BY fy A
5 thy (ea ieaotia
Me
i tile te
Beet Me mete ee
Habiegy bdo Mebe ba ts
weeny
Veith seeder ie
manyrete
etree) ate
pare hebe
reir Vested te he
" ser Pete
ead wate tte patra
(aM he fa Hale Sie te bette Une de ie Be
Sw tte tte hee
ae
wreta Nee
am
sae eater Oe Re
Seema
eee Mee A
nye nie Re
ig te EN
ete he te ore
foe tian eh spe tee te ee
Patriotte tra a OHS mye oats ter
ete
arta the edte CORN we Fae
Piet n eel ydy Pa tte de®
ge te ente
tet oe
fo myee eet
ep le
pie Koy wate Me
Ne de aa nia ns
Bin Ba tmutite He
rly cadet teen ne tye ie oe
Low mewng da tiene o tele hee
ete
ahs Mates
yee OS
ing she af wb
oe
ay re taa vee
reel
Hyon He Me te
oe
I Fin Te ty 8 fae
Peretti’
Co ewe
wie’
a aie
vere
bee Cote
eA hid
mylyn
Dal
Hy avste®
petite th aie
dear rele
ve
etd?
we
ena tent
rere eine
Pad
ted entree’
gay en eee
MREITIO LL baad
regent AY
woe
were ee
ah pews eee
ited eRe
yn patente?
Perera
dua in ty te?
wor te Vie
ee ES PEERS
42 BEES ED PE
aor ha
nee ete
ae a (tea Het te PE
oh ae AN ee
me
¥
pee eS
onsite eUrter
mh
oct ee eine
we
pew neeees vey’
ire eeu ates Fe Oe eR A
ay cen meee ae ab res ee
ae ~
lett SANT RNY
awe ney
Sait tN omstaere
See
AD ee ot ee
Fe bytn eee
m% Ve
~
A
ed Dad
Maine Mee wise hi
Rater tne oem ete Te Peer Twine
Nc tannin eet fervor Ss
Ane eet te NM iat etre NOs Se
<Teen te ™
- Siete ne
odes Sethe
sephora wi acre
Panaied Na ee
aa aN
neath
aygeke uel
preset
a
Neb ore Wy
~
ae
ty camer?
ete SN
ee a
me ent
anaeeyty es
demoed wate ¥
Aton
oe as
evn eek
bed
weyers
wn eyes i
vives
ny neh
SPAR PE
weet
we neye we
aye Ne
yon tae
pe tte eed
Pere Ce th akand
ereront he)
ine ee GS
wtewst
ven
ere he “
an aye we Chev ee
te tig NEN ere ewes
ona
tees
ayan ew he
‘at ges wy
waar sense *
an ey err eh ene
ada Wad eed
NOTE heads
pit PR tee
ores
emer toe eeu tnd
are ete eee
ge aya EN
Ave eeEeN
6 POE
weeny
eal
py yt pees ee
ans
oe var het
Fete rua!
peer eey’
wy newess®
agave ee
haan 4
RPT Thi tule
yee
ers
ebbeak a
yun pV
ty
ieee eve
pean tate
pega erent
Fg Belen ete
perth cee’
<P
a yawns
st eene
yn ale
yer dive RSW A
aA ee
Wonca
wed ht
ee
Pedy pst eeee eS
never tes?
wae
yare
went
vena hee
a Fp
wat
ayskety
meee
ay
meas eee
1H GEREN eee tS
xe
oe
seawerey tt
tebe ate
wna
nye
rihentas
ee
Voy ineeet welt ee®
paaea erene ee a8
ile MRE
Dag stevendet
ga ome TENG Pee
seu yeydi vere dyaee ss
pacar ah sey eee
itet eotdeew
a eee
vhs
waeeesett
Gysse awed sete
parma ee
veke
hae ee ead
ee anarerel
dia tun tee
yrmemewds
syed gees eb Cd
wont
wade
Ewe bh Meas dey wsrs
mehr dE pies byt
ve ay
pera
bei
Tu reyrensete®
Wiens
wevine
“eta Sethe ey
wee’
eee tnehll
ugeaeres®
Tr The
sey Oe
4
vewaye bee
weverdhaveee
e ayat ak ev aye ®
Terae ed sues y®
rw
vty oy ait aay
cyevewyl fe
Wereeye
eyaves
veegre?
Bre nS
vay hy
panel
Me 7
meer eer tl) bal
ates orate payee ee
PRPS Tikit
WeTwOn Sia
EE CSUN E
He ae ENTE
tommy eee
yeye
Arve
meats
Vosaiewed® phere vg Ny)
Wititoma, Lean HVE OE
ore Deven mani
ome
Tri
Witte eae
PINTO Li mahi
PAC Pu eeaes nes
errs Sead
yorwkytyy #h
wee yk Ere MNT IST LY avi Laan
pum es cp gevircheneedeya yn?
fs f enrari ns
vewtnet
ww
ve
eperyiayere
fener ats Dok
wbenepga ava
ween
meg eee
"
sew ems
yas er ehin
anime
angeced
qnoeee ue
Prerrin ia)
we avendmevsnepoed en cudhe
sewev vee
eres
pasa s sere en eee
yee
bayer
ayeagy cere
Levene kar ds es eVd
TA cheba apn eet
we
aves eves
ienget wee’
res LL
gbgevbwh edhe
paeate bee OF y
veiw OO
‘ vowel
Ww
aye yeh
vay heey hy
ayeredy .
peebe de
wae
ran
pry bee ede Ve WN
svebve’ eprrnné
Eup bare ng ncn eetet
vy veelbeeeh
Aw
evaseh ewes
vend
Pri ead
aye
bern
TST) Lhe
so trigty ey UVES
ul tow
woty
aidan ewes a8
eae ak etenth eho bE
pyrene’
wy vewe’®
wubehe
vom
ae seb are
payor eee
patsy attys ol
sy cede ben dhe
Terweenneset seee
TON Lhd cada
pia ateee Oe
Ata LEANER ES
re Thee
SALLE TSS
sph ree b
peer hh tas egg ve ghee MOREE
peapuesueunt ee Saeed TMT Py thn?
wee s
wy
ave eee
pee y
erent gate
sea edo ad NEN ESS iD
Feahe ees
eer
Cyadenn tate yd
ay mene’
vpemcws band dueh yes
Leta er eeenenh ced ee
evebthes t
yews
veh iieaeey ive het
Agee Mee
weld
pen Cyeree E
wader dive
veer
wavered ee ged
dd
nfewel of
sages peethe
webeevreee
“Avene SER aNTS
vane
err
Prato
Py UG YATES OEE
patho Webel ye
Aad yh OLRM aT
vutweerts
ae Pengt e smd ayn Ch by NTE
Sah ibat PAA pt ite
seer ey
yey ah
hats
elev
py ae
gute
Hehe yey a
peste’
Says
ny voy vbw
eave bye yew
atte
yeh aw
wis
eee ebett
‘wy
weigh eo
apr wang bebe’
eee ww
saved
per cuyy cetyl
neh
Me ~
svat cay neve PO ed
bees Wyn Crh
ety ttt
ec wtb anh attey
baa ayes
AAG ta stig BY
Wy bv were
yerede?
a
auaher
oe iy ator
ay ull ta)
wevetey
vey
Shah itew bell
pe dine’
th Ce eee
ayedwes
ne
re
RUD AL bTy
OL) ae
byerat at
by
py iyi
Riva te at EN
cove ANT
why
ath
on
AVN ih NHN
in) iran
TOO vain"
shel
ate a
fotevil
Reece
anh than oe
ry ai st alt
Nal generar v NY
aed
yew ’
Taduteene ew
grea Nasboal
a aber ance tUtUey nS
eR Tat et
"
4
f
t
c. ( f
1
vi s , 7
5 me : ' Lb
f > “i
‘ i ag a 4 1 ox i 3
i ; = ‘5 <
A i
wt t =
5 fms i
cae = > as
i
j
~ ‘
j 5 } t 5
{ ‘ ‘
t ¢ } FB gilt ” 2
{ : 4 a
/‘ a
, 4
’ i
wy) i
‘ee @
{7 I
es
=
Lea
rl
Fi 4
i
RE
: ts
. et
‘, er
- a
— 4
2 es
i 3
t 7
ee
j
i]
- aa
=
i a
=
mS
’ 2
/
¥
i
1
a
Misty ernie,
1?
"y 2
5
A
ARG
re ;
Pane e
a —_>
(aS
{ me
; ( i
ois {
Ss
F
_ x
)
Tey) 4
5
( ‘
i
f 2
14
Es,
}
'
=
, ’
Se es
0
y
=
t
: +
\
qr
: :
ree US
J
a
Ut
2
} S wv
H
SO 7K
VOLUME 110 AUGUST 2003 ISSN 0303-2515
oe |
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
~MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new
genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out); number of
illustrations and tables; and email address
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) | Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be provided. First lines of
paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be typed separately, their positions indicated
in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals; second subheadings
are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals) of headings and
abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential. All generic and specific names should
be underlined or italicized.
ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including caption); the
reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the figure; originals larger than
36 48cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final size. The size of illustrated
objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure (if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be
given in the caption; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not printed; half-tones
will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items of composite figures should be
designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform
style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropriate size taking into account the final size. The number of the
figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired
reduction or enlargement.
REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the paper, using the Harvard
System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) described
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described ...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927) ...’
NOTE: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; ef a/. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all
authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within each name, with
suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not
Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archives de
zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634.
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon. Annals
and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320.
KOHN, A. J. 19604, Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean. Bulletin
of the Bingham Oceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische und
anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid Afrika ausgefiihrt in den Jahren
1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16: 269-270.
ANNALS OF THE ANNALE VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 110 BAND 110
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 110 BAND
AUGUST 2003 AUGUSTUS
TYPBSET BYOUSERERIENDIEYS CAPE TOWN
PRINTED AND BOUND BY MILLS LITHO, NYMAN STREET, MAITLAND
LIST OF CONTENTS
GOWER, DAVID JOHN
Osteology of the early archosaurian reptile Erythrosuchus africanus Broom ..........
COOPER, MICHAEL ROBERT
Upper Cretaceous (Turonian—Coniacian) ammonites from
S2ORNiColaUey MOO ldmena tea Sremt CR oe ee a ee Se 89
COOPER, MICHAEL ROBERT
Stratigraphy and palaeontology of the upper Cretaceous (Santonian)
Bubastonmationvay sao NicolausAmeolay..22 . 4 5). = 2k tn ee ee et 147
KLINGER, HERBERT CHRISTIAN & KENNEDY, WILLIAM JAMES
Observations on the systematics, geographic and stratigraphic distribution
and origin of Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816)
(eepnalonodasAmimonoded)Ai65.. = Oe oe me Bk Se ee ia
KLINGER, HERBERT CHRISTIAN & KENNEDY, WILLIAM JAMES
Observations on Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965
(Cephalopoda: Ammonoidea). Ontogeny, shell structure, differential
PeeSeVANlOnlandninlraSpPeCINC VanlallOM sa. aw. ok Po ee ee 199
KLINGER, HERBERT CHRISTIAN & KENNEDY, WILLIAM JAMES
Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa. The ammonite families
Nostoceratidae Hyatt, 1894 and Diplomoceratidae Spath,1926............. YIN,
Volume 110 is complete in 6 parts.
EE.
gril
44
;
ere @ an plateptineey i
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 110 Band
August 2003 Augustus
Part l Deel
OSTEOLOGY OF THE EARLY ARCHOSAURIAN REPTILE
ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM
by
DAVID JOHN GOWER
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and review
articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
h, AU-3, 59), 302, 2S, 7B, eg), AA), SCS, 1-2), G2, epi),
HOA), SOU D, 7), WOG-D), MGE2, 5, 7, esos), WA), 1545).
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1—3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 183 0
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
OSTEOLOGY OF THE EARLY ARCHOSAURIAN REPTILE
ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM
by
DAVID JOHN GOWER
Department of Zoology, The Natural History Museum, Cromwell Road,
London SW7 SBD, U.K.
and
Department of Earth Sciences, University of Bristol, Queens Road,
Bristol BS8 IRJ, U.K.
(With 37 figures and 2 tables)
[MS submitted May 1996]
LMS accepted June 2001]
ABSTRACT
Erythrosuchus africanus Broom (Archosauria, Erythrosuchidae) is an early, non-crown-group
archosaurian reptile known exclusively from the Lower—Middle Triassic Cynognathus Assemblage
Zone of the South African Karoo Basin. A detailed redescription of the osteology, excluding that of the
braincase and tarsus, 1s presented, based on examination of nearly all known material. Several skull and
mandibular elements are described for the first time. Aspects of the interpreted and documented
osteology of particular interest include the presence of three-headed pectoral ribs, an antorbital fossa,
osteoderms, and possibly pneumatized neural arches. Palatal teeth are documented in the Russian
erythrosuchid Garjainia prima. New skeletal reconstructions of E. africanus are presented. Many skull
elements have joint surfaces that form potentially movable articulations with other elements, but
consideration of the adult cranium and mandible as whole units shows that they were not kinetic to any
notable extent. The main variations in morphology among known specimens of E. africanus are
summarized. Convincing intrinsic evidence for the recognition of more than a single species of
Erythrosuchus 1s lacking. Among erythrosuchids, the distribution of apparently derived osteological
features supports evidence from braincase osteology that has been interpreted as indicating that
E. africanus and the Chinese Shansisuchus are more closely related to one another than either taxon is to
Garjainia prima, although a new explicit analysis of phylogeny has yet to be performed.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 110 (1), 2003: 1-88, 37 figs, 2 tables, appendix.
|
bo
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure |
Erythrosuchus africanus. Restoration of skull and mandible, based largely on BPI 5207. Text should be
consulted for information on variation among specimens. A. Left lateral view. B. Dorsal view.
C. Occipital view.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 3
CONTENTS
PAGE
LAMPMO GUN CLLOM: <cseetascccaeadacn: cca Ree ERRE EMOREE ee teats: on eet saSnsvie nc hope aoaasacsneer ee yeh retaee heiann ride tacpeeee eae see 5
General ic ONminenisy a set en eer eee ne ree eats os Ss wccsam ew enau danas’ dcdpunte estes nottntnee sas coueeyainniesen «dias ane smeteeeey 5
VEY OSUEGIIIISEC IT CONUS A eetzt™ iteess EPOPRR ES 5c: cd wonscsydnse cs vas «tea consnsteeiseseaa tM taes.¥idssnenenegertousie aoctaes @)
GeO OSCARS LUN Orme RAM ere MR ee each hb dar dc uNlowdlseedn nsbaldnwa cd sdbantosdndddtonns wooed snes doctipeniendevaces> JI
IV Hata SeCIN CIMT LINO CLS eeteeteee sc. emer dass, cde bet eAGes ois uuieanepannataosie dePaate dee taeaai oak fy fame en seeameems avi teoilee 9
MIN ce ere ee ee cere eer tie, ASRS es, «0s csacaaie cdnpsldgadedeacs Riadet saadsveusacsestuvaereen cvleeess 1]
AO aT) SiS Pee ee ier shee Lee Mee ge.) Pee diotaviha ssicdhaaniswasdud vdtweet eototavsnpisstvacen seWertvaFhearsenacnss 1]
H.OIGIRIDE checcoocceatdesedono so7daboSeBacooeclacce athe ets iSees hc he et ihe ie nea ee ee 13
IL El testa ch lene eet Reenter ce Nx SA Meaty A Ra 52 us hvcocaesoaiatieck'c oc ouueapaglssvavsocteseetYoetesvarentosseboncrteens 13
FRU ITT eee es Is ss ENR se ene eRe AID Meeth 8 fac sa assltiiaelesenccmsoegacliont apeeclacomatwel you skintecon ieee decews 13
WES Chip il OMemrt atc ncste ecoes:- -vecaee seth postht apse raveturbeeseseszeancstsessstasranesnsaovorseyadencesrordewcarcsraqysucebavesrestnaeareree> 15
Salil ee: <r eR cs ON NU nee gO es Sos YE bL ewan Nia v SovaeUgbonbnausesuduuicemapheleel yertOEAls ative anes 15
Dermalibones-otithe SkullitO ois sex... eee seen eee saa oe has (edi das Puaenen tN tages scaasscosnsentnceses LS
eee IN OUD eee Morn et cc a Ra eh reais chcva's om MAREE Ct ASLAE «cna anne ce tete tens <onbinn cis sSagekn iste seSehatesteas 25
IN teal eee ree Mee Ae see ee Se clas ge maida wane cihy'ssins avqwibaileds sued dios aude gnc soimacste umn tactweansassen 3]
JD) aie fslils] Oot Mmmm eee te ete SOR aoe re ch coche candi an'idlal ecnsiedaas se Gadloaxousstapsmntunch ce aos phbamosdscrnapecs 36
PSHE TECHN COLUM Ene nerene in eee ee cartes eee ste SES AS tr. 2A sacs ja cog\stedieaalsegSouesbusoenen doacestew cee aerateeeee seats 3)
\W CIC ONENS BVDG! THOS cola tech soph ck Acie eRece nee LL Eee an een RRO BAEEA eCn Sane Sen ee aI
Iintencemiraran dana tinal leanemestarmen an tic curs.) 6sscss00%uasenons-cocsacceucent asaaaacesioss a cneemrestodererezes 53
NO DSDG NCTM ETE Sl SSOOETT IS aso caees gence scee aac cose Oe Rae ee eee ee ee ap)
IL AIAG OVEMEVALAAONA WIE TUL TTO) OY SNY Magen ccheac coe scReRen at cote eee ee eee Meena coe eaceeerne a)
Fe ce tell A) CHIMCAM INIA ees eee eR sc MMM 2201 ciaulnsten « acces teedebandsaactouwncte Mes acadicre canons 55)
|PEINAIG (ATMS GiTeV6 WTS) Supe cece neies Sea: so 7 kao eee geen ce er cer Sener meer eee ae 61
Geis iced cere eee eee AM, «AM NINN Sen aRealRee eave nlltdte Sica th wna Rieeecedsiaastes <n uhh pamaiess Meeass 69
OSS OC STAD ee airs att EO Roc Ba eB coee Se APR A Re Ce Oa ee Oe eRe 69
LTT OINCEAT OOS encoabiieacteeres Sees odcossb esc bes tone Ae SCUC RAM EEE OT ee ene Re ne oe Pee eee 71
SIREN ial TACOS TAC TO Sia ae ee ae Se ae ee eee ee ee Ae qi
Gremialeanne pana cil ul cite KAM SSH 33.25 ecavehoadesoseseoncteson s<deansdemeeeecotous <del nsaeeeet cece a tater es SReeeaeaaas omer eaat |
BR Arse OTN ON rere ee sae ee a ce ast ct ON cela ats dena ninc die Mic Nein. xc cok ca MMMM ONS saeh wana Mawes aah eben fat YZ
PLT ODS Roddoocdbooc ote etre wo coe eee 55 8 Ro SES) 74
FXG KMONVAC OS C10 CIN LSM teem ny eerie MR ie Mette! Pear a eels nccai~ fave anecseasssbabapadanss Tecensesestehs soswoeoResvt-ndvnss WS
IRSITSIRETAOSS: sesh o SIS UR REO ABRs SR RSE eM eer Aa OE ee Peete ee, erm - nee WS
/A\| DIDIER OLAS, Bae tee tee se Bese cee oe ee Re ee i ee NS ne Oe ee eee 80
AS CUCL OTS eee eee ren eee 2a ssh ssuies oanianaglGudyerasadnnna, Sette deve sie tecemenaniee Comme me manatee aces 2. 80
INTC ap OL) ay aoe a ee ee ns ec sre I sao anne SUG phd ie RA aceon cece SE OM a ais 80
PSO OSTINGIE Os. asapccas anes soc eee eC eNUASaO ESE GEER MERE te eo eo a Pes ce eee eee eee 83
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 2A
Erythrosuchus africanus. Skull and mandible of BPI 5207. Right lateral view.
Figure 2B
Erythrosuchus africanus. Skull and mandible of BPI 5207. Right lateral view.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM J
INTRODUCTION
GENERAL COMMENTS
Archosauria is a major clade of diapsids that consists of birds, crocodilians, dinosaurs,
pterosaurs and their nearest fossil relatives. Archosaurs dominated every terrestrial and
aerial large vertebrate niche for most of the Mesozoic. Recent interest in the pattern of
their radiation has focused upon the application of a cladistic methodology in the
inference of phylogenetic relationships, resulting in a number of major recent publications
(Gauthier 1986; Benton & Clark 1988; Sereno & Arcucci 1990; Sereno 1991; Parrish
1993; Juul 1994; Bennett 1996; Benton 1999).
Whereas these studies contain a certain amount of agreement on the interrelationships
of some of the main archosaurian groups (Gower & Wilkinson 1996), they are to some
extent based on differing approaches to the use of the same morphological information
available from the existing descriptive literature. Over the last decade the research effort
directed toward reassessing basal archosaur morphology and producing detailed
osteological descriptions pales in comparison with work conducted within the
phylogenetic research programme. This is also evident in the fact that the cladistic
analyses of archosaur relationships have focused thus far largely on the broader question
of the relationships between, rather than within, the major groups—their monophyly
largely being accepted a priori.
It could be argued that no detailed, complete osteological descriptions of any early
archosaur currently exist. Indeed, since Charig & Reig (1970: 140) reported that ‘the only
well known [early archosaur] genera are Chasmatosaurus, Erythrosuchus and Shansisuchus,
and even of those our knowledge is far from complete’, there has been only a single and
relatively brief reassessment (Cruickshank 1972) of the osteology of any adequately
represented early archosaur. Despite this, the existing descriptions remain the major
source of information used in the large number of recent cladistic analyses of basal
archosaurs. It is the aim of this paper to make a step towards redressing the morphology—
phylogenetics imbalance, by presenting a detailed revision of the osteology of
Erythrosuchus africanus.
The taxon Archosauria is used throughout in its traditional concept (see Juul 1994).
The restricted members of the Archosauria of Gauthier (1986; = Avesuchia Benton, 1999)
are referred to as “crown-group archosaurs’ (= avesuchians of Benton 1999).
ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS
Erythrosuchus africanus was named and preliminarily diagnosed by Broom in 1905 on
the basis of a single, incomplete post-cranial specimen (SAM—905). This was followed by
a fuller description of the holotype in which Broom (1906) also referred E. africanus to
the Phytosauria. A much more complete specimen, BMNH R3592, was the focus of a
more detailed monograph by Huene (1911), who considered E. africanus to be a
representative of a new reptilian order, the Pelycosimia, closely allied to the Pelycosauria.
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
100 mm
Figure 2C & D
Erythrosuchus africanus. Skull and mandible of BPI 5207. C. Left lateral view. D. Dorsal view.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 7
Huene recognized that some material referred by Seeley (1894) to Euskelosaurus brownii,
actually belonged to E. africanus. Some of the cranial material of BMNH R3592 is
incomplete or missing, whereas some of the preserved elements were ignored or
misidentified by Huene (e.g. laterosphenoids and palatine respectively). The
informativeness of parts of Huene’s description are perhaps further clouded by his belief
that Erythrosuchus has affinities with the Pelycosauria.
Watson (1917) placed E. africanus in his newly erected family, Erythrosuchidae. Later
systematic studies have consistently placed Erythrosuchus within the Archosauria in the
order Thecodontia and the suborder Proterosuchia (e.g. Charig & Sues 1976). These last
two taxa are commonly considered to be paraphyletic grades, and the results of cladistic
analyses have placed a monophyletic Erythrosuchidae outside the archosaur crown group
(e.g. Benton & Clark 1988; Sereno & Arcucci 1990; Sereno 1991; Parrish 1992, 1993;
Bennett 1996; Gower & Sennikov 1997).
Further descriptive accounts of Erythrosuchus africanus, and particularly of the tarsus
and braincase, have been presented by Huene (1920), Hughes (1963), Cruickshank
(1978), Gower & Sennikov (1996a) and Gower (1996, 1997). Parrish (1992, fig. 6)
presented a drawing of the skull of BPI 5207, but many of the sutural patterns depicted are
at variance with the observations made during the current study (compare with Figures
1—2 here). There have been no substantial reassessments of most of the osteology of this
important taxon since the work of Broom and Huene.
The aim of this study is to revise and correct descriptions that exist for those parts of the
skeleton previously studied but not described in detail, and to cover in detail the numerous
parts never previously described—in particular much of the skull and mandible. As a
result of the rarity of detailed descriptions and sub-familial phylogenetic analyses of early
archosaurs, it is not possible in most cases to fully assess the distribution of the features
described here. Where possible, considerations of the distribution of features are given by
means of comparative data.
Description of the problematic tarsal material, of a cast of the endocranial cavity, and
of the detailed structure of the braincase is presented elsewhere (Gower 1996; Gower &
Sennikov 1996a; Gower 1997).
GEOLOGICAL SETTING
The Karoo basin of southern Africa is well known for its extensive complex of
mudstones and sandstones, deposited from the Permo-Carboniferous to the early Jurassic
(300-190 Ma). Much of the impressive diversity of Mesozoic vertebrate remains to have
been documented are known from the fluvio-lacustrine succession of sediments of the
Beaufort Group (late Permian to early Triassic) of South Africa. The upper part of the
Beaufort Group is represented by the Cynognathus Assemblage Zone, and it is from this
zone that perhaps all specimens of Erythrosuchus africanus have been collected. The only
potential exceptions would seem to be erythrosuchid specimens from the equivalently-
aged Omingonde Formation of Namibia (Pickford 1995).
The Cynognathus Assemblage Zone has previously been equated with the upper part
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
[ju
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM gy
of the Lower Triassic (e.g. Charig & Sues 1976; Anderson & Cruickshank 1978; Sun
1980), but the most recent studies (e.g. Ochev & Shishkin 1988; Shubin & Sues 1991;
Shishkin & Welman 1994; Shishkin & Ochev 1995) suggest that its vertebrate fauna is
instead consistent with a lowermost Middle Triassic age. Sediments assigned to the
Cynognathus Assemblage Zone in South Africa are best exposed in the south-western
Free State and northern part of the extreme Eastern Cape Province (Kitching 1977).
Recently, Welman ef al. (1991) have also discovered vertebrate-bearing Cynognathus
Assemblage Zone deposits in the north-eastern Free State. Erythrosuchus africanus
specimens have been collected from a number of the best-known localities (Kitching
1977). The holotype originates from Oorlogsfontein, Aliwal North, whereas the other
most important specimens were discovered in localities near Burgersdorp
(BMNH_ R3592, BPI 2096—Geluk; NM QS1473—Winaarsbaken) or Rouxville
(BPI 4680, 5207—Betjeskraal; BPI 3893—-Lemoenfontein), all in the Free State. The
seven specimens listed above form the basis for the majority of current knowledge of the
morphology of Erythrosuchus africanus. Many of the approximately 60 known
specimens (see Appendix I) consist of disarticulated, isolated and/or poorly preserved
finds.
The Cynognathus Assemblage Zone vertebrate fauna contains many synapsids (e.g.
Cynognathus, Diademodon, Trirachodon, Bauria, Kannemeyeria), at least two
archosaurs (Erythrosuchus, Euparkeria), rnynchosaurs (Howesia, Mesosuchus), fish, and
capitosaurid amphibians (Kitching 1977; Welman et a/. 1991). There is generally a lack of
detailed records of the preservation of individual specimens of Erythrosuchus africanus
that might be taphonomically informative. However, a photograph of BMNH R3592 prior
to preparation, shows that this incomplete specimen (missing several elements including
some from the skull, the left forelimb, right forelimb epipodials, scapulae, intercentra) is
disarticulated apart from the caudal vertebrae and firmly sutured elements of the skull roof
and part of the braincase. The preserved elements form a concentrated jumble of bones in
a flat and tightly-packed ‘conglomerate’, approximately 1.5 x 1 xX 0.15 m in size. This
assemblage is perhaps indicative of fluvial winnowing, and is therefore consistent with
the interpretation of detailed studies of Karoo vertebrate taphonomy (e.g. Smith 1993),
that the fossiliferous deposits are channel/overbank and adjacent flood plain in their
origin.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
A full list of Erythrosuchus africanus material is presented in Appendix I. A small
amount of mechanical preparation (vibrotool) was undertaken on BPI 4526. Some
Specimens, but most notably BPI 3893, will possibly yield new information (e.g. on the
palate) when they are fully prepared. Most of the observation of specimens for this study
took place in the early 1990s. Further preparation and/or collection of material may have
taken place since then.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
10
‘Q[BIS SUIS 0} JOU IB SUOT}DOS “DOT IO1I9}SOd JO MIA JOLIOJUY “4 “YOo]q
[eUId JO MOIA IOLID1SOg “FY YOO] [eUSO JO MIIA IOLIOUY “ “€68E Idd JO V[qipuew pur [[nys poredaiduyg ‘snuvoiufy snyonsoayeugq
A a ‘de ons
Ap
O}
\\— e Jul
a |e EB
9 BS
9
6
48) jd
jd
jw
|
qd
ee)
1d [ j
a.
Me
Lt,
S
=
>
id dyad
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM Il
SYSTEMATICS
DIAPSIDA Osborn, 1903
ARCHOSAUROMORPHA Huene, 1946
ARCHOSAURIA Cope, 1869
Family Erythrosuchidae Watson, 1917
Genus Erythrosuchus Broom, 1905
Erythrosuchus africanus Broom, 1905
1889 Theriodont: Lydekker, pp. 572-573, pl. 54.
1890 Genus non det.: Lydekker, pp. 96-98.
1894 Euskelosaurus brownii Huxley: Seeley, pp. 335-340, figs 6—7.
1905 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom, pp. 336-337.
1906 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Broom, pp. 187—195, pl. 4.
QUEM Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Huene, pp. 3—25, pls 1-11.
TS Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Broom, p. 160.
1915 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Huene, p. 495, fig. 16.
1920 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Huene, p. 489, fig. 51.
1926 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Huene, pp. 44-45, figs 6—7.
IS Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Brink, pp. 146—148, fig. 2.
1963 Erythrosuchus Broom: Hughes, pp. 227—230, figs 1-2, 4—6.
1970 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Charig & Reig, pp. 134, 156—160, fig. 3.
DIS Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Ochey, p. 102.
1976 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Charig & Sues, pp. 28, 30.
1978 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Cruickshank, pp. 161—176, fig. 1, pls 1-13.
1981 Erythrosuchus Broom: Brinkman, pp. 18—20, fig. 12A—B.
92 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Parrish, pp. 94-101, figs 2, 6.
1994 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Juul, pp. 3-4, 6, 12.
1996 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Gower, pp. 349-358, figs 2-6.
1996a = Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Gower & Sennikov, pp. 581-583, figs 1-2.
19966 ~~ Erythrosuchus Broom: Gower & Sennikov, pp. 896—900, table 1.
1997 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Gower, pp. 557-573, figs 1-11.
1997 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Gower & Sennikov, table 2.
1997 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Witmer, pp. 12, 52.
2001 Erythrosuchus africanus Broom: Gower, pp. 120-121, fig. 2.
Diagnosis
Large erythrosuchid; skull and total snout—tail length possibly up to 1 m and 5 m
respectively. Skull tall and narrow, with antorbital fenestra and fossa. Fossa surrounds
antorbital fenestra. Ascending process of maxilla raised laterally and separated from
posterodorsal process of premaxilla by ventral flange of nasal. Jugal excluded from
antorbital fenestra by maxilla-lacrimal contact. Frontals L-shaped. Prefrontals triangular
with caniculae on dorsal surface. Fossa present in pineal region. Postparietal forms
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
C6SEN HNN JO se [[xeutoid Jo smorA [eUDA puk [eso *D ‘76SEM HNWA
JO ov[[rxeuioid JO SMOIA JeIOVeT “{ “O7Sp Idd “BI[rxeuosd yYyS11 posedosd Ayoyojduroour Jo MIA yeIO\eT] “y ‘SNUDILA{D SNYINSOLYIAAT
p onsty
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 13
pyramidal occipital peg. Quadratojugal very nearly or completely excluded from lateral
temporal fenestra by squamosal-jugal contact. Posterior process of postorbital with
incised groove. Squamosal with pleat in posterior margin of descending ramus. Foramen
absent between quadrate and quadratojugal. Post-temporal fenestrae no more than narrow
slits. Transverse processes of parietal with posteromedial tubercles. Palatal teeth absent
on pterygoid, uncertain on palatine and vomer.
Supraoccipital excluded from foramen magnum. Basioccipital excluded from foramen
magnum and floor of endocranial cavity. Basisphenoid midline exposure absent on floor
of endocranial cavity. Ventral ramus of opisthotic recessed within stapedial groove.
Stapedial groove with small bulge. Medial wall of otic capsule not fully ossified. Metotic
foramen undivided. Lagenar region not differentiated or elongated. Basisphenoid inter-
tuberal plate small. Laterosphenoid short and thick, with an anterodorsal channel.
Dentary expanded anteriorly and with three tapering posterior processes.
Retroarticular region of jaw short, with low ridge on posterodorsal surface. Five
premaxillary teeth; approximately 11 maxillary and 13 dentary teeth.
Estimated 25 presacral, two sacral, and at least 35 caudal vertebrae. All vertebrae short.
Separate intercentra present (probably throughout precaudal column). Dorsal neural
arches pierced by subdivided foramina, perhaps pneumatic in nature. Three-headed ribs
present in pectoral region. Scapula large and coracoid relatively small. Humerus robust,
with quadrangular deltopectoral crest. Femur with intertrochanteric fossa and prominent
ventral trochanter positioned slightly away from proximal end. All limb bones with
rugose/unfinished articular ends. Astragalus spherical. Calcaneum plate-like and with
laterally directed tuber. Fourth distal tarsal with ventral peg. First two distal tarsals and
centrale absent. Metatarsal III the longest. Osteoderms present.
Holotype
SAM-905 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Incomplete postcranial skeleton
from the locality of Oorlogsfontein, Kraai River, a few miles east of Aliwal North, Eastern
Cape Province, South Africa—Cynognathus Assemblage Zone, Upper Beaufort series,
Karoo system; upper part of the Lower Triassic or lower part of the Middle Triassic.
Material
A list of current material referred to Erythrosuchus africanus 1s given in Appendix I.
Remarks
Tatarinov (1961) synonymized the Russian genera Vjushkovia, Garjainia, Dongusia,
and the Argentinian Cuyosuchus with Erythrosuchus, but maintained distinctions
between respective species. These generic synonyms were rejected by Young (1964),
Charig & Reig (1970) and Charig & Sues (1976) and this view is accepted here. (All
except the Argentinian material has been examined.) Sennikov rejected the congeneric
status of E. africanus and E. magnus Ochev, 1980, and established the genus Uralosaurus
for the latter (Gower & Sennikov 2000). The taxonomy of Erythrosuchus is discussed
further below.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
14
"SMOIA [PIPOU
pur [eso}e] Ul OZ Idd JO Ll[EXeU IYSHY “ “SMOIA [eIPOU puL JOLIOJUR “TeIOJL] UL 8601 M-WVS JO PI] xeul yor “y ‘snuvotufo snyonsosyjcugq
¢ INS
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 15
DESCRIPTION
SKULL (for restoration, see Fig. 1)
The skull of Erythrosuchus africanus bears many features common to early,
presumably carnivorous, archosaurs: it is relatively tall and narrow, and possesses an
antorbital fenestra and fossa and recurved, serrated teeth. Notable cranial kinesis is absent
(see discussion below), and ‘articulation’ is used throughout to describe contact without
implying that a movable joint was present between two or more articulating elements.
Dermal bones of the skull roof
The premaxilla (Figs 2—4) is a short and narrow bone with two posteriorly directed
processes attaching it to the nasal and maxilla. A slender anterodorsal process extends
back to articulate with a groove on the dorsal surface of the nasal. Just behind the medial
edge of the base of this process is a foramen interpreted as probably transmitting the
medial ethmoidal nerve. Contact with the maxilla is achieved with a long and tapering,
posterodorsally directed process. The dorsal edge of this process forms the posteroventral
border of the external naris, the ventral edge contacts the front of the maxilla, and the
medial face of the posterior part of the process articulates with a shallow and closely
matching depression on the lateral flange of the nasal. Preparation of BPI 4526 revealed
the presence of a small posteriorly directed peg near the base of this process (Fig. 4A).
This peg, probably eroded away in BMNH R3592 and not visible in other specimens,
articulates with a pit on the anterior edge of the maxilla. A similar premaxillary peg is
present in this position in Shansisuchus kuyeheensis (Cheng, 1980).
Medially there is a short and slender palatal process. The area of symphysis between
the premaxillae covers a large anterodorsal part of their medial surface. Each premaxilla
holds five teeth.
The maxilla (Figs 2, 5, 6) is a long, narrow element that bears most of the upper jaw
dentition and forms the anterior and ventral border of the oval-shaped antorbital fenestra.
Anteriorly it articulates with the lacrimal, nasal, and premaxilla, whereas posteriorly it
firmly interlocks with the jugal and contacts the lacrimal.
The maxilla articulates with both the nasal and the anterior of the lacrimal by means of
a posterodorsally directed ascending process. The anterior edge of this process is grooved
to accommodate the posteroventral edge of the anterolateral flange of the nasal. The base
of the ascending process is raised to form a lateral ridge. Behind this, the posteroventral
edge of the process is thin and inset, and it extends posteriorly to articulate with a ventral
groove on the nasal before terminating in a depression on the lateral surface of the anterior
ramus of the lacrimal. As a result of this arrangement, the antorbital fenestra is
countersunk within a larger lateral depression—the antorbital fossa.
The anterior margin of the maxilla bears a broad, shallow groove that articulates with
the premaxilla. Situated within this groove is a posteriorly directed pit that accepts the peg
on the premaxilla. This pit is clearly seen in SAM—K1098 (Fig. 5A) and in the less well-
preserved maxilla of BMNH R3592. The present study disagrees with Juul’s (1994: 12)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
16
“SMOIA [RIPOU
pur [e1aqe] Ul Z76SEM HNIN JO B[Pxeus yo “_ “SMOIA JesIOp pue [eps “[e1oqL] Ul GZS Idd JO PI[XeU sry YW ‘snuvoLifo snyonsosyjAsy
9 wINnsIy
jed
seul
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 7.
identification in BPI 5207 of a ‘dorsoventrally elongated fenestra between the premaxilla and
maxilla’, comparable to openings in this region in other erythrosuchids and some
crown-group archosaurs. No fenestra could be located on the largely undisturbed right or the
somewhat flattened left side of BPI 5207, and there is no evidence for the presence of an
elongated fenestra in other (albeit mostly disarticulated) specimens. Openings in this region of
the skulls of archosaurs come in a diversity of forms. Among those taxa discussed by Juul
(1994), for example, the openings in Shansisuchus and Chalishevia are large circular fenestrae
lying between premaxilla, maxilla, and nasal, with a neighbouring fossa in the latter element
(Gower & Sennikov 2000). This is quite different to the similarly positioned openings in the
dinosaurian and rauisuchian taxa that Juul mentioned. In addition to requiring more precise
information on the form of any foramina or fenestrae in this region, the function and potential
homology of these features is badly in need of reinvestigation (Gower 2000).
The ventral edge of the maxilla is sigmoidally curved in lateral view and this
accentuates the wide notch between the ventral edges of the premaxilla and maxilla. The
maxilla tapers posteriorly and meets the jugal. Posterodorsally, the ventral arm of the
lacrimal also contacts the maxilla. Details of this articulation are not known but it
definitely excludes the jugal from the border of the antorbital fenestra.
A feature observed on BMNH R3592 is the presence of an incomplete, small dorsal
projection that notches the ventral border of the antorbital fenestra (Fig. 6B). This is
perhaps superficially similar to the condition in Euparkeria capensis as reconstructed by
Ewer (1965, fig. 2). The presence of this projection is also suggested by a broken surface
in SAM-K 1098, but it 1s apparently absent or not preserved in other specimens.
Medially, the palatal process is positioned far anteriorly. Posteriorly it is stout and
firmly fused to the medial wall, whereas anteriorly it is much thinner dorsoventrally and
slopes ventromedially to form an overhang (Fig. 5B). It is possible that the opposite
palatal processes of the maxillae would not quite have made contact medially because of
their narrowness. How they articulated with the premaxillae and vomers is not known.
The medial features of the posterior half of the maxilla are exposed in BPI 2529
(Fig. 6A) and 4680 (Fig. 5B). This part of the maxilla is composed of a thin dorsal and
lateral part, and a thicker ventral and medial component. Posteriorly, as the maxilla tapers
to a point, the thick medial and thin lateral parts become separated and the small gap
between them receives the central flange of the divided anteroventral arm of the jugal to
form an intimately interlocking articulation. A small posterodorsally open pit lies between
the lateral and medial parts of the maxilla of BPI 4680 and 2529 (Fig. 6A), whereas the
condition in BPI 4540 and BMNH R3592 is less clear. BPI 4540 seems to have a small pit,
perhaps equivalent to that in BPI 2529 and 4680 but, positioned a short distance in front of
this, is a much larger pit. This seems to be equivalent to a similarly placed pit in
BMNH R3592, and they probably represent the posterior opening of a neurovascular
canal. The absence of the larger pit in BPI 2529 and particularly 4680 could possibly be
explained by poorer preservation. This feature is also seen in other archosaurs (e.g. Gower
1999) and probably has a broad distribution.
The medial surfaces of BPI 4680 and 2529 bear scars that are interpreted as the area of
articulation with the palatine.
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
pv
S.popr
s.mas s.1 D
Figure 7
Erythrosuchus africanus, NM QS1473 skull roof. A. Ventral view. B. Lateral view of anterior part.
C. Ventral view of anterior part. D. Posterior view of anterior part, not to same scale.
The nasal (Figs 2, 3, 7, 8) is a long and narrow bone forming much of the anterior part
of the skull roof. Behind the naris, a large vertically descending flange bears a broad,
shallow groove that receives the posterior process of the premaxilla. Here the nasal is at its
ventral limit, and it separates the posterior process of the premaxilla from the ascending
process of the maxilla (Figs 2, 3). The posteroventral edge of the vertical nasal flange
articulates with the groove on the anterior edge of the ascending maxillary process. A
bevelled posteroventral edge and a shallow groove at the posterior limit of the vertical
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 19
nasal flange (Fig. 7B, C) articulate intimately with the rest of the tapering maxillary
process. A second groove, originating a short distance behind this, receives the dorsal
edge of the anterior arm of the lacrimal.
Sutural contact between the nasal and the overlapping frontal and prefrontal is
achieved via long interdigitating processes (Fig. 8). A transverse section through the skull
roof of NM QS1473 shows that the prefrontal is also intimately received by an
invagination on the dorsal surface of the nasal (Fig. 7D). The ventral surface sutures with
the prefrontal and frontal are less strongly interdigitating. The ventral surfaces of the
nasals carry the anterior part of a wide channel for the olfactory tract, and an area for the
nasal glands (Witmer 1997: 12).
The lacrimal (Figs 2, 3) is currently known only from BPI 5207 and 3893. Dorsally, the
posterior border of the lacrimal articulates with the ventrolateral surface of the prefrontal.
Anterior to this is a thickened dorsolateral ridge that articulates with the prefrontal and the
posterolateral edge of the nasal. The lacrimal curves slightly downwards from this point to
contact the ascending process of the maxilla. The posterior end of the maxilla rests in a
groove between the inset ventral and raised dorsal levels of the stepped lateral surface of
the lacrimal. This stepped area contributes to the antorbital fossa (Fig. 2).
The descending arm of the lacrimal meets, and laterally overlaps, the anterior end of
the jugal. It also meets the posterodorsal corner of the maxilla but the details of the
articulation are unclear, even in BPI 3893—which is sectioned in this region (Fig. 3).
Most of the posterior margin of the lacrimal is excluded from the orbit by the prefrontal. A
pit on the border between the left lacrimal and prefrontal of BPI 5207 (Fig. 2C) possibly
indicates the posterior opening of the nasolacrimal canal. Details of the medial surface of
the lacrimal are unknown.
Dorsally, the prefrontal (Figs 2, 3, 7, 8) is anteriorly pointed and forms part of the
interdigitating frontal/prefrontal-nasal suture. The blunt posterior end is angular in
BMNH R3592 (Fig. 8), but more rounded in BPI 5207 (Fig. 2D) and NM QS1473 (Brink
1955). The dorsal surface is shallowly concave and sculptured with a curious pattern of
shallow labyrinthine canals, most clearly seen in BMNH R3592 and GHG AK82-22.
These canals are present on most of the dorsal surface of the skull roof, but are notably
concentrated towards the lateral edge of the prefrontal. They bear a slight resemblance to
the less extensive canals present on the dorsolateral margin of the prefrontals of
Sphenosuchus acutus (Walker 1990).
The lateral edge of the dorsal part of the prefrontal is thickened, particularly
posteriorly, to form a prominent overhanging brow. Running longitudinally on the
posteroventral part of this ridge is a narrow groove, clearly seen in BMNH R3592
(Fig. 8B) and BPI 5207 (Fig. 2). Ventrally, this thickened area of bone ends in an abrupt
step marking the lateral limit of a pronounced depression on the ventral surface of the
skull roof in the area of nasal, frontal and prefrontal contact (Figs 7A, 8C).
The prefrontal pillar forms the anterior border of the orbit and articulates with the
lacrimal. Its ventromedial extent is currently unknown.
The frontals (Figs 2, 7, 8) exist as paired, unfused elements forming the major part of
the skull roof. They are broad posteriorly and narrow anteriorly, where long interdigitating
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 8
Erythrosuchus africanus, skull roof of BMNH R3592. A. Dorsal view. B. Left lateral view.
C. Ventral view.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 7/1
processes are sandwiched between the nasals, ventrally, and the prefrontals, dorsally. The
frontals form part of the short dorsal border of the orbit—at the point where contact is
made with the posterior part of the prefrontals. The opposite frontals meet at a well-
defined midline suture that is anteriorly simple, but posteriorly weakly interdigitating.
Weakly interdigitating sutures are also present at the point of frontal-parietal and
frontal-postfrontal contact. The only well-preserved frontal-parietal suture (NM QS1473,
Fig. 7A) is slightly curved. No contact is made between frontal and postorbital on the
dorsal surface of the skull roof. The dorsal surface of the anterior of the frontals is
essentially flat, but posteromedially they form the anterior limit of a steep-sided
subrectangular depression that extends back on to the parietals. This is the “pineal fossa’
described by Parrish (1992).
The centre of the ventral surface of the frontals bears a posterior continuation of the
channel for the olfactory tract (Figs 7A, 8C). The posterior limit of the midline frontal
suture lies in an additional channel that broadens out as it extends back on to the parietals.
Shallow depressions border the dorsal margins of the orbits on the ventral surface of the
frontals of BMNH R3592 (Fig. 8C), and possibly GHG AK82-—22 (absent in
NM QS1473). The posterolateral part of the ventral surface of each frontal bears a large
depression that is steep-sided and extends on to the postfrontals, postorbitals, and
parietals. Only the posterior limits of these depressions receive the capitate processes of
the laterosphenoids. Ventral contact between the frontal and postorbital excludes the
postfrontal from the posterodorsal border of the orbit.
The postfrontal (Figs 2, 7, 8) 1s a small element that is tightly bound between the
frontal, postorbital, and parietal. Dorsally it contributes to the posterodorsal border of the
orbit. Much of the lateral border of the prefrontal is enveloped by the postorbital, and
posteriorly brief contact is made with the parietal. The ventrolateral edge of the
postfrontal is thickened, and the thinner posteromedial edge contributes to the depression
that articulates with the capitate process of the laterosphenoid. In NM QS1473 only a
small area of the postfrontal is exposed ventrally (Fig. 7A), and here it no longer
contributes to the border of the orbit, although contact with the parietal is maintained.
The opposite parietals (Figs 2, 7-9) are firmly articulated but suturally distinct. They
are short, fairly broad, and have well-developed posteroventral transverse processes.
Laterally, and behind where contact is made with the frontals, postfrontals, and
postorbitals, the thickened edges of the parietals form the medial borders of the
supratemporal fenestrae. The central parts of the parietals are much thinner and bear the
posterior extension of the pineal fossa back from the dorsal surface of the frontals. There
is a fairly large and slightly irregular hole in the centre of this fossa in BMNH R3592
(Fig. 9D). Huene (1911) believed this to be a pineal foramen-a plesiomorphic feature for
archosauromorphs—but doubt has been cast on the naturalness of this hole by subsequent
workers (Charig & Reig 1970; Parrish 1992). Brink (1955) and Parrish (1992) reported
the absence of a pineal foramen in NM QS1473 and Parrish (1992) also reported its
absence in BPI 5207. Following an examination of all of these specimens, it is reported
here that the hole in BMNH R3592 has become slightly larger and more irregularly
shaped since it was last figured (Huene 1911, fig. 1). It is also positioned somewhat
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
N
“SMOTA [CUDA pu [eSIOp ‘[eIId1I990 Ul 76SEY HNING ‘°C ‘Mar [erd10900
Ul O89F Id ‘D “AMOIA [e}dI990 Ul CHOH [dq “| “MAIA [eNAIN90 UI €/ PISO WN “V ‘JOOd [[Mys ou} Jo Wed JoL1a\sod ‘snuvoisfo snyonsosyjArq
6 OINSIy
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM is}
off-centre with respect to the midline suture. It was not possible to determine whether a
small pineal foramen might present in NM QS1473 because of some restoration in this
region of the specimen. The skull of BPI 5207 was compressed laterally during
preservation and this means that the possible presence of a small foramen can not be
discounted. BPI 3893 was incompletely prepared in this area at the time of this study, but
is also laterally crushed here. In short, conclusive evidence on the presence or absence of a
pineal foramen in Erythrosuchus africanus 1s not currently available.
The tall and broad occipital surface of each posteroventral transverse parietal process
is essentially smooth, although two notable features are a dorsomedially positioned
tubercle and, nearer the ventral edge, a subhorizontal transverse groove (Fig. 9). The
dorsolateral edge of the occipital surface of the process of NM QS1473 (Fig. 9A) bears
horizontal striations. The ventral surface of the process holds a well-defined and triangular-
shaped socket for articulation with the dorsomedial edge of the paroccipital process. This
articulation results in a post-temporal fenestra that was, at most, a narrow slit. The
ventromedial edges of the transverse processes present a smoothly convoluted surface
(BMNH R3592) for articulation with the supraoccipital.
The ventral surface of the roof of the parietals closely matches the dorsal contours of
the laterosphenoids. Anteriorly there are small triangular ventral processes that rest
between the capitate and anterior processes of the laterosphenoids. Longitudinal grooves
on the ventral surface of these parietal processes form the dorsal surface of an
‘anterodorsal channel’ (see Gower & Sennikov 1996b; Gower 1997). A well-defined
ventral concavity surrounds the central hole in the parietals of BMNH R3592. This area
has been partially restored in NM QS1473.
The small postparietal (Figs 2, 7—9) is firmly sutured to the parietals, and projects
posteriorly as a short, free-standing pyramidal peg—a feature possibly restricted to
erythrosuchids (see also Gower & Sennikov 19965). Its tapered anterior end is wedged
between the posterior end of the parietals, and contact is also made with the supraoccipital
ventrally.
The postorbital (Figs 2, 3, 7) is an unevenly triradiate bone. Its short anterior arm
articulates with the anterolateral and posterolateral margins of the postfrontal, as well as
the anterolateral edge of the parietal. The postorbital therefore excludes the postfrontal
from the supratemporal fenestra (Figs 2C, 7A). As pointed out by Charig & Reig (1970),
this arrangement is contrary to that reconstructed by Huene (1911). The postorbital makes
a small contribution to the ventral depression for the capitate process of the
laterosphenoid. The anteroventral portion of the anterior arm of the postorbital is laterally
thickened and this contributes to an overhanging ridge at the posterodorsal corner of the
orbit. A distinctive depression lies just behind and above this thickened area.
The posterior process of the postorbital is slightly arched and pointed seen in lateral
view, and it articulates with a deep notch in the squamosal. The lateral surface of the distal
end bears a narrow, slit-like groove (Fig. 2). This groove, clearly visible in both specimens
where this area is preserved (BPI 5207 and 3893, NM QS1473), is accentuated by laterally
raised borders. Parrish (1992) listed deep tongue-in-groove articulation between
postorbital and squamosal as an erythrosuchid synapomorphy. The incised groove
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
‘Tesourenbs
WSL JO SMOIA [eIpow pur [eJoyey] “gq ‘[esourenbs jo] JO SMOIA [IPSUM pur [e1N}e] “VW ‘O89P Idd JO S[esowenbs ‘snupoiuifp SNYINSOAYJAAT
Ol canst y
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM Ze)
described here reflects a deep contact and might contribute to a clearer definition of a
more satisfactorily discrete character state.
The descending ramus of the squamosal (Figs 2, 10) is much longer than the anterior
one. Towards its ventral edge the posterior margin of this ramus bears a laterally
overhanging pleat or tuck (Fig. 10). This overhanging part forms a free-standing posterior
edge that sheaths laterally the dorsal part of the quadrate. The part of the squamosal that is
overhung continues ventrally to articulate with a depression on the lateral surface of the
quadratojugal. This squamosal pleat is perhaps restricted among the earliest archosaurs to
the erythrosuchids Erythrosuchus and Shansisuchus (personal observation of IVPP
material). The ventral process of the squamosal of E. africanus extends down towards the
posterior process of the jugal, and almost (BMNH R3592, BPI 4680) excludes the
quadratojugal from the border of the lateral temporal fenestra.
The medial surface of the squamosal is complex and articulates with the parietal,
paroccipital process of the opisthotic, the head of the quadrate, and the quadratojugal via a
series of concavities (Fig. 10).
The anterior process of the jugal (Figs 2, 3) is excluded from the border of the
antorbital fenestra. The dorsal edge of this same process forms the short ventral margin of
the orbit, which is smoothly notched by a small and rounded, jugal projection (Fig. 2B).
The anteroventral part of the anterior jugal process intimately interlocks with the maxilla.
The anterior extremity of the jugal consists of a medial overhanging projection and a thin
lateral flange, either side of a central ramus. The lateral flange is received by the gap
between the lateral and medial parts of the maxilla (described above), and the medial
projection articulates with the medial surface of the maxilla. This arrangement is also seen
in Proterosuchus fergusi (personal observation of RC 96), and possibly has a broad
distribution among early archosaurs.
The posterior process of the jugal is the longest, and forms the almost straight ventral
border of the lateral temporal fenestra, with the medial surface of the process contacting
the quadratojugal for most of its length. The anterior part of the articulation with the
quadratojugal is simple, with the medial face of the jugal contacting the lateral wall of the
quadratojugal. Posteriorly, however, the jugal tapers to a point and rests within a deep
notch on the quadratojugal. The quadratojugal (Figs 2, 11) is a complex element that
articulates with the jugal, squamosal and quadrate to form a robust posterolateral corner to
the dermatocranium. The bone consists of three main rami: laterally compressed anterior
and dorsal processes, and a more dorsoventrally compressed and anterodorsally inclined
posteromedial process.
The anterior process articulates with the ventromedial surface of the jugal, continuing a
long way forward as it does so, but never contributing to the ventral border of the lateral
temporal fenestra. The posterior part of the quadratojugal extends back from the dorsal
arm for a short distance, but it is largely expressed as a medial process that overlaps the
base of the quadrate posteriorly (Fig. 11A). This configuration of the quadratojugal
contributes to a large posterolateral and dorsal concavity in the lower posterolateral corner
of the skull, lateral to the lower half of the quadrate.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
0894 Idd JO syeApenb 19] JO MATA JOLIASO_ D 089h Idd JO Hespenb
JYSII JO MOIA JOLAISOg “G “76SEU HNN JO [esnloyespenb pue oye1penb iyo] JO SMOIA [elaje] pue IOLIN\SOg “W ‘snuvoiufo snyonsosysdugq
[] oIns1y
[b's
Bete
Res peed aaivenieinaees
ofb
.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 27
Palatal complex
The palate is the poorest known part of the skull. Information is available from
incompletely prepared and/or disarticulated and fragmentary specimens only. The palatal
contributions of the premaxilla and maxilla are described above.
The vomer of Erythrosuchus africanus is currently unknown. It should be preserved,
but is currently not visible, in the specimens BPI 5207 and BPI 3893. The only clue to its
form may come from the close resemblance (personal observation) of the other known
palatal elements to those of Garjainia prima (Ochev 1975).
The palatine is currently known from a single incomplete example belonging to the left
side of BMNH R3592 (Fig. 12), and a glimpse afforded by the anteriormost transverse
section of BPI 3893 (Fig. 3C, D). The BMNH R3592 example is the bone described and
figured by Huene (1911) as a vomer. Ochev (1975) interpreted this bone as a palatine, and
it very closely resembles that element in Garjainia prima and Vjushkovia triplicostata
(Ochev 1975; personal observation). It is very different from the long, slender, and
strongly dorso-ventrally compressed palatines of, for example, Proterosuchus
(Cruickshank 1972) and Prolacerta broomi (Gow 1975). It is constructed of thin
lamellae—a lateral one articulates with the maxilla, and a medial one with the pterygoid.
These meet near the anterior end of the palatine but they diverge posteriorly—contact
being maintained between the two by a third, more horizontal lamella. The horizontal
lamella and part of the medial one form part of the roof of the mouth.
The lateral lamella is essentially flat on its outer face, although centrally it bears a
narrow triangular depression. Anteriorly, the incomplete lamella seems to be tapering to a
point and, just behind this, the medial lamella joins it. A thickened and subcylindrical
dorsal process is present at the point where these two lamellae meet. The notch between
the anterior edge of this process and the dorsal part of the anterior extension of the lateral
lamella, forms the posterior border of the choana. Both the dorsal process and the thin
medial lamella probably continued upwards and forwards, as in Garjainia prima and
Vjushkovia triplicostata (Ochev 1975), to contact the posterior end of the vomer as well as
the anterior of the pterygoid. A small area anterior to this is irregularly roughened and
bears two circular pits. It is unclear if these are simply irregular growths or likely to be
characteristic for the species. It seems unlikely that this pitted, roughened area was
associated with palatal teeth.
Palatal teeth are present in at least one erythrosuchid, based on a re-examination of the
palatines of V. triplicostata. One of these, PIN 951/18, was incorrectly described by
Ochev (1975) as a left-side element. Contrary to Ochev, the palatines of V. triplicostata
clearly exhibit a number of small, blunt, conical teeth as well as some empty pit-like
‘sockets’. This is the first report of the presence of palatal teeth in erythrosuchids. Palatal
teeth are known in proterosuchids (e.g. Cruickshank 1972; Gower & Sennikov 1997;
Welman 1998), but their absence was previously thought to have characterized the clade
consisting of all archosaurs other than proterosuchids (e.g. Benton & Clark 1988; Sereno
1991; Parrish 1992). Although the pits on the palatine of BMNH R3592 approximately
resemble the empty ‘sockets’ in V. triplicostata, a similarly rough and pitted surface is
seen on some non-palatal elements of the BMNH R3592 material (e.g. anterior fragment
28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
dep
30 mm
Figure 12
Erythrosuchus africanus, left palatine of BMNH R3592. A. Lateral and slightly dorsal view.
B. Ventrolateral view. C. Dorsomedial view. D. Medial and slightly ventral view.
A B C
30 mm
Figure 13
Erythrosuchus africanus, right ectopterygoid of BPI 4680. A. Medial view. B. Lateral view.
C. Ventral view.
of left jugal). Furthermore, the pits on the palatine of BMNH R3592 are few in number
and relatively rather large.
At the point where the central lamella meets the lateral lamella, two foramina pass
between the floor of the dorsal hollow and the ventral edge of the palatine. The palatine of
Garjainia prima also exhibits a foramen in this region (Ochev 1975, fig. 3). A low and
weakly defined ridge extends anteromedially along the floor of the dorsal hollow, from a
position just anterior to the complete foramen.
The palatine is also visible in the anteriormost section through BPI 3893. Details are
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM AY)
Figure 14
Erythrosuchus africanus, right pterygoid of BMNH R3592. A. Lateral view. B. Medial view.
C. Ventral view. D. Dorsal view.
hard to interpret, partly due to the angle of the section, but Figures 3C and D shows the
palatine contacting the ventrolateral edge of the pterygoid and articulating with the medial
maxillary wall. Evidence for this also comes from the medial ‘scars’ seen on some of the
maxillae (see above). This specimen, and comparison with G. prima (Ochev 1975),
indicates that the opposite palatines probably did not meet along the midline.
Most of the information on the morphology of the ectopterygoid comes from single
examples from BPI 4680 (Fig. 13) and BMNH R3592, both from the right side. The
articular surface for the jugal is subquadrangular with an anterior notch (Fig. 13B). It is
almost certain that the ectopterygoid did not contact the maxilla in addition to the jugal. A
substantial tapering process stems from the articular head and extends posteriorly,
medially, and ventrally. The medial margin is incomplete in both examples but would
have articulated with the lateral margin of the ventrolateral ramus of the pterygoid. The
dorsal surface of the proximal part of the tapering posterior process bears a distinct
depression—giving this part of the ectopterygoid a concavo-convex transverse section.
The anterior margin 1s incomplete in both examples so that there is no indication of the
form of the posterior border of the suborbital fenestra. The BMNH R3592 example is less
well-preserved, slightly distorted, and was not identified or described by Huene (1911).
The only other direct information on the morphology of the ectopterygoids comes from a
glimpse through the right lateral temporal fenestra of BPI 5207 (Fig. 2B), which shows the
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
0.2m
Figure 15
Erythrosuchus africanus, restorations of the mandible. A. Lateral view. B. More speculative medial
view. The text should be consulted for information on the confidence that can be had in these
restorations.
posterior part of the head of the ectopterygoid articulating with the medial surface of the
jugal, and one of the transverse sections through the skull of BPI 3893 (Fig. 3E, F).
The form of the ectopterygoid, with an articular head and a long posterior process that
extends to the end of the ventrolateral ramus of the pterygoid, is essentially the same as in
Proterosuchus (Cruickshank 1972) and Garjainia prima (personal observation).
Re-examination of PIN material shows that Ochev (1975) misidentified the distal end of
the posterior process of the ectopterygoid of G. prima as a thickened ventrolateral
pterygoid edge.
The pterygoids (Figs 2, 3, 14) are deep and narrow elements. It is unclear how far
forward the dorsally arched palatal ramus extends but, in the light of many other close
similarities to the palate of G. prima (Ochev 1975), it 1s probable that contact was made
with the posterior of the vomer. The posterior edge of the ventrolateral process is
considerably thickened and almost cylindrical. Most of its lateral edge would have
contacted the ectopterygoid.
In lateral view the quadrate ramus appears as a large, smooth and triangular-shaped
surface, whereas medially it can be seen that it is trough-like in form, with a low medial
wall. The floor of this ‘trough’ articulates with the pterygoid process of the quadrate. The
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 3]
basal articulation is seen as a roughened and possibly incomplete oval surface on the end
of a horizontal ridge on the medial face of the central body of the pterygoid (Fig. 14B).
The sections through the skull of BPI 3893 (Fig. 3) show that an interpterygoid vacuity
was present along most of the length of the pterygoids. This becomes steadily narrower
anteriorly, and is eventually lost as the pterygoids appear to make contact along the
midline (Fig. 3D). There are no teeth on any part of the pterygoid. As Ochev (1975: 102)
realized, Huene (1911: 10, pls 1, 7) turned the right pterygoid of BMNH R3592 upside
down and referred to it as the left.
The quadrate of Erythrosuchus africanus is quite well known. It consists of a ventral
condylar area, a subvertical central ridge and an anteromedial lamella. The central ridge of
the quadrate (Fig. 11) is slightly bowed in lateral view. The base is expanded laterally to
provide a shallow depressed area for articulation with the medial arm of the quadratojugal.
The ventral surface of this area forms a kidney-shaped condyle. Just above the depression
for the quadratojugal, and about one-third up the height of the quadrate, is a postero-
laterally facing pit. This was described by Huene (1911) as the quadrate foramen but it is a
blind hollow, similar to a closed pit in the same position in Sphenosuchus acutus (Walker
1990). The quadrate of Stagonolepis robertsoni has a blind pit lying medial to an open
foramen (Walker 1961).
The quadrates of BMNH R3592 and BPI 4680 are incompletely preserved along their
lateral edges, but they present no evidence for the presence of a large quadrate foramen.
BPI 5207 shows minimal lateral compression here, and confirms that a quadrate foramen
was absent in Erythrosuchus africanus. Although absent in some species, e.g. Spheno-
suchus acutus (Walker, 1990), the quadrate foramen is a persistent feature present in
many fossil archosaurs, including proterosuchids (e.g. Cruickshank 1972; Gower &
Sennikov 1997), Garjainia prima (Ochev, 1981), Euparkeria capensis (Ewer, 1965),
aetosaurians (e.g. Walker 1961), and rauisuchians (Gower 1999).
Epipterygoids are not clearly visible in any specimen. A glimpse of the epipterygoid
through the right lateral temporal fenestra of BPI 5207 (Fig. 2B) shows that it was similar
in structure to those of other non-crown-group archosaurs (e.g. Garjainia prima—Ochev
1975; Proterosuchus—Cruickshank 1972; Clark et al. 1993), in having a broad base that
contacts the dorsal part of the pterygoid, and a slender dorsal process.
MANDIBLE
The lower jaw is fairly well known except for some details of the medial surface. It is
composed of seven elements and there is a well-developed lateral mandibular fenestra. A
reconstruction in lateral and medial view is shown in Figure 15. The reconstructed lateral
aspect is considered to be accurate, but medial details of the area of prearticular-
dentary-splenial-coronoid contact remain poorly known and are more speculatively
reconstructed.
The anterior of the dentary is dorsoventrally expanded (Fig. 2). As has been suggested
for crocodylomorphs exhibiting a similar condition (Parrish 1991; Sereno & Wild 1992),
the upturning of the anterodorsal margin of the dentary may be a developmentally more
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
50 mm
sym
40 mm
16
Figure
Anterior part
B
in ventral view.
f the mandible of BPI 3893
f the mandible of BPI 3893
10r part o
anus. A. Anter
>
hus afric
uc
srythros
left
in
ht dentary
10r part oO
C. Anter
ht lateral view
f section through right ramus seen in A. E. Medial view of r
in rig
of the mandible of BPI 3893
|
18
sterlor View O
w. D. Po
al vie
iter
of BMNH R3592. F. Medial view of right dentary of BMNH R2790..G. Isolated tooth of BMNH R3592.
©
c
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 33
consistent feature than any accompanying dorsoventral expansion of the distal end. Among
non-crown-group archosaurs, however, this feature may be restricted to erythrosuchids.
Posteriorly, the dentary divides into three processes that taper to points (Fig. 2). The
uppermost process articulates with a notch on the lateral surface of the surangular. The
central process is marginally the largest and is directed slightly medially as well as
posteriorly—so that it is wedged between the lateral surface of the angular and the medial
surface of the surangular. The ventral edge of this process forms the anterodorsal border of
the lateral mandibular fenestra. The lower process articulates with the angular by
overlapping it laterally and resting on a small shelf. This configuration is present in
Garjainia prima (Ochev 1981; personal observation), and it might be common to a wide
range of basal archosaurs. It also appears to be similar to that described for Herrerasaurus
ischigualastensis (Sereno & Novas 1993). The only notable difference is the presence, in
H. ischigualastensis, of a lateral ridge on the dorsal process. The condition in
Erythrosuchus africanus 1s also. similar to that of at least some Recent crocodilians
(lordansky 1973; personal observation), where the central of three dentary processes
passes medial to the surangular. In crocodilians the dorsal process is much reduced and
the central process is more intimately sutured to the surangular. The condition in
H. ischigualastensis is therefore not unique (contra Sereno & Novas 1993: 469) apart
from, perhaps, the lateral ridge.
The anterolateral end of the Meckelian canal tapers to a point level with the position of
the fifth alveolus. The dorsomedial surface of the dentary bears an anteriorly tapering and
step-like depression that possibly held an elongate coronoid. BMNH R2790 shows a series
of parallel channels, presumably vascular, running back posteroventrally over this step.
The dentaries of BMNH R2790 and R3592 suggest that the splenial did not reach the
symphisis, but terminated at a point level with the fourth or fifth tooth alveolus. BPI 3893
(Fig. 16) demonstrates that the splenial formed much of the ventral as well as the medial
wall of the Meckelian canal, with the ventral contribution increasing posteriorly. Contact
with the coronoid is made posterodorsally, but anteriorly the dentary would appear to lie
between these two elements. Each dentary holds approximately 13 teeth.
Knowledge of the coronoid is far from complete. Direct evidence of its presence was
found only in BPI 3893 (Figs 3, 16), where the coronoid can be detected as a sliver of bone
on the dorsomedial edge of the mandible. This demonstrates that the coronoid was more
extensive than a crescent at the anterodorsal border of the adductor fossa, but clear
evidence for the limit of its anterior extension is lacking—it may even have extended far
anteriorly, lying between the dorsomedial edge of the dentary and the dorsolateral edge of
the splenial. In non-archosaurian archosauromorphs such as rhynchosaurs (e.g. Huene
1938) and Prolacerta broomi (Gow 1975), the coronoid does not extend far anteriorly
alongside the dentary, and in living archosaurs it is a small crescent of bone
(crocodilians—e.g. Iordansky 1973) or absent (birds—e.g. Baumel & Witmer 1993).
There is evidence that the coronoid was long and slender in some extinct archosaurs,
including the erythrosuchid Garjainia prima (Ochev 1981; personal observation), the
proterochampsid Chanaresuchus bonapartei (Romer 1971), and _ the early
crocodylomorph Sphenosuchus acutus (Walker 1990).
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 17
Erythrosuchus africanus, surangular and articular of BMNH R3592. A. Lateral view of right ramus.
B. Medial view of right ramus. C. Dorsal view of right ramus. D. Ventral view of right ramus. E. Medial
view of left ramus. F. Lateral view of left ramus.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 39)
The surangular (Figs 2, 3, 16, 17) is composed of a laterally-compressed posteroventral
plate that is suspended from an angled longitudinal ridge. The tapered anterior end of the
dorsal ridge bears a conspicuous notch (Fig. 17A, F) that receives the upper posterior
process of the dentary. The central dentary process passes under the ventral edge of the
anterior end of the surangular to contact the lateral face of a ventrally opening trough on
the ventromedial surface of the surangular ridge. This area of the surangular has collapsed
slightly during preservation in BPI 5207, so that it is expressed as a lateral depression
(Fig. 2B).
Posteriorly, the dorsal ridge forms the lateral edge of the mandibular cotyle. A thin
process extends anteromedially from the anterior margin of this area—its ventral edge
maintains contact with the upper surface of the plate-like part of the surangular, and its
posterior face firmly abuts against the anterior of the articular. Below the cotyle, the
thickened part of the dorsal ridge ends abruptly in a stumpy posterolateral projection.
Most of the lateral face of the ventral plate of the surangular bears a shallow depression
that receives the medial face of the posterior part of the angular. A large surangular
foramen is seen laterally, below the anterior edge of the cotyle and under the overhanging
dorsal ridge. A narrow and shallow groove extends anteriorly from this foramen,
harboured by the overhang of the dorsal surangular ridge. The groove becomes slightly
broader as it extends anterodorsally over the ventrolateral edge of the dorsal ridge, where
it eventually disappears.
The articular (Fig. 17) is a thick bone that forms the major portion of the mandibular
cotyle and retroarticular process. The cotyle is subdivided into two depressions by a slight,
diagonal ridge. The anteromedial surface of the articular articulates with the posterior part of
the lateral face of the prearticular. Behind this contact, the posteromedial surface of the
articular bears a prominently projecting tubercle. A narrow channel running below this
tubercle, and an associated foramen further up on the medial face of the retroarticular
process (Fig. 17B, D), may have served to transmit the chorda tympani branch of the facial
nerve. The low, rounded retroarticular process is formed by a small part of the surangular as
well as the articular. Among the earliest archosaurs, it resembles that of Shansisuchus
shansisuchus (personal observation of [VPP material documented by Young 1964) in that it
lacks the free-standing, dorsally projecting process at the end of the retroarticular region
present in Garjainia prima and proterosuchids (personal observation).
Current knowledge of the prearticular (Figs 2, 16) is also incomplete. The posterior end
is forked and articulates with the articular and the ventromedial edge of the ventral lamella
of the surangular. Most of the dorsal edge was free standing, and the ventral edge
articulated with the angular, and probably contributed to the infra-Meckelian fossa. Very
little is known of the anterior end of the prearticular, although a small piece of bone visible
in BPI 3893 (Fig. 16C) suggests that it extended far enough anteriorly to rest between the
posterior ends of the splenial and coronoid. Nothing is known of the lateral surface except
a glimpse afforded through the right lateral mandibular fenestra of BPI 5207 (Fig. 2B).
The angular (Figs 2, 3, 18) articulates with most of the other mandibular elements. A
small lateral shelf near the anterior end presents an area for articulation with the lower
posterior process of the dentary. Posteriorly, the lateral face is dorsoventrally expanded,
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 18
Erythrosuchus africanus, left angular of BMNH R3592. A. Lateral view. B. Medial view.
and it overlaps laterally a large area of the posteroventral lamella of the surangular and a
small ventral part of the articular.
The central portion of the angular forms the floor of the large adductor fossa. A notch
in the dorsal margin of the medial part (Fig. 18B) probably represents the position of the
infra-Meckelian foramen—its margin being completed by the prearticular.
DENTITION
The marginal teeth of Erythrosuchus africanus (Fig. 16G) are typical of many
carnivorous archosaurs in that they are large, laterally compressed, recurved, sharply
pointed, and serrated. The mesial edge is more rounded than the sharply tapering distal
margin, and the labial edge is more convex than the lingual one. The serrations on the
distal edge extend from the pointed tip to the base of the crown, but mesially they extend
for only half of the length from tip to crown. The teeth have long cylindrical roots that are
embedded within sockets in the jaw. The bone at the edge of each alveolus of fully
developed teeth is in close contact with the fully developed tooth surface, without
approaching the condition seen in proterosuchids (see Gower & Sennikov 1997). Sections
through the teeth show layered dentine surrounding a central lumen. There appears to be
minimal variation in form throughout both the upper and lower jaw.
The premaxilla holds five teeth. The first three alveoli are fairly equal in size but the
last two are markedly smaller, and are situated in the broad notch between the premaxilla
and maxilla. The first maxillary tooth is similar in size to the last of the premaxilla. From
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM ay)
here, there is an increase in tooth size posteriorly, up to a point where the maxilla is at its
deepest and the largest maxillary tooth is held. The alveolar depth decreases steadily from
here to the posterior end of the maxilla, but the size of the erupted crowns of the teeth is not
noticeably reduced until the last few teeth, which are markedly smaller.
Knowledge of the mandibular dentition is far from complete. It is likely that the
mandibular dentition did not oppose the first and last few teeth of the upper jaw. Potential
variation in tooth size along the length of the dentary is unknown, because no specimen
reveals enough information. It is probable that a general decrease in size occurred
posteriorly, with the largest teeth being held by the deep anterior part of the dentary.
Tooth replacement in Erythrosuchus africanus occurred by the emergence of the new
tooth in a position lingual to the functional tooth, with the alternate tooth replacement
pattern seen in many ‘thecodontian’ archosaurs. The replacement teeth in the two sides of
the upper jaw are out of phase. Evidence comes from the premaxilla of BMNH R3592
(Fig. 4C), where the right side has functioning teeth in the first and third alveoli but a
replacing tooth in the second, and the left side has a replacing first tooth and a large
functional second. Further evidence comes from BPI 5207 (Fig. 2), where large
functioning third and fifth maxillary teeth border a smaller, replacing fourth tooth. The
right maxilla of the same specimen shows the opposite situation.
VERTEBRAL COLUMN
Vertebrae and ribs
Only a few of the known specimens of Erythrosuchus africanus include vertebrae, and
none exhibits a complete series. Furthermore, preservation and/or preparation is often
imperfect, making the identification of the exact position of isolated vertebrae
problematic. It has been possible, however, to discern most of the morphological
characteristics associated with changes in serial position. These closely follow those
known for other early archosaurs (Hughes 1963; Cruickshank 1972).
There are two sacral vertebrae and an estimated 25 presacral vertebrae, also the number
in Proterosuchus (Cruickshank 1972) and as estimated for Vjushkovia triplicostata by
Huene (1960). The almost complete tail of BMNH R3592 indicates that there were
approximately 35 caudal vertebrae. All of the presacral vertebrae are notably short
relative to their height, particularly in the pectoral region, and the centra are consistently
taller than they are long throughout the presacral column. The centra are platycoelus to
amphiplatyan and are laterally constricted or excavated. The dorsal neural arches are
pierced by often complex, subdivided pits or foramina. These are perhaps pneumatic in
nature (Gower 2001), but this requires further investigation because pneumatized
vertebrae are generally considered to be restricted to more derived archosaurs (e.g. Britt
1994; Britt et al. 1998). Intercentra are present throughout the length of the precaudal
column and three-headed ribs are present in the pectoral region.
It is probable that all of the precaudal vertebrae bore ribs. Unfortunately they are
incompletely known, largely because articulated postcranial specimens have not been
found. This is particularly true of the presacral ribs, where much of the information had to
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
g
OLIol
+r, ~~ _—CeestsOir—/— eA
€ a e
Figure 19
Diagrammatic views of vertebra showing dimensions recorded in Tables | and 2. a = centrum length;
b=centrum height anteriorly; c = centrum width anteriorly; d = centrum height posteriorly; e = centrum
width posteriorly; f = length of base of neural spine; g = length of distal end of neural spine;
h = longitudinal distance between tips of zygapophyses; 1 = maximum transverse distance across
anterior zygapophyses.
be gained from the corresponding articulatory surfaces on the vertebrae. The sacral ribs
and most of the caudal ribs are well known. Measurements of a number of vertebral
dimensions, defined diagrammatically in Figure 19, are presented in Tables | and 2.
Identification of a proatlas is uncertain. Squashed on to the lateral surface of the right
atlas neural arch of BPI 4680 (Fig. 20A) is a slender splint of bone, similar in shape and
relative size to the proatlas of Euparkeria capensis described by Ewer (1965). The
presence of a proatlas in Erythrosuchus africanus is also suggested by an anterior
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM sy
20 mm
Figure 20
Erythrosuchus africanus. A. Medial and lateral views of right atlas neural arch of BPI 4680. B. Anterior
and posterior views of atlas intercentrum of BPI 4680. C. Medial and lateral views of right atlas neural
arch of BMNH R3592. D. Anterior and posterior views of atlas intercentrum of BMNH R3592.
projection on the atlas neural arch, articulatory facets on the exoccipitals, and by the
presence of a proatlas in other early archosaurs.
The neural arch of the atlas (Fig. 20A, C) consists of a main body with a small anterior
projection and a longer, tapering posterior process. The arches are paired and unfused,
with the gap between them being partly overhung by the axis neural spine. The element as
a whole is laterally convex and medially concave. The main part of the arch contacting the
atlas intercentrum is short, broad, and transversely thick. The anterior edge forms an area
for articulation with the occipital condyle. The anterior projection arises dorsally, just
behind the anterior margin of the main body. It continues for a short distance antero-
medially before contacting the proatlas. There are two hollows at the base of the anterior
projection—anteromedially and posteriorly.
The intercentrum of the atlas is well preserved in BPI 4680 and BMNH R3592 (Fig. 20B,
D) as a crescent-shaped wedge of bone very similar to that of Euparkeria capensis (Ewer
1965). Posteriorly the ventral edge is bevelled, and posterolaterally each side forms a single
facet for articulation with what was probably a single-headed rib. The atlas centrum and axis
intercentrum have not been identified or preserved in any currently known specimen.
The centrum of the axis (seen in BPI 5207, Fig. 21A) is short and unkeeled, and the
anterior surface is perhaps more convex than in the other vertebrae of the column. The
anterodorsal part of the lateral edge of the centrum 1s raised to form what is interpreted as a
weakly expressed diapophysis. This facet is in a significantly more dorsal position than
the diapophyses of the following cervical vertebrae, such as is also seen in Proterosuchus
40)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
B
par
di
BNE Nera petit eT
arte
par
Figure 21
Erythrosuchus africanus. A. Right lateral view of axis and incomplete third presacral vertebra of
BPI 5207. B. Right lateral and anterior views of third(?) presacral vertebra of BMNH R3592. C. Right
lateral view of anterior cervical vertebra of SAM-—3028. D. Right lateral and anterior views of cervical
vertebra of BPI 4680. E. Right lateral, ventral and anterior views of slightly more posterior cervical
vertebra of BPI 4680. All scale bars represent 20 mm.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 4]
(Broili & Schroder 1934). There is no indication of a parapophysis below this. The neural
spine is incomplete but was clearly expanded. The atlas and axis ribs are unknown.
The anteriormost cervical vertebra might be represented by an incomplete example
from BMNH R3592 (Fig. 21B; Hughes 1963). The centrum is much taller than it is long
and bears circular parapophyseal and diapophyseal facets low down on its lateral surface.
Other anterior cervicals (SAM-—3028, BPI 4680—Fig. 21), have more circular faces to the
centra, and the ratio between height and length is less (Table 1).
A number of changes in morphology occur in moving posteriorly along the cervicals
and approaching the pectoral region (Table 1). The centra become taller, shorter
longitudinally, and show increased lateral constriction. The articulatory surfaces become
more circular in shape and the ventral margins remain bevelled. The parapophysis
remains low down on the anterior edge of the centrum, but the facet becomes
dorsoventrally elongated, whereas the diapophysis ‘migrates’ up the anterior edge.
BMNH R3592 includes two fairly well-preserved posterior cervical centra that,
because of their distinctive morphology and the aforementioned problem of deducing
their exact position, are referred to here as ‘pectoral vertebrae’. They are described in
some detail here because of the evidence they provide for the presence of three-headed
ribs. The more posterior centrum (Fig. 22B) was artificially stuck to a complete neural
arch and spine, and was considered by Charig & Reig (1970) to be a composite. Charig &
Reig used this as evidence in rejecting Tatarinov’s (1961) claim that facets for three-
headed ribs could be identified in this specimen. The centrum and arch have since been
separated. BMNH R3592 includes an additional disarticulated neural arch (Fig. 22C) and
centrum that are similar in form to the equivalent components of the former composite
example. The former composite arch fits this second, isolated centrum very closely, as
does the free arch with the former composite centrum, and the interpretation here is that
this was the original configuration. It is also suggested that these two vertebrae articulated
directly with one another in the column, with the formerly composite centrum and isolated
arch belonging to the more posterior (?ninth) of two consecutive vertebrae. In both
examples, the centrum forms only a small part of the diapophysis, whereas the
parapophysis remains low down on the anterolateral edge.
Although the two pectoral centra of BMNH R3592 share almost identical morphologies,
the corresponding neural arches show some differences. The ventral processes of the more
posterior arch (Fig. 22C) are much more prominent, more horizontally directed, and more
sculptured than in the preceding example. The distal end of the diapophysis does not form a
simple oval-shaped facet, but is instead constricted to present two quasi-discrete areas
(Fig. 22C). The larger upper area is oval-shaped and its long axis leans back at
approximately 45° to the vertical. The second area forms part of a smaller and more circular
facet with the diapophyseal component of the centrum. This arrangement strongly suggests
the presence of three-headed pectoral ribs very similar to those of Vjushkovia triplicostata
(Huene 1960; personal observation). This is supported by the presence of three heads in a rib
of Erythrosuchus africanus described below. BPI 4680 and SAM—PK-K10025 both
include a number of fragmentary, crushed and isolated centra, that are posterior cervicals
or possibly anteriormost dorsals. These are listed as pectorals in Table 1.
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 1
Various dimensions of precaudal vertebrae in five specimens of Erythrosuchus
africanus. The dimensions a—g are defined in Figure 19. AC = anterior cervical;
CE = cervical; P = pectoral; D = dorsal; AMD = anterior/mid dorsal; MD = mid dorsal;
MPD = mid/posterior dorsal; PD = posterior dorsal; S = sacral
; Estimated Dimensions (mm)
Specimen position : * : F : ‘
BMNH R3592 (large) , oo
AC 3 57 110 77
CE 50 109
CE 61 105 107 90
8 58 123 101 iD 105 32
9 54 125 106 123 113 34 32
AD 12 65 118 97 114 93 42
AMD 15 68 105 91 96 91 51 72
AMD 16 72 103 90 100 85 52 74
MPD 20 78 102 89 58 B
MPD D 78 94 85 98 82 56 16
S S1 72 97 85 100 75 42 45
S S2 69 100 75 90 70 35
BMNH R3592 (small) _
MD 16 85 65
MD 17 62 82 59 16 59 39
MD 18 61 86 62 719 64 42
MD 19 56 83 64 78 64 42
MD 20 Ti 64
PD 24 62 79 68 79 65 45 |
ee er
AC 3/4 48 16 66 81 69
INC 4/5 59 82 64 86 70
PC 7 41 87 80 84 80
8 44 87 75 91 80
9 Al 92 W) 93 78
10 91 86
AD 1 Al 85 81 81 75 29
AD 13 89 84 80 70 35
AMD 14 77 75 74 70 37
MD 74 67 65 62
MD 19 59 80 65 78 60
DO 78 69 67 68
DO 69 68 66 62
DO 35 66 68
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 43
Specimen Estimated Dimensions (mm)
position q b c d 2 ¢ g
SAM K3028
AC 4/5 SD) 79 65
SAM K905
MD 62 90 73 95 85
PD 7A 90 73 16
PD 69 95 73
SAM Kun-no.
AC 47 81 65
CE 49 79 58 80 65
CE 48 15 65 Z
I 74 ug
P 42 82 80 73
AD 40 88 75
AD 85
AD 48 80 q7.
DO 68
DO 70
DO 47 67 65
DO 51 13
DO 52 66 56
DO SD US
Anterior dorsal vertebrae are represented by single but relatively well-preserved
examples from BMNH R3592 and BPI 4680 (Fig. 23). The centrum is longer than those of
the ‘pectoral’ vertebrae and the articulatory faces are not so circular. The neural arch is
still distinct suturally from the centrum, but is more complex in form. The simple and
single diapophyseal facet is situated on the end of a near-horizontal transverse process that
is subtriangular in cross-section. A lamella extends between the di- and parapophyses, and
additional lamellae extend from the base of the transverse process. One of these is the
development of the anterior ridge extending on to the lateral surface of the anterior
zygapophysis, whereas another extends posteroventrally to the posterior edge of the
centrum. Finally, a moderately developed posterior ridge extends to a position just below
the posterior zygapophysis. There are two deep pits where the bases of the anterior and
ventral lamellae converge. A similar pit is also positioned between the anterior and
posterior zygapophyses—at the dorsal edge of the base of the transverse process.
Moving posteriorly along the dorsal series there is a general increase in centrum length
and a decrease in height (Table 1). All of the dorsal centra (Fig. 24) show strong lateral
constrictions. The neural arch pits become more complex, with each main excavation
housing a number of smaller ones separated by narrow lamellae (Fig. 24B). The anterior
pit becomes large and occupies much of the concave anterior surface of the transverse
process. Further posteriorly in the column, as the parapophysis migrates dorsally, the
anterior pit again becomes shallow and simple. The ventral pit gradually becomes less
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
44
QIT YO] JOF SJoow} JO oUITINO snyd ‘MorA JOLOyUe UI Yore [eINSU IOLIA\Sod aIOy ‘D ‘WIN.WUdD JoOTIO}sod o10N JO SMOIA [BUDA pur [e1a}e] OT -g
York [PANU IOLOJUL SIOU JO MIIA [BSIOP pu IOLI9\sod ‘[esojey WYSTY WV ‘T6SEU HNN JO seIQoUI9A [eIOJood SATINIOSUOD OMY ‘SnUDIL{D snyonsosyJAAT
CT? ANSI
208 "p
'p
THU QE Jed
45
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM
‘O89 Idd JO BIQOLIOA [LSIOP JOLIOJUL JO MOIA JOLIOISOd “CG “TOSEU HNIN JO PIQOHOA [eSIOp JOLIOJUB JO MIA TeSIO “D “coSed HNN
JO VIQOIIOA [LSIOP IOLIOJUL JO MITA [L19}R] YOT
‘J °Z6SEM HNING JO BAQOLIOA [BSIOP JOLIOVUL JO MOIA IOLIOWWY “YW “snUuDILIfY snyonso4LypAs]
€7 ONS
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
46
“UWI ()€ JUSSOIdaI SIeg BBO “[ENPIAIPUL JO[[eWIs JO 9v1Qd}19A |[eSIOP JOLIO\sod ysour
IU} JO UO JO MATA [LIDIL] YO] “| “LAQSLIIA [PSIOP IOLI9}SOd JO MOIA JOLIOSOg “C] “VIQSWSA [BSIOP JOLI9}SOd JO MOIA IOLIOWUY “dD ‘PIGOLIOA [esIOp
JOIIN}SOd JO MOIA [BIOL] JOT “G “PIQOVIOA [SIOP-PIU JO MOTA [RIDE] YOT “VW “76SEU HNING JO 2eIGoVI9A JesIop ‘snuvotifo snyansosypArq
y¢ cnsIy
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 47
well defined as the posteroventral lamella recedes. The dorsal pit becomes steadily bigger
and deeper, and is often complex. The arch also becomes pierced by foramina along the
posterior edge of the base of the transverse process and behind the posteroventral lamella.
These posterior foramina become less obvious as the posteroventral lamella recedes. The
facets of the anterior and posterior zygapophyses become more horizontally inclined. The
neural spines are long narrow blades with narrow ‘spine tables’.
In an isolated, possibly last, dorsal vertebra (Fig. 24E) from the smaller-sized material
belonging to BMNH R3592, the anterior neural arch pits are absent, but the dorsal and
posterior ones are highly reduced—only the ventral pits remain well defined. Additional
pits are positioned near the proximal end of the facets of the posterior zygapophyses.
These neural arch pits are similar to those that can be seen in a wide range of archosaurs,
including, for example, rauisuchians (personal observation). They are possibly pneumatic
(see Gower 2001), although pneumatized vertebrae are considered at present to be
restricted to ornithodiran archosaurs (Britt 1994). Erythrosuchus africanus certainly lacks
the large pneumatic foramina in the centra of some ornithodiran archosaurs (e.g. Britt et
al. 1998).
An almost complete and articulated example of the sacral vertebrae and ribs is
preserved as part of BMNH R3592 (Fig. 25). Erythrosuchus africanus has two sacral
vertebrae, the first of which is distinctly larger than the second. The first sacral centrum is
circular in end view and is taller than it is long. The anterior edge is ventrally bevelled,
probably for articulation with an intercentrum. An intercentrum is preserved in position
between the two sacral vertebrae of BMNH R3592. The second sacral vertebra is similar
to the first, with a few notable differences. It is smaller and the centrum has an oval-shaped
posterior articulatory surface. The facet for the second sacral rib occupies a more posterior
position. The possibly pneumatic pits characteristic of the neural arches of the preceding
dorsals are absent or greatly reduced on the sacral vertebrae, except perhaps for an
excavation behind the process that bears the facet for the first sacral rib.
The caudal vertebrae are well represented by a largely complete and articulated series
belonging to BMNH R3592, described only briefly by Huene (1911). There are some
glued breakages that may not all be true, but the first 31 caudal vertebrae are well
represented. There are at least a further three (and an estimated maximum of five)
associated vertebrae. This, together with the fact that at least one vertebra is missing from
the tip of the tail, means that the total number of caudal vertebrae was approximately 35.
Other specimens include only unassociated examples or fragments, so that possible
variations in form and number cannot be assessed currently.
There are a number of changes in morphology along the tail, with the dimensions of
some of these variables in BMNH R3592 shown in Table 2. The first caudal vertebra
(Fig. 26) is short and high, much like the second sacral vertebra. The single articulatory
area for the fused caudal rib is large. The second caudal vertebra (Fig. 26D) is smaller
than, but similar to the first. Bevelling of the ventral part of the centrum suggests the
presence of an intercentrum in life. Huene (1911) considered the first two caudal vertebrae
to be ‘caudo-sacral’—believing that the ribs would have contacted the medial surface of
the ilium. Although the available evidence (abrupt tapering of the preserved part of the
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ribs, absence of articulatory areas on the ilium) does not support this view, it is true that
the first two caudal vertebrae are laterally flanked by the posterior part of the iliac blade.
WANS ILS, 2
Variation in dimensions of caudal vertebrae in Erythrosuchus africanus, specimen
BMNH R3592. The dimensions a—i are defined in Figure 19.
Position Dimensions (mm)
a b c d e h 1
l 63 87 71 86 70 76 50
2 62 78 67 76 80
3 68 64
4 58 72 71
5 » 68 66 67
6 54 67 67 64
7 53 66 63 61 V7 50
8 54 61 60 58 1S 48
5) 53 57) 53) yy) WS 43
10 yy 53 49 49 72 45
1] Sl 50 47 46 72 43
12 49 48 43 43 70 36
13 48 45 42 42 69 35
14 48 38 39) 69 34
15 48 38 38 69
16 47 38 35 36 65 30
17 46 35 34 65 29
18 44 35 34 35 61 28
19 44 34 331 58 Di
20 43 30 33 31 26
21 42 32 30 34 32 53 26
22 40 33 30 31 30 53 DS
23 39 Sil 2) 28 28 47 23
24 39 30 28 28 26 Dy)
DS 29 26
26 38 DY 26 50
Dy 37 26 26 49 19
28 35 24 24 46 Ig
29 34 23 26 7B
W303 21
3] 20 19
32 30 18 19 18
33 19 17
34? De 14 16 13 35)
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 49
Figure 25
Erythrosuchus africanus, sacral vertebrae and ribs of BMNH R3592. A. Anterior view.
B. Posterior view.
Several changes occur over the following eight or so caudal vertebrae (Fig. 27A,
Table 2). There is a proportional lengthening of the centra up to a point where the centrum
of the tenth caudal vertebra is longer than it is high. This is accompanied by a decrease in
the absolute length and diameter of the centra. There is also a reduction in the expression
of lateral constriction. The ventral edge remains arched, but the keel is reduced, and the
ventral surface becomes a broad and almost flat area. The bevelling on the posteroventral
edge of the centra becomes kidney-shaped for articulation with haemal arches. The
contact areas for ribs decrease in size, and are positioned lower down on the vertebrae.
The articulatory surfaces of the zygapophyses become longer and narrower, and are at a
greater angle to one another (the anterior zygapophysial facets of the ninth caudal vertebra
are separated by an angle of 125°). The base of the neural spine becomes shorter and 1s
positioned further posteriorly. This change occurs fairly abruptly at the eighth and ninth
caudal vertebrae. The complete neural spine of the eleventh caudal vertebra is fairly short
and laterally compressed, but has a moderately expanded distal surface. It projects
posterodorsally at an angle of approximately 45° to the long axis of the centrum.
The relative lengthening of the centra and reduction in the size of the rib contact areas
continues along the remainder of the tail (Fig. 27, Table 2). By the twenty-fourth caudal
vertebra the neural spine is but a low, thin crest. Posterior to the twenty-fourth caudal and
up to the end of the tail, the angle between opposite zygapophyseal surfaces again
narrows—to a point where they are almost vertical, and significant lateral movement of
the tail would have been greatly restricted. In a horizontal plane the tail would have been
stiff at its base and again towards the tip, with more potential for movement between these
points. By the twenty-ninth caudal vertebra there is no longer a contact area for a caudal
rib, and by the thirty-second the neural spine is reduced to a barely perceptible ridge.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
“BIQOWOA
[EPNES PITY} FO MOIA [BIO IL] YO] “| “VIQOLIOA [PEPNLd puodas JO MATA [e19}L] 19] ‘(| “VIQOVIOA [EPNed JSIIJ JO MOIA IOLIDISOg “dD “BIQOVIOA [epned
ISI JO MOIA [B1D}L] YO] “ “CIGSLIOA [BPNLO ISI JO MOTA JOLIOWUY “VW ‘Z6SEU HNING JO esqov9A [epneos Joloyue ‘snupoifo snyonsoaysaag
QZ oIns1 4
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM oul
The presacral ribs are poorly known. BMNH R3592 includes one fairly complete
cervical rib (Fig. 28A) and some additional fragments. The shaft of the cervical rib is
short, laterally compressed but slightly concavo-convex, and tapers to a point. The
capitulum and tuberculum are short, and their facets lie close together. The tubercular
facet is circular but the capitular one is more oval in shape. A small leaf-shaped and
laterally compressed anterior process of the shaft projects forward between the capitulum
and tuberculum. Grooves, possibly for blood vessels, are located on the ventro- and
dorsomedial edges, just behind the base of the tuberculum and capitulum. The other
known fragments of cervical ribs show no notable deviation from this morphology.
The pectoral ribs of early archosaurs are of particular interest because of a number of
claims and refutations of the presence of three-headed ribs (Huene 1960; Tatarinov 1961;
Hughes 1963; Ewer 1965; Charig & Reig 1970; Cruickshank 1972; Thulborn 1979; Peng
1991; Parrish 1992). Excepting Tatarinov (1961), it has generally been accepted that
three-headed ribs were not present in Erythrosuchus africanus. Most recently, Parrish
(1992) has claimed that three-headed ribs are present only in the pectoral region of
Vjushkovia triplicostata Huene, 1960, and V. sinensis Young, 1973, and that they are a
synapomorphy of the genus Vjushkovia. Evidence from a pectoral vertebra belonging to
BMNH R3592 described above, suggests however that they were present in
Erythrosuchus africanus. An incomplete rib belonging to SAM—3028 (Fig. 28B) offers
further support for this interpretation. It is an almost complete proximal end with a short
fragment of shaft. There is no anterior process, the capitular and tubercular ‘peduncles’
are confluent with the proximal end of the shaft, and the articulatory facets are oriented
virtually perpendicular to the long axis of the shaft. The ventral margin is arched but the
dorsal one is nearly straight.
The capitular facet is oval-shaped and simple. The tubercular facet is slightly larger
and more circular, and closely associated with its ventral edge is a small but discrete
accessory facet. The posterior view of this rib shows that this third facet is not just an
expanded area of a lamella between the capitular and tubercular facets, but that it is
associated with its own cylindrical peduncle. This arrangement is very similar to the
pectoral ribs of Vjushkovia triplicostata (Huene 1960; personal observation). This rib
morphology, combined with the above description of the pectoral vertebra of
BMNH R3592 with three apophyses, provides the first detailed osteological evidence that
three-headed ribs were present in Erythrosuchus africanus. The presence of three-headed
pectoral ribs is not therefore a unique synapomorphy of the genus Vjushkovia (see also
Gower & Sennikov 2000).
The evidence from the apophyses of the anterior dorsal vertebrae is that the anterior
dorsal ribs were dichocephalous. Substantial shaft fragments and a possible distal end of a
large dorsal rib belong to BMNH R3592, but no proximal ends are known. Posterior
dorsal ribs (e.g. Fig. 28C) are known only from proximal fragments.
The sacral ribs (Fig. 25) are short, stout, and ventrolaterally directed. They are very
firmly attached to the sacral vertebrae, but a suture is still evident. The ribs of the first
sacral vertebra are much larger than those of the second. Anteromedially they protrude
beyond the anterior surface of the centrum to provide additional articulatory surfaces for
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
‘OBIQOLIOA [epnes YyNoJ-Ayry} puwe pary}-AUTY LH “ovIQOWOA Tepes pIy}-ALIUY 0} ISIJ-AYNY_L, “J “dVIQOLIOA [epnes
\sJ-AVITY] pure YJOHATYL, “Y “OeAQOVIOA [epneo yyUTU-AJUIM4 OF YYLY-AJUOM | “(| “OvIQOVIOA [epned YyVINOJ-AWUOA\} 0} JSIEJ-AJUIM |, *D “9PIQOLIOA Jepneo
POU) 0} YJUSAIY “| “OkIQOLIOA [EpNLd YUDAIJO 0} YLINO “VW “Z6SEU HNIN JO svAGoLIOA [epNed JO SMOIA [eIO}L] Yo] ‘snUDILfd snyonsosyaag
LZ 9INBI
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 53
the centrum of the last dorsal vertebra. The second sacral ribs articulate with the more
posterior part of the vertebra, and do not extend beyond the posterior edge of the centrum.
All of the caudal ribs (Figs 26, 27) are holocephalous and are firmly attached to the
vertebrae, although a suture can often be detected. The ribs of the first two caudal
vertebrae have very robust heads, but the short shaft tapers distally. The remaining ribs are
all dorsoventrally flattened, short, and project downwards and slightly posteriorly. They
become shorter and more slender along the length of the tail, before disappearing by about
the twenty-ninth caudal vertebra.
Intercentra and haemal arches
The presence or absence of intercentra has been employed as a character that has
importance for the resolution of early archosaur relationships (e.g. Benton & Clark 1988;
Sereno 1991; Parrish 1992). Despite some debate over the presence of intercentra in
erythrosuchids (e.g. Charig & Reig 1970) it is clear that intercentra were present
throughout the precaudal column in Erythrosuchus africanus. This 1s partly demonstrated
by the obvious bevelling on the anterior and posterior ventral edges of the centra. Contrary
to Parrish (1992), intercentra are preserved in some specimens of E. africanus. One is
preserved in BPI 4680 (Fig. 28F), and three articulated dorsal vertebrae from
SAM-—PK-K 10025 show intercentra preserved in articulation (Fig. 28E). An intercentrum
is also present between the two sacral vertebrae of BMNH R3592. The first two caudal
vertebrae of BMNH R3592 show bevelling, yet not the expanded kidney-shaped area of
the more posterior caudals. This suggests that intercentra but not haemal arches were
present here. The anterior edge of the third caudal centrum is not preserved, but between
the third and fourth and all subsequent caudals there are haemal arches, but no sign of
separate intercentra. This is different from the condition in Proterosuchus, where separate
caudal haemal arches and intercentra are present (Cruickshank 1972).
Haemal arches (Fig. 28D), or chevrons, are present from between at least the third and
fourth caudal vertebrae up to the end of the tail. They all share the same general structure
in possessing a broad, hour-glass or kidney-shaped proximal end, and a posteroventral
Y-shaped distal process. They articulate largely with the broad area on the posteroventral
bevelled edge of each caudal centrum, although contact with the anteroventral edge of the
following centrum is also achieved. The anteriormost haemal arches have long and almost
cylindrical distal ends, but several changes in form occur along the tail. They become
shorter more abruptly than the decrease in length of the corresponding centra, and the
openings for the passage of the blood vessels of the tail become smaller. The distal ends
gradually become laterally compressed, and they also develop a projecting, lamella-like
anterior edge. The lateral compression is combined with a small degree of torsion, so that
the right side of each haemal arch is rotated anteriorly and the left side posteriorly. There
is direct evidence of haemal arches being present at the thirty-second caudal vertebra, and
further indirect evidence (in the broad bevelling of centra) that they were present beyond
this and possibly up to the tip of the tail.
54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
cap
Figure 28
Erythrosuchus africanus. A. Lateral and medial views of anterior right cervical rib of BMNH R3592.
B. Medial and anterolateral views of left pectoral rib of SAM—3028. C. Medial and anterolateral views
of left posterodorsal rib of BMNH R3592. D. Anterior views of the anteriormost and a slightly more
posterior haemal arch of BMNH R3592. E. Ventral view of dorsal centra and intercentra of
SAM—PK—K 10025. F. Anterior and lateral outlines of isolated intercentrum of BPI 4680. All scale bars
represent 15 mm.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM bie)
APPENDICULAR ELEMENTS
Limb orientation terminology
The clarity of osteological descriptions and their usefulness in comparative studies is
often clouded by the lack of a definition of the terms used to orient limb surfaces. In
choosing a set of clearly-defined and practical terms, it is here intended to use those based on
form rather than on a postulated and potentially incorrect life position. This avoids the
vagaries of discrete gaits, that are usually too rigid and generalized (e.g. Jenkins 1971). The
terminology used here is based on the early (‘primitive’) tetrapod condition, rather than that
used in dinosaurian, avian, and mammalian studies—groups generally considered to have
an ‘upright’ gait. This terminology therefore aims to agree with that already established in
the osteological and myological description of extant quadrupedal archosaurs (for example,
that applied to crocodilians by Romer 1942), despite the additional problems caused by
differences in the relative position of homologous surfaces on single elements among
different taxa. Romer (1922, 1923, 1942) defined the dorsal and ventral surfaces for the
propodial elements of the fore- and hindlimb of early tetrapods. The ventral surface of the
‘primitive’ tetrapod humerus, as described by Romer, is broadly equivalent to the anterior
surface of the dinosaurian (or mammalian) humerus, but the ventral surface of the
‘primitive’ tetrapod femur is equivalent to the posterior of the dinosaurian femur. This
difference is a result of the flexural differences between the fore- (at the elbow and wrist)
and hind- (knee and ankle) limb. This disagreement represents a fundamental problem in
attempting to employ a consistent terminology for limb orientation.
In the works cited above, Romer was not concerned with the epipodials or the
carpal/tarsal elements. Rewcastle (1980) approached this problem, with respect to the
hindlimb of extant lizards, by standardizing a terminology to a fully, anteriorly extended
limb. Rewcastle’s study concerned the hindlimb only, and did not have to confront the
problems concerned with translating this same reasoning to the forelimb.
Although the differences in flexure mean that some disagreement must remain
between the fore- and hindlimb terminology, the main objective is to be explicit about the
terminology used. With respect to the hindlimb, I follow Rewcastle’s (1980; see also
Gower 1996) terminology, but with the forelimb I attempt to apply some of Rewcastle’s
reasoning as well as following Romer’s traditional definition of dorsal and ventral. Thus
the long axes of all the limb bones are parallel to the long axis of the body in lateral view.
The ‘standard’ posture of the forelimb is with the radius, ulna, carpus, and manus fully
anteriorly extended, but the humerus fully posteriorly extended. The dorsal and ventral
surfaces of the epipodials and manus/pes can, of course, be termed extensor and flexor
surfaces respectively. Although explicit in its definition, it is realized that this
terminology is far from perfect, and that a ‘standard’ posture is ‘somewhat arbitrary’
anyway (Rewcastle 1980).
Pectoral girdle and limb
The only elements of the pectoral girdle of Erythrosuchus africanus that are currently
known are the scapula and coracoid. The slightly incomplete scapula of the type
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
56
‘COSEU HNING JO ploseto9
JO] JO SMOIA [eIPSU pue [e19eT “g{ BZ7OLEU HNING JO B[ndeos 1YS11 JO SMOIA [VIPSW puK [eIOWeT] “VY ‘a[pPIIS [e10}O0d ‘snuvoiufp snyansosyjAsgq
6¢ SINS
OS's
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM D7,
specimen, SAM—905, was briefly described by Broom (1906). Only worn fragments are
preserved as part of BMNH R3592 (not described by Huene 1911), and there are two
incomplete and crushed examples preserved as part of SAM-—3028. The best specimen is a
well-preserved and complete right-side example—BMNH R3762a (Fig. 29A)—that is
shorter and more slender than that of the holotype.
The scapula (Fig. 29A) is tall, fairly slender, and much larger than the coracoid. The
long axis of the element is bowed so that the lateral surface is convex and the medial
surface concave. The anterior margin, when viewed laterally, is concave, whereas the
posterodorsal margin is neither strongly posteriorly directed nor tapering. The overall
outline of the scapula therefore resembles that of later archosaurs, and is the converse of
that seen in archosauromorphs more distant from the crown, such as Proterosuchus
(Cruickshank 1972) and Prolacerta broomi (Gow 1975).
The anterior margin of the scapula blade is thin, apart from a prominent anterolateral
process at the distal end. This might be termed the acromion process although there is no
direct evidence that its function was the support of a clavicle. Close to where the scapula
narrows to a ‘waist’, the posterior edge of the medial surface bears a thin, vertical ridge—
possibly associated with the origin of the m. subcoracoscapularis. A low ridge positioned
slightly distal to this, and close to the anterior margin, borders a shallow depression that
opens out on to the dramatically expanded distal end of the scapula.
The coracoid (Fig. 29B) is a remarkably small element compared with the scapula. The
anterior of the coracoid is thin and plate-like, but the posterior edges, particularly dorsally,
are greatly thickened—up to 4.5 times as thick as the anterior edge in BMNH R3592.
These edges are also highly rugose. The dorsally expanded area represents the ventral
surface of the glenoid fossa, which is quite different from that of Proterosuchus
(Cruickshank 1972) in being an essentially simple and posteriorly open notch—although
the socket in life may have been shaped largely by cartilage. The foramen for the passage
of the supracoracoid nerve is entirely within the coracoid.
The humerus (Fig. 30) is a short robust bone. The strongly expanded proximal and
distal ends are joined by a short, cylindrical shaft. The angle between the long axes of the
two end surfaces is approximately 30° in SAM—905S.
The ventral surface of the proximal end is dominated by a large deltopectoral crest. In the
largest specimens (SAM—905, BMNH R3592), the crest is almost rectangular in lateral
view and extends to almost halfway down the shaft. In smaller specimens (BMNH R3762,
SAM-—PK-K 10025), the crest is a less angular and less prominent feature, and the shaft is
more slender. In BMNH R3592, a rugosity on the lateral surface of the base of the
deltopectoral crest is interpreted as part of the area of insertion of the deltoid musculature.
The slightly concave and rugose surface of the distal end suggests that the capitellum
and trochlea were largely cartilaginous features in life. The supinator process is well
developed and its ventrolateral edge continues up on to the base of the deltopectoral crest
as a low supinator ridge. The dorsal edge of the supinator process forms the ventral border
of a deep ectepicondylar groove for the radial nerve and blood vessels.
The radius (Fig. 31A) of Erythrosuchus africanus is known only from a single,
complete example from the right side of SAM—905. The area of the proximal surface is
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
iy
‘Q]BOS OURS 0} 10U *76SEM HNWA
JO SHIOUINY JYSII JO SOUT[INO ISIOASUBI} JO SMOIA [BUNTXOLY “| SOG-IN'VS JO SNISUINY JYSLI JO MATA [eINIVT “G “SO6-INYVS JO Stuswny 13
JO MOTA [BNUIA “D “SO6-INVS JO SHIOUINY JYSIIJO MOIA [VIPS “G “SO6-INVS JO SHAOUINY JYSII JO MIA [esIog “y ‘snuvaLdf{d snyonsosyjAl
O¢ UNS
59
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM
"SMOIA [PB
WIxOId 91v SOUTINO OSIOASUB], “SMOTA [BUDA pur "]eIpoUl ‘Ies1op “Od
‘SMOIA [BIJUDA PUL “[RIPSU ‘dsJOASURI} ‘TeSIOP “[esoye] UL snipe WS “V “SO6-NVS JO
[¢ oNsIy
SIOASUBI} ‘[RIO}L] Ul BUTN WYSrY “_
sjeipodida quitjo1oy ‘snupoiifp SNYINSOAYJAAT
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
60
7T6SEU HNN JO [edieovjour ypanoy yYys11
JO MOIA [eSIOC] “cD ‘s[edivovJOU 19] INOJ JSALJ JO MOIA [SIO] “| “SMITA OM} Ul Z6SEU HNINA JO [edeo o]qissog “y ‘snupotdfy snyonsodysAdgy]
TE ANSI
spine
pirat te
se
Pro Say
woo
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 61
much smaller, and the distal end larger, than the corresponding ends of the ulna. The
dorsal surface bears two clear ridges, possibly representing areas of muscle attachment.
The ulna (Fig. 31B) is slightly longer and more heavily built than the radius. As with
the radius, the only complete example is from the right forelimb of SAM—905. The
proximal articular surface is terminal and there is no ossified olecranon process above it.
The surface is rugose, concave, and sub-triangular in shape. The shaft is essentially oval in
cross-section and apart from a low medial ridge, and a less prominent lateral ridge, it is
relatively featureless. The lateral surface of the distal end is roughened and slightly raised.
The carpus and manus of Erythrosuchus africanus, as in many early archosaurs, is very
poorly known. A small spherical bone not belonging to the tarsus is among the material
belonging to BMNH R3592 (Fig. 32A). Its surface is poorly ossified apart from a saddle-
shaped area of roughened compacta. It is here tentatively identified as a carpal element.
As with the carpus, the only information on the rest of the manus of Erythrosuchus
africanus comes from BMNH R3592. There are elements of what are probably two
individuals of clearly different sizes. These probably correspond to the two individuals
represented by the two different size categories of vertebral material catalogued under the
same number. Belonging to the larger size category, and probably belonging to the
individual represented by the vast majority of specimen BMNH R3592, are the first four
left metacarpals (third and fourth incomplete) and the fourth right metacarpal (Fig. 32B, C).
Belonging to the smaller individual are the first three left metacarpals (third incomplete),
the proximal end of the second left metacarpal, and a single phalanx, probably from the
first digit. At least the left carpal material of the larger individual was originally
catalogued as part of DMSW R525. All of the metacarpals show torsion along their length
and the proximal ends are closely overlapping. Of the four metacarpals known, the first is
the shortest followed by the second, with the third being marginally shorter than the
fourth. Nothing is known of either the fifth metacarpal or of the phalangeal formula. The
larger metacarpals, particularly the proximal surfaces, are similar in size to the metatarsals
of the same specimen.
Pelvic girdle and limb
The pelvic girdle (Fig. 33) resembles that of other early archosaurs in having a short
pubis and ischium, and a closed acetabulum. All of the articular surfaces between the
girdle elements are rugose. The anterior extension of the crest of the ilium (Fig. 33A) is
not strongly developed (and becomes less obvious in larger specimens), but here it is at its
thickest, bears heavy dorsal striations, and was probably the area of m. iliofemoralis and
m. iliotibialis attachment. Ventrally, the medial edge of the crest is thickened, and the
dorsal edge remains narrow. The downturned sacral ribs and prominent supra-acetabular
crest combine to present a ventrolaterally directed acetabular socket.
The medial surface of the ilium bears the large, shallow, and sculptured depression that
receives the head of the first sacral rib. The depression for the second sacral rib is smaller
and extends for a short distance on to the anteroventral part of the base of the iliac crest.
The two depressions, separated by a low, vertical ridge, closely match the lateral surfaces
of the two sacral ribs.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
“siqnd JO SMOIA [eIpou
pue ‘[esioposoque ‘e198 “_ “UNIT JO SMOTA [eIPSU pur [eloeT “VW “76SEC HNN JO s}uowoye o[psis otajod yYys1I ‘snupatafo snyonsosysAuq
d ® VEE oinsIy
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 63
The pubis (Fig. 33B) forms the rather weak anteroventral border of the acetabulum.
The surface for articulation with the ilitum is greatly expanded to form a broad, triangular
area. This is much larger than the corresponding surface on the ilium and the excess forms
a rugose anteroventral acetabular border. The head of the pubis remains roughened and
raised in front of the anterior margin of the acetabulum, and this probably represents the
site of the m. ambiens origin.
The remainder of the pubis is composed of two confluent and flattened plates of bone.
One projects medially, in a horizontal plane from the head of the pubis, and the other is
oriented almost at a right angle to the first to form the short, downturned part of the pubis.
An oval-shaped obturator foramen is positioned close to the posterior edge and just medial
to the head of the pubis. The downturned plate has a greatly thickened and cylindrical
lateral edge that ends abruptly in a roughened surface.
The anterodorsal part of the ischium (Fig. 33C) is expanded to form the posteroventral
border of the acetabulum. The remainder of the element consists of a broad,
dorsomedially-ventrolaterally flattened, and slightly ventrally concave plate. A number of
ridges towards the posteromedial margin of the dorsal surface of the ischium might have
been associated with the origin of the m. ischiotrochantericus. The reconstructed angle
between the dorsal surfaces of the ischia when articulated is estimated to be
approximately 115° anteriorly and 45° posteriorly.
The femur (Fig. 34) of Erythrosuchus africanus is considerably longer than the
humerus—in BMNH R35972 the ossified part of the femur is approximately 1.25 times as
long as the estimated ossified part of the humerus. The proximal and distal articular ends
are terminal and their faces are approximately perpendicular to the long axis of the shaft.
Both end surfaces are rugose, concave, and bear a central longitudinal groove—
suggesting that substantial cartilaginous caps would have formed the finished articulatory
surfaces. The proximal and distal ends are slightly up- (dorsally) and down- (ventrally)
turned respectively, although to a lesser degree than is seen in, for example, Prolacerta
broomi (Gow 1975) and proterosuchids (personal observation). The shaft is robust and
shows some degree of torsion, with the long axis of the distal articulatory surface offset at an
angle of approximately 25° to the long axis of the proximal surface. The femur is not as
straight as in Proterosuchus (Cruickshank 1972; personal observation) when viewed
dorsally or ventrally, with the proximal end clearly deviating from the long axis of the shaft.
On the ventral surface of the proximal end there is a large and well-defined
intertrochanteric (adductor) fossa. Bordering this medially, and lying a short distance
away from the proximal terminus of the femur, is a prominent flange-like trochanter. This
was probably an insertion site for at least part of the caudifemoral musculature, based on
comparisons with extant lizards (Snyder 1954; Walker 1977) and crocodilians (Romer
1923; Walker 1977). The proximolateral surface of the trochanter, together with the fossa,
are interpreted as a probable insertion site of the m. puboischiofemoralis externus.
Extending diagonally from the distal end of the trochanter towards the lateral edge of the
distal end is a well-defined ridge (adductor crest) for the m. adductor femoralis.
The edge of the femur lateral to the intertrochanteric fossa is narrow proximally. It
broadens out abruptly at a point level with the distal termination of the intertrochanteric
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
64
“UINIYOSI JO SMOIA [VIPAWIOSIOP puR [e1O}e]ONUDA ‘<C °
T6SEN HNWA JO S}uoWs[9 o[pIIs OTAlod JYSII ‘snuvoIAf{o SnYINSOAYJAAT
OEE ONS
65
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM
“MOTA [BIO}V'T] °C “MOIA [e.QUO A,
y's
“MOTIA [LUUTXOId UI SOUTTINO dSIOASUBIL “|
“J “MOIA [RIPSA “‘G “MOIA [RSIOG “VW "T6SEU HNINE JO ANwU9y YS ‘snudIIA{D SNYINSOAY]
pe ons
dod
raya)
eu
oy
wu 0g
Aq
66
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
40 mm
feats
Figure 35A,B&C
C. Proximal part of right side in lateral view.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 67
fossa, and forms an oval-shaped, dorsolateral swelling that extends distally to a point just
beyond one-third down the length of the shaft. This was identified as the trochanter major
by Gregory & Camp (1918, fig. 11), but Parrish (1992, fig. 2) considered it to be a fourth
trochanter. When the various trochanters are considered in terms of probable muscle
attachment sites, the identification of this as a fourth trochanter seems extremely doubtful.
The fourth trochanter of more derived archosaurs is a ventral feature positioned a
significant distance from the proximal end and, like at least part of the internal trochanter
of non-archosaurian diapsids, is a site for the insertion of caudifemoral musculature.
Whatever the name applied to this prominence, it seems a much more satisfactory
interpretation that this area, in Erythrosuchus africanus, was for the attachment of the
m. iliofemoralis and not the m. caudifemoralis, particularly when one considers the
actions that these muscles perform.
The ventral surface of the distal end of the femur is dominated by a large popliteal
space that, together with a wide. groove on the ventrolateral edge, extends about one-
quarter of the way up the femoral shaft. The dorsal surface of the femur is less contoured
(Fig. 34A). The dorsal part of the trochanter for the m. iliofemoralis can be seen on the
proximoposterior edge, and just proximal to this is a further scar that perhaps is the
insertion site of the m. ischiotrochantericus. Distally, there is a shallow and broad
intercondylar groove for the extensor tendon of the m. quadriceps femoris.
No complete tibia (Fig. 35) is known, but knowledge has been gathered from various
incomplete specimens representing proximal (BMNH R3592, left and right) and distal
(BMNH R3592, left and BPI 2096, right) ends. Huene (1911) interpreted the proximal
sections of the right tibia and fibula of BMNH R3592 (Fig. 35A—C) as distal ends. The
tibia is considerably shorter than the femur—an estimated 72 per cent of the length of the
femur in BMNH R3592. Approximately one-third down the length of the tibia the shaft is
cylindrical and at its narrowest. At this point and on the medial edge, there is a deep and well-
defined pit that is interpreted as a likely area for the insertion of the m. puboischiotibialis.
The shaft remains cylindrical and straight for the middle third of the tibia. At this
midpoint, at least, the shaft of the tibia is like that of the other limb bones for which clean
broken sections are available, in that it has a hollow core surrounded by a thin region of
cancellous bone. The gradual distal expansion of the tibia curves laterally towards the
fibula. A roughened area of bone and an adjacent low ridge on the dorsolateral surface of
the distal end might be the attachment site of a muscle lying between the hindlimb
epipodials. There is a similar, but more diffuse scar on the medial edge of the tibia. The
distal end of the tibia is almost circular in shape, and the surface is concave and weakly
ossified (Cruickshank 1978). Examination of the lateral surface of the distal end of the
tibia of BMNH R3592 supports Cruickshank’s (1978) suggestion that the ‘lateral process’
present in BPI 2096 is an artefact of preservation.
As with the tibia, there is no complete fibula (Fig. 35) currently known for
Erythrosuchus africanus. However, examination of various incomplete examples allows
a description of the whole element to be presented. These are BMNH R3592 (right
proximal), BMNH R3592 (formerly DMSW R525, left distal), and BPI 2096 (right
distal). In all cases these fibulae are clearly associated with the corresponding tibiae.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
68
‘f) 0} F soruedurosor seq 9]eds JaMoy ‘q 0} W sorueduIOsoR
qeq a[eos Joddy “ejnqy yo] Jo wed [eysIp Jo sMoIA yeuxosd pue JesIog ‘DH ‘e[nqy yo] Jo wed jeistp Jo smarA [e1sIp pue yenusA “4
“MOIA [BSIOP UI BIQH 19] JO Wed [esi] “| “MATA [erpour UI vIqQH yo] Jo ed [eUNIXOIg ‘ “Z6SEUY HNWA JO sso ‘snuparufo snyonsolyjasg
D # 4 “da ‘ase ounsiy
30 mm
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 69
The fibula is much more slender than the tibia, and the long axes of the proximal and
distal ends are approximately perpendicular to one another. The proximal limit of a
roughened and prominent scar for the m. iliofibularis is positioned about one-third of the
distance along the dorsolateral edge. This scar extends distally to a point just below
half-way down the shaft—by which point it has shifted to a dorsal position. A low but
well-defined ridge, distal to the m. iliofibularis scar and on the medial edge of the fibula, is
here interpreted as the possible fibular point of attachment of a muscle situated between
the fibula and tibia, possibly the m. interosseous cruris. An additional muscle scar forms
an unroughened, step-like ridge on the ventral surface of the fibula. The distal end surface
is oval in shape, gently concave, and covered in only a very thin veneer of compact bone
(as was possibly the proximal end before preservation/preparation). It is a little larger in
area than the proximal end.
The tarsus and pes have been described, at least in part, by Huene (1915, 1920),
Hughes (1963), Cruickshank (1978), and Brinkman (1981). Parrish (1992: 100)
questioned the referral of the tarsal material to Erythrosuchus, but Gower (1996)
supported the original identifications and presented a detailed redescription of the known
material.
GASTRALIA
The gastralia are poorly known but some examples are represented in three small
blocks of matrix belonging to BMNH R3592. These gastralia were not described by
Huene (1911), but are here interpreted as belonging to Erythrosuchus africanus. The best
of these examples consists of fragments of some 12 exposed, and additional unprepared,
abdominal ribs. The fragments are gently curved and slightly flattened hollow rods with
oval cross-sections. The cross-sections measure between 5 and 10 mm by between 4 and
6 mm and show an outer layer of solid bone surrounding a central area of more cancellous
bone. Nothing is currently known of the arrangement or extent of the gastralia.
OSTEODERMS
Osteoderms (= dermal armour/ossifications, scutes) are not generally thought to have
been present in the earliest archosaurs, but are instead currently considered to be a
synapomorphy of the more derived group Euparkeria+Proterochampsidae+crown-group
archosaurs (e.g. Benton & Clark 1988; Sereno 1991). Three specimens of Erythrosuchus
africanus suggest, however, that osteoderms have a wider distribution among archosaurs.
In his description of the holotype SAM-—905, Broom (1906) briefly mentioned an
element that he believed to be an unpitted dermal ossification (see also footnote in Charig
& Reig 1970: 133). A re-examination of this material has unfortunately failed to identify
which element Broom was referring to. Juul (1994: 6) reported the presence of rounded
osteoderms in BPI 5207, but that ‘the arrangement of these is uncertain’. The presence of
osteoderms in BPI 5207 was not noted during examination of that specimen in the course
of this study. The third specimen is BMNH R3592, which includes two possible
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
15 mm
Figure 36
Erythrosuchus africanus, isolated osteoderm of BMNH R3592 in presumably outer and inner views.
osteoderms, neither of which was mentioned by Huene (1911). The first example, shown
in Figure 36 and not closely associated with any other element, is undoubtedly an
osteoderm. It is nearly circular and strongly flattened, with a pitted and well-ossified,
presumably outer surface, and a less completely finished inner surface. A small transverse
break reveals a cancellous interior with three internal canals extending parallel to the long
axis of the element (presumably also the long axis in life position). The second
BMNH R3592 example is closely associated with the caudal vertebrae (Fig. 27B). It is not
resting above a neural spine, but is instead preserved attached to the left lateral surface of
the sixteenth caudal vertebra. It is oval-shaped and has a strongly concave, presumably
outer surface, and a less concave inner surface. This more poorly preserved example
shows no indication of pitting on the outer surface, but it 1s also interpreted here as an
osteoderm. There is no evidence of any non-Erythrosuchus archosaur material being
collected with BMNH R3592.
Despite these possible examples of osteoderms, stronger evidence for their presence in
Erythrosuchus africanus 1s clearly required. The two described examples were not found
in life position nor do they exhibit a consistent morphology, not that one should
necessarily be expected. Very few specimens of E. africanus preserving articulated
postcranial material have been collected. The absence of intercentra (that were certainly
present in life) in the more complete postcranial specimens suggests that the lack of
osteoderms should not necessarily be taken as evidence of absence. An extensive set of
osteoderms are preserved in close association with the recently discovered erythrosuchid
skeleton (Pickford 1995) from the Omingonde Formation of Namibia (M. Kotzé, personal
communication 1999).
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 71
IMPLICATIONS
SKELETAL RECONSTRUCTION
A diagrammatic reconstruction of the skeleton of Erythrosuchus africanus is presented
in Figure 37. This is based largely on the specimens SAM-—905, BPI 5207, and
BMNH R3592. It represents the approximate proportions of the whole animal, and should
not be taken as a statement on locomotion or gait in the absence of a detailed functional
study. The skeletal reconstruction by Huene (1911) looks ungainly with an excessively
large skull, but the proportions he presented are approximately correct according to this
revision. Based on BMNH R3592, the estimated total body length is just over 4 metres.
Some incomplete specimens suggest a maximum size greater than this. Preserved among
the BMNH R3592 material is a fragment of a dorsal neural arch that measures 140 mm
between the tips of the anterior and posterior zygapophyses, and with a neural spine some
85 mm long at its base—an estimated total body length of 4.75—5 m, based on
extrapolation of proportions of the individual represented by the bulk of BMNH R3592.
}
yt
SN eee
fk ny it <2 Re,
sldathsBOP™ a ata VES
H
H
na
\
a
w,
Cy
y
iy
H
%
Figure 37
Erythrosuchus africanus, restoration of whole skeleton in left lateral view. Excepting the carpals, all
unknown elements (several vertebrae, interclavicle, clavicles, and manual phalanges) have been
completely restored. This figure is intended to show the relative proportions of a skeleton approximately
the size of BMNH R3592 (total length 4 m+), and should not be taken as a statement on limb mechanics
or gait.
CRANIAL AND MANDIBULAR KINESIS
Although some of the cranial (including the braincase—Gower 1997) and mandibular
elements have features that suggest that they formed movable joints with other elements
in life, the available evidence is interpreted as showing that the skull and mandible were
not kinetic to any notable extent. For example, the dorsal surfaces of the laterosphenoids
are rounded (Gower 1997) and these articulate with depressions on the ventral surface of
the skull roof that are larger than the laterosphenoids, but these joints could not have been
72 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
movable in the adult skull because the interdigitating frontal-parietal suture indicates that
it was a stiff structure in this region, and the braincase is otherwise in close contact with
the parietal. Similarly, the rounded head of the quadrate could not have rotated within the
squamosal depression in which it lies because the squamosal-quadratojugal and
quadratojugal-quadrate junctions seem to have been fairly firm. The premaxilla was not
firmly sutured to any element, but movement of this element in isolation was probably
limited, at most, to some sliding along the long axis of the premaxillary peg that articulates
with the pit on the anterior margin of the maxilla. The mandibular symphysis was not an
osteologically specialized region and some relative movement between the jaw rami may
have been possible, but the interlocking of the three dentary posterior processes with the
posterior elements of the mandible would have clearly limited movement from occurring
within each individual ramus.
The presence of potentially movable articulations between elements in an essentially
akinetic skull and mandible has also been noted in the rauisuchian Batrachotomus
kupferzellensis (Gower, 1999). This pattern of joint may have been important in allowing
minor, passive movement within the functioning adult skull (e.g. in transmitting forces
encountered during feeding), may have been a remnant from a more kinetic juvenile skull,
or is perhaps largely misleading in terms of movement in life.
TAXONOMY
Despite the relative wealth of erythrosuchid material that has been collected from the
Cynognathus Assemblage Zone of South Africa, it has never been suggested that the
material represents more than one species. This is in marked contrast to the South African
proterosuchid archosaur material from the Lystrosaurus Assemblage Zone, which has
been the subject of much taxonomic debate (see Charig & Reig 1970; Cruickshank 1972;
Welman & Flemming 1993; Welman 1998). The difference probably lies in the fact that
debates about the proterosuchid material has centred on a series of variably sized,
essentially complete, and fully articulated skulls—only two of which are known for
Erythrosuchus. The detailed re-examination of the South African erythrosuchid material
that formed the basis of the redescription of Erythrosuchus presented here, has also
allowed an assessment of the possibility that the material represents more than one
species.
A number of small variations in morphology have already been noted in the above
description. Some of these can probably be explained as ontogenetic or individual
variation, such as the shape and relative size of the deltopectoral crest, the slenderness of
the scapula, and the anterior projection of the dorsal iliac crest. The lower ratio between
the height and length, and the more circular articular surfaces of the cervical centra in
specimens (BPI 4680, SAM-—3028) from individuals that are smaller than BMNH R3592
is another possible example of growth-related changes in morphology. Other, possibly
non-growth related variations present more of a problem in that they are seen in
incomplete specimens that preclude detailed comparisons. For example, slight differences
exist among the skull roofs of BMNH R3592, BPI 5207, NM QS1473, and
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 73
GHG AK82-—22 and among the maxillae of BMNH R3592, BPI 4680, 2529, 4540, and
SAM-K1098, but two of the skull roofs and three of the maxillae represent all that is
known of these particular specimens.
The main variations that can not be clearly correlated with growth are noted here:
postfrontal excluded from orbit on ventral surface by frontal-postorbital contact (clearly
seen in NM QS1473, but probably absent in BMNH R3592); depression on underside of
skull roof surrounding dorsal orbit border (present in BMNH R3592; absent in
NM QS1473); posteromedial edge of dorsal surface of postfrontals (angular in
BMNH R3592 and BPI 5207; more curved in NM QS1473); dorsal frontal-parietal suture
(straight in BPI 5207; curved in NM QS1473); shape of antorbital fenestra (generally
oval, but possibly more circular in BPI 3893); maxillary projection notching the border of
the antorbital fenestra (only seen in BMNH R3592 and possibly SAM—K 1098); maxillary
dorsomedial pit(s) (see description above); position of internal carotid foramina on
basisphenoid (close to the midline in BMNH R3592; further apart in UMCZ T700—
Gower 1997).
All of these differences are slight, and covariance can not yet be studied. I support
Parrish (1992) in his recommendation that it is most prudent to currently retain all of this
material in a single species. As more complete material is collected and prepared,
allowing extensive comparisons between specimens, this may need to be revised. More
specimens might eventually make a quantitative assessment of the material worthwhile. A
future move to distinguish multiple species would probably present problems in that the
holotype (SAM-—905) of Erythrosuchus africanus consists of postcranial material only.
Cranial remains are currently assigned to E. africanus on the basis of their similarity to
specimens such as BMNH R3592 that consist of skull material plus postcranial remains
that resemble those of SAM-—905.
Tatarinov (1961) referred the Russian species Vjushkovia triplicostata and Garjainia
prima to Erythrosuchus, an assignment rejected by some subsequent taxonomic
assessments of early archosaurs (e.g. Charig & Reig 1970; Charig & Sues 1976; Sennikov
1995) and here. Another species of Erythrosuchus from Russia has since been described
by Ochev (1980) as E. magnus. Sennikov (1995) subsequently transferred this species to
the new genus Uralosaurus. The material consists of a pterygoid, an incomplete dentary,
and a few isolated teeth and incomplete vertebrae (see Gower & Sennikov 2000). Ochev
partly based his referral of this material to Erythrosuchus on similarities to the Russian
Vjushkovia triplicostata and Garjainia prima—accepting Tatarinov’s synonymy of these
genera with the South African Erythrosuchus (rejected here). A re-examination of the
material in question shows it to be similar to those elements of known erythrosuchids with
some slight differences (e.g. more curved dentary with low tooth count). The vertebral
centra are as tall or taller than they are long and clearly bevelled ventral edges, probably
for articulation with intercentra, can be seen on at least the anterior cervical example. This
material possibly represents an erythrosuchid distinct from those already known from
Russia and South Africa, but it is very incomplete, poorly known, and the association of
the separate specimens is uncertain.
Based on current knowledge of early archosaur osteology, there is no convincing
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
intrinsic evidence for the presence of more than one species of Erythrosuchus. To date,
specimens of Erythrosuchus have not been found outside South Africa. The discovery in
Namibia of a partial skeleton with skull and mandible of a ‘proterosuchian cf.
Erythrosuchus africanus’ (Pickford 1995: 60) represents the first possible exception to
this. This is perhaps the most complete skeleton of an erythrosuchid yet collected, and it
will probably prove to be very important whether or not it represents EF. africanus. Study
of this material is now underway (M. Kotzé and R. M. H. Smith, personal communication
S12),
PHYLOGENY
In recent times (at least since Charig & Reig 1970), Erythrosuchus has consistently
been recognized as a member of the Erythrosuchidae—a clade including other Lower to
Middle Triassic archosaur taxa such as Shansisuchus from China and Garjainia prima
from Russia. Cladistic analyses have also reached a consensus that the Erythrosuchidae lie
outside the archosaurian crown group (Gower & Wilkinson 1996; Bennett 1996), but
there have been very few explicit phylogenetic considerations of the internal relationships
among erythrosuchids. Parrish (1992) conducted the first study and hypothesized that,
within the Erythrosuchidae, Erythrosuchus is more closely related than is Garjainia
prima to a clade composed of Shansisuchus+Vjushkovia (V. triplicostata+V. sinensis).
Gower & Sennikov (19966, 1997) did not consider V. sinensis or G. prima, but they
presented evidence supporting an alternative hypothesis in which Shansisuchus is more
closely related to E. africanus than it 1s to V. triplicostata. Gower & Sennikov (2000) have
since presented evidence that V. triplicostata should be considered a junior synonym of
G. prima.
A major proportion of Gower & Sennikov’s (19966, 1997) phylogenetic data came
from the braincase. This current study includes further support for the hypothesis that
Shansisuchus and Erythrosuchus africanus share a more recent common anestor with
each other than either taxon does with Garjainia prima (= Vjushkovia triplicostata). For
example, the Chinese and South African taxa share a premaxillary ‘peg’ that articulates
with a maxillary ‘socket’, a pleat/tuck on the posterior surface of the ventral process of the
squamosal, a short and low retroarticular process, and a quadratojugal that is nearly
excluded from the border of the lower temporal fenestra (Young 1964; Cheng 1980;
personal observation)—derived features absent in G. prima (personal observation).
Understanding of erythrosuchid interrelationships remains at a preliminary stage, and
several taxa have yet to be considered in explicit phylogenetic analyses: for example,
Guchengosuchus shiguaiensis Peng, 1991 and Chalishevia cothurnata Ochev, 1980. The
affinity of Vjushkovia (= Youngosuchus Sennikov in Kalandadze & Sennikov, 1985)
sinensis is currently in doubt, and Sennikov (in Kalandadze & Sennikov 1985) has
suggested that it is a rauisuchian rather than an erythrosuchid.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM Ts
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to thank those people who provided useful information, encouragement,
discussion and advice, including Mike Benton, Arthur Cruickshank, Peter Forey, Chris
Gow, Barry Hughes, Dave Norman, Andrei Sennikov, Dave Unwin, Alick Walker, Larry
Witmer and an anonymous reviewer. I am grateful to Jo-Anne Friedlander for labelling
the figures and for final editorial touches. Staff at a number of institutions are thanked for
providing hospitality as well as invaluable assistance with material: in particular Sandra
Chapman and Cyril Walker (BMNH); Bruce Rubidge and colleagues (BPI); Johann
Welman (NM); Clive Booth, Anusuya Chinsamy, Sheena Kaal, Gillian King, and Roger
Smith (SAM); and Jenny Clack and Ray Symonds (UMCZ). Parts of this work were
funded by a NERC Ph.D. studentship (supervised by Mike Benton) and NERC grant
G9/1569.
REFERENCES
ANDERSON, J. M., & CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1978. The biostratigraphy of the Permian and
Triassic. Part 5. A review of the classification and distribution of Permo-Triassic tetrapods.
Palaeontologia africana 21: 15-44.
BAUMEL, J.J. & WITMER, L. M. 1993. Osteologia. Jn: BAUMEL, J. J., KING, A. S., BREAZILE, J. E.,
EVANS, H. E. & VANDEN BERGE, J. C. eds. Handbook of Avian Anatomy: Nomina Anatomica
Avium: 45—132. Cambridge: Nuttall Ornithological Society.
BENNETT, S. C. 1996. The phylogenetic position of the Pterosauria within the Archosauromorpha.
Zoological Journal of the Linnean Society 118: 261-308.
BENTON, M. J. 1985. Classification and phylogeny of the diapsid reptiles. Zoological Journal of the
Linnean Society 84: 97-164.
BENTON, M. J. 1999. Scleromochlus taylori and the origin of dinosaurs and pterosaurs. Philosophical
Transactions of the Royal Society of London (B) 354: 1423-1446.
BENTON, M. J. & CLARK, J. M. 1988. Archosaur phylogeny and the relationships of the Crocodylia.
In: BENTON, M. J. ed. The Phylogeny and Classification of the Tetrapods: 295-338. Oxford:
Clarendon Press.
BRINK, A. S. 1955. Notes on some thecodonts. Navorsinge van die Nasionale Museum Bloemfontein
1: 141-148.
BRINKMAN, D. 1981. The origin of the crocodiloid tarsi and the interrelationships of thecodontian
archosaurs. Breviora 464: 1—23.
BRITT, B. B. 1994. Pneumatic postcranial bones in dinosaurs and other archosaurs. Journal of
Vertebrate Paleontology 14 (3, suppl.): 18A.
BRITT, B. B., MAKOVICKY, P. J., GAUTHIER, J. & BONDE, N. 1998. Postcranial pneumatization
in Archaeopteryx. Nature 395: 374-376.
BROILI, F. & SCHRODER, J. 1934. Beobachtungen an Wirbeltieren der Karrooformation. V. Uber
Chasmatosaurus vanhoepeni Haughton. Sitzungsberichte der Bayerischen Akademie der
Wissenschaften 1934: 225-264.
BROOM, R. 1905. Notice of some new fossil reptiles from the Karroo beds of South Africa. Records of
the Albany Museum 1: 331-337.
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
BROOM, R. 1906. On the remains of Erythrosuchus africanus, Broom. Annals of the South African
Museum 5: 187-196.
BROOM, R. 1915. Catalogue of types and figured specimens of fossil vertebrates in the American
Museum of Natural History. If Permian, Triassic and Jurassic reptiles of South Africa. Bulletin of the
American Museum of Natural History 25: 105—164.
CHARIG, A. J. 1972. The evolution of the archosaur pelvis and hindlimb: and explanation in functional
terms. In: JOYSEY, K. A. & KEMP, T. S. eds. Studies in Vertebrate Evolution: 121-155.
Edinburgh: Oliver & Boyd.
CHARIG, A. J. & REIG, O. A. 1970. The classification of the Proterosuchia. Biological Journal of the
Linnean Society 2 : 125-171.
CHARIG, A. J. & SUES, H.-D. 1976. Suborder Proterosuchia Broom. /n: KUHN, O. ed. Handbuch der
Palaoherpetologie 13: 11-39. Stuttgart: Gustav Fischer Verlag.
CHENG, Z. W. 1980. Vertebrate fossils. Jn: Mesozoic stratigraphy and paleontology of the
Shan-Gan-Ning Basin 2: 114-171. Beijing: Publishing House of Geology.
CLARK, J.M., WELMAN, J.,. GAUTHIER, J. A. & PARRISH, J. M. 1993. The laterosphenoid bone of
early archosauriforms. Journal of Vertebrate Paleontology 13: 48-57.
COPE, E. D. 1869. Synopsis of the extinct Batrachia, Reptilia and Aves of North America. Transactions
of the American Philosophical Society 14: 1-252.
CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1972. The proterosuchian thecodonts. Jn: JOYSEY, K. A. & KEMP, T. S.
eds. Studies in Vertebrate Evolution: 89-119. Edinburgh: Oliver & Boyd.
CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1978. The pes of Erythrosuchus africanus Broom. Zoological Journal of the
Linnean Society 62: 161-177.
CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1979. The ankle joint in some early archosaurs. South African Journal of
Science 75: 168-178.
EVANS, S. E. 1986. The braincase of Prolacerta broomi (Reptilia: Triassic). Neues Jahrbuch fur
Geologie und Paldontologie, Abhandlungen 173: 181—200.
EWER, R. F. 1965. The anatomy of the thecodont reptile Euparkeria capensis Broom. Philosophical
Transactions of the Royal Society of London (B) 248: 379-435.
GAUTHIER, J. A. 1986. Saurischian monophyly and the origin of birds. Memoirs of the California
Academy of Sciences 8: 1-55.
GOW, C. E. 1975. The morphology and relationships of Youngina capensis Broom and Prolacerta
broomi Parrington. Palaeontologia africana 18: 89-131.
GOWER, D. J. 1996. The tarsus of erythrosuchid archosaurs (Reptilia), and implications for early
diapsid phylogeny. Zoological Journal of the Linnean Society 116: 347-375.
GOWER, D. J. 1997. The braincase of the early archosaur Erythrosuchus. Journal of Zoology, London
242: 557-576.
GOWER, D. J. 1999. The cranial and mandibular osteology of a new rauisuchian archosaur from the
Middle Triassic of southern Germany. Stuttgarter Beitrdge zur Naturkunde (Serie B) 280: 1-49.
GOWER, D. J. 2000. Rauisuchian archosaurs (Reptilia, Diapsida): an overview. Neues Jahrbuch fir
Geologie und Paldaontologie, Abhandlungen 218: 447-488.
GOWER, D. J. 2001. Possible postcranial pneumaticity in the last common ancestor of birds and
crocodilians: evidence from Erythrosuchus and other Mesozoic archosaurs. Naturwissenschaften
88: 119-122
GOWER, D. J. & SENNIKOV, A. G. 1996a. Endocranial casts of early archosaurian reptiles.
Palaontologisches Zeitschrift 70: 579-589.
GOWER, D. J. & SENNIKOV, A. G. 19964. Braincase morphology in early archosaurian reptiles.
Palaeontology 39: 883906.
GOWER, D. J. & SENNIKOV, A. G. 1997. Sarmatosuchus and the early history of the Archosauria.
Journal of Vertebrate Paleontology 17 : 60-73.
GOWER, D. J. & SENNIKOV, A. G. 2000. Early Archosaurs from Russia. Jn: BENTON, M. J.,
KUROCHKIN, E. N., SHISHKIN, M. A. & UNWIN, D. M. eds. The age of dinosaurs in Russia and
Mongolia 140-159. London: Cambridge University Press.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 77
GOWER, D. J. & WILKINSON, M. 1996. Is there any consensus on basal archosaur phylogeny?.
Proceedings of the Royal Society (B) 263: 1399-1406.
GREGORY, W. K. & CAMP, C. L. 1918. Studies in comparative myology and osteology, No. III.
Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History 38: 447-563.
HUENE, F. VON. 1911. Uber Erythrosuchus, Vertreter der neuen Reptil-Ordnung Pelycosimia.
Geologische und Paldontologische Abhandlung 10: 1-60.
HUENE, F. VON. 1915. On reptiles of the New Mexican Trias in the Cope collection. Bulletin of the
American Museum of Natural History 34: 485-507.
HUENE, F. VON. 1920. Osteologie von Aétosaurus ferratus O. Fraas. Acta Zoologica 1: 465-491.
HUENE, F. VON. 1926. Gondwana-Reptilien in Sudamerika. Pal/aeontologia Hungarica 2: 1-108.
HUENE, F. VON. 1938. Stenaulorhynchus, ein Rhynchosauridae der ostafrikanischen Obertrias. Nova
Acta Leopoldina 6: 83-121.
HUENE, F. VON. 1946. Die grossen Stamme der Tetrapoden in den geologischen Zeiten. Biologische
Zentralblatt 65: 268-275.
HUENE, F. VON. 1960. Ein grosser Pseudosuchier aus der Orenburger Trias. Palaeontographica (A)
114: 105-111.
HUGHES, B. 1963. The earliest archosaurian reptiles. South African Journal of Science 59: 221-241.
IORDANSKY, N.N. 1973. The skull of the Crocodilia. In: GANS, C. & PARSONS, T. S. eds. Biology
of the Reptilia 4: 201—262. London: Academic Press.
JENKINS, F. A. 1971. Limb posture and locomotion in the Virginia opossum (Didelphis marsupialis)
and in other non-cursorial mammals. Journal of Zoology, London 165: 303-315.
JUUL, L. 1994. The phylogeny of basal archosaurs. Palaeontologia africana 31: 1-38.
KALANDADZE, N. N. & SENNIKOV, A. G. 1985. [New reptiles from the Middle Triassic of the
southern Cis-Urals.] Paleontologicheskii Zhurnal 1985: 77-84. [In Russian. ]
KITCHING, J. W. 1977. The distribution of the Karoo vertebrate fauna. Memoirs of the Bernard Price
Institute for Palaeontological Research 1: 1-131.
LY DEKKER, R. 1889. On associated remains of a theriodont reptile from the Karoo system of the Cape.
Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1889: 572-577.
LYDEKKER, R. 1890. Catalogue of the fossil Reptilia and Amphibia in the British Museum (Natural
History) Part 4. London: British Museum (Natural History).
MOOK, C. C. 1921. Notes on the postcranial skeleton in the Crocodilia. Bulletin of the American
Museum of Natural History 44: 67-100.
OCHEV, V. G. 1975. [On the proterosuchian palate. |’ Paleontologicheskii Zhurnal 1975: 98-105. [In
Russian. |
OCHEV, V. G. 1980. [New archosaurs from the Middle Triassic of the southern Cis-Urals.]
Paleontologicheskii Zhurnal 1980: 101—107. [In Russian. }
OCHEV, V. G. 1981. [On Erythrosuchus (Garjainia) primus Ochev.] Voprosy Geologii Yuzhnogo
Urala I Povolzh’ya 22: 3—22. [In Russian. ]
OCHEV, V. G. & SHISHKIN, M. A. 1988. Global correlation of the continental Triassic on the basis of
tetrapods. /nternational Geology Review 30: 163-176.
OSBORN, H. F. 1903. The reptilian subclasses Diapsida and Synapsida and the early history of the
Diaptosauria. Memoirs of the American Museum of Natural History 1: 449-507.
PARRISH, J. M. 1991. A new specimen of an early crocodylomorph (cf. Sphenosuchus sp.) from the
Late Triasic Chinle Formation of Petrified Forest National Park, Arizona. Journal of Vertebrate
Paleontology 11: 198-212.
PARRISH, J. M. 1992. Phylogeny of the Erythrosuchidae (Reptilia: Archosauriformes). Journal of
Vertebrate Paleontology 12: 93-102.
PARRISH, J. M. 1993. Phylogeny of the Crocodylotarsi, with reference to archosaurian and crurotarsan
monophyly. Journal of Vertebrate Paleontology 13: 287-308.
PENG, J. 1991. A new genus of Proterosuchia from Lower Triassic of Shaanxi, China. Vertebrata
Palasiatica 29: 95-107.
78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PICKFORD, M. 1995. Karoo Supergroup palaeontology of Namibia and brief description of a
thecodont from Omingonde. Palaeontologia africana 32: 51-66.
REWCASTLE, S. C. 1980. Form and function in lacertilian knee and mesotarsal joints: a contribution to
the analysis of sprawling locomotion. Journal of Zoology, London 191: 147-170.
ROMER, A. S. 1922. The locomotion apparatus of certain primitive and mammal-like reptiles. Bulletin
of the American Museum of Natural History 46: 517-606.
ROMER, A. S. 1923. Crocodilian pelvic muscles and their avian and reptilian homologues. Bulletin of
the American Museum of Natural History 48: 533-552.
ROMER, A. S. 1942. The development of tetrapod limb musculature-the thigh of Lacerta. Journal of
Morphology 71: 251-298.
ROMER, A. S. 1971. The Chanares (Argentina) Triassic reptile fauna. XI. Two new long-snouted
thecodonts, Chanaresuchus and Gualosuchus. Breviora 379: \1—22.
SEELEY, H. G. 1894. On Euskelosaurus brownii (Huxley). Annals and Magazine of Natural History
14: 317-340.
SENNIKOV, A. G. 1995. [Early thecodonts of Eastern Europe.] Trudy Paleontologicheskogo Instituta
RAN 263: 1-141. [In Russian. ]
SERENO, P. C. 1991. Basal archosaurs: phylogenetic relationships and functional implications. Society
of Vertebrate Paleontology Memoir 2: \-53.
SERENO, P. C. & ARCUCCTI, A. B. 1990. The monophyly of crurotarsal archosaurs and the origin of
bird and crocodile ankle joints. Neues Jahrbuch fur Geologie und Palaontologie Abhandlung 180:
21-52.
SERENO, P. C. & NOVAS, F. E. (1993). The skull and neck of the basal theropod Herrerasaurus
ischigualastensis. Journal of Vertebrate Paleontology 13: 451-476.
SERENO, P. C. & WILD, R. (1992). Procompsognathus: theropod, ‘thecodont’ or both? Journal of
Vertebrate Paleontology 12: 435-458.
SHISHKIN, M. A. & OCHEV, V. G. 1995. [Significance of sections of southern Cis-Urals and East
European platform for global correlation of the continental Triassic on the terapods.] Jn:
SHISHKIN, M. A., OCHEV, V. G. & TVERDOKLEBOV, V. P. eds. [Biostratigraphy of the
Triassic of southern Cis-Urals|: 166-184. Moscow: Nauka. [In Russian. |
SHISHKIN, M. A. & WELMAN, J. 1994. A new find of Trematosuchus (Amphibia, Temnospondyl1)
from the Cynognathus zone of South Africa. Palaeontologia africana 31: 39-49.
SHUBIN, N. H. & SUES, H.-D. 1991. Biogeography of early Mesozoic Continental tetrapods: patterns
and implications. Paleobiology 17: 214—230.
SMITH, R. M. H. 1993. Vertebrate taphonomy of late Permian floodplain deposits in the southwestern
Karoo Basin of South Africa. Palaios 8: 45—67.
SNYDER, R. C. 1954. The anatomy and function of the pelvic girdle and hindlimb in lizard locomotion.
American Journal of Anatomy 95: |—46.
SUN, A.-L. 1980. Late Permian and Triassic terrestrial tetrapods of north China. Vertebrata PalAsiatica
18: 100—110. [In Chinese. ]
TATARINOYV, L. P. 1961. Materialy po pseudosukhiyam SSSR. Paleontologicheskii Zhurnal 1961:
117-132. [In Russian. ]
THULBORN, R. A. 1979. A proterosuchian thecodont from the Rewan Formation of Queensland.
Memoirs of Queensland Museum 19: 331-355.
WALKER, A. D. 1961. Triassic reptiles from the Elgin area: Stagonolepis, Dasygnathus and their allies.
Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London (B) 244: 103-204.
WALKER, A. D. 1977. Evolution of the pelvis in birds and dinosaurs. Jn: ANDREW, S. M., MILES, R. S.
& WALKER, A. D. eds. Problems in vertebrate evolution: 319-357. London: Academic Press.
WALKER, A. D. 1990. A revision of Sphenosuchus acutus Haughton, a crocodylomorph reptile from
the Elliot Formation (late Triassic or early Jurassic) of South Africa. Philosophical Transactions of
the Royal Society of London (B) 330: 1-120.
WATSON, D. M.S. 1917. A sketch classification of the Pre-Jurassic tetrapod vertebrates. Proceedings
of the Zoological Society of London 1917: 167-186.
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 79
WELMAN, J. 1998. The taxonomy of the South African proterosuchids (Reptilia, Archosauromorpha).
Journal of Vertebrate Paleontology 18: 340-347.
WELMAN, J. & FLEMMING, A. 1993. Statistical analysis of skulls of Triassic proterosuchids
(Reptilia, Archosauromorpha) from South Africa. Palaeontologia africana 30: 113-123.
WELMAN, J., GROENEWALD, G. H. & KITCHING, J. W. 1991. Confirmation of the occurrence of
Cynognathus zone (Kannemeyeria-Diademodon Assemblage-zone) deposits (uppermost Beaufort
Group) in the northeastern Orange Free State, South Africa. South African Journal of Geology 94:
245-248.
WITMER, L. M. 1997. The evolution of the antorbital cavity of archosaurs: a study in soft-tissue
reconstruction in the fossil record with an analysis of the function of pneumaticity. Society of
Vertebrate Paleontology Memoir 3: |—73.
YOUNG, C. C. 1964. The pseudosuchians in China. Paleontologia Sinica 151: 1-205. [Chinese and
English. |
YOUNG, C. C. 1973. [On the occurrence of Vjushkovia in Sinkiang.] Memoirs of the Institute of
Vertebrate Paleontology and Paleoanthropology, Academia Sinica 10: 38—52. {In Chinese. ]
80
AMNH
BMNH
BPI
DMSW
GHG
IVPP
NM
PIN
RC
SAM
UMCZ
VH
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ABBREVIATIONS
INSTITUTIONS
American Museum of Natural History
Natural History Museum, London
Bernard Price Institute for Palaeontological Research, Johannesburg
D.M.S. Watson Collection
Geological Survey, Pretoria
Institute of Vertebrate Paleontology and Paleoanthropology, Beijing
Nasionale Museum, Bloemfontein
Palaeontological Institute, Moscow
S.H. Rubidge Collection, Wellwood, Graaff Reinet
South African Museum, Cape Town
Cambridge University Museum of Zoology
Vienna Hoffmuseum
MORPHOLOGY
angular
accessory (3rd) rib head
acetabulum
acromion process
adductor crest
adductor fossa
area of origin of m. ambiens
antorbital fossa
anterior process of rib
articular
atlas neural arch
axis vertebra
basioccipital
basisphenoid
coronoid
capitulum
choana
chorda tympani branch of facial nerve, route of
cnemial crest
coracoid
coracoid foramen
surface finished with compacta bone
channel for olfactory tract
cultriform process of parasphenoid
dentary
dorsal part of ......
central posterior process of dentary
dorsal posterior process of dentary
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM
depression
(facet of) diapophysis
deltopectoral crest
ventral posterior process of dentary
epipterygoid
ectopterygoid
ectepicondylar groove
external naris
exoccipital
foramen for medial ethmoidal artery
frontal
fibula
foramen magnum
foramen/foramina
glenoid fossa of shoulder girdle
groove .
haemal arch
intercentrum
intercondylar groove
area of insertion of m. iliofibularis
area of insertion of m. iliofemoralis
infra-Meckelian foramen
intertrochanteric fossa
jugal
lacrimal
lamella
lacrimal foramen
lateral mandibular fenestra
laterosphenoid
maxilla
muscle attachment scar
ascending process of maxilla
Meckelian canal
thin lateral part of maxilla
thick medial part of maxilla
maxillary pit/neurovascular channel
maxillary pit for premaxillary peg
maxillary projection
nasal
nutrient foramina
nasal anteroventral flange
notch
obturator foramen
osteoderm
parietal
palatal process
(facet of) parapophysis
parabasal process
81
8&2
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
postfrontal
pit for attachment of m. puboischiotibialis
pineal fossa
pit
palatine
premaxilla
premaxillary peg
postorbital
popliteal space
paroccipital process
postparietal
prearticular
prefrontal
prefrontal pillar
proatlas
pterygoid ramus of quadrate
pterygoid
parietal tubercle
posteroventral process of parietal
quadrate
quadrate head
quadratojugal
quadrate posterodorsal concavity
quadrate ramus of the pterygoid
right
retroarticular process
rib
surface/area/groove for articulation with ......
surangular
surangular foramen
scapula
supraoccipital
splenial
squamosal
supratemporal fenestra
supinator process
supinator ridge
area of mandibular symphysis
tibia
tubercle
tooth
transverse process
trochanter
‘tuck’ or ‘pleat’ in posterior margin of squamosal
tuberculum
ventral part of ......
tentative identification
metacarpal number
SAM—905
SAM-912
SAM-—978
SAM-1315
SAM-—3028
SAM-3612
SAM-—11330
SAM-—K 1098
SAM-K1118
SAM-—PK-K 10025
BPI 2094
BPI 2096
BPI 2529/322
BPI 2734
BPI 3893
BPI 4526
BPI 4539
BPI 4540
BPI 4553
BPI 4645
BPI 4649
BPI 4680
BPI 5207
GHG 7433MI
GHG AK82-22
NM QS1473
BMNH R533
BMNH R533a
BMNH R533b
BMNH R533c
BMNH R533d
BMNH R533e
BMNH R533f
BMNH R533¢
BMNH R533:
BMNH R533x
BMNH R533?
BMNH R2790
OSTEOLOGY OF ERYTHROSUCHUS AFRICANUS BROOM 83
APPENDIX I
Material of Erythrosuchus africanus
Incomplete postcranial skeleton (holotype).
Incomplete pelvic girdle.
Fragmentary skull material. A non-Erythrosuchus maxilla, probably not part of
the original specimen (different matrix), was also stored under this number.
Single cervical vertebra.
Incomplete postcranial material.
Incomplete braincase.
Skull roof fragments.
Incomplete left maxilla.
Incomplete posterior of skull and epistropheus.
Incomplete postcranial skeleton.
Fragmentary left maxilla.
Right pes, tarsus and distal crus.
Left maxilla.
Jaw fragments.
Virtually complete, largely unprepared skull.
Left premaxilla.
Fragmentary left maxilla.
Left maxilla.
First and fifth left metatarsal.
Posterior part of skull roof and incomplete braincase.
Fourth right metatarsal.
Extensive but incomplete skull, braincase, and postcranial material.
Complete skull.
Small partial skeleton, possibly a juvenile Erythrosuchus.
Incomplete skull roof.
Skull roof.
Two articulated dorsal vertebrae.
Neural arch of dorsal vertebra.
Incomplete dorsal vertebra.
Vertebral fragment.
Incomplete cervical vertebra.
Vertebral fragment.
Three consecutive caudal vertebrae.
Distal fragment of scapula.
Fragments of scapula and distal left femur.
Fragments of lower jaw and ilium.
Distal fragment of ulna.
Incomplete left mandible.
34
BMNH R2791
BMNH R2792
BMNH R2793
BMNH R2794
BMNH R2795
BMNH R2809
BMNH R3592
BMNH R3592a
BMNH R3755
BMNH R3759
BMNH R3762
BMNH R3763
BMNH R3764
BMNH R3776
BMNH R7888
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Single cervical vertebra.
Condylar fragment of left quadrate.
Vertebral fragments.
Dorsal part of quadrate and postcranial fragments.
Incomplete parietal posteroventral process and postcranial fragments.
Cast of left femur and tibia. Originals reportedly in Albany Museum,
Grahamstown, South Africa.
Incomplete, but extensive skull, mandible, and postcranial material of single
individual with at least some metacarpals from second, smaller individual.
Left distal crus, tarsus, and metatarsus (formerly DMSW R525).
Vertebral fragments.
Incomplete postcranial material, mostly vertebral but also proximal end of
eft femur.
‘Good but incomplete postcranial material. The specimen includes a distal
fragment of a humerus and a vertebra (with notochordal centrum) which are
not referable to Erythrosuchus.
Good right scapula and further fragmentary postcranial material.
Left pubis.
Neural arch fragments.
Two incomplete dorsal vertebrae.
Several specimens in the BMNH collection are unnumbered.
(1) Proximal fragment of left tibia, currently together with BMNH R2790, but not mentioned
by Seeley (1894).
(ii) Acervical and sacral vertebra and a sacral rib.
(111) Anterior fragment of iliac crest.
(iv) Complete right ilium.
BMNH R8667
UMCZ T666
UMCZ T675
UMCZ T678
UMCZ T682
UMCZ T700
AMNH 5594
AMNH 5595
AMNH 5596
AMNH 5597
Mid-dorsal vertebrae (formerly part of BMNH R3592)
Right ischium, formerly DMSW R389.
Single sacral rib, formerly DMSW R460.
Two anterior caudal vertebrae, formerly DMSW R488.
Isolated articular, formerly DMSW R520.
Crushed and poorly preserved braincase, formerly DMSW R417.
Incomplete skull roof.
Humeral fragments.
Scapula and coracoid.
Incomplete humerus and tibia.
None of these AMNH specimens were examined for this study.
—E a
— Se
— — ee ~ | emma ae —— _ eat es :
= 2 cy ; s a
. - a all — o Saar immanent tice ee, eee ee a ey — M
D . - z 5 ae eT —— a —— ny
° \ i r , = a ee eae Se ; — t -
— _ gl 5 ————
= - —_ aan deans ascent eS Fee <i =
™* — - I A TS ee ee ~
a = eee =
oO ee cat a Soeetentnetiiieemeennttiieensntined — ——
r nan commoner —< P =
Be ee
A _ {un
=
. 4)
>
7
t
Te
Seti.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 110 Band
August 2003 Augustus
Pantie Decl
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES
FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA
by
MICHAEL ROBERT COOPER
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and review
articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
CES Sy YC IES hen), AC), US, 7-2), GD, ti sot.)
Cy, Se OD, TP), IOC), LGD, 5, T, Caos), WD), 15S),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1—3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 1849
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES
FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA
by
MICHAEL ROBERT COOPER
Department of Geology, University of Durban-Westville,
Durban, KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa
(With 28 figures)
[MS submitted March 1998]
[MS accepted 1998]
ABSTRACT
The ammonite fauna from a condensed Turonian—Lower Coniacian succession is described from Sao
Nicolau in the southern part of the Mocgamédes Desert. Genera represented include Hypophylloceras,
Tetragonites, Gaudryceras, Anagaudryceras, Puebloites, Baculites, Damesites, Mesopuzosia,
Mossamedites, Kossmaticeras, Tongoboryceras?, Placenticeras, Vascoceras, Morrowites, Forresteria,
Prionocyclus, and Prionocycloceras. The species Baculites klingeri 1s new.
CONTENTS
PAGE
MIG Be tl IN eee Reece ees Sie ean RP ME EP Me chins iva nhgiiavecewnseined ted DY ee ie sco ae eae 91
Safe cA 1 stele eee eee een ance eee MAR ee MORE: RAEN ho Si cus cae osicostnnahopuneobtartavonettocqetteeesdMbanae 9]
(DMAMEMSIONG co. oder Gbbseeectehe Sacee see SUUSEERERC Gee EE ODeece teed ce ee ee eee orrteeerrrmamnr rere ee 93
SSS ike MMM CLISL CM [cll cA ON ONO Cay aemete teeta ites eeec- Me ae MM ote La ead he a dha Gc cuUasiaeisncssasadsnesashacMastiate setaguanedspacOeeeembes 93
SUN esteltel Nien lyase MVNO Ceara CAS tM e Seca eee oeate daca aad ta sass sadccuenuecnsns vavesiedadmenthaanesnedaaBbense comets: ye
SUI lod AM CURA OMICACC ACH renee MN Mec MME, cone a aac 8c (sh cdapapilcsuiads adaduacaketere Meer teat tee te Rem tees 96
SUE HMA gO AC CAC: < wre see Ae Ie AM ts, May Me SA MM cocccsscancbbade ap olnceteupetsastias Mace Ssuce 102
SUE Tec ON ys AGUNG AC C aS mere enn Nar ee Gets eee Seis nce coke Nga bt asiecanenianckies’oys seeeMteree ec seyiroasea Re atemece ee 105
SUpPematmily a DESMO CeKAatACea Cessencrmesweeneres on Fete cer tersesey de cee terereseieeS0T 2088 eaaemeyoanmnarels teaeemetemeee. 109
SLOSS ENGIN NG]? WAC ISTE VCE Ss eo a St Be
SUM etal gel OfMtAC CASH een Cena eset wehanlacfudwaneiaccenddianfiteacchiaseaws damecet tere eeecteece nes a. cele eee 119
SUPE Manny; NCAMUMOCEKAtACCAC 4, ett NON AMEN ich cotsissanecouute<oatece oodecteataateant ate aunaac cone Bacon e 121
SupestamnilyaC oll pmomiGehataC Cd 6-ewactteersecronscndossreoseew cow smaveertesewevwetancudevecs teumeaher ey veeeere ose terteee eet 129
PNAC AUTOM MIPS) ONMEING shel UMN Ae scene cane ce cee caanceieBoecsnagnsnooatin sdeadhiessnvnne cna sutceetesecdateessemvessouee trac MBS 138
AC AO WEL RE MUST SOR Ae Ah I Pn ner eerste oor revere eee eet. ee | 139
FR eSCHG IN Ce Spr me AIR ne Me SAT Recs PUTIN Nau SLi ccd Uti son aenagass detdadsaaneaeatenvénnee tale sau caceces inches tat wenreane 139
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 110 (2), 2003: 89-146, 28 figs.
89
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
90
SAO NICOLAU GROUP
PIAMBO CANGULO
FORMATION FORMATION
FORMATION
GIRAUL
CONGLOMERATE
MEMBER
OMBE VOLCANIC
MEMBER
MOCUIO FORMATION
BABA FORMATION
SALINAS FORMATION
PONTE GROSSA
MOCUNGO MEMBER
PONTA NEGRA
MEMBER
n
<<
oO
LL
=
©
eedl
)
za
@)
O
‘e)
oa
LU
aa)
Sate nn atate!
é
ereteratets
'
camédes basin.
5
igraphy of the Mo
Figure |
The Cretaceous lithostrat
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 91
INTRODUCTION
Although diversified Albian and Maastrichtian ammonite assemblages have long been
known from Angola, the mid-Cretaceous faunas are less well understood. Haughton
(1925: 264) reported ‘doubtfully Turonian’ ammonites from the Cuanza basin; these are
in the South African Museum and form part of the same Upper Turonian fauna recorded
subsequently by Basse (1963). Thiele (1933) identified Lower Turonian Mammites
conciliatus (Stoliczka) in faunas from Novo Redondo, but this is a misidentification of the
outer horned whorls of Middle Cenomanian Cunningtoniceras. Haas (1942) figured a
poorly preserved Romaniceras from north of Cabiri in the Cuanza basin, and Hoppener
(1958: 80) recorded Coilopoceras cacobaensis (a nomen nudum) from Tuenza in the
Cuanza basin. Basse (1963) described a badly crushed Late Turonian fauna from Cabo
Ledo, including Subprionocyclus and Puebloites, and Howarth (1968) documented a
mid-Turonian ammonite fauna from Ponta Grossa, just north of the present locality; the
latter fauna includes several of the species recorded here.
Cooper (1973) reported on Middle Cenomanian ammonites from Novo Redondo and,
subsequently, described uppermost Cenomanian—basal Turonian faunas from Salinas
(Cooper 1978a); he also summarized the mid-Cretaceous (Albian—Coniacian) stratigraphy
of Angola, figuring some of the mid-Cretaceous faunas (Cooper 19785). Collignon
(1977) described Kamerunoceras almeidai Collignon, Collignoniceras reali Collignon,
Pseudaspidoceras armatum Pervinquiere, Mammites nodosoides (von Schlotheim) and
Hoplitoides aff. ingens Von Koenen, but without providing stratigraphic or locality data.
The most recent work, by Howarth (1985), documents a Cenomanian—Lower Turonian
fauna from the environs of Novo Redondo.
STRATIGRAPHY
The Cretaceous succession of the Mocamédes basin is well known following the
studies of Carvalho (1958, 1960, 1961). Cooper (1976, 19785) applied formal
lithostratigraphical nomenclature and assigned the succession to the Sao Nicolau Group
(Fig. 1). The present collections come from the upper part of the Salinas Formation
(Fig. 2), a marine succession of uppermost Cenomanian to early Coniacian age that, in
general, follows conformably on underlying strata. It is overlain, perhaps disconformably
(Cooper 1972), by basalts, analcime basanites and andesites (Andrade 1957) of the Ombe
Formation, a Middle Coniacian to Lower Santonian volcanic suite.
The collections which form the basis of this paper were made in the spring of 1972,
from erosion gullies incising the sea cliffs east of the army post at Sao Nicolau. The
stratigraphy at this locality (Fig. 2) shows several features common to condensed
sequences, including negligible thickness, faunal enrichment and associated stromatolites
(Cooper 1972). The Lower Turonian to Lower Coniacian succession at this locality is
condensed into only 6 m. |
Associated with the ammonites are diverse bivalves and gastropods, including
Acanthotrigonia shepstonei (Griesbach), Veniella forbesiana (Stoliczka), Pseudocucullaea
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Dark green basalts, analcime basanites and andesites
Brownish limestone with Mesopuzosia
Brownish limestone with Prionocycloceras, Piacenticeras,
Kossmaticeras, and abundant Veniella forbesiana (Kossmat)
Pale yellowish siltstones
Brownish limestone with Prionocycloceras, Forresteria,
Baculites, Placenticeras, Tetragonites, Gaudryceras,
Anagauadryceras, Tongoboryceras? and Hypophylloceras
Unfossiliferous brownish limestone
0 Brownish limestone with Pseudaspidoceras and Vascoceras
: 4 White limestone with domical stromatolites
z =
Pale bioturbated siltstones
Figure 2
Measured section through the upper part of the Salinas Formation, west of Sao Nicolau.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 93
lens Solger, Trigonarca capensis (Griesbach), Protocardia umkwelanensis (Etheridge),
Rastellum (Arctostrea) sp., Meretrix umzambiensis Rennie, Zaria bonei (Baily), Arrhoges aff.
bailyi (Etheridge), Pseudomelania? sp., Semifusus sp., and Cryptorhytis sp.
All the material referred to here is housed in the palaeontological collections of the
South African Museum, Iziko Museums of Cape Town (SAM).
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions of specimens are given in millimetres, where D = shell diameter, W =
whorl width, H = whorl height, and U = umbilical width. The abbreviation c. (= circa) is
used where, due to damage to the shell, dimensions have been estimated. Figures in
parentheses refer to dimensions as a percentage of the shell diameter.
SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY
Class CEPHALOPODA Cuvier, 1797
Subclass AMMONOIDEA Zittel, 1884
Order PHYLLOCERATIDA Arkell, 1950
Suborder PHYLLOCERATINA Arkell, 1950
Superfamily PHYLLOCERATACEAE Zittel, 1884
Family Phylloceratidae Zittel, 1884
Subfamily Phylloceratinae Zittel, 1884
Genus Hypophylloceras Salfeld, 1924
Subgenus Hypophylloceras Salfeld, 1924
Type species
Phylloceras onoense Stanton, 1894; by original designation (Salfeld, 1924: 60).
Discussion
The writer follows a number of earlier workers (Birkelund 1965; Matsumoto &
Morozumi 1980; Matsumoto 1984; Henderson & McNamara 1985; Cooper 1989) in
according Hypophylloceras generic status.
Hypophylloceras (Hypophylloceras) sp. nov.?
Fig. 3A—B
Compare
Phylloceras cf. ellipticum Collignon (non Kossmat), 1956: 14, pl. 1 (fig. 1).
Material
With certainty only SAM—PCA1872, from Bed IV, although a crushed and poorly
preserved specimen, SAM—PCA1772 from Bed V, may belong here also.
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 3
A-B. Hypophylloceras (Hypophylloceras) sp. nov.? X 1.5. Ventral and lateral views of
SAM-PCA1872. C-—D. Damesites ainuanus Matsumoto. xX 1.5. Ventral and lateral views of
SAM-—PCA1756. E. Gaudryceras mite (von Hauer). X 1.5. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1750.
F—G. Tetragonites glabrus (Jimbo). X 1.5. Ventral and lateral views of SAM—PCA1870.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 95
Description
The shell is compressed, with virtually the entire preceding whorl covered. The
umbilicus is very involute (5 per cent of the shell diameter), pit-like, with a sloping
umbilical wall and subrounded shoulder. The whorl section is subovate, compressed
(H/W = 1.36), with a narrow evenly arched venter and weakly convex flanks which
converge slightly towards the venter. Maximum width is one-third of the way up the flank.
Ornament 1s lacking on the inner flanks but this is due, at least partly, to corrosion. On
the outer flank there are 23 fine, weakly prorsiradiate to almost rectiradiate lirae in a
distance equal to the whorl height, with at least 100 per half whorl. The lirae are as wide as
the interspaces, faintly convex adorally, and cross the venter transversely. The suture is
not displayed.
Measurements
Specimen D 3 H W H/W U
SAM-—PCA1872 36.5 2256) GANG. 5 (E) 45.2) 1.36 2.0 (5.4)
Discussion
The Angolan specimen most closely approaches the Phylloceras cf. ellipticum
Kossmat figured by Collignon (1956: 14, pl. | (fig. 1)) from the Turonian of Madagascar,
but is less inflated (the Madagascan specimen has a H/W ratio of 1.21). According to
Kennedy & Klinger (1977a), the Malgash specimen is probably Hypophylloceras
improvisum (Stoliczka) (1865: 113, pl. 58 (fig. 4)); the latter Cenomanian species,
however, differs from the Angolan example in having flattened flanks. True
Hypophylloceras ellipticum (Kossmat) (1895: 11, pl. 1 (fig. 2), pl. 6 (fig. 1)) 1s an Albian
to Cenomanian species with elliptical whorl section, weak fold-like ribs and faint
constrictions.
Turonian Hypophylloceras bizonatus (Fritsch) (in Fritsch & Schlonbach 1872: 40,
pl. 14 (fig. 7)) and H. masiaposense (Collignon) (1956: 18, pl. 1 (fig. 7)) differ from the
Angolan specimen in having flat subparallel flanks, a narrowly arched venter, and lirae
which are straight or weakly concave adorally. Essentially, these are the characters that
serve also to distinguish H. woodsi (van Hoepen) (Kennedy & Klinger, 1977a: 366, pl. 13
(figs 3-5), text-figs 4-5) and H. compressum (Matsumoto) (19426: 675, figs a2, b2).
Although Kennedy & Klinger (1977a) included H. hoepeni (Collignon) (1956)
(Fig. 4E-F) in the synonymy of H. woodsi, the Malgash species differs in having more
convex flanks and slightly rursiradiate (not prorsiradiate) lirae on the outer flank.
Campanian Hypophylloceras lambertense (Usher) (1952: 50, pl. 1 (figs 1-3)) is more
compressed than the Angolan specimen, with lirae that commence at a lower level on the
flanks, and Aptian H. wiedmanni Etayo-Serna (1979: 18, pl. 10 (fig. 3), text-fig. 3E) has
flatter flanks, irregularly distributed umbilical pleats, and maximum width at the
umbilical shoulder. Crushed H. rousseli (de Grossouvre) (Fig. 4A—B), from the Santonian
of Sougraignes, France, differs from the present example in having steeper umbilical walls.
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Stratigraphical occurrence
Hypophylloceras (Hypophylloceras) sp. nov.? is known with certainty only from the
upper Middle Turonian of Angola although, possibly, it could range into the Coniacian.
Order LYTOCERATIDA Hyatt, 1889
Suborder LYTOCERATINA Hyatt, 1889
Superfamily TETRAGONITACEAE Hyatt, 1900
Family Tetragonitidae Hyatt, 1900
Genus T7etragonites Kossmat, 1895
Type species |
Ammonites timotheanus Pictet, 1848; by original designation (Kossmat, 1895: 131).
Tetragonites glabrus (Jimbo, 1894)
Figs 3F—G, 5E-F
1894 Lytoceras glabrum Jimbo, p. 34, pl. 6 (fig. 2).
1895 Lytoceras (Tetragonites) glabrum Jimbo; Kossmat, p. 133.
1903 Tetragonites glabrus (Jimbo); Yabe, p. 43, pl. 7 (figs 2, 5).
1903 Tetragonites sphaeronotus (Jimbo); Yabe, p. 45, pl. 7 (fig. 1).
1942a Epigoniceras glabrum (Jimbo); Matsumoto, p. 672.
1958 Lytoceras (Tetragonites) jacksonense Anderson, p. 186, pl. 10 (fig. 2).
1959 Tetragonites glabrus (Jimbo); Matsumoto, p. 149, pl. 39 (figs 72—73).
1967 Tetragonites glabrus (Jimbo); Jones, p. 25, pl. 2 (figs 1-12, 23-26).
1977b Tetragonites glabrus (Jimbo); Kennedy & Klinger, p. 164.
Material
Six specimens; SAM—PCA1752 from Bed V, and SAM—PCA1857, 1870, 1873, 1882
and 1902 from Bed IV. None are complete but, where uneroded, they preserve
recrystallized test.
Description
In SAM—PCA1870, the best-preserved individual (Fig. 3F—G), the shell is somewhat
inflated and involute, with about 60 per cent of the preceding whorl covered. The
umbilicus 1s narrow (21—26 per cent of the diameter), deep, with a vertical umbilical wall
and evenly rounded umbilical shoulder. The flanks are slightly convex and converge to
the broad, evenly rounded venter. The whorl section is semicircular, varying from
somewhat depressed to as wide as high (H/W = 0.92-—1.00).
Ornament is lacking save for growth striae and 5—6 constrictions per whorl, each
backed by a low collar. The constrictions are strongly prorsiradiate, almost straight across
the flanks, and reflex at the ventrolateral shoulders to cross the venter transversely, with a
shallow adorally-concave sinus.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 97
Figure 4
A-B. Hypophylloceras (Hypophylloceras) rousseli (de Grossouvre). The holotype, MHNP—R405, from
the Santonian of Sougraignes (Aube). Figured by de Grossouvre (1894, pl. 24 (fig. 2)).
C-D. Hypophylloceras hoepeni infundibuliforme (Collignon). The holotype, MHNP-—R475, from the
Lower Santonian of Tsianaloky, Madagascar. Figured by Collignon (1956, pl. 4 (figs 2-4)).
E-F. Hypophylloceras hoepeni hoepeni (Collignon). The holotype, MHNP-R414, from the same
locality as above. Figured by Collignon (1956, pl. | (figs 4-6)). All x 1.
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-PCA1870 33 16 (48) c.16 (48) 1.00 7,@1)
4 DD, |PAK@)5) GNIASS)) 1.00 5:5 (25)
SAM-PCA1875 32 16 (50) ? ? T@2)
" 23 11 (48) 122) 0.92 6 (26)
SAM-—PCA1752 35 18 (51) 19 (54) 0.94 (ES CAN
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
a
: J
Figure 5
Whorl sections. A—D. Prionocycloceras carvalhoi (Howarth). A. SAM—PCA1754. B. SAM—PCA1944.
C. SAM-PCA1942. D. SAM—PCA1758. E-F. Tetragonites glabrus (Jimbo). E. SAM—PCA1902.
F. SAM-—PCA1870. G. Mossamedites serratocarinatus (Kennedy & Cobban), SAM—PCA1862.
H. Damesites ainuanus Matsumoto, SAM—PCA1750. I-J. Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge.
I. SAM—PCA1952; J. SAM—PCA1869. All x 1.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 99
Figure 6
A. Tetragonites beantalyensis Collignon. The holotype, NHMP-R708, from the Coniacian of Beantaly,
Madagascar. Figured by Collignon (1956, pl.10 (figs 1-2)). B—C. Tetragonites mitraikyensis
(Collignon). The holotype, NHMP-—R706, from the Upper Santonian of Mitraiky, Madagascar. Figured
by Collignon (1956, pl. 11 (fig. 2)). All x 1.
Discussion
The characters of this species have been covered by Matsumoto (1959) and Jones
(1967). At a comparable diameter, Madagascan 7. beantalyensis Collignon (1956: 83,
pl. 10 (fig. 1)) (fig. 6A) has a flatter venter than the Angolan material; it is said to be
connected to contemporaneous 7. embergeri Collignon (1956: 84, pl. 10 (figs 2—3)) by
intermediates.
Tetragonites superstes van Hoepen (Kennedy & Klinger, 19776: 162, figs 7-8,
12A-C) differs from the Angolan material in being more inflated, with only four faint
constrictions at comparable diameter. Santonian Tetragonites mitraikyensis (Collignon)
(1956: 86, pl. 11 (fig. 2)) is more involute, with a cylindrical outline in ventral view
(fig. 6B-C).
Stratigraphical occurrence
Tetragonites glabrus (Jimbo) is a long-ranging species recorded from the Turonian—
Lower Campanian interval (Matsumoto 1959) of Japan, California, Angola and Alaska.
Family Gaudryceratidae Spath, 1927
Genus Gaudryceras de Grossouvre, 1894
Type species
Ammonites mitis von Hauer (1866); by the subsequent designation of Boule et al.
GiO06: TL);
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 7
Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka). X 1. A. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1871. B—C. Lateral and
ventral views of SAM—PCA1753.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 101
Gaudryceras mite (von Hauer, 1866)
Figs 3H
1866 Ammonites mitis von Hauer, p. 305, pl. 2 (figs 2-3).
O52 Puzosia lytoceratoides Haas, p. 8, figs 14-17.
1965 Gaudryceras varagurense Kossmat; Howarth, p. 361, pl. 4 (fig. 5), pl. 5 (figs 1-2).
1968 Gaudryceras varagurense Kossmat; Howarth, p. 4, pl. 1 (figs 6—7).
1979 Gaudryceras mite (von Hauer); Kennedy & Summesberger, p. 74, pl. | (fig. 1), pl. 2
(figs 1-2), text-fig. 1 (cum synon.).
Material
A single somewhat eroded specimen, SAM—PCA1750, with recrystallized test
preserved, from Bed V. |
Discussion
The extensive synonymy of this well-known species has been listed by Kennedy &
Summesberger (1979). These workers, together with Haas (1952) and Howarth (1965,
1968), have all figured well-preserved examples of this species from Angola. The present
specimen has little to add, save to extend the stratigraphic range of this species downward
in Angola.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Gaudryceras mite (von Hauer) ranges from Turonian to Maastrichtian (Kennedy &
Summesberger 1979), the present record being Lower Coniacian. It is known from
Austria, the south of France, the Carpathians, northern Spain, Angola, Zululand,
Madagascar, India and Antarctica.
Genus Anagaudryceras Shimizu, 1934
Type species
Ammonites sacya Forbes, 1846; by original designation.
Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka, 1865)
Fig. 7A=C
1865 Ammonites involvulum Stoliczka, p. 150, pl. 75 (fig. 1).
1865 Ammonites sacya (Forbes) Stoliczka, p. 154, pl. 76 (fig. 3 only).
1895 Lytoceras (Gaudryceras) involvulum (Stoliczka); Kossmat, p. 128.
935 Gaudryceras (Anagaudryceras) utaturense Shimizu, p. 176.
1956 Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka); Collignon, p. 68.
1968 Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka); Howarth, p. 219, pl. 1 (figs 1—2).
IQIS Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka); Kennedy & Juignet, p. 77, fig. 1.
1976 Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka); Juignet & Kennedy, p. 49, pl. 1 (figs 1-2).
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
OWS Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka); Kennedy & Klinger, p. 146.
1984 Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka); Wright & Kennedy, p. 50, pl. 2 (fig. 2),
text=fig. IC) F.
1985 Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka) Zaborski, p. 7, figs 3—4.
Material
Three specimens preserving recrystallized test, SAM—PCA1753 from Bed V, and
SAM-—PCA1867 and 1871 from Bed IV.
Description
The shell is evolute, compressed, with a wide shallow umbilicus (about 29 per cent of
the shell diameter), inclined umbilical walls and gently rounded umbilical shoulders. The
flanks are weakly convex, with maximum width just below midflank, and converge to the
narrowly rounded venter. The whorl section is compressed oval (H/W = 1.21). Ornament
comprises very fine dense lirae that, up to 70 mm diameter, are visible only with the aid of
a hand lens. There are 3 weakly prorsiradiate, straight constrictions per half whorl.
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-PCAI753 c. 62 25.5 (c. 41) 21 (c. 34) 1.21 c. 18 (c. 29)
Discussion
This widespread species was recorded from the Ponta Grossa locality by Howarth
(1968); he covered the essential differences with other species, as did Wright & Kennedy
(1984) and Zaborski (1985).
Stratigraphical occurrence
Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka) ranges from Lower Cenomanian to Lower
Coniacian (Wright & Kennedy 1984); the present material occurs both in the upper
Middle Turonian and Lower Coniacian. It is reported from Japan, Nigeria, Angola,
southern India, France and England.
Suborder TURRILITINA Besnosov & Mikhailova, 1983
Superfamily TURRILITACEAE Gill, 1871
Family Hamitidae Gill, 1871
Genus Puebloites Cobban & Scott, 1973
Type species
Helicoceras? corrugatum Stanton, 1894; by original designation (Cobban & Scott,
1973: 45).
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 103
Figure 8
Puebloites greenhornensis Cobban & Scott. xX 1.5. (A) Lateral and (B) ventral views of
SAM-PCA1880.
Puebloites greenhornensis Cobban & Scott, 1973
Fig. 8A—B
21967 Scalarites sp. indet.; Collignon, p. 32, pl. 18 (fig. 2).
OFZ Scalarites sp.; Cooper, p. 248.
OFS Puebloites greenhornensis Cobban & Scott, p. 46, pl. 19 (figs 7-28).
21982 Glyptoxoceras cf. indicum (Forbes); Renz, p. 73, pl. 22 (figs 7-8).
Material
A single specimen, SAM—PCA1880, preserving recrystallized test, from Bed IV.
Description
The specimen is a loose gently arched fragment with subelliptical whorl section (H/W
= 1.05). Ornament comprises 5 strong annular ribs in a distance equal to the major
diameter. These cross the dorsum and venter obliquely, becoming crowded on the
dorsum. There are no flared ribs or constrictions, and the suture is not displayed.
Discussion
Although the general impression of Puebloites greenhornensis Cobban & Scott is of a
more-densely ribbed form, the Angolan example falls within the range of variation
displayed by the Colorado species. Early Turonian P. spiralis Cobban & Scott (1973: 46,
pl. 18 (figs 1—5), pl. 19 (figs 1-6)) is more densely ribbed, with narrower sharper ribs, as is
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 9
A. Prionocycloceras sp. X 1. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1775. B—C. Prionocycloceras carvathoi
(Howarth). x 1. Lateral and ventral views of SAM—PCA1758. D—E. Tongoboryceras? sp. Juv. X 2.
Lateral and ventral views of SAM—PCA1762. F. Baculites klingeri sp. nov. X 1. Lateral view of
SAM-PCA1808.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 105
P. corrugatus (Stanton) (Cobban & Scott, 1973: 45, pl. 18 (figs 6-19), fig. 17) and
P. matsumotoi (Collignon) (1967: 47, pl. 28 (figs 3—4)) at similar growth stage. As noted
by Cobban & Scott (1973), the specimen of Diplomoceras? cascadense Anderson figured
by Basse (1963: 874, pl. 23 (fig. 4)), from the Upper Turonian of Angola, may be
P. corrugatus.
The Scalarites sp. indet. of Collignon (1967, pl. 18 (fig. 2)) is too fragmentary for
adequate comparison, but may belong here. So too may the Glyptoxoceras cf. indicum
(Forbes) of Renz (1982: 73, pl. 22 (figs 7—8)) from the Early Turonian of Venezuela.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Currently, Puebloites greenhornensis Cobban & Scott is known only from the Lower
Turonian of the Western Interior of North America, and the upper Middle Turonian of
Angola. However, it may be present also in Venezuela and Morocco.
Superfamily BACULITACEAE Gill, 1871
Family Baculitidae Gill, 1871
Genus Baculites Lamarck, 1799
Type species
Baculites vertebralis Lamarck, 1801; by subsequent designation (Meek, 1876: 391).
Baculites klingeri sp. nov.
Figs 9F, 10, 11E-F
Diagnosis
A species of Baculites characterized by relatively strong ornament beyond a whorl
height of about 5 mm. This comprises 2-4, variably developed, crescentic, dorsolateral
bullae in a distance equal to the whorl height and projected growth striae on the upper
flank. In some, weak flat-topped ribs cross the venter.
Types
SAM-—PCA1737 is designated holotype. Paratypes are SAM—PCA1733-—34, 1736,
1738, 1740-3, 1745, 1761, 1781, 1783, 1785, 1788, 1800, 1808 and 1833. All are from
Bed V and all preserve recrystallized test; additional paratypes are SAM—PCA173 1-32,
1737, 1739, 1744, 1747-49, 1751, 1757-60, 1763-66, 1768, 1770, 1773-74, 1779-80,
1782, 1784, 1786-87, 1788, 1790-91, 1793, 1797, 1799, 1801—6, 1809-13, 1815, 1817,
1819-20, 1823, 1825-26, 1830-31, 1835, 1837-38, 1840, 1842-43, 1847, 1849 and
W851.
Etymology
For Dr H. C. Klinger, in recognition of his important contribution to ammonite
systematics in general, and an understanding of the Baculitaceae in particular.
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
N O
Figure 10
Baculites klingeri sp. nov. A—B. Lateral and ventral views of SAM—PCA1743. C. Lateral view of
SAM-—PCA1742. D-E. Lateral and ventral views of SAM—PCA1800. F—G. Lateral and ventral views of
SAM-PCA1833. H. Whorl section of SAM—PCA1733. xX 2. IJ. Lateral and ventral views of
SAM-—PCA1740. K-—L. Lateral and ventral views of SAM-—PCA1736. M. Whorl section
SAM-—PCA1788. X 2. N—O. Lateral and ventral view of the holotype, SAM—PCA—1737. All x 1 unless
stated otherwise.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 107
Description
Shell relatively small (maximum height = 9.5 mm), straight, tapering gradually
adapically, with a compressed elliptical to weakly subovate whorl section (H/W =
1.17—1.39). The dorsum is evenly rounded and the relatively flat flanks converge slightly
to the evenly rounded venter. Maximum width is at or just below midflank.
The earliest growth stages are smooth and the diameter at which tubercles first appear
is variable. SAM—PCA1733 lacks flank tubercles at a whorl height of 7 mm, whereas in
SAM-—PCA1808 they are present at only 5.4 mm whorl height. Typically, the lower flanks
are ornamented with 2-4 crescentic bullae of variable strength in a distance equal to the
whorl height. In some individuals, e.g. SAM—PCA1833, these are swollen and form nodes
(Fig. 1OF). The upper flanks are ornamented with projected growth striae that recurve to
cross the venter transversely, accompanied by weak, low, indistinct ribs that are broader
than the interspaces. On SAM—PCA1800 there are five such ribs in a distance equal to
twice the whorl height (Fig. 1|OD—E); they are much broader than the interspaces. The
dorsum is ornamented only by transverse growth striae. Suture not observed.
Measurements
Specimen H W H/W
SAM-PCA1754 SS 720 1.36
SAM-—PCA1740 oo) 6.5 bil
SAM-PCA1737 (holotype) 8.2 6.5 16
SAM-—PCA1738 8.0 5.8 ESS
SAM-—PCA1783 7.0 5:5 ee
SAM-—PCA1735 7.0 6.0 Ely
Discussion
The Angolan material is closest to Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu
(1926: 195, pl. 22 (fig. 5), pl. 26 (fig. 11); Matsumoto & Obata, 1963: 30, pl. 8 (fig. 5),
pl. 10 (figs 1-6), pl. 11 (figs 1, 4-5), pl. 12 (fig. 3), pl. 14 (fig. 4), figs 72—87)) in whorl
section and the angle of the ventral rostrum, i.e. the angle between the venter and the
projected growth striae on the upper flank. In general, however, the Japanese material
appears to have much weaker ornament; so too does B. besairiei Collignon (1931: 37, pl. 5
(figs 6-9), pl. 9 (fig. 16)), B. roedereri Collignon (1931: 38, pl. 5 (fig. 10), pl. 9 (fig. 7)),
and B. latelobatus Collignon (1931: 38, pl. 5 (figs 11-12), pl. 9 (fig. 18)) from the Upper
Coniacian of Mahagaga (Madagascar); Klinger & Kennedy (1996) include the three
Madagascan species in the synonymy of B. yokoyamai.
In ornament and small size, the Angolan material is close to B. mariasensis Cobban
(1951: 818, pl. 118 (figs 10-12), text-figs 4-7; Kennedy & Cobban 1991: 69, pl. 13
(figs 11-16, 22—23, 29-33, 38-40), pl. 14 (figs 1-23, 26-28, 43-48), text-fig. 25E). The
latter however 1s a younger Middle Coniacian to Middle Santonian species with distinctly
ovoid to pyriform whorl section. Upper Turonian B. undulatus Roman & Mazeran
108 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 11
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 109
(1913: 11, pl. 4 (figs 6-8); Matsumoto & Obata 1963: 28, pl. 8 (fig. 4), pl. 9 (figs 1-5),
pl. 11 (figs 2-3), text-figs 62—71) has a more ovate whorl section, with weaker tubercles
and finer, denser, better developed ribs.
Baculites schenki Matsumoto (1959: 113, pl. 32 (figs 1-6), figs 12-25; Matsumoto &
Obata, 1963: 38, pl. 12 (figs 1-2), pl. 14 (fig. 1), text-figs 90, 131-33) is allied to
B. klingeri sp. nov., but has a more ovate whorl section, as has Baculites boulei Collignon
(1931: 35, pl. 5 (fig. 2), pl. 9 (fig. 14); Matsumoto & Obata, 1963: 43, pl. 13 (figs 3, 5),
pl. 15 (fig. 6), figs 93, 152-55); the latter species also has stronger more distant tubercules
and is regarded a synonym of B. capensis Woods (Klinger & Kennedy 1996).
Baculites brevicosta Schluter (1872: 141, pl. 39 (figs 9-10)) resembles the present
form but has a subtrigonal whorl section and narrower venter, with 5 fine ribs in a distance
equal to the whorl height.
Stratigraphical occurrence 1
Baculites klingeri sp. nov. 1s known only from the Lower Coniacian of Angola.
Order AMMONITIDA Hyatt, 1889
Suborder HOPLITINA Spath, 1922
(nom. transl. Cooper 1992 ex Hoplitida Spath, 1922)
Superfamily DESMOCERATACEAE Zittel, 1895
Family Desmoceratidae Zittel, 1895
Genus Damesites Matsumoto, 1942a
Type species
Desmoceras damesi Jimbo, 1894; by original designation (Matsumoto, 1942a: 24).
Damesites ainuanus Matsumoto, 1957
Figs 3@_Dio
O57 Damesites ainuanus Matsumoto, p. 86, pl. 15 (figs 1-2).
1968 Damesites ainuanus Matsumoto; Howarth, p. 6, pl. 1 (figs 3-5).
Material
A single fragmentary specimen, SAM-—PCA1756 from Bed V,_ preserving
recrystallized test.
Fig. 11. (see facing page). A-D, G-—I. Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge. A—D. Kaffrarium
morphotypes. A—B. Lateral and ventral views of SAM—PCA1905. C—D. Ventral and lateral views of
SAM-—PCA1730. G—I. Umkwelanense morphotypes. G—H. Lateral and ventral views of
SAM-—PCA1726. I. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1727. E-F. Baculites klingeri sp. nov. Lateral and
ventral views of SAM—PCA1733. All Xx 1.
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
The shell is very involute and compressed, with a tiny deep umbilicus (10% of the
diameter) which has steep walls and evenly rounded shoulders. The flanks are almost flat,
with maximum width at about midflank, and the whorl section is oval compressed (H/W =
1.25). The evenly rounded venter shows a very weak, low siphonal keel. The test is
smooth and lacks ornament.
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-—PCA1756 DI I 255(S9) 10 (48) 12S 2 (10)
Discussion
Differences between D. ainuanus and other Damesites species have been covered by
Matsumoto (1957) and Howarth (1968).
Stratigraphical occurrence
Damesites ainuanus Matsumoto is known from the Upper Turonian of Japan and the
Lower Coniacian of Angola.
Family Pachydiscidae Spath, 1922
Genus Tongoboryceras HouSa, 1967
Type species
Lewesiceras tongoboryense Collignon, 1952; by original designation (HouSa, 1967: 42).
Tongoboryceras? sp. Juv.
Fig. 9D-E
Material
Two juvenile specimens, SAM—PCA1762 and 1767, both from Bed V and both
preserving recrystallized test.
Description
The shell is inflated and moderately evolute, with about 65 per cent of the preceding
whorl covered. The umbilicus is rather narrow (about 25 per cent of the shell diameter),
deep, with steep walls which pass imperceptibly into strongly convex flanks. The venter is
broadly rounded and the semi-circular whorl section depressed (H/W = 0.74). Ornament
is lacking but there is a distinct umbilical bulla on the adoral part of SAM—PCA1762, with
a weaker one half a whorl behind. A conspicuous prorsiradiate constriction is adorally
convex across the flanks, and forms a weak, anteriorly directed chevron across the venter.
|
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 111
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-PCA1762 11.8 5.1 (43) 6.9 (58) 0.74 aOlZo)
Discussion
The available specimens are too small to be certain of generic identity. However, their
weak ornament and strongly convex flanks suggest reference to HouSa’s (1967) genus.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Tongoboryceras is an Upper Turonian to Coniacian genus known from southern
England, France, Madagascar, and Zululand; the Angolan specimens are from the Lower
Coniacian.
Superfamily PUZOSIACEAE Spath, 1922
(nom. transl. Cooper & Greyling 1996 ex Puzosiidae Spath, 1922)
Family Puzosiidae Spath, 1922
Genus Mesopuzosia Matsumoto, 1954
Type species
Mesopuzosia pacifica Matsumoto, 1954; by original designation (Matsumoto,
1954: 79).
Mesopuzosia indopacifica (Kossmat, 1898)
Figs 12-13
1898 Puzosia indopacifica Kossmat, p. 117, pl. 17 (fig. 2a, b).
non 1932 Puzosia (Parapuzosia) indopacifica (Kossmat); Collignon, p. 18, pl. 6 (fig. la, b).
1954 Mesopuzosia indopacifica (Kossmat); Matsumoto, p. 84.
1958 Puzosia (Parapuzosia) hearni Anderson, p. 238, pl. 38 (fig. la, b).
1959 Mesopuzosia indopacifica (Kossmat); Matsumoto, p. 19.
71961 Puzosia eboroensis Collignon, p. 34, fig. 1.
71961 Puzosia orientalis (Matsumoto); Collignon, p. 32, pl. 5 (fig. 1).
21967 Mesopuzosia aff. indopacifica (Kossmat); Jones, p. 41, pl. 4 (figs 30-35).
1988 Mesopuzosia indopacifica (Kossmat); Matsumoto & Kera (in Matsumoto), 1988: 76,
figs 28-30.
Material
A single specimen, SAM—PCA1852, retaining recrystallized test.
Description
The shell is moderately large, compressed, and rather evolute, with slightly less than
half the preceding whorl covered. The umbilicus is fairly wide (30-32 per cent of the
112 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 12
Mesopuzosia indopacifica (Kossmat). X 0.75. (A) Ventral and (B) lateral views of SAM—PCA1852.
diameter), with steep umbilical walls and subrounded
shoulders. The broad flattish flanks converge slightly to
the narrow, evenly rounded venter giving a compressed,
oval whorl section (H/W = 1.25—1.42) (Fig. 13).
Ornament comprises seven prominent main ribs per
whorl; these begin at the umbilical seam, are straight and
slightly prorsiradiate across the flanks, and flex forwards
slightly near the venter. Between main ribs are 10—13
long ribs that arise close to the umbilical shoulder and
become prominent on the outer flank where they are
joined by occasional short intercalatories.
[
Figure 13
Mesopuzosia indopacifica (Kossmat). X 1. Whorl section of SAM—PCA 1852.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 113
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-—PCA1852 152 64 (42) 45 (30) eA 49 (32)
M als: 45 (40) 36 (32) 1.25 34 (30)
Discussion
Kossmat’s (1898) figure differs from the Angolan example in having the main ribs
more strongly projected across the venter, but this may be due to artistic licence.
Mesopuzosia eboroensis (Collignon) (1961: 34, fig. 1) barely differs from the Angolan
specimen and may be conspecific. Contemporary Puzosia orientalis Collignon (non
Matsumoto) (1961: 32, pl. 5 (fig. 1)) 1s also very close to M. indopacifica, but has more
(12-15) ribs between constrictions (main ribs).
Middle Turonian Mesopuzosia pacifica Matsumoto (1954: 82, pl. 14 (fig. 1), pl. 15
(figs 1-2), pl. 16 (figs 1-3), text—fig. 2; Matsumoto ef al. (in Matsumoto), 1988: 46, figs
8—11, 25B—D) is separated from M. indopacifica by its more inflated whorls, convex
flanks and more flexed ribs. Although the differences seem slight (cf Jones 1967), they
appear to be consistent.
Mesopuzosia beloensis Collignon (1965: 4, pl. 377 (fig. 1638)) is an Upper Turonian
species seemingly intermediate between M. ambikyensis Collignon and M. pacifica
Matsumoto. It is more involute (umbilicus 27 per cent of the diameter) than the Angolan
specimen, as 1s M. ambikyensis Collignon (1965: 20, pl. 421 (fig. 1749)) which, in
addition, is more compressed and with fewer (5—6) sinuous constrictions.
Coniacian Mesopuzosia yubarensis (Jimbo) (1894: 28, pl. | (fig. 6); Matsumoto er al.
(in Matsumoto), 1988: 68, figs 21-24, 25F, 26—27) differs from M. indopacifica in having
finer, more numerous ribs, as does M. manasoaensis (Collignon) (1961: 34, pl. 5 (fig. 2)).
According to Matsumoto (1988), Howarth’s (1968: 5, pl. 2 (figs 1—2)) specimen of
M. yubarensis from Ponta Grossa is a juvenile Pachydesmoceras.
Mesopuzosia takahashii Matsumoto (1988: 52, figs 12-18, 25E) is a densely ribbed
species which is unlikely to be confused with the present form.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Typically Mesopuzosia indopacifica (Kossmat) is a Middle Turonian to Coniacian
species known from California, Japan, India, Madagascar, Zululand and Angola.
Subfamily Hauericeratinae de Grossouvre, 1894
Discussion
Matsumoto et al. (1990) provide the most recent comment on the status and
composition of the subfamily; an origin is sought in Puzosia, via keeled ‘Puzosia’
serratocarinata Kennedy & Cobban (1988: 595, figs 2, 4.1—3).
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 14
Mossamedites serratocarinatus (Kennedy & Cobban). A—C. Lateral, ventral and oblique ventral views
of SAM—PCA1853. X 1. D. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1860. x 1.5. E-F. Ventral and lateral views of
SAM-—PCA1876. X 1.5.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 115
Genus Mossamedites gen. nov.
Type species
Puzosia serratocarinata Kennedy & Cobban, 1988; by original designation herein.
Discussion
Mossamedites provides the link between evolute and moderately inflated Puzosia, e.g.
P. compressa Kossmat, and very evolute and compressed Hauericeras of the Santonian,
with a conspicuously raised siphonal keel. It retains the ornament and suture of Puzosia
and has the shell form of Hauericeras; the sharpened venter of Mossamedites represents
an intermediate stage between the rounded venter of Puzosia and the specialized keel of
mature Hauericeras.
The type species of H. (Hauericeras), viz. H. pseudogardeni (Schliter) (Matsumoto et
al., 1990: 440, fig. 1) differs from Mossamedites gen. nov. in being more compressed,
with a distinctly raised keel to the venter, weaker ventral ribs, and in possessing
ventrolateral nodes, a shallow spiral groove on the upper flank, constrictions that are
adorally biconcave, and gradually descending auxiliary lobes. Hauericeras (Gardeniceras)
gardeni (Baily) (Matsumoto & Obata 1955: 139) differs from Mossamedites gen. nov. in
being more compressed, more evolute, with a very different siphonal keel, and without
trace of tubercles or ribs.
Mossamedites serratocarinatus (Kennedy & Cobban, 1988)
Fig. 5G, 14
IO Hauericeras sp.; Cooper, p. 248.
1988 Puzosia serratocarinatus Kennedy & Cobban, p. 595, figs 2, 4: 1-3.
Material
This is a fairly common species in the Angolan fauna, and is represented by ten more or
less fragmentary specimens from Bed IV, all of which preserve recrystallized test;
SAM-—PCA1853, SAM—PCA1855—56, 1858, 1860-1862, 1865, 1876 and 1883.
Description
The shell is strongly compressed and moderately evolute, with slightly less than half
the preceding whorl covered. The umbilicus is wide (25-33% of the diameter) and
shallow, with vertical walls and subrounded shoulders. The broad, weakly convex flanks
curve to the narrow fastigiate venter, resulting in a compressed, sublanceolate whorl
section (H/W = 1.45—1.56). The venter is sharpened along the siphonal line but there are
no bounding sulci and only the lowest of siphonal keels.
On the early whorls ornament comprises sinuous, prorsiradiate growth striae that flex
forwards near the venter and are followed, e.g. SAM—PCA1876, by an occasional weak
collar that probably marks a constriction on the internal mould. Beyond about 30 mm
diameter the ribs strengthen and are restricted to the ventral region, forming obtuse
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
chevrons at the siphonal line and weakly serrating the low keel. These dense prorsiradiate
ribs are about as wide as the interspaces, with 13 ina 15 mm distance at 50 mm diameter.
Constrictions are lacking but periodic low collars across the venter probably mark their
position on the internal mould.
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W 0)
SAM-PCA1853 c. 72 30 (c. 42) ? ? 22 (c. 31)
" 44 17 (c. 39) 12 (c. 27) 1.42 11 (c. 25)
SAM-—PCA1862 c. 54 24 (c. 44) 15 (c. 28) 1.60 ese, 33)
" aa 20 (45) 13 (c. 30) 1.54 14.5 (c. 33)
Discussion
The present material differs from the fragmentary type material from the upper Middle
Turonian of northern Mexico in being more involute (umbilicus 25—33 vs. 37 per cent of
the diameter) and somewhat more compressed (H/W = 1.42-1.56 vs. 1.61—1.70).
However given the small amount of material currently available the differences, probably,
are not taxonomically meaningful.
guiness
Kossmaticeras (Kossmaticeras) theobaldianum theobaldianum (Stoliczka). X 1.5. Lateral and ventral
views of SAM—PCA1902.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 117
The Angolan material closely resembles (and probably is ancestral to) Lower
Coniacian Hauericeras antiquum Collignon (1961: 75, fig. 12) but the latter species is
more evolute (umbilicus 40 per cent of the shell diameter), as 1s the ribbed Hauericeras
aff. gardeni (Baily) of Renz (1982: 106, pl. 35 (fig. 2)) from the Upper Coniacian or
Santonian of Venezuela.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Mossamedites serratocarinatus (Kennedy & Cobban) is known only from the upper
Middle Turonian of northern Mexico and Angola.
Family Kossmaticeratidae Spath, 1922
Subfamily Kossmaticeratinae Spath, 1922
Genus Kossmaticeras de Grossouvre, 1901
Type species
Ammonites theobaldianus Stoliczka, 1865; by original designation (De Grossouvre,
1901: 719).
Kossmaticeras theobaldianum (Stoliczka, 1865)
Pie, 15
1865 Ammonites theobaldianus Stoliczka, p. 161, pl. 78 (figs 2-3).
1897 Holcodiscus theobaldianus (Stoliczka); Kossmat, p. 142, pl. 18 (figs 4—5a, b), pl. 19
(fig. la, b).
1906 Holcodiscus theobaldianus (Stoliczka); Boule et al., p. 25, pl. 7 (figs 2-3).
O55 Kossmaticeras theobaldi (Stoliczka); Collignon, p. 20, pl. 1 (figs 2-3), pl. 2 (fig. 1)
(cum synon.).
1985 Kossmaticeras (Kossmaticeras) theobaldianum theobaldianum (Stoliczka); Kennedy &
Klinger, p. 170, figs 2A—E only (?non 1D—E = K. recurrens (Kossmat)) (cum synon.).
Material
A single fragmentary specimen, SAM—PCA1902 from Bed VI, preserving
recrystallized test.
Description
The shell is moderately evolute, compressed, with about half the preceding whorl
covered. The umbilicus is fairly wide (35 per cent of the diameter), with vertical walls and
well-rounded shoulders. The somewhat flattened flanks converge slightly to the broadly
rounded venter and the oval whorl section is as high as wide (H/W = 1.00).
Primary ribs begin at the umbilical seam and are rursiradiate to the umbilical shoulder,
where they bend forwards to become prorsiradiate and weakly falcate across the flank.
Ribs frequently bifurcate, or are separated by an intercalatory from the point of
geniculation, so that twice as many ribs cross the venter as leave the umbilicus. There are
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
about 35 ribs per half whorl across the venter. Since the outer whorl covers the preceding
whorl to exactly the level of bifurcation and intercalation, all ribs in the umbilicus are
simple. Periodic constrictions, each marked by a strengthened rib bearing a distinct
umbilical bulla, cut across ribs to the posterior and parallel those to the anterior.
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM—PCA1902 py) 23 (44) 23 (44) 1.00 18 (35)
Discussion
The Angolan specimen closely resembles figured material of K. theobaldianum and
comparison with other species is noted by Kennedy & Klinger (1985).
Figure 16
Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge. X 1. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1869.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 119
Stratigraphical occurrence
Kossmaticeras theobaldianum (Stoliczka) is a typical Lower Coniacian species,
apparently restricted to the Austral Realm. It is recorded from southern India,
Madagascar, Zululand and now Angola.
Superfamily HOPLITACEAE Douvillé, 1890
Family Placenticeratidae Hyatt, 1900
Subfamily Placenticeratinae Hyatt, 1900
Genus Placenticeras Hyatt, 1900
Type species
Ammonites placenta DeKay, 1828; by the subsequent designation of Meek, 1876.
Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge, 1904
Figs 5I—J, 11A—D, G-I, 16
1904 Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge, p. 89, pl. 3 (fig. 16).
19786 — Proplacenticeras kaffrarium (Etheridge); Cooper, p. 6.
1989 Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge; Klinger & Kennedy, p. 268, figs 9-14A, 19-20,
22—99 (cum synon.).
Material
Seventeen specimens, wholly or partially retaining recrystallized test. Of these, 12 are
P. kaffrarium morphotypes, SAM—PCA1869 is from Bed IV, SAM—PCA1730 and 1746
are from Bed V, and SAM—PCA1897, 1905, 1915, 1952-3, 1956, 1959, and 1962 are
from Bed VI. Of the 5 P. umkwelanense morphotypes, SAM—PCA1726-—7 and 1778 are
from Bed V and SAM—PCA1954 and 1961 are from Bed VI.
Description
Placenticeras kaffrarium morphotype.
Shell typically placenticeratid, high-whorled, discoidal and very involute, with 90 per
cent of the preceding whorl covered. The narrow funnel-like umbilicus (about 13 per cent
of the shell diameter) has a steeply sloping, flat umbilical wall that grades into the sub-
rounded shoulder. Broad, moderately convex flanks converge markedly to the narrow
tabulate venter which is flanked by abrupt, angular ventrolateral shoulders. Maximum
width is midway between the umbilical shoulder and midflank, and the degree of inflation
varies from individual to individual. Due to allometric growth, the umbilical ratio
increases with ontogeny, and the venter of macroconchs rounds in later growth.
Ornament comprises 6—7 small, acute umbilical tubercles per whorl and, on the outer
flank, there are 12—14 variably developed, broad, low bulges. Alternate bulges correspond
more or less closely with umbilical tubercles. The angular ventrolateral shoulders are
ornamented by 24—26 small, distinct clavi per whorl which alternate across the venter in
zigzag fashion.
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Placenticeras umkwelanense morphotype
The shell is strongly compressed, discoidal, high-whorled, and involute. The narrow
umbilicus (about 14 per cent of the shell diameter) has steep walls and subrounded
shoulders. The broad flanks are weakly convex and converge markedly to the narrowly
sulcate venter. In one juvenile (Fig. 11H) the venter is weakly raised along the siphonal
line and thus pseudotricarinate. Umbilical tubercles and ventrolateral clavi are lacking.
There are low falcate bulges on the outer flank, separated by falcate growth striae, but
these are variably developed and lacking from the largest specimen, SAM—PCA1961.
Measurements
Specimen D H WwW H/W i)
SAM-—PCA1727 | Cu) 26 (52) ? ? c. 7.0 (14)
SAM-—PCA1726 Garel c. 38 (54) c. 17.0 (45) 2.24 e
SAM-PCA1915 67 35 (52) 17.5 (26) 2.00 8.8 (13)
Discussion
As noted by Klinger & Kennedy (1989), Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge displays
high intraspecific variability, manifest in the degree of inflation of the whorls, the
prominence of the lateral bulges and umbilical tubercles, and the rounding of the venter.
These features are sexually linked, with larger macroconchs being more inflated, with
more conspicuous flank bulges and a broadly rounded venter at relatively early stage,
when compared with the microconch.
Namibian Placenticeras merenskyi Haughton (1930: 363, pl. 11; Klinger 1977, fig. 7)
differs from the present species in being more compressed, with smaller, more numerous
umbilical (12) tubercles per whorl. Contrary to Howarth (1985) and Klinger & Kennedy
eet A ey ca
= —,
Figure 17
Vascoceras cf. proprium (Reyment). X 1.5. Lateral and anterior views of SAM—PCA1896.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 121
(1989), the numerous small umbilical bullae exclude P. merenskyi from the present
species and, the writer believes, it should fall into the synonymy of P. memoria-
schloenbachi (Laube & Bruder) (1887: 221, pl. 23 (fig. 1)), an Upper Cenomanian—
Turonian species.
Proplacenticeras fritschi (de Grossouvre 1894: 124, pl. 5 (figs 1—2)) from the
Coniacian of La Ribochere, differs from P. kaffrarium in having ventrolateral clavi paired
across the venter. Although most workers regard Proplacenticeras a subjective junior
synonym of Placenticeras, in the context of hoplitacaean phylogeny the opposite
ventrolateral clavi are phyletically and taxonomically meaningful and, here,
Proplacenticeras is regarded a valid taxon.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge is a Middle Turonian—Coniacian species reported
from Zululand, Madagascar, India, and Angola; in the latter region it occurs both in the
upper Middle Turonian and Lower Coniacian, but only P. kaffrarium morphotypes are
known from the lower level.
Suborder ACANTHOCERATINA Hyatt, 1900
(nom. transi. Cooper 1991 ex Acanthoceratida Hyatt, 1900)
Superfamily ACANTHOCERATACEAE de Grossouvre, 1894
Family Vascoceratidae Douvillée, 1912
Genus Vascoceras Choffat, 1898
Type species
Vascoceras gamai Choffat, 1898; by the subsequent designation of Diener, 1925: 182.
Vascoceras cf. proprium (Reyment, 1954)
lene, U7
Compare:
1954 Pachyvascoceras proprium Reyment, p. 258, pl. 5 (fig. 1), fig. 3d.
72 Subtissotia? sp.; Cooper, p. 248.
1987 Vascoceras proprium (Reyment); Kennedy et al., p. 46, pl. 4 (figs 1-15, 18-19),
pls 5—6, figs 8A—C, 9 (cum synon.).
Material
A single specimen, SAM—PCA1891 from Bed II, partially eroded but preserving
recrystallized test.
Description
The shell is strongly inflated, globose, with a very narrow, crater-like umbilicus (about
15% of the diameter). The overhanging umbilical wall is broad, convex, with a well
rounded shoulder. The convex flanks converge rather rapidly to the evenly rounded venter
122 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 18
Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth). X 1. A. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1892. B. Lateral view of
SAM-PCA1887. C—D. Lateral and ventral views of SAM—PCA 1889.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 123
to produce a subtrigonal whorl section. Ornament is lacking and the suture is not
displayed. Slight deformation and erosion make morphometric analysis unreliable and
measurements are excluded.
Discussion
Although poorly preserved, the Angolan example shows all the essential features of
Reyment’s (1954) species. Given the wide range of variation admitted for V. proprium (cf.
Kennedy et al. 1987), it may prove to be a subjective junior synonym of Tunisian
V. fleuryi (Pervinquiere).
Vascoceras hartti (Hyatt) (1870: 386; 1903: 103, pl. 14 (fig. 16); White 1887: 226,
pl. 19 (figs 1-2), pl. 20 (fig. 3); Chancellor 1982: 98, figs 28C, 29-33) resembles the
present specimen, especially in its subtrigonal whorl section, but the Brazilian species has
steeply sloping umbilical walls.
Vascoceras kossmati Choffat (Berthou et al. 1985: 76, pl. 5 (figs 1-9)) (= V. harttiforme
Choffat) resembles the Angolan specimen but has umbilical tubercles, a less undercut
umbilical wall, and a broader rounder venter.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Vascoceras proprium (Reyment) is known with certainty only from the Lower
Turonian of Texas, northern Mexico, Nigeria and probably Angola.
Family Euomphaloceratidae Cooper, 1978
(nom. transl. Cooper 1997 ex Euomphaloceratinae Cooper, 1978)
Subfamily Euomphaloceratinae Cooper, 1978
Genus Morrowites Cobban & Hook, 1983
Type species
Mammites depressus Powell, 1963; by original designation of Cobban & Hook (1983: 9).
Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth, 1968)
Figs 18-19, 20A, E, 21-24
1968 Mammites mocamedensis Howarth, p. 222, pl. 3.
1985 Pseudaspidoceras mocamedense (Howarth); Howarth, p. 98.
Material
Six specimens, SAM—PCA 1885, 1887-9 and 1892-93 from Bed HI, partially or wholly
preserving recrystallized test.
Description
The shell is evolute, compressed, with about 20 per cent of the preceding whorl
covered. The evolute umbilicus (about 35 per cent of the diameter) is relatively shallow,
with steep, fairly broad walls and subrounded shoulders. The broad flat flanks converge
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 19
Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth). X 0.66. Ventral and lateral views of SAM—PCA1885,
a horned adult.
slightly toward the relatively broad, flattened venter. Costally the whorl section is
polygonal, slightly higher than wide, with a weakly concave venter; intercostally it is
broadly ovate and compressed (H/W = 1.09—1.32) (Fig. 20A, E), becoming more inflated
with growth. Part of the poorly preserved suture is illustrated as Figure 30.
Ornament, especially the strength of tuberculation and ribbing, is variable. There are
about 13 umbilical bullae per whorl on the best preserved specimen, but their strength
varies and not all ribs develop bullae. Not uncommonly there is a weak arcuate bulla
between main bullae, unconnected to a rib. The main umbilical bullae give rise to fairly
thick low ribs. These are adorally convex across the flank, weak at midflank, and
separated by up to three intercalatories. Main ribs are ornamented with inner and outer
ventrolateral tubercles, although the latter tend to be irregular in strength and
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 125
Figure 20
Whorl sections. X1. A, E. Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth). A. SAM—PCA1885:
E. SAM—PCA1888. B-C. Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge. B. SAM-—5106; C. SAM-—6523.
D. Prionocycloceras carvalhoi (Howarth). SAM—PCA1896.
development. From the inner ventrolateral tubercles the ribs project forwards to connect
with outer ventrolateral tubercles close to the siphonal line and are weakly joined across
the venter. There is a multiplicity of outer ventrolateral tubercles, unconnected to ribs, so
that on SAM—PCA1892 15 outer ventrolateral tubercles correspond with only seven
lower ventrolateral tubercles (Fig. 21). Occasionally an inner ventrolateral tubercle lacks
an accompanying upper ventrolateral. That the inner ventrolateral tubercles represent the
septate bases of hollow spines is evident from SAM—PCA1892; this specimen preserves
13 short, stubby, backwardly directed spines per half whorl impressed in the umbilical
wall or the penultimate whorl.
SAM-—PCA1885 represents this species in maturity, at a diameter of about 190 mm. It
is compressed, evolute, with a wide, moderately deep umbilicus surrounded by broad,
steeply inclined walls and evenly rounded shoulders. The broad flat flank converges
126 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 21
Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth). Schematic rib pattern of SAM—PCA1888.
slightly to the weakly convex, flattened venter, and the costal whorl section is
subquadrate, about as wide as high. Ornament comprises about eight prominent umbilical
tubercles per half whorl. These give rise to coarse, distant, almost rectiradiate ribs that are
narrower than the interspaces and ornamented by adorally convex growth striae. Ribs
terminate at the ventrolateral shoulder in the swollen bases of hollow horns. At this
growth stage intercalatories are lacking and ribbing does not cross the venter. There is a
row of small nodate to weakly clavate outer ventrolateral tubercles, some of which occur
in the interspaces between horns.
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-—PCA1888 c. 100 G 3838) @, 35 (Sd) 1.09 35 GS)
V2 27 (38) 24 (33) Hell) 25) (39)
SAM-—PCA1892 105 43 (41) c. 40 (38) 1.08 32 (30)
Discussion
The exaggerated ventrolateral horns of the present species preclude it from
Pseudaspidoceras as currently interpreted. Although immature growth stages of the
Angolan material conform closely to the type of Pseudaspidoceras curvicostatum
Reyment (1955: 55, pl. 11 (fig. 1), pl. 12, text-fig. 24) and, initially, were identified as
such, the outer whorls are Mammites-like, with exaggerated ventrolateral horns
(Fig. 20A). Since ventrolateral horns are a feature of Morrowites, most emphasis is placed
on these derived characters, and the Angolan material is assigned to Cobban & Hook’s
(1983) genus; unfortunately the character of the lateral lobe (L) could not be discerned in
the Angolan material.
Zaborski (1995) included Pseudaspidoceras curvicostatum in the synonymy of
P. paganum Reyment (1954: 253, pl. 4 (fig. 1), text-figs 3h, 4). Since the holotype of the
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 127
isune 22
Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth). X 1. Lateral and ventral views of SAM—PCA1888.
latter preserves body chamber at relatively small diameter and resembles a small
M. mocamedensis, the two species could be dimorphs and synonyms; however, Zaborski
(1995) does not report ventrolateral horns of the size seen in M. mocamedensis for
P. paganum.
Morrowites depressus (Powell) (1963: 1228, pl. 168 (figs 1-3), pl. 170 (figs 4-5),
pl. 171 (fig. 1), text-figs 5e, 6fh; 1967: 313, figs 2-5) has much more-depressed whorls
than the present species, with a wider venter and sparser more-rigid ribs to the inner
whorls. Morrowites subdepressus Cobban & Hook (1983: 11, pl. 1 (figs 8-13), pl. 3
(figs 19-20), pl. 4 (figs 1-3, 12-16), pl. 7, text-figs 6-7) also has straighter, more-rigid
ribs and, apparently, does not develop exaggerated ventrolateral horns.
Morrowites dixeyi (Reyment) (1955: 50, pl. 9 (fig. 4), pl. 11 (fig. 2), text-figs 20-21) does
not develop the exaggerated ventrolateral horns of the present species; neither does
Morrowites michelobiensis (Laube & Bruder) (1887: 231, unnumbered text figure on p. 231).
Pseudaspidoceras flexuosum Powell (Kennedy et al. 1987: 34, pl. 2 (figs 1+, 8-13,
16-17), text-figs 3A—C, 5, 6C—D, 7A—C) differs from the present material in its subdued
ornament, looped ribs across the venter, and lack of ventrolateral horns. It is said to
include in its synonymy Madagascan Ampakabites auriculatus (Collignon) (1965: 29,
pl. 388 (fig. 1662), pl. 389 (fig. 1664)) and A. collignoni Cobban & Scott (1973: 81, pl. 29
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 23
Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth). Partial suture, showing external lobe (E) and lateral saddle (E/L),
of SAM—PCA1892 at 85 mm diameter.
(figs 1-3), text-figs 39-40) from the Western Interior (fide Kennedy et al. 1987).
Pseudaspidoceras sorachiense Matsumoto & Hashimoto (1953: 101, pl. 10 (fig. 1)) also
lacks ventrolateral horns and has straighter flank costae at comparable diameters;
moreover, no mention 1s made of the multiplicity of outer ventrolateral tubercles which is
a feature of the present species.
Pseudaspidoceras conciliatum (Stoliczka) (1864: 99, pl. 50 (fig. 4), pl. 51 (fig. 1)) isa
highly variable species with prominent outer ventrolateral tubercles which, to judge from
Stoliczka’s (1864, pl. 51 (fig. 1)) illustration, could be the septate bases of ventrolateral
horns; if this is so, it 1s generically distinct from Ampakabites. It differs from
M. mocamedensis in its quadrate whorl section at relatively small size, and its straighter,
more prominent ribs.
Pseudaspidoceras footeanum (Stoliczka) (1864: 101, pl. 52 (figs 1-2); Kennedy et al.
1987, text-fig. 4) apparently differs from the present species in its straighter flank costae,
more compressed whorls at large size, and in lacking the ventrolateral horns of the present
material. Howarth (1985: 98, figs 30-33) recently reported this species from the Novo
Redondo region of Angola, but at least one of his fragments (the original of his figure 31)
has been assigned to Mammites powelli Kennedy et al. (1987: 42, pl. 3 (figs 1-14), pl. 4
(figs 16-17), text-fig. 2F, G). According to Chancellor (1982) and Bengtson (1983),
Ammonites pedroanus White (1887: 212, pl. 22 (figs 1—2)) 1s a subjective junior synonym
of P. footeanum.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth) is known only from the upper Lower Turonian
of Angola.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 129
Figure 24
Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth). X 1. A body-chamber fragment, SAM—PCA1897, showing the
septate bases to the ventrolateral horns.
Superfamily COLLIGNONICERATACEAE Wright & Wright, 1951
(nom. transl. Cooper 1991 ex Collignoniceratidae Wright & Wright, 1951)
Family Collignoniceratidae Wright & Wright, 1951
Subfamily Barroisiceratinae Basse, 1947
Genus Forresteria Reeside, 1932
Type species
Barroisiceras (Forresteria) forresteri Reeside, 1932; by original designation
(Reeside, 1932: 14).
Forresteria sp.
Fig. 25
1976 Forresteria? sp.; Cooper, p. 102, pl. 48 (fig. C).
Material
A single eroded specimen, SAM—PCA1846 from Bed V, preserving recrystallized test
on one side.
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 25
Forresteria sp. X 1.5. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1846.
Description
The shell is poorly preserved due to erosion of one flank and the venter. What remains,
however, suggests a fairly evolute, compressed shell with about 30 per cent of the
penultimate whorl covered. The umbilicus is rather wide (about 35 per cent of the shell
diameter) and fairly deep, with a steep, narrow umbilical wall and gently rounded
shoulder. The flanks are broad and convex, with maximum width at midflank, and
converge to the narrow, eroded venter. Ornament comprises coarse rectiradiate ribs which
arise at the umbilical shoulder and develop into prominent swollen bullae just below
midflank. These give rise to two rectiradiate secondaries which are about as wide as the
interspaces.
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-PCA1846 c. 23 c. 14 (c. 61) c. 10 (c. 43) c. 1.40 c. 8 (35)
Discussion
This specimen shows the essential features of the genus but is otherwise too poorly
preserved for detailed comparison.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Forresteria is a Lower Coniacian genus, with near cosmopolitan distribution.
Family Peroniceratidae Hyatt, 1900
Subfamily Prionocyclinae Breistroffer, 1947
Genus Prionocyclus Meek, 1876
Type species
Ammonites novi-mexicani Marcou, 1858 (= A. serratocarinatus Meek, 187la (non
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 131
Figure 26
Prionocyclus cf. novimexicanus (Marcou). X 1.5. Lateral and oblique lateral views of SAM—PCA1943.
Stoliczka, 1865) = P. wyomingensis Meek, 1876); by original designation (Meek,
18716: 298).
Prionocyclus cf. novimexicanus (Marcou, 1858)
Fig. 26
Compare
1858 Ammonites novi-mexicani Marcou, p. 35, pl. | (fig. 2)).
1870 Ammonites serrato-carinatus Meek (non Stoliczka), p. 429.
1898 Prionocyclus wyomingensis (Meek); Logan, p. 463, pl. 106.
1946 Prionocyclus wyomingensis (Meek); Haas, p. 200, pl. 18 (figs 3-6), pls 19-24.
1971 Prionocyclus wyomingensis (Meek); Matsumoto, p. 132, pl. 21 (fig. 2), pl. 22 (fig. 1),
text-fig. 2.
19785 = Subprionocyclus? sp.; Cooper, p. 4.
1979 Prionocyclus novimexicanus (Marcou); Hook & Cobban, p. 34, fig. 3E—L.
1981 Prionocyclus novimexicanus (Marcou); Matsumoto ef al., p. 4.
Material
A single flattened specimen, SAM—PCA1943, preserving recrystallized test, was
picked up in surface scree and is assumed to originate from Bed IV.
Description
The shell is fairly evolute, probably rather compressed, and with about 20 per cent of
the preceding whorl covered. The umbilicus is shallow, moderately wide (about 30 per
132 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
AW “i ( AN
\ SUNN
.s \ \\
‘vane
ae
“Ey
Figure 27
Prionocycloceras carvalhoi (Howarth). xX 1. A-—B. Lateral and oblique ventral views of
SAM-—PCA1958. C. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1942.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 133
cent of the shell diameter), and with a steep, narrow umbilical wall and subrounded
umbilical shoulder. The flanks are relatively broad and, probably, were almost flat.
Ornament comprises primary ribs that begin at the umbilical seam and pass backwards
to the umbilical shoulder where they terminate in about 20 small but distinct umbilical
bullae per whorl. These, in turn, give rise singly or in pairs to sinuous, slightly
prorsiradiate flank costae which commonly are separated by one, rarely two, intercalated
ribs. There are about 50 ribs on the outer whorl, with 14 ribs per 6 umbilical bullae;
ribbing weakens slightly on the adoral part of the outer whorl. Each rib is ornamented with
paired clavi on the ventrolateral shoulder. Towards the adoral end of the shell, the lower
ventrolateral tubercles strengthen and show a tendency to become spinose. From the
upper ventrolateral clavi the ribs are weakly projected onto the venter, but they fail to
reach the finely serrated siphonal keel. The notches to the siphonal keel greatly outnumber
the ventrolateral clavi. There 1s a distinct oblique constriction near the adapical end of the
outer whorl. What can be seen- of the penultimate whorl shows dense fine ribbing with
frequent bifurcation and intercalation. Suture lines are not displayed. Because the
specimen is crushed almost flat morphometric analysis is impossible.
Discussion
Matsumoto (1971) noted the possible synonymy of P. novimexicanus and P. wyomingensis
when describing the latter species from Japan. Subsequently, Matsumoto ef al. (1921)
reassigned the Japanese material to Marcou’s (1858) species. Given the wide range of
variation documented for this species (Haas 1946), the crushed Angolan specimen is
perhaps conspecific, being closest to P. novimexicanus var. elegans (Haas).
Prionocyclus aberrans Matsumoto (1965: 25, pl. 5 (fig. 1), pl. 6 (fig. 3), text-figs 89;
1971: 133, pl. 21 (fig. 1), text-fig. 3) differs from the present species in having coarse,
simple flank costae, without bifurcation or intercalation. Prionocyclus cobbani
Matsumoto (1965: 21, pl. 4 (figs 1-4), text-fig. 7) and P. reesidei Sidwell (1932: 318,
pl. 49 (figs 10-12); Matsumoto 1965: 21, pl. 17 (fig. 1)) also are more coarsely ribbed,
with only 29-38 ribs per whorl, as is P. hyatti (Stanton) (1894: 176, pl. 42 (figs 5-8);
Matsumoto 1965: 19, pl. 17 (fig. 3)); the latter species also has flank costae differentiated
into those that are strong, umbilically bullate and horned, and those that are weak,
non-bullate, and hornless (Kennedy & Cobban 1988).
Stratigraphical occurrence
Prionocyclus novimexicanus (Marcou) is known from the upper Middle and low Upper
Turonian of North America (Wyoming, S. Dakota, New Mexico), Japan and probably Angola.
Genus Prionocycloceras Spath, 1926
Type species
Ammonites guayabanus Steinmann, 1881; by original designation of Spath (1926: 80).
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 28
Prionocycloceras carvalhoi (Howarth). X 1. A—B. Ventral and lateral views of SAM-—PCA1916.
C—D. Ventral and lateral views of SAM—PCA1896.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 135
Prionocycloceras carvalhoi (Howarth, 1968)
Figs 5A—D, 9B-C, 20D, 27-28
21967 Prionocycloceras guayabanum (Steinmann) Collignon, p. 48, pl. 29 (figs 1-3 only).
1968 Prionocyclus carvalhoi Howarth, p. 224, pl. | (figs 8-11), pl. 2 (figs 3-6).
19786 — Prionocycloceras carvalhoi (Howarth); Cooper, p. 4, fig. 7.
Material
Many fragmentary specimens, including SAM—PCA1754, 1758, 1832, 1896, 1911,
1916, 1931, 1942, 1944, 1958, and 1965, from Beds V and VI.
Description
The shell 1s compressed, evolute, with about 15 per cent of the preceding whorl
covered. The umbilicus is moderately wide (27-43 per cent of the shell diameter),
shallow, with subvertical walls and evenly rounded shoulders. The flat flanks are
subparallel and the broad venter is flattened in costal section, resulting in a subquadrate,
compressed whorl section (H/W = 1.13—1.42).
Ornament is variable. Ribs begin at the umbilical seam and pass backwards to the
umbilical shoulder where they form bullae of variable strength; on SAM—PCA1942 there
are conspicuous umbilical spines whereas SAM—PCA1896 and 1911 display irregular
tubercle development varying from strengthened growth lines to swollen bullae. From the
umbilical tubercles broad, low, indistinct, prorsiradiate ribs cross the flank, separated by
narrower interspaces, and terminate in septate ventrolateral spines which are directed
diagonally outward on SAM—PCA1758. At diameters of less than 35 mm, weak but
distinct ventrolateral clavi are also developed but these become obsolete in maturity.
Intercalated ribs are sporadically developed between main ribs and tend to be finer than
the latter, with poorly developed ventrolateral spines. Spine prominence 1s linked to the
size of the umbilical bullae; large spines are generally associated with conspicuous bullae
and vice versa. Ribs project strongly forwards on the venter, but become effaced before
reaching the conspicuously serrated stphonal keel. Serrations far exceed the number of
ventrolateral spines, with 11—12 in a distance equal to the whorl height. In maturity the
keel thickens and serrations become increasingly indistinct until, finally, only a broad low
siphonal hump remains which is crossed by growth striae. Sulci development on either
side of the keel is variable in early and middle growth; they are present in
SAM-PCA1754, 1758, 1916 and 1942, indistinct in SAM—PCA1911, and lacking from
SAM-—PCA1931 and 1965. The general tendency is for sulci to shallow and become
obsolete at large diameter.
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-—PCA1944 ? oy) 26 1.42 2
SAM-PCA1916 83 33 (40) E311) 1.06 28 (34)
SAM-PCA1896 78 34 (44) B05) (33) 155 28 (36)
: 53 23.5 (44) 20 (38) 1.18 19 (36)
SAM-—PCA1958 q3 30 (41) ? ? 25 (34)
SAM-—PCA1754 H 30 py) 136 2
SAM-PCA1758 ? 43 38 LS) y
SAM-PCA1807 34 14 (41) Lil (Bz) 127 11,5 (34)
SAM-PCA1942 34 15 (44) 11.5 (34) 1.30 9 (27)
SAM-PCA1832 ? 18.5 14.5 1.28 u
SAM-PCA1911 28 13 (46) 10.2 (36) 17 12 (43)
Discussion
Howarth (1968: 224) assigned the present species to Prionocyclus ‘... because the keel
is bordered by shallow sulci and the ribs are projected strongly forwards on the venter and
do not clearly join the keel’. However, the material now available shows much variation in
this respect; in addition, the new stratigraphical data show P. carvalhoi associated with
typical Coniacian forms. This, together with its coarser, sparser, more irregular ribbing
and propensity for horn development, suggests better reference to Prionocycloceras;
there can be no doubt, however, that the latter evolved from the former. The Angolan
material is characterized by well-developed but irregular flank ornament, with strong
radial ribs bearing spinose umbilical tubercles and long ventrolateral spines.
Moroccan P. keithyoungi (Collignon 1967: 49, pl. 30 (figs 3—5)) closely resembles
P. carvalhoi, but is characterized by migration of the umbilical tubercle up the flank
during ontogeny. Collignon (1967) recorded P. keithyoungi in association with
P. guayabanum (Steinmann), but some of his specimens (Collignon 1967, pl. 29 (figs 1-3
only)) differ from true P. guayabanum (Steinmann) (Gerhardt 1897: 197, pl. 5 (fig. 22);
Young 1963: 67, pl. 23 (figs 5—6), pl. 27 (figs 2-3); Renz 1982: 107, pl. 35 (figs 11—14)) in
being more strongly and densely ribbed, with distinct umbilical bullae, and are thus closer
to the present species. In view of the high intraspecific variability displayed by the
Angolan material, it seems certain that the host of nominal Prionocycloceras species are
an artefact of polymorphism.
Prionocycloceras portarum Etayo-Serna (1979: 95, pl. 13 (fig. 12), pl. 14 (fig. 4))
displays the subdued, sparse ribbing and very weak umbilical bullae of P. guayabanum,
and Renz (1982) included it in the synonomy of Steinmann’s (in Gerhardt 1897) species.
According to Young (1963), Peroniceras (Donjuaniceras) longispinata Basse (1951:
247, pl. 11 (figs 1—4)) is also a synonym of P. guayabanum.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 137
Prionocycloceras mediotuberculatum (Gerhardt) (1897: 198, pl. 5 (fig. 23)) differs
from the present species in having uniformly developed, flexuous, main ribs which swell
at midflank, with weaker umbilical bullae and no intercalated ribs.
Prionocycloceras wrighti Matsumoto (1971: 134, pl. 22 (fig. 2), fig. 4) is based upon a
juvenile that was separated from P. guayabanum on differences in the suture line and the
presence of doubled ventrolateral tubercles. The Angolan species shows doubled
ventrolateral tubercles in the juvenile growth stages and, consequently, the Japanese
species 1s poorly discriminated.
Prionocycloceras adkinsae Y oung (1963: 69, pl. 23 (figs 1-4), text-figs 25f, 28g, 34e)
is based on fragmentary material that is much more coarsely ribbed than the Angolan
material. Prionocycloceras gabrielense Y oung (1963: 69, pl. 24 (figs 1-3), pl. 29 (fig. 5),
pl. 67 (fig. 1), text-fig. 21c) is difficult to judge but, according to Kennedy & Cobban
(1991), is a giant Protexanites.
Prionocycloceras crenulatum (Anderson) (1902: 125, pl. 1 (figs 17-18); 1958: 263,
pl. 34 (figs 4—5)) differs from the present species in the loss of ventrolateral spines beyond
about 50 mm diameter. Gauthiericeras fauremuretae. Collignon (1967: 50, pl. 28
(fig. 10)) may be a Prionocycloceras; it differs from the present material in its denser,
more uniform ribbing.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Prionocycloceras carvalhoi (Howarth) 1s known with certainty only from the Lower
Coniacian of Angola, but may be present also in Morocco. —
Prionocycloceras sp.
Fig. 9A
Material
A single laterally crushed specimen, SAM—PCA1775, preserving recrystallized test
from Bed V.
Description
The shell is evolute, compressed, with about 15 per cent of the preceding whorl
covered. The umbilicus is wide and shallow (34 per cent of the diameter), with a fairly
steep umbilical wall and evenly rounded umbilical shoulder. The flanks are broad and flat
but the nature of the venter and the whorl section are obscured by crushing.
Beyond a diameter of 40 mm, ribbing becomes indistinct and the whorls are essentially
smooth save for conspicuous, horizontally directed ventrolateral horns. There are distinct
sulci bounding the conspicuously notched siphonal keel.
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Discussion
Superficially, the present specimen most closely resembles Prionocycloceras hazzardi
Young (1963: 71, pl. 24 (fig. 4), pl. 25 (figs 2-3), pl. 26 (figs 1-2), pl. 27 (fig. 4), pl. 34 |
(fig. 2), pl. 39 (fig. 3), text-figs 12f, 13b,d, 14g, 20h; Collignon, 1967: 49, pl. 31 (fig. 1)) but |
the latter species 1s a Protexanites (cf. Matsumoto 1965) and the Angolan specimen retains
the finely serrated keel of Prionocycloceras. It differs from P. carvalhoi (Howarth) in that
its ribbing becomes indistinct beyond 40 mm diameter, umbilical bullae are lacking, and the
ventrolateral spines are directed horizontally outwards. Perhaps it is merely an aberration.
Stratigraphical occurrence
Prionocycloceras sp. is currently known only from the Lower Coniacian of Angola.
AGE RELATIONSHIPS OF THE FAUNA
Bed I of the Sao Nicolau succession did not contain ammonites but Bed II yielded
Vascoceras cf. proprium (Reyment) and Morrowites mocamedensis (Howarth). Since
Morrowites is believed to have evolved from uppermost Cenomanian-basal Turonian —
Pseudaspidoceras, Bed 2 belongs to a level above the base of the Turonian. Bed III did not |
yield ammonites.
Bed IV yielded Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka), Hypophylloceras sp. nov.?,
Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge (kaffrarium morphotypes only), Tetragonites glabrus
Jimbo, Mossamedites serratocarinatus (Kennedy & Cobban), and Puebloites green- —
hornensis Cobban & Scott. Although most of these taxa are long ranging and do not
provide precise age determinations, M. serratocarinatus (Kennedy & Cobban) occurs in
the upper part of the Middle Turonian in New Mexico and serves to date Bed IV. This is
probably also the level of Prionocyclus cf. novimexicanum (Marcou). The bivalve
Acanthotrigonia shepstonei (Griesbach) also occurs in this bed, and this occurrence
represents the earliest record of the genus.
Bed V dates to the lowest Coniacian on the basis of the occurrence of Prionocycloceras
carvalhoi (Howarth) and Forresteria sp.; less-diagnostic species from this level include
Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge, Damesites ainuanus Matsumoto, Tetragonites
glabrus Jimbo, Gaudryceras mite (von Hauer), Anagaudryceras involvulum (Stoliczka),
Baculites klingeri sp. nov., Tongoboryceras? sp., and Hypophylloceras sp. Juv.
Bed V1is still Lower Coniacian, with abundant Prionocycloceras carvalhoi (Howarth)
and Veniella forbesiana (Stoliczka), together with Kossmaticeras theobaldianum
(Stoliczka) and Placenticeras kaffrarium Etheridge.
Beds VII and VIII contained no ammonites and Bed IX, the highest exposed bed in the
gullies, yielded only Mesopuzosia indopacifica (Stoliczka), a Middle Turonian to Lower
Coniacian species.
Almost the entire Turonian succession at Sao Nicolau therefore is condensed into only
3m of thin fossiliferous limestones and unfossiliferous siltstones, with the latter
predominant. By contrast, the overlying 7 m of the exposed section suggest only the
Petrocoriensis Zone at the base of the Coniacian is represented.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 139
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The fieldwork for this project was undertaken while the writer was employed by the
South African Museum. Drs M. A. Cluver and H. C. Klinger (South African Museum,
Cape Town), Dr J. Sornay (Muséum National d’histoire Naturelle, Paris), Dr D. Pajaud
(Université de Paris VII), and Prof. W. J. Kennedy (Oxford University Museum of
Natural History, Oxford) provided access to collections and assistance for which I am
grateful. Betsie Greyling and Lorraine van Hoof are thanked for assistance with the
photography.
REFERENCES
ANDERSON, F. M. 1902. Cretaceous deposits of the Pacific Coast. Proceedings of the Californian
Academy of Science (3) 2: 1-154.
ANDERSON, F. M. 1958. Upper Cretaceous of the Pacific Coast. Memoirs of the Geological Society of
America 71: 1-378.
ANDRADE, M. M. DE. 1957. Rochas vulcanicas da orla Meso-Cenozoica entre Benguela e
Mocamédes. Garcia de Orta 5 (4): 739-766.
BASSE, E. 1951. Quelques mollusques du crétacé de Colombie. Bulletin de la Société Géologique de
France (5) 20: 245-255.
BASSE, E. 1963. Quelques ammonites nouvelles du crétacé supérieur d’ Angola. Bulletin de la Société
Géologique de France (7) 4: 871-876.
BENGTSON, P. 1983. The Cenomanian—Coniacian of the Sergipe basin, Brazil. Fossils and Strata 11:
1-78.
BERTHOU, P. Y., CHANCELLOR, G. R. & LAUVERJAT, J. 1985. Revision of the Cenomanian—
Turonian ammonite Vascoceras Choffat, 1898, from Portugal. Comunicagoes da Commissao dos
trabalhos do Servico Geologico de Portugal 75 (1): 55-79.
BIRKELUND, T. 1965. Ammonites from the Upper Cretaceous of West Greenland. Meddelelser om
Gronland udgivne af Kommissionen for Videnskabelige Undersogelser i Gronland 179 (7): 1-192.
BOULE, M., LEMOINE, P. & THEVENIN, A. 1906-7. Paléontologie de Madagascar, III.
Céphalopodes crétacés des environs de Diego-Suarez. Annales de paléontologie 1 (1906): 173-192;
24 2(1907): 1-56.
CARVALHO, G. S. DE. 1958. As formacoes cretacicas da bacia de Mocamédes (Angola) e alguns dos
sevs problemas. Publicacoes do Museu e Laboratorio Mineralogico e Geologico da Faculdade
Ciéncias, Universidade do Porto (3) 75: 1-32.
CARVALHO, G. S. DE. 1960. Sobre os depositos cretacicos do litoral de Angola. Boletim. Servigo
Geologico e Minas de Angola 1: 37-48.
CARVALHO, G. S. DE. 1961. Geologia do deserto de Mocamédes (Angola). Uma Contribuigao para o
Conhecimento dos Problemas da Orla Sedimentar de Mocamédes. Memorias da Junta de
Investigacoes do Ultramar(2) 26: 1-227.
CHANCELLOR, G. 1982. Cenomanian—Turonian ammonites from Coahuila, Mexico. Bulletin of the
Geological Institutions of the University of Uppsala, n.s., 9: 77-129.
CHOFFAT, P. 1899. Recueil d’études paléontologiques sur la faune crétacique du Portugal: Vol. 1.
Espeéces nouvelles ou peu connues: Deuxieme série. Les Ammonées du Bellasien des Couches a
Neolobites vibrayanus, du Turonien et du Sénonien 11: 41-86. (Dated 1898.)
40) ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
COBBAN, W. A. 1951. New species of Baculites from the Upper Cretaceous of Montana and South |
Dakota. Journal of Paleontology 25: 817-821.
COBBAN, W. A. & HOOK, S. C. 1983. Mid-Cretaceous (Turonian) ammonite fauna from Fence Lake |
area of west-central New Mexico. Memoirs. New Mexico Bureau of Mines and Mineral Resources |
41: 1-50. |
COBBAN, W. A. & SCOTT, G. R. 1973. Stratigraphy and ammonite fauna of the Graneros Shale and |
Greenhorn Limestone near Pueblo, Colorado. Professional Papers. United States Geological Survey
645: 1-108. [For 1972.] |
COLLIGNON, M. 1931. Faunes sénoniennes du nord et de l’ouest de Madagascar. Annales —
Géologiques du Service des mines, Madagascar 1: \—66. |
COLLIGNON, M. 1932. Paléontologie de Madagascar. XVII. Fossiles du crétacé supérieur du Meénabe.
Annales de Paléontologie 21: 35-87.
COLLIGNON, M. 1952. Ammonites néocrataceés du Menabe (Madagascar). II. Les Pachydiscidae.
Travaux. Bureau Service Géologique de Madagascar et dépendances 17: 1-114.
COLLIGNON, M. 1955. Ammonites neocrétaceés du Ménabe (Madagascar), III. Les
Kossmaticeratidae. Travaux. Bureau Géologique, Service Géologique de Madagascar et
dépendances 62: 9-54.
COLLIGNON, M. 1956. Ammonites neocrétacées du Ménabe (Madagascar). IV. Les Phylloceratidae.
V. Les Gaudryceratidae. VI. Les Tetragonitidae. Annales Géologiques du Service des mines,
Madagascar 23: 1-106.
COLLIGNON, M. 1961. Ammonites neocrétacées du Ménabe (Madagascar), VII. Les Desmoceratidae.
Annales Géologiques du Service des Mines, Madagascar 31: \—115.
COLLIGNON, M. 1965. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites). XII.
(Turonien). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1967. Les céphalopodes crétacées du Bassin cotier de Tarfaya. Relations
stratigraphiques et paléontologiques. Notes et Mémoires du Service Géologique du Maroc 175:
10-148. [Misdated 1966.]
COLLIGNON, M. 1977. Ammonites du cretacé moyen-supérieur de l’Angola. Centenario da
Academia das Ciéncias de Lisboa. Reconhecimento cientifico de Angola: Estudos de geologia e
paleontologia e de micologia 2: 1-75.
COOPER, M. R. 1972. The Cretaceous stratigraphy of Sao Nicolau and Salinas, Angola. Annals of the
South African Museum 60 (8): 245-251.
COOPER, M. R. 1973. Cenomanian ammonites from Novo Redondo, Angola. Annals of the South
African Museum 62 (2): 41-67.
COOPER, M. R. 1976. The Cretaceous palaeontology and stratigraphy of Angola. Unpublished D. Phil.
thesis, Oxford University.
COOPER, M. R. 1978a. Uppermost Cenomanian—basal Turonian ammonites from Salinas, Angola.
Annals of the South African Museum 75 (5): 51-152, 39 figs.
COOPER, M. R. 19786. The mid-Cretaceous (Albian—Turonian) biostratigraphy of Angola. Annales du
Museum d Histoire Naturelle de Nice 4 (1976): xvi.1—22.
COOPER, M. R. 1989. Additions to the Cretaceous ammonite fauna from Zululand. South African
Journal of Geology 92 (3): 250-253.
DE KAY, J. E. 1828. Report on several multilocular shells from the State of Delaware, with
observations on a second specimen of the new fossil genus Eurypterus. Annals of the Lyceum of
Natural History of New York 2: 273-275, 277-279.
ETAYO-SERNA, F. 1979. Zonation of the Cretaceous of central Colombia by ammonites.
Publicaciones Geologicas Especiales del Ingeominas Colombia 2: 1-186.
tL THERIDGE, R. 1904. Cretaceous fossils from Natal. 1. The Umkwelane Hill deposits. Report of the
Geological Survey of Natal and Zululand 2: 71-93.
FORBES, E. 1846. Report on the fossil Invertebrata from Southern India. Transactions of the
Geological Society of London 27 (3): 97-174.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 141
| FRITSCH, A. & SCHLONBACH, U. 1872. Cephalopoden der B6hmischen Kreideformation. Prague:
| A. Fritsch.
GERHARDT, K. 1897. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Kreideformation in Venezuela und Peru. Jn:
STEINMANN, G., Beitrage zur Geologie und Palaeontologie von Siidamerika. V. Neues Jahrbuch
fiir Mineralogie, Geologie und Paldontologie, Beilageband 11: 65-208.
GILL, T. 1871. Arrangement of the family of mollusks. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Contributions 227:
1-49.
GROSSOUVRE, A. DE. 1894. Recherches sur la Craie Supérieure. II. Paléontologie les ammonites de
la Craie Superieure. Mémoires pour servir a l’explication de la carte géologique détaillée de la
France. Paris: Imprimerie Nationale.
GROSSOUVRE, A. DE. 1901. Recherches sur la Craie Supérieure. I. Stratigraphie générale. Mémoires
pour servir a l’explication de la carte géologique détaillée de la France: 1—1013.
HAAS, O. 1942. Some Upper Cretaceous ammonites from Angola. American Museum Novitates 1182:
1-24.
HAAS, O. 1946. Intraspecific variation in, and ontogeny of, Prionotropis woollgari and Prionocyclus
wyomingensis. Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History 86 (4): 141-224.
HAAS, O. 1952. Some Albian desmoceratid and lytoceratid ammonites from Angola. American
Museum Novitates 1561: 1-17. ‘i |
HAUER, F. VON. 1866. Neue Cephalopoden aus den Gosaugebilden der Alpen. Sitzungsberichte der
Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien (1) 53: 300-308.
HAUGHTON, S.H. 1925. Notes on some Cretaceous fossils from Angola (Cephalopoda and
Echinoidea). Annals of the South African Museum 22 (1): 263-288.
HAUGHTON, S. H. 1930. On the occurrence of Upper Cretaceous marine fossils near Bogenfels, S. W.
Africa. Transactions of the Royal Society of South Africa 18 (4): 361-365.
HENDERSON, R. A. & McNAMARA, K. J. 1985. Maastrichtian non-heteromorph ammonites from
the Miria Formation, Western Australia. Palaeontology 28 (1): 35-88.
HOOK, S. C. & COBBAN, W. A. 1979. Prionocyclus novimexicanus (Marcou)—common Upper
Cretaceous guide fossil in New Mexico. Annual Report of the New Mexico Bureau of Mineral
Resources, July 1, 1977—June 30, 1978: 34-42.
HOPPENER, H. 1958. Brief report on the palaeontology of the Cuanza basin—Angola. Boletim da
Sociedade Geologica de Portugal 12 (3): 75-82.
HOUSA, V. 1967. Lewesiceras Spath (Pachydiscidae, Ammonitida) from the Turonian of Bohemia.
Sbornick Geologickych Ved Rada Paleontologie, Praha P9: 1—50.
HOWARTH, M. K. 1965. Cretaceous ammonites and nautiloids from Angola. Bulletin of the British
Museum of Natural History (Geology) 10 (10): 335-412.
HOWARTH, M. K. 1968. A mid-Turonian ammonite fauna from the Mocamédes Desert, Angola.
Garcia de Orta 14: 217-228.
HOWARTH, M. K. 1985. Cenomanian and Turonian ammonites from the Novo Redondo area, Angola.
Bulletin of the British Museum of Natural History (Geology) 39: 73-105.
HYATT, A. 1870. Report on the Cretaceous fossils. In; HARTT, C. F., Geology and physical
geography of Brazil: 385—393. Boston: Field, Osgood & Co.
JIMBO, K. 1894. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Fauna der Kreideformation von Hokkaido.
Palaontologische Abhandlungen (n.s.) 2 (3): 147-194.
JONES, D. L. 1967. Cretaceous ammonites from the lower part of the Matanuska Formation, southern
Alaska. Professional Paper. United Sates Geological Survey 547: 1-49.
JUIGNET, P. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1976. Faunes d’ammonites et biostratigraphie comparée du
Cénomanien de nord-ouest de la France (Normandie) et du sud de |’ Angleterre. Bulletin trimestriel
de la Société Géologique de Normandie et des amis du Muséum du Havre 63 (2): 1-193.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 1988. Mid-Turonian ammonite faunas from northern Mexico.
Geological Magazine 125 (6): 593-612.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 1991. Coniacian ammonite faunas from the United States
Western Interior. Special Papers in Palaeontology 45: |1—96.
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
KENNEDY, W. J. & JUIGNET, P. 1975. Présence du genre Anagaudryceras (Ammonoidea) dans le
Cénomanien de Haute-Normandie. Compte rendu sommaire des Séances de la Société Géologique
de France (3) 1975b: 77-79.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1977a. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. The ammonite family Phylloceratidae. Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History)
(Geology) 25 (5): 349-380.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1977b. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. The ammonite family Tetragonitidae Hyatt, 1900. Annals of the South African Museum 73
(7): 149-197.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1979. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
The ammonite family Gaudryceratidae. Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History) (Geology)
31 (2): 121-174.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1985. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
The ammonite family Kossmaticeratidae Spath, 1922. Annals of the South African Museum 95 (5):
165-231.
KENNEDY, W. J. & SUMMESBERGER, H. 1979. A revision of Ammonites mitis Hauer and
Ammonites glaneggensis Redtenbacher from the Gosau Beds (Upper Cretaceous) of Austria.
Beitrdge zur Paldontologie von Osterreich 6: 71-87.
KENNEDY, W. J., WRIGHT, C. W. & HANCOCK, J. M. 1987. Basal Turonian ammonites from West
Texas. Palaeontology 30 (1): 27-74.
KLINGER, H. C. 1977. Cretaceous deposits near Bogenfels, South West Africa. Annals of the South
African Museum 73 (3): 81-92.
KLINGER, H.C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1989. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
The ammonite family Placenticeratidae Hyatt, 1900. Annals of the South African Museum 98 (9):
241-408.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1996. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
The ammonite family Baculitidae Gill, 1871. Annals of the South African Museum 105 (1): 1-206.
KOSSMAT, F. 1895-98. Untersuchungen tiber die Siidindischen Kreideformationen, 1. Beitrdge zur
Paldontologie Osterreich-Ungarns und des Orients 9 (1895): 97-203; 11 (1897): 1-46; 11(1898):
89-152.
LAMARCK, J. B. 1799. Prodrome d’une nouvelle classification des coquilles. Mémoires de la Société
d'Histoire Naturelle de Paris: 63-91.
LAMARCK, J. B. 1801. Systéme des animaux sans vertébres. Paris: Deterville.
LAUBE, G. C. & BRUDER, G. 1887. Ammoniten der béhmischen Kreide. Palaeontographica 3:
217-239.
LOGAN, W. N. 1898. The invertebrates of the Benton, Niobrara and Fort Pierre Groups. Kansas
University Geological Survey 4 (8): 431-518.
MARCOU, J. 1858. Geology of North America, with two reports on the prairies of Arkansas and Texas,
the Rocky Mountains of New Mexico and the Sierra Nevada of California. Zurich.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1942a. A note on the Japanese ammonoid species belonging to the Tetragonitidae.
Proceedings of the Imperial Academy of Japan 18: 671-673.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1942. A short note on the Japanese Cretaceous Phylloceratidae. Proceedings of the
Imperial Academy of Japan 18: 674-676.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1954. Family Puzosiidae from Hokkaido and Saghalien. Memoir of the Faculty of
Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 5 (2): 69-118.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1957. A Turonian Damesites from Hokkaido, Japan. (Studies of the Cretaceous
ammonites from Hokkaido and Saghalien—XII). Transactions and Proceedings of the
Palaeontological Society of Japan, n.s., 27: 86-88.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1959. Upper Cretaceous ammonites of California. Part II. Memoirs of the Faculty of
Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology), Special Volume 1: 1-172.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1965. A monograph of the Collignoniceratidae from Hokkaido. Part 1. Transactions
and Proceedings of the Palaeontological Society of Japan, n.s., 16 (1): 1-80.
UPPER CRETACEOUS (TURONIAN-CONIACIAN) AMMONITES FROM SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 143
MATSUMOTO, T. 1971. A monograph of the Collignoniceratidae from Hokkaido. Part 5. Memoirs of
the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (D, Geology) 21 (1): 129-162.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1984. Some ammonites from the Campanian (Upper Cretaceous) of northern
Hokkaido. Palaeontological Society of Japan. Special Paper 27: \—93.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1988. A monograph of the Puzosiidae (Ammonoidea) from the Cretaceous of
Hokkaido. Palaeontological Society of Japan. Special Paper 30: 1-179.
MATSUMOTO, T. & HASHIMOTO, W. 1953. A find of Pseudaspidoceras from Hokkaido, Japan.
(Studies on the Cretaceous ammonites from Hokkaido and Saghalien—Il). Transactions and
Proceedings of the Palaeontological Society of Japan, n.s., 12: 97-102, pl. 10, | fig.
MATSUMOTO, T., FUTAKAMI, M., TANABE, K. & OBATA, I. 1981. Upper Turonian ammonite
assemblages in the Pombets area, central Hokkaido. Bulletin of the Kitakyushu Museum of Natural
History 3: 1-10. [In Japanese. |
MATSUMOTO, T. & MOROZUML, Y. 1980. Late Cretaceous ammonites from the Izumi Mountains,
southwest Japan. Bulletin of the Osaka Museum of Natural History 33: \—31.
MATSUMOTO, T. & OBATA, I. 1955. Some Upper Cretaceous desmoceratids from Hokkaido and
Saghalien. Memoirs of the Faculty. of Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 5 (3):
119-151.
MATSUMOTO, T. & OBATA, I. 1963. A monograph of the Baculitidae from Japan. Preface and Part 1.
Memoir of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 13 (1): 1-73.
MATSUMOTO, T., TOSHIMITSU, S. & KAWASHITA, Y. 1990. On Hauericeras de Grossouvre,
1894, a Cretaceous ammonite genus. Transactions and Proceedings of the Palaeontological Society
of Japan, n.s., 24 158: 439-458.
MEEK, F. B. 1970. A preliminary list of fossils, collected by Dr Hayden in Colorado, New Mexico and
California, with brief descriptions of a few of the new species. Proceedings of the American
Philosophical Society 11 (84): 425—431.
MEEK, F. B. 1876. A report on the invertebrate Cretaceous and Tertiary fossils of the Upper Missoury
County. U.S. Geological Survey of the Territories 9:1—629.
MEEK, F. B. 1871a. A preliminary list of fossils collected by Dr Hayden in Colorado, New Mexico and
California, with brief descriptions of a few of the new species. Proceedings of the American
Philosophical Society 11: 425-431.
MEEK, F. B. 18715. Preliminary palaeontological report, consisting of lists of fossils, with descriptions
of some new types, etc. United States Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories.
Annual Report 4 (1870): 287-318.
PICTET, F.-J. 1848. Description des mollusques fossiles qui se trouvent dans les grés verts des environs
de Genéve. Mémoires de la Société de Physique et d Histoire naturelle de Geneve 11 (2): 257-412.
POWELL, J. D. 1963. Turonian (Cretaceous) ammonites from northeastern Chihuahua, Mexico.
Journal of Paleontology 37 (6): 1217-1232, pls 166-171.
REESIDE, J. B. 1932. The Upper Cretaceous ammonite genus Barroisiceras in the United States.
Professional Paper. United States Geological Survey 214—A: 1-11.
RENZ, O. 1982. The Cretaceous ammonites of Venezuela. Basel: Maraven.
REY MENT, R. A. 1954. Some new Upper Cretaceous ammonites from Nigeria. Colonial Geology and
Mineral Resources 4 (3): 248-270.
REYMENT, R. A. 1955. The Cretaceous Ammonoidea of southern Nigeria and the southern
Cameroons. Bulletin. Geological Survey of Nigeria 25: 1-112.
ROMAN, F. & MAZERAN, P. 1913. Monographie Paléontologique de la faune du Turonien du Basin
d’Uchaux et de ses dépendance. Archives du Muséum d’histoire naturelle de Lyon 12 (2): 1-137.
SALFELD, H. 1924. Die Bedeutung der Konservativstamme ftir die Stammesentwicklung der
Ammonoideen. Leipzig.
SCHLUTER, C. 1871-6. Cephalopoden der oberen deutschen Kreide. Palaeontographica 21
(1871-72): 1-120; 24 (1876): 121-264.
SHIMIZU, S. 1935. The Upper Cretaceous cephalopods of Japan. Part I. Journal of the Shanghai
Science Institute (Il) 2: 159-226.
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SIDWELL, R. 1932. New species from the Colorado group, Cretaceous in south central Wyoming.
Journal of Paleontology 6: 312-318.
SPATH, L. F. 1926. On new ammonites from the English Chalk. Geological Magazine 63 (2): 77-83.
STANTON, T. W. 1894. The Colorado Formation and its invertebrate fauna. Bulletin. United States
Geological Survey 106: 1-288. [For 1893.]
STOLICZKA, F. 1863-66. The fossil Cephalopoda of the Cretaceous rocks of southern India.
Ammonitidae with revision of the Nautilidae & c. Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India,
Palaeontologica indica (3) 1 (1863): 41-56; 2-5 (1864): 57-106; 6-9 (1865): 107-154; 10-13
(1866):155—216.
THIELE, S. 1933. Neue Fossilfunde aus der Kreide von Angola mit einem Beitrag zur
Stammesgeschichte der Gattung Pervinquieria Bohm. Zentrablatt fur Mineralogie, Geologie und
Paldontologie (B) 1933: 110-123.
TOKUNAGA, S. & SHIMIZU, S. 1926. The Cretaceous formation of Futaba in Iwaki and its fossils.
Journal of the Faculty of Science, Tokyo Imperial University 21 (6): 181-212.
USHER, J. L. 1952. Ammonite fauna of the Upper Cretaceous of Vancouver Island, British Colombia.
Bulletin. Geological Survey of Canada 21: 1-182.
WHITE, C. A. 1887. Contribution to the palaeontology of Brazil; comprising descriptions of Cretaceous
invertebrate fossils mainly of the Provinces of Sergipe, Pernambuco, Para and Bahia. Archivos do
Museu nacional, Rio de Janeiro 7: 1-273.
WRIGHT, C. W. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1984. The Ammonoidea of the Lower Chalk. Part I.
Palaeontographical Society. Monographs: 1-126.
YABE, H. 1903. Cretaceous Cephalopoda from the Hokkaido. Part 1. Journal of the College of Science,
Imperial University, Tokyo, Japan 18 (2): 1-55.
YOUNG, K. 1963. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from the Gulf Coast of the United States. University of
Texas Publications 6304: 1-373.
ZABORSKI, P. M. P. 1985. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from the Calabar region, south-east Nigeria.
Bulletin of the British Museum of Natural History (Geology) 39 (1): 1-72.
ZABORSKI, P. M. P. 1995. The Upper Cretaceous ammonite Pseudaspidoceras Hyatt, 1903, in
north-eastern Nigeria. Bulletin of the British Museum of Natural History (Geology) 51 (1): 53-72.
ares
a :
an J - - | | ;
. 4 PAS 4 | : | _ :
| Peake ] 7 hx ' . e ic .,
Peay Ask vsti ine |
7
a
Be BTRATICIRA:
Ur. acp : :
a . S , : ; = ; 5
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 110 Band
August 2003 Augustus
Part 3 Deel
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF THE
UPPER CRETACEOUS (SANTONIAN) BABA FORMATION
AT SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA
by
MICHAEL ROBERT COOPER
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and review
articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
C20 59), ED) ESTES eas), AGI), SUES, 7D), GGL, tao.)
CY SW, 7), (CES), IND, 5, 7 eos), II), 154-5),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 185 7
| DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF THE
UPPER CRETACEOUS (SANTONIAN) BABA FORMATION
AT SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA
by
MICHAEL ROBERT COOPER
Department of Geology, University of Durban-Westville
Durban, KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa
With 9 figures
[MS submitted March 1998|
[MS accepted 1998]
=
ABSTRACT
The stratigraphy and palaeontology of the Baba Formation is described from west of Sao Nicolau in
the Mocamedes Desert. The transgressive-regressive succession 1s divided into a lower unit of richly
fossiliferous marine limestones and fine-grained clastics, the Cani¢o Member (new term), and an upper
unit of nearshore coarse clastics, the Bero Member. Ammonites from the Canico Member include
Texanites, ?Protexanites, Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) and Damesites, and serve to date both the base of
the Baba Formation and a major transgressive event to the Middle Santonian. This indicates a Middle
Coniacian to Lower Santonian age for basaltic lavas of the Ombe Formation.
CONTENTS
PAGE
tastg CHT sO Ol merece ee te err erate Mat cee OE Sc astihe 0h stra slot sa voawnv sanithe teen? eeaaeegcuatacmreswhsrant: MERMORERERE ccna 149
SSAicl OL rca) Ny Aa a eet ee eH RD ae Gh snd cE aie te haa caida souacutouadcauaaneuduedevendiae temttee tt mtod eeseeees 149
SH SUC MAMMA AC OMUOLO Ry aatrarats ne see ene Senco cece (okwceessasciaseuteneende onabebidesscnewasdecentScktesscoc eee eMeee ay coc we 53)
Spree aa COMMER C CAC ee ate tcc elece cc carecticedsscaccepcilenndvaaeeaennsseducee eeccoceatecceeetee: se: ae ReOPREERE =. cca 8a- 153
SUPAe flr ATM BIDS SMMMOCERALAC CAC rare eran a oeste odoin ack snsect ecg udes'swuinecos eennevensotes sie nenae tnceaase sceetonbcnenetan teaser 55)
SMe amily COllien@ Mie erataCeAae as. .kinccssa cscs ssnccwadunnecies-osceenect aden ccusucnesdtancndacdet state seusaceeree one eeeese 161
FXO ANON AC CIC MUS eer ee MEN RM Mend A sci crs <5 Scteasaras deciaAce sala aemaumuetannsedeere erate aackeeaent erste ce meae tee deucbete 166
HRS CRC ING © Seen cree AAT Re Meats Pee AE ots wart Sun sles Yattnel ooo asdcunasibvn Tognde nest aNenet dgvanemacnateemt enema tessa coat 166
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 110 (3), 2003: 147-170, 9 figs.
147
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Ponta da Salinas
Fauna studied
by Cooper, 1978
oe *
EV isa ce
Fauna studied
by Howarth, 1968
he Younger cover Fauna studied
by Cooper, 2003a
= Baba Formation
= Ombe Formation
7 Salinas Formation fauna
Piambo Formation
Present
Figure |
Locality map showing distribution of the Sado Nicolau Group in the vicinity of the Farol de Ponta Grossa.
Adapted from Carvalho (1961).
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 149
INTRODUCTION
This paper continues the writer’s account of the Cretaceous ammonite faunas and
stratigraphy of Angola (Cooper 1972, 1973, 1974, 1983, 1989; Cooper & Kennedy 1979),
and concerns the Baba Formation at Sao Nicolau (Fig. 1).
Mouta & Borges (1926) were the first to study this lithostratigraphical unit; based on
occurrence of the bivalves Crassatella numidica Munier-Chalmas, Cardita beaumonti
d’Archiac and Roundaireia drui Munier-Chalmas, they assigned a Senonian age to the
Baba Formation. This age was confirmed by Rennie’s (1929) study of Mollusca from the
stratotype at Baba (some 60 km to the south of the present locality); identification of
Trigonarca angolensis Rennie, T. cf. trichinopolitensis (Forbes), Nemodon natalensis
(Baily), Veniella drui (Munier-Chalmas), Cardita barroneti Munier-Chalmas, Cardium
(Trachycardium) reynoldsi Rennie, Tellina (Palaeomoera?) sp. and Turritella
(Haustator?) cf. acanthophora (Muller) led Rennie (1929) to assign a Campanian—
Maastrichtian age to the deposit. This determination was repeated by Mouta & O’ Donnell
(1933) and Mouta (1938).
Subsequent work has centred around the present exposures at Sao Nicolau; from here
Rennie (1945) identified Trigonia (Scabrotrigonia) shepstoni Griesbach, Turritella (Zaria)
bonei Baily, and Lima (Mantellum) sp., revising the age of the Baba Formation to Campanian.
Borges (1946; cited in Carvalho 1961) listed nine molluscan species from immediately above
the basalts at Sao Nicolau, but these identifications are suspect. Most recently, Spath (1951)
identified Eutrephoceras indicum (Spengler) (= E. spengleri Wiedmann) and Baculites aff.
asper (Morton) from collections made by O’Donnell at Sao Nicolau.
The lithostratigraphy of the Baba Formation in the Mo¢camedes Desert was described
in detail by Carvalho (1961) and this worker accepted the Campanian age ascribed these
rocks. However, Cooper (1972, 1979) described the Cretaceous stratigraphy of the region
around Sao Nicolau and Salinas and, on the basis of preliminary ammonite identifications,
assigned an early Santonian age to the sediments overlying the volcanics, 1.e. the Cani¢o
Member.
STRATIGRAPHY
Cooper (1979) first applied formal lithostratigraphical nomenclature to the Cretaceous
succession of the Mocamedes desert. The Baba Formation was introduced for marine
sediments which disconformably overlie the Ombe Volcanic Formation and are, in turn,
overlain disconformably by the Mocuio Formation with a basal bone bed rich in vertebrate
remains. The latter, which include Mososaurus beaugei Arambourg and selachian teeth
assigned to Squalicorax pristodontus (Agassiz), S. kaupi (Agassiz), Cretolamna
biauriculata moroccana (Arambourg), Carcharias subulata (Agassiz), Rhombodus
binkhorsti Dames, Enchodus elegans Darteville & Casier, E. lybicus Quaas, E. bursauxi
Arambourg and E. lemonnieri Dollo (Darteville & Casier 1941, 1946; Darteville 1942;
Carvalho 1961), serve to date the Mocuio Formation to the uppermost Campanian/
Maastrichtian.
150
BABA FORMATION
\
Vite
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Neogene deposits
Pale greyish-green to yellowish siltstones with
numerous irregular concretions in the upper two
metres.
Siltstones, similar to above but often highly
concretionary and with occasional thin limestones.
Upper surface of limestone corroded
Limonitized burrows
Inoceramite with Hauericeras and Texanites
Highly concretionary, with inoceramite capping
Dispersed concretions and bivalves
Coquinoidal orange sandy limestone with fossils,
including Texanites, ?Protexanites and Damesites,
preserved in orange calcite
Unfossiliferous pitted orange sandstone
Inoceramite
Massive grey limestone rich in Phygraea and with
a basal sedimentary breccia of volcanic clasts
OMBE FORMATION
Figure 2
‘ured section through the Canico Member, Baba Formation, west of Sao Nicolau.
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA fay
Carvalho (1961) identified a fundamental division within the Baba Formation,
separating a lower unit of richly fossiliferous marine limestones and fine-grained clastics
from the conformably overlying coarse clastics (with inoceramid prisms) of the Bero
Conglomerate Member. This division is widespread in the Mocamedes Desert and it is
proposed here to recognize these lithological differences formally, with the introduction
of the Canico Member. The stratotype for the latter unit is in the Damba do Canico, to the
south of Chapéu Armado (cf. Carvalho 1961).
To the south-east of the Farol de Ponta Grossa (Fig. 1), the Baba Formation is
represented only by the Canic¢o Member, which here comprises a succession of
fossiliferous limestones and decalcified fine-grained clastics with concretionary horizons
and layers of inoceramite (Fig. 2). These marine sediments rest disconformably on the
Ombe Formation with a basal sedimentary breccia of volcanic clasts and, in turn, are
disconformably overlain by Neogene conglomerates (‘Tirreniano’ fide Carvalho (1961),
but probably Pliocene). Fossils, which are most abundant in the lower part of the Canico
Member, are dominated by bivalves (Figs 3—5). The collections in the South African
Museum include Neithea (Neithea) quinquecostata (J. Sowerby), Acanthotrigonia sp. juv.,
Veniella undata (Conrad), Protocardia cf. umkwelanensis (Etheridge), Trachycardium
cf. reynoldsi (Rennie), Oscillopha cf. dichotoma (Bayle), Plicatula aff. auressensis
(Coquand) and Phygraea aff. newberryi (Stanton), with which are associated the echinoid
Bolbaster and occasional, mostly unidentified gastropods. The ammonites described here
come from units II and III of the stratigraphic column.
Because Santonian macrofossil biostratigraphy is poorly known in detail, the precise
age of the succession is problematical. The association of Texanites + Hauericeras
(Gardeniceras) immediately brackets the Cani¢o Member into the Santonian—Lower
Campanian. Although the presence of ?Protexanites in unit I] led Cooper (1972) to favour
an early Santonian age for the Cani¢o Member, this ammonite genus is now known to
extend into the Upper Santonian (Toshimitsu 1988).
The relative abundance of Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) gardeni (Baily) and Texanites
venustus Collignon in the Sao Nicolau fauna is believed to be biostratigraphically
meaningful since these taxa first appear only in the Middle Santonian ‘Zone a Texanites
hourcqui’ of Madagascar (Besairie 1972: 285) and, likewise, are absent from the Lower
Santonian of Zululand (pers. obs.). The balance of faunal evidence favours, therefore, a
mid-Santonian age for the Canico Member at Sao Nicolau. This determination, together
with the early Coniacian age assigned to the uppermost observed levels of the Salinas
Formation, serves to date Ombe volcanism as Middle Coniacian to Lower Santonian.
A mid-Santonian age for the marine transgression responsible for Baba sedimentation
_ 1S of some significance, since it is of identical age to the major late Cretaceous trans-
gressive event along the east coast of Africa (Cooper 1974, 1976), and accounts for the
similarity between the Baba and Mzamba molluscan faunas (Rennie 1945; Carvalho
1961). The overlying Bero Conglomerate, a proximal shoreline facies, indicates shoaling
upward and deposition of the upper Baba Formation under regressive conditions;
unfortunately, the latter phase is not yet dated precisely. However, the transgressive-
regressive cycle responsible for deposition of the Baba Formation is believed to correlate
152 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 3
A D. Veniella undata (Conrad). X 1. Interior, lateral, dorsal and anterior views of a left valve,
SAM-PCA\976, E-F. Oscillopha cf. dichotoma (Bayle). < 1. Internal and external views of a right
valve, SAM—PCA1989.
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 152
with Sequence 32 of the global sea-level curve (Hag et al. 1987).
All the material described here is housed in the South African Museum, Cape Town.
Abbreviations for measurements are as follows: D = shell diameter, H = whorl height,
W = whorl width, U = umbilical diameter, c. = circa, applies to measurements which have
been estimated, whether due to erosion, damage or distortion; all measurements are
followed, in parentheses, by the dimension as a ratio of the shell diameter.
SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY
Subclass AMMONOIDEA Zittel, 1884
Order AMMONITIDA Agassiz, 1847
Suborder TURRILITINA Besnosov & Mikhailova, 1983
Superfamily BACULITACEAE Gill, 1871
Family Baculitidae Gill, 1871
Genus Baculites Lamarck, 1799
Type species
Baculites vertebralis Lamarck, 1799; by the subsequent designation of Meek, 1876.
Baculites aff. bailyi (Woods, 1906)
Compare
1906 Baculites bailyi Woods, p. 341, pl. 44 (fig. 5).
QS Baculites aff. asper (Morton); Spath, 1951: 127.
Material
Three very small fragments, SAM—PCA2042, 2045-6, preserved as internal moulds.
Description
Typically baculitid, with a straight tapering shaft and compressed, elliptical whorl
section. Except for some very faint undulations across the venter, ornament appears to be
lacking but this may be due to erosion.
Discussion
The above material is too poorly preserved for proper identification and does not
warrant figuring. However, its lack of ornament and age suggests comparison with
Wood’s (1906) species. As the material recorded by Spath (1951) as Baculites aff. asper
(Morton) comes from the same locality it 1s probably conspecific.
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 4
A-C. Trachycardium cf. reynoldsi (Rennie). X 2. Lateral, interior and anterior views of a right valve,
SAM PCA1984. D-F. Phygraea aff. newberryi (Stanton). X 1. Lateral, anterior and internal views of a
left valve.. SAM~PCA8531. G. Acanthotrigonia sp. juv. X 2. Lateral view of a left valve,
SAM-PCA3613.
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA le)
Suborder HOPLITINA Spath, 1925
Superfamily DESMOCERATACEAE Zittel, 1895
Family Desmoceratidae Zittel, 1895
Genus Damesites Matsumoto, 1942
Type species
Desmoceras damesi Jimbo, 1894; by original designation.
Damesites sugata (Forbes, 1846)
Figs 6E—-F, 7D
1846 Ammonites sugata Forbes, p. 113, pl. 10 (fig. 2).
1898 Desmoceras sugata (Forbes); Kossmat, p. 176, pl. 18 (fig. 11), pl. 19 (fig. 1).
1902 Desmoceras sugatum (Forbes); Anderson, p. 98, pl. 3 (figs 98-99).
1954 Damesites sugata (Forbes); Matsumoto, p. 266.
| 955 Damesites sugata (Forbes); Matsumoto & Obata, p. 128, pl. 26 (figs 4-5), pl. 27
(figs 3-4).
57) Damesites sugata (Forbes); Matsumoto, p. 87.
1958 Kotoceras subsugatum Anderson, p. 217, pl. 35 (fig. 2).
1958 Kotoceras richardsoni Anderson, p. 217, pl. 36 (fig. 3).
1958 Kotoceras frazierense Anderson, p. 217, pl. 40 (fig. 5).
1959 Damesites sugata (Forbes); Matsumoto, p. 12.
1961 Damesites sugata (Forbes); Collignon, p. 71 (figs I—2).
LOT Damesites damesi var. intermedia Jeletzky (non Matsumoto), in Muller & Jeletzky, p. 38.
1988 Damesites sugata (Forbes); Toshimitsu, p. 191.
1989 Damesites sugata (Forbes); Haggart, p. 195, pl. 8.4 (figs 14-23).
Material
A single specimen, SAM—PCA 1968, preserving recrystallized test.
Description
The shell is compressed, extremely involute, with the outer whorl covering virtually
the entire penultimate whorl. The umbilicus is very narrow (8% of the diameter) and deep,
with a strongly convex umbilical wall that overhangs the seam and an evenly rounded
shoulder. The broad flanks are weakly convex, with maximum width slightly above
midflank, and the venter is rounded with a well-developed but narrow siphonal keel. The
whorl section (Fig. 4D) is somewhat compressed, higher than wide (H/W = 1.21). The
flanks are smooth with no sign of ornament and constrictions are lacking.
Measurements
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-—PCA1968 36.2 22.3 (0.60) 16.8 (0.45) 1,333) 3 (0.08)
156 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 5
A-C. Protocardia cf. umkwelanensis (Etheridge). X 1. Hinge, lateral and dorsal views of a left valve,
SAM-PCA3613. D. Plicatula aff. auressensis (Coquand). X1.5. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1700.
E—F. Neithea (Neithea) quinquecostata (J. Sowerby). X 1.5. Lateral views of the left and right valves of
SAM-PCA1705.
Discussion
The present material agrees well with Forbes’ (1846) illustration and is considered
conspecific. It differs from contemporaneous D. compactus (van Hoepen) (1921: 21, pl. 4
(figs S~7) and Lower Campanian Damesites rabei Collignon (1961: 72, pl. 27 (fig. 3)) in
having maximum width just above midflank and not at the ventrolateral shoulders.
Damesites damesi (Jimbo) (Matsumoto 1954: 267, pl. 5 (figs 1-3), text-figs 10-11) isa
long-ranging, poorly characterized contemporary of D. sugata, which seems to differ only
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA LOA
in having flexuous constrictions. Significantly, D. damesi intermedius Matsumoto
(1954: 270, pl. 6 (fig. 4); Matsumoto & Obata 1955: 131, pl. 27 (figs 1—2)) is claimed to be
transitional between the two and Haggart (1980) suggested that this subspecies is better
included in the synonymy of D. sugata.
Lower Santonian Damesites tsianalokyensis Collignon (1961: 73, pl. 27 (figs 4-6),
text-fig. 11) is a Madagascan species that differs from the Angolan specimen in being
more involute, with more inflated whorls and very fine flexuous lirae.
Damesites ainuanus Matsumoto (1957: 86, pl. 15 (figs 1—2)) is a Turonian—Coniacian
species distinguished from D. sugata by its broader, lower siphonal keel. Damesites
laticarinatus Saito & Matsumoto (1956: 192, fig. 1) from the Cenomanian of Japan has an
even lower keel than D. ainuanus.
Damesites hetonaiensis Matsumoto (1954: 271, pl. 6 (figs 1-3), text-fig. 12) 1s an
Upper Campanian to Maastrichtian species which was said to differ from D. sugata in
having weaker constrictions, a narrower umbilicus, and somewhat more inflated whorls.
Damesites hetonaiensis fresnoensis (Anderson) (1958: 218, pl. 57 (figs 1-5); Matsumoto
1959: 14) is larger than the nominate subspecies and with conspicuous flexuous lirae.
Damesites semicostatus Matsumoto (Matsumoto & Obata 1955: 133, pl. 26 (fig. 2),
pl. 30 (fig. 6)) differs from D. sugata in possessing pronounced, weakly flexuous lirae.
Occurrence
Damesites sugata (Forbes) ranges from Coniacian to Campanian and is known from
southern India (Forbes 1846; Kossmat 1895), Madagascar (Collignon 1961, 1966),
Zululand (pers. obs.), California (Matsumoto 1959), British Columbia (Haggart 1989),
Japan (Matsumoto & Obata 1955; Toshimitsu 1988), and now Angola.
Family Pachydiscidae Spath, 1922
Genus Menuites Spath, 1922
Type species
Ammonites menu Forbes, 1846; by original designation.
Menuites sp.
Fig. 8H-K
Material
Two specimens, the one a moderately large, highly eroded internal mould,
SAM-—PCA 1706, and the other a juvenile preserving recrystallized test, SAM—PCA2016.
Description
The shell of SAM—PCA1706 appears to have been moderately inflated and fairly
involute, with c. 70 per cent of the preceding whorl covered. The umbilicus is moderately
wide and fairly deep, with gently sloping umbilical wall and evenly rounded umbilical
shoulder. The flanks are strongly convex and converge to the evenly arched venter. The
158 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 6
A-D.
flauericeras (Gardeniceras) gardeni (Baily). x 1. A-B. Lateral and ventral views of
SAM
PCA1692. C_D. Ventral and lateral views of SAM-PCA1693. E-F. Damesites sugata (Forbes).
x 1. Ventral and lateral views of SAM—PCA 1968.
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA Se
only ornament is periodic prorsiradiate ribs (?constrictions), but the specimen gives the
impression of having had these separated by weakly developed ribs.
The better-preserved juvenile shell, SAM—PCA2016, is compressed, moderately
involute, with c. 60 per cent of the penultimate whorl covered. The fairly narrow
umbilicus (27-31% of the diameter) is rather deep, with a steep umbilical wall and evenly
rounded shoulder, and the convex flanks converge towards the narrowly arched venter.
Ornament comprises prominent periodic constrictions that flex forwards slightly near the
venter and, on the adoral half of the outer whorl, are separated by very weak, indistinct,
flexuous riblets.
Measurements
Specimen ID H W U
SAM—PCA2016 DD) 10 (0.45) v 6 (0.27)
i 16 8 (0.50) 7.5 (0.47) 5 (0.31)
Discussion
The weak ornament of the Angolan material suggests it is a species of Menuites.
However, the available material is either too poorly preserved or too immature for positive
identification, and comparison with other species is unwarranted.
Occurrence
Menuites is a Campanian genus (Wright 1996).
Family Puzosidae Spath, 1922
Subfamily Hauericeratinae Matsumoto, 1938
Genus Hauericeras de Grossouvre, 1894
Subgenus Gardeniceras Matsumoto & Obata, 1955
Type species
Ammonites gardeni Baily, 1855; by original designation.
Discussion
For the most recent concepts of this genus the reader is referred to Matsumoto et al.
(1990).
Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) gardeni (Baily, 1855)
Fig. 6A—D
1855 Ammonites gardeni Baily, p. 450, pl. 9 (fig. 3).
1865 Ammonites gardeni Baily; Stoliczka, p. 61, pl. 33 (fig. 4).
1890 Desmoceras gardeni (Baily); Yokoyama, p. 184, pl. 20 (fig. 10).
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1894 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); De Grossouvre, p. 219.
1898 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); Kossmat, p. 123, pl. 18 (figs 7-8, 10).
1907 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); Pervinquiere, p. 166, pl. 7 (figs 1, 3-6).
1921 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); Van Hoepen, p. 27, fig. 15.
1921 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); Spath, p. 238, fig. A, 1-9.
1931 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); Basse, p. 23, pl. 4 (figs 2-4), pl. 10 (fig. 8), pl. 11 (fig. 1).
1932 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); Collignon, p. 17, pl. 3 (fig. 3).
1952 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); Usher, p. 65, pl. 5 (figs 1—2), pl. 21 (fig. 10).
1955 Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) gardeni (Baily); Matsumoto & Obata, p. 140, figs 8-12.
1961 Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) gardeni (Baily); Collignon, p. 76, pls 28—29, 30 (figs 1-2)
1969 Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) gardeni (Baily); Collignon, p. 66, pl. 539 (fig. 2114).
1979 Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) gardeni (Baily); Summesberger, p. 133, pl. 6 (fig. 27);
text-fig. 19.
1982 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); Immel et al., pl. 16, pl. 5 (fig. 1), pl. 6 (fig. 1), figs 2-4.
non 1982 Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) aff. gardeni (Baily); Renz, p. 106, pl. 35 (figs 2-4)
(= Hauericeras (Hauericeras) sp.).
1987 Hauericeras gardeni (Baily); Immel, p. 91.
1990 Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) gardeni (Baily); Matsumoto et al., p. 451.
Material
Nineteen highly eroded, very fragmentary, poorly preserved specimens including
SAM-—PCA1692 and 1693.
Description
The shell is strongly compressed, very evolute, with a wide shallow umbilicus. The
umbilical wall is steep, convex, with a subrounded shoulder, and the broad, weakly
convex flanks converge to the narrowly arched, keeled venter. The whorls are strongly
compressed, higher than wide (H/W = 1.61—1.96), with a lanceolate section. Ornament
and constrictions are not preserved and the material is too poorly preserved for reliable
morphometric analysis.
Discussion
Differences between Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) species have been covered by
Matsumoto & Obata (1955) and Matsumoto et al. (1990), and need not be repeated here.
Occurrence
Hauericeras (Gardeniceras) gardeni (Baily) is typical of Middle Santonian to Lower
Campanian strata and is reported from Austria (Summesberger 1979), Madagascar
(Collignon 1961, 1966), Zululand (Kennedy & Klinger 1975), Transkei (Baily 1855; Van
Hoepen 1921), Japan (Matsumoto & Obata 1955), British Columbia (Usher 1952), and
now Angola.
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 161
Suborder ACANTHOCERATINA Hyatt, 1900
Superfamily COLLIGNONICERATACEAE Wright & Wright, 1951
Family Texanitidae Collignon, 1948
Subfamily Texanitinae Collignon, 1948
Genus Protexanites Matsumoto, 1955
Type species
Ammonites bourgeoisi d’ Orbigny, 1842; by original designation.
?Protexanites sp. indet.
Material
A single whorl fragment, SAM—PCA2015, preserving recrystallized test.
Description
The shell was undoubtedly evolute, with a wide shallow umbilicus. The whorl section
(Fig. 7C) is compressed (H/W = 1.27), elliptical in intercostal section but polygonal
costally, with maximum width about a third of the way up the flank. The rectiradiate ribs
begin at sharp umbilical tubercles, swell at midflank without developing a tubercle, and
join prominent, swollen, clavate marginal tubercles from which they project forwards to
terminate in extremely elongate external clavi. The latter are separated from the siphonal
keel by narrow sulci.
Discussion
The strong ornament and trituberculate ribs of the available fragment suggest reference
to Protexanites. Normally, the inner whorls of Plesiotexanites which, also, are
trituberculate, do not have the very strongly clavate external tubercles of the Angolan
specimen (H. C. Klinger, pers. comm. 1990).
Occurrence
Protexanites is an Upper Coniacian to Santonian genus (Wright 1957; Toshimitsu
1988), which may be present in the Middle Santonian of Angola.
Genus Texanites Collignon, 1948
Type species
Ammonites texanus Roemer, 1852; by original designation.
Texanites venustus Collignon, 1948
Figs 7A—B, 8A—G, 9A
1948 Texanites venustus Collignon, p. 81, pl. 9 (fig. 4).
1966 Texanites venustus Collignon, p. 74, pl. 484 (fig. 1960).
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 7
Whorl sections. X 1. A-B. Texanites venustus Collignon. A = SAM—PCA1992, B = SAM—PCA1967.
C. ?Protexanites sp., SAM—PCA2015. D. Damesites sugata (Forbes).
1980 Texanites venustus Collignon; Klinger & Kennedy, p. 124.
Material
Thirty-three specimens, the majority very fragmentary, including SAM—PCA1718,
L967, 1972—73, 1978, 1982, 1986, 1992; 1994 11998, 2001, 20095 2013, 201024
2030-31, 2037, and 2048, with both recrystallized test preserved and internal moulds.
Description
The shell is strongly compressed, very evolute, with c. 20 per cent of the penultimate
whorl covered. The umbilicus is very wide (38-47% of the shell diameter) and shallow,
with a subvertical wall and evenly rounded shoulder. The whorl section (Fig. 7A—B) 1s
compressed (H/W = 1.09-1.44), elliptical intercostally and polygonal costally, with
broad, flat flanks and a narrow venter bearing a low well-developed siphonal keel.
Maximum width is just below midflank. Ribs begin at the umbilical seam and pass
radially outwards to prominent umbilical bullae, of which there are 22—24 per whorl.
These give rise singly, or in pairs, to 38-44 strong prorsiradiate ribs per whorl; where
single there is generally an associated intercalatory. On relatively large whorl fragments
the majority of ribs seem to be single and slightly convex adorally across the flank,
suggesting a simplification of ribbing in maturity. From the earliest stage visible flank
costae are ornamented with a prominent rounded tubercle just below midflank, closely
spaced marginal and submarginal clavi, and strongly clavate external tubercles. The latter
are separated from the low siphonal keel by shallow sulci.
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 163
Figure 8
A-G. Texanites venustus Collignon. A-B. Ventral and lateral views of SAM—PCA1992. C—D. Ventral
and lateral views of SAM—PCA1967. E-F X 1; G X 2. H-K. Menuites sp. juv. H—I. Ventral and lateral
views of SAM—PCA2016. X 1. J-K. Same. X 2.
Material
Specimen D H W H/W U
SAM-PCA2019 24 10 (0.42) 8 (0.33) 2S 10 (0.42)
SAM-PCA2048 c. 24 9 (0.38) . IO2Z) 29) c. 11 (0.46)
SAM-PCA2030 DS 10 (0.40) 9(0.36) Ith 10 (0.40)
SAM-—PCA1982 Sil 11 (0.35) 9 (0.29) 22 14 (0.45)
SAM-PCA1998 BY 12 (0.38) 11 (0.34) 1.09 15 (0.47)
SAM-PCA1718 136 14 (0.39) ? z 17 (0.47)
SAM-PCA2001 c. 43 151035) 2 ? 18 (0.42)
SAM-PCA1967 43 150385) 12 (0.28) 2S) 17 (0.40)
34 13 (0.38) 10 (0.29) 1230 13 (0.38)
SAM-PCA1978 47 16 (0.34) 13 (0.28) 1228 20 (0.43)
i Sul 12 (0.39) 9 (0.29) 1233 13 (0.42)
SAM-PCA1994 CAO® 23) (035) 18 (0.28) 1.28 c. 28 (0.43)
SAM-PCA2009 ? 36 | 133 ?
SAM-PCA1992 2 36 25 1.44 ?
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Discussion
The Angolan material conforms well with descriptions of the Madagascan material
(Collignon 1948, 1966) and is considered to be conspecific. Other texanites to be
described from Angola are 7. angolanus Haas (1942: 12, figs 8-10), T. angolanus berryi
Haas (1942: 15, fig. 11) and Texanites quinquenodosus evolutus (Haas 1942: 18, fig. 12).
The former two have been included (Cooper 1989) in the synonymy of 7. roemeri (Yabe
& Shimizu) (Young 1963: 84, pl. 43 (fig. 1), characterized by coarse single ribs, and the
latter taxon differs from the present species in being serpenticone (umbilicus 63% of shell
diameter).
Of species that warrant comparison, Texanites dichotomus Collignon (1948: 80, pl. 9
(fig. 3), pl. 11 (fig. 1)) has similar ornament but typically depressed whorls (H/W =
(.83—0.91). Among the south-east African material described by Klinger & Kennedy
(1980), the Angolan material is closest to highly variably T. soutoni (Baily, 1855: pl. 11
(fig. 1)); Texanites soutoni natalensis Klinger & Kennedy (1980: 214, figs 164-185) is
based on much larger specimens that are difficult to compare but seem to be more evolute,
with fewer (24—38) ribs per whorl. Texanites soutoni soutoni (Baily) (Klinger & Kennedy
1980: 189, figs 143-151, 152B, 153-163) has similar proportions but, at comparable
diameters to the Angolan material, lacks bifurcating ribs. Texanites umzambiensis Klinger
é& Kennedy (1980: 167, figs 126-129, 152A) has lower whorls (whorl height only 30% of
the diameter), inner whorls with prominent ventrolateral spines, and fewer, generally
simple ribs per whorl.
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 165
Figure 9
A. Texanites venustus Collignon. X 2. Lateral view of SAM—PCA1967. B-C. ?Protexanites sp. X 1.5.
Ventral and lateral views of SAM—PCA2015.
American 7. americanus (Lasswitz) (Young 1963: 83, pl. 41 (figs 1, 3), pl. 44
(figs 2-3), pl. 48 (figs 1, 3), pl. 57 (fig. 5), text-fig 24c) has only 12—19 ribs per whorl at
diameters below 50 mm, whereas very similar 7. shiloensis Young (1963: 89, pl. 46
(figs 1-4), pl. 54 (figs 4-7), pl. 70 (figs 5-6, 8), text-fig. 24d) has only 7—8 intercalatory
ribs at diameters of 40 mm or less and weaker tuberculation. Texanites lonsdalei Young
(1963: 90, pl. 34 (fig. 1), pl. 51 (figs 3-7), pl. 58 (figs 5—6), text-fig. 22a, d) is more
involute than the present species, with fewer, generally simple costae.
Occurrence
Texanites venustus Collignon is known only from the Middle Santonian of
Madagascar (Collignon 1966) and now Angola.
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I should like to thank Drs M. A. Cluver and H. C. Klinger for access to the
palaeontological collections of the South African Museum, and Betsie Greyling for
assistance with the photography. Publication was supported by a grant from the
University of Durban-Westville for which I am grateful.
REFERENCES
ANDERSON, F. M. 1902. Cretaceous deposits of the Pacific Coast. Proceedings of the California
Academy of Science (3) 2 (1): 1-154.
ANDERSON, F. M. 1958. Upper Cretaceous of the Pacific Coast. Memoirs of the Geological Society of
America 71: 1~378.
BAILY, W. H. 1855. Description of some Cretaceous fossils from South Africa. Quarterly Journal of
the Geological Society of London 11: 454-465.
BASSE, E. 1931. Monographie paléontologique du crétacé de la Province de Maintirano
(Madagascar). Gouvernement général de Madagascar et se dépendances. Tananarive: Service des
Mines.
BESAIRIE, H. 1972. Géologie de Madagascar. |. Les terrains sédimentaires. Annales géologique de
Madagascar 35: 1-463.
CARVALHO, G. 1961. Geologica do deserto de Mocamedes (Angola). Uma Contribuicao para o
Conhecimento das Problemas da Orla Sedimentar de Mocamedes. Memorias da Junta de
Investigagoes do Ultramar (2) 26: 1-227.
COLLIGNON, M. 1932. Paléontologie de Madagascar. XVII. Fossiles du Crétacé du Menabe. Annales
de Paléontologie 21: 35—87.
COLLIGNON, M. 1948. Ammonites néocrétacées du Menabe (Madagascar). I. Les Texanitidae.
Annales géologique du Service des mines (de Madagascar) 13: 49-105.
COLLIGNON, M. 1961. Ammonites néocrétacées du Menabe (Madagascar). VII. Les Desmoceratidae.
Annales géologique du Service des mines (de Madagascar) 31: 1-115.
COLLIGNON, M. 1966. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites). XIV.
(Santonien). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1969. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites). XV.
(Campanien inferieur). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COOPER, M. R. 1972. The Cretaceous stratigraphy of Sao Nicolau and Salinas, Angola. Annals of the
South African Museum 60 (8): 245-251.
COOPER, M. R. 1973. Cenomanian ammonites from Novo Redondo, Angola. Annals of the South
African Museum 62 (2): 41-67.
COOPER, M. R. 1974. The Cretaceous stratigraphy of south-central Africa. Annals of the South African
Vuseum 66 (5): 81-107.
COOPER, M. R. 1976. Eustasy during the Cretaceous; its implications and importance.
Palaeogeography, Palaeoclimatology and Palaeoecology 21: 1-60.
COOPER, M. R. 1978. Uppermost Cenomanian—basal Turonian ammonites from Salinas, Angola.
innals of the South African Museum 75 (5): 51-152.
COOPER, M. R. 1979. The mid-Cretaceous (Albian—Turonian) biostratigraphy of Angola. Annales du
Museum d'histoire naturelle de Nice 4 (for 1976): xvi.1—xvi.22.
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 167
COOPER, M. R. 1983. Lower Cretaceous (Middle Albian) ammonites from Dombe Grande, Angola.
Annals of the South African Museum 89 (5): 265-314.
COOPER, M. R. 1989. Upper Cretaceous (Lower Campanian) ammonites from Angola. South African
Journal of Geology 91 (2): 207-211.
COOPER, M. R. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1979. Uppermost Albian (dispar zone) ammonites from the
Angolan littoral. Annals of the South African Museum 77 (10): 175-308.
COOPER, M. R. 2003a. Upper Cretaceous (Turonian—Coniacian) Ammonites from Sao Nicolau,
Angola. Annals of the South African Museum 110 (2): 89-146.
DARTEVELLE, E. 1942. Le Crétacé Supérieur de Mocamedes (Contribution a la Géologie de
Angola. Bulletin Société Belge. Géologie, Paléontologie et Hydrologie 50 (1940-41): 186-189.
DARTEVELLE, E. & CASIER, E. 1941. Les poissons fossiles de l Angola. Comunicoes Servicos
Geologico do Portugal 22: 99-109.
DARTEVELLE, E. & CASIER, E. 1946. Les poissons fossiles de |’ Angola. II. Mote complémentaire.
Comunicoes Servicos Geologico do Portugal 27: 85—90.
FORBES, E. 1846. Report on the fossil Invertebrata from southern India, collected by Mr. Kaye and
Mr. Cunliffe. Transactions of the Geological Society of London (ser. 2) 7: 97-174.
GROSSOUVRE, A. DE. 1894. Recherches sur la Craie Supérieure. II. Paléontologie. Les ammonites de
la craie supérieure. Mémoir du Service de la Carte Géologique Detailee de la France: 1-264.
HAAS, O. 1942. Some Upper Cretaceous ammonites from Angola. American Museum Novitates 1182:
1-24.
HAGGART, J. W. 1989. New and revised ammonites from the Upper Cretaceous Nanaimo Group of
British Columbia and Washington State. Bulletin. Geological Survey of Canada 396: 181-222.
HAQ, B. U., HARDENBOL, J. & VAIL, P. R. 1987. Chronology of fluctuating sea levels since the
Triassic. Science 235: 1156-1167.
IMMEL, H. 1987. Die Kreideammoniten der nordlichen Kalkalpen. Zitteliana 15: 3-163.
IMMEL, H., KLINGER, H. C. & WIEDMANN, J. 1982. Die Cephalopoden des Unteren Santon der
Gosau von Brandenberg/Tirol, Osterreich. Zitteliana 8: 3-32.
JIMBO, K. 1894. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Fauna der Kreideformation von Hokkaido.
Palaeontologische Abhandlungen. N.F. 2 (3): 149-194.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
Introduction, stratigraphy. Bulletin of the British Museum of Natural History (Geology) 25 (4):
263-315.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1980. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
The ammonite subfamily Texanitinae Collignon, 1948. Annals of the South African Museum 80:
1-357.
KOSSMAT, F. 1898. Untersuchungen tber die stdindische Kreideformation. Beitrdge zur
Paldontologie Osterreich-Ungarns und des Orients 11: 1-46.
LAMARCK, J.B. P. A. de M. 1799. Prodrome d’une nouvelle classification des coquilles. Mémoire de
la Société d’Histoire Naturelle de Paris: 63-91.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1942. A note on the Japanese Cretaceous ammonites belonging to the subfamily
Desmoceratinae. Proceedings of the Imperial Academy of Japan 18: 24-29.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1954. Selected Cretaceous leading ammonites in Hokkaido and Saghalien.
Appendix. Jn; MATSUMOTO, T. ed. Cretaceous System in the Japanese Islands: 243-313. Tokyo:
Japanese Society for the Promotion of Scientific Research.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1955. Evolution of Peroniceratidae. Transactions and Proceedings of the
Palaeontological Society of Japan. (n.s.) 18: 37-44.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1957. A Turonian Damesites from Hokkaido, Japan. (Studies of the Cretaceous
ammonites from Hokkaido and Saghalien — XII.) Transactions and Proceedings of the
Palaeontological Society of Japan (n.s.) 27: 86-88.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1959. Upper Cretaceous ammonites of California. Part II. Memoirs of the Faculty of
Science, Kyushu University (D, Geology) Special Volume 1: 1-172.
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MATSUMOTO, T. & OBATA, I. 1955. Some Upper Cretaceous desmoceratids from Hokkaido and
Saghalien. Memoirs of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (D, Geology) 5: 119-151.
MATSUMOTO, T., TOSHIMITSU, S. & KAWASHITA, Y. 1990. On Hauericeras de Grossouvre,
1894, a Cretaceous ammonite genus. Transactions and Proceedings of the Palaeontological Society
of Japan (n.s.) 158: 439-458.
MEEK, F.B. 1876. A report on the invertebrate Cretaceous and Tertiary fossils of the Upper Missouri
Country. U.S. Geological Survey of the Territories 9: 1-629.
MOUTA, F. 1938. Notice Géologique sur l’ Angola (Afrique Occidentale Potugaise). Comunicoes
Servicos Geologico de Portugal 20: 19-37.
MOUTA, F. 1954. Noticia explicative do Esbocgo Geologico de Angola (1 : 2000000). Lisboa: Junta de
Investigacoes do Ultramar.
MOUTA, F. & BORGES, A. 1926. Sur le Crétacé du littoral de 1’ Angola (districts de Benguella et
Mossamedes). Boletim da Agéncia geral Colonias, Lisboa 14: \|-43.
MOUTA, F. & O’DONNELL, H. 1933. Carte géologique de l’Angola, I :2000000. Notice Explicative.
Ministerio das Colonias, Lisboa.
MULLER, J. E. & JELETZKY, J. A. 1970. Geology of the Upper Cretaceous Nanaimo Group,
Vancouver Island and Gulf Islands, British Columbia. Geological Survey of Canada, Paper 69-25:
1-77.
ORBIGNY, A. d’. 1842. Paléontologie francaise: Description des Mollusques et Rayonnes fossiles:
Terrains crétacés: Tome premier. Cephalopodes. p.431—662. Paris: Masson.
PERVINQUIERE, L. 1907. Etudes de paléontologie tunisiennes. Part I. Céphalopodes des terrains
secondaires. Carte géologique de Tunisie: 1-438.
RENNIE, J. V. L. 1929. Cretaceous fossils from Angola (Lamellibranchia and Gastropoda). Annals of
the South African Museum 28: 1—54.
RENNIE, J. V. L. 1945. Lamelibranquios e Gastéropodos do Cretacico Superior de Angola. Memoirias
Junta das Missoes geograficas e de investigacoes Colonias, Ministerio das Colonias, Lisboa 1:
1-141.
RENZ, O. 1982. The Cretaceous Ammonites of Venezuela. Basel: Birkhauser. Caracas: Maraven.
ROEMER, F. A. 1852. Die Kreidebildungen van Texas und thre organischen Einschlusse. Bonn.
SAITO, R. & MATSUMOTO, 1956. A new species of Damesites from the Cenomanian of Hokkaido,
Japan. Transactions and Proceedings of the Palaeontological Society of Japan (n.s.) 22: 191-194.
SPATH, L. F. 1921. On Upper Cretaceous Ammonoidea from Pondoland. Annals of the Durban
Museum 3 (2): 21-56.
SPATH, L. F. 1922. On the Senonian ammonite fauna of Pondoland. Transactions of the Royal Society
of South Africa 10 (3): 113-147.
SPATH, L. F. 1951. Preliminary notice on some Upper Cretaceous ammonite faunas from Angola.
Comunigoes Servicos geologique Portugal 32 (2): 123-130.
STOLICZKA, F. 1865. The fossil Cephalopoda of the Cretaceous rocks of southern India. Memoir of
the Geological Survey of India, Palaeontologica indica: 41-216.
SUMMESBERGER, H. 1979. Eine obersantone Ammonitenfauna aus dem Becken von Gosau
(Oberosterreich). Annalen Naturhistorisches Museum Wien 82: 109-176.
TOSHIMITSU, S. 1988. Biostratigraphy of the Upper Cretaceous Santonian Stage in northwestern
Hokkaido. Memoirs of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (D, Geology) 26 (2): 125-192.
USHER, J. L. 1952. Ammonite faunas of the Upper Cretaceous rocks of Vancouver Island, British
Columbia. Bulletin. Geological Survey of Canada 21: 1-182.
VAN HOEPEN, E. C. N. 1921. Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Pondoland. Annals of the Transvaal
Museum 8 (1): 1-48.
WOODS, H. 1906. The Cretaceous fauna of Pondoland. Annals of the South African Museum 4 (7):
275-350.
nil, C. W. 1957. Cretaceous ammonites. In: MOORE, R. C. ed. Treatise of invertebrate
tology. Part L. Mollusca 4. New York and Lawrence: Geological Society of America and
y of Kansas Press.
STRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEONTOLOGY OF BABA FORMATION, SAO NICOLAU, ANGOLA 169
WRIGHT, C. W. 1996 with CALLOMAN, J. H. and HOWARTH, M. K. Treatise on Invertebrate
Paleontology. Park L. Mollusca 4. Revised. Boulder: The Geological Society of America Inc. and
Lawrence: The University of Kansas.
YOKOYAMA, M. 1890. Versteinerungen aus der japanischen Kreide. Palaeontographica 36:
159-202.
YOUNG, K. 1963. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from the Gulf Coast of the United States. Publication.
University of Texas, Bureau of Economic Geology 6304: 1-373.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 110 Band
August 2003 Augustus
Ran 4 Deel
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS, GEOGRAPHIC AND
STRATIGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION AND ORIGIN OF DIPLOMOCERAS
CYLINDRACEUM (DEFRANCE, 1816) (CEPHALOPODA: AMMONOIDEA)
by
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and review
articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
(1, VU 5), S02, 4-5, 7S, tant), 40), SUS; 7D), S02, cenit),
TOD), & CUD, M, OMB), MI, 5, Fea), MIG, 16545),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 1865
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS, GEOGRAPHIC AND
STRATIGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION AND ORIGIN OF DIPLOMOCERAS
CYLINDRACEUM (DEFRANCE, 1816) (CEPHALOPODA: AMMONOIDEA)
by
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
South African Museum, Iziko Museums of Cape Town
E-mail [email protected]
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, Oxford University Museum of Natural History, Oxford
E-mail [email protected]
~ (With 17 figures)
[MS accepted February 2003 ]
ABSTRACT
The heteromorph ammonite genus Diplomoceras has a near world-wide distribution in the
Maastrichtian, but records as far back as early Campanian have been quoted. Due to the generally
fragmentary nature of the material and intraspecific variation, systematics of the genus are disputed.
According to recent comprehensive reviews by Kennedy (1986a, 1987 et seq.), the genus appears to be
monospecific, consisting of the type species, Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816) only.
Differential preservation of internal moulds of the phragmocone and body chamber respectively, and
similarities in suture lines suggest that the origins of Diplomoceras cylindraceum may be sought in
Neoglyptoxoceras annulatum (Collignon, 1969), a species thus far known only from the lower
Campanian of Madagascar.
CONTENTS
PAGE
JELGUTCCO XG NOU AICO Sasa ca Atetasgubtie deo Socaee ade HeDR Roce caEe See aE em oO asc Ri 6A a9 SG ene te ee 173
SW SUED UCHR osase lbochout dic eboodoontoAdeon Sas toss ode ae EEE eet mr hot NS Ee Soc sra5 a co eee Oe IS
Geooraphicand! straierap iC ats pmb UCTOM sac... ceceeceacneece-aco-eeeesa-2 ae e224 «ee reeeeeee emeReeEnRCe. «once cb knees 5
Owmoinso te Dip) OMOCCHASPEV WNALACCIM a. aredes settee oeee cate tee pedis a chee ann ot ee Oe ace ca Minn ane tee tRoe i aeeeneo be canes hy
PNGSIVON IG OREN O OTSA SOR A at et ence nia ec, ae re gee eee 19]
RGIS CSS SN A 506 Ee ee conan RoR RE CAA OE 2 194
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 110 (4), 2003: 171-198, 17 figs.
171
iy) ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure |
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). SAM—PCZ9551 from locality 113, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation. Maastrichtian a or b. An internal mould that retains the ribbing. x 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM 173
INTRODUCTION
The heteromorph ammonite Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816), type
species of the genus Diplomoceras Hyatt, 1900, is a conspicuous faunal element of the
Maastrichtian stage by virtue of its near-cosmopolitan distribution, paper clip-like coiling
and, in some instances, gigantic size. It is also amongst the last surviving ammonites
before the demise of the Order Ammonoidea at the end of the Cretaceous Period.
Diplomoceras typically consists of several straight shafts, connected by a series of
variable U-shaped sections (Figs 1-6). Because of this loose coiling, post-mortem
fragmentation is universal and complete specimens of the species are unknown. The early
whorls were thought to have been coiled in a helix (cf. Wright 1957: L227; Matsumoto
1959: 165; Klinger 1976: 81), but this misconception was probably based on a helically
coiled heteromorph from Seymour Island, Antarctic Peninsula, described and figured as
Anisoceras (Diplomoceras) notabile Whiteaves, 1903 by Kilian & Reboul (1906: 15
(pars), pl. 5, pl. 6 (fig. 1) only). These specimens are definitely not conspecific with
D. notabile, and may possibly be Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense Klinger,
1976, but without having seen the actual specimens we can not be sure. Juvenile
specimens tentatively referred to D. notabile by Matsumoto (1984: 312, pl. 8 (fig. 3)) and
Matsumoto & Miyauchi (1984: 68, pl. 27 (fig. 2); text-fig. 11A) suggest that the paper
clip-like coiling already occurs from a very early ontogenetic stage. Gigantic specimens
with estimated total uncoiled lengths of c. 2.5 metres have been recorded from Seymour
Island as Diplomoceras maximum Olivero & Zinsmeister (1989: 629, figs 2.5, 4.1-4.4,
5.1-5.4), exceeding in size by far the largest late Cretaceous (straight) baculitids (see
Klinger & Kennedy 2001). Up to now, no complete specimen has been found, and the
adult aperture is unknown.
The whorl section is generally circular, or slightly compressed or depressed (Fig. 2E).
Ornament on the shell consists of simple, uniform ribs with no tubercles (Figs 5-6).
Constrictions, if present (cf. Henderson ef al. 1992, fig. SA-B; Kennedy 1999: 653,
fig. 12.1-2) are rare. On internal moulds, however, ornament differs between the
phragmocone and body chamber. Internal moulds of the phragmocone are usually
(Figs 2B, 3-4), but not always (Figs 1, 2A, C-D) smooth whereas internal moulds of the
body chamber retain the ribbing. This conspicuous anomaly has been noted on several
occasions (see Olivero & Zinsmeister 1989: 627; Henderson ef al. 1992: 141; Kennedy
1999: 657), and according to Olivero & Zinsmeister (1989), can be ascribed to the
thickening of the nacreous shell layer below the ribs on the phragmocone, and may be
considered diagnostic of the genus Diplomoceras. Apart from shell structure, the latter
authors also provided details of muscle scars, previously recorded by Jones (1961), and
speculated on the mode of life and buoyancy control of Diplomoceras. The suture line
(Fig. 7A—C) is deeply incised with a large bifid lateral (L) and umbilical (U) lobe, and a
small, trifid internal (/) lobe. The saddles all have very narrow stems.
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 2
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). A. SAM—PCZ7940 from locality 20, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation. Maastrichtian a or b. B. SAM—PCZ7904 from the same locality as A. C-E. SAM-—
PCZ17356 (ex H105/9) from locality 116, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a. All x 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM LTD
SYSTEMATICS
The geographic and stratigraphic distribution of the genus Diplomoceras is largely
dependant on whose taxonomic procedure is followed. Conservatively, the following
species have been referred to the genus with differing degrees of confidence:
1. D. cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816)—the type species.
2. D. notabile Whiteaves, 1903.
3. D. lambi Spath, 1953.
4. D. maximum Olivero & Zinsmeister, 1989.
5. D. australe Huinicken, 1965.
Apart from these, several species from California have been attributed to the genus by
Anderson (1902, 1958), but these are either uninterpretable from the figures and
descriptions, or are synonyms of-the above.
Kennedy (1987), in his revision of the ammonite fauna of the type Maastrichtian, and
subsequently (Kennedy & Henderson 1992; Henderson et al. 1992), based on Indian and
Western Australian material respectively, regard D. notabile, D. lambi and D. maximum
as junior synonyms of D. cylindraceum because of overlapping dimensions of the whorl
section and density of ribbing.
Based on the compressed whorl section (Wb: Wh = 1,26 and 1,24) of the holotype, the
only other species that may be referable to the genus according to these authors is
D. australe. However, according to Macellari (1986: 9), the specimens referred to this
species by Hunicken appear to be deformed, and may be referred to D. /ambi, that is,
D. cylindraceum as interpreted by Kennedy (1987, and subsequent discussions).
GEOGRAPHIC AND STRATIGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION
If the taxonomic procedure of Kennedy (1986a, 1987 et. seg.) is accepted, the genus
Diplomoceras is monospecific, comprising the type species, D. cylindraceum (Defrance,
1816) only.
Diplomoceras cylindraceum has a near world-wide distribution (Figs 8-9), being most
common in high northern and southern latitudes, but is remarkably rare in equatorial
regions and is apparently absent from the Middle East (Zeev Lewy pers. comm.) and
Angola and Nigeria. It ranges throughout the whole of the Maastrichtian stage.
There are, however, earlier, Campanian records of D. cylindraceum, some apparently
extending back to the early Campanian (Alabushev & Wiedmann 1997). Upper
Campanian records from Japan include those of Matsumoto & Morozumi (1980),
Matsumoto (1984) and Matsumoto & Miyauchi (1984). In Zululand (Klinger & Kennedy,
this volume 110(6), p. 303) D. cylindraceum occurs mainly in the Maastrichtian, but a
single specimen is known from the uppermost Campanian of Kennedy & Klinger’s (1975)
locality 111 (Klinger & Kennedy, this volume 110(6), p. 303). In Antarctica, the species
has been dated as late Campanian—early Maastrichtian and late Maastrichtian as D. lambi
and D. maximum respectively. In northern Spain, Gallemi et a/. (1983) have records of
D. notabile from the upper Campanian. Machalski (1996) also tentatively records
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Ricuneys
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). A. IRSNB 10292 ex Ubaghs Collection from the upper
Maastrichtian Calcaire de Kunraed of Kunrade, Limburg, The Netherlands. B. IRSNB 10262 (IG 8261
ex De Jaer Coll.) from the same horizon and locality as A.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM WHS:
D. cylindraceum from the upper Campanian of the Piotrawin section in Central Poland.
Kichler & Odin (2001) also record D. cylindraceum from the upper Campanian of Tercis,
France.
The stratigraphic distribution of the species in southern Sakhalin reported by
Alabushev & Wiedmann (1997) is difficult to interpret. According to these authors,
D. cylindraceum s.s. is restricted to the upper Maastrichtian and is the index fossil for the
eponymous zone as proposed by them for northeast Russia. Diplomoceras notabile, on the
other hand, is reported (Alabushev & Wiedmann 1997: 15) to occur in the lower
Campanian of Sakhalin and the lowermost Campanian of northwestern Kamchatka but,
according to their Table | (p. 29) occurs throughout the whole of the Campanian. The
specimen figured as being from the lower Campanian (Alabushev & Wiedmann 1997,
pl. 4 (fig. 1)) is part of a juvenile shell, and is generically indeterminable; it could be
referred to either Diplomoceras or Glyptoxoceras.
Even if the record of the first occurrence of D. cylindraceum in the lower Campanian is
incorrect, its definite occurrence from the upper Campanian to the end of the Maastrichtian
makes it one of the longest ranging heteromorph ammonite species of the Cretaceous Period.
ORIGIN OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM
Despite its near-cosmopolitan occurrence and long stratigraphic range, the origins of the
species and genus have received little attention. Matsumoto & Miyauchi (1984: 68) suggested
an origin in Scalarites (together with Glyptoxoceras), but no further details were given.
Based on similarities in suture lines, mode of coiling, ornamentation in general, and
differences in ornament on internal moulds of the phragmocone and body chamber
respectively, we suggest an origin for Diplomoceras cylindraceum in the poorly known
and apparently endemic material from Madagascar referred to the two genera, Neo-
glyptoxoceras Collignon, 1969 and Epiglyptoxoceras Collignon, 1969. Neoglyptoxoceras,
type species Neoglyptoxoceras magnificum Collignon, 1969 (1969:30, pl. 523 (fig. 2065),
p. 35, pl. 526 (figs 2074-2075)) (Fig. 1OA—B) and Epiglyptoxoceras, type species
Epiglyptoxoceras abnorme Collignon, 1969 (1969: 35, pl. 526 (fig. 2076)) are both
relatively common in the lower Campanian of Madagascar. Apart from the type species,
Neoglyptoxoceras is further represented by N. perangustum Collignon, 1969 (1969: 38,
pl. 527 (fig. 2078)) (Fig. 11) and Epiglyptoxoceras by E. annulatum Collignon, 1969
(1969: 41, pl. 529 (fig. 2083)) (Figs 12-15) and EF. giganteum Collignon, 1969 (1969: 40,
pl. 528 (figs 2081—2082)) (Fig. 16) in the lower Campanian. Neog/yptoxoceras persists to
the middle Campanian of Madagascar as Neoglyptoxoceras serta Collignon, 1970 (1970:
15, pl. 613 (figs 2286—2289)) (non Miller & Wollemann, 1906). As their names indicate,
Neoglyptoxoceras and Epiglyptoxoceras are superficially similar to the genus
Glyptoxoceras Spath, 1925 in being ornamented by ribs only, but differ from that genus in
their much larger size.
According to Collignon, the two genera differ from each other in the number of saddles
and lobes in their suture lines. Neoglyptoxoceras was reported to have four saddles instead
of three, and three lobes instead of two as in Epiglyptoxoceras.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
178
Figure 4
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). IRSNB 10257 (IG 6521 ex Ubaghs Collection) from the
upper Maastrichtian Calcaire de Kunraed of Kunrade, Limburg, The Netherlands. x 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM LS)
Unfortunately, Collignon’s sutural terminology is confusing and needs to be clarified.
According to the sutural terminology of Wedekind (1916), reviewed by Kullmann &
Wiedmann (1970), the adult suture of Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites consists of
four lobes, E (External), L (Lateral), U (Umbilical) and / (Internal); the three saddles are
referred to by their positions relative to the lobes, i.e. E/L, L/U, U/I.
The following is Collignon’s original diagnosis of Neoglyptoxoceras (1969: 35) with
our interpretation of the sutural terminology in parenthesis.
““ .et surtout par sa cloison qui compte 4 selles au lieu de 3, et 3 lobes au lieu de 2. Ces 4
selles sont de forme careé, avec lobule médian plus ou moins oblique. Le premier lobe (L)
trés étalé, tres volumineux, deux fois plus long que le siphonale (£); le deuxiéme (a large
median incision of the saddle U/L) est réduit, en forme d’étoile; le troisiéme (U)
présqu’aussi fort et long que le premier, présente une branche externe prépondeérante.
Lobule antisiphonal (/) tres allonge”.
The “extra” lateral lobe in Neoglyptoxoceras is in fact no more than a large, median
incision of the saddle L/U, which is very broad. In Epiglyptoxoceras, this saddle (L/U) is
constricted at the base, and the median incision is reduced (compare Collignon 1969,
figs 2074-2076, 2081-2083). This suture pattern differs in no significant respects from
that of D. cylindraceum (See Fig. 7). We agree with Wright (1997: L250) in regarding
Epiglyptoxoceras as a synonym of Neoglyptoxoceras, albeit for different reasons; Wright
considered Epiglyptoxoceras to be based on a pathological specimen. We do not think that
the sutural differences between the type species of the two taxa merit separation at generic
level, and as first revising authors select the name Neoglyptoxoceras for the taxon.
Apart from similar sutures, Neoglyptoxoceras resembles Diplomoceras in being
ornamented by ribs only. A further, and in our consideration, crucial similarity is in the
difference in ornament between internal moulds of the phragmocone and body chamber in
both Diplomoceras and Neoglyptoxoceras. It is well known that internal moulds of
D. cylindraceum are generally smooth, whereas the same mode of preservation of the
body chamber produces distinct ribbed ornament. This anomaly has been ascribed to
abnormal thickening of the middle nacreous layer below the ribbing on the phragmocone,
and is considered characteristic of the genus Diplomoceras by Olivero & Zinsmeister
(1989: 627, with additional references). A similar, though not identical situation exists in
Neoglyptoxoceras. Here, ribbing occurs on both phragmocone and body chamber, but the
strength and shape of ribbing changes dramatically on internal moulds at the end of the
phragmocone and beginning of the body chamber. This can be clearly seen on the
holotype and paratype of N. magnificum (Collignon 1969, pl. 523 (fig. 2065); pl. 526
(figs 2074—2075)) (Fig. 1OA—B); see also Fig.17). Similar differences in ribbing on the
body chamber and phragmocone on internal moulds have also been recorded in
Glyptoxoceras rugatum by Henderson et al. (1992) and may possibly be a diagnostic
feature of some of the genera referred to the subfamily Diplomoceratinae Spath, 1926.
The ribbing of Neoglyptoxoceras magnificum 1s too coarse, and the suture line a little
too different for it to be considered directly ancestral to D. cylindraceum. The fine ribbing
of Neoglyptoxoceras annulatum (Collignon, 1969) (Collignon 1969: 41, pl. 529
(figs 2083—2084)) (see also Figs 12—15), however, is perfectly compatible with that of
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 5
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). IRSNB 10290, ex Ubaghs Collection from the upper
Maastrichtian Calcaire de Kunraed of Kunrade, Limburg, The Netherlands. The specimen retains
silicified shell. x 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM 181
D. cylindraceum. \n addition, the coiling in N. annulatum changes from crioconic in the
early stages of growth (Fig. 15) to more elliptical, tending towards straightening of the
shaft in the adult stage (Figs 12-14). In fact, some specimens of N. annulatum
(Figs 13-14) and D. cylindraceum (Kennedy 1987, pl. 23 (fig. 1)) (Fig. 3A) have
near-identical coiling. In addition, in larger specimens of N. annulatum the whorl section
changes from slightly compressed at the smaller adapical end to near-circular at the larger
abapertural end.
A curious feature of NV. annulatum is that successive sutures, rather than interdigitating
as in D. cylindraceum, are clearly separated, producing smooth zones on the internal
mould (Figs 12A—B, 13-14). As yet, we have no explanation for this distinctive feature,
but similar, widely-spaced sutures also occur in Glyptoxoceras cf. subcompressum
(Forbes 1846) (Kennedy 1987: 179, pl. 26 (figs 1-6, 8-9, 13-14, 19-21)) from the upper
Maastrichtian of Kunrade, The Netherlands.
We believe that all the necessary elements for the “Bauplan” of D. cylindraceum may
be found in NV. annulatum. Apart from the smooth band between successive sutures, these
elements include similar suture lines, the change in ornament on internal moulds from the
phragmocone to the body chamber, the adult whorl section, and progressive tendency
towards elliptical coiling on the outer whorl, eventually leading towards the straight limbs
of D. cylindraceum. With the exception of a single possible specimen from KwaZulu
(Fig. 10C) the genus Neoglyptoxoceras appears to be endemic to Madagascar. Previous
records of Neoglyptoxoceras from Europe, e.g. (Neoglyptoxoceras (?) retrorsum in
Kennedy 1986b: 106, pl. 16 (figs 1-4, 6—7); pl. 17 (figs 1-2); text-fig. 38) are best referred
to Glyptoxoceras.
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 6
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). IRSNB 10290, ex Ubaghs Collection from the upper
Maastrichtian Calcaire de Kuraed of Kunrade, Limburg, The Netherlands. The specimen retains
silicified shell. x 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM 183
f} 3s
Oo
Figure 7
Suture line of Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). A. Copy after Kennedy 1986a,
text-fig. 7M. B. Copy after Macellari 1986, fig. 15. C. Copy after Jones 1963, fig. 15.
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 8 above (and see Figure 9)
Geographic distribution of Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). France, Biscay Region
(Ward & Kennedy 1993), Pyrénées Atlantiques (Kennedy 1986c), Tercis (Kichler & Odin 2001);
Cotentin Peninsula (Kennedy 1986a); Northern Spain (Wiedmann 1962); Italy (Mariani, 1898); The
Netherlands (Kennedy 1987); Belgium, the Mons Basin (Kennedy 1993); northern Germany (Schluter
1872); Denmark (Birkelund 1993); Poland (Blaszkiewicz 1980; Machalski 1996); Austria (Kennedy &
Summesberger 1986); The Ukraine (Kennedy & Summesberger 1987); Bulgaria (Tzankov 1982);
Serbia (ex Yugoslavia) (Petkovic 1953); Don Basin, Russia (Naidin 1974); Caucasus & Crimea (Naidin
& Shimanski 1959); European Russia (Mikhailov 1951); Arctic Siberia (Dundo 1971);
Continued next page
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM 185
Figure 9
Continued from previous page:
Northwestern Kamchatka & southern Sakhalin (Alabushev & Wiedmann 1997); Tunisia (Robaszynski
et al. 2000); South Africa (KwaZulu) (Klinger 1976); Madagascar Collignon 1971); South India
(Kennedy & Henderson 1992); Pakistan, Baluchistan (Kennedy 1999 in Fatmi & Kennedy); Western
Australia (Henderson et al. 1992); Antarctic Peninsula (Olivero & Zinsmeister 1989); Argentina
(Htinicken 1965); Chile (Stinnesbeck 1986); Brazil (Maury 1930); California (Anderson 1902, 1958);
British Columbia (Whiteaves 1903); Alaska (Jones 1963); Japan, Hokkaido (Matsumoto 1984); and
possibly West Greenland (Birkelund 1965) and New Zealand (Henderson 1970). This list is not intended
to be complete, and references are mainly restricted to one per locality.
186 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 10
A-B. Neoglyptoxoceras magnificum Collignon, 1969. The holotype, GD12074 from Gisement 162 de la
Coupe de Berere I (Belo sur Tsiribihina), lower Campanian, Zone of Anapachydiscus wittekindi &
Eulophoceras jacobi, subzone of Hourcquiella bererensis, level of Neogauthiericeras zafimahovai. C.
Neoglyptoxoceras sp. cf. N. serta Collignon 1969 non Miller & Wollemann, 1906 from locality 109C,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM 187
Figure 11
Neoglyptoxoceras perangustum Collignon, 1969. The holotype, GD12078 from Gisement 162, lower
Campanian Zone of Anapachydiscus wittekindi & Eulophoceras jacobi subzone of Hourcquiella
bererensis, Coupe de Berere I (Belo sur Tsiribihina). x 1.
188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 12
Neoglyptoxoceras annulatum (Collignon, 1969). A-B. GD 12083, the holotype, from Gisement 312 du
Km 16,200 de la Coupe Ampolypoly—Antsirasira—Behamotra (Belo sur Tsiribihina), lower Campanian,
Zone of Menabites boulei & Anapachydiscus arrialoorensis. Note the smooth zone between successive
sutures. C. Early whorls of N. annulatum, GD14013 from Gisement 162 de la Coupe de Berere I (Belo
sur Tsiribihina), Zone of Anapachydiscus wittekindi & Eulophoceras jacobi, subzone of Hourcquiella
bererensis. Level of Neogauthiericeras zafimahovai.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM 189
a ‘
KY
‘e
\ A
ANN
ye TE ul
\\
\\
\
\\
Figure 13
Neoglyptoxoceras annulatum (Collignon, 1969). GD14014 from Gisement 312 du Km. 16,200 de la
Coupe Ampolypoly—Antsirasira-Behamotra (Belo sur Tsiribihina), lower Campanian, Zone of
Menabites boulei & Anapachydiscus arrialoorensis. In the figure, the lower part of the shaft has been
cropped to fit the page size. X 1.
190 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 14
Neoglyptoxoceras annulatum (Collignon, 1969). The same specimen as figured in Fig. 10. In the figure,
the lower part of the shaft has been cropped to fit the page size. x 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM 19]
A, B C
Figure 15
Neoglyptoxoceras annulatum (Collignon, 1969). GD14015 located imprecisely as Berere, lower
Campanian. Early, criocone whorls. X 1.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We thank Dr Jean-Henri Delance (Dijon) for allowing us to examine material in the
Collignon Collection, for loan of specimens, and for assistance in many ways. Klinger
gratefully acknowledges financial aid from the Service de cooperation et d’action
culturelle, France, and the National Research Foundation, South Africa for travelling and
subsistence costs in Dijon in November 1999, and to the Oppenheimer Fund during his
stay in Oxford in August/September 2000. Kennedy gratefully acknowledges assistance
from the Department of Earth Sciences, Oxford and of the Geological Collections, Oxford
University Museum of Natural History. We thank Kerwin van Willingh for assistance
with photography.
192. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 16
Neoglyptoxoceras giganteum (Collignon, 1969). GD12081, the holotype from Gisement 307 du Km.
15,500 de la coupe Ampolypoly—Antsirasira-Behamotra (Belo sur Tsiribihina), lower Campanian,
Zone of Menabites boulei & Anapachydiscus arrialoorensis, subzone of Rabeiella orthogonia.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM 193
Figure 17
Neoglyptoxoceras magnificum Collignon, 1969. GD12075, part of the paratype figured by Collignon
(iS69>=35, ple 526 (fe 2075)) irom ‘Gisement 161, de Coupe de Berere i (Belo), Zone of
Anapachydiscus wittekindi & Eulophoceras jacobi, subzone of Hourcquiella bererensis, level of
Neogauthiericeras zafimahovai.
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REFERENCES
ALABUSHEV, A. & WIEDMANN, J. 1997. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from southern Sakhalin and
northwestern Kamchatka (northeast Russia). Palaeontographica 244A (1-3): 1-36.
ANDERSON, F.M. 1902. Cretaceous Deposits of the Pacific Coast. Proceedings of the Californian
Academy of Sciences (3) Geol. 2: 1-154.
ANDERSON, F.M. 1958. Upper Cretaceous of the Pacific Coast. Memoirs. Geological Society of
America 71: 1-378.
BIRKELUND, T. 1965. Ammonites from the Upper Cretaceous of Greenland. Meddelelser om
Gronland. Udgivne af Kommissionen for Videnskabelige undersogelser i Gronland 179: 1-192.
BIRKELUND, T. 1993. Ammonites from the Maastrichtian White Chalk in Denmark. Bulletin of the
Geological Survey of Denmark 40: 33-81.
BLASZKIEWICZ, A. 1980. Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites of the Middle Vistula Valley,
Poland: a stratigraphic—palaeontologic study. Prace Instytutu geologiczego. 92: 1-63.
COLLIGNON, M. 1969. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) XV
(Campanien inférieur). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1970. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) XVI
(Campanien moyen; Campanien supérieur). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1971. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites). XVII
(Maestrichtien). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
DEFRANCE, M.J.L. 1816. Baculites cylindracea. In: Dictionnaire des Sciences naturelles, dans lequel
on traite méthodiquement des différents Etres de la Nature. Paris, Strasbourg: Levrault.
DUNDO, O.P. 1971. [A key section of the Late Maastrichtian sediments of the central part of the
Korvaksky Highlands (State Collection)]. In; VASILEVSKAYA. N.D. [Ed.] Opornyj razrez
Maastrichtskikh otlozhenijy Tsentral’ noj chasti Koryakskogo nagorya. pp 84-92.
Nauchno-issledovatel skjij Leningrad. [In Russian]
FORBES, E, 1846. Report on the fossil Invertebrata from southern India, collected by Mr Kaye and
Mr Cunliffe. Transactions of the Geological Society of London 2, 7(3): 97-174
GALLEMI, J.. MARTINEZ, R., & PONS, J.M. 1983. Coniacian—Maastrichtian of the Tremp Area
South Central Pyrenees). Newsletters on Stratigraphy 12(1): 1-17.
HENDERSON, R.A. 1970. Ammonoidea from the Mata Series (Santonian—Maastrichtian) of New
Zealand. Special Papers in Palaeontology 6: iv + 1-82.
HENDERSON, R.A., KENNEDY, W.J., & MCNAMARA, K.J. 1992. Maastrichtian heteromorph
ammonites from the Carnarvon Basin, Western Australia. Alcheringa 16: 133-170.
HUNICKEN, M.A. 1965. Algunas Cefalépodos Supracretacicos del Rio Turbio (Santa Cruz). Revista
de la Facultad de Ciencias exactas, fisicas y naturales, Universidad Nacional de Cordoba (Serie
Ciencias Naturales) 26: 49-100.
HYATT, A. 1900. Cephalopoda. pp 502-604. In: ZITTEL, K.A. VON, (Ed.). Textbook of
Paleontology. London & New York: Macmillan. [Trans]. C.R. EASTMAN].
JONES, D.L. 1961. Muscle attachment impressions in a Cretaceous ammonite. Journal of Paleontology
35: 502-504.
JONES, D.L. 1963. Upper Cretaceous (Campanian and Maastrichtian) ammonites from southern
Alaska. Professional Papers. United States Geological Survey 432: 1-53.
KENNEDY, W.J. 1986a. The ammonite fauna of the Calcaire a Baculites (Upper Maastrichtian) of the
Cotentin Peninsula (Manche, France). Palaeontology 29(1): 25-83.
KENNEDY, W.J. 19865. Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites from northern Aquitaine, France.
Special Papers in Palaeontology 36: 1-145.
KENNEDY, W.J. 1986c. In: KENNEDY, W.J., BILOTTE, M., LEPICARD, B & SEGURA, F. Upper
Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites from the Petites-Pyrénées, southern France. Eclogae
geologicae Helvetiae 79(3): 1001—1037.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF DIPLOMOCERAS CYLINDRACEUM JM)
KENNEDY, W.J. 1987. The ammonite faunas of the type Maastrichtian, with a revision of Ammonites
colligatus Binckhorst, 1861. Bulletin de l'Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique.
(Sciences de la Terre). Bulletin van het koninklijk Belgisch Instituut voor Natuurwetenschappen
(Aardwetenschappen) 56: 151—267. (Dated 1986.)
KENNEDY, W.J. 1993. Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites from the Mons Basin (Belgium).
Bulletin de I’'Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, (Sciences de la Terre). Bulletin van
het koninklijk Belgisch Instituut voor Natuurwetenschappen (Aardwetenschappen) 63: 99-131.
KENNEDY, W.J. 1999. In: FATMI, A.N. & KENNEDY, W.J. Maastrichtian ammonites from
Balochistan, Pakistan. Journal of Paleontology 73(4): 641-662.
KENNEDY, W.J. & HENDERSON, R.A. 1992. Heteromorph ammonites from the Upper
Maastrichtian of Pondicherry, South India. Palaeontology 35(3): 693-731.
KENNEDY, W.J. & SUMMESBERGER, H. 1986. Lower Maastrichtian ammonites from Neuberg,
Steiermark, Austria. Beitrdige zur Paldontologie von Osterreich 12: 181-242.
KENNEDY, W.J. & SUMMESBERGER, H. 1987. Lower Maastrichtian ammonites from Nagoryany
(Ukrainian SSR). Beitrdge zur Paldontologie von Osterreich 13: 25-78.
KILIAN, W. & REBOUL, P. 1906. Les céphalopodes néocretacées des isles Seymour et Snow Hill.
Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der Schwedischen Sudpolar-Expedition 1901-1903 3(6): 1—75.
KLINGER, H.C. 1976. Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites from Zululand. Memoirs. Geological
Survey, Republic of South Africa 69: 1-142.
KLINGER, H.C. & KENNEDY, W.J. 2001. Stratigraphic and geographic distribution, phylogenetic
trends and general comments on the ammonite family Baculitidae Gill, 1871. (With an annotated list
of species referred to the family). Annals of the South African Museum 107: 1-290.
KLINGER, H.C. & KENNEDY, W.J. 2003. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
The ammonite families Nostoceratidae Hyatt, 1894 and Diplomoceratidae Spath, 1926. Annals of
the South African Museum. 110(6): 219-336.
KULLMANN, J. & WIEDMANN, J. 1970. Significance of sutures in phylogeny of Ammonoidea.
Paleontological Contributions. University of Kansas 47: \—32.
KUCHLER, T. & ODIN, G.S. 2001. Upper Campanian—Maastrichtian ammonites (Nostoceratidae,
Diplomoceratidae) from Tercis les Bains (Landes, France). Jn: ODIN,G:S. (Ed.). The Campanian—
Maastrichtian Boundary D4e: 500-528.
MACELLARI, C. 1986. Late Campanian—Maastrichtian ammonite fauna from Seymour Island
(Antarctic Peninsula). Memoir. The Paleontological Society 18: 1-55.
MACHALSKI, M. 1996. Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816); a typically Maastrichtian
ammonite in the Piotrawin section, central Poland. Przeglad Geologiczny 44: 953-954.
MARIANL E. 1898. Ammoniti del Senoniano Lombardo. Memorie del Reale Instituto Lombardo di
Scienze e lettere, classe di Scienze matematiche e naturali. (3)18: 51—58 (1-8).
MATSUMOTO, T. 1959. Upper Cretaceous Ammonites of California. Memoirs of the Faculty of
Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 8(4): 91-171.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1984. Some ammonites from the Campanian (Upper Cretaceous) of northern
Hokkaido. Special Papers. Palaeontological Society of Japan. 27: \-32.
MATSUMOTO, T. & MIYAUCHI, T. 1984. Part II. Some Campanian ammonites from the Soya area.
Special Papers. Palaeontological Society of Japan. 27: 33-76.
MATSUMOTO, T. & MOROZUMI, Y. 1980. Late Cretaceous ammonites from the Izumi Mountains,
southwest Japan. Bulletin of the Osaka Museum of Natural History 33: \-31.
MAURY, C.A. 1930. O Cretaceo da Parahyba do Norte. Servicico Geologica do Brasil. Monografia 11:
1—183. [In Portuguese and English]
MIKHAILOV, N.P. 1951. [Upper Cretaceous ammonites from the southern part of European Russia
and their importance in zonal stratigraphy (Campanian, Maastrichtian)]. Trudy Jnstituta
geologicheskikh Nauk 129: 1-143. [In Russian]
MULLER, G. & WOLLEMANN, A. 1906. Die Molluskenfauna des Untersenon von Braunschweig und
Ilsede. 2. Die Cephalopoden. Abhandlungen der Koniglichen Preussischen Geologischen
Landesanstalt. N.F. 40: 1-30.
196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
NAIDIN, D.P. 1974. [Ammonoidea] pp 158-195. Jn: Krymgolts, G. Ja (Ed.). [Atlas of Upper
Cretaceous fauna of Donbass|“NEDRA”: Moscow [In Russian]
NAIDIN, D.P. & SHIMANSKIJ, V.N. 1959. [Cephalopoda] /n: Moskvina, M.M. (Ed.). [Atlas of Upper
Cretaceous fauna of the northern Caucasus and Crimea] “NEDRA”: Moscow. [In Russian]
OLIVERO, E.B. & ZINSMEISTER, W.J. 1989. Large heteromorph ammonites from the Upper
Cretaceous of Seymour Island, Antarctica. Journal of Paleontology 63(5): 626-636.
PETKOVIC, V.K. 1953. [La lumachella (banc) a Céphalopodes et Inocérames dans les couches
Sénoniennes de |’Osmaskovska Reka, avec fauna prépondeérante des eaux basses et saumatres, son
importance biostratigraphique et l’interprétation de ce phénomene (Serbie Orientale)]. Zborn. Rad.
geol. inst. 34: 1-66 [In Serbian with French summary]
ROBASZYNSKI, F., GONZALEZ DONOSO, J.M., LINARES, D., AMEDRO, F., CARON, M.,
DUPUIS, C., DHONDT, A. & GARTNER, S. 2000. [The Upper Cretaceous of the Kalaat Senan
region, central Tunisia. Integrated litho-biostratigraphy based on ammonites, planktonic
foraminifera and nannofossils zones from Upper Turonian to Maastrichtian.]. Bulletin du Centre de
Recherches Elf Exploration Production 22(2): 359-490. [In French]
SCHLUTER, C. 1871-1876. Cephalopoden der oberen deutschen Kreide. Palaeontographica 21:
1-24(1871); 21: 25-120 (1872); 24: 1-144 (121-264) (1876).
SPATH, L.F. 1926. On new ammonites from the English Chalk. Geological Magazine 63: 77-83.
SPATH, L.F. 1953. The Upper Cretaceous Cephalopod fauna of Grahamland. Scientific Report. British
Antarctic Survey 3: 1-60.
STINNESBECK, W. 1986. Zu den faunistischen und palokologischen Verhaltnissen in der Quiriquina
Formation (Maastrichtium) Zentral-Chiles. Palaeontographica 194A: 99-237.
TZANKOV, V. 1982. [The fossils of Bulgaria. Va. Upper Cretaceous]. Sofia: Bulgarian Academy of
Sciences. 136 pp. [In Bulgarian with French summary]
WARD, P.D. & KENNEDY, W.J. 1993. Maastrichtian Ammonites from the Biscay region (France,
Spain). Memoir. The Paleontological Society. 30: 1-58.
WEDEKIND, R. 1916. Uber Lobus, Suturallobus und Inzision. Zentralblatt fiir Mineralogie, Geologie
und Paldontologie B 8: 185-195.
WHITEAVES, J.F. 1903. On some additional fossils from the Vancouver Cretaceous, with a revised list
of the species therefrom. Geological Survey of Canada. Mesozoic Fossils 1(5): 309-409.
WIEDMANN, J. 1962. Ammoniten aus der Vascogotischen Kreide (Nordspanien). 1, Phylloceratina,
Lytoceratina. Palaeontographica 118A: 119-237.
WRIGHT, C.W. 1957. Cephalopoda, Ammonoidea. Jn: MOORE, R.C. Ed. Treatise on invertebrate
paleontology. Part L, Mollusca 4: xxii, 1-490. New York & Lawrence: Geological Society of
America and University of Kansas Press.
WRIGHT, C.W. with CALLOMON. [sic. misspelled Calloman], J. H. & HOWARTH, M. K. 1997.
Treatise on invertebrate paleontology. Part L, Mollusca 4. Revised. Volume 4. Boulder, Colorado:
Geological Society of America, and Lawrence, Kansas: University of Kansas Press. (Dated 1996)
_ a
as
:
NN Oe
a4
_
=
a ae
eae wey ANSE Oe!
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 110 Band
August 2003 Augustus
Part =_5 Deel
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXYBELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI COLLIGNON,
1965 (CEPHALOPODA: AMMONOIDEA). ONTOGENY, SHELL STRUCTURE,
DIFFERENTIAL PRESERVATION AND INTRASPECIFIC VARIATION
by
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and
review articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/1ziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
L, HS, SO), HUD, 4-5, EB, eat, 4D), SUS, 7-9), GU, to?)
CZ), G02, 1), WO), WD, S, 9, tet), ZS), 155),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 187 3
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXYBELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI COLLIGNON,
1965 (CEPHALOPODA: AMMONOIDEA). ONTOGENY, SHELL STRUCTURE,
DIFFERENTIAL PRESERVATION AND INTRASPECIFIC VARIATION
by
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
South African Museum, Iziko Museums of Cape Town
E-mail [email protected]
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, Oxford University Museum of Natural History, Oxford
E-mail Jim. [email protected]
(With 10 figures)
[MS accepted February 2003]
ABSTRACT
Examination of more than one hundred specimens of the Coniacian heteromorph ammonite
Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965, from Madagascar and two from KwaZulu (Zululand)
shows that coiling is in an open criocone and that, due to the shell structure, ornament varies
considerably between internal moulds of the phragmocone and body chamber respectively, and in
specimens with shelly preservation. The specimens also exhibit some variation in whorl section and
ornamentation on both phragmocones and body chambers.
CONTENTS
PAGE
NETO GLU G CLO ee Rae ccc rsa ee dl decd cdngav Muses budeeeudeatolneteaeuver.dvibasdusecuesacdi desdstae 201
IR ea colada ee ee a a ee reals ered EN Dok Uae dacevadt avaeeaunceed ede Meudenteeacatheuse dens cepssbortaedloays 201
CW coil ame eres ee ea sk coe ca ca nalsaudasae naven deer vee uate ovendudetensnothaa tacos ceOR tea y <i bcadAan Sel ahiobeae 203
Shellistmuctume am a@komimaime ita ttOMl cece oo-25.2sahssosassasaereesensseodessvasestss aesavcesseewecebcewobondaeesaueecocccenossocaepgcese 203
Vitesse © Mtn ama Ca UN @ Meee etn ee ce ARE olen sn naauls cece aay Set ana Wea tieloe doc uee em Nee plate aie teeta, Gaaeceneus@cSeas beds 207
ED) AS TS OI SERENE ee Pee RMR SET OND cient 1 EE set dy a OO. ere Yee a ete neds eo Ace ee 209
ene KMONVALE CE SMAGILS meee memes Ohta rod el AN Sao Ne IR NS Eg Roto Laake Meee ela eshte: 2S
IREMEMRANGES -ohosconun Sec eeelea eels sce sens Ne at ee ROMA Cie ai iets 37 Fes 52 adenine alRNet sil: ke oe ee NS
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 110 (5), 2003: 199-218, 10 figs.
1199
200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure |
Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965. GD14000 from Gisement 462. The most complete
specimen consisting of an inner phragmocone and an outer body chamber whorl, illustrating the
apparent open, elliptical crioconic coiling of the adult shell. x 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXYBELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI A0T
INTRODUCTION
In 1999 and 1993 respectively we had the opportunity to examine both the type and
undescribed material in the General M. Collignon collection of Cretaceous fossils from
Madagascar, which is now permanently housed at the Centre des Sciences de la Terre,
Université de Bourgogne, in Dijon. Amongst these, we were able to examine more than a
hundred specimens of the Coniacian heteromorph ammonite Pseudoxybeloceras
matsumotoi Collignon 1965 (1965: 12, pl. 419 (fig. 1731)). These, as well as two
specimens from the Coniacian of Kwazulu, allow us to comment on the ontogeny, shell
structure and resultant dissimilar appearance of ornamentation on the phragmocone and
body chamber of internal moulds and, where shell is preserved, as well as on the
intraspecific variation of the latter and of the whorl section.
=
MATERIAL
Madagascan material examined is from the localities (“Gisements’) listed by
Collignon (1965):
225. Ankotrofotsy (Antsalova). Coniacian sensu lato.
263. Masiaposa (Belo sur Tsiribihina). Lower Coniacian, Zone of Peroniceras
dravidicum.
280. Coupe Ampolipoly—Antsitasira km 10,5 a 10,700 ... qui pourrait étre de la base
du Campanien. (Note: this appears to be incorrect as all the other localities are Coniacian!)
335. Beantaly (Belo sur Tsiribihina). Middle Coniacian, Zone of Kossmaticeras
theobaldianum & Barroisiceras onilahyense.
344. Analabe (Belo sur Tsiribihina). Middle Coniacian, Zone of Kossmaticeras
theobaldianum & Barroisiceras onilahyense.
462. Manasoa (Betioky). Middle Coniacian, Zone of Kossmaticeras theobaldianum &
Barroisiceras onilahyense.
467. Ravin d’Anjoho (Betioky). Middle Coniacian, Zone of Kossmaticeras
theobaldianum & Barroisiceras onilahyense.
729. Ambiky, Sud Andimaka, pres Ampolipoly (Belo sur Tsiribihina). Middle
Coniacian, Zone of Kossmaticeras theobaldianum & Barroisiceras onilahyense.
731. Coupe Andimaka-Iampolipoly. Middle Coniacian, Zone of Kossmaticeras
theobaldianum & Barroisiceras onilahyense.
745. Coupe Ankinatsy—Souromaraina (Belo sur Tsiribihina). Middle Coniacian, Zone
of Kossmaticeras theobaldianum & Barroisiceras onilahyense.
The two KwaZulu specimens, SAM—PCZ18747 and NMB—PCZ18743 respectively
are from Kennedy & Klinger’s (1975) localities:
Locality 92, Bed 1, Coniacian IH, St Lucia Formation.
Locality 145, Coniacian II, St Lucia Formation.
202 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 2
Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965. GD14001 from Gisement 225. An internal mould of
the phragmocone to illustrate the weak ribbing on the flanks and dorsum, and absence over the venter as
well as complete absence of tuberculation on internal moulds. x 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXYBELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI 203
COILING
The initial juvenile stages are unknown; the earliest ontogenetic stages present consist
of slightly curved shafts with a whorl height of c. 20 mm. With the exception of GD14000,
all the specimens consist of slightly curved shafts only. GD14000 (Fig. 1) comprises parts
of two slightly curved shafts situated next to each other and, though not in contact,
probably belong to the same individual. The inner shaft is part of the phragmocone, the
outer 1s body chamber. This suggests that coiling of the adult shell may have been in an ©
open, elliptical criocone. An elliptical crioconic shell is also consistent with the
taphonomy of the species. With no contact between the successive coils, the shell would
have been extremely fragile and subject to post-mortem fragmentation. This would
explain why nearly all of the material consists of parts of curved shafts only. Epizoan
encrustation by serpulids and oysters of many of the specimens suggests an immediately
post-mortem shallow depositional environment with currents strong enough to fragment
most of the shells prior to burial.
When compared with later, Santonian-Campanian Pseudoxybeloceras quadrinodosum
(Jimbo, 1894) (Wright & Matsumoto 1954, figs 9-12; Matsumoto 1977: 345, pl. 57
(fig. 2); pl. 6 (fig. 4); Szasz 1974: 193, pl. 1 (figs 1-4); pl. 2 (figs 1-3)); pl. 3 (fig. 1);
text-fig. 2; 1t appears that the trend in coiling in the genus Pseudoxybeloceras was from an
open, elliptical criocone towards parallel, straight shafts linked by tightly curved sections,
specifically in the body chamber which seems to have occupied two shafts. This seems to
have been a common trend amongst genera conventionally referred to the Family
Diplomoceratidae Spath, 1926 (Klinger & Kennedy this volume 110(4)).
SHELL STRUCTURE AND ORNAMENTATION
Details of the shell structure of ammonoids are reviewed by Kulicki (1996) and apart
from a brief summary need not be repeated here. In all ammonoids, the post-embryonic
shell consists of three principal layers:
1. The outer prismatic layer
2. The middle nacreous layer
3. The inner prismatic layer.
In most ammonoids, ornamentation of the outer part of the shell is the same as that of
the inner part; the gross surface morphology of external and internal moulds is essentially
similar. Also, the dorsal part of the ammonoid shell consists only of the inner prismatic
layer. A well-documented exception to this rule amongst heteromorph ammonites occurs
in the genus Diplomoceras Hyatt, 1900; specifically in the type and apparently only
species definitely referable to the genus, D. cylindraceum (Defrance,1816) (see e.g.
Olivero & Zinsmeister 1989: 627 with references and Klinger & Kennedy this volume
110(4)). Here, internal moulds of the phragmocone are generally perfectly smooth
whereas specimens that retain the shell are distinctly ribbed. Furthermore, internal moulds
of the body chamber in this species are always ribbed, thus suggesting a difference in shell
structure between the phragmocone and body chamber. Ventral and dorsal parts of the
204 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 3
Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965. A-C. GD14002 from Gisement 225. D—G. GD14003.
H-J. GD 14004, both from Gisement 263. All internal moulds of the phragmocone to illustrate the weak
ribbing on the flanks and over dorsum, and complete absence of tubercles. All x 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXY BELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI 205
shell in Diplomoceras also appear to be the same, in contrast to “normally” coiled
ammonites.
According to Olivero & Zinsmeister (1989) these apparent differences in ornament are
due to the extreme thickening of the middle nacreous layer below the ribs on the
phragmocone. Another notable feature of Diplomoceras is the discontinuous nature of the
inner prismatic layer.
A similar situation occurs in Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi, although details differ,
mainly because of the presence of tubercles on the ribs, in contrast to Diplomoceras which
only has ribbing.
The majority of the specimens we have examined are internal moulds, both of the
phragmocone and body chamber. Only two specimens, SAM—PCZ18747 and GD14009
retain parts of the original aragonitic shell, but in other specimens, parts of the original
shell are preserved in recrystallized calcite.
Typical ornament in adult Pseudoxybeloceras as originally defined by Wright &
Matsumoto (1954) consists of single ribs, each bearing a pair of ventral and ventrolateral
tubercles, 1.e. four tubercles per rib.
Internal moulds and sections of the body chamber that retain part of the original shell of
P. matsumotoi show the typical quadrituberculate ribbing (e.g. Figs 1, 4E—-G, 5-9).
Details of the ornamentation on the different parts of the shell are to be discussed below.
In contrast, internal moulds of the phragmocone (e.g. Figs 2-3, 4A—D, 10C) vary from
specimens that are virtually smooth, to specimens with faint ribbing on the flanks and over
the dorsum, but absent on the venter, with no traces of tuberculation at all. Internal moulds
such as these were referred to Diplomoceras (Glyptoxoceras) subcompressum (Forbes) by
Collignon (1965: 13, pl. 419 (fig. 1732)) (Fig. 10C). The presence of ribbing on the flanks
and over the dorsum, but their absence over the venter suggests that the inner prismatic
layer is present in the former regions, and is either absent or very poorly developed over
the venter. If this is the case, P. matsumotoi differs in this respect from D. cylindraceum,
where the shell structure on the dorsum and the venter is the same according to Olivero &
Zinsmeister (1989: 629).
As noted above, a few specimens retain either parts of the original aragonitic shell or
recrystallized parts thereof. These show that construction of the greater part of the
ornamentation, i.e. ribbing and tuberculation, is restricted to the middle, nacreous layer.
The nacreous layer is thick, and forms solid, rather than hollow ribs and tubercles. Where
the nacreous layer is well preserved, the ribs are prominent on the flanks and on the
dorsum, but weaker-developed between the ventrolateral and ventral tubercles, and even
weaker to absent between the latter over the venter. Both rows of tubercles in the nacreous
layer are radially elongated with rounded upper surfaces and consist of solid shell. The
solid nature of the ribs and tubercles is clearly indicated in specimens where these have
been sheared off. In the case of the ventrolateral tubercles and ribs, these fractures are
tear-shaped to narrowly elliptical (Figs SA—B, 6, 8). In contrast, the ventral tubercles
appear more rounded (Fig. 6A—C, 8), creating the impression that there was a basal
septum to the original hollow tubercle. These fracture surfaces, however, are completely
flat and irregular in outline, thus confirming the solid nature of the tubercles.
206 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 4
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXYBELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI 207
In SAM—PCZ18747 (Figs 7-8) parts of the complete shell are preserved over the
ventral region. Here, an outer layer, which we suspect to be the prismatic layer, covers the
tubercles of the nacreous layer and, in the case of the ventrolateral tubercles at least, forms
delicate, hollow spines, each ending in a broad, flattened end (Figs 7A, 8). Without
damaging the specimen for thin sectioning, it is impossible to determine whether this is
indeed the outer prismatic layer, or part of the middle nacreous layer, but we suspect the
former. It is not clear what, if any function, these spines performed. Hollow spines with a
basal septum are common in diverse ammonite groups, especially in anisoceratid and
turrilitid genera. Amongst the diplomoceratids, abnormal spines have been recorded in
Pseudoxybeloceras aff. lineatum (Gabb) by Olivero (1988: 263, fig. 3) and in
Parasolenoceras soyaense Matsumoto & Miyauchi 1986 (1986: 9, pl. 1 (figs 1-4);
text-figs 1-2) and Parasolenoceras tomitai Matsumoto, 1984 (Matsumoto & Miyauchi
1986: 12, pl. 1 (fig. 5); text-figs 3-4).
INTRASPECIFIC VARIATION
Apart from the artefacts of differential preservation discussed above, and overall
maximum size, there is little intraspecific variation in the material we have examined. A
specimen with extremely coarse tuberculation is shown in Fig. 9E. The specimen shown
in Fig. 9A—D, in contrast, has more delicate tuberculation and, in addition, has a distinctly
depressed whorl section (Fig. 9C). We suspect the latter feature may be due to diagenetic
deformation.
The most complete specimen, GD14000 (Fig. 1) discussed above, differs from the rest
of the specimens in being much larger. The whorl height of the body chamber of that
Specimen is nearly twice that of the other specimens examined. It is not possible to say
whether this merely reflects an extreme range in maximum size in the adult stage, or
whether it is indicative of dimorphism.
Fig 4. (see facing page). Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965. A-C. GD14005 from
Gisement 225. An internal mould of the phragmocone to illustrate weak ribbing on flanks and
dorsum, and complete absence of tubercles. D. GD14006 from Gisement 263. An internal mould of
the phragmocone with weak traces of ventrolateral and ventral tubercles. E-G. GD14007 from
Gisement 335. A body chamber fragment with recrystallized shell showing typical P. matsumotoi
ornament of quadrituberculate ribbing. All x 1.
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 5
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXY BELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI 209
DIMENSIONS
The whorl height (Wh), whorl breadth (Wb) (in millimetres) and rib index (R1) (ribs
counted per whorl height) for figured specimens are as follows:
Specimen Wb Wh Wb:Wh Ri
GD14000 46,0 65,0 0,71 12
20,0 28,0 oy ei
GD14001 24,0 32,0 0,75 12
GD14002 22,0 28,0 50a eee
GD14003 20,0 : 25,0 0,80 710
GD14004 14,5 18,0 = 0 RU ave ae Oe d
GD14006 22,0 29,0 0,76 10
GD14007 28,0 36,0 08 oe Oe is
PCZ18743 22,0 29,5 0,75 9
GD14008 2055 29,0 = _ 0,76 Oe a A:
GD14009 25,0 34,5 0,72 9
GD14010 40,0 33,0 1,21 10
Fig 5. (see facing page). Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965. A-C. NMB—PCZ18743 from
locality 145, KwaZulu. A body chamber fragment with most of the middle nacreous layer intact.
This specimen shows the typical rounded elliptical shape of the tubercles, as well as the flat fracture
surface where these have been sheared off. D-F. GD14008 Part of the phragmocone with part of the
shell preserved in recrystallized calcite. Note the absence of tubercles on the internal mould (E, F)
where the shell has not been preserved. Both x 1.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
210
"| X JO poreoys us0q savy soposroqny
PUL SGI PHOS SY} S19YM JOUSA OY} UO PUB SYUL]J 94} UO soovyINS oINjORL] IVIJ OY} DION “poAsosoid 1aXey snooroeU o|Ppru pue oneursrid
JOUUT ot} JO Led YIM suOsoUIseAYd oY} Jo UONDES W [EL JUOASIN WOY KNOPIGD $96] “UOUSIT[OD 1ojownsypu spsad0jaqgdxopnas qf
9 OINSIy
AK
\
\
)
Be
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXYBELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI Zell
Figure 7
Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965. SAM—PCZ18747 from locality 92. A specimen which
has part of the original aragonitic shell preserved. A. is an enlarged section of the septate section of B to
show weak ribbing on the internal mould, radially elongated, rounded, solid ventrolateral tubercles of
the middle nacreous layer, and the hollow ventral row of spines of what we suspect to be the outer,
prismatic layer. A. X 2, B. X 1.
bo
La
bo
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 8
Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965. SAM—PCZ18747 from locality 92. Magnified section
of the body chamber part of Fig. 7B to show details of ventral and ventrolateral tuberculation. x 2.
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXYBELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI 213
we
ae
Ne
Figure 9
Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965. A-D. GD14010 from Gisement 280. E. GD14011
from Gisement 263. F. GD14012 from Gisement 335. Body chamber fragments to show variation in
ornament and whorl section. E. shows extreme coarse tuberculation; A—D has a depressed whorl section
which may be due to diagenetic deformation. All xX 1.
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 10
Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, 1965. A—B. The lectotype here designated figured by
Collignon (1965, pl. 419 (fig. 1731)) GD11731 from Gisement 335, Beantaly (Belo sur Tsiribihina),
Lower or Middle Coniacian. C. “Diplomoceras (Glyptoxoceras) subcompressum Forbes” of Collignon
1965: 13, pl. 419 (fig. 1732), an internal mould of the phragmocone of P. matsumotoi from Gisement
225, Ankotrofotsy (Antsalova), Coniacian sensu lato. Both X 1.
OBSERVATIONS ON PSEUDOXYBELOCERAS MATSUMOTOI ZA:
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We thank Dr Jean-Henri Delance (Dijon) for allowing us to examine material in the
Collignon Collection, for loan of specimens, and for assistance in many ways. Klinger
gratefully acknowledges financial aid from the Service de cooperation et d’action
culturelle, France and the National Research Foundation, South Africa for travelling and
subsistence costs in Dijon in November 1999, and to the Oppenheimer Fund (Oxford
University, U.K.) during his stay in Oxford in August/September 2000. We are grateful to
Kerwin van Willingh for assistance with the photography of the specimens. Kennedy
acknowledges the technical assistance of the staff of the Department of Earth Sciences,
Oxford, and the Geological Collections of the Oxford University Museum of Natural
History.
REFERENCES
COLLIGNON, M. 1965. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) XIII
(Coniacien). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1969. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) XV
(Campanien inférieur). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
DEFRANCE, M.J.L. 1816. Baculites cylindracea. In: Dictionnaire des Sciences naturelles, dans lequel
on traite methodiquement des different Etres de la Nature. Strassbourg, Paris: Levrault.
HYATT, A. 1900. Cephalopoda. pp 502-604. In: ZITTEL, K.A. VON , (Ed). Textbook of Paleontology.
London & New York: Macmillan. [Transl. C.R. EASTMAN]
JIMBO, K. 1894. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Fauna der Kreideformation von Hokkaido.
Palaeontologische Abhandlungen 6 (N.F.2) 3: 149-194.
KENNEDY, W.J. & KLINGER, H.C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
Introduction, Stratigraphy. Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History) (Geology) 25(4):
263-315.
KLINGER, H.C. 1976. Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites from Zululand. Memoirs. Geological
Survey, Republic of South Africa 69: 1-142.
KLINGER, H.C. & KENNEDY, W.J. 2003. Observations on the systematics, geographic and
stratigraphic distribution and origin of Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Detrance, 1816) (Cephalopoda:
Ammonoidea). Annals of the South African Museum. 110(4): 171-198.
KLINGER, H.C. & KENNEDY, W.J. 2003. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
The ammonite families Nostoceratidae Hyatt, 1894 and Diplomoceratidae Spath, 1926. Annals of
the South African Museum. 110(6): 219-336.
KULICKI, C. 1996. Ammonoid shell microstructure. Topics in Geobiology 13: 65-101.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1977. Some heteromorph ammonites from the Cretaceous of Hokkaido. Memoirs of
the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 23: 303-366.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1984. Some ammonites from the Campanian (Upper Cretaceous) of northern
Hokkaido. Part 1. Ammonites from the Upper Campanian of the Teshio Mountains. Special Papers.
Palaeontological Society of Japan 27: 5-32.
MATSUMOTO, T. & MIYAUCHI, T. 1986. Further notes on Parasolenoceras (heteromorph
ammonoid) from northern Hokkaido. Science Report of the Yokosuka City Museum 34:7-16.
216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
OLIVERO, E.B. 1988. Early Campanian heteromorph ammonites from James Ross Island, Antarctica.
National Geographic Research 4(2): 259-271.
OLIVERO, E.B. & ZINSMEISTER, W.J. 1989. Large heteromorph ammonites from the Upper
Cretaceous of Seymour Island, Antarctica. Journal of Paleontology 63(5): 626-636.
SPATH, L.F. 1926. On new ammonites from the English Chalk. Geological Magazine 63: 77-83.
SZASZ, L. 1974. Pseudoxybeloceras quadrinodosum (Jimbo) (Ammonoidea) in Campanianul Superior
de la Ponor (Zoa Pui, Carpatii Meridional1). /nstitutul de Geologie si Geofizica. Dari de Seami ale
sedilentor 60: 191-198.
WARD, P.D. & MALLORY, V.S. 1977. Taxonomy and evolution of the lytoceratid genus
Pseudoxybeloceras and relationship to the genus Solenoceras. Journal of Paleontology 51(3):
606-618.
WRIGHT, C.W. & MATSUMOTO, T. 1954. Some doubtful Cretaceous ammonite genera from Japan
and Saghalien. Memoirs of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology)
8(4): 107-134.
APRECAS MUSEU
Ty) ee : oe
Sain. Ly SKA a Arce MUAY +4
iy
Sr
z
3
s
r
1
i
r
i
1
x
=
ai
y
5
a
iF
2
=
1
=
c
s
)
ir
©
.
: i
|
= = abe
age
j ‘ a 4
= 4
5.
t
H
re face
im J
i
Zo
Soli ;
oy =
| nea =
. 2
it =
.
; x
| j
i
I f {
eee
! + sav
41) 0) eon ‘
| 4 5 as
fi +
; a =
| =
|
Rhy +
1) Alt 3
an
15
|
iL wate
i =
| i
Ht ae
if oy
\
(i ae
hy iz i
if a Sa
i 4 =
5 NS
ie “
} S <
U ms > es
\Tis y
J & ; .
{
4
}
J
. ~ a
| 2S
| oe
. S =
5
'
¢
(t y
{
=
4
5 eae
ow RN ai
or een
as
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 110 Band
August 2003 Augustus
Paltz © | IDE!
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND
NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA. THE AMMONITE FAMILIES
NOSTOCERATIDAE HYATT, 1894 AND
DIPLOMOCERATIDAE SPATH, 1926
by
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and
review articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
|, ACA, 59), SUB, 4-3, TES, tiga.) A), SUS, EO), GOLD, cui.)
104), 8, 00D, 7, TOC), M2, 5, 7, tai, AVA), SG),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1—3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 188 1
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND
NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA. THE AMMONITE FAMILIES
NOSTOCERATIDAE HYATT, 1894 AND
DIPLOMOCERATIDAE SPATH, 1926
by
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
South African Museum, Iziko Museums of Cape Town
E-mail [email protected]
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, Oxford University Museum of Natural History, Oxford
E-mail [email protected]
(With 64 figs)
[MS submitted August 2001]
[MS accepted 31 January 2002|
ABSTRACT
Some of the Upper Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites from Zululand and Pondoland, which had
previously been described by Klinger (1976), are revised and refigured. New material and taxonomic
data are incorporated in the present descriptions. The provisional classification adopted here is loosely
based on that of Wright (1997) pending a full review of the relationships between the families
Diplomoceratidae and Nostoceratidae. Representatives of the genera and subgenera Eubostrychoceras
(Eubostrychoceras) Matsumoto, 1967, E. (Amapondella) Klinger & Kennedy, 1997, Nostoceras
(Nostoceras) Hyatt, 1894, Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) Hyatt, 1900, Didymoceras (Didymoceras)
Hyatt, 1894, Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras) s. gen. nov., Diplomoceras Hyatt, 1900, Glyptoxoceras
Spath, 1925, Scalarites Wright & Matsumoto, 1954, Neoglyptoxoceras Collignon, 1969, Neocrioceras
(Neocrioceras) Spath, 19216, N. (Schlueterella) Wiedmann, 1962, Pseudoxybeloceras (Pseudoxy-
beloceras) Wright & Matsumoto, 1954 and Spiroxybeloceras Kennedy & Cobban, 1999, are described,
including the following new species: Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) nibelae sp. nov., E. (E.) zulu
sp. nov., Didymoceras (Didymoceras) australis sp. nov., Didymoceras (Didymoceras?) africanum sp.
nov., Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras) howarthi sp. nov., Neoglyptoxoceras collignoni nom. nov., and
Neocrioceras (Neocrioceras) annelisae sp. nov.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 110 (6), 2003: 219-336, 64 figs.
2S)
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CONTENTS
PAGE
Trntrodimete@nn 65...6025 Le ea eee se rs RR SOOO oe 221
LOCATION. OF SPECIMENS oe..25c0a ace ec ee eee ee eee oo ae re ene a 72)
Piel! TOCaIICS e orsccctocseonntetecconstocteeen see c ace e he FeO PAMPER EE CEG SSAC ICC os ee Eee 221
SULUTE CEHMINOLO SY o..sceaccseseosaeteck Gaoe cn Bost Voss een Oo Ron TRE See ch ae HSA Roe Ret cs cc garhs 9 cee DTA
DIMENSIONS rans sn ieinncct bee lk an eee bes enue ah eee aa Sea eee a EOE a PE es So Wp)
ClAaSSITCAUION 4 .cicssnsesencRouansaetoncderR ene teeee tee tetee meee en mana ee ewea etn ee ean eat ty chon cee area 2D
Systematic palacontology. sc.. eek etiegen: seecas eee eee mane ee 2D)
Famuly Nostoceratidacss a2 sah haede Sete ns esate ee te ea SORE ow ons LCoS 22
GenusvLADOSTLYCHOCEIAS Wei TR ARE ae recone aa D222
SUDEMUS ZubOSthy ChOCEr as (IDOStmy CHOCCKAS) snr a ee eee MM)
Subgenus 2 uUDOSTLVChOCEras (AINGDONGEIIG) rn. cee ese erate ee 235
GENUS NOSLOCELAS iss. sonci sete aes cee AOE Oe ea Rade ROA CER 244
subgenus Nostoceras: (NOStOCEIGS) eer neck cone oie) sco csiouss ceheccceeeene see eee ee 244
Subsenus Nostoceras (BOSUWeEhOCCr aS) crm rt ne eee ee 250
GENUS DIG VMOCEIAS acc5.4 sk Sores toe OOo Ss NN ee aeons 261
Subgenus Didymoceras (DidVMmOGeras) men. cece co teeee creer ee 261
Subgenus Didymoceras (Hodidy mOCCrAS) terse ee 29)
Family Diplomoceratidae®...ccarscas cote ne eet eee occ omnes cou weaete cneres Someene oar eect ene eee 301
GENUS DD iPLOMOCEIAS sicsod sch eee OA osc Boobs STA REE 301
Gems (Gly PloxOCer GS. FM eA Tare eee nee ae deseo e AEE SEER TRAC enc cA ae oe 306
GSS SCOAPILES F.2., Bsa ce eee oe Ae sae a oben ann wan een CaSBE ene Se RnR U Renee ARIAT eee ee 310
Genus NCO Gly PIOXOC ELAS! sa. core nee eee ote c ec dpa oe hoe ccu do Oe cohnes LR Eet Et eo Syl
Grenuss NCOCrIOCEIGS Fair tesa ease toes Senn aoe oie TER Ge weey cea eHe Sec Jacko Cea R eC TaL cee REE 32
Subgenus Neoeriocenas (INCOCHIOGEH GAS) sh. eee heen ee SZ
SubsenusyNeoeniocenas (SCHIMeCLCFElIG) ra mmen- Heeee note cee 315
Genius: PsevdoxybelOCORAS Vea ak Ie: Re A Be 37)
SubgenusiEseudonybeloceras (BseudoxybeloCends) i n.e tee eo ee 319
Genus SPiVOXRVOCIOCEFAS IT cere iene SL LO SENSE aan 324
ACKNOWIEUSEINEMIS Hee. cose. concettananecte cee toe ecua eee oes cea snurne ee te ca concn ssador seek ts cot eeceres eae ent a eee Si)
FROPETETICES, “ assitrscmede eae inne oe es geet EIR ESTER BAR GPs cc er crs 2 adie i AES IR cach 328
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA Dee
INTRODUCTION
In 1976 Klinger described most of the known heteromorph ammonites from Zululand
and Pondoland*, excluding the scaphitids and most of the baculitids. Unfortunately,
during the editing process, reduced format working copies of the plates were substituted
for the original plates. Consequently, the actual published figures were much smaller than
the originals and of unsatisfactory quality. In this present contribution we refigure some of
the 1976 material belonging to the families Nostoceratidae and Diplomoceratidae, as well
as new material collected in the interim. Also, taxonomic changes and/or corrections are
incorporated.
LOCATION OF SPECIMENS
The following abbreviations are used to indicate the location of specimens mentioned
IM Une Were
GD Centre des Sciences de la Terre, Université de Bourgogne, Dijon
NMB National Museum, Bloemfontein
SAM _ South African Museum
SAS Council for Geosciences, Pretoria
FIELD LOCALITIES
Details of field localities are given by Kennedy & Klinger (1975); further descriptions
of these localities are deposited in the Geological Collections, Oxford University Museum
of Natural History, Department of Palaeontology, Natural History Museum, London and
Division of Earth Sciences, South African Museum, Cape Town.
SUTURE TERMINOLOGY
The suture terminology of Wedekind (1916), reviewed by Kullmann & Wiedmann
(1970) is followed here: I = internal lobe, U = umbilical lobe, L = lateral lobe, E = external
lobe.
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions are given in millimetres. Wb = Whorl breadth; Wh = Whorl height;
Wb: Wh = ratio of whorl breadth to whorl height. Prefixes Mx and Mn indicate maximum
and minimum measurements. Ri = Rib index, ribs counted along the length of the specimen
over a distance equal to the whorl height measured at the middle of that distance.
*In current geopolitical terminology, Zululand and Pondoland now form parts of the provinces of
KwaZulu-Natal and Eastern Cape respectively. For the sake of continuity, we retain the names Zululand
and Natal in the titles of our series of systematic descriptions of the ammonites from these regions.
bo
Bo
bo
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CLASSIFICATION
Various attempts have been made to classify the genera referred to the families
Nostoceratidae and Diplomoceratidae (amongst others Spath 1953; Wright 1957, 1997;
Anderson 1958; Matsumoto 1959, 1967, 1977; Wiedmann 1962; Howarth 1965; Klinger
1976, 1982; Ward 1976; Ward & Mallory 1977; Cooper 1994). Broadly speaking, the
genera were either lumped together or the families were split into numerous genera and
subgenera, based on minute differences. None of these classifications corresponded and
were neither satisfactory nor consistent. Reasons for this can be ascribed to many factors.
Because of the loose coiling in most of the taxa, complete specimens are rare. The shells
may be broken due to predation, taphonomic processes and during preparation from the
matrix. Consequently, some genera were based on fragments and their diagnoses were
incomprehensible. Furthermore, there is an extreme range of variation, not only within the
same species, but in genera. In some, ornamentation was accorded priority, whereas in
others the coiling was regarded as diagnostic. We are still not certain of the significance of
the different coiling strategies of the early ontogenetic stages. To add to this, the
Nostoceratidae and Diplomoceratidae show a rapid rate of evolution. Finally, dimorphism
also has to be taken into consideration.
On completion of this largely descriptive section, we intend to publish a separate part
on the classification and origins of the families Nostoceratidae and Diplomoceratidae,
based on study of actual material at our disposal from various parts of the world. This 1s to
be accompanied by an annotated list of species referred to the families, similar to that
provided by the authors’ description of the family Baculitidae Gill, 1871 (Klinger &
Kennedy 2001).
For the purpose of description of the South African material below, we provisionally
use a Classification adapted from Wright (1997) with a few modifications.
SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY
Suborder ANCYLOCERATINA Wiedmann, 1966
Superfamily TURRILITACEAE Gill, 1871
Family Nostoceratidae Hyatt, 1894
(= Jouaniceratidae Wright, 1952; Bostrychoceratinae Spath, 1953;
Hyphantoceratinae Spath, 1953; Emperoceratinae Spath, 1953;
Proavitoceratinae Spath, 1953 errore pro Pravitoceratinae)
Genus Eubostrychoceras Matsumoto, 1967
Type species
Eubostrychoceras indopacificum Matsumoto (1967: 333, pl. 18 (fig. 1)) by original
designation of Matsumoto (1967: 332).
Diagnosis
Early ontogeny may be irregular, consisting of straight shaft(s) or heterostrophic
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 3
whorls, followed by helically coiled stage that is either loosely or tightly coiled or a
combination of both, and of variable duration, ending in a body chamber which may face
upwards or embrace part or all of the helix. Ornament consists of simple ribs, in some with
intercalated flared ribs at some stage or other. Tubercles generally absent.
Discussion
Two subgenera are here referred to Eubostrychoceras, E. (Eubostrychoceras) and
E. (Amapondella) Klinger & Kennedy 1997. Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) may
have heterostrophic or hamitid to ptychoceratitid early whorls, followed by loosely or
tightly coiled helical whorls. Ornament in most species consists of simple ribbing only;
E. (E.) japonicum differs in having flared ribs in early and late ontogeny and incipient
tuberculation. Eubostrychoceras (E.) auriculatum (Collignon, 1965) (Figs 3C, 7B—C) has
flared ribs on the body chamber.
Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) Klinger & Kennedy, 1997, differs from the nominal
subgenus in having intercalated flared ribbing on part of the phragmocone and on the body
chamber; the latter coils upwards and over the apex of the helical stage.
Subgenus Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) Matsumoto, 1967
Type species
Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) indopacificum Matsumoto (1967: 333, pl. 18
(fig. 1)), by original designation of Matsumoto (1967: 332).
Diagnosis
Early ontogeny consists of one or two, possibly three straight shafts; in rare cases
heterostrophic, followed by helical whorls, either in close contact or loose, corkscrew-
like. Aperture simple, facing obliquely upwards. Ornament in most species consists of
simple ribbing and periodic constrictions. Suture moderately complex. Siphuncle situated
at mid-flank.
Discussion
When Matsumoto (1967: 332) initially erected this (sub)genus, he included only forms
with contiguous whorls, and with an upward-facing aperture that does not detach itself
from the base of the spire. He also mentioned that the early whorls may show slightly
irregular coiling and change in direction of ribbing. The type species,
E. (Eubostrychoceras) indopacificum from the Coniacian of Japan, Madagascar and India
(see e.g. Boule et al. 1907, pl. 7 (14) (fig. 1)) or Kennedy (1986, text-fig. 36)), shows the
characters of the genus. Later, however, Matsumoto (1977: 324-329) expanded the scope
of Eubostrychoceras s.s. to also include species with loosely coiled, helical whorls, as
well as those with a detached, recurved body chamber. Essentially, Eubostrychoceras s.s.
as interpreted subsequently by Matsumoto (1977) included virtually all the
non-tuberculate species that had originally been referred to the genus Bostrychoceras
Hyatt, 1900 except for the type species, Bostrychoceras polyplocum (Roemer, 1841).
224 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Taxonomy within Eubostrychoceras S.s. is not easy. Wiedmann (1962: 202) included
virtually the whole of what we regard here as EF. (Eubostrychoceras) in a single
‘super-species’, Cirroceras (C.) indicum. This he divided into three subspecies based
mainly on density of ribbing: C. (C.) indicum saxonicum (Schliter, 1875) with 90 ribs per
whorl, C. (C.) indicum indicum (Stoliczka, 1866) with 50 ribs per whorl and C. (C.) indicum
elongatum (Whiteaves, 1903) with 25 ribs per whorl. This approach was initially adopted
in describing the KwaZulu material by Klinger (1976), but in retrospect, we realize that
Wiedmann’s approach was unrealistic from both a taxonomic and stratigraphic point of
view. Loosely and tightly coiled forms were included in the same subspecies and, even by
heteromorph standards they had extremely long stratigraphic ranges—Turonian to
Campanian.
We follow a more conservative interpretation of the subgenus. Based on coiling and
ornamentation, two more or less distinct species groups can be recognized in the expanded
subgenus E. (Eubostrychoceras).
1. Group of E. (Eubostrychoceras) indopacificum. This includes nearly all the species
originally included in Eubostrychoceras by Matsumoto (1967). Except for the very
early whorls, discussed above, the greater part of the shell consists of a tightly coiled
Spire, ornamented by non-tuberculate ribs and constrictions only, ending in a slightly
upwards facing aperture.
2. Group of E. (Eubostrychoceras) otsukai (Yabe, 1904) as interpreted by Collignon
(1969). This group is easily identified by the generally loose, corkscrew-like coiling in
the main part of the shell. The early whorls could be straight and in line with the axis of
coiling, but not enclosed in the helix. The aperture also faces obliquely upwards.
Occurrence
Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) first occurs in the lower Turonian, but only
becomes common in the upper Turonian and persists through the Coniacian to the
Campanian. The youngest possible E. (Eubostrychoceras) is a fragment recorded from
the Maastrichtian of Nigeria by Reyment (1955: 15, pl. 1 (fig. 4)) as Bostrychoceras sp.
The genus is best known from the middle Turonian to the Campanian, with records
from Japan, India, Madagascar, KwaZulu, North Africa, West Africa, Western Europe,
the Pacific Coast of North America, and from the U.S. Western Interior.
Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) indopacificum Matsumoto, 1967
Fig. 1D-G
1895 Turrilites (Heteroceras) indicus Kossmat (non Stoliczka), p. 143 [47], pl. 20 [6]
(figs 5a—c, 6).
1907 Turrilites (Bostrychoceras) polyplocus Boule et al. (non Roemer), p. 61 [41], pl.14 [7]
(figs 1—2).
1926 Bostrychoceras indicum Stoliczka; Tokunaga & Shimizu, p. 193, pl. 22 (fig. 4a—b),
pl. 26 (figs 1-10).
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA As)
1965 Bostrychoceras indicum Stol.; Collignon, p.10, pl. 418 (fig. 1726), p. 12, pl. 419
(figs 1727-1729).
21965 Bostrychoceras sp. aff. indicum Stol.; Collignon, p. 12, pl. 419 (fig. 1730).
1967 Eubostrychoceras indopacificum Matsumoto, p. 333, pl. 18 (fig. 1).
1976 Didymoceras (Didymoceras) sp. gr. ex. indicum (Stoliczka); Klinger, p. 64 (pars), pl. 24
(fig. 3) only.
1986 Nostoceras (Eubostrychoceras) indopacificum Matsumoto; Kennedy, p. 101,
text-fig. 36.
Type
Holotype is the specimen figured in Matsumoto (1967, pl. 18 (fig. 1)) from the
Coniacian of Sakurazawa, Fukushima Prefecture, northwest Japan.
Material
SAM—PCZ18708 (ex SAS—Z1078), SAM—PCZ17332 (ex 33/li), both from locality 71,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian I (?II).
Description
Both specimens are small and are probably microconchs. Coiling is dextral in
SAM-—PCZ18708 and sinistral in SAM—PCZ17332. The successive whorls are in close
contact, but apparently not impressed into each other.
Ornament consists of predominantly single, slightly rursiradiate ribs—in SAM-—
PCZ18708 about 40 per whorl and in SAM—PCZ17332 about 70. Constrictions are
common and conspicuous, occurring approximately once per half whorl. This results in
all the constrictions being slightly offset, one above the other in a line parallel to the axis
of coiling.
Discussion
Kaplan & Schmid (1988: 52) described the extent of variation in the upper Turonian to
possibly basal Coniacian species E. (E.) saxonicum, and discussed the difficulty of
separating it from allied species such as E. (E.) indopacificum and E. (E.) muramotoi
Matsumoto, 1967. In terms of rib density, closely coiled Turonian—Coniacian species of
Eubostrychoceras can be arranged from coarsely costate E. (E.) matsumotoi Cobban,
1987 with 20 to 30 ribs per whorl, through E. (E.) indopacificum with 50 to 55 per whorl,
to E. (E.) saxonicum with 30 to 80 per whorl. In terms of rib density, our specimens clearly
connect with FE. (E.) indopacificum and FE. (E.) saxonicum. The spacing of the
constrictions is similar to that of E. (E.) muramotoi Matsumoto 1967. Our material is best
referred to E. (E.) indopacificum.
Occurrence
Coniacian of Japan, India, Madagascar, and KwaZulu.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
226
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 227,
Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) nibelae sp. nov.
Fig. 1H-I
1976 Didymoceras (Didymoceras) sp. gr. ex. indicum (Stoliczka); Klinger, p. 64 (pars), pl. 24
(fig. 4) only.
Type
Holotype by monotypy is SAM—PCZ17333 (ex A430) from locality 111, KwaZulu,
St Lucia Formation, Campanian III.
Etymology
Named after the Nibela Peninsula on the northern side of Hell’s Gates, which connect
Lake St Lucia and False Bay, KwaZulu.
Description
Coiling is tight with a distinct zone of impression on the upper surface of the whorls.
The apical angle (i.e. angle of the helically coiled part of the shell) is wide, approximately
65°. Ornament consists of about 60 slightly rursiradiate and sinuous ribs and
regularly-spaced constrictions; one per whorl, resulting in their being aligned obliquely
one above the other on the flanks.
Discussion
Even though we have only one specimen, the wide apical angle, tight coiling and
regular spacing of the constrictions distinguishes this species from all other species of
E. (Eubostrychoceras) in KwaZulu. The closest match in terms of ornament and
constrictions is E. (E.) indopacificum, but that species has a smaller apical angle and is
younger (Coniacian).
Occurrence
Campanian II of KwaZulu.
Fig 1. (see facing page). A-C. Eubostrychoceras (E.) protractum (Collignon, 1969). A-B. SAM—
PCF17331 (ex Collignon Collection) from Gisement 719, km 10 000 de la coupe Ampamba
Antsirasira (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar lower Campanian, Zone of Menabites boulei and
Anapachydiscus arrialoorensis, subzone of Termierella lenticulare. C. SAM—PCZ18713 from
locality 74, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, uppermost Santonian or lower Campanian.
D-G. Eubostrychoceras (E.) indopacificum Matsumoto, 1967. D-F. SAM—PCZ18708. G. SAM—
PCZ17332 (ex H33/li), both from locality 71, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian III.
H-I. Eubostrychoceras (E.) nibelae sp. nov., SAM—PCZ17333 (ex A430), the holotype from
locality 110, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian I. A-E, H-I x 1; F X 2.
228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 2
A. Eubostrychoceras (E.) zulu sp. nov. SAM—PCZ17334 (ex A432), the holotype, from locality 72,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IJ. B. Eubostrychoceras (E.) otsukai (Yabe, 1904).
NMB-—D1065, imprecisely located as ‘Die Rooiwalle’, but probably the same as locality 74, KwaZulu,
St Lucia Formation, uppermost Santonian or basal Campanian. Both X 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA By)
Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) zulu sp. nov.
Figs 2A, 63F
1976 Didymoceras (Didymoceras) sp. gr. ex. indicum (Stoliczka); Klinger, p. 64 (pars), pl. 24
(fig. 2) only.
Type
Holotype is SAM—PCZ17334 (ex A432) from locality 72, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian II.
Etymology
Named after the geographic region of origin.
Material
Paratypes are SAM—PCZ18710 (ex A2278), SAM—PCZ18711 (ex A2272), SAM—
PCZ18709 and SAM—PCZ18718, all from locality 72, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation,
Coniacian II.
Description
Coiling is in a loose helix with the distance between successive whorls about half the
height of the previous whorl. The umbilical width increases with growth, but even at the
largest preserved diameter, is still less than half the diameter of the whorls.
SAM-—PCZ18709 (Fig. 63F) represents the earliest growth stage available, at a whorl
diameter of 5 mm. Here, coiling is already distinctly helical, as in the later stages of
growth. None of our specimens has the body chamber preserved, and we do not know if
the helical mode of coiling continues right up to the aperture, or whether there is an
upward change in direction as 1s characteristic of the subgenus.
Ornament consists of single, rounded ribs which are most prominent on the flanks and
weakest on the dorsum. In the early stages of growth these are nearly radial, but with
increasing diameter they become progressively rursiradiate and S-shaped. Prominent
constrictions are already present on SAM—PCZ18709 at a whorl height of 6 mm, and
occur on the whole phragmocone at a frequency of every 3/4 to | whorl.
The suture is complex. The position of the siphuncle is interesting. Instead of following
the centre of the flanks, it follows a course nearly perpendicular to the axis of coiling.
Discussion
Eubostrychoceras (E.) zulu has coiling similar to that of E. (E.) otsukai (Yabe, 1904)
and E. (E.) protractum (Collignon, 1969), but these are younger, Santonian-Campanian
with larger umbilical widths and different ribbing.
Eubostrychoceras (E.) zulu superficially resembles E. (£.) japonicum (Yabe, 1904),
which was comprehensively described and figured by Matsumoto (1977: 329, pl. 48
(figs 1-4), pl. 49 (figs 1-3), pl. 50 (figs 1-2), pl. 51 (figs 1-2), pl. 52 (fig. 3)). However, in
E. (E.) japonicum the early whorls are heterostrophic and with a Scalarites-like ornament
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
230
‘| X MIOg ‘UBIORIUOD “IeOseSepey ‘ATejURIOg WOT
(UOTI9T[OD WOUsTITOD x9) 9EELTAOd-NVS ($961 ‘UoUsTT[OD) wnynjnoLinn (J) spsavoyoa.ysoqngy *D ‘ueruedues jeseq JO ueluojURS
jsouliaddn “‘uoneuliog viony 1g “nnzemy “pL Aypeooy Wo CEELTZOd-NVS ‘(PO6I ‘OqeA) WwyNs}o (J) spraooyo.ysoqny ‘g—V
€ ons
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA Vs) |
(see Tanabe et al. (1981: 216, text-fig. 1; pl. 35 (fig. la—e)), Okamoto 1988, pl. 7 (fig. 9))
—quite unlike those of F. (E.) zulu. Here, the earliest known whorls are already coiled in a
corkscrew with uniform ribbing and constrictions. We suspect that the earliest part of the
Shell may have been straight as in Hyphantoceras (H.) orientale (Yabe) as figured by
Okamoto (1988, pl. 7 (fig. 8)), pointing away from the helix.
Occurrence
Coniacian II of KwaZulu.
Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) otsukai (Y abe, 1904)
Figs 2B, 3A—B, 4
1904 Heteroceras (?) otsukai Yabe, p. 14, pl. 4 (figs 1-2), pl. 6 (fig. 7).
1932 Bostrychoceras Boulei Collignon, p. 40, pl. 9 (fig. 4, 4a).
21932 — Bostrychoceras Condamyi Collignon, p. 39, pl. 9 (figs 1—2).
1969 Bostrychoceras otsukai (Y abe); Collignon, p. 31, pl. 524 (figs 2066-2068).
1969 Bostrychoceras boulei Coll.; Collignon, p. 34, pl. 525 (figs 2071-2072).
Type
Holotype is the specimen figured by Yabe (1904, pl. 4 (fig. 1)) from the Santonian of
Kikumezawa, Ikushumbets, Hokkaido.
Material
NMB-—D1065, imprecisely located as “northwestern end of False Bay’, but probably
the same as locality 74, Die Rooiwalle, SAM—PCZ17335, SAM—PCZ9550 both from
locality 74, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, uppermost Santonian or basal Campanian,
SAM—PCZ18712 (ex H179/21) from locality 6, KwaZulu, uppermost Santonian or basal
Campanian, SAM—PCZ12939 (ex H40/2) from field locality H40, Nyalazi, KwaZulu,
St Lucia Formation, Campanian I.
Description
The most complete specimen NUB—D1065 (Fig. 2B) is preserved as an internal mould
and consists of two and a half continuous whorls. The other specimens each consist of less
than a whorl. In NUB—D1065 coiling is dextral in a loose helix with the distance between
the successive whorls equal to about the height of the lower whorl. The umbilicus is very
narrow and shows little if any increase in width from the early to the later whorls. The
whorl section is virtually circular.
Ornament consists of about 36 to 50 slightly S-shaped, sharp-crested prominent ribs,
separated by interspaces wider than the ribs themselves. SAM—PCZ18712 (Fig. 4) is the
most coarsely ornamented with about 18 ribs per half whorl. On the adapical part of the
whorl the ribs show a sudden ‘knick-point’ and, converging, continue in an apertural
direction before passing radially, but much weakened over the dorsum. On the abapical
part of the whorls the ribs do not show this sudden change in direction and merely weaken
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Zsy
‘UOHBULIO.T elon 1S ‘nynzemy ‘9 Ayyeso]
‘C X ‘uelUedueD [eseq 10 uevluojuRs Isouoddn
Woy (IZ/6LTH X®) ZIL8IZOd-WVS “(p061 ‘oqeA) IDYNSIO (3) spdavoyoysoqny “\—y
p WINS 7
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 233
towards the dorsum. Three prominent constrictions, approximately one per whorl,
associated with an abapical flared rib are visible in NUB—D1065.
Discussion
The loose, corkscrew-like coiling and narrow umbilicus, associated with the
distinctive ornament on the venter and adapical shoulder are characteristic of the species
as interpreted by Collignon (1969: 31).
Matsumoto (1977: 331) stated that Eubostrychoceras (E.) otsukai is difficult to
interpret on the basis of the type material, as well as separating it from the older
(Turonian) E. (E.) japonicum. It is curious that Matsumoto did not discuss Collignon’s
(1969: 31) interpretation of E. (E.) otsukai. Should the Madagascan and KwaZulu
material not belong to E. (E.) otsukai, we suggest that as first revising authors, the valid
name for the material should be E. (E.) condamyi as originally described by Collignon
S29 ol Oi(igs 12):
Eubostrychoceras (E.) japonicum has similar loose coiling on the major part of the
phragmocone, but the ornament differs from that of E. (E.) otsukai as interpreted by
Collignon (1969: 31). Ribbing continues virtually radially over the adapical edge instead
of changing direction suddenly as in E. otsukai. Also, flared ribs occur on the early and
late stages of ontogeny in FE. (E.) japonicum. The Campanian specimen figured by
Collignon (1932: 40, pl. 9 (fig. 3,3a)) as Bostrychoceras japonicus Yabe certainly does
not belong to that species and is probably conspecific with E. (E.) otsukai.
Eubostrychoceras (E.) boulei Collignon (1932: 40, pl. 9 (fig. 4, 4a); 1969: 34, pl. 525
(figs 2071—2072)) is a similar loosely coiled species, but has a wider umbilicus, equal to
twice the whorl width. We suspect that E. (E.) boulei is possibly only a looser coiled form
of E. (E.) otsukai.
Eubostrychoceras (E.) protractum Collignon (1969: 31, pl. 524 (figs 2069—2070)) (see
also below) is easily distinguished by the much finer and denser ribbing.
Occurrence
The type material of FE. (E.) otsukai is dated as Santonian; the Madagascan specimens
are abundant (Collignon 1969: 31 mentioned one hundred specimens) in the upper part of
the lower Campanian. The KwaZulu material is probably also from the lower Campanian,
but may extend down to the uppermost Santonian.
Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras) protractum Collignon, 1969
Fig. 1A—C
1969 Bostrychoceras protractum Collignon, p. 31, pl. 524 (figs 2069-2070).
Type
Holotype is the specimen figured by Collignon (1969, pl. 524 (fig. 2069)) from the
lower Campanian of Gisement 320, Coupe Ampolypoly-Antsirasira-Behamotra (Belo sur
Tsiribihina), Madagascar.
234 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
SAM-PCZ18713, PCZ18714, PCZ18715, PCZ18716, PCZ18717, all imprecisely
located as ‘northwestern end of False Bay’, probably the equivalent of our locality 74, Die
Rooiwalle, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, upper Santonian or lower Campanian.
Description
The ornament is very characteristic, consisting of fine, slightly rursiradiate ribs. These
are strongest on the outer flank (venter) and weaken on the adapical and abapical umbilical
shoulders. The ribs are typically single, but occasional irregular bifurcating or intercalatory
ribs occur. The ribs number about 100 per whorl. Distinct constrictions are visible at all
growth stages. In SAM—PCZ18717 two constrictions are present per half whorl.
Discussion
The loose coiling, dense ribbing and distinct constrictions are characteristic of the
species. Our material is identical to that figured by Collignon, and topotype material
(Fig. 1!A—B).
As far as density of ribbing is concerned, the upper Santonian/lower Campanian
loosely coiled E. (Eubostrychoceras) species can be arranged from coarsest E. (E.) elongatum,
through E. (E.) otsukai to E. (E.) protractum (finest).
Eubostrychoceras (E.) densicostatum Matsumoto (1977: 332, pl. 52 (fig. 2)) has a
comparable rib density, but the whorls are in contact in later stages of growth.
Occurrence
Lower Campanian of Madagascar, upper Santonian and/or lower Campanian of
KwaZulu.
Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras?) sp.
Fig. 9D-E
Material
SAM-—PCZ18750 from locality 105, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, upper Santonian
or lower Campanian.
Description and discussion
A single fragment from this locality differs from all other known heteromorphs from
KwaZulu. It consists of part of a helical whorl which passes into a straight shaft with
noticeable increase in whorl diameter, associated with a prominent constriction.
Ornament consists of single, simple sharp ribs, separated by wide interspaces. No signs of
tubercles are visible.
The small size and uncoiled body chamber clearly separates this specimen from all
known species of Eubostrychoceras in KwaZulu. The absence of tubercles and the upper
Santonian or lower Campanian occurrence of this specimen rule out the possibility that
this might be a fragment of Nostoceras.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA A5}3)
Occurrence
Upper Santonian or lower Campanian of KwaZulu.
Subgenus Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) Klinger & Kennedy, 1997
Type species
Heteroceras amapondense Van Hoepen, 1921 (1921: 17, pl. 4 (figs 1—2)) by original
designation of Klinger & Kennedy (1997: 246).
Diagnosis
Earliest whorls apparently helical, tightly coiled, followed by major part of shell which
forms a low helix, and ending in an upcurved limb which reaches up to or slightly over the
apex of the helical section. Ornament initially consists of simple ribbing only; at a later,
variable stage, intercalated flared ribs occur.
Discussion
Klinger & Kennedy (1997: 244-246) recently discussed the affinities of the type
species of Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella), Heteroceras amapondense and concluded
that it was neither a typical Hyphantoceras nor a Madagascarites as tentatively implied by
Klinger’s (1976: 71) reference to it as Hyphantoceras (Madagascarites?) amapondense.
Occurrence
Upper Santonian of Pondoland, offshore deposits of Natal Coast, KwaZulu, Israel,
Austria, France and Mississippi, and lower Campanian of Madagascar and KwaZulu.
Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (Van Hoepen, 1921)
Figs 5, 6, 7A, 8A—D, 9A—C
1906 Heteroceras sp. Woods, p. 339, pl. 42 (fig. 4).
1906 Heteroceras sp. Woods, p. 339, pl. 42 (fig. 5).
1906 Hamites (Anisoceras) sp. Woods, p. 340, pl. 44 (fig. 3).
| Heteroceras amapondense Van Hoepen, p. 17, pl. 4 (figs 1-2).
1921la _ Bostrychoceras? sp. Spath, p. 255, pl. 24 (fig. 2).
192la —_ Bostrychoceras? sp. nov. Spath, p. 252.
IDSY Anaklinoceras stephensoni Collignon, p. 50, pl. 532 (fig. 2096).
1969 Hyphantoceras reussianum d’ Orb; Collignon, p. 38, pl. 527 (figs 2079-2080).
L7G Hyphantoceras (Madagascarites?) amapondense (Van Hoepen); Klinger, p. 71, pl. 32
(fig. 5a—b), pl. 33 (figs 2-3), text-fig. 10d-e.
1976 Hyphantoceras (Hyphantoceras) sp. A. Klinger, p. 70, pl. 32 (figs 2-4), pl. 32 (fig. 1).
ID79 Hyphantoceras (Madagascarites?) amapondense (Van Hoepen); Summesberger,
je 123, ole 3 (iy, WD), weit, WS),
1980 Hyphantoceras (Madagascarites?) amapondense (Van Hoepen); Summesberger,
Oo. 277, fol Il Cie, 2), tase, 3
36
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 5
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 257,
1983 Hyphantoceras(?) amapondense (van Hoepen); Lewy, p. 24, figs 1-6.
1985 Hyphantoceras (‘?Madagascarites) amapondense (Van Hoepen); Klinger, p. 6, figs 4i-K.
1987 Hyphantoceras (?)Madagascarites) amapondense (van Hoepen); Immel, p. 134.
1991a_ —§ Ayphantoceras(?) amapondense (van Hoepen); Kennedy & Cobban, p. 181, fig. 9: 9,10.
1995 Hyphantoceras(?) amapondense (Van Hoepen); Kennedy, p. 428, pl. 28 (figs 24-30).
OF) Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense van Hoepen; Klinger & Kennedy,
p. 244, figs 12-14A, 15A—D, 17A-C.
Type
Holotype by original designation is the specimen figured by Van Hoepen (1921, pl. 4
(figs 1—2)) in the Transvaal Museum Collections (Fig. 5E—-F) from an unspecified horizon
at locality 1, Mzamba River Estuary, Pondoland, Eastern Cape Province, Mzamba
Formation, Santonian III?. :
Material
A cast of the holotype, SAM-PCZ18722, from an unknown horizon at locality 1,
Pondoland, Eastern Cape Province, Mzamba Formation, Santonian III?, also CGH
(= SAM—PCP 12882), SAM—PCP6890, SAM—PCP6891, SAM—PCP17368, SAM-—13227,
SAM-—PCZ18729, SAM—PCZ18725, SAM—PCP18724, SAM—PCP18723, SAM-4821,
SAM-—PCP18726 SAM—PCP18721, SAM-—7060, SAM-—7061, all also from an
unspecified horizon at locality 1; SAM—PCP8277, SAM-—6890, SAM-—8285, from Bed 7 at
locality 1, Santonian HI; SAM—PCZ7318, SAM—PCZ7321, SAM—PCZ7328, SAM-—
PCZ7342, SAM—PCZ17372 (ex Z2071) loose at locality 105, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Santonian III or Campanian I; SAM—PCZ12881 (ex H126E/1), SAM-—
PCZ18719 from bed 5 at the same locality, Campanian I; SAM—PCZ18730 (ex H125)
from locality 107, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian I; SAM—PCZ18727 (ex
H77/H1) from locality 75, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Santonian; SAM—PCZ18728
(ex H36/2) from locality 31, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Santonian; SAM—PCF 18720,
SAM-—PCF17338 (ex Collignon Collection) from Madagascar.
Description
Coiling is helical in the major part of the shell, forming a low spire with the whorls
either just touching or slightly impressed; part of the body chamber curves upward, and
over the apex of the helix. Ornament in the early stages consists of single ribs only; in later
stages of the phragmocone and body chamber flared ribs occur between normal ribs.
Fig 5. (see facing page). Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (Van Hoepen, 1921).
A-C. SAM-—PCP18721 from locality 1, the Mzamba Estuary, Eastern Cape Province, Mzamba
Formation, upper Santonian or lower Campanian. D. SAM—PCF17338 (ex Collignon Collection)
labelled ‘Hyphantoceras’ from Méitraiky, north of Manimbilo, Madagascar, Santonian.
E-F. SAM-—PCP 18722. Cast of the holotype, Transvaal Museum collections from an unspecified
horizon at the type locality of the Mzamba Formation at the Mzamba River Estuary, Eastern Cape
Province, upper Santonian or lower Campanian. All xX 1.
38
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 6
i0n,
Formati
.
la
105, KwaZulu, St Luc
ity
(Amapondella) amapondense (Van Hoepen, 1921). SAM—PCZ7328 from local
Eubostrychoceras
Campanian I. X 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA ZS9)
Hina
\
Ta
Figure 7
A. Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (Van Hoepen, 1921). SAM—PCZ7328 from locality
105, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian I. B—C. Eubostrychoceras (E.) auriculatum (Collignon,
1965). SAM—PCF17370 (ex Collignon collection) from Gisement 335, Beantaly (Belo sur Tsiribihina),
Madagascar, lower Coniacian. Both x 1.
40
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 8
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 24]
Discussion
This species is quite variable in overall size, tightness of coiling, and the stage at which
flared ribbing first appears. Since Klinger’s (1976) description of the species from
Pondoland and KwaZulu, and inclusion of the Madagascan Anaklinoceras? stephensoni
Collignon (1969: 50, pl. 532 (fig. 2096)) in its synonymy, £. (A.) amapondense has been
recorded from the offshore deposits off the Natal South Coast (Klinger 1985), the upper
Santonian of the Gosau Basin of Austria (Summesberger 1979, 1980; Immel 1987)
(although Kennedy & Cobban 1991: 182 suggest that it may belong to Jowaniceras
sicardi (De Grossouvre)), upper Santonian of France (Kennedy 1995), the upper
Santonian of Israel (Lewy 1983), and Mississippi (Kennedy & Cobban 1991). We have
also seen a specimen from the middle Santonian of Madagascar in the Collignon
collection in Dijon.
The description of this latter material, especially that from Israel and additional
material from Pondoland and KwaZulu clearly show that Hyphantoceras sp. A of Klinger
(1976: 32 (figs 2-4), pl. 33 (fig. la—b)) is a synonym of E. (4.) amapondense. Klinger
(1976: 71) admitted that Hyphantoceras sp. A and E. (A.) amapondense were practically
indistinguishable in small fragments, but thought that the former differed on account of
the tighter coiling and ovoid whorl section. We agree with Lewy (1983: 25) that these
differences are within the range of variation of E. (A.) amapondense.
Some of the Campanian Madagascar specimens identified by Collignon (1969: 38,
pl. 527 (fig. 2079-2080)) as Hyphantoceras reussianum (d’Orbigny, 1850)—a typical
Turonian species, are also parts of E. (4). amapondense. But H. reussianum in Collignon
(1969: 29, 523 (fig. 2064)) is different. According to Matsumoto (1977: 308) it may be an
example of Ainoceras Matsumoto & Kanie, 1967. An alternative explanation is that it
could be a coarsely ribbed E. (Eubostrychoceras)—allied perhaps to E. (E.) junior
(Moberg, 1885). Undescribed specimens labelled as ‘“Hyphantoceras’ (ex Collignon
collection) from the Santonian of Mitraiky, Madagascar (Figs 5D, 9A) also belong to
E. (A.) amapondense.
The specimen from Mkweyane (Umkwelane Hill) described and figured by Spath
(1921a: 255, pl. 24 (fig. 2)) as Bostrychoceras? sp. ind. also belongs to E. (A.) amapondense.
It is on the same block of matrix from which Diaziceras tissotiaeforme Spath (1921a: 245,
pl. 19 (fig. la-c)) was extracted. Spath also described several fragments as
Bostrychoceras? sp. nov., which he considered to be the same as Woods’ (1906, pl. 42
(fig. 5a—b)) specimen. The latter is unquestionably E. (A.) amapondense, but Spath’s
Fig 8. (see facing page). A—D. Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (Van Hoepen, 1921).
A-B. SAM-—PCZ12881 (ex H126E/1) from Bed E at locality 105, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation,
Campanian I. C-D. SAM—PCP 12882 (ex CGH) from an unspecified horizon at the type locality of
the Mzamba Formation at the Mzamba Estuary, Eastern Cape Province, Mzamba Formation, upper
Santonian or lower Campanian. E. Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras)? sp. SAM—PCZ12949 (ex
SAS—Z2071), latex peel showing apparent hamitid early whorls and part of body chamber with
bituberculate, flared ribs. From an unspecified horizon at locality 105, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, upper Santonian or lower Campanian. All x 1.
242 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 9
A-C. Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (Van Hoepen, 1921). A. SAM—PCF18720 (ex
Collignon collection), labelled “‘Hyphantoceras’ from Gisement 252, Coupe de Bevaho, (Belo sur
Tsiribihina), Madagascar, lower Campanian, Zone of Anapachydiscus wittekindi and Eulophoceras
Jacobi. B. SAM—PCZ18719 from locality 105, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, upper Santonian or lower
Campanian. C. SAM—PCP6890 from Bed 7 at locality 1, Eastern Cape Province, Mzamba Formation,
Santonian II]. D-E. Eubostrychoceras (Eubostrychoceras?) sp. SAM—PCZ18750 from locality 105,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, upper Santonian or lower Campanian. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 243
specimens include parts of straight shafts—e.g. SAM—PCZ18739 and are best referred to
Glyptoxoceras.
Complete or semi-complete specimens of FE. (A.) amapondense are rare. However,
examination of the holotype and SAM—PCP12882 from Pondoland, SAM—PCZ7328,
SAM-—PCZ18727 (ex H77/hi) and SAM—PCZ18728 (ex H36/2) from KwaZulu, the
holotype of Anaklinoceras? stephensoni from Madagascar and the specimen from Israel
figured by Lewy (1983, figs 1-6) show the range of variation in overall size, tightness of
coiling, apical angle of the helix and the stage at which flared ribbing first appears.
The near-complete Israeli specimen and SAM—PCP 12882 (CGH) are more or less the
same size; yet in the former, flared ribs already occur on the third-last whorl of the helix,
whereas the Pondoland specimen only has flared ribbing on the last whorl of the helix.
The Israeli specimen also has a lower apical angle. This early onset of flared ribbing
corresponds more or less to Klinger’s Hyphantoceras sp. A., which, as discussed above, is
a synonym of E. (A.) amapondense. Lewy (1983, figs 4-6) figured the early helical
whorls. These show the initial simple ribbing, but with onset of flared ribbing at a
diameter of 16 mm. SAM—PCP6890 (Fig. 9C) has simple ribbing up to a diameter of
46 mm; flared ribs only appear beyond that diameter.
Cobban & Scott (1972: 46) compared Puebloites spiralis with Woods’ (1906: 340,
pl. 44 (fig. 3a-d)) Hamites (Anisoceras) sp. Puebloites, however, is much older
(Cenomanian—Turonian) and never develops flared ribbing.
Ankinatsytes yabei Collignon (1965: 16, pl. 420 (fig. 1738)) from the lower Coniacian
of Madagascar has ornament reminiscent of the later stages of E. (A.) amapondense with
normal and flared ribs; but the latter are allegedly trituberculate. We can not say whether
these two species are related or not.
Crioceras serta Miller & Wollemann (1906: 20, pl. 9 (fig. 3), pl. 10 (figs 1—3)) shows
a similar ontogenetic sequence of ornament—simple ribbing on the early whorls followed
by intercalated flared ribs on the outer whorls. Unfortunately all the German specimens
are crushed, and the complete form of the shell is unknown. It could possibly also be
referred to E. (Amapondella). Collignon (1970: 15, pl. 613 (figs 2286—2288)) described
and figured a helically coiled heteromorph from the middle Campanian of Madagascar as
Neoglyptoxoceras serta. The Madagascan material, however, appears to have regular
ribbing throughout, thus differing from the German Crioceras serta. The Madagascan
material is here renamed Neoglyptoxoceras collignoni nom. nov. The holotype is the
specimen figured by Collignon (1970, pl. 613 (fig. 2286)). (See also p. 311).
Occurrence
Upper Santonian Pondoland, offshore Natal South Coast, Austria, France and
Mississippi, upper Santonian and lower Campanian, KwaZulu and middle Santonian to
lower Campanian of Madagascar. Together with the texanitid genera Submortoniceras
and Reginaites, E. (Amapondella) is a good indicator of the proximity of the Santonian—
Campanian boundary in South Africa.
244 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Genus Nostoceras Hyatt, 1894
Type species
Nostoceras stantoni retrorsum Hyatt (1894: 570) by the original designation of Hyatt
(1894: 569).
Diagnosis
The major part of the phragmocone is coiled in a tight helix. Coiling changes in the
later part of the phragmocone and body chamber. Ornament generally consists of two
rows of tubercles at some stage; in some forms irregularly developed.
Discussion
In most Nostoceras (Nostoceras) species the body chamber forms a distinct U-shaped
loop suspended below the base of the preceding spire, with the aperture often very close to
the latter. N. (N.) liratum Kennedy 19925 is an exception. Here, the body chamber curves
upwards, in contact with the helix. This is reminiscent of E. (Eubostrychoceras), or
possibly transitional to N. (Anaklinoceras) Stephenson, 1941 (type species Anaklinoceras
reflexum Stephenson, 1941). In Nostoceras (Anaklinoceras) the body chamber curves
upwards and over the apex of the helix and the shells are generally small. In Nostoceras
(Planostoceras) Lewy, 1967 (type species Planostoceras rehavami Lewy, 1967) the body
chamber forms a hook at right angles to the axis of coiling of the helix and parallel to the
base of the latter. In Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) the body chamber also forms a loop
suspended below the base of the spire as in Nostoceras s.s., but is generally larger, and
with irregular tuberculation. In N. (Pravitoceras) Yabe, 1902 (type species Pravitoceras
sigmoidale Yabe, 1902) the terminal hook is in the same plane as the predominantly
planispiral phragmocone and is C-shaped, involving a 180° torsion of the shell.
Occurrence
Campanian to Maastrichtian.
Subgenus Nostoceras (Nostoceras) Hyatt, 1894
Type species
Nostoceras stantoni retrorsum Hyatt (1894: 570) by original designation of Hyatt
(1894: 569).
Diagnosis
The major part of the phragmocone consists of a closely coiled helix, either dextral or
sinistral, generally with an acute apical angle, followed by a U-shaped, retroversal body
chamber hook which brings the aperture to a position just below the base of the helical
stage. Ornament consists of ribs with one or two rows of tubercles; some have no tubercles
at all.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 245
Occurrence
Upper Campanian and Maastrichtian. Nostoceras (Nostoceras) is best known from
North America (Gulf Coast, Atlantic Sea Board and Western Interior), but has also been
reported from Colombia (in Cobban 1974: 8), Peru, Argentina, Angola, Nigeria, Libya,
Egypt, Israel, Madagascar, KwaZulu, and various regions in Europe including England,
Spain, France, Belgium, The Netherlands, Italy, Poland, Ukraine, Austria, Bulgaria, and
Russia; and Australia, India and Japan.
Nostoceras (Nostoceras) subangulatum Spath, 1921
Fig. 1OA
192la Nostoceras? subangulatum Spath, p. 250, pl. 22 (fig. 3a—c).
Type
Holotype by monotypy is SAM—PCZ18731 from east of the Railway at Riverview
Halt, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, probably Campanian.
Discussion
No additional specimens of this species have been found and the holotype is here
figured (Fig. 10A) for comparison with the holotype of N. (N.) natalense which was
recorded from the same locality. The ornament of the two species is broadly comparable;
both have a large row of tubercles situated just above midflank and a second row at the
base of the spire, just visible above the suture between the whorls. The whorl section in
N. (N.) natalense is more angular, and the apical angle is much larger, resulting in a low,
squat spire. In contrast, NV. (N.) subangulatum has a rounded whorl section and a much
smaller apical angle, resulting in a shell shape reminiscent of the turrilitid genus Mariella
Nowak, 1916 as was also noted by Spath (1921a: 252).
Occurrence
Probably Campanian, KwaZulu.
Nostoceras (Nostoceras) natalense Spath, 1921
Figs 1OB—D, 11-12
192la Nostoceras? natalense Spath, p. 248, pl. 22 (fig. 2a—b).
PIDSIh Turrilites (Bostrychoceras) Schloenbachi Favre; Basse, p. 19, pl. 2 (figs 11-15).
1965 Nostoceras(?) obtusum Howarth, p. 384, pl. 10 (fig. 2), text-fig. 17.
Com Nostoceras obtusum Howarth; Collignon, p. 9, pl. 643 (fig. 2375).
CLOT Nostoceras hyatti Steph.; Collignon, p. 8, pl. 643 (fig. 2371).
1976 Didymoceras (D.) natalense (Spath); Klinger, p. 68, pl. 30 (fig. 3), pl. 31 (figs 1-3),
poll, 32 Gite. Dy
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
246
T X og ‘ueluedureD soddn A}qeqoid ‘uonewso, elon] 1g ‘nynzemy yey MOIAIOATY Je ABAMTIEY IY} JO ISVs WoL YJog ‘adAjojoy oy) ‘TEL8IZOd-WVS
‘TZ6l “Wedg asuajnjou (spsad0jsony) sp.1a20]s0N *G—g adAjojoy ot “TEL8IZOd-WIVS ‘IZ61 ‘weds UNIDINBUDGNS (SD1IIOISON) sv4ad0]SON “W
Ol omnsty
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 247
Type
Holotype by monotypy is SAM—PCZ18732 from east of Riverview Railway Halt,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, probably Campanian.
Material
SAM-—PCZ18733, SAM—PCZ18734 from locality 113, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation,
Maastrichtian a or b; SAM—PCZ18736 (ex Z2270) and SAM—PCZ18735 (ex H106) from
locality 117, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a, SAM—PCZ18737 (ex
H116/2) from locality 120, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a.
Description
Apart from SAM—PCZ18734 (Fig. 11F), no further material has been found since
Klinger’s (1976) description. The five available specimens show considerable variation.
At one end of the scale is a coarsely ornamented form with an apical angle of about 70° as
in the holotype (Fig. 1OB—D). The ribs on the adapical part of the whorls are broad and
strong and incipiently looped in the early whorls. They are connected to large tubercles
situated above mid-flank, then weaken on the flank before connecting to a smaller,
abaperturally displaced row of smaller tubercles visible just above the whorl suture. The
ribs continue over the base of the spire in a prorsiradiate fashion, narrowing towards, and
continuing over the whole of the umbilical wall.
The other end of the scale is typified by SAM—PCZ18736 (Fig. 1 1A) with a wide apical
angle of about 130°. Here the adapical part of the whorl is ornamented by much finer ribs
and these connect in unequally strong pairs to the upper row of tubercles, which are
situated in the whorl suture. |
Specimens such as SAM—PCZ18734 (Fig. 11F) and SAM—PCZ18737 (Fig. 11C—E)
connect these two extremes of variation. In both, the ribbing is coarser than in
SAM-—PCZ18736 but still distinctly looped on the upper and lower parts of the whorls.
SAM-—PCZ18735 (Fig. 11B) consists of the last part of the helix and the retroversal body
chamber. A single constriction is present in SAM—PCZ18737 (Fig. 11C—E).
Discussion
Klinger (1976: 68) regarded the Angolan N. (N.) obtusum (Howarth 1965: 384, pi. 10
(fig. 2), text-fig. 17) as a synonym of N. (N.) natalense. When compared with the
holotype, Howarth’s (1965: 384) reasons for maintaining them separate—e.g. large
tubercle, bold ribs and smaller umbilicus—seem reasonable. However, SAM—PCZ18734
(Fig. 1 1F) has an apical angle, open umbilicus and rib density indistinguishable from the
holotype of N. (N.) obtusum, and we consider N. (N.) natalense to be a senior synonym of
N. (N.) obtusum.
All the specimens described by Basse (1931: 19, pl. 2 (figs 11-15)) as Turrilites
(Bostrychoceras) schloenbachi are smaller than our smallest specimen. They definitely
do not belong to Favre’s (1869) N. (N.) schloenbachi (see Kennedy & Summesberger
1987: 30-31 for a review of that species). The largest of Basse’s specimens (1931, pl. 2
(fig. 15)), however, is very similar to SAM—PCZ18737 (Fig. 11C—E). The impression of
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
248
11
Figure
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 249
C=. Pare of
specimen
ichtian a or b. Both x 1.
, Maastric
‘mation
Figure 12
outer whorl removed. From locality 113, KwaZulu, St Lucia For
Nostoceras (Nostoceras) natalense Spath, 1921. SAM—PCZ18733 (ex 113). A-B. Complete
Fig. 11. (see facing page). Nostoceras (Nostoceras) natalense Spath, 1921. A. SAM—PCZ18736 (ex
Z2270) from locality 117, KwaZulu. Specimen with distinct siphonal spines and bifurcating ribbing
on the adapical side. B. SAM—PCZ18735 (ex H106) part of a recurved body chamber from the same
locality as A. C-E. SAM—PCZ18737 (ex H116/2) from locality 120, KwaZulu. F. SAM—PCZ18734
from locality 113, specimen showing distinct abapical spines. All from the St Lucia Formation,
Maastrichtian a or b. All X 1.
250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
an earlier whorl on this specimen shows fine ornament comparable to that of Basse’s
material.
The specimens figured by Collignon (1971: 13, pl. 644 (figs 2385—2386)) as
Didymoceras schloenbachi could also possibly be included in N. (N.) natalense, but they
are too small for definite allocation. At any rate, they also do not belong to Favre’s
species.
Nostoceras obtusum Howarth in Collignon (1971: 9, pl. 643 (fig. 2375)) from the
lower Maastrichtian of Mont Ambohitsiombe, Madagascar is very similar to the KwaZulu
specimen SAM—PCZ 18737 (Fig. 1 1C—E) and is also tentatively referred to NV. (N.) natalense.
Another specimen figured by Collignon (1971: 8, pl. 643 (fig. 2371)) as Nostoceras
hyatti Stephenson is possibly also a N. (N.) natalense, comparable to the finely ribbed
forms, e.g. SAM—PCZ 12942 (Fig. 11A).
Our finer ribbed specimen, SAM—PCZ18736 (Fig. 11A) resembles some Nostoceras
(N.) alternatum (Tuomey, 1851) as figured by Cobban (1974: 86, figs lw-—rr, 5) and
Cobban & Kennedy (1991: E3, pl. 2 (figs 5—27)). This species has a similar prominently
pointed row of upper tubercles connected by looped ribs on the adapical edge. Generally,
however, it seems to have a larger apical angle (45—90°) and a higher spire—compare e.g.
Cobban’s (1974, fig. 5) restoration of N. (N.) alternatum with SAM—PCZ18736
(Fig. 11A). Some specimens, e.g. Cobban & Kennedy (1991, pl. 2 (figs 12—13)) with a
wide apical angle are indistinguishable from SAM—PCZ18736. The similarity between
N. (N.) alternatum and N. (N.) obtusum, the latter here regarded as a synonym of
N. (N.) natalense, was also noted by Cobban & Kennedy (1991: E3) and Cobban (1974:
87). Given more material, N. (N.) natalense and N. (N.) alternatum may eventually turn
out to be the same, or possibly only different subspecies.
Kuchler & Odin (2001: 509) commented on the similarities between Nostoceras
(N.) obtusum and N. (N.) schloenbachi (Favre, 1869), but separated the latter on account
of the more rounded whorl section and coarser ribs and/or much coarser tubercles.
Occurrence
Maastrichtian a or b KwaZulu, lower Maastrichtian Madagascar, Campanian/
Maastrichtian, Angola, uppermost Campanian of Tercis, France (as N. (?D.) obtusum
(Kichler & Odin 2001: 507)).
Subgenus Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) Hyatt, 1900
Type species
Turrilites polyplocus Roemer (1841: 92, pl. 14 (figs 1—2)), by original designation of
Hyatt (1900: 588).
Diagnosis
Coiling helical, initially ornamented by fine ribs and two rows of tubercles; later
tuberculation may become irregular or disappear completely. Body chamber forms
distinct loop below the spire.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 251
Discussion
Virtually all the species that had originally been referred to Bostrychoceras have now
been placed in Eubostrychoceras. Simply put, tight, helically coiled specimens with
tubercules at some stage of their ontogeny are referred to Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras),
whereas those predominantly without tubercles are referred to Eubostrychoceras
(Eubostrychoceras). Kennedy (1986) examined several specimens of the type species of
N. (Bostrychoceras) and illustrated the extreme degree of variation, thus eliminating the
need for the various names created by Wiedmann (1962), Blaszkiewicz (1980) and
recently Kuchler (2000).
Occurrence
Upper Campanian and lower Maastrichtian, Europe, Texas and Angola.
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense Klinger, 1976
Figs 13-40, 47D
21909 = Anisoceras notabile Whiteaves sp.; Kilian & Reboul, p. 15 (pars), pl. 5?, pl. 6 (fig. 1 only).
1976 Didymoceras (Didymoceras) depressum (Wiedmann) sanctaeluciense Klinger, p. 65,
pl. 25-28, pl. 29 (figs 1-3), pl. 30 (figs 1-2), text-figs 8f-h.
Type
Holotype (Figs 13-16) by original designation of Klinger (1976) is SAS—Z762 from
locality 119, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b.
Material
In addition to the original material in the collections of the Council for Geosciences we
have numerous specimens from the following localities: SAS—Z2251, SAM—PCZ9028,
SAM-—PCZ9079, SAM—PCZ9328, SAM—PCZ9334, SAM—PCZ9339, SAM—PCZ10494
from locality 119, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b; SAM—PCZ9329,
SAM—PCZ9335, SAM—PCZ9340, SAM—PCZ9342, SAM—PCZ9343, SAM—PCZ17341
(ex H116/7), SAM-PCZ17349 (ex H115/15) SAM—PCZ17350,(ex 115/13) from locality
120, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b; SAM-—PCZ10489,
SAM-—PCZ10490, SAM-—PCZ10493, SAM—PCZ10497, SAM-—PCZ10500, SAM-—
PCZ10501, SAM—PCZ10502, SAM—PCZ10505-10507, from locality 125, KwaZulu, St
Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b; SAS—A2009, SAM-PCZ7907, SAM—PCZ9330,
SAM-—PCZ9331, SAM—PCZ9339, SAM—PCZ9431, SAM—PCZ10495, SAM—PCZ10496,
SAM-PCZ10498 (ex A2016), SAM-PCZ10499 from locality 113, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Maastrichtian a or b; SAM—PCZ7902, SAM—PCZ7927, SAM—PCZ10504,
SAM-—PCZ10606, SAM—PCZ17343—17346, SAM—PCZ17349, unlocalized from ‘The
Coves’, localities 118-120, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b.
Diagnosis
Relatively large; low-spired phragmocone, ornamented by 100 to 130 ribs per whorl,
LV, ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LTS MI Py
Figure 13
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). Stipple drawing by Samantha Black of
the holotype, SAS—Z762 from locality 119, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 0.7
siphonal and abapical tubercles at some stage; the former disappear at larger diameters.
Retroversal body chamber suspended below spire and ornamented irregularly by one or
two rows of tubercles.
Description
Klinger (1976) described the species in detail, noting the variation in ornamentation on
the phragmocone and on the body chamber. The new material includes specimens
showing parts of the very early ontogenetic stage and others showing a wide range in
overall size and variation in coiling of the phragmocone as well as the body chamber.
The earliest ontogenetic stage is shown in SAM—PCZ10490a, b (Fig. 17A, C), part and
counterpart, consisting of four complete whorls. Coiling is very shallow, nearly
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 253
planispiral. On the innermost whorl, 32 single, sharp ribs occur. On the second whorl, at a
spiral diameter of c. 18 mm, spinose siphonal tubercles appear in the umbilical suture,
either from single or from paired ribs—their tips resting on the adapical shoulder of the
succeeding whorl. Distinct but small tubercles also occur on the inner abapical edge of the
third whorl; here rib density has increased to about 80. On the outer whorl, rib density is
about 100 to 120. The majority of ribs are single, but some are bifurcate on the inner third
of the adapical edge. |
Another specimen, SAM—PCZ10489a and b, part and counterpart (Figs 17B, 18B) also
shows the early ontogenetic stage. Here, distinct abapical tubercles are visible at a spiral
diameter of 25—30 mm. Three to four single ribs occur between these tubercles. In
SAM-PCZ10499 (Fig. 19A—B) impressions of siphonal tubercles are still visible at a
spiral diameter of 65 mm. On the next whorl, at a diameter of 95 mm, the siphonal
tubercles have disappeared, but abapical tubercles are well developed. In SAM-—
PCZ10495 (Fig. 20) the outermost whorl shows distinct impressions of siphonal tubercles
up to a diameter of about 80 mm, after which they disappear—thus confirming Klinger’s
(1976: 66) observations that siphonal tubercles only persist up to a maximum diameter of
about 100 mm.
On internal moulds, ribbing is generally thin and thread-like on the phragmocone. In
the original condition, however, the ribs were blade-like with rounded extremities,
separated by wider interspaces. These interspaces are in-filled with calcitic matrix. When
extracting specimens from the matrix, the layer consisting of the high ribs and interspace
matrix usually detaches from the rest of the shell, resulting in a low-relief internal mould.
In some specimens, e.g. SAM—PCZ10498 (Fig. 21B) and SAM—PCZ10503, part of the
original high-crested ribbing is still preserved.
During ontogeny, the whorl section on the phragmocone changes from depressed
(adapical-abapical) to rounded to distinctly laterally (dorsal-siphonal) compressed.
Coiling in the phragmocone is both sinistral and dextral. In most specimens the apical
angle is very wide, of the order of 120 to 140 degrees e.g. the holotype, SAS—Z762
(Figs 13-16), SAM—PCZ17341 (Fig. 21A), SAM—PCZ10494 (Fig. 22A), etc., but in
some specimens, e.g. SAM—PCZ7927 (Fig. 22B), SAM—PCZ17343 (Fig. 22C),
SAM-PCZ10493 (Fig. 22D), SAM—PCZ10506 (Fig. 23) and SAM—PCZ17352
(Fig. 47D), the spire is turreted with an acute apical angle of the order of 60 degrees.
The body chamber occupies approximately the last third to quarter (or even less) of a
whorl of the spirally coiled section before it breaks away to form a retroversal loop. The
whorl section of the body chamber in the spiral section is very characteristic in being high,
laterally compressed and in having a distinct adapical zone of impression. The uncoiled
section of the body chamber recurves, forming an angle of between 60 and 90 degrees
with the base of the spire, and ends very close to the latter. The aperture is preserved in
several specimens, e.g. SAM—PCZ 10499, SAM—PCZ9328, SAM—PCZ10500 (Fig. 24)
SAM-—PCZ7902 (Fig. 25A), SAM—PCZ9336, SAM—PCZ10501 (Fig. 26) and SAM—
PCZ10506, first forming a slight constriction and then a simple flare. Ornament on the
body chamber is quite irregular, consisting of one or two rows of tubercles which are
much larger than those of the phragmocone. There is usually a non-tuberculate interval
254 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 14
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). Apical view of the holotype, SAS—Z762
from locality 119, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 0.7.
between the last occurrence of tubercles on the spiral section, and the first appearance of
tubercles on the body chamber. The suture line is extremely complex and interdigitated.
The species shows an extreme variation in size. This 1s very obvious by the different
sizes of adult specimens with complete, recurved body chambers. In the smallest adult,
SAM-—PCZ9328 (Figs 29-30), the body chamber detaches itself at a whorl height
(adapical-abapical diameter) of 40 mm, whereas the largest, SAM—PCZ17346 (Fig. 31
A-B) uncoils at a height of 85 mm. Other specimens uncoil at intermediate whorl heights:
SAM-PCZ10499-42 mm
SAM-—PCZ10504—c. 50 mm
SAM—PCZ10506—55 mm
Holotype—c. 60 mm
SAM-—PCZ10505—68 mm.
It is tempting to ascribe the variation in size at which maturity is attained to
dimorphism—the small specimens are microconchs and the large ones macroconchs.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA ZS
Figure 15
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAS—Z762, the holotype from
locality 119, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 0.8.
However, as the dimensions indicate, there seems to be a nearly continuous growth series
from smallest to largest. If this size difference is indeed due to dimorphism, there is a large
degree of overlap in size between microconchs and macroconchs. There are, however,
other differences between the small and large specimens. In the smallest specimens, the
body chamber occupies very little of the spiral part of the shell. More important, perhaps,
is the fact that the retroversal loop is suspended perpendicularly below the base of the
256 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 16
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAS—Z762, the holotype from locality
119, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 0.7.
Fig. 17. (see facing page). Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). A, C.
SAM-—PCZ10490a, b, part and counterpart of the very early helical whorls. Note the very early onset
of helical coiling and apparent absence of irregularly coiled early stage. From locality 125,
KwaZulu. B. SAM—PCZ10489. Note the development of large, lateral spines on thickened ribs.
From locality 119, KwaZulu. D. SAM—PCZ10496. Ventral view of part of phragmocone showing
ventral tubercles. From locality 113, KwaZulu. All from the St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or
br All xl:
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA Dai
Figure 17
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
258
18
igure
Ie
B. SAM-—
113, KwaZulu,
SAMER CASO
A
, OO).
Both from local
inger
iense (Kl
| mould of early ontogeny
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluc
ity
interna
d
St Lucia Format
, Impression an
PCZ10489
Both x 1.
, Maastrichtian a or b
10n
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 259)
spire. In contrast, in the large specimens, the body chamber may occupy up to a third of the
spiral section, and the retroversal loop forms an angle of about 60 to 70 degrees with the
base of the spire.
The differences in size, length of the body chamber and attitude of the retroversal loop
suggest, but can not prove, that these variations are due to dimorphism. Another possible
explanation is that the differences may be an adaptation to assist in orientation and
buoyancy control in the adult stage.
Discussion
When Klinger (1976) first described this species, he was influenced by Wiedmann’s
(1962) analysis of northern German specimens of Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras)
polyplocum (Roemer, 1841). One or possibly two of Schliter’s specimens of this species
(1876, pl. 34 (figs 2-3), ?pl. 34 (figs 4-5)) with a wide apical angle and fewer whorls in
the spire were referred by Wiedmann (1962: 199 footnote) to a new species, Cirroceras
depressum. Kennedy (1986) has examined the German collections of N. (Bostrychoceras)
polyplocum and noted the wide range of variation. It is a typically upper Campanian
Species, restricted mainly to Europe, but also occurs in Texas (as Bostrychoceras
secoense) (Young, 1963: 42, pl. 3 (figs 1—5), pl. 4 (figs 4, 8), text-fig. 7s) and Mexico. The
KwaZulu material occurs in the lower Maastrichtian, and is unrelated to
N. (Bostrychoceras) polyplocum as Kennedy (1986: 97) has correctly pointed out.
We were initially inclined to refer this species to the genus Didymoceras. The latter,
however, has distinct irregular early whorls, and is generally loosely coiled in the later stages.
Consequently, we would rather place the species in the subgenus N. (Bostrychoceras).
The specimens figured by Kilian & Reboul (1909, p. 15 (pars), pl. 5, 6 (fig. 1 only)) as
Anisoceras notabile Whiteaves, 1879, resembles N. (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense, but
without having seen the actual material, we are uncertain whether they are the same species.
Unfortunately, the Madagascan Maastrichtian heteromorphs are mostly poorly
preserved and incomplete. Klinger (1976: 67) suggested that Nostoceras stantoni serratum
Collignon (1971: 12, pl. 644 (fig. 2383)) may be conspecific. Unfortunately this species is
based on half a juvenile whorl and its relation to N. (B). sanctaeluciense remains unresolved.
Our study, based on the original material plus new material, clearly shows that
N. (N.) sanctaeluciense is quite variable as far as ornament and coiling is concerned, plus
the effects of probable dimorphism. A comparable wide range of variation was shown in
Didymoceras awajiense (Yabe) by Morozumi (1985: 35, pl. 10 (figs 1-4), pl. 11 (fig. 1),
pl. 12 (figs 1-2), pl. 13 (figs 1-2), pl. 14 (figs 1-2), pl. 15 (figs 1-3), text-figs 9-11) from
the upper Campanian of Awaji Island, Japan. This includes specimens with a nearly
planispiral phragmocone (Morozumi 1985, pl. 10 (fig. 4)), to specimens with a high
turreted spire (Morozumi 1985 pl. 13 (fig. 2), pl. 14 (fig. 1)). Apart from being older
(Campanian), D. awajiense has different ornament—on the body chamber virtually every
rib is bituberculate—in contrast to the irregular tuberculation in N. (B.) sanctaeluciense.
On account of the regular coiling of the early whorls, we suggest that D. awajiense should
also be referred to the subgenus N. (Bostrychoceras).
Nostoceras (N.) fischeri (Brunnschweiler, 1966) (in Henderson et al. 1992: 136,
260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
h and without the outer
whorl. Again, note absence of early, irregular whorls. From locality 113, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. Both x 1.
imen wit
Figure 19
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). A-B. SAM—PCZ10499. The same spec
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 261
figs 2D—H, 3, 4A—C) from the lower Maastrichtian nodule bed of the Korojon Calcarenite
of Western Australia is unfortunately represented by a few specimens only. The
ornamentation of the body chamber is very similar to that of NV. (B.) sanctaeluciense. The
size difference between the largest and smallest of the body chamber hooks is comparable
to that of the KwaZulu material, and Henderson ef al. (1992: 138) have also suggested that
this may be indicative of dimorphism. None of the Western Australian specimens,
however, reaches such large sizes as our KwaZulu material. The largest diameter of the
helicoid stage in the former is only 56 mm, compared to 85 in N. (B.) sanctaeluciense.
Occurrence
Lower Maastrichtian, Maastrichtian a and b of KwaZulu and possibly Seymour Island,
Antarctica.
Genus Didymoceras Hyatt, 1894
[=Emperoceras Hyatt, 1894; Didymoceratoides Kennedy & Cobban 1993b (fide
Kennedy et al. 2000); = ?Cirroceras Conrad, 1868 nom. dub. |
Type species
Ancyloceras nebrascense Meek & Hayden (1857: 71) by original designation of Hyatt
(1894: 574).
Diagnosis
Generally large forms; initial whorls irregular, followed by loosely coiled helical
section and large retroversal body chamber. Ornament generally of numerous ribs, and
two rows of tubercles which may be irregularly developed.
Occurrence
Didymoceras is best known from North America (see Kennedy et al. 2000), but also
occurs in Canada, Mexico, The Netherlands, France, Spain, Poland, Israel, Madagascar,
KwaZulu, Angola and Nigeria.
Subgenus Didymoceras (Didymoceras) Hyatt, 1894
Type species
Ancyloceras nebrascense Meek & Hayden (1857: 71), by original designation of Hyatt
(1894: 574).
Diagnosis
Early whorls irregular, sometimes hamitid, followed by loosely coiled helix and
ending in retroversal body chamber hook. Ornament consists of ribs and two rows of
tubercles which may be irregularly developed. Generally large.
262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 20
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10495 from locality 113,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 1.
Discussion
D. (Didymoceras) differs from D. (Eodidymoceras) subgen. nov. (to be described
below) in being much larger, and by the distinct retroversal body chamber hook
suspended below the phragmocone. It differs from N. (Nostoceras) by the irregular early
whorls and by its generally much larger size.
Occurrence
The subgenus is best known from the Campanian and Maastrichtian of the U.S.
Western Interior, but has also been recorded from the Gulf Coast region, California, the
Atlantic Seaboard, Colombia, France, northern Spain, Austria, Poland, Russia, Nigeria,
Angola, KwaZulu, Madagascar, ?Israel and Japan.
263
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
‘L x yjog ‘q Jo v ue
ny
poy[l sooedsiojul oy) pure poasosoid SuIqqlt [BUISI.
nNZeMy “OT] Ayypeooy woy (Z/9T1 x9) IreLIZOd-
Ot
1}
S
Be
“UOTVULIO v
ION] 1S OY} WIOAY YOY WUOWIIPSs YIM
10 JO yred YM uouUToodg “nyNZeMy “E] | AV[Loo] WOY (91OTV X9) 86v01ZId-WVS “4
WVS ‘V ‘(9L6 ‘19SUI[) asuatonjanjouvdS (SDsIIOYIAAJSOG) SDVAIIO]SON
[Z ons14
264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 22
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 265
Figure 23
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10506 from locality 125,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. Specimen with acute apical angle on
phragmocone. X 0.83.
Fig. 22. (see facing page). Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). A. SAM-—
PCZ10494 from locality 119, KwaZulu. B. SAM—PCZ7927 imprecisely located from “The Coves’,
localities 118-121, KwaZulu. C. SAM—PCZ17343 from the same locality. D. SAM—PCZ10493
from locality 125, KwaZulu. All from the St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. All specimens
with acute apical angle of phragmocone. All x 1.
266 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 24
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10500 from locality 125,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. Part of recurved body chamber with preserved,
constricted aperture. X 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 267
Figure 25
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). A. SAM—PCZ7902 imprecisely located
from ‘The Coves’, localities 118-121, KwaZulu. Specimen with constricted aperture preserved.
B. SAM-—PCZ17344 from the same locality. Both from the St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b.
Both X 1.
268 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 26
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10501 from locality 125,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. Specimen with recurved body chamber hook. xX 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 269
Figure 27
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ17345, imprecisely located
from ‘The Coves’, localities 118-121, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. Ventral view
of recurved body chamber showing strong, irregular tuberculation. Xx 1.
270 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 28
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAS—Z2251 from locality 119,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. Recurved body chamber hook showing transition
from single row of tubercles to bituberculate ornamentation. X 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
Figure 29
Lik
.
rmation,
Maastrichtian a or b. Part of last helical whorl and recurved body chamber of adult microconch. X 1.
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ9328 from locality 119, KwaZulu, St Lucia Fo
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ZU,
‘| X ‘ouosourseryd [eorfay JO 9svq MoOjaq soySuP yY3II Ie popuodsns Joquieys Apog paainood YIM YOUOIOIOIY “G JO v URTIYOLNSeR
‘UOHeULIOY eIony 1$ ‘nNzZeMy ‘6T | AVVO] WO STEG6ZOd-NVS ‘(9L6 “1O3UITy) ISUALINJADIIUDS (SDAIIOYIAASOG) SD1II0JSON
O€ SINT
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
Figure 31
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM-—PCZ17346 imprecisely located from ‘The Coves’, localities
273
SOS:
10n
and recurved body chamber
10n.
1 sect
1Ca
r b. Macroconch with last part of hel
f ventral tubercles on inner edge of last part of helical sect
o)
ax}
S
CS
p=
oe) ©
ee
ree
SS
68
as
= 2
aS.
[D)
>
=
D)
Nn
oO
(oF
4
fo)
fo)
=
118-121, KwaZulu, St Lucia Fo
274 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 32
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ9431 (ex 113E) from bed E at
locality 113, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian b. Macroconch, part of last helical whorl and
recurved body chamber. X 0.58.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA Jif)
Figure 33
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ17341 (ex SAS—H116/7
from locality 120, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian b. Xx 1.
276 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 34
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10504 imprecisely located
from ‘The Coves’, localities 118-121, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 0.7.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
ANS a
Figure 3
Lie
“n
oD)
>
(e)
oO
cD)
——
[=
a
(Si
°
(fa
4S)
oO
om p
Sa
Cys
=O
Oo =
pS)
Oo fs
Oo
a 8
(=! Oo
=o
=
S
N
SS
S
rmation
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10504
localities 118-121, KwaZulu, St Lucia Fo
278 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 36
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10507 from locality 125,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
Figure 37
Lid)
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10507 from locality 125, KwaZulu,
St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 1.
280 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 38
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10507 from locality 125,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. View of venter of last phragmocone whorl and
impression of recurved body chamber. X 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
igure 39
). B. SAM—PCZ17350 (ex
5
/\
5
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). A. SAM—PCZ17349 (ex SAS-H11
281
how
specimens to s
of
NeW
a or b. Ventral v
lan
, Maastricht
rmation
appearance of abapicai tubercles. Both x 1.
SAS-H115/13). Both from locality 120, KwaZulu, St Lucia Fo
282 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 40
Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976). SAM—PCZ10504 imprecisely located
from ‘The Coves’, localities 118-121, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 1.
Didymoceras (D.) australis sp. nov.
Figs 41—44, 50B—C
Type
Holotype is SAM—PCZ17351 from locality 109C, western part of Nibela Peninsula,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III.
Material
SAM-—PCZ7576 and SAM—PCZ9332, both from the same locality as the holotype.
SAM-—PCZ18749, SAM—PCZ18748, NMB-—-D1490, all presumably from the same
locality.
Etymology
Named for its occurrence in the southern hemisphere.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 283
Figure 41
Didymoceras (Didymoceras) australis sp. nov. The holotype, SAM—PCZ17351 from locality 109c,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. With part of what appears to be an anaptychus
(arrow). X 0.8
254 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 42
Didymoceras (Didymoceras) australis sp. nov. The holotype, SAM—PCZ17351 from locality 109c,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. Xx 0.8.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 285
Figure 43
Didymoceras (Didymoceras) australis sp. nov. The holotype, SAM—PCZ17351 from locality 109c,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. x 0.8.
286 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 44
Didymoceras (Didymoceras) australis sp. nov. SAM—PCZ7576 from locality 109c, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Campanian III. x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 287
Description
The holotype SAM—PCZ17351 consists of at least two helically coiled whorls of
which the last half a whorl is non-septate. The paratypes all consist of less than half a
whorl.
Ornament on the phragmocone consists of low, dense ribbing and two large, but
weakly developed and irregularly spaced rows of tubercles—one just below the siphuncle
and the other near the abapical part of the whorl. Ornament becomes stronger on the body
chamber and sharp-crested ribs are conspicuous, but the tubercles are still poorly
developed.
The suture line is extremely complex. A structure resembling an anaptychus is situated
between the early whorls of the holotype (Fig. 41, arrow). We do not know if this structure
belongs to the present species or to the associated ammonite fauna.
Discussion
Size, coiling and ornament clearly distinguish this specimen from all other known
KwaZulu nostoceratids.
The closest match we can find with our material is D. (D.) nebrascense from the upper
Campanian of the U.S. Western Interior. The reconstruction in Scott & Cobban (1965)
(see also Gill & Cobban 1973, fig. 5a; Kennedy ef al. 2000: 7, figs 3-4, 6-7, 8c, d, 9-13, 62))
shows loose, helical coils and poorly developed tuberculation on the phragmocone, compared
to the stronger ornament in the younger D. (D.) stephensoni and D. (D.) cheyennense.
Occurrence
Campanian III of KwaZulu.
Didymoceras (Didymoceras) sp.
Fig. 45
Material
SAM-—PCZ7638 from locality 109C, the western part of Nibela Peninsula, KwaZulu,
St Lucia Formation, Campanian III.
Description and discussion
A single specimen differs from Didymoceras (D.) australis in being much larger and
still septate at a diameter of c. 50 mm, and in having tighter coiling. This specimen may
connect with the largest fragment of D. (D.) australis, SAM—PCZ7576 in having a similar
mode of ornamentation. It is possible that the differences in size are due to dimorphism,
but with the limited material available, it is impossible to say with certainty.
Occurrence
Campanian II of KwaZulu.
288
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 45
Didymoceras (Didymoceras) sp. SAM—PCZ7638 from locality 109c, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 289
Didymoceras (Didymoceras?) africanum sp. nov.
Figs 46, 47A—C
Type
Holotype by monotypy is SAM—PCZ7637 from locality 109C, western part of Nibela
Peninsula, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III.
Etymology
Named after its geographic occurrence.
Description
The holotype consists of a large, virtually planispirally coiled half of a whorl, part of an
earlier whorl impressed in the matrix of the former on the inner adapical edge, and a
fragment of an even earlier whorl, found loose in the same block of matrix.
Coiling in the spiral section of the shell is extremely loose, forming a low spire with a
very wide umbilicus. Ornament consists of numerous, sharp-crested ribs. These are weak
on the inner (dorsal) side of the whorl, and strongest on the adapical and abapical parts of
the whorls. Two rows of tubercles are situated on the ventral (siphonal) part of the whorls.
The first is slightly adapical of the midline and the second just above the abapical edge.
These are connected adapically and abapically by irregularly looped or single ribs; some
of the ribs are not connected to tubercles at all. In the area between the tubercles the ribs
weaken and form loops or are connected in a zig-zag pattern (Fig. 47B—C).
Discussion
The asymmetric position of the tubercles on the venter (flanks) and the impression of a
smaller whorl above the largest suggest that this is indeed a very low-spired species of
Didymoceras, and not, perhaps, a representative of Exiteloceras, Lewyites, or
Neancyloceras. Exiteloceras jenneyi camacki Kennedy et al. (2000: 62, figs 44D, 49-50)
is superficially similar to the present species as far as the large size is concerned, but
differs in being planispirally coiled.
The low coiling and consistent, strongly bituberculate ornament easily distinguishes
D. (D.2) africanum from the coeval D. (D.) australis, as well as from the younger
N. (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense. Some specimens of N. (B.) awajiense (Yabe)
figured by Morozumi (e.g. 1985, pl. 10 (fig. 4a—c)) have a similar very low apical angle,
but again the coarser ribbing and regular bituberculation distinguish D. (D.?) africanum
from this Japanese species.
Occurrence
Campanian III of KwaZulu.
290 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 46
Didymoceras (Didymoceras?) africanum sp. nov. The holotype, SAM—PCZ7637, from locality 109c,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 291
Subgenus Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras) subgen. nov.
Type species
Nostoceras hyatti Stephenson var. mitraikyensis Collignon (1970: 67, pl. 614
(fig. 2293)) from the middle Campanian of Madagascar and lower Campanian of
KwaZulu.
Etymology
Eos, indicating the dawn or origin of the genus Didymoceras.
Diagnosis
Major part of shell coiled in a loose helix or possibly even criocone, body chamber
curves upwards. Ornament consists of bituberculate and non-tuberculate ribs. Some ribs
are both flared and bituberculate. Constrictions may be present. Early whorls possibly
irregular.
Discussion
This subgenus is erected for the earliest representatives of Didymoceras s.l. They differ
from Didymoceras s.s. mainly in being smaller and in having more regular, corkscrew-
like coiling on the major part of the phragmocone, and the upwards-facing aperture as in
the majority of Eubostrychoceras (E.) species. The regular ornamentation consisting of
tubercles on all, or on alternate ribs, some with constrictions and flared bituberculate ribs
also separates D. (Eodidymoceras) from Didymoceras s.s. This lineage appears to
continue in the middle Campanian of the U.S. Western Interior as Didymoceras
cochleatum (Meek & Hayden, 1859) and in the upper Campanian as Didymoceras
binodosum Kennedy & Cobban, 1993). The genus Cirroceras Conrad, 1868 (type species
Ammonoceratites conradi Morton, 1841: 109; 1842: 212, pl. 10 (fig. 1)) is generally
regarded as a synonym of Didymoceras. The genus was revived, however, by Kennedy et
al. (2000: 11) for forms coiled in a loose helix and with an upward curving aperture. Thus
as far as coiling is concerned, Cirroceras is very close if not indistinguishable from
D. (Eodidymoceras). The main differences are that in Cirroceras, of the two rows of
tubercles, those of the lower row are larger, and constrictions are absent. In addition,
Cirroceras is only known with certainty from the upper part of the upper Campanian. If
Cirroceras is to be considered a valid taxon, it should possibly be regarded as a subgenus
of Didymoceras. It is possibly derived from the D. (Eodidymoceras) lineage.
Unfortunately our material is limited, but all three KwaZulu and Madagascan species
to be described below show distinct Allocrioceras-like features, thus suggesting that the
origins of the Nostoceratidae may be sought in that genus.
Occurrence
Lower Campanian of KwaZulu; middle Campanian of Madagascar; ?middle and upper
Campanian of the U.S. Western Interior.
292 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 47
A-C. Didymoceras (Didymoceras?) africanum sp. nov. The holotype, SAM—PCZ7637 from locality
109c, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. A. The outer whorl. B—C. Fragment of inner whorls
impressed into the outer whorl. Note the asymmetry of the ornamentation, indicative of low, helical
rather than planispiral coiling. D. Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense (Klinger, 1976).
SAM-—PCZ17352, probably from locality 119, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b.
Impression of phragmocone of specimen with acute apical angle. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
Figure 48
293
lan,
ky (Antsalova), Madagascar, middle Campan
. Note upward curvature of body chamber. X 1.
itral
, 1970). A-B. SAM—PCZ18754 (ex WJK 4/D) from locality 14, KwaZulu, St Lucia
a!
)
:
>
>
~
~
fo
~
- n
=~ <a)
eo) a
‘S =
5D ey,
— Sf
= .
= ”
e) >
~
<2)
mas ro
Y —
n FS
SS =
Q ~
as S
SS
~ Q
= t
~ Qe
> >
~ ~
e 4
“~~
~ vo
Slers
n N
~
)
:
~
ee
~~
.)
~
~
=~
>
—_
=
Formation, lower Campanian. C—D. The holotype, GD11293 from Gisement 148, M
Didymoceras (Eod
294 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras) mitraikyense (Collignon, 1970)
Fig. 48
21969 Nostoceras sp. Collignon, p. 46, pl. 530 (fig. 2092).
1970 Nostoceras hyatti Stephenson var. mitraikyensis Collignon, p. 67, pl. 614 (fig. 2293).
1976 Didymoceras (Didymoceras) schloenbachi schloenbachi (Favre, 1869); Klinger, p. 67,
pl. 29 (fig. 4), pl. 30 (fig. 4).
Type
Holotype is the specimen figured by Collignon (1970, pl. 614 (fig. 2092)) GD11293
(Fig. 48C—D) from the middle Campanian, of Gisement 148, Mitraiky (Antsalova),
Madagascar.
Material
SAM-—PCZ18754 from locality 14, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, lower Campanian.
Description
No new material has been found since Klinger’s (1976) original description, but
several pieces have been fitted together to form a helix consisting of about three and a half
whorls. Coiling is sinistral, forming a regular, loose corkscrew, with the whorls separated
by intervals of approximately one whorl height. The holotype (Fig. 48C—D) shows that the
last part of the body chamber curves upwards in Eubostrychoceras (E.)-fashion.
Ornament consists of about 30 single, radial to slightly rursiradiate ribs per whorl.
Each alternate rib bears two rows of tubercles, one just below midflank, and the other at
the abapical edge.
Discussion
Following Wiedmann’s (1962: 204) interpretation of Helicoceras schloenbachi Favre
(1869: 30, pl. 7 (fig. 5)), Klinger (1976: 67) referred the KwaZulu material to that species.
However, Blaszkiewicz (1980) and Kennedy & Summesberger (1987: 31) suggested that
all Campanian specimens referred to schloenbachi belong elsewhere. In the case of
loosely coiled specimens such as the KwaZulu material, Kennedy & Summesberger
(1987: 31) suggested that they may even belong to different genera.
As far as the loose, helical coiling, and ornament on the phragmocone are concerned,
D. (Eodidymoceras) mitraikyense 1s very similar to D. (D.) puebloense Cobban et al.
(1997: 225, figs 2-5) from the upper Campanian of Colorado and Wyoming. That species,
however, has the typical U-shaped body chamber suspended below the phragmocone, and
large size of Didymoceras s.s. |
Fragments of D. (E.) mitraikyense are virtually indistinguishable from helically coiled
species of Allocrioceras, e.g. A. billinghursti Klinger, 1976 (see Fig. 52E—F). Again, we
are not quite sure of the exact relationships between the two genera but, as suggested
above, it seems to confirm our view that at least some of the Nostoceratidae can trace their
origins to A/locrioceras during the Turonian.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 295,
A few species of Didymoceras show loose coiling similar to that of
D. (E.) mitraikyense, but in all the cases the ornament is sufficiently different to
distinguish between these. D. (D.) donezianum (Mikhailov, 1951), recently reviewed by
Kennedy & Cobban (1993c: 137) has loose coiling in the early stages, but the body
chamber becomes closely coiled. Didymoceras (D.) navarroense (Shumard, 1861) (see
Stephenson 1941: 417, pl. 83 (figs 9-13)), and Kennedy & Cobban (1993a: 421, figs 12.1,
13.1-13.8, 14.1-14.4, 14.13, 14.14) has more robust ornament, and numerous fine looped
and intercalatory ribs. Didymoceras (D.) subtuberculatum Howarth (1965: 374, pl. 7
(figs 2-6), pl. 11 (fig. 4)) has similar loose coiling on the phragmocone, and regularly-
spaced, flared ribs; it may possibly be referred to D. (Eodidymoceras).
Occurrence
Lower Campanian of KwaZulu, lower? and middle Campanian of Madagascar.
Didymoceras (E.) howarthi sp. nov.
Figs 49, 50A, 51
Type
Holotype, by monotypy is SAM—PCZ7349 from locality 74, Die Rooiwalle, KwaZulu,
St Lucia Formation, probably from the lower Campanian, but possibly uppermost
Santonian.
Etymology
Named for Dr M. K. Howarth of the Natural History Museum, London.
Description
The holotype consists of two and a half whorls of a loosely coiled helix. Ornament
consists of 34 minor and major ribs per whorl. These are narrow and high-crested,
separated by much wider interspaces. The minor ribs bear two rows of minute tubercles,
the first slightly above the midline and the other near the abapical quarter of the flanks.
About 5 major flared ribs occur per whorl. These are flanked adaperturally by a wide
constriction. Where sufficiently well preserved, these can also be seen to bear two rows of
tiny pointed tubercles.
Discussion
With respect to the loose coiling of the phragmocone, bituberculate normal and flared
ribs and constrictions, D. (E.) howarthi is very similar to D. cochleatum (Meek & Hayden
1859) (see Kennedy et al. 1999) from the middle Campanian of South Dakota and
Wyoming and D. binodosum (Kennedy & Cobban 1993b) from the upper Campanian of
the U.S. Western Interior and Gulf Coast. Neither of these two species, however, has as
loose coiling as D. (E.) howarthi. It is possible that D. (E.) howarthi gave rise to this
middle to upper Campanian lineage.
Another comparable species is Didymoceras subtuberculatum Howarth (1965: 374,
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
296
‘T X “SQit [[B UO JUStUBUIO 9}B[NOIOQNIIG YIM PUB LI PoIe[J Poyeldosse YIM UONILSUOD SuO.NS 9} SON “UerTuedureD Jomo] JO URTUOWURS
Joddn ‘uoneuo, eiony 1S ‘njnzemy ‘OI[PMIOOY sq “pL Aiypeso] Woy GPE LZOd-WYVS ‘odAjojoy ayy, “Aou ‘ds IYJADMOY (SPAQIOWAPIPOT) SpsédIOUApPIG
6p 21NS14
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
Figure 50
la
iwalle, KwaZulu, St Luc
sp. nov. NMB—D1490 from locality 109c,
Roo
1e
ity 74,
local
rom
dymoceras) howarthi sp. nov. The holotype, SAM—PCZ7349 f
A. Didymoceras (Eodi
297),
1S
dymoceras) austral
.B-C. Didymoceras (Di
anian
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. Both x 1.
1an or lower Camp
Formation, upper Santon
298 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 51
Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras) howarthi sp. nov. Reconstruction of the holotype, SAM—PCZ7349, by
Samantha Black. X 1.
pl. 7 (figs 2-6), pl. 11 (fig. 4)) from the uppermost Campanian or basal Maastrichtian of
Angola. This species could possibly also be referred to the subgenus D. (Eodidymoceras)
as mentioned above. In D. (D.) subtuberculatum, however, the minor ribs are more
numerous and finer, and the flared ribs far more prominent than in D. (E.) howarthi. Also,
the two rows of tubercles in D. (D.) subtuberculatum are much more prominent, and
placed near the base of the whorls, rather than on the flanks. The specimen from the lower
Campanian of Madagascar described by Collignon (1969: 42, pl. 529 (fig. 2086)) as
Didymoceras subtuberculatum may possibly also be referred to this species.
Occurrence
Possibly uppermost Santonian but probably lower Campanian of KwaZulu.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 299
Figure 52
A-D. Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras?) sp. SAM—PCZ18751 (ex Z2071) from locality 105, KwaZulu,
St Lucia Formation, upper Santonian or lower Campanian. Note the bituberculate flared rib, reminiscent
of Allocrioceras ornamentation. E-F. Allocrioceras billinghursti Klinger, 1976. SAM—PCZ18752
(ex Z1598) from locality 92, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II or III. Note the close
resemblance to Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras) mitraikyense (Collignon, 1969). Both x 1.
300 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras?) sp.
Fig. 8E, 52 A—D
1976 Hyphantoceras (Madagascarites?) amapondense (Van Hoepen); Klinger p. 71 pars,
pl. 33 (fig. 2) only.
1994 Allocrioceras Cooper, p. 365, fig. 1f-g.
OOF Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (Van Hoepen); Klinger & Kennedy
19975 5245) fied only.
997 ‘Allocrioceras’ sp. Klinger & Kennedy, p. 246, fig. 16.
Material
SAM-PCZ18751 (ex Z2071a—b), SAM—PCZ12949 from locality 105, St Lucia
Formation, KwaZulu, uppermost Santonian or basal Campanian.
Description
Unfortunately this species is based on fragments only. The most complete,
SAM-—PCZ18751 (Fig. 52A—D), consists of less than a third of an apparently crioceratitid
whorl. The whorl section is circular; ornament consists of major, bituberculate ribs
separated by three to four subsidiary, non-tuberculate ribs. The tubercles of the major ribs
are extremely delicate. SAM—PCZ12949 (Fig. 8E) is a latex peel consisting of a large
specimen with bituberculate major ribs and non-tuberculate intermediary ribs. Part of a
Glyptoxoceras-like whorl occurs with this specimen. We do not know if the two
specimens belong to the same individual; if they do, it suggests that the early whorls of
Didymoceras (Eodidymoceras) may be irregular, as in later Didymoceras s.s. spp.
Discussion
If these specimens were found in isolation and without a Santonian/Campanian date,
we would not hesitate to refer them to Allocrioceras, as was done by Cooper (1994,
fig. |F—G). This genus, however, is generally limited to the Cenomanian to Coniacian
Stages. However, the similarities between A/locrioceras and D. (Eodidymoceras) are so
striking, that we doubt if these similarities are purely homoeomorphic, as previously
mentioned.
Occurrence
Upper Santonian and/or lower Campanian of Pondoland, KwaZulu and Madagascar
(HCK pers. obs.)
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 301
Family Diplomoceratidae Spath, 1926
(= Family Solenoceratidae Cooper, 1994; Family Neocrioceratidae Spath, 1953)
Subfamily Diplomoceratinae Spath, 1926
(= Scalaritinae Ward, 1976)
Genus Diplomoceras Hyatt, 1900
[= Eudiplomoceras Brunnschweiler, 1966]
Type species
Baculites cylindracea Defrance, 1816 by original designation of Hyatt (1900: 160).
Diagnosis
Shell consists of three or more parallel shafts, closely spaced, but not in contact. Whorl
section varies from compressed through circular to depressed. Ornament consists of fine,
sharp-crested, dense ribbing. Internal moulds are generally, but not always smooth.
Suture deeply incised and complex. The shell may reach very large size, with body
chambers over a metre in length.
Discussion
Klinger (1976) followed Wiedmann (1962) in regarding Glyptoxoceras as a subgenus
of Diplomoceras. The recent descriptions of well-preserved and abundant specimens of
Glyptoxoceras from south India (Kennedy & Henderson 1992), Western Australia
(Henderson ef a/. 1992), France (Kennedy 1992a), British Columbia (Ward & Mallory
1977) and California (Matsumoto 1959) all show that the coiling strategies in
Glyptoxoceras, albeit very variable, differ sufficiently from those of Diplomoceras to
watrant separate generic status.
Following the extensive revision of the type species, D. cylindraceum by Kennedy
(1987) it appears that the genus is monospecific. All the other ‘species’ referred to
Diplomoceras are either synonyms of D. cylindraceum or based on uninterpretable
material.
The systematics, affinities, stratigraphic and geographic distribution and possible
origins of the type species, Diplomoceras cylindraceum are discussed fully by Klinger &
Kennedy (This volume 110 (4)).
Occurrence
Where precisely dated, D. cylindraceum typically occurs in the Maastrichtian, but
there are reports of the species from the upper Campanian of Tercis, France (Kuchler &
Odin 2001) and Piotrawin, Poland (Machalski 1996). Other specimens, described mainly
as D. lambi or D. notabile are also recorded from the Campanian, even ranging down as
far as the lower Campanian (e.g. Alabushev & Wiedmann 1997).
302 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 53
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). SAM—PCZ17355 (ex SAS—A432) from locality 111,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 303
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816)
Figs 53-55
1816 Baculites cylindracea Defrance, p. 160.
1976 Diplomoceras (Diplomoceras) notabile Whiteaves; Klinger, p. 82, pl. 33 (figs 2a—b, 4a—b).
1987 Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance); Kennedy, p. 181, pl. 17 (fig. 3), pl. 18 (fig. 5),
pl. 21 (figs 2-3, 5-6), pl. 22 (fig. 6), pl. 23 (figs 1-2), pl. 24 (figs 1-3), pl. 25 (figs 1-8),
pl. 26 (fig. 18), pl. 33 (fig. 16), pl. 36 (fig. 6), text-figs 9-10 (with full synonymy).
1992 Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance); Henderson et al., p. 140, figs 5, 6A—-E, H-K, 7.
noo Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance); Kennedy & Henderson, p. 704, pl. 6 (figs 1-3),
text-figs 1B, 3.
IDB) Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance); Hancock & Kennedy, p. 164, pl. 15 (fig. 15),
pl. 17 (figs 1-4). ;
1993 Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance); Ward & Kennedy, p. 49, figs 42, 43.16, 43.17.
1997 Diplomoceras notabile Whiteaves; Alabushev & Wiedmann, p. 14 pl. 4 (fig. 1).
IDS Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance); Kennedy, p. 653, figs 12.1—12.5.
2003 Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance); Klinger & Kennedy, figs 1—9.
Type
Neotype designated by Kennedy (1987: 183, pl. 24 (figs 1-3)) is no. 10511 in the
collections of the Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique from the upper
Maastrichtian Nekum or Meersen Chalk of St Pietersberg near Maastricht in The
Netherlands.
Material
SAM-—PCZ7843, PCZ7943 from bed 7 at locality 20, Maastrichtian I];
SAM-—PCZ17355 (ex SAS—A432) from locality 111, Campanian HI; SAM—PCZ9551
from locality 113, Maastrichtian a or b; SAS-A2080, SAM—PCZ12950 (ex H108/9),
PCZ12951 from locality 116, Maastrichtian a, SAM—PCZ7940 from locality 20,
Maastrichtian a or b; SAM-—PCZ7998 from locality 124, Maastrichtian a or b;
SAM—PCZ17356 (ex H105/9) from locality 116, Maastrichtian a or b;, SAM—PCZ18707,
SAM—PCZ7904, unlocalized from ‘The Coves’, Maastrichtian a or b. All from KwaZulu
and all from the St Lucia Formation.
Dimensions
Specimen MxWb MxWh Wb:Wh MnWb MnWh Wb:Wh Ri
PCZ12950 28 31 0.9
PCZ7843 40 36 Nil
PCZ9551 58 64 0.9 39 44 0.9 19
RCAWo aI S// 64 O) 45 56 0.8 16
304 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 54
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). SAM—PCZ9551 from locality 113, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. X 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 305
Figure 55
Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816). A. SAM—PCZ7940 from locality 20, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. B. SAM—PCZ7904, an internal mould of the phragmocone showing the
typical absence of ornament. C-E. SAM—PCZ17356 (ex H105/9) from locality 116, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Maastrichtian a. All x 1.
306 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
All except one of our specimens are parts of the straight shafts of the phragmocone,
preserved as internal moulds. The whorl section varies from depressed to near-circular to
compressed. All but one of our figured specimens is ornamented by fine, c.16—19 ribs per
whorl height. Their orientation varies from radial to distinctly rursiradiate on the larger
specimens. This is rather unusual, as internal moulds of the phragmocone of this species
are usually smooth, due to thickening of the nacreous layer beneath the ribs. The sutures
are complex and dendritic.
Discussion
Variation in this species was described in detail by Kennedy (1987) on the basis of
more than 70 specimens from the type locality and our material adds nothing new. As
mentioned above, various aspects of the species are discussed extensively by Klinger &
Kennedy (This volume 110 (4)).
Occurrence
Where well dated, D. cylindraceum is a typical Maastrichtian species, but it has been
recorded from as early as Early Campanian. The species has a virtually cosmopolitan
distribution; details are provided by Klinger & Kennedy (This volume 110 (4)).
Genus Glyptoxoceras Spath, 1925
(= Neohamites Brunnschweiler, 1966)
Type species
Hamites rugatus Forbes (1846: 116, pl. 11 (fig. 6)), by original designation of Spath
(1925230)
Diagnosis
Early whorls variable, straight, criocone, open helix or turriliticone, followed by loose,
planispiral elliptical or polygonal whorls. Ornament consists of simple ribs only. Aperture
collared and preceded by a constriction.
Discussion
Due to the open coiling and inherent fragile nature of the shell, complete specimens of
Glyptoxoceras are a rarity. There is great variation in density of ribbing; this, combined
with the incomplete nature of the material means that the systematics of the genus are
rather chaotic. At present, only the upper Maastrichtian material from south India, revised
by Kennedy & Henderson (1992), and of Western Australia revised by Henderson et al.
(1992) and Glyptoxoceras aquisgranense (Schliter) from the lower Campanian, based on
exquisitely preserved material from Nalzen, France (Kennedy 1992a) are sufficiently
defined. Older, Coniacian and Santonian material from Madagascar, KwaZulu and
Austria, as well as lower Campanian material from Madagascar, are difficult to separate
satisfactorily.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 307
Occurrence
Coniacian to Maastrichtian, with records from Western Europe, Poland, Russia,
Madagascar, KwaZulu, India, Western Australia, British Columbia, California, New
Zealand, Brazil, Chile, Jamaica and Japan.
Glyptoxoceras rugatum (Forbes, 1846)
Fig. 56C
1846 Hamites rugatus Forbes, p. 117, pl. 11 (fig. 2).
1992 Glyptoxoceras rugatum (Forbes); Kennedy & Henderson, p. 695, pl. 1 (figs 1-2, 5-16),
pl. 2 (figs 10-11, 14-29), pl. 3 (figs 1-3), pl. 4 (figs 2, 12-15), text-fig. 1A, E. (cum
synon. ).
1992 Glyptoxoceras rugatum (Forbes); Henderson et al., p. 145, (figs 8-13) (cum synon.).
Material
SAM-—PCZ17358 from the locality exposing the contact between the base of the Uloa
Formation and the top of the St Lucia Formation at Monzi (see e.g. Cooper & McCarthy
1998: 5, fig. 7a for details). Maastrichtian I or II.
Description and discussion
A single, straight fragment with a circular section and about five ribs per whorl height
is the only specimen referable to this species.
This species is best known from the upper Maastrichtian of Western Australia
(Henderson et al. 1992) and south India (Kennedy & Henderson 1992). These authors
provide an extensive synonymy of the species and show that the various specific names
applied, e.g. suwbcompressus, nereis, circulare, nipponicum, bullarensis, giraliensis,
cardabiensis, largesulcatus and soufoulisi all fall within the variation of G. rugatum.
Occurrence
Maastrichtian of south India, KwaZulu, Brazil, possibly Chile, Western Australia,
northern Spain, south-east France, The Netherlands and Belgium.
Glyptoxoceras octocostatum (Collignon, 1969)
Fig. 56A—B, D-F
1906 Heteroceras sp. Woods, p. 339, pl. 42 (fig. 5).
1921a Diplomoceras? indicum Spath, p. 256, pl. 23 (fig. 5).
1969 Diplomoceras indicum Forbes octocostatum Collignon, p. 45, pl. 530 (fig. 2090).
1976 Diplomoceras (Glyptoxoceras) indicum (Forbes); Klinger, p. 79, pl. 34 (figs 3-5).
Material
SAM-PCZ18739 and SAM—PCZ18741 from an unspecified horizon at Mkweyane
(Umkwelane Hill), St Lucia Formation, Santonian or Campanian; SAM—PCZ17357 and
308 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
G
Figure 56
A-B, D-F. Glyptoxoceras octocostatum (Collignon, 1969). A. SAM—PCZ18739. D. SAM—PCZ18741.
Both from Mkweyane (Umkwelane Hill), KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, upper Santonian or lower
Campanian. B. SAM—PCZ18740 from locality 105, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, upper Santonian or
lower Campanian. E-F. SAM—PCZ17357 from locality 105, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, upper
Santonian or lower Campanian. C. Glyptoxoceras rugatum (Forbes, 1846). SAM—PCZ17358 from
below the base of the Uloa Formation at Monzi, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian.
G. Neoglyptoxoceras collignoni nom. nov. SAM—PCZ18742 from locality 109, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Campanian II or HI. H—I. Scalarites sp. H. SAM—PCZ18738. I. SAM—PCZ7961, both from
locality 72, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II. All X 1.
SAM-—PCZ18740 (ex Z2071) from locality 105, St Lucia Formation, uppermost
Santonian or basal Campanian; SAM—PCZ9923 from locality 18, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Santonian.
Description and discussion
The material consists of curved fragments of a species which may be referred to
G. octocostatum. The whorl section is rounded and, as the name implies, ornament consists of
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 309
Figure 57
Glyptoxoceras texanum Kennedy, Landman & Cobban, 2001. SAM—PCZ12955 (ex H179/20) from
locality 6, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, upper Santonian or lower Campanian. X 1.
about eight sharp ribs per whorl height. As indicated by Kennedy & Henderson (1992) and
Henderson et al. (1992), G. indicum 1s a typical Maastrichtian species, and not conspecific with
the Santonian and/or Campanian material referred to this species by e.g. Klinger (1976: 79).
Occurrence
Uppermost Santonian and/or basal Campanian of Pondoland and KwaZulu, and lower
Campanian Madagascar.
Glyptoxoceras texanum Kennedy, Landman & Cobban, 2001
Fig. 57
1976 Diplomoceras (Glyptoxoceras) subcompressum (Forbes); Klinger, p. 80, pl. 34 (fig. 6).
2001 Glyptoxoceras texanum Kennedy, Landman & Cobban, p. 7, (fig. 4).
Material
SAM-—PCZ12955 (ex H179/20) from spoil heaps at excavations for a bridge at locality 6,
St Lucia Formation, upper Santonian or basal Campanian.
Description and discussion
The specimen differs from all others referred to Glyptoxoceras in southern Africa in
having a distinctly compressed whorl section (Wb:Wh = 0.7), about six ribs per whorl
310 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
height and a distinct constriction. Even though we only have a single specimen, the
dimensions, ornamentation and stratigraphic occurrence are identical to the species
recently described by Kennedy et a/. (2001: 7) from the top of the Blossom Sand in Texas
as Glyptoxoceras texanum.
Klinger (1976: 80) previously referred the specimen to G. subcompressum, but that
species has thus far only been accurately recorded from the upper Maastrichtian and
therefore can not be the same as the KwaZulu specimen.
Occurrence
Uppermost Santonian or basal Campanian of KwaZulu, upper Santonian of Texas.
Genus Scalarites Wright & Matsumoto, 1954
Type species
Helicoceras scalare Y abe (1904: 9, pl. 3 (fig. 2)), by original designation of Wright &
Matsumoto (1954: 115).
Diagnosis
Early straight shaft with constrictions followed by loose elliptical coils omamented by
simple ribs with occasional flared, non-tuberculate ribs and occasional constrictions.
Discussion
Scalarites is amongst the oldest diplomoceratids. Scalarites densicostatus Matsumoto
(1977: 349, pl. 57 (fig. 1), pl. 61 (fig. 6)) already occurs in the middle Turonian. It differs
from other Scalarites in having Diplomoceras-like coiling. Matsumoto (1977: 350)
suggested that it might be ancestral to Polyptychoceras obstrictum.
Differences between Glyptoxoceras and Scalarites may be slight. We suspect that
some of the Coniacian and Santonian ‘Glyptoxoceras’ may be representatives of
Scalarites.
Occurrence
The genus first appears in the middle Turonian and persists to the Santonian. It is best
known from Hokkaido, but is also known from California, Morocco, northern Germany,
Colombia and KwaZulu.
Scalarites sp.
Fig. 56H-I
Material
SAM-—PCZ18738 (ex SAS-A1997) and SAM-PCZ7961, both from locality 72,
St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA SLT
Description and discussion
Two body chamber fragments of what appear to be Scalarites are available.
SAM-—PCZ118738 is associated with an evolute peroniceratid. Both specimens are
crushed, but the whorl section seems to be higher than wide. Ornament consists of
rounded, prorsiradiate ribs, c. three per whorl height. Towards the larger end, the ribs
become progressively prorsiradiate.
Occurrence
Coniacian II of KwaZulu.
Genus Neoglyptoxoceras Collignon, 1969
(= ?Epiglyptoxoceras Collignon, 1969)
Type species
Neoglyptoxoceras magnificum Collignon (1969: 30, pl. 523 (fig. 2065), p. 35, pl. 526
(figs 2074-2075)) by original designation of Collignon (1969: 35).
Diagnosis
Neoglyptoxoceras forms large, loose open criocone to aspinoceratid coils; some may
form a low, loose helix. It is ornamented by ribs only and may have a very complex suture
line. The whorl section varies from ovoid to circular. No constrictions have been
observed.
Discussion
The main difference between Neoglyptoxoceras and Glyptoxoceras is the larger size of
the former. A detailed discussion of the genus and its affinities are given by Klinger &
Kennedy (This volume 110 (4)).
Occurrence
Lower and middle Campanian of Madagascar and middle Campanian of KwaZulu.
Neoglyptoxoceras collignoni nom. nov.
Fig. 56G
O70 Neoglyptoxoceras serta (Miller & Wollemann); Collignon, p. 15, pl. 613 (figs 2286-2288).
1970 ?Neoglyptoxoceras sp. aff. serta (Mill. et Woll.); Collignon, p. 15, pl. 613 (fig. 2289).
2003 Neoglyptoxoceras sp. cf. N. serta Collignon 1969 non Muller & Wolleman, 1906;
Klinger & Kennedy, fig 10c.
Type
The holotype is the specimen figured by Collignon (1970, pl. 613 (fig. 2286)) from the
middle Campanian of Gisement 203, Coupe d’Andimaka, Belo sur Tsiribihina,
Madagascar.
312 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Etymology
Named after the late General M. Collignon.
Material
SAM-PCZ 18742 from locality 109C, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III?
Description and discussion
Half a criocone whorl with a rib density of about 6 per whorl height appears identical
with Collignon’s figured material from the middle Campanian of Madagascar.
Collignon (1970: 15) originally identified his Madagascan specimens with Muller &
Wollemann’s (1906: 20, pl. 9 (fig. 3), pl. 10 (figs 1-4)) Crioceras serta, as
Neoglyptoxoceras. Muller & Wollemann (1906: 21), however, clearly state that in later
stages of growth, larger, flared ribs start appearing at regular intervals. Because of this
latter feature, Crioceras serta cannot be referred to Neoglyptoxoceras. This type of
ornamentation 1s reminiscent of Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella).
The coiling of N. collignoni is very similar to some Eubostrychoceras, but the
generally much larger size may separate it from loosely coiled Eubostrychoceras.
Occurrence
Middle Campanian of Madagascar and Campanian III of KwaZulu.
Genus Neocrioceras Spath, 19216
Subgenus Neocrioceras (Neocrioceras) Spath, 19216
Type species
Neocrioceras cf. spinigerum Jimbo, 1894 by original designation of Spath (19216: 51).
Diagnosis
Initial loose helix followed by open spiral and some with J-shaped body-chamber.
Ribs, some stronger and with lateral and ventral tubercles.
Discussion
Spath erected the genus Neocrioceras and designated as ‘genotype’ (type species) part
of a helically coiled fragment which he tentatively identified as Neocrioceras cf.
spinigerum (here refigured as Fig. 63C—E). This specimen is from the type locality of the
Mzamba Formation in Pondoland, presumably from the upper Santonian part of the
section. It is, in fact, part of N. (Schlueterella) compressum Klinger, 1976. Diener (1925:
192) subsequently designated Neocrioceras (N.) spinigerum Jimbo (1894: 184, pl. 24
(figs 1-1b)) as type species of Neocrioceras. This has caused considerable confusion in
interpreting Neocrioceras. Matsumoto (in Matsumoto et al. 1986) described and figured a
suite of specimens of Neocrioceras (N.) spinigerum from the Santonian of Hokkaido.
These show that N. (N.) spinigerum is coiled in an open, planispiral criocone throughout.
This, however, is in contrast to Spath’s original concept of the genus—1.e. helical early
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 313
whorls and possibly an uncoiled straight shaft (as in Ancyloceras pseudoarmatum
Schliter 1876: 164, pl. 43 (figs 8-9)). Apart from the original material described by Spath,
no additional specimens of Neocrioceras cf. spinigerum (i.e. N. (Schlueterella)
compressum) have been found at Mzamba.
Occurrence
Neocrioceras s.s. 1s only definitely known from the Turonian to Santonian and
possibly lower Campanian of Japan and Saghalien, and the Coniacian of KwaZulu.
Records from the lower Santonian of the Gosau as Neocrioceras maderi by Immel et al.
(1982: 24, pl. 9 (fig. 2), pl. 11 (figs 1-2)) are regarded as doubtful Neocrioceras by
Matsumoto in Matsumoto et al. (1986: 468), a view not supported here.
Neocrioceras (Neocrioceras) annelisae sp. nov.
Fig. 58
Type
Holotype by monotypy is SAM—PCZ9809 from locality 72, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian III.
Etymology
Named after Annelise Crean (S.A. Museum) who patiently prepared the specimen.
Description
The holotype is septate throughout. Coiling appears to be in an open criocone. The
whorl section is elliptical, higher than wide with a Wb: Wh ratio of 16:21 (0.76) and 20:24
(0.83) at the smaller and larger ends respectively.
The ornamentation of the species is very distinctive. Fine ribs occur on the flanks and
over the dorsum. These are slightly prorsiradiate on the flanks and radial over the dorsum
and uniformly strong throughout. A row of large clavate tubercles occurs on either side of
the venter, and a second row just above mid-flank. The ventral and ventrolateral tubercles
are arranged in sets of three. Starting from the abapertural end, the first ventral tubercle is
smallest, the second about twice as large as the first and distinctly clavate. The third is the
largest of the three and about twice as large as the preceding tubercle and distinctly
clavate. It has a groove running along the lateral flank, suggesting a bipartite origin. The
ventrolateral tubercles show a similar increase in size, but they are much smaller than the
ventral ones. The third ventrolateral tubercle also shows a slight radial groove on the
flanks, similar to that of its ventral counterpart.
Ventrally, the tubercles are connected in a series of adaperturally curved looped ribs.
The ventral and ventrolateral tubercles are joined by irregularly distributed ribs; some are
connected by irregular loops whereas others are connected in a zigzag fashion. About
three to four intermediary ribs occur between these sets of tubercles. Dorsally, two to four
ribs connect with the ventrolateral tubercles.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
314
‘T X ‘TI ueloeruo)
‘UOHeULIO, BION] 1g “NINZeMy “ZL AeIO] WO G086ZId-NVS ‘odAjojoy sy, “Aou “ds avsyauun (sp.1a201490aN) sp.1az01100aN
Bg oINsI J
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 315
Discussion
Even though this species is represented by a single specimen only, the unique mode of
omamentation consisting of sets of three tubercles arranged in order of increasing size
clearly distinguishes N. (N.) annelisae from all other representatives of Neocrioceras. The
open, criocone coiling and lack of clearly thickened ribs suggests that the species is best
referred to Neocrioceras s.s. rather than to N. (Schlueterella).
The closest match with the present species is Kawashitaceras dentatum Matsumoto &
Obata (1981: 115, pl. 1 (fig. 1), pl. 2 (fig. 1)); also Matsumoto (1984, fig. 1) from the upper
Turonian of Hokkaido. Here, however, the ventral and ventrolateral tubercles are each
situated on a wide base and their crests are serrated and staggered.
Occurrence ;
Coniacian III of KwaZulu.
Subgenus Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) Wiedmann, 1962
Type species
Ancyloceras pseudoarmatum Schliter 1872 by original designation of Wiedmann
(1962; 205).
Diagnosis
Open spiral or helix followed by ancyloceratid coiling. Tuberculate ribs, with four
rows of tubercles, more prominent than intercalatory, non-tuberculate ones.
Discussion
Matsumoto & Miyauchi (1984: 59) and Matsumoto in Matsumoto et al. (1986: 469)
have discussed the affinities of Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) and Neocrioceras
(Neocrioceras). Some species, which had been referred to Neocrioceras (Schlueterella),
e.g. N. (S.) riosi Wiedmann (1962: 205, pl. 12 (fig. 7)) from the Campanian of northern
Spain and S. multinodosum (Schliter 1872: 106, pl. 32 (figs 1—-2)); Wright 1979: 293, pl. 2
(figs 4-5)) from the Turonian of Germany and England are best referred to
Pseudoxybeloceras, as pointed out in part by Klinger (1976: 74).
Occurrence
The subgenus first appears in the middle Coniacian of Wyoming, but is most common
in the Santonian to Campanian, with records from KwaZulu, Pondoland, Madagascar,
California, northern Germany, Sweden, France, Romania and Hokkaido.
Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) compressum Klinger, 1976
Figs 59, 60A-C, 61
1921b Neocrioceras cf. spinigerum, Jimbo sp.; Spath, p. 52, pl. 7 (fig. 6a—c).
1976 Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) compressus Klinger, p. 74, pl. 33 (fig. 5), text-figs 8], 10g.
316 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 59
Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) compressum Klinger, 1976. SAM—PCZ17363 from locality 74, KwaZulu,
St Lucia Formation, Santonian I. X 1.
1982 Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) compressum Klinger; Immel et al. p. 25, pl. 9 (fig. 3),
pl. 10 (figs 1-4), pl. 11 (fig. 3).
19915 ~~ Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) compressum Klinger; Kennedy & Cobban, p. 65, pl. 10
(figs 1-2), pl. 12 (figs 4-7), text-fig. 25c.
995 Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) compressum Klinger; Kennedy, p. 430, pl. 27
(figs 13-15), pl. 29 (figs 4-7).
Type
Holotype is SAS—19/1, the specimen figured by Klinger (1976, pl. 33 (fig. 5),
text-figs 8], 10g) from locality 94, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I.
Material
Apart from the holotype, the specimen described and figured by Spath (19215, pl. 7
(figs 6a—c)) as Neocrioceras cf. spinigerum and SAM—PCZ17363 from locality 74,
Santonian I and SAM—PCZ17364 from locality 79, Coniacian V, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation.
Description and discussion
It is now clear that Spath unknowingly had Sch/lueterella in mind when he proposed the
genus Neocrioceras. The ‘genotype’ (type species) of Spath’s Neocrioceras is in fact a
good example of Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) compressum Klinger, 1976. A crushed
body chamber fragment from locality 79 (Fig. 60A—C) has ornament comparable to that
described and figured by Immel ef al. (1982) from the Santonian of Austria, especially
their (1982, pl. 10 (fig. 3)) specimen with few intercalatory ribs.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 317
Figure 60
A-C. Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) compressum Klinger, 1976. SAM—PCZ17364 from locality 79,
KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian V. D.Pseudoxybeloceras (Pseudoxybeloceras)
quadrinodosum (Jimbo, 1894). SAM-—P1411 from an unspecified horizon at the type section of the
Mzamba Formation, the Mzamba River Estuary, Eastern Cape Province, locality 1, upper Santonian or
lower Campanian. Both xX 1.
Occurrence
Upper Coniacian and lower Santonian of KwaZulu, lower Santonian of Austria,
middle Coniacian of Wyoming and Santonian of California. It is also known, but as yet
undescribed from Japan (Matsumoto & Miyauchi 1984: 63) and Madagascar (H.C.K.
pers. ob.) (Fig. 61).
Subfamily Polyptychoceratinae Matsumoto, 1938
(nom. transl. Wiedmann, 1962, ex Polyptychoceratidae Matsumoto, 1938)
Genus Pseudoxybeloceras Wright & Matsumoto, 1954
Type species
Hamites quadrinodosus Jimbo, 1894 by original designation of Wright & Matsumoto
@IOs4= 119):
Diagnosis
Shell consists primarily of straight or curved shafts connected by U-bends. Ribbing
may be bi- or quadrituberculate; in some forms major ribs develop on the body chamber.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
318
"| X ‘Jeosesepepy
Jo ueluoURS d[PpIUU “¢/Z JUSUOSIH Wo USUTIOAdS jURID B ‘poJoIsIsoIUN “GD 9/6] “JOSUI[S] Wnssaiduos (vjJasajanjyIS) SPsaI014002N
[9 oInst 4
AW \
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA sil)
Discussion
We follow Klinger (1976) in regarding Parasolenoceras Collignon, 1969 and
Christophoceras Collignon, 1969 (of which Cyphoceras Ward & Mallory 1977 is a
synonym) as subgenera of Pseudoxybeloceras. This arrangement was also followed by
Matsumoto & Morozumi (1980: 19). The genus Lewyites Matsumoto & Miyauchi, 1984
(type species [diohamites (?) oronensis Lewy, 1969) may possibly also be included as a
subgenus in Pseudoxybeloceras.
Subgenus Pseudoxybeloceras (Pseudoxybeloceras) Wright & Matsumoto, 1954
Type species
Hamites quadrinodosus Jimbo, 1894 by original designation of Wright & Matsumoto
(1954: 119). $
Diagnosis
Straight or curved shafts connected by U-bends. Ribbing uniform throughout. Initial
ornament may consist of ventral tubercles on ribs only, but soon changes to ventral and
ventrolateral on every rib.
Occurrence
The subgenus has been recorded from the upper Turonian to possibly Maastrichtian
with records from Austria, Germany, France, Romania, Pondoland, KwaZulu,
Madagascar, New Zealand, U.S. Western Interior, California, British Columbia, Alaska,
Hokkaido and Saghalien.
Pseudoxybeloceras (Pseudoxybeloceras) quadrinodosum (Jimbo, 1894)
Figs 60D, 62
1894 Hamites quadrinodosus Jimbo, p. 39, pl. 7 (figs 3-4).
IQ Hamites amapondensis Van Hoepen, p. 15, pl. 3 (figs 5—6), text-fig. 9.
1921b Oxybeloceras? cf. quadrinodosum (Jimbo); Spath, p. 50, pl. 7 (figs 2a—b).
1954 Pseudoxybeloceras quadrinodosum (Jimbo); Wright & Matsumoto, p. 120, pl. 7 (fig. 6),
text-figs 6, 9-12.
1974 Pseudoxybeloceras quadrinodosum (Jimbo); Szasz, p. 193, pl. | (figs 1-4), pl. 2
(figs 1-3), pl. 3 (fig. 1), text-fig. 2.
1976 Pseudoxybeloceras sp. A. Klinger, p. 77, pl. 34 (fig. la—b).
OTT Pseudoxybeloceras quadrinodosum (Jimbo); Matsumoto, p. 345, pl. 57 (fig. 2), pl. 61
(fig. 4).
OWT Pseudoxybeloceras quadrinodosum (Jimbo); Ward & Mallory, p. 611, text-fig. 2.
1982 Pseudoxybeloceras quadrinodosum (Jimbo); Szasz, p. 49, pl. 2 (figs 2a—b), pl. 3
(ie 3a=b))e
1994 Pseudoxybeloceras amapondense van Hoepen; Cooper, (figs lh, 2).
320 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 62
Pseudoxybeloceras (Pseudoxybeloceras) quadrinodosum (Jimbo, 1894). SAM—PCP 18744 (ex Cape of
Good Hope Geological Commission collection). From an unspecified horizon at the type section of the
Mzamba Formation at the Mzamba River Estuary, Eastern Cape Province, locality 1, upper Santonian or
lower Campanian. X 0.7.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 521
Type
Lectotype by subsequent designation of Wright & Matsumoto (1954: 120) is the
specimen figured by Jimbo (1894, pl. 7 (fig. 3)), housed in the collections of the
University Museum, University of Tokyo, nr MM7524—1 from the Santonian?—
Campanian of the Chiptanshibets on the Tumbets River, Kitami Province, Hokkaido.
Material
SAM-—PCP 18744 and SAM-—P 1411, both from an unspecified horizon at locality 1, the
type section of the Mzamba Formation at the Mzamba River Estuary, Pondoland, Eastern
Cape Province, Mzamba Formation, probably Santonian III.
Description
The larger of the two specimens, SAM—PCP18744 (Fig. 62), consists of two straight
shafts, connected by an open U-bend, such that they are not strictly parallel, but slightly
divergent. This appears to be the specimen from the Geological Survey, Cape Town,
mentioned by Spath (19215: 51) and refigured by Cooper (1994, fig. 2).
The whorl section is oval, higher than wide, with a rounded dorsum and flanks, but
flattened in the intertubercular area over the venter and the ventrolateral third. Maximum
width is at mid-flank. Ornament consists of fine, single ribs, each bearing four rows of
small, pointed tubercles; one pair on the venter and the other at the ventrolateral third of
the flanks. Ribbing on both shafts 1s prorsiradiate, but the degree of inclination and density
varies slightly. At the smaller end there are 9 distinctly prorsiradiate ribs per whorl height;
at the biggest end there are nearly 12 rectiradiate ribs per whorl height. Towards, and in
the bend, ribbing changes from rectiradiate to rursiradiate.
The smaller specimen, SAM—P 1411 (Fig. 60D), is slightly curved, and shows irregular
development of the ventrolateral row of tubercles. These only occur on alternate ribs and
are irregularly displaced on either side.
Discussion
The smaller specimen (Fig. 60D) was originally identified as Pseudoxybeloceras? sp. A
by Klinger (1976: 77) because of the irregular tuberculation. However, seen in association
with the adult specimen, it seems that this feature is merely part of the juvenile
ornamentation. In the most comprehensive discussion of P. (P.) quadrinodosum so far,
Matsumoto (1977: 345-347) also describes the early ornament. Here, however, the
bituberculate stage passes directly to the quadrituberculate stage without intermediary
bituberculate ribs as in the Pondoland specimen. The early stages of P. (P.) quadrinodosum
thus show a combination of Parasolenoceras (type species Parasolenoceras splendens
Collignon 1969: 44, pl. 530 (fig. 2087)) and Christophoceras (type species Christopho-
ceras ramboulai Collignon 1969: 47, pl. 531 (fig. 2093)) features and further support our
view that these could be included as subgenera of Pseudoxybeloceras; as also suggested
by Matsumoto & Morozumi (1980: 19) and tentatively by Ward & Mallory (1977: 611)
(as Cyphoceras Ward & Mallory, 1977) and most recently by Wright (1997: 253).
Hamites amapondensis Van Hoepen (1921: 15, pl. 3 (figs 5-6), text-fig. 9) is a clear
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
322
€9 ANSI
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 323
synonym of P. (P.) quadrinodosum, as Van Hoepen (1921: 16) had tentatively suggested.
Differences quoted by him, e.g. details of the suture line, rib density and whorl section are
all within the limits of intraspecific and ontogenetic variation.
Oxybeloceras? ct. quadrinodosum in Spath (19216: 50, pl. 7 (fig. 2a—b)) with ventral
tubercles only, is merely a juvenile of P. quadrinodosum as shown by the descriptions of
Matsumoto (1977).
Occurrence
So far none of the Pondoland specimens have been accurately localized, but they
probably occur in the upper Santonian. In Romania, Szasz (1974, 1982) records the
species from the upper Campanian. The Japanese specimens are probably of Santonian
age, but could be Campanian (Matsumoto 1977: 346). This seems to indicate a Santonian
to Campanian age for the species in Japan, Romania and Pondoland.
Pseudoxybeloceras (Pseudoxybeloceras) matsumotoi Collignon, 1965
Fig. 63A—B
1965 Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon, p. 12, pl. 419 (fig. 1731).
1965 Diplomoceras (Glyptoxoceras) subcompressum Forbes; Collignon, p. 13, pl. 419
(fig. 1732).
1976 Pseudoxybeloceras (Pseudoxybeloceras) matsumotoi Collignon; Klinger, p. 76, pl. 33
(fig. 6).
2003 Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi Collignon; Klinger & Kennedy (This volume 110 (5)),
p. 199, figs 1-10.
Type
Lectotype designated by Klinger & Kennedy (2003: 214) is the specimen figured in
Collignon (1965, pl. 419 (fig. 1731)) GD11731 from the lower or middle Coniacian of
Beantaly (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar.
Material
SAM—PCZ18747 (ex SAS—92/1) from bed 1 at locality 92, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Fig. 63 (see facing page). A-B. Pseudoxybeloceras (Pseudoxybeloceras) matsumotoi Collignon, 1965.
A. SAM-—PCZ18747 (ex 92/1) from locality 92, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II. Note
the distinct spatulate endings of the spines. B. NMUB—PCZ18743 from locality 145, KwaZulu,
St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II. C-E. Neocrioceras (Schlueterella) compressum Klinger, 1976.
Natal Museum, Durban collections, the original of Spath’s (19216: 52, pl. 7 (Figs 6a-c))
Neocrioceras cf. spinigerum, and the ‘genotype’ of Neocrioceras sensu Spath (19216: 51) from an
unspecified horizon at the type locality of the Mzamba Formation, Mzamba River Estuary, Eastern
Cape Province, locality 1, upper Santonian or lower Campanian. F. Eubostrychoceras
(Eubostrychoceras) zulu sp. nov. SAM—PCZ 18709, a paratype from locality 72, St Lucia Formation,
Coniacian II. A-E X 1; F x 2.
324 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Formation, Coniacian H; NMB-—PCZ18743 from locality 145, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian II.
Description
The specimen originally figured by Klinger (1976, pl. 33 (fig. 6)) is here refigured
(Fig. 63A) to show the spatulate shape of the hollow spines, where preserved. The other
specimen, NUB-—PCZ18743 (Fig. 63B) is virtually identical to the lectotype. The whorl
section 1s elliptical (Wb:Wh = 21.5:30.4 (0.71)). Ornament consists of predominantly
single, radial ribs, numbering about 8 or 9 per whorl height. Each bears a small pair of
ventrolateral, radially elongated tubercles and a larger pair of ventral tubercles. As
mentioned above, in shelly preservation these bear long, spatulate, hollow spines.
Discussion
Hollow spines are rarely preserved in heteromorphs. These may be quite variable, but
are generally pointed and sealed off from the rest of the shell by a convex septum.
Spatulate spines that are somewhat similar to those of P. (P.) matsumotoi have been
observed in Hyphantoceras (H.) reussianum (see e.g. Metzdorf 1992, pl. 1 (figs 7—8)) and
P. (P.) aff. lineatum Un: Olivero 1988, fig. 3C—D).
A full discussion of the ontogeny, shell structure and differential preservation of
internal moulds of the phragmocone and body chamber respectively in P. matsumotoi is
given by Klinger & Kennedy (This volume 110 (5)).
Occurrence
Rare in Coniacian II of KwaZulu, common in the lower and middle Coniacian of
Madagascar.
Genus Spiroxybeloceras Kennedy & Cobban, 1999
Type species
Ptychoceras meekanum Whitfield, 1877: 44, illustrated by Whitfield 1880, pl. 16
(figs 1-2) from the Pierre Shale, Wyoming, by original designation of Kennedy & Cobban
(1999: 74).
Diagnosis
Early stage loose, planispiral, followed by two parallel shafts barely in contact.
Ornament consists of narrow, sharp ribs that bear small pointed tubercles on the venter.
Discussion
There is some confusion about the validity of three genera with very similar adult
stages: Solenoceras Conrad, 1860 (type species Hamites annulifer Morton, 1841: 109),
Oxybeloceras Hyatt, 1900 (type species Ptychoceras crassum Whitfield, 1880: 459) and
Spiroxybeloceras Kennedy & Cobban, 1999 (type species Ptychoceras meekanum
Whitfield, 1877). According to Kennedy & Cobban (1993a: 142), Solenoceras and
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA Sy4g)
Oxybeloceras differ in that: (1) “Solenoceras consists of two straight parallel shafts,
lacking the initial planispire of Oxybeloceras’; (2) Solenoceras has ‘the shafts closely
adpressed for all their length’; (3) ‘constrictions with associated flared ribs occur on the
body chamber and phragmocone’; (4) ‘The ribs bearing tubercles are weaker than in
Oxybeloceras and the tubercles may efface’.
Spiroxybeloceras is similar to Solenoceras, but differs in having an early ontogenetic
stage consisting of a loose planispiral growth stage, followed by two parallel shafts barely
in contact. Solenoceras, in contrast, has an early ontogenetic stage consisting of an
ammonitella, followed by a straight shaft which is impressed in a second, parallel shaft.
Occurrence
Solenoceras s.1. occurs in the upper Campanian and lower Maastrichtian, and has been
recorded from the Gulf Coast regions of the USA, Angola, Nigeria, Egypt, the Middle
East, Spain, Madagascar, KwaZulu and Japan.
Spiroxybeloceras minimus (Basse, 1931)
Fig. 64
1931 Hamites (Ptychoceras) minimus Basse, p. 17, pl. 1 (figs 20-22).
V3 Hamites (Ptychoceras) cf. Humei Douvillé; Basse, p. 18, pl. 6 (figs 9-10).
OT Solenoceras sp. cf. texanum (Shumard); Klinger, p. 77, pl. 34 (fig. 7).
Type
Lectotype here designated is the specimen figured by Basse (1931, pl. 1 (figs 20—22))
from Andrafiavelo, Madagascar.
Material
SAM—PCZ17365 (ex SAS—A2083), probably from locality 119, KwaZulu, St Lucia
Formation, Maastrichtian a or b. SAM—PCZ7899, SAM—PCZ7900a, b, SAM—PCZ18745-6,
SAM-—PCZ9890, all from locality 119, KwaZulu, St Lucia Formation, Maastrichtian a or b.
Description
The new material shows the early criocone whorls of the species. Unfortunately these
are only preserved as imprints or incomplete secondary infillings. The rest of the shell
consists of two slightly curved shafts. The smaller is distinctly impressed into the dorsum
of the larger. Ornament consists of fine, sharp-crested ribs. In the curved section
connecting the two shafts, the ribs are interrupted over the venter and end in a pair of small
ventrolateral tubercles. On the rest of the shell, the ribs are continuous over the venter.
Minute tubercles can be seen under oblique lighting on the body chamber shaft.
The species is very small—the total length of the final shaft is 30 mm or less. The mode
of occurrence of the material is of interest. One of the specimens, SAM—PCZ7899 is
situated in part of the body chamber of Nostoceras (Bostrychoceras) sanctaeluciense. In
the nodule SAM—PCZ18745-—6, at least seven specimens are visible.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
326
vy X J-d:1 X H-D ‘7 X I‘O-V “4-q WI sjioym AyIe9 9UODO0LI9 ‘uado
of} SION “q JO & URNYOINseeYy ‘UONeWIO, elon] 1S ‘njnzemy
x9) S9ELIZOd-WVS “D “SPL81ZOd -WVS ‘A
d
0686Z0d
“WYVS *D 8006LZ0d-WYVS ‘a-V
p9 dINST
°
“61 Alfeoo] Woy [TV ‘9PL8IZOd-NVS ‘I ‘Q006LZId-WVS ‘H (€807V
(TE6I ‘osseg) snunuru spsazo0jaqaxosdsy
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA S27,
Discussion
The presence of early criocone whorls, first suggested by Whitfield (1892: 273) and
substantiated by Lewy (1967: 170, pl. 3 (figs 1-2)) in Spiroxybeloceras humei humei
(Douvillé, 1929) is further confirmed by the present material.
Klinger (1976: 77) initially identified a single specimen of this genus as Solenoceras sp.
cf. texanum and distinguished it from S. minimus (Basse, 1931) on account of the denser
ribbing of the latter. Basse’s figures (1931, pl. 1 (fig. 20-22)) show very fine tubercles on
the final shaft, similar to those in SAM—PCZ7900a. The small size, the impression of the
first shaft into the dorsum of the second, and the very fine ventral tuberculation on the
final shaft are characteristic of the species.
It is difficult to separate all known species of Spiroxybeloceras satisfactorily. Perhaps
because of their small size, individuals are not very common in collections. In addition,
complete specimens are rare. S. texanum (Shumard) (1861: 190) (see Stephenson 1941:
399, pl. 77 (figs 4-5), pl. 79 (figs 1-4)) with which our KwaZulu material had previously
been tentatively identified, has very distinct ventral tubercles and is easily separated.
Occurrence
Lower Maastrichtian, Madagascar and KwaZulu.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Financial assistance to Klinger from the Foundation for Research and Development,
South Africa, the Service de cooperation et d’action culturelle, France for travelling and
subsistence costs in Dijon in 1999, and the Oppenheimer Fund (Oxford University, U.K.)
during his stay in Oxford in 2000, and to Kennedy from the trustees of the Sir Henry
Strakosh Bequest, Royal Society and Natural Environment Research Council (U.K.) is
gratefully acknowledged. Dr J.-H. Delance (Dijon) kindly allowed access to the General
M. Collignon collection and loan of material. Some of the Madagascan material
illustrated here was donated to H. Klinger by General M. Collignon during his visit to
Moirans in 1974. We thank Samantha Black, Ingrid Klinger and Kerwin van Willingh
(South African Museum) and the Department of Earth Sciences (Oxford) for technical
assistance.
We are grateful to the numerous colleagues who have supplied us with literature,
material, photographs and advice. We specially thank Drs W.A.Cobban and
N. Landman, and Neal and Peter Larson.
SAG) ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REFERENCES
ALABUSHEV, A. & WIEDMANN, J. 1997. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from southern Sakhalin and
northwestern Kamchatka (North-east Russia). Palaeontographica 244A: 1-36.
ANDERSON, F. M. 1958. Upper Cretaceous of the Pacific coast. Memoirs. Geological Society of
America 71: |—378.
BASSE, E. 1931. Monographie paléontologique du Crétacé de la province de Maintirano Madagascar.
Memoires géologiques du Service des Mines, Madagascar 1931: 1-86.
BLASZKIEWICZ, A. 1980. Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites of the middle Vistula River
valley, Poland: a stratigraphic-paleontological study. Prace Instytutu Geologicznego 92: 1-63.
BOULE, M., LEMOINE, P. & THEVENIN, A. 1906-1907. Paléontologie de Madagascar: III.
Céphalopodes crétacés des environs de Diego-Suarez. Annales de Paléontologie 1: 173-192 (1-20);
2(1): 1-56 (21-70).
BRUNNSCHWEILER, R. O. 1966. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from the Carnarvon Basin of Western
Australia: I. The heteromorph Lytoceratina. Bulletin. Bureau of Mineral Resources, Geology and
Geophysics, Australia 58:1—58.
COBBAN, W. A. 1974. Ammonites from the Navesink Formation at Atlantic Highlands, New Jersey.
Professional Papers. United States Geological Survey 845: |—21.
COBBAN, W.A. 1987. The Upper Cretaceous ammonite Eubostrychoceras Matsumoto in the Western
Interior of the United States. Bulletin. United States Geological Survey 1690: Al—AS.
COBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1991. Upper Cretaceous (Maastrichtian) ammonites from the
Nostoceras alternatum zone in southwestern Arkansas. Bulletin. United States Geological Survey.
Shorter Contributions to Paleontology and Stratigraphy 1985: E1—E6.
COBBAN, W. A., KENNEDY, W. J. & SCOTT, G. R. 1997. Didymoceras puebloense, a new species of
heteromorph ammonite from the Upper Campanian of Colorado and Wyoming. Geobios 30 (2):
225-230.
COBBAN, W. A. & SCOTT, G. R. 1972. Stratigraphy and ammonite fauna of the Graneros Shale and
Greenhorn Limestone near Pueblo, Colorado. Professional Papers. United States Geological Survey
645: i-v, 1-108.
COLLIGNON, M. 1932. Paléontologie de Madagascar: XVII. Fossiles du Crétacé supérieur du
Menabe. Annales de Paléontologie 21: 35-87.
COLLIGNON, M. 1965. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites). XIII.
Coniacien. Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1969. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites). XV.
Campanien inferieur. Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1970. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) XVI.
Campanien moyen—Campanien supérieur. Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1971. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites). XVII.
Maestrichtien. Tananarive: Service Géologique.
CONRAD, T. A. 1860. Descriptions of new species of Cretaceous and Eocene fossils of Mississippi and
Alabama. Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia (2) 4: 275-298.
CONRAD, T. A. 1868. Synopsis of the invertebrate fossils of the Cretaceous Formations in New Jersey.
In: COOK, G. H. ed. Geology of New Jersey: 721-732. Newark: New Jersey Geological Survey.
COOPER, M. R. 1994. Towards a phylogenetic classification of the Cretaceous ammonites. IV.
Phlycticriocerataceae. Abhandlungen. Neues Jahrbuch ftir Geologie und Paldontologie 194 (2-3):
361-378.
COOPER, M. R. & McCARTHY, M. J. 1998. The Cainozoic palaeontology and stratigraphy of
KwaZulu-Natal. Part 2. Stratigraphy of the Uloa Group. Durban Museum Novitates 23: 3-28.
DEFRANCE, M. J. L. 1816. Baculite. In: Dictionnaire des sciences naturelles 3, Supplement, 159-160.
DIENER, C. VON. 1925. Ammonoidea Neocretacea. Fossilium Catalogus (1: Animalia) 29: 1-244.
DOUVILLE, H. 1929. Les Ammonites de la Craie supérieur en Egypte et au Sinai. Mémoires de
l’Académie des Sciences de I’Institut de France 60 (1) [for 1928]: 1-44.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 329
FAVRE, E. 1869. Description des Mollusques fossiles de la craie des environs de Lemberg en Galicie.
Geneve, Bale: H. Georg. I — XII: 1-187.
FORBES, E. 1846. Report on the fossil Invertebrata from Southern India, collected by Mr Kaye and
Mr Cunliffe. Transactions of the Geological Society of London (2) 7 (3); 97-174.
GILL, T. 1871. Arrangement of the families of mollusks. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections 227:
1i-xvi, 1-49.
GILL, J. R. & COBBAN, W. A. 1973. Stratigraphy and geologic history of the Montana Group and
equivalent rocks, Montana, Wyoming, and North and South Dakota. Professional Papers. United
States Geological Survey 776: \1—37. |
HANCOCK, J. M. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1993. The high Cretaceous ammonite fauna from Tercis,
Landes, France. Bulletin de I|'Institut Royal des sciences naturelles de Belgique (Sciences de la
Terre). Bulletin van het koninklijk Belgisch Instituut voor Natuurwetenschapppen
(Aardwetenschappen) 63: 149-209.
HENDERSON, R. A., KENNEDY, W. J. & MCNAMARA, K. J. 1992. Maastrichtian heteromorph
ammonites from the Carnarvon Basin, Western Australia. A/cheringa 16: 133-170.
HOEPEN, E. C. N. VAN. 1921. Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Pondoland. Annals of the Transvaal
Museum 8 (1): 1-48.
HOWARTH, M. K. 1965. Cretaceous ammonites and nautiloids from Angola. Bulletin of the British
Museum (Natural History) (Geology) 10 (10): 337-412.
HYATT, A. 1894. Phylogeny of an acquired characteristic. Proceedings of the American Philosophical
Society 32 (143) [for 1893]: 349-647.
HYATT, A. 1900. Cephalopoda. pp 502-604. Jn: ZITTEL, K.A. VON, (Ed). Textbook of Paleontology.
London & New York: Macmillan. [trans]. C.R. EASTMAN]
IMMEL, H. 1987. Die Kreideammoniten der nordlichen Kalkalpen. Zitteliana 15: 3-163.
IMMEL, H., KLINGER, H. C. & WIEDMANN, J. 1982. Die Cephalopoden des Unteren Santon der
Gosau von Brandenberg/Tirol, Osterreich. Zitteliana 8: 3-32.
JIMBO, K. 1894. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Fauna der Kreideformation von Hokkaido.
Palaeontologische Abhandlungen (Neue Folge) 2 (3): 149-194.
KAPLAN, U. & SCHMID, F. 1988. Die heteromorphen Ammoniten der Gattungen Eubostrychoceras
and Hyphantoceras aus dem Turon NW-Deutschlands. Geologie und Paldontologie in Westfalen 12:
47-87.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1986. Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites from northern Aquitaine, France.
Special Papers in Palaeontology 36: 1-145.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1987. The ammonite fauna of the type Maastrichtian with a revision of Ammonites
colligatus Binkhorst, 1861. Bulletin de I’Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique.
(Sciences de la Terre). Bulletin van het koninklijk Belgisch Instituut voor Natuurwetenschappen
(Aardwetenschappen) 56: 151—267. (Dated 1986.)
KENNEDY, W. J. 1992a. In: KENNEDY, W. J., HANSOTTE, M., BILOTTE, M. & BURNETT, J.
Ammonites and nannofossils from the Campanian of Nalzen (Ariége, France). Geobios 25 (2):
263-278.
KENNEDY, W. J. 19926. In: FOLLMI, K. B., GARRISON, R. E., RAMIREZ, P. C., ZAMBRANO-
ORTIZ, F., KENNEDY, W. J. & LEHNER, B. L. Cyclic phosphate-rich successions in the Upper
Cretaceous of Colombia. Palaeogeography, Palaeoclimatology, Palaeoecology 93: 151-182.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1995. In: KENNEDY, W. J., BILOTTE, M. & MELCHIOR, P. Ammonite faunas,
biostratigraphy and sequence stratigraphy of the Coniacian—Santonian of the Corbieres (NE
Pyrénées). Bulletin du Centre de Recherches Elf Exploration Production 19 (2): 377-499.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1999. In: FATMI, A. N. & KENNEDY, W. J. Maastrichtian ammonites from
Balochistan, Pakistan. Journal of Paleontology 73 (4): 641-662.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 1991a. Upper Cretaceous (Upper Santonian) Boehmoceras
fauna from the Gulf Coast region of the United States. Geological Magazine 128: 167-189.
KENNEDY, W.J. & COBBAN, W.A. 1991b. Coniacian ammonite faunas from the United States
Western Interior. Special Papers in Palaeontology 45: 5—96.
330 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 1993a. Upper Campanian ammonites from the Ozan-Annona
Formation boundary in southwestern Arkansas. Bulletin of the Geological Society of Denmark 40:
115-148.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 19936. Campanian ammonites from the Annona Chalk near
Yancy, Arkansas. Journal of Paleontology 67 (1): 83-97.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 1993c. Ammonites from the Saratoga Chalk (Upper
Cretaceous), Arkansas. Journal of Paleontology 67 (3): 404-434.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 1999. Campanian (Late Cretaceous) ammonites from the
Bergstrom Formation in Central Texas. Acta geologica Polonica 49 (1): 67-80.
KENNEDY, W. J.. COBBAN, W. A. & LANDMAN, N. H. 1999. The heteromorph ammonite
Didymoceras cochleatum (Meek & Hayden, 1858), from the Pierre Shale of South Dakota and
Wyoming. American Museum Novitates 3268: |-8.
KENNEDY, W. J., COBBAN, W. A. & SCOTT, G. R. 2000. Heteromorph ammonites from the Upper
Campanian (Upper Cretaceous) Baculites cuneatus and Baculites reesidei zones of the Pierre Shale
in Colorado, USA. Acta geologica Polonica 50 (1): 1-20.
KENNEDY, W. J. & HENDERSON, R. A. 1992. Heteromorph ammonites from the Upper
Maastrichtian of Pondicherry, South India. Palaeontology 35 (3): 693-731.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa.
Introduction, Stratigraphy. Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History) (Geology) 25 (4):
263-315.
KENNEDY, W. J., LANDMAN, N. H. & COBBAN, W. A. 2001. Santonian ammonites from the
Blossom Sand in northeast Texas. American Museum Novitates 3332: 1-9.
KENNEDY, W. J., LANDMAN, N. H., COBBAN, W. A. & SCOTT, G. R. 2000. Late Campanian
(Cretaceous) heteromorph ammonites from the Western Interior of the United States. Bulletin.
American Museum of Natural History 251: 1-88.
KENNEDY, W. J. & SUMMESBERGER, H. 1987. Lower Maastrichtian ammonites from Nagoryany
(Ukrainian SSR). Beitrdge zur Paldontologie von Osterreich. 13: 25-78.
KILIAN, W. & REBOUL, P. 1909. Les céphalopodes néocrétacés des iles Seymour et Snow Hill.
Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der Schwedischen Sudpolar-Expedition, 1901—1903 3 (6): 1-75.
KLINGER, H. C. 1976. Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites from Zululand. Memoirs. Geological
Survey, Republic of South Africa 69: 1-142.
KLINGER, H. C. 1982. Revision of Ancyloceras bipunctatum Schliiter, 1872 (Cephalopoda,
Ammonoidea) and discussion of the validity, phylogeny and limits of the genus Neancyloceras
Spath, 1926. Annals of the South African Museum 90 (5): 219-239.
KLINGER, H. C. 1985. Upper Cretaceous Cephalopoda from offshore deposits of the Natal South
Coast, South Africa. Palaeontologia africana 26 (1): 1-12.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1997. On the affinities of Madagascarites andimakensis
Collignon, 1966, and allied Upper Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites. Annals of the South African
Museum 105: 227-247.
KLINGER H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 2001. Stratigraphic and geographic distribution, phylogenetic
trends and general comments on the ammonite family Baculitidae Gill, 1871 (with an annotated list
of species referred to the family). Annals of the South African Museum 107 (1): 1-290.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 2003. Observations on the systematics, geographic and
stratigraphic distribution, and origin of Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816)
(Cephalopoda: Ammonoidea). Annals of the South African Museum 110(4): 171-198.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 2003. Observations on Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi
Collignon, 1965 (Cephalopoda, Ammonoidea). Ontogeny, shell structure, differential preservation
and intraspecific variation. Annals of the South African Museum 110(5): 199-218.
KOSSMAT, F. 1895-98. Untersuchungen tber die Siidindische Kreideformation. Beitrage zur
Paldontologie Osterreich-Ungarns und des Orients 9 (1895): 97-203 (1-107); 11 (1897a): 1-46
(108-153); 11 (1898): 89-152 (154-217).
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA Bei)
KUCHLER, T. 2000. Nostoceras (Euskadiceras) euskadiense a new ammonite subgenus and species
from the higher Upper Campanian (Upper Cretaceous) of northern Spain. Berliner
Geowissenschaftliche Abhandlungen E34: 291-307.
KUCHLER, T. & ODIN, G. 2001. Upper Campanian—Maastrichtian ammonites (Nostoceratidae,
Diplomoceratidae) from Tercis les Bains (Landes, France). Jn: ODIN, G. S. ed. The
Campanian—Maastrichtian boundary D4e: 500-528.
KULLMANN, J. & WIEDMANN, J. 1970. Significance of sutures in phylogeny of Ammonoidea.
Paleontological Contributions. University of Kansas 47: 1-32.
LEWY, Z. 1967. Some Late Campanian nostoceratid ammonites from southern Israel. /srael Journal of -
Earth Sciences 16: 165-173.
LEWY, Z. 1969. Late Campanian heteromorph ammonites from southern Israel. Israel Journal of Earth
Sciences 18: 109-135.
LEWY, Z. 1983. A well-preserved Upper Santonian heteromorph ammonite from Israel. Current
Research. Geological Survey of Israel 1982, 1983: 24-27.
MACHALSKI, M. 1996. Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816); a typically Maastrichtian
ammonite in the Piotrawin section, Central Poland. Przeglad Geologiczny 44: 953-954.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1938. Preliminary notes on some of the more important fossils among the
Gosyonoure fauna. Jn: MATSUMOTO, T. Geology of Gosyonoura Islands, Amakusa, with special
reference to the Cretaceous Stratigraphy. Journal of the Geological Society of Japan 45: 12-24.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1959. Upper Cretaceous Ammonites of California. Pt I. Memoirs of the Faculty of
Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 8 (4): 91-171.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1967. Evolution of the Nostoceratidae (Cretaceous heteromorph ammonoids).
Memoirs of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 18 (2): 331-347.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1977. Some heteromorph ammonites from the Cretaceous of Hokkaido. Memoirs of
the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 23(3): 303-366.
MATSUMOTO, T. 1984. An aberrant ammonite genus from the Cretaceous of Hokkaido. Proceedings
of the Japan Academy (Series B) 60 (9): 341-344.
MATSUMOTO, T. & KANIE, Y. 1967. Ainoceras, a new heteromorph ammonoid genus from the
Upper Cretaceous of Hokkaido. Memoirs of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (Series D,
Geology) 18 (2): 349-359.
MATSUMOTO, T. & MIYAUCHI, T. 1984. Some Campanian ammonites from the Soya area. /n:
MATSUMOTO, T. Some ammonites from the Campanian (Upper Cretaceous) of northern
Hokkaido, part II. Special Papers. Palaeontological Society of Japan 27: 33-76.
MATSUMOTO, T. & MOROZUMI, Y. 1980. Late Cretaceous ammonites from the Izumi Mountains,
southwest Japan. Bulletin of the Osaka Museum of Natural History 33: \—31.
MATSUMOTO, T. Jn: MATSUMOTO, T., MURAMOTO, K., TAKAHASHI, T., YAMASHITA, M.
& KAWASHITA, Y. 1986. On Neocrioceras spinigerum (Jimbo), a species of Cretaceous
heteromorph ammonoids (studies of the Cretaceous ammonites from Hokkaido-LV). Transactions
and Proceedings of the Palaeontological Society of Japan (N.S.) 143: 463-474.
MATSUMOTO, T. & OBATA, I. 1981. A new heteromorph ammonite from Hokkaido in the collection
of Yoshitaro Kawashita. Bulletin of the National Science Museum (of Tokyo) (C) 7 (3): 115-118.
MEEK, F. B. & HAYDEN, F. V. 1857. Descriptions of new species of Gasteropoda and Cephalopoda
from the Cretaceous formations of Nebraska Territory. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia 8 [for 1856]: 70-72.
MEEK, F. B. & HAYDEN, F. V. 1859. Descriptions of new organic remains collected in Nebraska
Territory in the year 1857, by Dr. F.V. Hayden, geologist to the exploring expedition under the
command of Lieut. G.K. Warren, Top. Engr. U.S. Army, together with some remarks on the geology
of the Black Hills and portions of the surrounding country. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia (1858) 10: 41-59.
IS ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
METZDORE, R. 1992. Die innerartliche Variatsionsbreite von Hyphantoceras reussianum (d’Orbigny,
1850) aus dem Bereich des Hyphantoceras-Event (Ober-Turonium) von Halle/Westf. und dem
Ostwestfalendamm (Bielefeld). Berichte des Naturwissenschaftlichen Vereins Bielefeld und
Umgegend 34 (1993): 177-215.
MIKHAILOV, N. P. 1951. Verkhnemelovye ammonity yuga evropejsko] chasti SSSR 1 ikh znachenie
dlya zonal’noj stratigrafi. Trudy Instituta geologicheskih nauk. Akademiya Nauk (Geologicheskaya
seriya 50) 129: 1-143 + 3 pp. [In Russian]
MOBERG, J. C. 1885. Cephaloderna i Sveriges Kritsystem. Hl. Artbeskrifning. Sveriges geologiska
undersoknung. Afhandlingar och uppsatser (series C) 73: 1—64.
MOROZUML, Y. 1985. Late Cretaceous (Campanian and Maastrichtian) ammonites from Awaji Island,
Southwest Japan. Bulletin of the Osaka Museum of Natural History 39: \—58.
MORTON, S. G. 1841. Description of several new species of fossil shells from the Cretaceous deposits
of the United States. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 1 {for 1841}:
106-110.
MORTON, S. G. 1842. Description of some new species of organic remains of the Cretaceous Group of
the United States; with a tabular view of fossils hitherto discovered in this formation. Proceedings of
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 8: 207-227.
MULLER, G. & WOLLEMANN, A. 1906. Die Molluskenfauna des Untersenon von Braunschweig und
Ilsede: 2. Die Cephalopoden. Abhandlungen der Koniglichen Preussischen Geologischen
Landsanstalt (Neue Folge) 47: 1-30.
NOWAK, J. 1916. Uber die bifiden Loben der oberkretazischen Ammoniten und ihre Bedeutung fiir die
Systematik. Bulletin international de |’Academie des sciences et des lettres de Cracovie (Classe des
Sciences mathématiques et naturelles) (B) 1915: 1-13.
OKAMOTO, T. 1988. Analysis of heteromorph ammonoids by differential geometry. Palaeontology 33
(1): 35-52.
OLIVERO, E. B. 1988. Early Campanian heteromorph ammonites from James Ross Island, Antarctica.
National Geographic Research 4 (2): 259-271.
ORBIGNY, A. D’. 1850. Prodrome de Paléontologie stratigraphique universelle des animaux
mollusques et rayonnes 2. Paris: Masson.
REYMENT, R. A. 1955. The Cretaceous Ammonoidea of Nigeria and the southern Cameroons.
Bulletin. Geological Survey of Nigeria 25: 1-112.
ROEMER, F. A. 1841. Die Versteinerungen des norddeutschen Kreidegebirges. Hannover: Hahn.
SCHLUTER, C. 1871-76. Cephalopoden der oberen deutschen Kreide. Palaeontographica 21: 1-24
(1871); 21: 25-120 (1872); 24: 1-144 (1876).
SCOTT, G. R. & COBBAN, W. A. 1965. Geologic and biostratigraphic map of the Pierre Shale between
Jarre Creek and Loveland, Colorado. Miscellaneous Geologic Investigations (n.s.) Map 1-439
SHUMARD, B. F. 1861. Descriptions of new Cretaceous fossils from Texas. Transactions of the
Academy of Science of St. Louis 1 (4) [for 1860]: 590-610.
SPATH, L. F. 1921a. On Cretaceous cephalopoda from Zululand. Annals of the South African Museum
12: 217-321.
SPATH, L. F. 19216. On Upper Cretaceous Ammonoidea from Pondoland. Annals of the Durban
Museum 3 (2): 39-56.
SPATH, L. F. 1925. On Senonian Ammonoidea from Jamaica. Geological Magazine 62 (1): 28-32.
SPATH, L. F. 1926. On new ammonites from the English Chalk. Geological Magazine 63 (2): 77-83.
SPATH, L. F. 1953. The Upper Cretaceous cephalopod fauna of Graham Land. Scientific Report.
British Antarctic Survey 3: 1-60.
STEPHENSON, L. W. 1941. The larger invertebrate fossils of the Navarro Group of Texas. Bulletin.
University of Texas, Austin 4101: 1-641.
STOLICZKA, F. 1863-66. 1866. The fossil Cephalopoda of the Cretaceous rocks of Southern India.
Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, Palaeontologia indica (3) 1: 41-56 (1863); 2-5
(57-106) (1864); 6-9: 107-154 (1865); 10-13: 155-216 (1866).
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA 333
SUMMESBERGER, H. 1979. Eine obersantone Ammonitenfauna aus dem Becken von Gosau
(OberOsterreich). Annalen des Naturhistorischen Museums in Wien 82: 109-176.
SUMMESBERGER, H. 1980. Neue Ammoniten aus der Sandkalkbank der Hochmoosschichten
(Obersanton; Gosau, Osterreich). Annalen des Naturhistorischen Museums in Wien 83: 275-283.
SZASZ, L. 1974. Pseudoxybeloceras quadrinodosum (Jimbo) (Ammonoidea) in Campanianul Superior
de la Ponor (Zona Pui, Carpatii Meridionali). /nstitutul de Geologie si Geofizica. Dari de Seama ale
sedintelor 60: 191-198.
SZASZ, L. 1982. Les Ammonites hétéromorphes campaniennes des Carpates méridionales
(Roumanie). /nstitutul de Geologie si Geofizica. Dari de Seama ale sedintelor 66 [for 1979]: 45—56.
TANABE, K., OBATA, I. & FUTAKAMI, M. 1981. Early shell morphology in some Upper Cretaceous
heteromorph ammonites. Transactions and Proceedings of the Palaeontological Society of Japan
(N.S.) 124: 215-234.
TOKUNAGA, S. & SHIMIZU, S. 1926. The Cretaceous formation of Futaba in Iwaki and its fossils.
Journal of the Faculty of Science, Imperial University of Tokyo, Section II. Geology, Mineralogy,
Geography, Seismology 1: 181-212.
TUOMEY, M. 1851. Description of some new fossils from the Cretaceous rocks of the southern States.
Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 7 (5) [for 1855]: 167-172.
WARD, P. D. 1976. Upper Cretaceous ammonites (Santonian—Campanian) from Orcas Island,
Washington. Journal of Paleontology 50 (3): 454-461.
WARD, P. D. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1993. Maastrichtian ammonites from the Biscay Region (France,
Spain). Memoir. The Paleontological Society 34: 1-58.
WARD, P. D. & MALLORY, V. S. 1977. Taxonomy and evolution of the lytoceratid genus
Pseudoxybeloceras and relationship to the genus So/enoceras. Journal of Paleontology 51 (3):
606-618.
WEDEKIND, R. 1916. Uber Lobus, Suturallobus und Inzision. Zentralblatt fiir Mineralogie, Geologie
und Palaontologie (B) 8: 185-195.
WHITEAVES, J. F. 1879. On the fossils of the Cretaceous rocks of Vancouver and adjacent islands in
the Strait of Georgia. In; WHITEAVES, J. F. Mesozoic Fossils 1: 93-190. British Columbia:
Geological Survey of Canada.
WHITEAVES, J. F. 1903. On some additional fossils from the Vancouver Cretaceous, with a revised list
of the species therefrom. Jn7 WHITEAVES, J. F. Mesozoic fossils 1: 309-416, pls 40-51. British
Columbia: Geological Survey of Canada.
WHITFIELD, R. P. 1877. Preliminary report on the palaeontology of the Black Hills, containing
descriptions of new species of fossils from the Potsdam, Jurassic and Cretaceous Formations of the
Black Hills of Dakota. U.S. Geographical and Geological Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region,
Washington D.C.: 1-49.
WHITFIELD, R. P. 1880. Paleontology of the Black Hills of Dakota. Jn: NEWTON, H. & JENNEY, W.
P. Report on the geology and resources of the Black Hills of Dakota, with atlas. U.S. Geographical
and Geological Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region, Washington, D.C.: 325-468.
WHITFIELD, R. P. 1892. Gasteropoda and Cephalopoda of the Raritan Clays and Greensand Marls of
New Jersey. Monographs. United States Geological Survey 18: 1-402.
WIEDMANN, J. 1962. Ammoniten aus der Vascogotischen Kreide (Nordspanien). I. Phylloceratina,
Lytoceratina. Palaeontographica 118A: 119-237.
WIEDMANN, J. 1966. Stammesgeschichte und System der posttriadischen Ammonoideen: Ein
Uberblick: 2. Teil. Abhandlungen. Neues Jahrbuch fiir Geologie und Paldontologie 127 (1): 13-81.
WOODS, H. 1906. The Cretaceous fauna of Pondoland. Annals of the South African Museum 4 (7):
275-350.
WRIGHT, C. W. 1952. A classification of the Cretaceous ammonites. Journal of Paleontology 26:
213-222.
WRIGHT, C. W. 1957. Cephalopoda, Ammonoidea. Jn: MOORE, R.C. Ed. Mesozoic Ammonoidea.
Treatise on invertebrate paleontology. Part L, Mollusca 4. New York: Geological Society of
America, and Lawrence, Kansas: University of Kansas Press.
334 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
WRIGHT, C. W. 1979. The ammonites of the English Chalk Rock (Upper Turonian). Bulletin of the
British Museum (Natural History) (Geology) 31 (4): 281-332.
WRIGHT, C. W., with CALLOMON [sic. misspelled Calloman], J. H. & HOWARTH, M. K. 1997.
Treatise on invertebrate paleontology. Part L, Mollusca 4. Revised. Volume 4. Boulder, Colorado:
Geological Society of America, and Lawrence, Kansas: University of Kansas Press. (Dated 1996)
WRIGHT, C. W. & MATSUMOTO, T. 1954. Some doubtful Cretaceous ammonite genera from Japan
and Saghalien. Memoirs of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 4 (2):
107-134.
YABE, H. 1902. Note on three Upper Cretaceous ammonites from Japan, outside of Hokkaido. Journal
of the Geological Society of Tokyo 9: \—7.
Y ABE, H. 1904. Cretaceous Cephalopoda from the Hokkaido: 2. Turrilites, Helicoceras, Heteroceras,
Nipponites, Olcostephanus, Desmoceras, Hauericeras, and an undetermined genus. Journal of the
College of Science, Imperial University 20 (2): 1-45.
YOUNG, K. 1963. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from the Gulf Coast of the United States. Bulletin.
University of Texas, Austin 6304: 1-373.
; ; m a phe. ie, a A
rah :
i hes bee emma 7s
whe Sig Psat xa # =
awe | ary, wed
ine
TY
cei
te
_—
ri
So
“s
7 =
te
+ —
i
iz
t
E- nk
-
»
ey
ae
«
a
Leary —
he
° a
D
IE
7. =e
ee eee ry
— j
cm a “ « = “a Yas w
- i -
a ve ”
fe =
a rc 7
oe vy
, : :
vs ‘ * 4 i
"
~
te ne io 7 t
S re
oa
nie a
ra
y Z
S ~
5 n A
1
ie ey
- lon
=
" fs
a
, |
~~ > 7
i
t= <
a I \ i
)
a ri
1
ct c Sts
Mf
5 é
: p BRS :
c
“ , “
\, \ il
> ~ a
' ioe =e -
< ae z
>
=
~ 5
a a : Ee
z \ == v
G i
i ca
( (c
= ; ;
c
yi fl
:
pI t eS
MJ ak
oh ) J
i Kae
"a » \
' ¥ “
rn : , i Haas j S S
; is oie rae eae ,
j rd -
ay Wi : : ye are ~
- ¥ bs _ - »
7” i ay Lae
; oo ing Ke t %
’ =, Daher F
i i a = _ 2
E: {we
= f aa ee Pw 2 os
{
Ww
1
a
; ~—48. (uae | oe Bevie
SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature (particularly Articles 22
and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed by the appropriate
Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov., etc. The name of the taxon should be
followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s(s’) name(s) (not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a
comma must separate author’s(s’) name(s) and year. The author’s(s’) name(s) and date must be placed in parentheses if
a species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must
be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published scientific names by
which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order, with all references to that name
following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the
year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should
adopt one style or the other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Example i a
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a-b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
NOTE punctuation in the above example: comma separates author’s name and year; semicolon separates more than one
reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of plates are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens mentioned in the original
description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes; additional material not regarded as paratypes
should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality,
collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach,
Port Elizabeth (33 51 S25 39 E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’, or
“... in C. namacolus (Fig. 10) ....’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, ifnot preceded by initials or full names: e.g. Du
Toit, but A. L. du Toit; Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should preferably be expressed
in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a book or
article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded
by the generic name or its abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph),
provided the same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included in the
title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the editorial
committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports will be forwarded to the
author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’ suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised
manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee. In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee
reserves the right to consult one or more referees regarding the revised manuscript.
“WOU
3 9088 01206 726
VOLUME 111 JANUARY 2004 ISSN 0303-2515
OH
Seer
_ ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
- CAPE TOWN
|
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new
genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out); number of
illustrations and tables; and email address
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be provided. First lines of
paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be typed separately, their positions indicated
in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals; second subheadings
are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals) of headings and
abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential. All generic and specific names should
be underlined or italicized.
ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including caption); the
reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the figure; originals larger than
36 48cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final size. The size of illustrated
objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure (if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be
given in the caption; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not printed; half-tones
will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items of composite figures should be
designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform
style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropriate size taking into account the final size. The number of the
figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired
reduction or enlargement.
REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the paper, using the Harvard
System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
“Smith (1969) described 4’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described ...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927) ...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927) ...’
NOTE: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all
authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within each name, with
suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not
Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140. ;
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archives de
zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634.
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon. Annals
and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320.
KOHN, A. J. 19605. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean. Bulletin
of the Bingham Oceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische und
anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid Afrika ausgefihrt in den Jahren
1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16: 269-270.
ANNALS OF THE ANNALE VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME I11 BAND 111
Pa MITHSON7Z j
ry.
4
JUN 1 8 9004
oe
“~~ = (ANIC? a
a
us
i:
=
= ae rs
j
rs ¥
os :
fl =
a
, ,
' e
i
= =
we
35
> > OF ?
E f iy i 2 Be a 7 a 1» & 7
- G ke = 4 " - é -) he > = -
= ew a i we ef ’ oye? (Sse 90) ae |
UR ? are — nS ia az,
- a ra < e =<. * : = :
i r =e . = ee
al i = at Ss
i a : i aa - a i 7 : 2 a
y = Pome Sw - i- i t 1 ie a os se - i
A 7 a : ; A al = ; 7
% at Be if : a) = . i P Ate 7
* = 7 co Fy ’ oS ie A
: ; ZN
es = 2 i oe 4 a4 ; a a
= : > <a 3
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 111 BAND
FEBRUARY 2004 FEBRUARIE
TYPESET BY USER FRIENDLY, CAPE TOWN
PRINTED AND BOUND BY MILLS LITHO, NYMAN STREET, MAITLAND
LIST OF CONTENTS
Page
SHAW, E. M.
Basketwork of the Southern Nguni (Part 3 of Basketwork of southern Africa) ......... |
MILLER, DUNCAN & DESAI, NIRDEV
The Fabrication Technology of Southern African Archaeological Gold ............ 79
=
Volume 111 is complete in 2 parts.
os
Ney
ay
A AAP ee,
+2) Wat 44 ;
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 111 Band
February 2004 Februarie
Part 1 Deel
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA.
PART 3
BASKETWORK OF THE SOUTHERN NGUNI
by
E.M. SHAW
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and
review articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
DUB, 59), HID, 4S, 7-3 tio), 2), SUS, 7), CL, 4-2),
AC), 8, XID, M, (OGD), WG, 5S, eae, IAG, 15-5),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 189 X
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
ANGE
BASKETWORK OF THE SOUTHERN NGUNI
by
E. M. SHAWt
formerly of the South African Museum,
Iziko Museums of Cape Town
(With 52 figures)
[MS-accepted February 1995]
ABSTRACT
In Part 1 of this study, the techniques and materials used in southern African basketwork were described
(Shaw 1992). Part 3 continues the ethnographic part of the study and describes the basketwork of the
people of the Eastern Cape Province, who are the southernmost branch of the Nguni-speaking people. In
addition to the various group affinities, two divisions can be distinguished: the earliest entrants into the
area, and other later immigrants from KwaZulu-Natal.
The Southern Nguni used basketwork for many purposes. They also traded baskets to neighbours, and
some of the early examples now in museums were collected from the Gonaqua (Khoekhoe) who had
obtained them from the Xhosa. The increasing availability of first metal and then plastic alternatives
caused the disappearance of the early watertight baskets, which were difficult and slow to make.
Although some uses or objects made have disappeared, as is shown by the terms recorded earlier but no
longer current, the craft was still vigorous in the 1960s and 1970s in some places when the fieldwork was
undertaken, especially in the making of gifts for special occasions, such as weddings. There are some
local differences, and indications are that at one time these were more marked and demonstrated distinct
traditions of basketry.
EDITORIAL NOTE
E. M. Shaw began research for this project on the basketwork of southern Africa in the middle of the last
century, and continued to gather and process data until the 1990s. Two volumes were published (1992
and 1993), and this volume was in the final stages of preparation when Miss Shaw died in 2002. As
colleagues we were asked to check and correct the MS before submission for publication. Obvious
anomalies were corrected, such as the adoption of the term Khoekhoe for Khoikhoi or Hottentot.
Botanical terms quoted by Miss Shaw in the text have been retained. Contemporary names for provinces
have been adopted, but descriptive regional names like Mpondoland have been retained. Elsewhere,
attempts were made to discern and respect Miss Shaw’s wishes regarding the use of other obsolete
terminology for historical accuracy.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 111 (1), 2004: 1-78, 52 figs.
Z ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
One reviewer of the manuscript congratulated Miss Shaw on ‘... a most useful and painstakingly
executed piece of research and synthesis. Not many ethnographers (a rare breed, alas) would have had the
patience to carry out such a task ...”. Miss Shaw’s highly specialized knowledge of the technology of
basketwork is reflected in the presentation of the information. We had difficulties resolving certain
problems, such as the linking of some technical illustrations to the text, without this knowledge. Readers
with a special interest in basketwork technology are referred to her earlier volumes.
This publication, the last in a distinguished series on material culture by E. M. Shaw, will provide a
reference point in the study of indigenous knowledge systems in South Africa. Interest in the
relationships between people, their environment, and their material culture, continues to inform
museum collections and provides the impetus for future research and interpretation.
The final technical editing was done by Ms J. Friedlander.
Gerald Klinghardt
Lindsay Hooper
Social History Collections Division
Iziko Museums of Cape Town
February 2003
CONTENTS
PAGE
Ja 86) gkallla 2 (0) coer Men eee nang mer nee sti Sane, hl cr jolie ai A ae RAMA bree AC ode ibe ae ee cosonaccocoan07 Ice: 1
FMNOMU CHO Mics rcie diaiGrssonsaanaetsnelied ong denice meee de aaenr wae Rees Gnamnctd wdcnne tenes decing acess (edta eee eee eee 3
SPE CRMIGQUES - 5. cao dssdccapisvonss ade eansnaceadendauins stacy ea oMeeeee Nee cc cs sist ak fe tise sane eeias heen eat Soa 3
Deseriptiono€ basketwotk ci.) ..2.ccnssseseces egrets scene riesueecceleineiatoaeeBern te seee ERE ote 14
Garden and-general.camryit® DaSketS)....5.05sceao9- canto’ saessmanneaonedgepines Saesiio eon cou sSel cine exes eRe 14
General: purpose baskets. c.xiides aesnatssudeteccsedtesceatacessecaceescasorsdaehaneete aibtegenc hea chee ee ee 22
Vessels: for toodiand: liquids wx:2ick ioe eee eee cas 24
Storas baskets ist 2 Yee ok ee edt sei oooh EE, 29
BFA SRC or iets ris ae) oe lie enter eta cor dtr Rag Ailend tt. cab oALeMaSdandodkbodcocagsouaanoaa0¢ Il
Crean DTS: 2. os gh che get ca oe ce Re ie se i lta saris sh aca Se 34
FOO 1W1AtS 6.5.1 sesosccde banedeadactoeeaee aust emer cn 36
Strainers: arid: Skatmiaa ers tsce.fiscesses-o) nedeacen.s sa ssceace sees sab scboe lnc sh cwnaneteeeceare een eee 39
Furnish @ mats: cs. 0.2 sceetev ssc cacesestti eotcateee es enesech ceases uascoi aeesugecuaetacec cen Meee eee eee ee 43
Fish traps 0s 3)e0: we see Grswutee eases ea ome eeaancg cette se ac =o tase fe ao Guach Acs Sac te cea eee ee 45
SICASES + sect iidejnnsies Bcadteaeee ate Moctane conta rece eae n ee ies eso A 46
Building-techniquesy:.:22:::.2..dnsqs Gee tesa teh ea eae Mente ees ee eee 47
Clothing and ornament.................... peek. Wnty ee eee 52
Miscelilaneoiis's.< 1.2.0.0 ce ee Sass acct hoes ocean ee ee 58
PDASCUSSIOM 3 32s cct if cp ste panes ca eee eee Cece en 6c ka eee ROCCE ne one eee 61
60,1716) 506) Peper nen oni r= WB iy ern ss Gia nO eM non Ine AS TSS ncgcbedoonccozese20 67
A CKO WIEd GENIUS, e552. ota Lope es satanic suas eee Ne See wed eNO oo suo e Sots RSS ER RSCR ELE Ce 69
RELEPEMCES i52 sics gave sas essckcge cou ceuesteeses Teas REISE Coe oeer Go CAPES. SONS Seen ESE Ca EC ECE Re ce 69
FaN0) 3) ¢24'4 C151 6) <n ee ee err EN ee Pe ee gS eba eee ccceh ea cce sooo dk daincocccnosodacdibconuadeceenaadsaodeo GZ
TOK. ac Bac secpaesec cocks Gk eee ee he ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee W3)
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 3
INTRODUCTION
The Eastern Cape and neighbouring areas have been the home for several centuries
firstly of Thembu, Xhosa, Bomvana, Mpondomise and Mpondo, Vundla of Quthing and
Umzimkulu, and Nci of Harding and Umzimkulu. According to tradition they entered the
area from the north-east and moved gradually south and westward, and in the case of the
Vundla, north again. As far as is known at present, they were the first Ntu-speaking people
to enter the area.
As a result of increasing pressures in KwaZulu-Natal, they were followed in the east at
various times by Xesibe, Bhaca, Xolo, Nzimakwe and Nhlangwini, and finally by Hlubi
and Mfengu, who were direct fugitives from the Zulu wars of the early nineteenth century.
Together these are the southern branch of the Nguni-speakers. Xhosa is now the
language spoken throughout, with some differences of dialect. It should be noted that,
through dialectical differences (and individual’s terms) in different parts of the Eastern
Cape, two objects that are apparently the same may, in their respective areas, have
different names and/or uses and, conversely, the same name may be applied to objects
having different purposes.
Part | of this series dealt with the technology of the basketwork (Shaw 1992).
Individual named techniques were given numbers (e.g. chequer weave, /a). The same
numbering system is followed here in the captions to Figures 1-3.
As in Part 2 Basketwork of the Khoisan and Dama (Shaw 1993), the text is arranged
under headings of class of basket or other object, and the authors are quoted in date order
of sojourn and grouped as Early — up to 1899, and Recent — from 1900. Examples from
both time periods were seen and examined. Most of the information was obtained from
fieldwork, which was undertaken by the author at intervals between 1948 and 1971, and
fieldwork undertaken by South African Museum colleagues, P. Davison and L. Hooper,
between 1984 and 1986. Records relating to fieldwork are listed as ‘Field survey’. Many
museum collections were examined in southern Africa and in Europe. Over 400 examples
were examined and noted and more observed in the field.
TECHNIQUES
The techniques used by the Southern Nguni are shown in Figures 1-3.
Figure 1. A-Z. FABRIC. AA-LL. BEGINNINGS.
A-K (page 5). A. Straight chequer weave, /a. B. Diagonal twill, 2b. C. Plain wrapped weave, 3.
D. Lattice wrapped weave, 3. E. Plain close twined weave, single warp, 4a. F. Plain close twined
weave, multiple warp, 4b. G. Plain open twined weave, single warp, 4c. H. Plain open twined weave,
multiple warp, 4d. I. Close chain twine over multiple warp, 4f. J. Twilled twine, 4g. K. Close zigzag
split-warp twine, 4/.
L-W (page 6). L. Open zigzag split-warp twine, 47. M. Close diagonal split-warp twine, 47. N. Open
diagonal split-warp twine, 4k. O. Chequer wicker, 5a. P. Chequer wattlework, 6a. Q. Simple plait,
7a. R. Round plait, 70. S. Square plait, 7g. T. Several stranded spiral plait, 7¢. U. Straight sewing,
single foundation, 8. V. Straight sewing, twisted composite foundation, 9a. W. Straight sewing, flat
coiled plaited foundation, /0a.
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
X-LL (page 7). X. Simple sewing over coiled multiple foundation, //b. Y. Plain beeskep sewing over
coiled multiple foundation, /7a. Z. Close furcate sewing twice into one hole, over coiled multiple
foundation, /8c. AA. Warps side by side, joined by first row of weft, 20a. BB. Elements knotted in
pairs for twilled work, 25. CC. Elements knotted one end; end of sewing strand knotted, 29a.
DD. Bound warp, 3/. EE. Looped warp, 32. FF. Twined weft for elliptical shape, 33b. GG. Bent
foundation for sewn work, 37a. HH. Closed ring of foundation, 38a. II. Open ring of foundation, 38d.
JJ. End of foundation knotted, 39. KK. End of sewing knotted, 40. LL. Double chequer square, 43a.
Figure 2. A-D. SHAPING. E-U. EDGES — WARP OR FOUNDATION OF STRAIGHT SEWING. V—AA. EDGES —
WEFT OR STRAIGHT SEWING. BB—EE. EDGES — COILED SEWN WORK.
A-I (page &). A—-D. Shaping. A. Pairing warps, 466. B. Adding warps, 47a. C. Removing foundation
strands in straight sewing, 48. D. Placing of foundation coil, 5/a. E-U. Edges E. Front selvedge on
diagonal twill, 67b. F. Double selvedge on diagonal twill, 67c. G. Bent warp selvedge on twine,
multiple warps held by single row, 68a. H. Scalloped selvedge on twine, multiple warp, front, back,
front, and cut, 6Sc. I. Scalloped selvedge on twine, part multiple warp up to edge, far side cut, 68e.
J—T (page 9). J. Scalloped selvedge on twine, part multiple warp up to edge, near side cut 68d.
K. Scalloped selvedge on twine, weaving part warp up to edge before cut, 68h. L. Scalloped selvedge
on twine, warps front, back and under twining, 68n. M. Plaited edge, full warp, 6dp. N. Plaited edge,
part warps, 6Sq. O. Edge of close twine on open twine, same direction, 75a. P. Edge of close twine on
any technique, opposite direction, 75b. Q. Wrapped edge, 76a. R. Wrapped edge, chain effect, 767.
S. Knotted edge, 79a. T. Knotted edge, fringe below knots, 79c.
U-EE (page 10). U. Stapled edge on wicker or wattle, 80. V. Weft threaded back on tracks to end off,
54d. W. Weft continues straight back from edge, 55a. X. Weft carried down tautly to next row, 85d.
Y. Weft back and forth and half-hitched between rows, 857. Z. Weft wound round last warp to next
starting place, $57. AA. Wrapped edge, S6a. BB. Plain blanket stitch, 95a. CC. Oversewing over
thinned last coil, 90. DD. Herring-bone edge, 96a. EE. Flat diagonal oversewing on top of coil, 975.
Figure 3. A-F. FINISHINGS. G-W. DECORATION. X-CC. ORNAMENTATION AND UTILITARIAN ADDITIONS.
A-J (page 11). A. Ends knotted separately, /06b. B. Ends bound together in same direction to form a
knob, /09a. C. Ends laid together and half-hitched, 709d. D. Spiny cone on straight sewing, //0b.
E. Elements turned inside and knotted, //4. F. Knots turned in and sewn invisibly, //5a. G. Band of
different twine, /25a. H. Twining in pattern between rows of open twine, /25b. I. Bands of chain
twine on plain twine, /25e. J. Rows of lattice twine, /25¢.
K-S (page 12). K. Lines or patterns by lengthening stroke, /257. L. Raised line of three strand twine,
125k. M. Extra strand introduced to make a chain pattern, /25n. N. Rows of crossed warp in open
twine, /25s. O. Lengthening twists of composite foundation in straight sewing, /29b. P. Change of
direction of twists in straight sewing, /29d. Q. Lengthening stitch in coiled sewing, /3/. R. Pattern
by half-hitching sewing strand round neighbouring stitch, /34a. S. Coloured pattern on twill in same
material dyed, /43b.
T-CC (page 13). T. Pattern on twine with two different coloured wefts, 745d. U. On straight sewn,
coloured foundation strand of same material dyed, /49a. V. On coiled sewn, band of different
coloured foundation, /50a. W. On coiled sewn, different coloured sewing strand, /5/a. X. Sewn
embroidery, /5Sd. Y. Brass buttons and beads, /62, 163b. Z. Lid, 164. AA. Hanging strap, /65.
BB. Stiff cord handle on twilled bag, /66a. CC. Stiff handle on sewn work, /67b.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
Buccs
CATHAL -
a
Lice ae
in 1 TL Th I mT
\/
LYE
ILD DDD
LSE ELELESE
Bsa es
ze .-, a
Figure 1A—K
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
D = a
DA D=Z
< iW
> p=
1S,
nr
\\\
\\
oY
—_—
Fa
Z
2
Ze
ZZ
=
eS
C4
YA
oe.
Sa
SL
i
= FS ri — i
yY
c
—_
CA
Z
Zi
AG
Z
'
— —_ es
SS
— :
Figure 1L—W
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
TE
eaN LY
i
A
Maat
i
( (i
\
ay es
fi
J
a
Cy) ch)
r Y
(mN
Ye Ie FSS SSS 5
Uy;
Wah.
ON | eu
Isl
TaN
S
N
Rue
\
AAS
ESZS D:
RY nv
—=
Q
\
Figure 1X—LL
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(LI —
VAY GS
\)
ae
JARHAARIA 9)),0)
Ne 3
Naive
Nyaa
= SS ps ea ea
(LAE |
SS Ss ee
SSS SF AN ws
NTENSBIN iN fh Se ->
| aes Le p
S LZ UO EMA ive ise
| othr rp vee oo pine 0 Ma
mT iii |
H
Figure 2A—I
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
4 — A = S
oe een ee
Soo LE” ION Cae z p>
milanianiinn RATE ee gee ee AS
Ca ee
Q 3 5 5 5
Ses
ph
——S
)
YP
&
SST ——s
(
HO VV
y
Ii)
i
}
= —
=)
ii
Figure 2J—T
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A a VAN VA
HOU
HOee
WAAE
}
i
B
YAY VA |
|_|
|
AVAVA i\
AH U
He
ma
|
Figure 2U—EE
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 11
6
ve
Shy
IGS)
f
Os
<) Ss go
a
i
\
NI
—\
=
mang) former
Figure 3A—J
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
12
3 We
ra
~_s
a P Z
v4
Ry
o) an
TORO
ROR
ony A Mi
UNA
LAM
Tee
era aly hah S|
G
>
J A
“eh 7
5.
(2 wy
<P oy of
[i iy 4 :
Bre.
>
SESH [Gf fA] Bf (GE
2
HERG ” Ad | : a=
DOSS DS
=e Ms
KLE?
<
S
P
ee
kul
Tents
GE
alee
AGEN
Ad
ww
N
NSN
id
ea
va
Cea
er
ve
we
N\\\
=
1A
\e
~
NS
ei
\ {lk
\\
Figure 3K—S
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
Ly _ |
WT
(el
t/a
ANION
W777,
ae
if /
v4
\Y
If)
I;
VG
mit cbt ff
\y
We
ar
pay S
‘)
CRT aye \! ay ~
N\
{ Ww
S
i)
AT ONG 5
a
‘a in :
CY 4
LZ
ANVNVANANAAAYY TV ANANNNRRAN .
SOLU | / La
TOUR Ni if AY a vs
Sa HDL | Sees
LETT
ay AC
PeranenasRR Ia
a eft AN, COCA CG OVOIEG
PEE LOSES VES CURE L
S:
IN
MU
ry 7 AL ly
Plo) Amore
ap
oP Ys
Are
BUEN WW
ZAMS
Pe Ga i"
1e Yy, a
ay
ey
Bala
Bot
Se NNW
\\
YYYyYvYyY yyy)
\ K =
a
Figure 3T—CC
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
DESCRIPTION OF BASKETWORK
It has not been possible to identify exactly each basket or item of basketwork for which
there is a term in the vocabulary. Some of the terms are dialectical differences for the same
object. As many types as are identifiable according to function are recorded. Some objects
and shapes seen in old collections, especially baskets with necks, are not identifiable from
the contemporary records. Figure 4A—C shows such examples. The records are vague,
especially in the use of the term “Kaffir’, but the techniques are recognizable. The fine
furcate sewing (Fig. 1Z) was particularly characteristic of the Xhosa and Thembu who
settled furthest west. .
The following types of object were, and in some cases still are, made.
GARDEN AND GENERAL CARRYING BASKETS
Large garden baskets were used for carrying produce from the fields, for winnowing
and for general purposes. Many were being made and used at least up to the late 1980s.
The shape was generally an inverted cone, with a flat or concave base, which sometimes
had a loop attached to it for hanging. A sketch by Sir Richard England done between 1835
and 1837, however, illustrates a large coiled basket of spherical shape. Baines’ sketch
(1848) and painting (1873) (Fig. 4D), of a Xhosa woman, also shows a spherical basket.
1. itala: obsolete. Presumed garden basket of Xhosa and Thembu, which most of the early
authors do not identify by name. According to Dohne (1844: 4142), however, itala was
the largest of the baskets and held two bushels. It was used for carrying produce or to hold
grain for immediate use.
Techniques
Not known, but following Déhne (1844: 41) and other early descriptions, and in all
antique Xhosa and Thembu baskets seen in museums, they were coiled and sewn with
simple (Fig. 1X) or furcate (Fig. 1Z) sewing.
Tools
An awl; an ‘iron needle’, isilanda.
Materials
Sedge (Cyperus textilis) (Fig. 5) stems split and de-pithed; the best strands for sewing,
and the remainder for the foundation.
Makers
Women.
Records
Early: Hallema 1776 [1932: 132-133], Xhosa. Von Winkelman 1788-1789 [1932:
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 15
84-85], Xhosa. Barrow 1797 [1806: 120-121, 157], Xhosa. Alberti 1803-1806 [1810:
62], Xhosa. Bonatz 1834: 352, Thembu, Shiloh. England 1835-1837 [Kennedy 1967: 52,
pl. E315], Xhosa or Mfengu. Dohne 1836-1844 [1844: 41-42], Xhosa.
Recent: Nil.
Field survey: Nil.
2. umnyazi: general. A rounded conical basket with slightly concave base that is said to
have been common among the Xhosa in the Eastern Cape until recently, and similarly
among the Thembu.
Techniques
Fabric: coiled, beeskep sewing over multiple foundation (Fig. 1).
Beginning: closed ring (Fig. 1 HH).
Method of work. not known.
Shaping: placing of coil (Fig. 2D).
Shape: conical.
Edge: no edging.
Finishing: ends sewn in.
Decoration: none.
Ornamentation: none.
Tools
Not known.
Materials
Foundation: ‘grass’; incaluka (Iridaceae).
Sewing: two-ply cord of twisted sedge.
Makers
Not known.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: US Xho. 45, Xhosa. Liverpool 34.129.1, Thembu.
Field survey: Nil.
3. ingobozi: general. Also named umnyazi: Xhosa, Bomvana, Mpondo, Xesibe, Bhaca,
Vundla; wnyati: Bhaca. (Fig. 6A—D). This is a soft, flanging basket which was used
particularly for carrying produce from the fields. The largest might hold up to 22 kg
(Hunter 1936: 85). It was also used for winnowing, when the grain was poured from one
basket, held high in the breeze, to another on the ground. It was most often woven in a
distinctive split-warp twined weave which is not found elsewhere in southern Africa,
except among the Ndzundza of Mpumalanga Province. This is the style of garden basket
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
16
\
5
\
We
sf \\
\
\
‘ ee
: i
4 :
a
i AK
y
Figure 4A
Figure 4B
\
\ : .,
op
\
)
\\
\ ‘
4, y Yj _
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 17
th
nytt
Figure 4.
Late eighteenth- and nineteenth-century baskets of
Xhosa and Thembu.
A. Basket, ‘Kaffrer’ (Xhosa), near the Sundays
River, collected by Sparrman, 1775. Coiled,
grass foundation, furcate sewing with split
sedge. Height 205 mm. Stockholm 1799.2.101.
B. Narrow-necked basket for holding liquids.
‘Kaffir’ (Xhosa), purchased c. 1891. Grass
foundation, corded sedge sewing. Height
275 mm. PR, no number.
C. Basket ‘for keeping of milk’, Thembu, possibly
near Cradock, collected H.M. Naestead,
1852-57. Coiled, furcate sewing with sedge
over sedge. Height 164 mm. Copenhagen Gd 52.
D. Basket of maize, Xhosa, Amatola Mountains,
painting by Thomas Baines, sketch c. 1848,
painting 1873. Iziko Museums of Cape Town,
Art Collections Division (SANG 1291). Figure 4D
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 5
Cyperus textilis.
used most widely in recent times. It was in common use among the Mpondo in the late
1980s. It became known to all groups, but the name ingobozi is not mentioned in early
accounts of the Xhosa and Thembu, and the basket style and technique are likely to have
belonged to later immigrants (Mbo). Those seen among Xhosa and Mfengu in 1971 were
made in a variety of plain twine. |
Techniques
Fabric: woven, in close split-warp twine, diagonal (Fig. 1M) or zigzag (Fig. 1K) warp;
twilled twine (Fig. 1J); plain twine (Fig. 1F); plain or split-warp twine over wide warps.
Beginning: bound warp (Fig. 1DD); looped warp (Fig. 1 EE).
Method of work: the material is wetted for use and kept damp while working. Outside
faces maker. Moves from right to left (right-handed) (Fig. 6B).
If a conical base is required the work is turned upside down after the base is made and
the sides proceed upwards.
Shaping: adding warps (Fig. 2B).
Shape: flanging, with concave base.
Edge: scalloped, with whole warp (Fig. 2L), or with part warp cut (Fig. 2I-K);
scalloped, with scalloping warp threaded up to edge and cut (Fig. 2K); last weft
sometimes different and stronger; rows of fine twine, or three-ply twine; one row of
two-ply bark cord.
Finishing: weft cut off close in fabric.
Decoration: band of different twine, especially plain twine, below edge (Fig. 3G);
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 19
Figure 6
ingobozi, garden basket. A. Mpondo, Libode, D & H, 1984. Height 167 mm. SAM—12728.
B. Mpondo woman making ingobozi, Libode, D & H, 1984.
C. Mpondomise, Tsolo, 1938. Height 320 mm. SAM-—5973.
D. Xhosa, Kentani, 1969. Height 350 mm. SAM—9601.
band of different coloured material, especially plain or plaited horse hair; bands of same
material, different natural colour.
Ornamentation: none.
Utilitarian addition: hanging loop (Fig. 3AA) of two-ply cord or leather.
Tools
Modern knife, formerly a spear blade, for cutting the material.
Materials
Warp: sedge, which grows near the sea or in rivers; grass, especially inland.
Weft: sedge; horse hair (for decoration).
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Makers
Women, but not all women are skilled, and some are specialists.
Records
Early: None recognizable.
Recent: Kidd 1904, pls 50, 78, Mpondo. Hunter 1936: 85, 99, Mpondo. Duggan-
Cronin 1949: 2, pl. 50, Mpondo. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1974: 162, general. UCT—32/42,
1932, Mpondo, Flagstaff. Liverpool 34.129.2, 1934, Mpondomise. NCHM ET 35/498,
1935, Mpondo, Lusikisiki. SAM-—5552, SAM-—5622, 1936, Mpondomise, Tsolo.
SAM-—5973, 1938, Mpondomise, Tsolo. SAM—6058, 1939, Mpondo, Libode. SAM-—6009,
1939, Vundla, Port Shepstone. TM 8028, 1939, Xesibe, Mount Ayliff. AM 60.1215, 1960,
Mpondo, Port St Johns. EL 5429, EL 5433, 1969, Mpondomise, Tsolo.
Field survey: 1948-1971: Eastern Cape, general. 1969: Xhosa, Kentani, SAM—9601,
EL 4791; Mpondo, Libode, SAM—9554, SAM—9563; Mpondomise, Tsolo, SAM—9579.
1984: Mpondo, Libode, SAM—12719, SAM—12727, SAM-—12728. 1985: Xhosa, Dwesa,
Willowvale, SAM—12763. 1986: Mpondo, Libode, SAM—12871, SAM—12874.
4. isiludu: Thembu, Mpondomise, Bhaca, Hlubi, Mfengu; isirudu: Thembu (Engcobo),
(Fig. 7A—C); also called isidladla, Thembu (Herschel), Mpondomise (Tsolo) (learnt from
Hlubi), but udladla 1s a large open-air maize bin.
The Thembu, and some others, who have long had contact with the South Sotho, use a
hard, coiled-sewn basket (cf. Sotho seroto). Where Sotho influence was very strong the
sewing strand might be plaited and the base covered on the outside with oxhide, goat- or
sheep-skin. The edge might be oversewn with a twist of horse tail hair.
While the use of the term isiludu (isirudu) indicates that this is a borrowing,
nevertheless the Thembu had a long tradition of coiled basketwork.
Techniques
Fabric: coiled sewn, simple or plain beeskep oversewing (Fig. 1X, Y), multiple foundation.
Beginning: knotted foundation (Fig. 1JJ); knotted sewing (Fig. IKK); open ring
foundation (Fig. III).
Method of work: several stitches are made before the sewing strand is pulled through
and tightened (Hlubi, Sigogo, 1961); outside faces maker, sewn from inside out and right
to left (right-handed); sewing material damp.
Shaping: placing of coil (Fig. 2D).
Shape: inverted cone with flat or concave base (Fig. 7).
Edge: no change of stitch but sometimes of material, for example horse hair, which
may be plaited.
Finishing: sewing strands cut off close, or knotted separately; coil tapered at edge
(Fig. 2CC); base may be covered with ox- or goat-skin.
Decoration: uncommon, two recorded with a single band of different colour;
lengthening stitch (Fig. 3Q).
Ornamentation: none recorded.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
Figure 7
isirudu, garden basket. __
A. Thembu, Engcobo, 1955. Plaited sewing.
Height 213 mm. SAM—7408.
B. Mpondomise, Tsolo, 1969. Plaited sewing.
Height 210 mm. SAM—9580.
C. Hlubi, Herschel, 1961. Edge sewn with horse
hair. Height 170 mm. SAM-—8567.
Tools
Modern knife; awl; two modern steel needles, one flat the other curved (Hlubi,
Matatiele, 1961); sailmaker’s needle.
Materials
Foundation: grass.
Sewing. grass, plaited or often two-ply twisted grass, agave fibre, sedge, or /ridaceae
leaf.
Decoration: Horse tail hair or dyed material.
Makers
Mainly men, but women too.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: Cornner (correspondence) 1936, Mpondomise, Tsolo. Shaw & Van Warmelo
1981: 233, 238, 404, 409, general. NCHM ET 35/465, 1935, Thembu, Xalanga. EL 5499,
1969, Thembu, Qebe Valley.
Field survey: 1955: Thembu, Engcobo, SAM—7408. 1961: Hlubi, Matatiele; Hlubi,
Herschel, SAM—8543, SAM-—8567. 1969: Thembu, Engcobo; Mpondomise, Tsolo,
SAM—9580.
22 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
GENERAL PURPOSE BASKETS
Smaller baskets of different sizes were used for general carrying or holding purposes.
These baskets were of the same techniques and materials as the garden baskets, that is,
those formerly made by the Xhosa and Thembu were sewn and those of the others woven.
The dominant material for both sorts was sedge, but grass was greatly used for coil
foundation or warp.
1. inzwazwa: obsolete, Xhosa; umzwazwa: large basket (one bucket), Xhosa (Dohne
1844); ingceke (Fig. 8A): Xhosa, Mpondo, Mpondomise, Xesibe, Nzimakwe; ingcebe:
Xesibe; ijomo: Xhosa, obsolete; umnyazi: general (Fig. 8B, C), except Hlubi and Mfengu.
Technique
The same as for ingobozi.
Records
Early: Dohne 1836-1844 [1844: 41-42], Xhosa.
Recent: Muller 1926: 23, 42, Hlubi. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981: 409-410, general.
Field survey: 1948: Mpondo, Lusikisiki, SAM—6684. 1955: Mpondo, Bizana, SAM—
7386. 1961: Vundla, Quthing, SAM—8541. 1969: Mpondomise, Tsolo, SAM—9577;
Bhaca, Mount Frere.
2. No name. A tiny roughly-made coiled basket (height 60 mm) with a handle (Fig. 9). It
is used for holding white beads and other precious things when they are put into the river
as a ritual offering.
Techniques
Fabric: furcate sewing, twice into one hole, on multiple foundation (Fig. 1Z).
Beginning: open ring.
Shape: small, bowl-shaped, with handle.
Edge: no edging.
Tools
Not known.
Materials
Split palm-leaf sewing over palm-leaf midrib foundation.
Makers
Not known.
Records
Early: Nil.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 23
Figure 8
ingceke, umnyazi, isinyati,
general purpose baskets.
A. ingceke, Mpondo, Bizana, 1955. Height
275 mm. SAM-—7386.
B. umnyazi, Vundla, Quthing, 1961. Height
380 mm. SAM-8541.
C. umnyazi, Mpondo, Lusikisiki, 1948. Height
175 mm. SAM—6684.
Recent: Albany Museum, no number. Hammond-Tooke
NOT.
Field survey: Nil.
3. Modern baskets. During the last two centuries, other
styles, both of shape and technique, and the addition of lids
and handles, have been introduced, largely through the
schools (Fig. 10). They have not all been suited to the older
purposes. The Mfengu in the Peddie district, who were more
exposed or more susceptible to foreign influences in the
early 19th century, made coiled sewn baskets of split palm-
leaf or sedge, with lids and handles. A Thembu isi/udu was Figure 9
seen with openwork sewing, an introduced technique. The Aske are atuad Polenne:
Mpondo near Port St Johns learnt how to make an entirely Xhosa, Eastern Cape, c. 1969.
different style of basket, of German origin, primarily for Height 60 mm
sale, but they are used by the makers as well (Fig. 11). Albany Museum, no number.
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 10 reuptic wil
Basket and _ tray, schoolwork, probably Port St Johns basket, German origin, Mpondo,
Mpondomise, St Cuthbert’s Mission, Tsolo, Port St Johns, 1961. Height including handle
1937. Height of basket 178 mm. SAM-—5852. 248 mm. SAM-—8456.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: 1937, Mpondomise, Tsolo, SAM—5852. Eastern Cape, SAM-—7141.
Field survey: 1968: Mpondo, Port St Johns, SAM—8456.
VESSELS FOR FOOD AND LIQUIDS
MILK VESSELS
The most famous baskets of former times, mentioned frequently in the literature, were
those used for holding milk, and in the west as milk pails. Déhne (1844) gave their size as
about half a bucket, but this must have been an average as larger ones have been seen.
According to Morgan (1833: 48) and Kropf (1889: 101), the small ones were used to drink
out of. Such baskets are recorded in the literature up to 1901, and according to Bhaca
testimony were used by some up to 1948, but they gave way to the easy availability of new
containers, because it was no longer worth the effort of making them, and they are now
obsolete. A few survive in museums. They were made of sedge, in the coiled sewn
technique, generally with the very fine furcate sewing not seen nowadays in this area nor
elsewhere in southern Africa. De Mist (1835: 114) stated that they were smeared with fat
before use, but their watertightness depended, as did that of the Khoisan roofing mats, on
the swelling of the materials when damp. In Stockholm, Copenhagen and Oxford, the
surviving examples are of Xhosa and Thembu origin. The technique was still to be
observed in 1948, and rather rough examples were seen then among the Bomvana (whom
Carter (1927: 60) may have meant by the name ‘Mambookie’ among whom he saw such
milk baskets in 1782). For actual milking, Bomvana, Mpondo, Xesibe and Bhaca used
wooden pails. According to estimates, the size of the baskets varied from one to eighteen
litres capacity.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 25)
1. ithunga: obsolete, Xhosa and Thembu. Basketwork milk pail, for milking into or for
holding milk (Figs 12, 13); still known and used for holding milk by Hlubi up to 1901, and
some Bhaca in 1948. /thunga now generally means a milk pail of any material. /mbenga:
obsolete, Xhosa and Thembu, a milk vessel.
Techniques
Fabric: coiled sewn with fine furcate sewing on multiple foundation (Fig. 1Z).
Beginning: closed ring of foundation (Fig. 1HH); knot in sewing (Fig. 1KK).
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: placing of coil (Fig. 2D).
Shape: bowl-shaped, some with walls slightly incurved to mouth.
Edge: plain oversewing; oversewing two-ply cord; blanket-stitch (Fig. 2BB).
Finishing: not known.
Decoration: spaced vertical lines of sewing (Fig. 3Q).
Ornamentation: none.
Utilitarian addition: handle (Fig. 3CC); lid (Fig. 3Z).
Tools
No reference, but an awl must have been used.
Materials
Foundation: stripped sedge; grass.
Sewing: stripped sedge, plain or twisted.
Decoration: two-ply cord of plant fibre.
Figure 12 Figure 13
ithunga, an obsolete basket for holding milk or in ?ithunga, milk storage basket, mid-1790s. Fine
this case ‘for holding water’, travelling ‘Kaffir’ furcate sewing. Height 285 mm.
(Emigrant Xhosa). Collected by Burchell, 1811, Stockholm 187.1.258 (Afzelius Collection).
Kanna Kraal, between Fraserburg and Carnarvon.
Height 160 mm.
PR 1886.1.468 (Ashmolean Collection).
26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Makers
Women.
Records
Early: (A few records have been selected out of the very many references to these
baskets.) Sparrman 1775 [1785: 34-35, pl. 1], Gonaqua. Stockholm 1799.2.101, Gonaqua
or Xhosa, collected by Sparrman, 1775. Hallema 1776 [1932: 132], Xhosa. Gordon 1777
[1988: 106], Xhosa, Great Fish River. Carter 1782 [1927: 60-61], Mbo. Le Vaillant 1782
[1797: 364], Gonaqua. Von Winkelman 1788-1789 [1932: 85], Xhosa. Barrow 1797
[1806: 120-121, 157], Gonaqua. Stockholm 187.1.258, mid-1790s. Stockholm RES
1623, 1799, Gonaqua. De Mist 1803 [1835: 114], Xhosa. Lichtenstein 1803—1806 [1811:
449, 665], Xhosa. Alberti 1803-1806 [1810: 37], Xhosa. Burchell 1811 [1953: 190].
PR 1886.1.468, 1811, Emigrant Xhosa, near Fraserburg, collected by Burchell. Hallbeck
& Fritsch 1827 [1826: 307], Thembu. Kay 1827 [1833: 123, 126], Xhosa. Morgan 1833:
48, Xhosa. Bonatz 1834: 350, 352, Thembu, Shiloh. Dohne 1836-1844 [1844: 4142],
Xhosa. Backhouse 1839 [1844: 183, 225, 252], Xhosa, Kei River. King 1851—1852
[1853: 164], Mfengu. Copenhagen Gd 52, 1857, Thembu. Walker 1851 (in Backhouse &
Tylor 1862): 360, Xhosa. Nauhaus 1881: 343-344, Xhosa. Kropf 1846—1889 [1889: 100],
Xhosa.
Recent: Scully 1901: 45, Hlubi.. Schonland 1905: 131, ?Xhosa, ?Mfengu,
Grahamstown. Miller 1926: 23, 42, Hlubi. Duggan-Cronin 1939: 28, Xhosa. Tyrrell
1968: 168, Mpondo. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981: 260, 264, 410, 411, general.
Field survey: 1948: Eastern Cape, none seen.
VESSELS FOR FOOD AND DRINK
Other baskets of various sizes, for serving food or for drinking or holding beer or water,
and either bowl- or beaker-shaped, were called isitya, irrespective of which shape or
purpose. Those of Xhosa (Dohne 1844: 42) and Thembu, now no longer seen, appear to
have been of the same technique and materials as the milk baskets above. In the east,
palm-leaf is used for the sewing of such baskets, coiled sewn with simple oversewing, on
either a grass or a palm-leaf foundation, and sometimes decorated with diaper patterns.
The beaker-shaped beer baskets, though not as well documented as the milk baskets, are
almost as renowned.
2. isitya: obsolete, Xhosa (Lichtenstein 1811, sihtja) for milk or food; Mpondo, Xesibe for
food or beer; Bhaca said to be for food only, but some beer baskets so named were seen at
Mount Frere in 1969. (Fig. 14A—D)
3. iqgaku: Xhosa, a small cup; Mpondo, for drinking, especially for infants; not generally
known.
4. umnyazi: Mpondo, Mpondomise, a measure for dry foods; Xhosa, Bomvana,
Mpondomise, Xesibe, Vundla, a smallish basket.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA Bi
rd abe i
paeee tea
yy ge
i .
S42 5teeet
2324eat
Figure 14
isitya, beer beaker (A—C) or food basket (D).
A. Mpondo, Flagstaff, 1932. Height 256 mm. UCT-—32/41.
B. Mpondo, Umvume Springs, 1939. Height 294 mm. SAM—5994.
C. Mpondo, Libode, 1942. Width 222 mm. FH 369. Photo N. J. van Warmelo.
D. Xesibe, Mount Ayliff, 1969. Height 225 mm. SAM—9633.
5. ingcaza: Bhaca, for drinking beer.
6. ingceke: Vundla, a small basket for food; Xhosa, Mpondo, Xesibe, a small ingobozi.
7. ilala: made of palm-leaf, for food or drink; this would mean a coiled sewn basket like
isitya above.
28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Techniques
isitya, igaku
Fabric: Xhosa, Thembu: obsolete, close furcate or simple sewing over multiple
foundation (Fig. 1X, 1Z). Mpondo, Xesibe, Bhaca: coiled, simple oversewing, over
multiple foundation (Fig. 1X). Xesibe: widely spaced sewing. Bhaca (Ixopo): woven,
split-warp twine.
Beginning: chequer square (Fig. ILL); closed ring (Fig. 1HH) (including Xhosa
obsolete); open ring (Fig. III); bent foundation (Fig. 1GG).
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: placing of coil (Fig. 2D).
Shape: for food, shallow, widely flanging, sometimes with rounded base; for beer,
straight-sided or slightly narrowed at mouth, usually on a flat base (Fig. 14). Bhaca
(Ixopo) only slightly flanging sides.
Edge: herring-bone (Fig. 2DD) or close diagonal oversewing (Fig. 2EE) or close plain
oversewing (Xhosa, obsolete).
Finishing: ends tucked inside, under two stitches below.
Decoration: diaper pattern by lengthening stitch (Fig. 3Q), by making raised pattern or
half-hitching sewing strand round neighbouring stitch (Fig. 3R).
Ornamentation: none.
umnyazi: See ingobozi.
Tools
Xhosa and Thembu, presumed awl; Mpondo, awl.
Materials
Foundation: sedge, Xhosa, Thembu and Bhaca; grass or palm-leaf strips, Mpondo,
Xesibe.
Sewing. palm-leaf, Bhaca.
Makers
Xhosa and Thembu women; Mpondo and Xesibe men.
Records
Early: Lichtenstein 1803-1806 [1811: 655], Xhosa. Dohne 1836-1844 [1844: 42],
Xhosa. Baines 1849 [1961: 138], Xhosa. Stanford 1889 [1958: 124], Mpondo.
Recent: MM 1830, 1913, Bomvana or Mpondo. Muller 1926: 42, Hlubi. Hunter 1936:
99, 359, Mpondo. Duggan-Cronin 1949, pl. 53, Mpondo. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981:
405, 410, 411, 413, general. UCT—32/41, 1932, Mpondo, Flagstaff. NCHM ET 35/454,
1935, Bomvana. SAM—5994, 1939, Mpondo, Umvume Springs. SAM-—6068, 1939,
Mpondo, Libode. FH 369, no date, Mpondo. SAM—10505, SAM—10506, 1974, Port St
Johns, Mpondo.
Field survey: 1969: Mpondo, Libode; Xesibe, Mount Ayliff, SAM—9633.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 29
STORAGE BASKETS
Baskets were, but are seldom any longer, used for the storage of clothing, ornaments,
household goods and small articles.
Narrow-necked, lidded, globular baskets (Fig. 4), possibly for storage of liquids or
left-overs, have been seen in museum collections, where they were attributed to this area,
but not all the attributions have been confirmed. All are coiled sewn, two of palm-leaf,
with simple sewing, one of grass with furcate sewing, and one of sedge with simple
oversewing (Copenhagen Gc 420, 1873, Cradock; Cambridge, 1882.42, Cape Colony,
‘Kafir’, ‘for storing milk’).
FOR CLOTHING, ORNAMENT AND HOUSEHOLD GOODS
1. igindiva: Xhosa, obsolete. Used for clothing, household goods and small things. Dohne
(1844: 41-42) stated that it held two buckets, and Nauhaus (1881: 344) described it as a
large trunk, about 90 by 50 cm. There is no indication of shape, but see Figure 15, an oval
basket, described as a woman’s basket (PR 1884.44.12, Thembu, 1827).
2. itala: Xhosa, large basket.
Techniques
Fabric: these are coiled sewn baskets (Fig. | X—Z).
Beginning: (igindiva) bound oval (Fig. 1GG).
Edge: (igindiva) herring-bone (Fig. 2DD).
Figure 15
igindiva, for storing clothes or small household things, Thembu, 1827. Height 300 mm. PR 1884.44.12.
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Palm-leaf.
Records
Early: Dohne 1836-1844 [1844: 41-42], Xhosa. Nauhaus 1881: 343, Xhosa. Kropf
1846-1889 [1889: 101], Xhosa. PR 1884.44.12, Thembu, 1827.
Recent: Cambridge 58.1.1901.
Field survey: Nil.
FOR SNUFF
Nauhaus (1881: 343) claimed to have seen a small basketwork snuff-box, shaped like a
gourd, with a tight lid. There is no confirmation of this.
Techniques (according to Nauhaus 1881)
Fabric: coiled sewn.
Beginning: not known.
Shaping: placing of coil (Fig. 2D).
Shape: gourd-shaped.
Edge: not known.
Finishing: not known.
Decoration: not known.
Ornamentation: none.
Utilitarian additions: lid, handle.
Tools
Not known.
Materials
Foundation: grass.
Sewing: ‘bast’.
Makers
Not known.
Records
Early: Nauhaus 1881: 343, Xhosa.
Recent: Nil.
Field survey: Nil.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA dT
BAGS
GENERAL
The following loosely woven bags were used:
1. umngqungu: Xhosa, Bomvana, Mpondo, for holding tobacco; Bomvana, for collecting
fish. ixamba: Mpondo, for holding tobacco for sale in one piece; for holding sprouted
maize (Van Warmelo pers. comm. 1958) (Fig. 16); Mpondo, Libode, for holding dry
tobacco (Davison & Hooper pers. comm. 1985).
2. umgodlo: a bag made of ikhwane rushes, Thembu and others (cf. South Sotho mokotlo)
(Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981: 232).
3. uzwazwa: Bomvana, Mpondo, for carrying fish (Fig. 17).
Techniques
Fabric: open plain twine (Fig. 1G); open (Fig. 1L) or close (Fig. 1K) split-warp zigzag
twine.
Beginning: warps laid side by side and joined by first row of twined weft, then bent at
centre (Fig. 1AA).
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: tension.
Shape: umngqungu, long oval with handle;
uzwazwa, rectangular.
Edge: four rows of close twine in same or
opposite direction (Fig. 20, P).
Finishing: ends cut off.
Decoration: none.
Ornamentation: none. i PL AN
Utilitarian addition: handle. ah ai et
Tools
If any, not known.
Materials
Warp: for tobacco bag, thick sedge
(ikhwane), Cyperus latifolius Poir.; for fish
bag, a thinner sedge.
Weft: grass or sedge.
Handle: sedge.
Figure 16
Makers umngqungu, ixamba, tobacco bag, Mpondo,
Women. Libode, 1939. Length 445 mm. SAM-—6059.
32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 17
uzwazwa, fish or shrimping bag, Mpondo, Libode, 1939. Height 470 mm. SAM—6057.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: Cambridge 34.107, 1934, Ngqeleni, Mpondo. NCHM ET 35/450, NCHM ET
35/467, 1935, Elliotdale, Bomvana. SAM—6057, SAM-—6059, 1939, Umvume Springs,
Mpondo. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981: 232, 374-375, Xhosa, Bomvana, Mpondo.
Field survey: 1969: Mpondo, Libode. 1985: Mpondo, Libode (D & H).
FOR SEEDS
4. intlwayelelo: Bomvana, otherwise not known. A small oval basket with a narrow neck
and a strap by which it was held (Fig. 18). Used for holding the seeds while sowing.
Techniques
Fabric: close or open diagonal, or open zigzag, split-warp twine (Fig. 1K, L, M).
Beginning: bound warp (Fig. 1DD).
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: pairing or adding warps (Fig. 2A, B).
Shape: ovoid.
Edge: half warp bent forward to right into last row of twine.
Finishing: not known.
Decoration: band of close diagonal split-warp twine at neck on body of open zigzag
split-warp twine.
Ornamentation: none.
Utilitarian addition: a cord or three-strand simple plait.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 33
Tools
Not known.
Materials
Warp and weft: sedge.
Makers
Not known, but likely to have been women.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: NCHM ET 35/354, NCHM ET 35/355,
NCHM ET 35/364, 1935, Elliotdale, Bomvana. Shaw
& Van Warmelo 1981: 232, 239, Bomvana.
Field survey: 1948: Bomvana, Elliotdale.
POUCHES Figure 18
5. isikwamu: Nzimakwe. In the eastern area of the /”“/wayelelo, basket for holding seed
Eastern Cape, a twilled pouch, such as ices CS ; SESE oop Ba ies
characteristic of the east coast of Africa, is sometimes NCHM ET 35/354.
used. It is seen among the Mpondo, Xesibe and
Nzimakwe, and an isolated example (SAM-—4938),
came from the Lesotho border. It consists of two parts, one of which is slightly larger than
the other and fits over it as a lid which slides up and down on the plaited palm-leaf cord
handle that passes inside both parts. It is used for carrying small quantities of food, or,
more particularly, by doctors for carrying medicine. It is possible that examples are
bought from KwaZulu-Natal, and not made locally (Fig. 19).
Figure 19
isikwamu, pouch, Nzimakwe, Port Shepstone, 1939. Height 200 mm. SAM—6005.
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Techniques
Fabric: woven, diagonal twill over two (Fig. 1B).
Beginning: elements knotted in pairs (Fig. 1 BB).
Method of work: each part is woven separately as a cylinder, one to fit over the other.
Shaping: each cylinder pressed flat and one end sewn to close it.
Shape: rectangular.
Edge: elements back on tracks making a double edge (Fig. 2F).
Finishing: knots turned in and edges of the bend sewn together invisibly to close the
base (Fig. 3F).
Decoration: a cross on back and front by using the same material dyed (Fig. 3S).
Ornamentation: none.
Utilitarian handle: plaited palm-leaf, knotted outside, runs inside (Fig. 3BB).
Tools
A sharp tool for sewing the base.
Materials
Fabric and handle: Hyphaene coriacea, leaf folioles split.
Dyes: mtsekisane (Euclea sp.) and isimoyo (Acacia sp.)
Makers
Not known.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: SAM-—6005, 1939, Nzimakwe, Port Shepstone.
Field survey: 1955: Mpondo, Bizana. 1969: Xesibe, Mount Ayliff.
GRAIN BINS
A basket bin for bulk storage of grain is not a Southern Nguni feature. Their custom
was to store the grain harvest in pits, preferably under the cattle enclosures. In the north of
the area, however, along the Lesotho border, where Thembu, Bhaca and some Xhosa have
long been in contact with South Sotho and later with Hlubi, the habit of storing grain in
large baskets was adopted by a few (Fig. 20). Where the Zulu word isilulu is used for the
bin, it may be that the custom was adopted from Mfengu or Hlubi rather than from Sotho.
Latterly, the bins have mostly been replaced by grain bags or disused oil drums.
1. isilulu: Xhosa, Herschel; Thembu, Engcobo; Bhaca and Hlubi, Mount Frere (Fig. 20A);
Hlubi, Herschel; isiximba: Bhaca, Mount Frere. A large, ovoid basket that varies in size
from about 60 to 150 cm high, and which holds from 5 to 30 bags of grain. It is kept on a
platform of stone, indoors (Bhaca) or outdoors (Hlubi), and used for the storage of grain.
If outdoors, it is sometimes plastered on the outside with a mixture of cowdung and mud.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA % f:]
The opening at the top is closed with a flat stone (Hlubi), or a small mat (Bhaca). The
Hlubi hold the bin upright by attaching it by ropes to a tripod of saplings placed over it.
The bins are made each year about July, their numbers in accordance with the expected
size of the harvest. According to Bhaca, an isiximba is built on to a sledge and plastered.
There is a drawing by C. Bell “A Caffre Basket’ (Fig. 20B) that has a similar shape, but
‘Caffre’ usually denotes Xhosa or Thembu.
Technique
Fabric: coiled, with multiple foundation about 2 cm thick, very loose simple, or widely
spaced beeskep oversewing (Fig. 1 Y); sewing strand sometimes plaited.
Beginning: not known.
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: placing of coil (Fig. 2D).
Shape: ovoid, narrowing to small mouth.
Edge: oversewn with grain-bag twine.
Finishing: not known.
Decoration: none.
Ornamentation: none.
Tools
Modern, for sewing, a needle made from a bucket handle, Hlubi.
Materials
Foundation and sewing: coarse thatching grass, Hyparrhenia sp.,; sewing sometimes a
three-strand simple plait of grass.
RS In. 4946.-E7_ 3
Figure 20
isilulu, isiximba, grain bin.
A. Bhaca or Hlubi, Lugangeni, Mount Frere, 1948. Photo N. J. van Warmelo.
B. ‘Caffre’ basket which has the appearance of a grain bin. Drawing by C. Bell, c. 1836.
Photo Cape Archives.
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Makers
Men.
Records
Early: Perestrello 1554 [1898: 236], ?7Mpondo, near Msikaba River. Bell 1836,
drawing, ?Xhosa. Weitz 1876: 327, Hlubi.
Recent: Miller 1926: 42, Hlubi. Department of Agriculture and Forestry 1940, Xhosa.
Shaw & Van Warmelo 1972: 97, Hlubi.
Field survey: 1948: Bhaca, Mount Frere. 1961: Hlubi, Thembu, some Xhosa,
Herschel. 1969: Thembu, Engcobo; Mpondomise, Tsolo.
FOOD MATS
Small mats were made in a variety of shapes, circular, semi-circular or half oval, but
most commonly quadrilateral. Among the Mpondo the edges of the circuitar mats are
sometimes turned up to form a shallow bowl. The larger examples are used to catch the
meal as it falls from the grinding stone; an example was seen in Mpondoland large enough
to serve four stones at once, but commonly each stone has its mat. The smaller examples
are used as dishes for food. They form the symbol for relationship groups in small
communities (Hammond-Tooke 1963), and are often given as gifts. Recently they have
been sold in shops.
1. isithebe: general (Fig. 21 A—E).
Techniques
Fabric: plain close twine (Fig. 1E); chain stitch twine (Fig. 11).
Beginnings: for quadrilateral shape, warps laid flat and joined by twining (Fig. 1AA);
for circular shape, bound warps (Fig. 1!DD).
Method of work: weave from right to left.
Shaping: tension; adding warps (Fig. 2B).
Shape: rectangular; flanging quadrilateral; circular; half-oval.
Edge: warp: wrapped (Fig. 2Q); half cut off, half tucked back to front to back and cut
(Fig. 21 or J); half cut off, half to join last row of twine to look like plaiting of the last row
(Fig. 2N); several rows of fine twine; row of wrapping, chain effect (Fig. 2R); elements
tucked under last row of twine (Fig. 2G); weft: front weft wrapped over three, back weft
over two, or across front warp and back (Fig. 2AA), last warp sometimes thickened.
Finishing: weft elements tied with a knot at start and end; in body of work just cut off.
Decoration: all over chain twine (Fig. 11); alternating bands of plain and chain stitch
(Fig. 31); lines or diaper pattern by lengthening stroke (Fig. 3K); a raised line of three- strand
twine (Fig. 3L); warp edge may be of different material, or different colour; three rows of
lattice twine (Fig. 3J); bands of open twine; split warp on body of plain twine (Fig. 3G).
Ornamentation: none.
Utilitarian addition: loop of bark fibre thread for hanging.
37
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
RY
A.
et
igure 2]
F
isithebe, food mat.
Length 364 mm
Lusikisiki, 1948.
b)
A. Mpondo
1
9564
6683
C. Mpondo
SAM-—
B. Mpondo
330 mm.
lameter
D
Libode, 1969.
b)
SAM—
Length 570 mm
, 12oY
ibode
Jb;
9559
SAM—
D. Nci,
Length
1969
ing,
ingolweni, Hard
. SAM-—8447
Tsolo
Izingo
320 mm
E. Mpondom
SAM—
Length 515 mm
1969.
b)
b)
ise
9578
NA ql
can
Vian
RAR
Wy
ith
ue
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Tools
None.
Materials
Warp: thick sedge or grass
Weft: thin or coarse sedge.
The sedge is dried (Fig. 22), then the night before use it is left out in the dew.
Makers
Women.
Records
Early: Smith 1831—1832 [1955: 186], Mpondo. Dohne 1836-1844 [1844: 42], Xhosa.
Kropf 1846-1889 [1889: 101], Xhosa.
Recent: Kidd 1904, pl. 79, Mpondo. Muller 1926: 41, Hlubi. Hunter 1936: 365,
Mpondo. Duggan-Cronin 1949: 28, Mpondo. Hammond-Tooke 1963: 302-319, general.
SAM-—9653, Xhosa, King William’s Town. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981: 410, 417, 419,
general. UCT—32/43, 1932, Mpondo, Flagstaff. SAM—5550, 1936, Mpondomise, Tsolo.
SAM-—6055, 1939, Mpondo, Libode. EL 993, Xesibe, Mount Ayliff.
Field survey: 1948: Mpondo, Lusikisiki, SAM—6683. 1961: Hlubi, Herschel,
SAM-8528; Nci, Harding, SAM—8446, SAM-—8447. 1968: Mpondomise, Tsolo. 1969:
Mpondo, Libode, SAM—9553; Thembu, Engcobo; Mpondomise, Tsolo, SAM—9578;
Mpondo, Mevana, Libode and Nggeleni; Mfengu, Peddie. 1971: Xhosa, Kentani; Bhaca,
Mount Frere. 1984: Mpondo, Libode, D & H. 1985: Xhosa, Willowvale, D & H.
Figure 22
Small bundles of Cyperus, collected for making isithebe; Mpondo, Libode, D & H, 1984.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 59
2. isixazi: Xhosa; ucango: Bomvana; uhlango: Mpondo (Fig. 23); isithebe senyama:
Xesibe. This is a wicker tray for sharing out raw meat or serving meat to men only. It was
recorded only from the Xhosa, Bomvana, Mpondo and Xesibe. The same name is used by
Bomvana for door (Fig. 39). Both are made in the same technique.
Techniques
Fabric: chequer wicker (Fig. 10).
Beginning: warps laid side by side and held with weft (Fig. 1AA).
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: none.
Shape: rectangular; size seen at Lwandile, 60 x 45 cm.
Edges: warp: stapled (Fig. 2U); weft: weft element taken straight back into next row
(Fig. 2W).
Finishing: none.
Decoration: none.
Ornamentation: none.
Tools
If any, not known.
Materials
Warp: slivers of wood (at Lwandile
ugonothi).
Weft: creeper or crushed reed.
Makers
Men.
Records
Early: Maclean 1858: 155, Xhosa. Shaw
1820-1856 [1860: 368], Xhosa.
Recent: Cambridge 1934.112, Mpondo.
Hunter 1936: 17, Mpondo. SAM-—6091, Figure 23
1939, Mpondo, Libode. isixazi, tray for serving meat, Mpondo, Libode,
Field survey: 1969: Mpondo, Lwandile. 1936. Length 364 mm. SAM-6091.
STRAINERS AND SKIMMERS
During the process of making beer, after the initial fermentation, the liquid is strained
by squeezing it through a strainer (Figs 24-28). The Bhaca also use small strainers for
straining children’s porridge. According to Alberti (1810), the Xhosa of his day used the
nests of the weaver bird as strainers for beer. Skimmers (Fig. 29) are used to skim the scum
or foreign objects off the surface of the beer when it is being served.
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1. intluzo: general except Bhaca; or imijijwa: Mpondo; ivovo: Bhaca. A_ long,
funnel-shaped basket, closed at one end, and worked loosely for pliability. It is nearly
always fitted with a loop for hanging (Figs 24—28).
Techniques
Fabric: 1. intluzo, straight sewn, foundation elements twisted into two- or three-ply
cord (Fig. 1V), general (Fig. 25).
i. intluzo, open and close diagonal and zigzag split-warp twine (Fig. 1K—N), Thembu
(Fig. 28).
111. ivovo, Mpondo, Xesibe, Bhaca and Xolo only, diagonal twill (Fig. 1B) over three
or four elements (Figs 24, 27).
iv. plain open twine (Fig. 1G), Bomvana.
Beginning: 1. intluzo, foundation strands knotted and joined in a circle by the first row
of work (Fig. 1CC), end of sewing strand may be worked in as foundation.
11. intluzo, warps knotted and joined in a circle by the first row of work (Fig. 1AA).
111. ivovo, knotted in pairs (Fig. 1 BB).
iv. start with the plaited hanging loop and let the material of the loop become the warp.
Method of work: the sewn strainer is made on a core of grass, usually but not always,
starting at the mouth (Figs 25, 26). The two- or three-ply foundation strands are twisted in
preparation before the work begins.
Shaping: tension; elements threaded to inside, knotted and cut off inside tube
(Fig. 2C); natural decrease of material.
Shape: tubular.
Edge: beginning forms edge, with knots cut short or left long enough to form a short
fringe (Fig. 2T); several rows plain twine, then alternate warps cut (Fig. 2K), others from
back to front to back; on twine, warps twisted and bent to right in front of next warp and
Figure 24 (above)
ivovo, beer strainer, Mpondo, Flagstaff, 1932.
Length 630 mm. UCT-—32/44.
Figure 25 (right)
intluzo, beer strainer, Hlubi, Herschel, 1961.
Length 880 mm. SAM-—8566.
41
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
fringe below knots of beginning.
ill,
h hanging loop (Fig. 3D)
on tw
p)
through to back (Fig. 2H)
ends bound together with bark cord
9
Finishing: spiny cone wit
to make a 25 mm knob
elements turned inside and hanging loop, which may be plaited,
b)
.
knotted with them (Fig. 3E)
lines by a different ply or a different
1 line or
lengthening gap (F
a vertica
3P)
| dyed (Fig. 3U).
Decoration: in the sewn variety,
duction
intro
latterly, 1
50);
18
.
>)
t or direction of foundation (Fig
of coloured strands,
twis
la
Same mater
Ornamentation: none
Utilitarian addi
d loop for hanging.
iste
plaited or tw1
ion
t
\
:
Figure 27 (above right)
Figure 28 (right)
No
™~
a)
a
=
<
N
5
=
Wa
\O
Ww
Ss
je!)
=|
D)
—]
Length 555 mm. SAM-6010.
No)
(aa)
on
—_
S
fo)
MN
EH
> 3
—_
= ts
S56
me) co}
S cn]
— ‘o)
a Ss
2 en
=) 6)
ep 8
an Ss
~~
DN
i
cD)
oO
Ie)
S
N
=
>
Ss
ivovo, beer strainer, Xolo, Port Shepstone, 1939.
intluzo, beer strainer, Thembu, Mqanduli, 1935.
Length 228 mm. NCHM ET 35/357
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Tools
Core of grass to hold shape; for sewing, a plain or curved needle, inhlambo (Hlubi); a
metal needle with a bone handle; formerly a wooden needle (Hlubi).
Materials
Foundation: 1. two- or three-ply twisted cord of split sedge, gathered from the river,
dried and then wetted and twisted for work. u. split sedge. i11. split folioles of Hyphaene
coriacea palm-leaves.
Sewing: 1. two-ply cord of split sedge, dried after gathering, then wetted and twisted
for work; or, latterly, grain-bag fibre. 11. split sedge. 11. split folioles of Hyphaene
coriacea palm-leaves.
Makers
1, 11 and iv (see above), women; 111. men.
Records
Early: Alberti 1803-1806 [1810: 36-40], Xhosa; Fritsch 1863-1866 [1872: 76],
Xhosa.
Recent: Muller 1926: 41, Hlubi. Soga 1932: 399, 401, Xhosa. UCT—32/44, Mpondo,
Flagstaff. NCHM ET 35/357, Thembu, Mqaanduli, 1935. Hunter 1936: 99, Mpondo.
SAM-—~4971, 1933, Thembu, Cala. SAM—5564, 1939, Mpondomise, Tsolo. SAM-—6010,
Xolo, 1939, Port Shepstone. SAM—6054, 1939, Mpondo, Libode. Shaw & Van Warmelo
1974: 213, pl. 30; 1981: 412, 436, pls 61-62.
Field survey: 1961: Hlubi, Herschel, SAM—8523; Hlubi, Quthing, SAM—8566. 1969:
Thembu, Engcobo; Mpondomise, Tsolo, SAM—9576; Mpondo, Nggeleni, SAM—9566;
Bhaca, Mount Frere, SAM—9628. 1985: Xhosa, Willowvale (D & H). |
2. isiketho: Mpondo; isihlenga: Mpondo (Fig. 29). A woven spoon for removing scum
or flies from the top of beer. This was recorded in the field only among the Mpondo of
Lusikisiki. It has probably been borrowed from KwaZulu-Natal where such spoons are
used.
Techniques
Fabric: warps bent at centre to form a
bowl, held at wide intervals with double
row of twining; warps bound or chequer
woven together to form a single or double
handle, with a ring or a loop at the end.
Materials
Warp and weft midribs of palm-leaf
Figure 29
isiketho, skimming spoon, Mpondo,
folioles. Lusikisiki, 1948. Length 210 mm.
Photo N. J. van Warmelo.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 43
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: NCHM ET 35/426, 1935, Mpondo, Bizana. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981: 424,
426, pl. 66.
Field survey: 1948: Mpondo, Lusikisik1.
3. isongulo: Xhosa. This was described by informants as a skimmer with a woven head
and a wooden handle. It was not seen.
FURNISHING MATS
Long rectangular mats were made in different sizes according to use. The longer were
used as beds on which to sleep, and were rolled up and put on one side during the day. The
shorter were used as children’s beds or as sitting mats for many occasions. It was
customary to take one’s own mat when travelling. The mats might also serve as shrouds.
Mats were also used to screen off part of the hut on special occasions, or to keep off the
draught from the door. The coarser sort were used for laying out tobacco to sweat. Among
the Mfengu of Peddie, where they were no longer used as beds, some were seen hung on
the walls as ornaments.
1. ukhuko: general, except Xesibe and Bhaca; isicamba: Mpondo; icansi: Xesibe, Bhaca,
Hlubi, Mfengu; isicangca: Xhosa, Bomvana, Mpondo, Xesibe. ee mat; according
to Thembu this is the twined variety (Fig. 30).
2. isicamba: Xhosa, Mpondo; isicangca: Xhosa, Bomvana, Xesibe, Mpondo; isihlalo:
Xesibe. A smaller sleeping mat or sitting mat.
3. umahambehlala: Xhosa, Mpondo, Bhaca, Hlubi, also called moseme, from the Sotho.
A special sitting mat, especially for women, and especially when nursing a baby.
Figure 30
ukhuko, isicamba, ucansi, isicangca, sleeping mat.
A. Mpondomise, Tsolo, 1936. Length 2 215 mm, width | 150 mm. SAM—5565.
B. Close-up of SAM—5565, showing twined technique and edge.
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
4. isigcobo: general. A rough mat for babies
to sleep on and for many other purposes,
including sweating tobacco (Fig. 31).
5. ngoboko: a sewn sleeping mat, Thembu,
Hlubi (Herschel), 1961.
Techniques
Fabric: open twine over single or
multiple warp (Fig. 1G, H); a small number
— five out of the 45 seen — were straight ‘sigcobo, rough mat for sweating tobacco,
Mpondo, Libode, 1939.
sewn (Fig. 1U). P ss :
(Fig ) Length 1 525 mm, width 750 mm. SAM-—6060.
Figure 31
Beginning: lay warps flat and hold by
first row of weft or sewing (Fig. 1AA).
Method of work: the material is worked wet.
Shaping: none.
Shape: rectangular.
Edge: warp — double row of close twining (Fig. 20, P); one row twine, one row
wrapping under one and over two (Fig. 2Q); wrapping under two over three; scalloped;
weft: back in tracks over one or two warps (Fig. 2V); carried down taut to re-start
(Fig. 2X); zigzag twining between rows (Fig. 2Y); wound round last two elements
(hie227))
Finishing: weft elements — ends oversewn; ends knotted at edge.
Decoration: twining in pattern between rows of open twine (Fig. 3H); rows of crossed
warp (Fig. 3N).
Ornamentation: none.
Tools
For twined work only a cutting tool is needed for trimming; for sewn work Hlubi and
Xhosa of Herschel use an awl to open the hole in the wet material, then push a needle
through while the awl is still in position (the Khoekhoe method); a sailmaker’s needle is
also used today.
Materials
Warp and foundation elements: sedge, of different qualities according to use (Kay
1833: 147). Bhaca import it by lorry from East London. Bullrush leaves for rougher mats.
Weft and sewing strand: sinew (Von Winkelman 1788—1789 [1932: 84]), two-ply cord
of bark fibre, grain-bag twine, sisal fibre, thin strips of bark or string.
Makers
Women.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 45
Records
Early: Von Winkelman 1788-1789 [1932: 76, 84], Xhosa. Alberti 1803-1806 [1810:
48], Xhosa. Kay 1827 [1833: 147], Xhosa. Smith 1831-1832 [1955: 186], Mpondo.
Dohne 1836-1844 [1844: 29, 42-44], Xhosa. Backhouse 1839 [1844: 270], Mpondo.
Kretzschmar 1853: 239, Xhosa. Maclean 1858: 162, Xhosa.
Recent: Bachmann 1901: 164, Mpondo. Kidd 1904: 314, Mpondo. Muller 1926: 41,
Hlubi. Cook 1931: 67, Bomvana. Soga 1932: 217, 231, Xhosa. UCT—32/46, 1932,
Mpondo, Flagstaff. SAM—5565, 1936, Mpondomise, Tsolo. SAM—6056, SAM-—6060,
1939, Mpondo, Libode. SAM-—6089, 1939, Nzimakwe, Port Shepstone. Brownlee 1944:
24, Xhosa. Hunter 1936: 87, Mpondo. Broster 1967: 131, Thembu. Tyrrell 1968: 192,
194, Xhosa. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981: 378-380; 1988: 744, general.
Field survey: 1948: Mpondo, Qawukeni. 1961: Vundla, Quthing; Hlubi, Herschel,
SAM-—8565; Hlubi, Matatiele; Mfengu, Peddie. 1968: Xhosa, King William’s Town,
SAM—9424; Bhaca, Mount Frere. 1969: Xhosa, Kentani.
FISH-TRAPS
In the main, the Southern Nguni were not fish-eaters. The only two basket traps
recorded were used by the coastal Bomvana and Mpondo.
1. uzwazwa: Mpondo. A bag-shaped basket made of sedge in a very open twine (Fig. 1G).
It is used for catching shrimps or fish by holding it behind the retreating wave and letting
the water run through it. It was used by Mpondo and Bomvana (Fig. 17). The term was
also used for a fixed conical fish-trap, according to an isolated, unconfirmed report from
informants at Mbotye Bay.
Techniques
Fabric: open zigzag split-warp twine (Fig. 1L), Bomvana; open twine (Fig. 1G), rows
closer at base to prevent escape of the catch, Mpondo.
Beginning: warps joined at centre with one row of weft (Fig. AA) and bent up.
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: none.
Shape: rectangular.
Edge: three rows of close twine in opposite direction to open twine (Fig. 2P); warps cut
off a centimetre above this.
Finishing: ends cut off.
Decoration: none.
Ornamentation: none.
Utilitarian addition: handle.
Tools
Not known.
46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Materials
Thick-stemmed sedge.
Makers
Not known, but likely to be women.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: MM 1822, Bomvana. SAM-—6057, Mpondo, Umvume Springs.
Field survey: 1948: Mpondo, Mbotye Bay.
SLEDGES
1. isileyi: general (Fig. 32). The sledge is a modern innovation. It is hitched to oxen to
convey produce from the fields or to transport any heavy material. Strong wooden stakes
are planted in a heavy forked wooden base to serve as warps. The walls are completed
with pliable wooden wefts and the base filled in with a wicker floor, or latterly with
wooden planks (see no. | in Materials below). A variety (see no. 2 in Materials below) in
which the walls consisted of coiled sewn maize stalks was seen among the Thembu near
Figure 32
isileyi, sledge.
A. (left) Xesibe, Mount Ayliff, 1969.
B. (below) Mpondo, on the road near
Lusikisiki, 1971.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 47
Engcobo, and Bhaca spoke of the upper part of a sledge being ‘basketwork’. Sledges were
seldom seen by the late 1990s.
Techniques
Fabric: chequer wattle (Fig. 1P); simple oversewing on coiled foundation (Fig. 1X).
Beginning: warps stuck into the base.
Shaping: position of warps.
Shape: triangular base, sometimes flanging walls.
Edge: sometimes stapled (Fig. 2U).
Finishing: none.
Decoration: none.
Ornamentation: none. -
Tools
Not known.
Materials
Base: a forked tree trunk or two thick wooden logs.
Walls: 1. warps: wooden stakes; wefts: pliable stems of tecoma (Tecomaria capensis
Spach), isithombothi (Acalypha glabrata Thunb.), umhlali or uzungo (Rhoicissus
rhomboidea (E. Mey) Planch.)
2. foundation: maize stalks; sewing: bark or split withies.
Makers
Men.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: Hunter 1936: 88, Mpondo. Walton 1954: 24, general. Shaw & Van Warmelo
1974, pl. 25 (fig. 3), pl. 33 (figs 3-4), Xhosa, general; 1981: 238, general.
Field survey: 1961: Bhaca, Mount Frere; Hlubi, Herschel. 1968: Mpondo, Mgazana
Mouth. 1969: Xhosa, Kentani; Thembu, Engcobo; Mpondo, Mevana; Xesibe, Mount
Ayliff. 1971: Mpondo, Libode. 1985: Mpondo, Libode (D & H).
BUILDING TECHNIQUES
Before sun-dried mud bricks and modern structures took over, some wattlework was
used, especially in the east of the area, in building the framework of hut walls. Fences,
including those for cattle enclosures, fowl-coops and open-air granaries were also built in
this technique, the latter mainly in the west.
1. uphahla: Mpondo. Frame for the wall of a cylindrical hut (Fig. 33). _
Seen in the eastern part of the area only and said to have been introduced there in the
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 33
uphahla, hut frame, Mpondo, Mbotye, 1948. Photo N. J. van Warmelo.
mid-nineteenth century. Strong saplings are planted in a circle as warps and thinner
sapling wefts are woven into them in chequer weave. On the frame of the old-style huts the
side pieces were not woven, but tied, to the vertical posts. This word is now generally used
for the roof of a stone-walled hut.
In the west, the roof thatch was held down by plaited ropes — one set, the warps,
fastened at intervals from the top to the edge, and the other set, the wefts, wrapping round
them, making rows of open wrapping (Fig. IC).
2. inyango: Xhosa, Mfengu. Formerly a small store hut on poles, now an ordinary store
hut (Fig. 34).
3. ingobe: Mpondo. Temporary rough hut of bent saplings for use while a permanent hut is
being made.
4. udladla: Xhosa, eastern Mpondo, Xesibe, Bhaca (Fig. 35). Open-air granary in the shape
of a tall cylinder, for storing maize, generally having a small door at the base. The warps are
long saplings planted in the ground in a circle. The wefts are thinner saplings and the weave
is chequer. This is an article typical of the western part of the Eastern Cape, but has been
seen in the east. One seen in Kentani in 1969 had the lower section covered with clay and the
inside lined with palm-leaves.
5. ubuhlanti, isibaya: general. Enclosure for cattle or small stock (Fig. 36).
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 49
0
vt,
PSC iL.
S S
ey N S
Re S S
ted XS S N 5
x NS SI ;
S| S
N A S iN
N N S N
8G N S S
¥ N HCE
$ S 5 B
S
Figure 35
udladla, open storage bin, Xhosa, Willowvale,
D & H 1985.
Figure 34 Figure 36 (below)
inyango, store, ‘Kafir’ (Xhosa), ‘Kafirland’. ubuhlanti, cattle enclosure, Mpondo, Libode,
After Graham, L. & Robinson, H. (1854). D&H 1985.
50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
6. indlwana yenkuku: general. Small
fowl-coop, similar in structure to a granary,
but roofed. Some have a short, roofed
passage to the door (Fig. 37). Individual
nests are made on a forked stick and fixed
against the wall inside the hut (Fig. 38)
(Davison & Hooper pers. comm. 1984).
7. uthango, ujilo: Xhosa, Bomvana;
impingelo: Bomvana. Wattlework fences.
Poles are planted in the ground and pliable
saplings are woven in close or open chequer
weave. Such fences were used for cattle "”@/wa74 yenkuku, chicken coop, Bomvana,
enclosures as well as gardens, screens Sloe he
(tkhusi) inside the hut and traps. They used
to be renewed each year, but for a long time
there has not been enough wood.
Figure 37
Techniques
Fabric: close or open chequer or twined
wattlework (Fig. 1P).
Beginning: warp, sticks planted in the
ground; or a forked stick (Fig. 36).
Shaping: placing of warps; bending of
warps for fowl-coop roof.
Shapes: cylindrical; conical; straight.
Edge: none.
Finishing: none.
Decoration: none.
Ornamentation: none.
Tools
An axe for cutting the material. Figure 38
; Nest, Mpondo, Libode, D & H 1984.
Materials
Wooden stakes and withies or creepers,
igonoti plant (Bomvana).
Makers
Men.
Records
Early: Van der Kemp 1799-1806 [1806: 437], Xhosa. Alberti 1803-1806 [1810:
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 51
104—5], Xhosa. Smith 183 1—1832 [1955: 108], Mpondo. Kay 1827 [1833: 117, 129, 362],
Xhosa, Mpondo. Morgan 1833: 34, Xhosa. Baines 1849 [1961: 169], Xhosa, Mfengu.
Shaw 1820-1856 [1860: 387], Xhosa. Bonatz 1834: 308, Thembu. Backhouse 1839
[1844: 236], Xhosa. Kropf 1846-1889 [1889: 99], Xhosa.
Recent: Scully 1901: 43, Hlubi. Kidd 1904: pl. 93, Mpondo. Muller 1926: 20-21,
Hlubi. Cook 1931: 158, Bomvana. Soga 1932: 409, Xhosa. Hunter 1936: 97, Mpondo.
Shaw & Van Warmelo 1972: 70, 72, 83, 84, 98, pl. 5, pl. 12 (fig. 1), pl. 14, Xhosa,
Mpondo, pi. 15, Xhosa, Mpondo, pl. 17 (fig. 2), Xhosa; 1974: 163, general. EL Eth. 5317,
Bomvana, 1969.
Field survey: 1968, 1969: Mpondo, Libode. 1971: Xhosa, Kentani. 1984: Mpondo,
Libode, SAM—12722 (D & H).
8. ucango: Xhosa; uhlango: Mpondo, Xesibe; uhlako: Bhaca. Doors of wicker chequer
were used on the old grass huts and many modern huts. The door was a rectangular
structure of thick withies, woven chequer, and it was sometimes plastered with mud
(Fig. 39). It was held in position across the doorway by a pole attached to its centre with
rope. Some, possibly old ones, were used as part of the gate of the cattle enclosure.
Techniques
Fabric: chequer wicker (Fig. 10).
Beginning: warps held by first row of weft
(Fig. LAA).
Shaping: none.
Shape: rectangular.
Edge: warps turn over into next gap; wefts
turn straight back into next row (Fig. 2W).
Finishing: none.
Decoration: none.
Ornamentation: none.
Tools
Axe for cutting material.
Materials
Withies. .
ers Figure 39
Men. ucango, door, Mpondo, Libode, 1967.
Height 1 728 mm. MM no number.
Records
Early: Swellengrebel 1776 [Hallema 1932: 13], Xhosa. Smith 1831-1832 [1955: 167],
Mpondo. Alexander 1835 [1837: 392], Xhosa. Shaw 1820-1856 [1860: 412], Xhosa.
Fritsch 1863-1866 [1872: 77], Xhosa. Kropf 1846-1889 [1889: 98], Xhosa.
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Recent: Cook 1931: 161, Bomvana. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1972: 70, general, pl. 9,
Mpondo. | rf
Field survey: 1948-1969: general. 1961: Mfengu, Peddie; Bhaca, Mount Frere.
CLOTHING AND ORNAMENT
CEREMONIAL COSTUME |
1. umhlambi: a palm-leaf dancing skirt (Fig. 40); ingcambeni, a palm-leaf head-dress; a
veil of rush or palm-leaf.
2. iphunga: a palm-leaf veil for the face; palm-leaf arm-bands and leg-bands. These items
make up the costume worn by the newly-circumcised initiates (abakhwetha) for the
dancing that ends the initiation period (Fig. 41). Each is a fringe of palm-leaf (Phoenix
reclinata Jacq.) of different lengths and split to different widths according to the item, and
held at one edge by one or two rows of wrapping or lattice wrapping with a strip of bark.
Each has ties of two-ply bark cord except the skirt, which has a plaited bark waist-string.
Bomvana fathers have to travel some distance to obtain the material, as the Phoenix palm
does not grow in Bomvanaland. Mfengu and Hlubi hold initiation schools, but no record
has been made of any special dress. Other eastern people may have held the schools in the
past, but have not done so for a very long time.
Figure 40 Figure 41
Detail of umhlambi, a khwetha initiate’s skirt, khwetha, initiate, Eastern Cape, c.1920.
Bomvana, Elliotdale, 1935. Photo Transkei Studio.
NCHM ET 35/838. Photo N. J. van Warmelo.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 53
Techniques
Fabric: double row of wrapping (Fig. 1C) for skirt; single row of lattice-wrap
(Fig. 1D) for accessories.
Beginning: the first bunch of fringe is held by the wrapping (Fig. 1AA).
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: cut where needed.
Shape: skirt: an increasing depth of fringe; accessories: rectangular.
Edge: none.
Finishing: knotted.
Decoration: none.
Ornamentation: none.
Tools
Not known.
Materials
Leaf of palm, Phoenix reclinata Jacq.; bark fibre for cord.
Makers
Men (the fathers of the initiates).
Records
Early: D’ Almada 1622 [1902: 92], Xhosa. Von Winkelman 1788-1789 [1932: 89],
Xhosa. Kay 1827 [1833: 76], Xhosa. Morgan 1833: 38, Xhosa. Shaw 1820-1856 [1860:
456], Xhosa. Kropf 1846-1889 [1889: 125], Xhosa.
Recent: SAM-—665, 1907, Xhosa. Cook 1927: 60-61, Bomvana. Brownlee 1928: 180,
Mfengu. UCT—29/1, 29/2, 29/33, 1929, Xhosa. Soga 1932: 255-256, Xhosa. NCHM ET
35/838, Bomvana, Elliotdale, 1935. Duggan-Cronin 1939, pl. 32, Xhosa. Tyrrell 1968:
190, Xhosa. Gitywa 1971: 117, Xhosa. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1974: 163, pl. 32 (fig. 1),
Xhosa.
Field survey: Nil.
OTHER RITUAL DRESS
1. ‘Straw caps’ are said to have been worn as charms by Mpondo twins (Schapera
1926: 126).
2. There are early accounts that when a widow left the homestead for the period of mourning
for her husband, she returned ‘clad only in a covering of woven grass’ (Shaw & Van
Warmelo 1988: 554). There is no detailed information about this costume.
ORDINARY DRESS
1. intshinga: Thembu only. A boater-shaped hat worn formerly by young Thembu men as
an ornament. It had a wide brim and a very small crown.
54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
2. umnqwazi: Thembu, Hlubi. The common variety of hat, worn by Thembu, Mpondo,
Mpondomise and Hlubi herdboys (Fig. 42). It has a normal crown and a narrow brim. The
Hlubi make another variety too, with a slightly arched crown and a sloping brim, but some
of them have also adopted the conical shape of their Sotho neighbours.
Techniques
Fabric: coiled multiple foundation, simple, beeskep or furcate sewing (Fig. 1X, Y, Z);
plain close twine (Fig. 1E).
Beginning: closed hole; bent foundation (Fig. 1GG).
Method of work: according to some, worked while material is green.
Shaping: placing of coil (Fig. 2D); adding extra warps (Fig. 2B).
Shape: boater, modified boater, inverted cone (Hlub1).
Edge: no edge; cross stitch; herring-bone; bound with tape or material.
Finishing: ends cut off in the fabric.
Decoration: use of horse hair on some.
Ornamentation: fine chain, leather, coloured braid, green wool.
Tools
An awl or wooden needle (Hlubi) or a thorn, for the sewn work.
Materials
Foundation: grass.
Sewing. grass or sedge.
Makers
Men and boys.
Records
Early: Von Winkelman 1788-1789 [1932: 85], Xhosa.
Recent: SAM—987, 1903, Thembu, Herschel. Miller 1926: 30, Hlubi. SAM—6062,
Figure 42
umnqwazi, herdboy’s hat, 1939, Mpondo, Libode. Depth of crown 55 mm. SAM-—6062.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 3)3)
1939, Mpondo, Libode. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1974, pl. 32 (fig. 2); 1988: pl. 78 (fig. 4),
Thembu, Umtata.
Field survey: 1961: Hlubi, Herschel.
3. incitsho: Bhaca. A sheath for the penis. Worn by circumcised men. Mount Frere, 1948
(Fig. 43).
Techniques
Fabric: plain close twine.
Beginning: not known.
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: flanging for first few centimetres then narrowing slightly to edge.
Shape: tubular.
Edge: warps bent straight back over plain row of material under two rows of weft.
Finishing: ends of warps cut off closely.
Decoration: three horizontal bands, same material, different colour.
Ornamentation: none.
4. ibhanti womdlezana: Thembu; isinggombo: Qwati (Thembu). A belt to support a
woman’s stomach after confinement. It is said also to be worn as an ornament in front by
women and behind by children.
Techniques
Fabric: straight sewn at wide intervals
(Fig. 1W).
Beginning: bent foundation (Fig. 1GG).
Method of work: not known.
Shaping: placing of foundation coil
(Fig. 2D).
Shape: long oval.
Edge: none.
Finishing: bound at the ends.
Decoration: none; use of coloured wool
for sewing; beads.
Ornamentation: none.
Tools
Not known.
Materials Figure 43
19 DEAE erase: incitsho, penis-sheath, Mpondo, Lusikisiki,
Sewing: three-ply fibre cord; wool. 1948. Length 49 mm.
Photo N. J. van Warmelo.
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: Louw 1964: 11, Mpondo, Port St Johns. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1988: 544,
general.
Field survey: 1969: Qwati (Thembu), Qebe Valley, SAM—9597.
ORNAMENTS
1. inquma: a headband of a Xhosa headman. It was made of monkey-hair warps twined
into a flat band with sinew thread wefts (Shaw & Van Warmelo 1988: 658, pl. 97 (fig. 3).
It has also been recorded among the Thembu, NCHM ET 35/347 (Fig. 44).
Techniques
Fabric: two or three rows of close twine to form a narrow band.
Edge: none.
Finishing: ends joined to form a circlet.
Materials
Warps: fine monkey hair.
Wefts: sinew.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: NCHM ET 35/347, 1935; Shaw & Van Warmelo 1988: 658, pl. 97 (fig. 3),
Xhosa.
Field survey: Nil.
2. In the late summer and autumn, when the grass is ripe, it has always been general
custom throughout to make and wear a large number of necklaces, bangles, bandoliers and
girdles (Fig. 46). The shiny flowering stalks of grasses of Digitaria spp., umphica, and
others are used.
A variety of plaits is used and the ornaments appear to be named according to the type
of grass or the type of plait used rather than to the object made. Later fashion has seemed
to favour narrow strands, but older examples are often wide flat bands, or groups of flat,
round, or square plaits (Fig. 1Q, R, S) sewn together at intervals or made into a fabric by
straight sewing (Fig. 45). Some are decorated with beads (Fig. 3Y).
Techniques
Fabric: a variety of plaits (Fig. 1Q—S). Sometimes plaits are sewn together in bunches
or as a flat fabric.
Beginning: a knot.
Method of work: made while grass is green (Thembu).
Edge: none.
Finishing: ends laid together with half-hitches (Fig. 3C) or spiny cone (Fig. 3D).
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 7)
Figure 44 Figure 45
=
inquma, twined headband, Thembu, Mqanduli, ibande, arm-band, ?Mpondo. Depth 55 mm.
1935. NCHM ET 35/347. SAM-—3355.
Figure 46
Plaited ornaments.
A. Eastern Cape. Width of band 20 mm.
SAM-—5922.
B. Mpondo, Flagstaff, 1901. Width of band
25 mm. SAM-—249b.
C. Mpondo, Flagstaff, 1901. Diameter of band
6 mm. SAM—249a.
Decoration: some have beads added.
Ornamentation: brass buttons.
Tools
None.
Materials
Flowering stalks of grasses, mainly Digitaria spp., or very thin or stripped sedge.
Records
Early: Backhouse 1839 [1844: 269], Mpondo. Dohne 1836—1844 [1844: 42], Xhosa.
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Recent: SAM-—249, 1901, Mpondo, Flagstaff. TM 35/353, TM 35/360, TM 35/419,
1935, Bomvana. SAM—5922, 1938, Eastern Cape. SAM-—8325, 1961, Thembu, Mganduli.
SAM--8634, 1948, Mpondo, Lusikisiki. Tyrrell 1968: 152, 154, 156, Bhaca. Gitywa 1971:
117-129, Xhosa.
Field survey: 1948: general, Eastern Cape. 1961: Thembu, Herschel, SAM—8534.
1969: Mpondo, Libode, SAM—9556.
MISCELLANEOUS
1. umtshayelo: general, a broom (Fig. 47). Not all but many brooms are made of a bundle
of grass or sedge stems, turned over and bound at one end with plaited horse hair, sedge
cord, cord made from grass stems or grain- or orange-bag fibre, store-bought string or
coloured cloth, to form a grip. The binding may pass over and under the outer grass stems
in a simple or patterned chequer weave, or the thread may be sewn through the head. An
alternative end 1s the spiny cone (Fig. 3D). In a fourth variety, the strands of the broom are
joined together at one end by a row of twining to form a fringe that is then rolled up and
bound at the grip to form the broom. In certain areas, for example in east Mpondoland,
makers are more particular than elsewhere about the style of their brooms.
Techniques
Fabric: binding; chequer weave (Fig. 1A); spiny cone (Fig. 3D); simple twine
(Fig. 1E); seizing; sewing through.
Decoration: none, other than the main technique, which may be decorative.
Ornamentation: sewn embroidery (Fig. 3X).
Tools
A needle to finish off the handle; shears to trim.
Materials
Warps (i.e. the strands of the broom): grass, sedge.
Figure 47
umtshayelo, broom, Mpondomise, Tsolo, 1935. Total length 510 mm. SAM—5508.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA Sy)
Weft: sedge, twisted bark strands, plaited horse hair, jute fibre, fine string, or cloth for
binding.
Makers
Women generally, but one old man was seen in Mpondoland (D & H pers. comm.
1984).
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: SAM—5508, 1935, Mpondomise, Tsolo. SAM—5551, 1936, Mpondomise,
Tsolo. SAM—6061, 1939, Mpondo, Libode.
Field survey: 1961: Xhosa, Thembu, Hlubi, Herschel; Bhaca, Mount Frere. 1961:
Thembu, Herschel, SAM-—8557. 1969: Thembu, Engcobo; Mpondo, Libode;
Mpondomise, Tsolo; Xesibe, Mount Ayliff. 1971: Mfengu, Sotho Location.
2. umichale: Hlubi. A bridle made of a four-strand plait of the bullock’s own tail hairs or
of grass. It is passed through the beast’s nose (Fig. 48).
Records
Early: Walker 1851 (in Backhouse &
Tylor 1862, pl. 15), Xhosa.
Recent: Muller 1926: 10, Hlubi. Shaw &
Van Warmelo 1981: 262, Hlubi, pl. 37
(fig. 2), Xhosa.
Field survey: 1961: Hlubi, Matatiele.
1969: Bhaca, Mount Frere.
3. isicheme: a muzzle. A muzzle made of
sedge and presumably woven, was put on to
calves to prevent them from sucking.
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981:
262, general.
Field survey: 1948: Bomvana,
Elliotdale.
4. Stick covering. The shaft of a dancing
stick may be covered with a chequer weave
(Fig. 1A) of sedge warp and string weft Figure 48
(Fig. 49). Hlubi man riding an ox with plaited bridle.
Matatiele, 1961. Photo B. S. Griffin.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
60
Figure 50
Figure 49
Covering of dancing stick, Xhosa. Total length
981 mm. NCHM ET 1239. Photo NCHM
umthwaso, rope, Mpondo, Libode, 1939.
SAM-—6067.
Figure 52
Figure 51
Wrapped strengthening for large pot, Mpondo,
Libode.
D & H, 1984.
Lusikisiki, 1935. Diameter of calabash 240 mm.
NCHM ET 35/453.
Wrapped sling for calabash (idliwa), Mpondo,
Records
il.
Recent: NCHM ET 1239
N
Field survey
Early.
108 (fig. 2).
680, pl.
Xhosa. Shaw & Van Warmelo 1988
9
Xhosa
Kentani
9)
1961:
. An all-purpose rope
leaves (F
be
1
Xes
daceae
umbeleso
sedge or Jr
general
f grass
intsontelelo
Xhosa
consisting of a thick three
kOe;
umthwaso
5
ig. 50). Used
i
y)
strand plait o
down thatch.
ing
for hold
especially
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 61
Records
Early: Kay 1827 [1833: 117], Bomvana.
Recent: Shaw & Van Warmelo 1972: 69, 73; 1974: 160, 164, pl. 32 (figs. 3, 4), general.
SAM-5626, Mpondomise, Tsolo, 1936. SAM—6067, Mpondo, Libode, 1939.
Field survey: 1955: Mpondo, Flagstaff, SAM—7418. 1961: Hlubi, Matatiele. 1969:
Bhaca, Mount Frere; Mpondo, Mevana. 1971: Mfengu, Sotho Location.
6. Sling. A sling or framework may be put round a small calabash for travelling. It consists
of two or more bound coils of sedge, with sedge warps fastened between them, and sedge
wefts wrapped (Fig. 1C) at intervals (Fig. 51).
7. Support. A band of wrapped weave is used by Mpondo to support and strengthen large
pots (Fig. 52).
Records
Early: Nil.
Recent: Killie Campbell Museum 217. NCHM ET 35/453, Mpondo, Lusikisiki, 1935.
Shaw & Van Warmelo 1981: 416, pl. 63 (fig. 6).
Field survey: 1961: Thembu, Hlubi, Herschel. 1984: Mpondo, Libode (D & H).
DISCUSSION
In the range of basketwork of the people of the Eastern Cape, the most notable were the
garden and general carrying baskets, the sleeping mats, the food and grain mats, and the
beer strainers. In addition, some basketwork techniques were used for ornaments and
other small items and in building.
Techniques
Fabric: Writers in the nineteenth century gave the impression, if not the actual
statement, that the most important, if not the only, technique used for actual baskets by the
Xhosa and the Thembu, with whom they were mainly in contact, was coiled sewn work. It
may be presumed that no actual statement to that effect was made because no other
technique was seen. A lot of this type of work, especially the particularly fine furcate
sewing has disappeared, though some examples survive in museums and a few more
recent, rougher examples were seen during the field studies. A heavier coiled sewing is,
however, used for garden baskets by Hlubi, some Thembu and some Bhaca, all of whom
have long been in contact with South Sotho and who use the term isiludu/isirudu which 1s
obviously related to Sotho seroto. This somewhat different type of coiled sewing may,
therefore, be a borrowing from their neighbours. Mpondo and Xesibe use fine simple
sewing over a multiple foundation for palm-leaf beer beakers. Coiled sewing is also used for
hats. The Mfengu must have maintained their coiled technique from their former practice in
KwaZulu-Natal. No examples of this were seen and it was doubtless overtaken by the
techniques taught in school. Weaving techniques are the most commonly seen today.
62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Lack of documentary evidence makes it difficult to determine all the techniques that were
used by people in the east of the area. For garden and general carrying baskets, the technique —
among all except the Xhosa, Thembu and Hlubi — was and still is split-warp twine, which in
southern Africa is shared only by the Ndebele of Mpumalanga. There is no evidence to show
whether or not, in former times, they used other techniques for such baskets.
Plain close twining is used throughout the area for food and grain mats. The Hlubi use
twined weave for hats, and the Bhaca used it for penis-sheaths.
Open twined weave is used generally for sleeping mats and other similar mats. Some
sleeping mats were seen in which the straight sewn technique had been used. This seems
to indicate a vestige of Khoekhoe influence, as Khoekhoe mats were sewn. Open twining
is also used for bags, fish bags, and strainers.
Whatever may have been the case in the past, the twined weave has been the most
important technique used in the Eastern Cape for some time now.
Twilled weave is used by Mpondo and Xolo for one type of beer strainer and, through
influence from KwaZulu-Natal, by the Nzimakwe and others for pouches.
Straight sewing is used for the other type of beer strainer throughout the area.
Wicker- and wattlework in chequer weave have been used mainly in building and
fences, as they have been in many parts of southern Africa. But such building techniques
are disappearing rapidly from the Eastern Cape.
Plaiting is used for rope and for ornaments.
Beginnings: Roughly the same range of beginnings is used throughout. In flat work,
woven or sewn, the elements are laid side by side and joined by the first row of weft or
sewing. For ascending woven work, when twined, the warps are bound or looped; when
twilled, the elements are knotted in pairs. Ascending coiled sewn work may start with a
closed or open ring of foundation, with the sewing or the foundation knotted, or with the
foundation bent and sewn over. A method of beginning that is now used for coiled sewn
work in palm-leaf, is the chequer square. It has not been established whether this was
introduced, nor, if so, where.
Shaping: The common method of increase or decrease in twined or straight-sewn work
is to add or take out warps or foundation elements, or to thicken or divide existing multiple
warps. Tension is sometimes used. For twilled beer strainers, the natural decreasing width
of the material is exploited. In coiled work the placing of the coil regulates the shape.
Shapes: Shapes are practical and dictated by the use for which the object is intended,
for example, flanging open from a narrow base to hold a heavy load on the head, or
straight sided or slightly narrowed at the mouth to contain liquids. A thin rectangular mat
can be rolled up easily and put out of the way when not in use.
Edges: Among the Southern Nguni, coiled sewn work seldom has a special edging, but
a change of material for the last round may be used.
The warp edges of flat twined work may be wrapped, scalloped, tucked back, or cut off
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 63
perhaps after a row or two of close twining. On the weft edges, the weft may be carried
straight down to the next row, twined back and forth in a decorative pattern, or wound two
or more times round the last warp, which may be thickened.
The circular twined baskets have a scalloped edge, sometimes after a few rows of
divided warps. On split-warp twine the edge is often preceded by a band of plain or
three-strand twine. Sometimes the last weft is different and stronger.
On beer strainers of both techniques, the beginning knots form the edge, sometimes
with the ends left as a fringe.
The warp edge of wicker is stapled.
The edge to the twilled pouch is a selvedge in which the strands are taken back on their
tracks. The upper part has its edge finished on the outside and the lower part on the inside,
for smoothness in opening or closing.
Finishings: The most common way of finishing is to cut the weaving or sewing strand off
with or without a knot, but in sewn work the end of the sewing strand may be oversewn
closely. On beer strainers the elements are turned inside and knotted. On bangles the strands
are usually bound together, or finished with a spiny cone. Broom handles are seized.
Decoration: The common forms of decoration on twined work are bands of a different
twine from the rest of the work, or of a different coloured material, generally horse hair.
Geometric designs, sometimes very striking, are made in woven techniques either by the
use of a different material or material of a different colour, or, in diaper, by lengthening or
altering the stroke. On the twilled pouch of the Nzimakwe a simple pattern is made by
using elements of the same material dyed. Very little decoration is recorded on coiled
sewn work, but again a design may be made by lengthening the stitch or by the use of a
different material, especially horse hair, in the body or for the edge. In the straight sewn
cylindrical work of beer strainers, a stripe may be made by altering the ply of some of the
foundation strands, or latterly, by introducing colour.
Ornamentation: Ornamental additions, added after completion of the work, are rare
and confined mainly to beads and brass buttons on belts and other ornaments.
Utilitarian additions: The few ornamental or utilitarian handles and lids recorded are
likely to have been the result of foreign influence.
Tools
Few tools are used.
To cut and trim the material before use and on the finished work: in former times a
spear blade must have been the tool used throughout, as there were no knives. Today a
knife or a pair of shears is used.
To pierce holes for the sewing strand: an awl, inyatyhoba, general; ilabo, Hlubi. These
have been recorded in wood, iron, iron wire, long thorns or the points of an aloe leaf. For
hat-making, the Mpondo use a wooden needle, isilanda.
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
To thread the sewing strand in straight-sewn work: a needle is used today.
To thread the sewing strand through the hole made by the awl in circular work: wooden
needles are said to have been used, but in general the sewing strand was pushed through
the hole made by the awl. Hlubi said they used two needles, one flat and one bent, or a
sailmaker’s needle, or the needle might be made from a bucket handle.
To hold the shape of beer strainers: a core of grass was used by Thembu and Mpondo
when making straight-sewn beer strainers.
Materials
The most important material for the fabric of baskets, mats and small articles was, and
still is, undoubtedly the stem of the sedges, Cyperus sp. or Scirpus sp. This was used for
the weft and often the warp elements of woven work, for the foundation and sometimes
the sewing of straight sewn work, and for the sewing and often the foundation of coiled
sewn work. Sedge grows especiaily near the coast and in rivers. It is also cultivated and
traded by individuals to areas where it does not grow, and where store-keepers sell it. It is
put out in the air to dry and then sorted, and according to the purpose, split and depithed or
left whole. Before use it is dampened.
Grass 1s, however, very important too, especially in the east or in areas away from the
coast or rivers, where sedge 1s scarce and has to be imported. Special grasses are used for
special purposes. Grass is plentiful in the autumn and perhaps because of its greater
availability, it is often used for the sewing as well as the foundation of coiled work, and for
the warps of woven work. It supplies all elements for plain and ornamental plaiting, for
which the shiny stemmed varieties were used green, which changed later, with ripeness, to
golden yellow. For broom making, the Thembu of Herschel heat the material to split the
stems before soaking them.
Rushes are often used instead of sedge for rough mats and bags.
Tail hair and dyed materials are used in decoration.
Materials of less frequent use, but often important, are bark and other plant fibres.
For building techniques, available woods are used, now especially wattle and other
Acacia species such as Port Jackson, Acacia saligna (Labill.) H. L. Wendl.
The following is a list of materials recorded.
GRASSES
ichancasi — grass, for food mats, Thembu, Mpondo
idobo — grass, for making rope, Mfengu, Sotho Location; Mpondo; ukwame, Bomvana;
for thatching, Xhosa; general term for long coarse grass
incema — grass or short rush (?sedge) for food mats, Thembu, Bhaca, Hlubi; or ornaments,
Vundla
incuma — grass for making maternity belts, Xhosa
ingca — general term for grass
injika — grass for bangles, general
inqgogotwane — grass for sewing of isiludu, Hlubi
intsimbane — grass, Setaria sphacelata Stapf & Hubb., Xhosa
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 65
ixonya — grass for making rope, general
ubhijo — grass, Digitaria spp. for ornaments, Mpondo, Bhaca
umgwigwi — grass, Eragrostis curvula Nees, Mpondo
umhluma — Hyparrhenia sp.
umphica — Digitaria natalensis Stent, for making ornaments, Thembu
umqungu — grass, Cymbopogon marginatus Stapf, for rope, Bomvana
umsingizane — Sporobolus pyramidalis P. Beauv., grass used for rope, Bomvana; for
garden baskets (isirudu), Thembu, Mfengu; for foundation coil of baskets, and hats,
Hlubi; for plaited sewing of coiled work, for hats, all except Xhosa; the whole plant is
used for coil foundation of grain bins by Hlubi of Herschel
umsuka — tough grass, Eragrostis plana Nees, Hyparrhenia hirta Stapf, Sporobolus
fimbriatus Nees, Xhosa, Thembu, Mpondo; grass, Hyparrhenia hirta, coil foundation,
Thembu, Hlubi, Sigogo; grass, Miscanthus capensis (Nees) Anderss., Xhosa, Umtata
umthala — Miscanthus capensis Stapf, for rough mats, Xhosa
urasi — grass from mountains for making ropes and brooms, Thembu, Mpondo; wrasi, grass,
for making beer baskets, Mpondo; irashu, Miscanthus capensis (Nees) Anderss., Xhosa,
Umtata; urasi, Xesibe, Bhaca; irasu, from Umzimvubu River, Mpondo
SEDGES
ikhwane — sedge, Cyperus latifolius Poir, for sleeping mats, Xhosa, Bomvana, Mpondo,
Mfengu
umzi (pl. imizi) — sedge, Cyperus textilis Thunb. and other species for baskets, food mats, beer
strainers, sleeping mats and maternity belts, general; and for sewing of grain bins, Hlubi.
Mpondo plant this variety in gardens or along rivers, where it also grows naturally.
incema — short variety of sedge for food mats, general
ingcema — split sedge for ingobozi, Vundla
irwantsi— sedge, Cyperus sexangularis Nees, for mats and food mats, Thembu, Mpondo
RUSHES
inkomfe — plant for making rope, Thembu, Bhaca
umcubhatha — rush or sedge, used for tobacco bag and sweating-mat or a baby’s mat, Bhaca
utyani — rushes for sleeping mats, Xhosa (Kay 1833: 147)
CREBRERS
umnxeba — wild vine, Vitis, general; any fibrous binding material, such as rope, Bomvana,
Bhaca
umsonto — rope made of uluzi, general
uzunqu — monkey-rope, Rhoicissus rhomboidea (E. Mey) Planch., Mpondo; uzungo, for
wetts of sledges, Mpondo; for oversewing edges of baskets, Xesibe, Bhaca
PLANT LEAVES
ilala—palm-leaf, Hyphaene coriacea Kunze (H. crinita), Mpondo, Libode and elsewhere;
for beer beakers, Mpondo
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
incaluka — plant of family Jridaceae, for ornaments, Mfengu (Kawa 1929)
isundu — palm, Phoenix reclinata Jacq., leaves of which are used for khwetha skirts,
Xhosa; usundu, Thembu
ithembu — used for rope, Thembu, Xesibe, probably Dierama sp.; leaves of Hypoxis sp. for
ornaments, Mfengu (Kawa 1929)
BARK
intsontelo — rope made of uluzi, general
itwhebu — fine inside bast of tree bark (Kropf 1915)
ixolo — the outer bark of a tree, general
uluzi — inner bark of Ficus sp. or any of the other smooth barks, for weft of twined mats
and for decoration of baskets; general
FIBRES
uluzi — fibre of Ficus sp., used for the sewing or weaving of sleeping mats, general
ikhala — agave, the fibre from its leaves 1s used for the weft of sleeping mats, Xhosa, Tshabo
ikhamanga — small species of aloe, or ordinary aloe
WITHIES
isiphingo — Scutia myrtina Kurz, for wattling cattle enclosures (Kropf 1915)
isithombothi — withies of Acalypha glabrata Thunb., for the sides of sledges
ugonothi — wood slivers for making wicker meat tray, Mpondo, Lwandile
ANIMAL MATERIAL
umsundulo — tendons from under the shoulder-blade of an ox, which provide sinew thread,
Xhosa
itshoba — ox tail hair, used for decoration, Xhosa, Mpondomise, Mfengu, Hlubi; horse tail
hair is also used
DYES
isimoyo — Acacia sp., pattern on pouches, Xolo
mtsekisane — Euclea sp., pattern on pouches, Xolo
Makers
Women make baskets, mats, some bags, sewn beer strainers, ornaments, brooms and
rope. Men make initiation costumes, hats, woven palm-leaf beer strainers, sewn baskets
(Hlubi), wicker meat trays and all wicker- and wattlework used in building. There is no
record of women doing wicker- or wattlework.
Basketwork used not to be a specialist craft. It has become more so although there was
usually, until recently, one person 1n a family who was able to make actual baskets. Some
people make baskets to sell to others or to the stores where others buy their baskets.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 67
Seasons
Although wicker- and wattlework can be done at any time, the late autumn and winter
are the main seasons for other basketwork because the material is then ready and, as far as
women are concerned, it is the slack season for agricultural work and thus they have time.
In the Eastern Cape this means April to August.
CONCLUSION
The people of the Eastern Cape were, by tradition, pastoralists and agriculturalists. For
many generations before they settled in the localities now included in the Eastern Cape,
they were on the move. It is understandable therefore that light, easily transported
equipment, renewable without dependence on, for example, deposits of clay for pottery,
should have been important. This seems to have been very marked in the west, where the
pottery tradition was weak, and the majority of utensils were of basketwork.
People moving into a new area bring their techniques with them, but it 1s nevertheless
obvious that they must use techniques for which the available material is suitable. This
was not much of a problem in this case, because the people came from a floristic region
with similar plant species, with the exception of the Hyphaene palm which does not occur
west of about the Umzimvubu River. One does not, therefore, find regular use of
palm-leaf in the basketwork of the west. The Phoenix palm-leaves are not strong enough
for general use but are used for the young men’s initiation costumes.
Inevitably the coverage of this study is uneven in several respects. The early records in
the literature refer mainly to the Xhosa and the Thembu, the people of the west, who were
the first with whom the early authors were in contact. For the same reason the earliest
examples in museums came from the western people, or from the eastern Khoekhoe to
whom they were traded. It is not possible, therefore, at this stage, to be precise about what
were the former differences in basketwork techniques between the respective Southern
Neguni groups. Proximity has brought about near uniformity in this respect.
These aspects are reflected in the range of sources and museum specimens quoted, as is
the fact that, as the years passed, authors and collectors of basketwork were active further
east and the western people were exposed to alternative materials and articles and became
less and less dependent on basketwork. In the fieldwork, it was attempted to cover the
whole area, and it became evident that, at the time that the study was undertaken, the
pattern was the same in that the eastern people still had great reliance on basketwork,
while those in the west used the technique less.
The following are the differences in technique, and the range of objects used, that
appear to have been characteristic of different people or in different areas.
1. Fine, furcate, coiled sewn work of Xhosa and Thembu, apparently used formerly by
them for all baskets, but now disappeared. It seems to indicate a different tradition from
the twined woven work of the others. It has not been recorded elsewhere in southern
Africa except on the edges of the main area, that is, in Lesotho, northwestern
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
KwaZulu-Natal and Bomvanaland. Xhosa and Thembu milk vessels were made in this
technique, whereas other people of the Eastern Cape used pottery or wooden milk vessels.
2. Split-warp twined weave used by Mpondo, Bomvana, Xesibe, Mpondomise and
Bhaca, for all baskets. This technique was also used by the Ndebele of Mpumalanga for
basketwork lids for pots, but was not seen elsewhere in southern Africa.
3. Straight sewn technique for furnishing mats, recorded from the west, presumably
reflects former Khoekhoe influence, since in both west and east of the area, the twined
technique is generally used for such mats.
4. Twilled palm-leaf weave used for beer strainers and pouches by the Mpondo, Xesibe,
Xolo and Nzimakwe, all living in the area of the Hyphaene palm, and having historical
connections with the KwaZulu-Natal region and proximity to the east African basketry. It
is, in fact, used further inland, wherever the palm or a suitable flat leaf is available.
5. Fine simple oversewing on a coiled foundation, with strands of palm-leaf, of the
Mpondo and Xesibe beer beakers. This technique again seems related to KwaZulu-Natal
and, of course, to the area of the Hyphaene palm. In other areas pottery is used for drinking
beer.
6. Plain coiled basketwork of Thembu and Hlubi seems to show definite South Sotho
influence, but it is, however, widely used.
7. Thickly coiled sewn grain bins in use in the northeast of the area instead of storage
pits as in the west.
8. Straight sewn beer strainers and twined food mats are characteristic of all
Nguni-speakers, but are also known among other peoples in southern Africa.
9. Woven penis-sheath, used by the Bhaca.
It is worth noting that, of the three predominant techniques used for actual baskets,
one — coiled, with simple oversewing — is common all over Africa and elsewhere in the
world; another — coiled, with fine furcate sewing and now obsolete among the Southern
Nguni — has been seen in recent times in rougher form, only in Bomvanaland and at the
southern border of Lesotho and the northwest corner of KwaZulu-Natal but not elsewhere
in southern Africa; and the third — split-warp twined weave — used in the east of the area,
was also used for one article among the Ndebele of Mpumalanga, but there is no other
record of it in southern Africa. The significance of these differences has not yet been
established.
During the last 200 years, much soft or domestic basketwork has been taught in the
schools. For the most part the technique has been a quicker, looser and less-durable coiled
sewing. Undoubtedly, a lot of these baskets were made for use, especially in the early
days, but in addition a lot were made for sale locally. From the early 1800s, there was
regular trade, and it is recorded that Xhosa brought baskets and mats to trade at the Fort
Willshire Fair. Baskets are still used by the Southern Nguni themselves, and some are
made for sale, but there has not been the large development of production for export, such
as has flourished in KwaZulu-Natal (Vukani) and Botswana (Botswanacraft).
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 69
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The financial assistance of the Human Sciences Research Council towards the
fieldwork for this study, and of the Centre for Science Development for the publication of
the work, is acknowledged with thanks. Opinions expressed and conclusions arrived at are
those of the author and are not to be attributed to the HSRC or the CSD.
Many people in the field, owners and creators of basketwork, Government officials,
and museum curators, have made this study possible. I am grateful to them all.
Acknowledgement is made, with thanks, to the following institutions for permission to
publish items in their collections — the Cape Archives (Fig. 20B), the National Museum,
Copenhagen (Fig. 4C), the Pitt Rivers Museum, Oxford (Figs 4B, 12), the National
Cultural History Museum, Pretoria. (Figs 18, 28, 40, 43, 51), Iziko Museums of Cape
Town, Art Collections Division (Fig. 4D) and the Statens Etnografiska Museum,
Stockholm (Figs 4A, 13).
In particular, many thanks are due to Mrs A. C. Lawton (Van Jaarsveld), who was
involved in the early stages of the study, and to the late Miss L. Phillip, who drew most of
the techniques. Thanks are also due to Mr Cedric Hunter for several drawings and for
work on the figures, to Mrs June Hosford for photography, and to the Editor, Miss
E. Louw. Permission from the late Mrs Van Warmelo to use some photographs taken by
the late Dr N. J. van Warmelo is gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
ALBERTI, L. 1810. De Kaffers aan de zuidkust van Afrika. Amsterdam: Maaskamp.
ALEXANDER, J. E. 1837. Narrative of a voyage of observation among the colonies of western Africa,
in the flagship Thalia; and of a campaign in Kaffir-land on the staff on the Commander-in-Chief in
1835. 2 vols. London: Colburn.
BACHMANN, F. 1901. Stidafrika: Reisen, Erlebnisse und Beobachtungen wahrend eines sechs-
jahrigen Aufenthaltes in der Kapkolonie, Natal und Pondoland. Berlin: Eichblatt.
BACKHOUSE, J. 1844. A narrative of a visit to the Mauritius and South Africa. London: Hamilton,
Adams.
BACKHOUSE, J. & TYLOR, C. 1862. The life and labours of George Washington Walker of Hobart
Town, Tasmania. London: Bennett.
BAINES, T. 1961. Journal of residence in Africa, 1842-1849, vol. 1. Edited by R. F. Kennedy. (The Van
Riebeeck Society Publications 42.) Cape Town: The Van Riebeeck Society.
BARROW, J. 1806. Travels into the interior of Southern Africa 1. 2nd ed. London: Cadell & Davies.
BELL, C. c. 1836. Drawing. Cape Archives, Elliot Collection.
BONATZ, A. 1834. Description of the mission settlements of Shiloh, in the country of the Tambookies;
with some account of the manners, customs, etc., of the neighbouring tribes. Periodical Accounts
relating to the Missions of the Church of the United Brethren established among the heathen.
London 13: 302-308, 347-352, 403.
BROWNLEE, F. 1928. The circumcision ceremony in Fingoland. Bantu Studies 3: 180-183.
BROWNLEE, F. 1944. Burial places of chiefs. African Affairs 43 (170): 23-24.
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
BROSTER, J. A. 1967. Red blanket valley. Johannesburg: Keartland Press.
BURCHELL, W. J. 1953. Travels in the interior of Southern Africa 1. London: The Batchworth
Press. (1st ed. 1822)
CARTER, G. 1927. The wreck of the Grosvenor containing a narrative of the loss of the Grosvenor,
East Indiaman, wrecked on the coast of Caffraria, 1782. (The Van Riebeeck Society Publications 8.)
Cape Town: The Van Riebeeck Society.
COOK, P. A. W. 1927. Customs relating to twins among the Bomvana of the Transkei. South African
Journal of Science 24: 516-520.
COOK, P. A. W. 1931. Social organisation and ceremonial institutions of the Bomvana. Cape Town:
Juta.
CORNNER, F. 1936. Correspondence. Social History Collections Division files in the South African
Museum, Iziko Museums of Cape Town.
D’ ALMADA, F. V. 1902. Tratado do successo que teve a nao S. Jodo Baptista. (An account of the
misfortune that befell the ship Sao Jodo Baptista.) Lisbon. In: THEAL, G. M. Records of south-
eastern Africa 8: 68—137. London: Government of the Cape Colony.
DE MIST, A. U. 1835. Dagverhaal van eene reis naar de Kaap de Goede Hoop en in die binnelanden van
Afrika, in 1802 en 1803. Penélopé, Amsterdam 8: 72.
DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY. 1940. Entomological Report. Survey of
native methods of storing grain. Unpublished MS, Department of Agriculture and Forestry, Union of
South Africa.
DOHNE, J. L. 1844. Das Kafferland und seine Bewohner. Berlin: Evangelisches Missionshaus.
DUGGAN-CRONIN, A. M. 1939. The Bantu tribes of South Africa 3 (Section 1). The Ciskei and
southern Transkei tribes (Xhosa and Thembu). Cambridge: Deighton, Bell; Kimberley: Alexander
McGregor Memorial Museum.
DUGGAN-CRONIN, A. M. 1949. The Bantu tribes of South Africa 3 (Section 2). The Mpondo and
Mpondomise. Cambridge: Deighton, Bell; Kimberley: Alexander McGregor Memorial Museum.
ENGLAND, R. 1967. Sketch book, 1835-1837 (Kaffir War). In: KENNEDY, R. F. (compiler)
Catalogue of pictures in the Africana Museum 3: 52. Johannesburg: Africana Museum.
FRITSCH, G. T. 1872. Die eingeborenen Sud-Afrikas, ethnographisch und anatomisch beschrieben von
Gustav Fritsch. Breslau: F. Hirt.
GITY WA, V. Z. 1971. The arts and crafts of the Xhosa in the Ciske1; past and present. Fort Hare Papers
5: 87-165.
GORDON, R. J. 1988. Robert Jacob Gordon Cape Travels 1. Edited by P. E. Raper & M. Boucher.
Johannesburg: Brenthurst Press.
GRAHAM, L. & ROBINSON, H. 1854. Scenes in Kafirland and incidents in the Kafir War of
1851—2-3, from sketches by two officers of the 43rd Light Infantry. London: Dickinson.
HALLBECK, H. P. & FRITSCH, J. G. 1826. Journal of a reconnoitring visit to the Tambookkie country
(1827). Periodical Accounts relating to the Missions of the Church of the United Brethren
established among the heathen. London 10: 295-324.
HALLEMA, A. 1932. Een bezoek van Mnr. Hendrik Swellengrebel aan den Kafferkapitein Jeramba.
Zuid-Afrika 9: 131—137.
HAMMOND-TOOKE, W. D. 1963. Kinship, locality and association: hospitality groups among the
Cape Neguni. Ethnology 2: 302-319.
HAMMOND-TOOKE, W. D. 1975. The symbolic structure of Cape Nguni cosmology. Jn: WHISSON, M.
G. & WEST, M. eds. Religion and social change in southern Africa. Anthropological essays in
honour of Monica Wilson. 15-33. Cape Town: David Philip.
HUNTER, M. 1936. Reaction to conquest. London: Oxford University Press.
KAWA, R. T. 1929. I-Bali lama Mfengu. Lovedale: Lovedale Press.
KAY, S. 1833. Travels and researches in Caffraria. London: Mason.
KIDD, D. 1904. The essential Kafir. London: Black.
KING, W. R. 1853. Campaigning in Kaffirland, or scenes and adventures in the Kaffir War of 1851—
1852. London: Saunders & Otley.
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 71
KRETZSCHMAR, E. 1853. Stidafrikanische Skizzen. Leipzig: Hinrichs’ schen.
KROPF, A. 1889. Das Volk der Xosa-Kaffern im Ostlichen Stidafrika nach seiner Geschichte, Eigenart,
Verfassung und Religion. Ein Beitrag zur afrikanischen Volkerkunde. Berlin: Evangelische
Missions-Gesellschaft.
KROPF, A. 1915. A Kaffir—English dictionary. 2nd ed. Edited by R. Godfrey. Lovedale: Lovedale
Mission Press.
LE VAILLANT, F. 1797. Voyage de F. Le Vaillant dans l’intérieur de l'Afrique 1. Nouvelle édition.
Paris: Desray.
LICHTENSTEIN, H. 1811. Reisen im stidlichen Africa in den Jahren 1803, 1804, 1805 und 1806 1.
Berlin: Salfeld.
LOUW, J. 1964. Catalogue of the Estelle Hamilton-Welsh collection. Fort Hare: University Press.
MACLEAN, J. 1858. A compendium of Kafir laws and customs, including genealogical tables of Kafir
chiefs and various tribal census returns. Mount Coke: Wesleyan Mission Press.
MORGAN, N. 1833. An account of the Amakosae, a tribe of Caffers adjoining the eastern boundary of
the Cape Colony. South African Quarterly Journal (2nd series) 1 (1): 1-12; 1 (2): 33-48; 1 (3):
65-71.
MULLER, F. 1926. Die Hlubikaffern. Land und Leben. Herrnhut: Missions-buchhandlung.
NAUHAUS, C. T. 1881. Ethnographische Gegenstande aus Siidafrika. Zeitschrift fur Ethnologie 13:
343-347.
PERESTRELLO, M. DE M. 1898. Relacgao do naufragio da nao S. Bento. (Narrative of the wreck of the
ship St Benedict). [1554] In: THEAL, G. M. Records of south-eastern Africa 1: 150—285. London:
Government of the Cape Colony.
SCHAPERA, I. 1926. Customs relating to twins in South Africa. Journal of the African Society 26:
117-137.
SCHONLAND, S. 1905. Arts and crafts of the Natives of South Africa. South African Journal of
Science Joint Meeting 3: 130-146.
SCULLY, W. C. 1901. A sketch of native life. In; SOUTH AFRICAN NATIVE RACES
COMMITTEE. The natives of South Africa: their economic and social conditions: 42-49. London:
Murray.
SHAW, E. M. & VAN WARMELO, N. J. 1972. The material culture of the Cape Nguni. Part 1.
Settlement. Annals of the South African Museum 58 (1): 1-101.
SHAW, E. M. & VAN WARMELO, N. J. 1974. The material culture of the Cape Nguni. Part 2.
Technology. Annals of the South African Museum 58 (2): 103-214.
SHAW, E. M. & VAN WARMELO, N. J. 1981. The material culture of the Cape Nguni. Part 3.
Subsistence. Annals of the South African Museum 58 (3): 215-445.
SHAW, E.M. & VAN WARMELO,N. J. 1988. The material culture of the Cape Nguni. Part 4. Personal
and general. Annals of the South African Museum 58 (4): 447-949.
SHAW, E. M. 1992. The basketwork of southern Africa. Part 1. Technology. Annals of the South
African Museum 100 (2): 53-248.
SHAW, E. M. 1993. The basketwork of southern Africa. Part 2. Basketwork of the Khoisan and the
Dama. Annals of the South African Museum 102 (8): 273-301.
SHAW, W. 1860. The story of my mission in south-eastern Africa. London: Hamilton, Adams.
SMITH, A. 1955. Andrew Smith and Natal. Edited by P. R. Kirby. (The Van Riebeeck Society
Publications 36.) Cape Town: The Van Riebeeck Society.
SOGA, J. H. 1932. The Ama-Xosa: life and customs. Lovedale: Lovedale Press.
SPARRMAN, A. 1785. A voyage to the Cape of Good Hope, towards the Antarctic polar circle, and
round the world: but chiefly into the country of the Hottentots and Caffres from the year 1772 to
1776 2. Dublin: White, Cash & Byrne.
STANFORD, W. 1958. The reminiscences of Sir Walter Stanford 1. Edited by J. W. Macquarrie. (The
Van Riebeeck Society Publications 39.) Cape Town: The Van Riebeeck Society.
TYRRELL, B. 1968. Tribal peoples of southern Africa. Cape Town: Books of Africa.
72 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
VAN DER KEMP, J. T. 1806. An account of the religion, customs, population, government, language,
history and natural productions of Caffraria. Transactions of the London Missionary Society 1:
432-468. (Reprint: Dr van der Kemp’s account of Kaffraria and the Kafirs. Cape Quarterly Review 1
(1882): 331-342.) :
VON WINKELMAN, F. 1932. Reisaanteekeningen van F. von W. 1788-9. In: GODEE
MOLSBERGEN, E. C. Reizen in Zuid-Afrika in de Hollandse tijd 4: 63-99. ’s Gravenhage: Nijhoff.
WALKER, G. W. see BACKHOUSE, J. & TYLOR, C. 1862.
WALTON, J. 1954. The forked sledge in Southern Africa. Ethnos 19: 24-33.
WEITZ, T. 1876. Journey into independent Kaffraria (1876). Periodical Accounts relating to the
Missions of the Church of the United Brethren established among the heathen. London 39: 327.
ABBREVIATIONS
AM MuseumA frica, Johannesburg (formerly Africana Museum)
Cambridge Cambridge University Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology
Copenhagen National Museum, Copenhagen
D&H Patricia Davison & Lindsay Hooper, Iziko Museums of Cape Town,
fieldwork 1984-1986
jell, East London Museum
FH F. S. Malan Museum, Fort Hare
Liverpool Liverpool Museum
MM McGregor Museum, Kimberley
NCHM National Cultural History Museum, Pretoria
PR Pitt Rivers Museum, Oxford
pers.comm. — personal communication
SAM South African Museum, now incorporated in Iziko Museums of
Cape Town
Stockholm Statens Etnografiska Museum, Stockholm
T™ Transvaal Museum, ethnographic collection, now in National
Cultural History Museum, Pretoria
Wen University of Cape Town collection, on permanent loan to
Iziko Museums of Cape Town
US University of Stellenbosch
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA 73
INDEX
A ceremonial costume 52
abakhwetha 52 charm 53
Acacia 34, 64, 66 clay 48, 67
Acacia saligna (Labill.) H. L. Wendl. 64 cloth 58, 59
Acalypha glabrata Thunb. 47, 66
agave 21, 66
agriculturalists 67
aloe 63, 66
Amatola Mountains 17
animal material 66
arm-band 52, 57
autumn 56, 64, 67
awit l421- 25, 28. 44 54.63
axe 05S) :
B
bag 4, 31, 32, 34, 35, 42, 44, 45, 58, 62, 64, 65, 66
bandolier 56
bangle 56, 63, 64
bark 18; 36,41, 44, 47, 52, 53, 59, 64, 66
base 14,15, 18, 20, 28, 34, 45, 46, 47, 48, 62
bast 30, 66
bead-4 22-55, 56, 57, 63
bed 43
beer 26, 27, 28, 39, 40, 41, 42, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 68
beer basket 26, 65
beer beaker 26, 27, 61, 65, 68
beeskep sewing 4, 15
berinmame: 5. lio) V8, 205222.25,.28:29° 30; 31,32, 34, 35,
36, 3D. 2M, All, ZR Ai Ae SU lh Sys), oye Ss oo, (OY
belt 55, 63, 64, 65
Bhacas 15.20.22, 24. 25, 26, 27, 28, 34, 35, 36,38, 39,
AORADeASNAAN AS Ay VAS) Sp 52, 55, 58, 59) Ol, 62.
64, 65, 68
binding 58, 59, 65
Bizana 22, 23, 34, 43
Bomvana 3, 15, 24, 26;:28, 31, 32, 33, 39; 40, 43, 45, 46,
DONE 52) 53, 58,59, 61, 64; 65, 68
Bomvanaland 52, 68
bone 42
Botswana 68
Botswanacraft 68
brass button 4, 57, 63
bridle 59
broom 58, 63, 64, 65, 66
bucket 29, 35, 64
building techniques 47, 62, 64
bullrush 44
C
Cala 42
calabash 60, 61
Cape Colony 29
Carnarvon 25
cattle enclosure 34, 47, 49, 51, 66
clothing 29, 52
colour 4, 19, 20, 36, 48, 54, 55, 58, 63
cord 47 155185 19525, 32, 33740, Al A244 ..52.,53; 55,
58
costume 52, 53, 66, 67
Cradock 17, 29
creeper 39, 5065
cutting tool 44
Cymbopogon marginatus Stapf 65
Cyperus 38
Cyperus latifolius Poir. 31, 65
Cyperus sexangularis Nees 65
Cyperus sp. 64
Cyperus textilis Thunb. 14, 18, 65
D
Dama 3
dancing stick 59, 60
decoratiom4 518319205210 25,28, 302 3115 325347 35,
36, 39, 41, 44, 45, 47, 50, 51, 53, 54, 55, 57, 58, 63,
64, 66
dialect 3
Dierama sp. 66
Digitaria natalensis Stent 65_
Digitaria spp. 56, 57, 65
door 39, 43, 48, 50, 51
Dwesa 20
dye(s) 21, 34, 41, 63, 64, 66
E
East London 44
Basten Cape lsuils) 2002304; 26, 33.46, 52, 51.50:
61, 62, 67, 68
edges) alas iSi 2 On 22525 28s 295 30 3 132) 34535;
36, 39, 40, 43, 44, 45, 47, 50,51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56,
ST OING2Z5635.071
Eilioidale 32; 335.45, 50552, 53,59
embroidery 4, 58
Emigrant Xhosa 25, 26
Engcobo 20, 21, 34, 36, 38, 42, 47, 59
Eragrostis curvula Nees 65
Eragrostis plana Nees 65
Euclea sp. 34, 66
F
fabhiCG Sa loplS. 20522, 25.02 Oa 0 ol 824 345.55, 50:
39, 40, 42, 44, 45, 47, 50,51, 53,54, 55, 56, 58, 61, 64
fat 24
fence 47, 50, 62
fibre 21, 25, 36, 42, 44, 53, 55, 58, 59, 64, 66
Ficus sp. 66
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
imaclsumey Bs 1S, 2, Zils 22, 23), 24), ZO, 23, 30, 32s 33,
34°36, 38) 39), 42,43), 45), 46), 47, Sl 2 Sn Ds 5D0:
58, 59, 60, 61
finishine(s))3; 15, 18, 20) 25, 28) 305315 325345 35, 36,
39, 41, 44, 45, 47, 50, 51, 53, 54, 55, 56, 63
fish 31, 45
fish bag 31, 32, 62
fish-trap 45
Flagstaff 20, 27, 28, 38, 40, 42, 45, 57, 58, 61
food 24, 26, 27, 28, 33, 36
food mat 37, 61, 62, 64, 65, 68
forked stick 50
forked tree trunk 47
Fort Willshire Fair 68
fowl-coop 47, 50
frame 47, 48, 61
Fraserburg 25, 26
fringe 4, 40, 41, 52, 53, 58, 63
furnishing mat 43, 68
G
garden basket 14, 15, 19, 21, 22, 61, 65
general purpose basket 22, 23, 61
geometric design 63
German 23, 24
girdle 56
Gonaqua 1, 26
Grahamstown 26
grain bin 34, 35, 65, 68
grain mat 61, 62
granary 48, 50
MASS ID, G5 WD, Zl, 2, 2D, 20s 235 29; 305 311, 35; 385 40,
AV, Ny Say S4ty DDy SO, Dy Noy), O41, CD
Great Fish River 26
grinding stone 36
group 1, 18, 36, 67
H
hair 19, 20, 21, 54, 56, 58, 59, 63, 64, 66
handle 4, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 31, 33, 34, 35, 42, 43, 45, 58,
63
Harding 3, 37, 38
hat 53, 54, 61, 62, 63, 65, 66
headband 56, 57
head-dress 52
herdboy 54
Herschel 20, 21, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 45, 47, 54, 55, 58,
59, 61, 64, 65
Hlubi 3, 20, 21, 22, 25, 26, 28, 34, 35, 36, 38, 40, 42, 43,
44, 45, 47,51, 52,54, 55,59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 68
hut 43, 47, 48, 50, 51
Hyparrhenia hirta 65
Hyparrhenia hirta Stapf 65
Hyparrhenia sp. 35, 65
Hyphaene coriacea 34, 42, 65, 67, 68
Hypoxis sp. 66
I
ibande 57
ibhanti womdlezana 55
icanst 43
ichancasi 64
idliwa 60
idobo 64
igonoti 50
ijomo 22
ikhala 66
ikhamanga 66
ikhusi 50
ikhwane 31, 65
ilabo 63
ilala 27, 65
imbenga 25
imijijwa 40
imizi 65
impingelo 50
incaluka 15, 66
incema 64, 65
incitsho 55
incuma 64
indlwana yenkuku 50
ingca 64
ingcambeni 52
ingcaza 27
ingcebe 22
ingceke 23, 27
ingcema 65
ingobe 48
INZObOZI Ns 18, 19222752 865
inhlambo 42
initiate 52, 53
injika 64
inkomfe 65
ingogotwane 64
inquma 56, 57
intluzo 40, 41
intlwayelelo 32, 33
intshinga 53
intsimbane 64
intsontelelo 60
intsontelo 66
inyango 48, 49
inyatyhoba 63
inzwazwa 22
iphunga 52
igaku 26, 28
igindiva 29
irashu 65
Iridaceae 15, 21, 60, 66
iron 14, 63
irwantsi 65
isibaya 48
isicamba 43
isicangca 43
isicheme 59
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA VS
isidladla 20
isigcobo 44
isthlalo 43
isithlenga 42
isiketho 42
isikwamu 33
isilanda 14, 63
isileyi 46
isiludu 20, 23, 61, 64
isilulu 34, 35
isimoyo 34, 66
isinggombo 55
isinyati 23
isiphingo 66
isirudu 20, 21, 61, 65
isithebe 36, 37, 38, 39 -
isithombothi 47, 66
isitya 26, 27, 28
isixazi 39
isiximba 34, 35
isongulo 43
isundu 66
itala 14, 29
ithembu 66
ithunga 25
itshoba 66
itwhebu 66
ivovo 40, 41
ixamba 31
ixolo 66
ixonya 65
Ixopo 28
Izingolweni 37
K
Kanna Kraal 25
Kei River 26
Kentani 19, 20, 38, 45, 47, 48, 51, 60
Khoekhoe 1, 44, 62, 67, 68
Khoisan 3, 24
khwetha 52, 66
King William’s Town 38, 45
knife/knives 19, 21, 63
KwaZulu-Natal 1, 3, 33, 42, 61, 62, 68
L
language 3
leg-band 52
Lesotho 33, 34, 67, 68
Libode 19, 20, 27, 28, 31, 32, 37, 38, 39, 42, 44, 45, 47,
49, 50, 51, 54, 55, 58, 59, 60, 61, 65
nel 255 29530533203, 68
log 47
loop 14, 19, 36, 40, 41, 42
Lugangeni 35
Lusikisiki 20, 22, 23, 37, 38, 42, 43, 46, 55, 58, 60, 61
Lwandile 39, 66
M
maize 17, 20, 31, 46, 47, 48
maker(s)
boy 54
men 21, 28, 36, 39, 42, 47,50, 51, 53, 54, 59, 66
not known 15, 22, 30, 34
women 14, 20, 21, 26, 28, 31, 33, 38, 42, 44, 46, 58,
59, 66
Mambookie 24
Matatiele 21, 45, 59, 61
matenalsil, 14215, 19) 21, 22, 24 05. 26, 28, 30731533;
34, 35, 38, 39, 42, 44, 46, 47, 50, 51,53, 54, 55, 56,
57, 58, 64, 67
Mbo 18, 26
Mbotye 48
Mbotye Bay 45, 46
measure 26
bucket 22, 24, 29
bushel 14
meat 39, 66
medicine 33
metal 1, 42
Mevana 38, 47, 61
Mfengu 3, 15, 18, 20, 22, 23, 26, 34, 38, 43, 45, 48, 51,
52, 53, 59, 61, 64, 65, 66
Megazana Mouth 47
milk basket 24, 26
milk pail 24, 25
milk vessel 25, 68
Miscanthus capensis (Nees) Anderss. 65
Miscanthus capensis Stapf 65
miscellaneous 58
modern basket 23
mokotlo 31
monkey-rope 65
moseme 43
Mount Ayliff 20, 27, 28, 34, 38, 46, 47, 59
Mount Frere 22, 26, 34, 35, 36, 38, 42, 45, 47, 52, 55, 59, 61
Mipondoyssal sl S595 205225 23/246, 2728) 332s
33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48,
AOS SON SIS S25 534 S455 59502515 58559) 6056162,
63, 64, 65, 66, 68
Mpondoland 1, 36, 58, 59
Mpondomise 3, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 26, 36, 37, 38, 41, 42,
43, 45, 54, 58, 59, 61, 66, 68
Mpumalanga Province 15, 62, 68
Mganduli 41, 42, 57, 58
Msikaba River 36
mtsekisane 34, 66
mud 34, 47, 51
muzzle 59
N
Nets 375.38
Ndebele 62, 68
Ndzundza 15
necklace 56
needle 14, 21, 35, 42, 44, 54, 58, 63, 64
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
nest 39, 50
Nggeleni 32, 38, 42
Nguni-speakers 1, 3, 68
Nhlangwini 3
nqoboko 44
Ntu-speaking people 3
Nzimakwe 3, 22, 33, 34, 45, 62, 63, 68
O
oil drum 34
ordinary dress 53
ornament 29, 43, 52, 53,55,56,57, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66
ornamentation 4, 15, 19, 20, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35,
36,39) 4 44e A547, 50) 5, 535545 55. SONOS
ox (oxen) 20, 46, 59, 66
P
palm 52, 53, 66, 67
palm-leaf 22, 23, 26, 27, 28, 29, 33, 34, 42, 48, 52, 61, 62,
65, 66, 67
pastoralists 67
Peddie 23; 383-43; 45; 52
penis-sheath 55, 62, 68
Phoenix reclinata Jacq. 52, 53, 66, 67
porridge 39
Port Jackson 64
Port Shepstone 20, 33, 34, 41, 42, 45
Port St Johns 20, 23, 24, 28, 56
pot 60, 61, 67, 68
pottery 67, 68
pouch 33, 62, 63, 66, 68
Q
Qawukeni 45
Qebe Valley 21, 56
Quthing 3, 22, 23, 42, 45
Qwati 55, 56
R
egos 3), 114, IS, 20, Ail, 22, WA, AO, 2S, 30, 32, 33, 34),
36, 38, 39, 42, 43, 45, 46, 47, 50, 51, 53, 54, 56, 57,
595/60; 61,67
reed 39
Rhoicissus rhomboidea (E. Mey) Planch. 47, 65
ritual dress 53
roof 48, 50
roofing mat 24
rope 35, 48, 51, 60, 62, 64, 65, 66
rush 31, 52, 64, 65
S
sapling 35, 48, 50
school 23, 24, 52, 61, 68
Scirpus sp 64
screen 43, 50
Scutia myrtina Kurz 66
seasons 67
sedge [40 15, 17, 19) 21; 22) 23; 24, 25,28) 29s mosnoen
42, 44, 45, 46, 54, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 64, 65
seed 32, 33
seroto 20, 61
Setaria sphacelata Stapf & Hubb. 64
shape 4, 1/4, 15, 18, 20, 22, 23. 25, 26,28) 30,3ihS2e34"
35, 36, 39, 40, 42, 44, 45, 47, 48, 50, 51, 53, 54, 55,
62, 64
shaping 4, 15, 18, 20, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 39,
40, 44, 45, 47, 50, 51, 53, 54, 55, 62
shears 58, 63
Shiloh 15, 26
shrimping bag 32
shroud 43
Sigogo 20, 65
sthtja 26
sinew thread 44, 56, 66
sitting mat 43
skimmer 39, 43
skimming spoon 42
skin 20
skirt 52, 53, 66
sledge 35, 46, 47, 65, 66
sleeping mat 43, 44, 61, 62, 65, 66
sling 60, 61
snuff-box 30
Sotho 20, 34, 43, 54, 61
Sotho Location 59, 61, 64
South Sotho 20, 31, 34, 61, 68
Southern Nguni 1, 3, 34, 45, 62, 67, 68
spear blade 19, 63
Sporobolus fimbriatus Nees 65
Sporobolus pyramidalis P. Beauv. 65
St Cuthbert’s Mission 24
stake(s), wooden 46, 47, 50
stick 50, 59, 60
stick covering 59, 60
storage basket 25, 29
storage bin 49
storage pit 68
store hut 48
strainer 39, 40, 41, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 68
straw cap 53
string 44, 52, 58, 59
summer 56
Sundays River 17
support 55, 61
sweating-mat 64, 65
T
technique 1, 3, 4, 7, 14, 18, 23, 24, 26, 39, 43, 47, 58, 61,
62, 63, 64, 67, 68
techniques including beginnings, fabric, shaping, shape,
edge, finishing, decoration, ornamentation 3, 14, 15,
18s, 205 22, 25, 28; 29, 30) 35 32, 345 So SOS aas
42, 44, 45, 47, 50, 51, 53, 54, 55, 56, 58, 61, 68
Tecomaria capensis Spach 47
BASKETWORK OF SOUTHERN AFRICA Td,
thatch 35, 48, 60, 64
Thembu 3, 14,15, 17, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28,
29, 30, 31, 34, 35, 36, 38, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46,
AL, Sil. S35 SAK S55 DOs Diy Dish os Olly WAS (4ENTOS)5 LOH
67, 68
thorn 54, 63
thread 36, 56, 58, 66
tobacco bag 31
LOOMS) 145 15, 19, 21), 22, 25, 28, 30) 31, 33, 34, 35, 38,
BONA A445, 47, 50; 51, 53, 54, 55,57, 58, 63, 68
trade 64, 67, 68
trap 45, 50
tray 24, 39, 66
Tshabo 66
Msolom95205215 22° 24. 36, 37, 38,41, 42, 43. 45,58, 59:
61 2
PIMC IMA loon Sle 32. 35, 36,40. 43, 44545. 50;
DAW) 50,).57, 50, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68
twins 53
U
ubhijo 65
ubuhlanti 48, 49
ucango 39, 51
udladla 20, 48, 49
ugonothi 39, 66
uhlako 51
uhlango 39, 51
ujilo 50
ukhuko 43
ukwame 64
uluzi 65, 66
umahambehlala 43
umbeleso 60
umcubhatha 65
umgodlo 31
umgwigwi 65
umhlali 47
umhlambi 52
umhluma 65
umichale 59
umngqungu 31
umnqwazi 54
umnxeba 65
umnyazi 15, 22, 23, 26, 28
umphica 56, 65
umqungu 65
umsingizane 65
umsonto 65
umsuka 65
umsundulo 66
Umtata 55, 65
umthala 65
umthwaso 60
umtshayelo 58
Umvume Springs 27, 28, 32, 46
umzi 65
Umzimkulu 3
Umzimvubu River 65, 67
umzwazwa 22
unyati 15
uphahla 47
urasi 65
usundu 66
uthango 50
utyani 65
uzungo 47, 65
uzunqu 65
uzwazwa 31, 32, 45
Vv
veil 52
Vitis 65
Vukani 68
Vundlase lS. 20522523. 26.215 45, 64. 65
W
waist-string 52
wall 25, 43, 46, 47, 48, 50
watertightness 1, 24
wattle 4, 47, 64
wattlework 3, 47, 50, 62, 66, 67
weave 3, 15, 36, 48, 50, 58, 59, 61, 62, 68
wicker 3, 4, 39, 46, 51, 62, 63, 66, 67
wild vine 65
Willowvale 20, 38, 42, 49
winnowing 14, 15
winter 67
wire 63
withies 47, 50, 51, 66
wood 39, 46, 50, 63, 64, 66
wool 54, 55
x
Xalanga 21
Xesibe 3, 15, 20, 22, 24, 26, 27, 28, 33, 34, 38, 39, 40, 43,
46, 47, 48, 51, 59, 60, 61, 65, 66, 68
Mhosaies wl slam lS O52 002252324 262i
DS 2 OF SON BE O2. SANS 504 36s 59, 42, 45144. 45,
47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 53, 54, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 64,
65, 66, 67, 68
Xolo 3, 40, 41, 42, 62, 66, 68
Z
zigzag 3, 18, 31, 32, 40, 44, 45
Zulu 3, 34
Re ay
To
= sh
5
- ee is , . 7
I a¢€ i a a
+ =a ‘ - c
a = B . * — iowa, =" :
5 i i a - cs ae =
Ks &eue5 i tiasgimae dhl Tbe nar
Do al es 4 oe aoe =
: : F : 4 /
’ ; , - =a = Pew Te >
ea ee! = | thang: EON Te @, SE;
a “3 iy L ° y a on uy .
\ E
A 5 = ,
= ! ; f ; ;
- Cae eM ' = ne
i { i. - - i .
c eas ee wet ome i ih is
= — 2
fj» = Fr A " -
ie * zs ar : : sd
= op ( Sto = £, - :
7 ‘ } Fi
z aa ) ae ¢ Opaee Eos Cad og \ “
1 7 1 a. > - Lis i r
« = t= = Seyi ,
e F 5 t a
Bs ‘ : eto F
y a) | a ade i aa a
> y Lap | = t ic u
‘ D eee : :
= ;
= 3 ie = . OP)
i 4 re ad a i : 1 i Ne
, + ; ~ ‘ a iy i i =
“7 - hae e
is = G iq a - rs cl ra
‘ 2 7
: Fs Ps es Ne —-
i ait . ¥ m7 de =e = = = i
t ‘ i = _- “i i — det =
x a 6 ome) we - Fe i 7 Piro ie
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 111 Band
February 2004 Februarie
Patton) Deel
THE FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN
ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD
by
DUNCAN MILLER
&
NIRDEV DESAI
The Council of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
(incorporating the South African Museum)
gratefully acknowledges the financial contribution of
the University of Cape Town
towards the cost of publication of this paper.
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and
review articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
i DES, 5), ED, 4-5, TS, tn A, SLES, FO), CLD, te.)
HO), &, COD, TM, OGD), IND, 5, 7, eat), IAA), ISS),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 190 3
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
THE FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF
SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD
by
DUNCAN MILLER
Department of Archaeology, University of Cape Town,
Rondebosch, South Africa 7701
e-mail: [email protected]
&
NIRDEV DESAI
c/o Department of Archaeology, University of Cape Town,
Rondebosch, South Africa 7701
(With 12 figures and 2 tables)
[MS submitted 8 October 2001]
[MS accepted 15 February 2002|
ABSTRACT
Gold has been produced in southern Africa for nearly 1000 years. This paper records the study of gold
assemblages from the South African sites of Mapungubwe and Thulamela, and from sites in modern
Zimbabwe. The gold fabrication technology was indigenous, and derived from that employed in copper
working. Sub-spherical gold prills, probably formed by pouring molten gold into water, were punched
using a four-sided tapered punch to make solid gold beads without a join. Some of these were decorated
by regularly spaced indentations in the outer margins. Other beads were made from wrapped strip or
short lengths of wire, which was hammered rather than drawn. Hammered gold sheet was attached to
presumably wooden forms using square section tacks cut from tapered rod and hammered in cold,
forming a flattened head. The sheets and tack heads were scratch burnished to create a sheen on the
exposed surfaces. Gold sheet was also cut into narrow strips for helical wound bangles, which were also
made from hammered wire. There was no evidence of soldering or heat treatment other than annealing.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 111 (2), 2004: 79-102, 12 figs, 2 tables.
VD
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CONTENTS
PAGE
| Gas goys (Nios (0) « Manna nee na einen rete imp. isn one th 9th eeor do cnaa omeBeoCe aaao UE Mea dsebacObNobaGboccoboodov9oqcusoauosae 81
Prévious Studies iidi.csGiiee chink Lape aan oh cna beat coe ea San eac eels een oak RS, 9 81
The material studieds icici nyt eect ane dat ere see ieee betes ed wc eu ducises #4 Socal os taco nate cee ee 82
Metallography and! reconstruction om fabrication technolo pyc seers receeeceetee nese eee eee eee 83
Comparison with other: metal assemblag estes. sccscse-cceeceecees cesta cee ne cor seco eee ee eee 93
Concluding remarhsy. os. c.c0:ccssalgantedounceedcobeonce aia dest SacBee cet thats LEAN a eet shenctssanaete ee 94
Acknowledgements... .33s.2edcssacocelesteas Sovenaee stance cuadedocnanecnceatee cuayat Secestenceeedsteaesch Geese eee ee ee 94
es i 11 0,21 a SR AE ER ARE I MRR Sg ol GB ae a so en SBR arog oe Gade SoncddcnGtioocoasoseonaaocsececs 95
ZAMBIA | MOGAMBIQUE
ANGOLA ingombe Iliede
ZIMBABWE
Ngoma
Divuyu
© Danangombe
Great Zimbabwe o
NAMIBIA | Bosutswe o :
K2 and Mapungubwe
oO’ Thulamela
BOTSWANA
Oo
Broederstroom
LESOTHO
SOUTH AFRICA fs)
Kwagandaganda
Figure |
Map of southern Africa, showing the archaeological sites mentioned in the text.
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 81
INTRODUCTION
The clearest evidence for the early use of gold in southern Africa is in the form of gold
mines on the Zimbabwe plateau, with dates that span the last 1000 years (Summers 1969;
Swan 1994). Gold mining was stimulated by increased trade with the East Coast, that
started in the late 1st millenntum AD (Phimister 1976; Miller et al. 2000). This trade
contributed to significant economic changes that in turn led to the rise of a complex social
structure, with an elite living in walled hill-top sites like Mapungubwe, Great Zimbabwe
and Thulamela (Huffman 1996). The East Coast trade was usurped by the Portuguese at
the beginning of the 16th century AD, but it never flourished to the same extent as the
earlier Islamic trade, and gold production declined sharply. Various lines of evidence
allow us to describe the history of indigenous gold mining and the gold trade (Miller et al.
2000), but there are technical questions pertaining to the production and fabrication
technology of jewellery manufacture which have not been answered satisfactorily. This
paper reports the visual inspection and metallographic study of a representative sample of
southern African archaeological gold artefacts, in order to describe the techniques used in
their manufacture.
PREVIOUS STUDIES
Previous studies of southern African gold artefacts have not reached a consensus on the
fabrication technology employed. The early studies were either very superficial, or
consisted in making interpretations based on very small sample sizes. Fouché (1937)
reported studies of a small sample of gold artefacts from Mapungubwe (see Fig. 1)
conducted by a number of metallurgists. Weber studied eight beads from this site and
together with Pearson noted that the beads had punched holes (Fouché 1937).
Nevertheless, Pearson also suggested that these beads may have been cast with holes in
place (Fouché 1937; Meyer 1998). Stanley observed that the Mapungubwe gold beads
were of punched and wrapped varieties, and that cold and hot working as well as casting
were used in the fabrication process (Fouché 1937). Beck attempted to measure the
density of the gold as a test for purity, but submersion in water for hydrostatic weighing
was unsuccessful due to gas bubbles sticking to the beads (Fouché 1937). Beck also
studied some samples microscopically for methods of manufacture, which revealed that
individual beads were either wrapped or cast. The gold foil sheets were made by
hammering on a flat surface and were cut into sections with a sharp-edged object. It
appeared that the holes for nails were punched in, and not drilled. It was speculated that
some beads may have been drawn wire bent around, or wire was flattened and then
punched through the centre when cold (Fouche 1937).
The gold work from Mapungubwe, Great Zimbabwe, Ingombe Ilede and Dhlo Dhlo
(Danangombe) was described in much greater detail by Oddy (1983, 1984). Oddy
concluded that the fabrication technology was relatively unsophisticated, and that there
was no evidence to suggest that it was not indigenous, particularly because of the absence
of soldering. Hammered foil was attached to wooden forms by creasing and folding, and
8&2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tacked into place with gold pins (Oddy 1984: 72). Three types of beads were identified
from Mapungubwe: cast flattened spheres with the holes apparently ‘cast-in’; similar
beads with grooved margins; and beads of wrapped ‘wire’ made by hammering. Some of
the wire from Great Zimbabwe showed signs of wire drawing, and wire drawing
implements (and other blacksmiths’ tools) were recovered from Ingombe Ilede.
Nevertheless, gold wire from this latter site appeared to have been hammered rather than
drawn. In other respects there was no significant difference between the gold from the
various Iron Age assemblages. Meyer (1998) reiterated Oddy’s interpretations for the
gold from Mapungubwe.
THE MATERIAL STUDIED
Gold assemblages studied here came from Mapungubwe and Thulamela in South
Africa, and from historic collections made in Zimbabwe (Fig. 1). The Mapungubwe
cluster of sites dates from the early 11th to early 14th centuries AD, but the important
Mapungubwe gold burials date to the mid to late 13th century AD (Vogel 1998; Meyer
1998). Most of the gold from Mapungubwe was poorly provenanced, but by far the
majority originated from the burials on the Hill (Fouche 1937; Miller 2001). Much of the
Zimbabwean material is thought to have come from Great Zimbabwe (Desai 2001), but
some of it may have originated from other Zimbabwe culture sites looted in the late
19th century AD (Swan 1994; Miller 2002). Consequently, the material from Zimbabwe
may span the period from the 14th to mid-19th centuries AD (Huffman 1996). Thulamela
has radiocarbon dates ranging from the 14th to 17th centuries AD (Kusel 1992; Steyn et
al. 1998). Most of the gold from Thulamela was collected in 1996 from the two elite
burials excavated by the team led by Sidney Miller (Steyn et a/. 1998) and from the earlier
midden excavations (Kusel 1992).
Two sets of samples from Mapungubwe were analysed metallographically to
characterise the fabrication technology in detail (Table 1—see page 96). The first set,
M1231 A-Q consisted of representative material selected by Professor Andrie Meyer of
the University of Pretoria from their collections for analysis. There were seven beads, one
gold globule, four pieces of gold helices, two tacks, one wire, one foil sheet and one strip.
Two additional beads from the University of Pretoria collections, M870 and M1118 were
studied visually without analysis. The second set analysed, UCT A—L, was a small
collection of Mapungubwe gold work in the collections of the University of Cape Town
(UCT). This group consisted of four tacks, one helix, one sheet, and beads divided into
four subgroups (on the basis of their size and mode of manufacture) containing six beads,
three beads, fifteen beads, and seven beads respectively. In all, twenty seven gold artefacts
were analysed metallographically. All these samples were tested at UCT for major
element content by energy dispersive X-ray (EDS) fluorescence in a fully analytical Leo
S440 scanning electron microscope, using freshly ground and polished sections through
the bulk of each artefact to avoid surface enrichment or contamination effects. This
system has a detection limit of about 0.1% for metals such as copper and silver which
could be expected as possible alloying elements.
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 83
The larger collections of Zimbabwe and Thulamela material were studied visually with
the intention of determining any possible significant differences from the earlier
Mapungubwe material studied metallurgically (Desai 2001) and material illustrated in
publication (Fouché 1937; Meyer 1998). The substantial collection of gold thought to
originate from Great Zimbabwe, donated by Cecil John Rhodes in 1874, is housed at the
South African Museum in Cape Town. These artefacts are glued onto a flat opaque surface
for exhibition purposes and could be viewed from one side only. A total of sixteen pieces
of foil, one hundred and forty six tacks, sixty four beads, twenty one pieces of assorted
wire, seven links, five nuggets and nine spherical cast droplets or prills from this
collection were inspected (Desai 2001). Another collection of Zimbabwean gold, also
thought to originate from Great Zimbabwe but possibly including material from later
Zimbabwe culture sites, is in the Rhodes collection at his former home, Groote Schuur in
Cape Town. These pieces had no detailed provenance. They were not described in terms
of their fabrication technology, but were sampled with material from the other collections
for trace element analysis, reported elsewhere (Grigorova et al. 1998; Miller et al. 2001).
METALLOGRAPHY AND RECONSTRUCTION
OF FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY
The detailed descriptions of the artefacts studied visually are recorded in Desai (2001)
and the results of the metallographic analyses are summarised in Table 1. Metallography
was performed only on gold samples from Mapungubwe, in order to confirm the
reconstruction of the fabrication technology suggested by the visual inspection.
The metallographic study revealed the following common characteristics. There was
very little corrosion in any of the gold artefacts. Silver was the only detectable major
element other than gold, ranging from 2% to 12% Ag. This matches the range of silver
occurring naturally in material from the Witwatersrand gold fields (Erasmus et al. 1987).
The silver content did not correlate with artefact type, and does not indicate intentional
alloying. The metal was homogeneous, and there were no inclusions. All the finished
artefacts were both cold worked and annealed at some stage of manufacturing. There was
no evidence of welding or soldering.
The gold artefacts from all the assemblages studied could be described in terms of
seven categories, based on their morphology. These were foil, tacks, prills, beads, rod
sections, wire, and discs.
Gold foil, or sheet ranging from 0.3 to 0.5 mm thick, was well represented in all the
collections. Original size could be estimated if the foil contained punch marks, since these
marks would have been on the edges of the foil pieces (Fig. 2). Most individual pieces
were usually no larger than 20 mm by 30 mm, although the gold rhinoceros from
Mapungubwe (Meyer 1998) was made from substantially larger sheets. The punch marks
themselves were usually square, reflecting the square cross section of the tacks (Fig. 3).
All the sheets were pitted and rough on one side, evidently from being hammered out on a
granular stone anvil. Sheets were cut to the required size by using either a chisel or a blade,
or simply used as is with the ragged edges hidden by overlaps, pinned in place on wooden
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM:
34
he scratch burnish
ing t
on the outer surface (magnification 4 x).
, show!
3
babwe (SAM 7904)
igure
Je
A perforated gold sheet from Mapungubwe
/
\\\
s
\\
tack holes
ing square
show
6X).
9
fication
1
1m.
and a ragged edge (magn
A perforated gold sheet from Z
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 85
Figure 4
Two gold tacks from Mapungubwe, showing heads formed in use (magnification 4X).
forms with gold tacks. Finally, the exposed surface was scratch burnished, resulting in a
shine. As overlapped areas of foil were not scratch burnished one can deduce that the foil
was burnished after it was attached to the object to be covered. Two fragments of sheet
were analysed metallographically. The grains were recrystallised, equi-axed and angular.
The grain sizes varied considerably, from a coarse ASTM 4 to a fine ASTM 8.
The tacks were four-sided, tapering, wedge-shaped pieces of gold that were between
3 mm and 10 mm long (Fig. 4). The tacks were made by hammering the end of a piece of
wire into a four-sided point, and then cutting off the short tapered section, presumably
with a chisel. The flattening of the heads took place by hammering the tacks into the
substrate, as evidenced by the metallographic study of three of the tacks. The grains of
used tacks were heavily deformed, particularly in the flared heads (Fig. 5). The grain sizes
of these tacks were generally quite small, ranging from ASTM 6 to 8. The tack with the
largest grains, UCT D, had a grain size of ASTM 5. It was also not as deformed along its
length as the others, lacked a head, and was probably an unused tack blank.
Prills, or cast droplets, were spherical pieces of gold found in diameters from 0.5 mm to
12 mm. They were used to make various items such as punched beads, or flattened into
strips or foil. The casting of these small droplets accounts for the voids or ‘air bubbles’
noted by Oddy (1984:73). Larger prills or nodules may have been buttons of gold
recovered from melting crucibles. The smaller spherical droplets were probably formed
by pouring molten gold into water, or melting filings or short pieces of wire in a crucible
packed with charcoal. Pearson suggested that prills could have been formed by spilling the
molten gold onto a flat surface, with the molten gold forming globules as it cooled
(Fouche 1937). This untested method appears unlikely given the ease of producing gold
shot by pouring molten gold into water.
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 5
Etched section through a gold tack from Mapungubwe, showing longitudinal cracks running
down the length of the shaft and intense cold work deformation in the head (magnification 18 X).
Figure 6
Punched solid gold bead from Mapungubwe, showing four indentations from the sharp edges
of a tapered, square-sided punch (magnification 12x). 7
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 87
Figure 7
Grooved solid gold bead from Mapungubwe, showing five indentations impressed
into the outer margin (magnification 14x).
Bead sizes ranged between approximately 2 mm and 5 mm in external diameter, with
an internal diameter ranging from 1 mm to 3 mm. Most of the gold beads analysed and
described in the current study could be categorised into two groups distinguished by the
means of manufacture; punched or wrapped. Punched beads were sub-spherical items
with single holes and no visible join. The grain sizes varied from relatively large
(ASTM 4) to very fine (ASTM 10), indicating different degrees of cold work before the
final anneal. They were indeed punched, and not cast with holes as proposed by Oddy
(1984) and earlier investigators (Fouché 1937). There were traces of four evenly spaced
indentations on the edge of the internal diameters on both the flattened end surfaces of
most of these beads (Fig. 6), although in some specimens these indentations had all but
disappeared through wear.
After somewhat flattening spherical prills or shot on an anvil, beads were punched
from both sides with a square punch that left a four-sided squarish hole, sometimes with
cracks extending from the sharp corners. Stringing wear subsequently rounded the
aperture. Only one exception to the punched square hole was noted, where a circular
round bead had a round indentation punched from one side only. A possible explanation
for the preference for a square punch is that it remained sharper for longer and was easier
to sharpen with four hammer blows at the tapered edge. The punch used for making holes
in the punched beads was probably made with an iron tip, as it was the hardest metal
mined in the southern African Iron Age and could easily pierce through a small gold prill.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
8&3
8
f grooved gold bead from Mapungubwe
Figure
intense cold work
ing the
fication
show
dented cold (magn
b)
10N O
Etched sect
56x).
1
In
ich was
at the base of the groove wh
Wrapped gold bead from Mapungubwe, showing an open join (magnification 12 x).
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 89
Intensely cold worked copper is also a possibility but is less likely, since iron was
available and the iron point would last longer.
Some beads had five decorative indentations equi-distantly impressed on their outer
circumferences. This grooving, presumably with a light tap by a carefully orientated
chisel, produced visible cold work deformation beneath the indentations and often
deformed the pre-existing hole into a pentagonal shape (Fig. 7). Oddy (1984) had been
unsure if these grooves were cast in place or cut. The grain deformation visible in the
metallographic sections proved that these grooves had been indented after punching the
central hole, and while the bead was cold (Fig. 8).
There were also large numbers of wrapped gold beads. These were round, often with
flattened end surfaces, and to the naked eye looked superficially similar to punched beads,
but the wrapped beads were often cruder and less symmetrical (Fig. 9). The most obvious
difference between wrapped and punched beads was the presence of a join in the former,
usually visible with the naked eye. In metallographic section, most of the beads had
extensive cold work deformation in the grains adjacent to the join, showing that they had
been hammered closed while cold. There was an equal number of wrapped beads with
annealed and recrystallised grains compared to those with deformed grains present
throughout the material. This indicated that a final anneal was not standard practice. In the
annealed examples, the grain size ranged widely, indicating different degrees of prior cold
work. As with the punched beads, residual cold work deformation on the outer margins
was due mostly to use wear.
To make a wrapped bead, a strip was cut from roughly square gold wire, and then bent
around a thick iron wire used as a former. Often the wrapped beads were barrel shaped and
not flattened at the ends as much as the punched beads. Incompletely closed beads were
produced that could be squeezed closed by hammering around the join, which often
showed cold work. Another type of gold bead was found at Mapungubwe, best described
as rolled beads, and illustrated in Meyer (1998: 248). Gold foil was used to make a
tapering tongue-like strip, which was wrapped around a wire former several times until
the strip was completely wound into a tube, and the former withdrawn.
A representative set of beads and one unperforated prill were sampled for microhardness
testing (Vicker’s microhardness, 10g load, 10 second dwell time) (Table 1). The purpose of
this exercise was to show whether or not a relationship existed between a bead’s being
punched, wrapped, annealed or finally cold worked, and the microhardness of the metal.
There was a positive relationship between the final working stage and the microhardness of
the metal, with annealed pieces being the softest and cold worked pieces being the hardest,
as expected. The worked beads (mean Hv 62) were two to three times harder than the
unworked cast prill tested (Hv 21). In addition, from the metallographic analysis it was clear
that annealing was not practised systematically and in some cases a final, possibly
accidental anneal, had overprinted earlier cold work deformation.
Links were like wrapped beads, bent around a flattened or rounded wire, without the
join being closed. In many cases they were probably simply wrapped beads that had been
pulled open during use. Alternatively they could have been an intermediate stage for
making wrapped beads, or used as ornamented clips, such as the ones found on the
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 10
Offcuts, or small pieces of square gold wire from Zimbabwe (SAM 7903),
showing chisel cut ends (magnification 4 xX).
igure | 1
ing irregu
F
ing
d flatten
ire an
ity of the w
lar
of the outer margins through wear (magnification 10x).
showing 1
from Mapungubwe,
ire helix
Gold w
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 9]
corroded iron necklace of the male burial at Thulamela (Miller 2002). No gold chains
occurred in any of the assemblages studied.
Rod sections, or offcuts, were generally square-shaped in cross-section, made by
cutting a rod or fine bar into various lengths with chisel cuts, at an angle between 60° and
the perpendicular (Fig. 10). The South African Museum catalogue recorded these pieces
as ‘weights’, but there did not seem to be a standard size or range of masses for these
pieces. The most plausible interpretation is that these rod sections were intended to be
flattened to make foil or to be hammered out to form wire for helices.
Earlier studies found evidence for production of Late Iron Age southern African gold
wire by drawing it through successively smaller holes in a perforated draw plate. Fouche
(1937) and his colleagues suggested that the wire from Mapungubwe was drawn in this
way, as opposed to being beaten into shape. Oddy (1983, 1984) noted that Mapungubwe
gold wire did not appear to have been drawn, although there was evidence for gold wire
drawing from Great Zimbabwe, with both drawn and beaten wire, including wire with a
D-shaped cross section. Gold wire from Ingombe Ilede did not appear to have been drawn,
although wire drawing dies were found at this site (Oddy 1984). According to Swan
(1994: 67), there is evidence in the form of draw plates from Great Zimbabwe and other
Zimbabwe sites that gold wire was made by drawing. In the current study, only beaten
wire was identified in all three assemblages. There was no evidence of the consistent
longitudinal striations associated with wire drawing, but rather a faceted, scaly
appearance on the unworn inner surfaces of the wire coils. It appears that all the gold wire
inspected in this study was made by hammering, and that the D-shaped cross sections
were the result of wear or deliberate flattening of the outer surface of originally round wire
(Fig. 11). The discrepancy with earlier studies may be due to the small size of the
collection from Zimbabwe available for this study. The issue of gold wire drawing needs
further investigation through the metallographic analysis of well provenanced material in
the national collections of Zimbabwe.
Coiled wire helices were made by hammering a length of wire to the desired thickness,
accompanied by turning to round and stretch the wire. Then the gold wire was wound
around a flexible fibre core to form a helix (Meyer 1998: 247). The wire itself could have
been round or squarish, similar to that used to produce the links and the wrapped beads.
M1231 P and M1231 Q were the only two pieces in this category studied metallo-
graphically. In cross section they were flattened on the outside through wear, and some
cold work deformation was present on the outer margins. Strips of flat “wire’ were cut
from gold sheet with a blade and wrapped around a core to form a helix. Individual
windings had characteristic trapezoidal cross sections (Fig. 12). Invariably they had been
wound with the two cut edges on the inside of the helix, to provide a smooth outer surface.
Short helices may have been used as beads. The longer ones were made into bangles or
necklaces, sometimes combining more than one wound strand in a plaited arrangement, as
in the bangle from the female burial at Thulamela.
Discs were flattened prills made by hammering flat a large nodule. Many of them had
cracked edges (Meyer 1998:251, 252), and their use is unknown, but they were probably
precursors to making sheet.
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 12
Etched cross-section through one segment of a helically wound gold strip from Mapungubwe,
showing residual burrs at each end from cutting with a chisel or a knife,
and angular annealed grains (56).
Secondary ornamentation was limited to indenting, as in the pentagonally grooved
gold beads. From Mapungubwe there were small sheets with raised areas, some of them
indented with a round indentor from the inside to produce rows of knobs on the outside
(Oddy 1984). There were also raised sheets decorated with linear indentations arranged
like hatch marks on the outside (Meyer 1998). The Mapungubwe gold rhinoceros was
scored similarly to indicate hair on its rump.
It was clear that the basic fabrication technology of the gold artefact types produced
was the same for all three assemblages, and that a standardised means of fabrication was
used to produce each of the four main different types of finished artefacts — beads, wire,
sheet, and tacks. The tool kits used to produce these artefacts have not been found in
association with metal working areas on these sites. Nevertheless, all of these gold
artefacts could have been produced with a tool kit consisting of bellows, melting
crucibles, working surfaces like stone anvils, stone or iron hammers, straight iron wire, a
sharp four-sided punch, a blunt round-ended punch, various chisels, and sharp cutting
implements like knife blades. The skill in working in producing thin sheet, fine wire, and
tiny beads was evident, despite the simplicity of the technology.
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 93
COMPARISON WITH OTHER METAL ASSEMBLAGES
Metallographic analyses have been performed on a number of ferrous and non-ferrous
metal assemblages from southern African Iron Age sites, reported in Miller (2002). These
sites are Broederstroom (Mason 1981; Huffman 1993), Divuyu (Miller 1996), Nqoma
(Miller 1996), KwaGandaganda (Miller & Whitelaw 1994), K2 and Mapungubwe (Meyer
1998; Miller 2001), Bosutswe (Plug 1996; Denbow 1999), Great Zimbabwe (Huffman &
Vogel 1991), and Thulamela (Steyn et a/. 1998). Together the metallographic analyses
provide a comparative basis against which to assess the gold assemblages reported here.
Table 2 (see page 102) illustrates the occurrence of jewellery items made in different
metals from these major southern African Iron Age sites. Gold working was preceded by
copper and iron working in southern Africa. Bronze and brass (more strictly a ternary alloy
known as gun-metal) first appeared in the archaeological record in the later part of occupation
at Mapungubwe, simultaneously with the appearance of gold (Miller 2001). The assemblages
from Bosutswe, Great Zimbabwe and Thulamela also contained numerous bronze pieces
(Miller 2002) in addition to gold. Both gold and bronze appear to have been used only for
jewellery or elite insignia, and were valued locally for their aesthetic appearance.
The fabrication technology employed in working copper, bronze and gold was very
similar, with slight variations which exploited the superior malleability of gold. Copper
alloys and gold were hot worked to shape with no evidence for soldering. Most of the
copper artefacts were generally left in the annealed state, but the gold microstructures
were often deformed by subsequent cold work, often unintentionally through use wear.
Metal smithing generally seems to have involved cycles of hot and cold work, with no
other systematic heat treatment (Miller 2002).
The only evident differences between the metal working processes of gold compared
to the other metals in southern Africa were in the few artefact types that were made only in
gold, such as tacks and punched and rolled beads, which exploited the intrinsic
malleability of this metal. The advent of gold led to some innovation in design and
technology, first using gold sheet to ornament wooden forms at Mapungubwe (Miller
2001). This style of ornamentation was present in both the Zimbabwe and Thulamela
assemblages, and in the latter case ornamental sheets held in place with tacks were
produced in bronze as well (Miller 2002). In only this instance, the novel fabrication
technology which made its first appearance with gold was transferred to another metal
with substantially different mechanical properties but a similar golden appearance.
Notably, numerous jewellery items like finger rings, solid bangles and chains continued to
be produced only in copper or iron, even after the advent of gold working. Other jewellery
items, like wrapped beads and wound helices continued to be made in copper and iron,
along side production of similar items in gold and bronze. Bronze and gold may have been
used interchangeably, to add their yellow colour to the pre-existing palette of the white of
iron and the red of copper. There is ample evidence of the ritual significance of colour in
African metal work, although the indigenous significance of gold has always been
overshadowed by that of copper (Herbert 1984).
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CONCLUDING REMARKS
Gold was produced mainly for export, and gold jewellery and insignia were associated
only with the ruling elite who controlled this trade (Miller et a/. 2000). It is likely that
there was a hierarchy of access to various metals (Calabrese 2000), reflecting the
hierarchy of social status that characterised settlement patterns in the Late Iron Age of
southern Africa (Huffman 1996). The fabrication technology employed in working iron,
copper, gold and bronze in jewellery was substantially uniform and remarkably stable
through time, with minor variations made possible because of the enhanced malleability
of gold. Deliberate alloying of gold was not performed, nor was refining to remove silver.
Soldering and gold casting into moulds was unknown. The fabrication technology
employed for gold (and bronze) developed linearly from that employed for the previous
1000 years in working copper and iron (Miller 2002), which points to the indigenous
nature of this technology, with no significant external input. A simple, rudimentarily tool
kit was used with great manual skill to produce delicate items of jewellery that embodied
the stability and continuity of a local indigenous African style of metal working.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
All the sampling for analysis was undertaken in terms of South African National
Monuments Council Permit to Destroy No. 8/9/02/011/50 dated 23 February 1995. The
following individuals and institutions are thanked for providing access to material
described in this paper: Dr U. Ktisel (National Cultural History Museum, Pretoria), and
Professor Andrie Meyer (University of Pretoria), Ms Alta Kriel (Groote Schuur Museum,
Cape Town), Dr Patricia Davison (Iziko Museums, Cape Town). The Department of
Archaeology, UCT provided research facilities and administrative support. Professor
Judy Sealy, Dr Paul Craddock and Dr Candy Lang are thanked for their helpful comments
on a draft of this paper. Financial support from Anglo-American Chairman’s Fund
Educational Trust, De Beers Educational Trust, the University of Cape Town Research
Committee, and the South African National Research Foundation for research into early
mining and metallurgy is acknowledged with gratitude. Opinions expressed in this paper
and conclusions arrived at are those of the authors and are not necessarily to be attributed
to any of the supporting agencies.
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 95
REFERENCES
CALABRESE, J. 2000. Metals, ideology and power: the manufacture and control of materialised
ideology in the area of the Limpopo-Shashe confluence, c. AD 900 to 1300. South African
Archaeological Society Goodwin Series 8: 100-10.
DENBOW, J. 1999. Material culture and the dialectics of identity in the Kalahari: AD 700-1700. Jn:
McINTOSH, S. K. Beyond chiefdoms: 110-123. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
DESAI, N. 2001. Technological, social and economic aspects of gold production and use by the Iron
Age people of southern Africa. Unpublished M.Sc. thesis: University of Cape Town.
ERASMUS, C. S., SELLSCHOP, J. P. F. & WATTERSON, J. I. W. 1987. New evidence on the
composition of mineral grains of native gold. Nuclear Geophysics 1: 1-23.
FOUCHE, L. 1937. Mapungubwe, ancient Bantu civilization on the Limpopo. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
GRIGOROVA, B., SMITH, W., STULPNER, K., MILLER, D. & TUMILTY, J. A. 1998. Fingerprinting
of gold artefacts from Mapungubwe, Bosutswe and Thulamela. Gold Bulletin 31: 99-102.
HERBERT, E. W. 1984. Red gold of Africa. Madison: The University of Wisconsin Press.
HUFFMAN, T. N. 1993. Broederstroom and the Central Cattle Pattern. South African Journal of
Science 89: 220-6.
HUFFMAN, T. N. 1996. Snakes and crocodiles; power and symbolism in ancient Zimbabwe.
Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.
HUFFMAN, T. N. & Vogel, J. C. 1991. The chronology of Great Zimbabwe. South African
Archaeological Bulletin 46: 61—70.
KUSEL, M. M. 1992. A preliminary report on settlement layout and gold melting at Thula Mela, a Late
Iron Age site in the Kruger National Park. Koedoe 35: 55—64.
MASON, R. J. 1981. Early Iron Age settlement at Broederstroom 24/73, Transvaal, South Africa. South
African Journal of Science 77: 401-16.
MEYER, A. 1998. The archaeological sites of Greefswald. Pretoria: University of Pretoria.
MILLER, D. E. 1996. The Tsodilo jewellery. Cape Town: University of Cape Town Press.
MILLER, D. 2001. Metal assemblages from the Greefswald areas, South Africa: K2, Mapungubwe Hill
and Mapungubwe Southern Terrace. South African Archaeological Bulletin 56: 83-103.
MILLER, D. 2002. Smelter and smith: metal fabrication technology in the southern African Early and
Late Iron Age. Journal of Archaeological Science 29: 1083-131.
MILLER, D., DESAI, N., GRIGOROVA, D. & SMITH, W. 2001. Trace-element study of gold from
southern African archaeological sites. South African Journal of Science 97: 297-300.
MILLER, D., DESAI, N. & LEE-THORP, J. 2000. Pre-colonial gold mining in southern Africa: a
review. South African Archaeological Bulletin Goodwin Series 8: 91-9.
MILLER, D. & WHITELAW, G. 1994. Early Iron Age metal working from the site of
KwaGandaganda, Natal, South Africa. South African Archaeological Bulletin 49: 79-89.
ODDY, A. 1983. On the trail of Iron Age gold. Transvaal Museum Bulletin 19: 24-6.
ODDY, A. 1984. Gold in the southern African Iron Age. Gold Bulletin 17: 70-8.
PHIMISTER, I. R. 1976. Pre-colonial gold mining in southern Zambezia: a reassessment. African
Social Research 21: 1-30.
PLUG, I. 1996. Seven centuries of Iron Age traditions at Bosutswe, Botswana: a faunal perspective.
South African Journal of Science 92: 91-7.
STEYN, M., MILLER, S., NIENABER, W. C. & LOOTS, M. 1998. Late Iron Age gold burials from
Thulamela (Pafuri Region, Kruger National Park). South African Archaeological Bulletin 53: 73-85.
SUMMERS, R. 1969. Ancient mining in Rhodesia. Salisbury (Harare): National Museums of Rhodesia
Memoir 3.
SWAN, L. 1994. Early gold mining on the Zimbabwean plateau. Uppsala: Societas Archaeologica
Upsaliensis.
VOGEL, J.C. 1998. Radiocarbon dating of the Iron Age sites on Greefswald. Jn: Meyer, A. The
archaeological sites of Greefswald: 296—7. Pretoria: University of Pretoria.
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Table 1. Selected gold artefacts from Mapungubwe described metallographically.
<< Consents
M1231 A wrapped bead, visible open homogeneous, bulk of material has 4.0% Ag
annular bead, join, diameter 3.5 mm, angular recrystallised equi-axed grains
0.191 g thickness 2.2 mm with annealing twins
Hv 48 (n=3, range 45-51)
M1231 B wrapped bead, visible open homogeneous, bulk material consists of 4.5% Ag
annular bead, join, diameter 3.2 mm, recrystallised angular, equi-axed grains
0.099 g thickness 1.5 mm with annealing twins
Hv 67 (n=2, range 66-67)
M1231 C no visible join, diameter homogeneous, recrystallised angular 6.4% Ag
annular bead, 2.1 mm, thickness 1.0 mm equi-axed grains, numerous bent
0.041 g annealing twins
Hv 56 (n=3, range 55—56)
M1231 D no visible join, large homogeneous, recrystallised angular 6.0% Ag
annular bead, serpentine voids, diameter equi-axed grains, 4 stress fractures
0.037 g 1.9 mm, thickness 1.0 mm running through the cross section of the
sample corresponding to punch marks
M1231 E no visible join, diameter homogeneous, recrystallised angular 10.2% Ag
annular bead, 2.1 mm, thickness 1.3 mm equi-axed grains with a few bent
0.045 g annealing twins, voids on inner margin
M1231 F punched bead with recrystallised angular equi-axed grains 12.4% Ag
grooved bead, pentagonal shaped hole and 5___ with straight twins and numerous slip
0.201 g outer grooves, diameter3.4 bands
mm, thickness 2.0 mm Hv 58 (n=2, range 47-69)
M1231G no visible join, diameter homogeneous, recrystallised angular 5.0% Ag
grooved bead, 2.2 mm, thickness 1.1 mm equi-axed grains, two voids on inner
0.043 g margin closest to two of the grooves and
the third one is in the bulk
M1231 H numerous casting voids, rounded dendritic grain structure, 3.0% Ag
spherical prill, diameter 4 mm numerous inter-dendritic pores
0.555 Hy 21 (n=1
M1231 I narrow flat strip, rough inner homogeneous, recrystallised angular 3.9% Ag |
helical strip surface and smooth outer equi-axed grains with annealing twins
fragment, surface, length 13.5 mm,
022718 width 1.5 mm, thickness
0.3 mm
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 97
Grain Size Deformation Fabrication
ASTM 6-7 join area: grains elongated, severely cold worked strip cut from hammered sheet,
outer margin: smeared layers, grain elongation annealed, wrapped around and join
inner margin: grains squeezed together, few cracks worked cold, outer margin cold
& protuberances that have been flattened by stringing worked through use wear
wear
ASTM 5 join area: grains elongated strip cut from hammered sheet,
outer margin: minor localised smearing and cold
work deformation
inner margin: some lamination and deformation due
annealed, strip hammered around
cold preserving rough inner surface,
join hammered closed, outer surface
to smearing, slip bands in grains on inner margin burnished through use wear
ASTM 4 outer margin: many slip bands and elongated grains cast droplet, ends flattened,
bulk: few slip bands perforated with sharp-sided punch,
inner margin: two voids diagonally opposite each annealed, cold working due punching
other, some smearing and use wear
ASTM 5-6 outer margin: grain elongation and slip bands due to _ cast droplet, ends flattened,
cold work perforated cold with sharp-sided
bulk: 4 stress fractures correspond to corners of square punch, smearing on inner
square punch, numerous slip bands margin and grain elongation on outer
inner margin: burnished, some smearing margin caused by use wear
ASTM 6-7 outer margin: elongated grains with slip bands cast droplet, ends flattened, punched
bulk: finer grains with bent annealing twins
inner margin: 4 voids corresponding to punch marks
cold with sharp-sided square punch,
outer margin smeared due to use wear
and elongated grains, smearing from stringing wear
ASTM 5
outer margin: severe deformation and grain flattening
in base of grooves
bulk: slip bands throughout due to heavy cold work
inner margin: severe grain deformation and
flattening, lamination due to smearing, originally
round hole deformed into pentagonal shape by the
cast droplet, end flattened, perforated,
5 ornamental grooves impressed cold
onto outer margin causing
deformation and distortion of inner
bore, slip bands due to pervasive cold
work
indentation of the 5 external grooves
larger grains
in bulk:
ASTM 5
smaller grains
on margins:
ASTM 10
ASTM 6-7
outer margin: elongated flattened grains, 5 grooves
with associated slip bands
inner margin: lamination from smearing in use
none — no cold work
inner margins rough, outer margins smooth, no
visible deformation
cast droplet, ends flattened,
perforated cold, briefly annealed,
5 grooves impressed cold onto outer
margin, inner margin smoothed by
use wear
cast droplet, no further working
hammered sheet on rough anvil, strip
cut from ‘inside’ forming trapezoidal
cross section, wrapped around
(missing) fibre core, outer surface
burnished
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Objects Structure Constituents Ae
M1231 J narrow flat strip, wound into homogeneous, recrystallised angular 3.8% Ag
helical strip coil, length 10 mm, width equi-axed grains with straight annealing
fragment 1.5 mm, thickness 0.3 mm twins
0.175 g
M1231 K narrow flat strip, both sides homogeneous, recrystallised angular 3.1% Ag
helical strip rough, length 12.5 mm, equi-axed grains, a few voids and
fragment, width 2.0 mm, thickness annealing twins present
0.090 g 0.3 mm
M1231 L narrow flat strip, rough inner homogeneous, recrystallised angular 3.6% Ag
flat strip surface and smooth outer equi-axed grains with annealing twins
fragment, surface, length 11.5 mm,
0.089 g width 1.6 mm, thickness
0.3 mm
M1231 M narrow flat sheet, two kinks homogeneous, recrystallised angular 6.9% Ag
flat sheet in sheet representing a fold, | equi-axed grains; no slip bands but many
fragment, thickness 0.2 mm bent annealing twins, 2 areas of
0.037 g intergranular corrosion
M1231 N flattened head, two homogeneous, recrystallised cold 3.9% Ag
tack, 0.062 g longitudinal cracks in shaft, | worked grains, numerous slip bands,
head diameter 1.5 mm, longitudinal cracks
length 4.8 mm
M1231 0 flattened head, two homogeneous, recrystallised cold 4.1% Ag
tack, 0.045 g longitudinal cracks in shaft, | worked grains, numerous slip bands
head diameter 1.4 mm,
length 4.8 mm
M1231 P coiled D-shaped wire, length homogeneous, recrystallised angular 8.3% Ag
helical wire 15 mm, diameter 0.5 mm, equi-axed grains with annealing twins;
fragment, diameter of helix 2 mm no slip bands
0.155 g
M1231 Q coiled D-shaped wire, length homogeneous, recrystallised angular 8.8% Ag
helical wire 9.2 mm, width 0.5 mm equi-axed grains with annealing twins;
fragment, no slip bands
0.042 g ee
UGC small headed tack, length 8.9 homogeneous, heavily cold worked 4.4% Ag
tack, 0.111 g mm grains
VCD headless tack, length 7.1mm homogenous, heavily cold worked grains 6.8% Ag
tack, 0.135 g
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD 99
Grain Size
ASTM 5-6
ASTM 3
ASTM 4
ASTM 8
inner grains:
ASTM 5-6
outer grains:
ASTM 6-8
ASTM 8-9
ASTM 4-5
Deformation
no visible deformation
some minor local grain deformation
outer surface: smooth, no visible deformation
bulk: annealing twins, no slip bands
inner surface: rough, numerous pits and
protuberances from hammering on a rough anvil.
outer surface: burnished
bulk: bent annealing twins, small grain size
head: severe cold working
sides of shaft: one side smooth, other side smeared
bulk of shaft: two voids from tip to centre of nail,
heavily cold worked grains
head: severe cold working
sides of shaft: one side smooth, other side smeared
bulk of shaft: two voids from tip to centre of nail,
heavily cold worked grains
flattened outer margins of the coil due to wear
Fabrication
hammered sheet on rough anvil, strip
cut from ‘inside’ forming trapezoidal
cross section, wrapped around core,
outer surface burnished
hammered sheet on rough anvil, strip
cut from one side forming trapezoidal
cross section, annealed, wound
around core to form coil
hammered sheet on rough anvil, strip
cut from ‘inside’ forming trapezoidal
cross section, outer surface burnished,
final anneal
hammered sheet on rough anvil,
annealed, cut, bent
annealed wire hammered into 4-sided
wedge incorporating longitudinally
running voids, short length cut off
with chisel, tapered by hammering
cold, head formed by hammering into
substrate cold
anealed wire hammered into 4-sided
wedge incorporating longitudinally
running voids, short length cut off
with chisel, tapered by hammering
cold, head formed by hammering into
substrate cold
hammered wire, coiled, outer margins
flattened by abrasion producing
D-shaped cross-section, final anneal
(accidental?)
ASTM 4-5
flattened outer margins of the coil due to wear
hammered wire, coiled, outer margins
flattened by abrasion producing
D-shaped cross-section, final anneal
(accidental?)
ASTM 4-5
centre: ASTM
7-8
edges:
head: heavily cold worked, flattened elongated
grains, voids on outer edge
sides of shaft: one smooth, other smeared
shaft: heavily cold worked throughout, slip bands,
few bent twins, elongated, flattened grains in bulk of
material
thick end: void occurs at one edge, heavily cold
worked flattened grains, not as heavily worked as
UGE
annealed wire hammered into 4-sided
wedge incorporating longitudinally
running voids, short length cut off
with chisel, tapered by hammering
cold, head formed by hammering into
substrate cold
wire hammered into 4-sided wedge
incorporating longitudinally running
voids, short length cut off with chisel,
ASTM 5 shaft: elongated grains run along length of sample headless so probably unused
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Constituents
WG: flat sheet, with 6 holes along homogeneous, annealed recrystallised 5.5% Ag
sheet fragment, one edge grains with straight annealing twins
0.368 g
UCT II punched bead, diameter homogeneous, annealed recrystallised 10.9% Ag
large annular 4.0 mm, thickness 1.9 mm grains with bent annealing twins, four
bead, 0.30 g punch indentations on one side
Hv 72 (n=4, range 64-80)
UCN punched bead, diameter homogenous, recrystallised grains with 4.5% Ag
large annular 3.5 mm, thickness 1.8 mm bent annealed twins in bulk of material
bead, 0.29 g
WUC il wrapped bead made from homogenous, recrystallised grains with 8.5% Ag
wrapped annular wrought wire with bevelled bent annealed twins and slip bands in
bead, 0.13 g edges, diameter 4.5 mm, bulk of material
thickness 1.7 mm Hv 70 (n=3, range 69-74)
UCT YA wrapped bead made from homogeneous, recrystallised grains with 3.7% Ag
wrapped annular wrought wire with bevelled = mostly straight annealing twins, several
bead, 0.13 g edges, diameter 4.5 mm, voids
thickness 1.7 mm
UCT Ka flat round bead, diameter in homogeneous, numerous voids and 8.9% Ag
small annular 2 mm, no visible join stress fractures
bead, ca. 0.06 g
UCT Kb flat round bead, diameter homogenous, recrystallised grains witha 4.9% Ag
small annular 2 mm, no visible join few bent annealing twins in bulk of
bead, ca. 0.06 g material
WGK flat round bead, diameter homogeneous, recrystallised grains with 8.9% Ag
small annular 2 mm, no visible join bent annealing twins
bead, ca. 0.06 g
UCT Kd flat round bead, diameter homogeneous, recrystallised grains with 4.7% Ag
small annular 2 mm, no visible join bent annealing twins
bead, ca. 0.06 g
FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY OF SOUTHERN AFRICAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL GOLD
Grain Size Deformation
ASTM 4-6 all edges are smeared, pitted on both sides
101
Fabrication
sheet hammering out on rough anvil,
annealed, burnished on one side,
punched with tack holes, some post-
annealing deformation on surfaces
ASTM 5-10 outer margin: grains crumpled, flattened, elongated
bulk: larger grain size, bent twins due to cold work
inner margin: grains elongated
cast prill flattened on two sides,
punched cold with sharp four-sided
punch, annealed, margins deformed
and cold worked through use
ASTM 5 outer margin: local smearing, incorporating long
laminar voids
bulk: bent annealing twins, some dendritic grain
structure :
cast prill flattened on two sides,
punched cold with sharp four-sided
punch, annealed, margins deformed
and cold worked through use
inner margin: flattened grains
ASTM 5-6 outer margin: grains crumpled, flattened and elongated
bulk: bent annealing twins, slip bands
inner margin: crumpled grains, most of slip bands
occur here, two voids on edge
strip cut from hammered sheet,
annealed, bent around cold, use wear
caused bent twins and damage on
inner and outer margins
cold working on outer and inner margins
ASTM 6 outer margin: smearing caused voids, crumpled grains __ strip cut from hammered sheet,
bulk: some bent annealing twins, one large annealed, bent around cold, closure of
longitudinally running void join and use wear caused bent twins
inner margin: lamination and cracks with many voids and damage on inner and outer
large voids near join, cold work around the join. margins
ASTM 5-6 outer margin: smeared layers, two stress fractures cut hammered wire incorporating
running through bulk to inner margin, several slip
bands
bulk: one large void, several smaller ones, few slip
bands
inner margin: generally smoother, one void running
voids, annealed, bent around cold,
ends flattened, outer margin smeared
due to use
from outer to inner margin.
ASTM 6-10 outer margin: smeared, flattened, elongated grains,
one void
bulk: bent annealing twins, slip bands
inner margin: continuous voids parallel to
cut from hammered sheet or wire,
annealed, bent around cold, use wear
caused bent twins and damage on
inner and outer margins
circumference due to smearing
ASTM 7-10, outer margin: slip bands, elongated flattened grains,
outer half two voids due to smearing
grains smaller bulk: slip bands, bent annealing twins, elongated
than inner grains, one large void
inner margin: smeared, one void, flattened elongated
cut from hammered sheet, annealed,
bent around cold, use wear caused
bent twins and damage on inner and
outer margins
grains
ASTM 6-10 outer margins: flattened, elongated grains, smeared
edge
bulk: larger grains, bent annealing twins, three voids
inner margin: smearing from stringing wear, one void
cut from hammered wire or sheet,
annealed, bent around cold, use wear
caused bent twins and damage on
inner and outer margins
running into bulk of material
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
102
‘(ZOOT JOIN Wor) Tejour sty} Fo AqpIqvoyjew oy} SUNIO[dx9 ‘syov} puL JooYs plOs pur ‘speoq pos po|[os pue poyound jo
amqnsundepy ye souvreodde ay) yyiM ‘ASojOuYsa} oY} Ul yUOUdOTSASp SuIpUuOdsoLIO) & SEM SIOY], “SOIS S}I]O Je S[IAQ]| JO}V] WOT SUNLpP sose[quiosse
ay} [je ul juosoid o1oM pue ‘poreodde ozuoiq pure pos (qy Ammjuso YjUSE,IIY) 9}e] 0} prut) oMqnsundeyPy Jo uoNednd90 oY) YA\ “OSN UI OOM
wos pue Jaddoo Ajuo (Gy Ainjuss yUSsyTY) ApJ oy} [HUN) ZY JO UoTednd90 Jo suIT oY} [YUN puke osV UOT] ATIe_ OY} UT ‘S[eJou JoAOU Jo souvIesdde
Jo 90uanbas [eoIsojOUOIYS Ul posueLe ‘voLIpY UIOYINOS UI OSV UOT] 91e'T pue Ajreq oy) suruueds soyts 1ofeur wos AroT[aMol ul pasn sAoT[e pue speyoyy
iC 9eL
ug/ND ‘ny ny W\/ SSE L
us/n)
‘oq “ND “ny W\9/ ny de hs)
1nt@) oH no oy ssuly
oy ay oy oy sjuepudd
N's) nD nD oy sdoo7]
Sal nV nM) ny aq ND Jc l@) oq ND syury
ny ny us/D
ny ‘usm ‘ey = ‘usg/ND “eq ND = “eg “US/ND “ND ‘ny “oq ND NO ‘ed oq “ND oq “ND S99T[9H
oq “NO oy ‘NO suleyy)
ny ny PoTol “sprog
oq ‘ND ny ng ‘ny usg/Ng ‘oq “NO ny ‘ND ‘oy no a4 NO a4 “no aq ‘ng poddeim ‘sprog
ny ny ny poyound ‘sprog
Ny “of us/ng ‘ng oy Nd ‘oy NY ‘of ng ‘of oy sojsurg
Jy 0U91 Dri | :
gy OWI Url emgequiz UV Vs GVO UvOukl Pil GVO we dy 0 Ws 9 Cy Oe ty
pjowelny | 1eoIH) aMmsinsog amgnsundes| On pvulobN nAnaAiq WOOlSIopoolg
it ac A
SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature (particularly Articles 22
and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed by the appropriate
Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov., etc. The name of the taxon should be
followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s(s’) name(s) (not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a
comma must separate author’s(s’) name(s) and year. The author’s(s’) name(s) and date must be placed in parentheses if
a species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must
be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published scientific names by
which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order, with all references to that name
following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the
year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should
adopt one style or the other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
=
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
NOTE punctuation in the above example: comma separates author’s name and year; semicolon separates more than one
reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of plates are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nickles, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens mentioned in the original
description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes; additional material not regarded as paratypes
should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality,
collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach,
Port Elizabeth (33 51 S25 39 E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. “... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’, or
*... in C. namacolus (Fig. 10) ....’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full names: e.g. Du
Toit, but A. L. du Toit; Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should preferably be expressed
in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a book or
article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded
by the generic name or its abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph),
provided the same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included in the
title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the editorial
committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports will be forwarded to the
author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’ suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised
manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee. In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee
reserves the right to consult one or more referees regarding the revised manuscript.
E————
———
ee
VOLUME 112 APRIL 2004 ISSN 0303-2515
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new
genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out); number of
illustrations and tables; and email address
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) | Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(1) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be provided. First lines of
paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be typed separately, their positions indicated
in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals; second subheadings
are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals) of headings and
abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential. All generic and specific names should
be underlined or italicized.
ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including caption); the
reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the figure; originals larger than
36 48cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final size. The size of illustrated
objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure (if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be
given in the caption; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not printed; half-tones
will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items of composite figures should be
designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform
style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropriate size taking into account the final size. The number of the
figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired
reduction or enlargement.
REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the paper, using the Harvard
System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
“Smith (1969) described
“Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described ...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 196956; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927) ...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
NOTE: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; e¢ al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all
authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within each name, with
suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19696) and not
Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archives de
zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634.
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon. Annals
and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320.
KOHN, A. J. 19605. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean. Bulletin
of the Bingham Oceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In; SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische und
anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid Afrika ausgeftihrt in den Jahren
1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16: 269-270.
ANNALS OF THE ANNALE VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 112 BAND 112
a prow {\ tA /\
SEP 02 2004
LipnArmicy
TS
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 112 BAND
APRIL 2004 APRIL
TYPESET BY USER ERIENDLY, CAPE TOWN
PRINTED AND BOUND BY MILLS LITHO, NYMAN STREET, MAITLAND
LIST OF CONTENTS
Page
STAMPANATO S. & JANGOUX M.
The Asteroid Fauna (Echinodermata) of Marion and Prince Edward Islands ..........
MARSKA G.A. :
J.H. Day’s Type Specimens of Polychaeta (Annelida)
Mricmolecion orine South African Museum... ... .. 2s 222-042 .+-5+25+-. 17
VINOGRADOV G.M.
Near-Bottom and Pelagic Gammaridean Amphipods
iMRI CSTOhIElNdAN- OCCANG4s 560s 506 tb tg ety toe OPE eee 2 el Bees eee) ohn ese A 39
WOOLDRIDGE T. & MEES J.
Mysidacea from the Comoros Archipelago
AME SCMPuUONS OF (WO NEWSPECIES . » o...4% G0 2 ee See hee eee eee ee 89
Volume 112 is complete in 4 parts.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 112 Band
April 2004 April
Part l Deel
THE ASTEROID FAUNA (ECHINODERMATA)
OF MARION & PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS
by
S. STAMPANATO
&
M. JANGOUX
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and
review articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, omithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
1 DUS, SO), VOD, OS, TER, gai), 4D), SOLES, 7-9), G02, tan.)
TO), & O02, My, IOUS), LID, 5, 7, ant, IAG), 1S@—),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 191 1
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
THE ASTEROID FAUNA (ECHINODERMATA) OF MARION
AND PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS
by
S. STAMPANATO
Laboratoire de Biologie marine, Université de Mons-Hainaut,
B-7000 Mons, Belgium
and
M. JANGOUX
Laboratoire de Biologie marine (160/15), Université Libre de Bruxelles,
B-1050 Bruxelles, Belgium
(With 2 figures and | table)
[MS accepted 15 January 2003|
ABSTRACT
Thirty-one species of asteroids were collected in waters off Marion and Prince Edward (MPE) islands
during benthic surveys made by the University of Cape Town between 1982 and 1989. From the
thirty-one species, one is new to science (Solaster dianei sp. nov.), eleven are new for the MPE area and
eight were previously known only from the Subantarctic part of the Weddell quadrant.
CONTENTS
PAGE
NEGRO EN UNG BLOT eres eer. ac Sona A cect ste, SA. pek. tn Masa neh SMe dsc nase tne dh Meo, A daa thoeunatnae ea neMetr ee peaenEh Mites watees ti Z
LISTE OLE SCRUNCING Se A red ree Se or Re ec soc oe ee asec aE ae en ne ee an RS PE Macnee ean oe ee 2
WETS IMO ONS CLE ESIC CLES ede a eee cate actin ie taeda ase eUicna stat ase naceeemceeras sme semen deyeee ie te cveacod +
aonomicaliandsz200ceo tapi cali COmMMACMES Aes ests n.otee cece ces cuoee cs aoceeesecae ada eee tp oee teen es Seas ehcshcowedee 6
FEN KAN OA CUE CHING INES pe ean noch Ne ec cNc th Doses ae ae lc 9. ced mh Ma adh Seta ape ere oes MRE NS ache dC 14
INGHSRSNCE SD Hak ee ra eRe oi cer ein 2 ee em ee or RRM ann Met coe eee ame 6 nea are ane ean 15
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 112 (1), 2004:1-16, 2 figs, 1 table
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
The asteroid material on which the present report is based was collected between 5 m
and 644 m depth near Marion and Prince Edward Islands (approximately 47°S, 37°E)
during repeated benthic surveys carried out in 1982—9 by the University of Cape Town
(UCT), South Africa.
The asteroid fauna of Marion and Prince Edward Islands (MPE) is poorly known.
Twenty species are known to occur in the area mostly as a result of various scientific
expeditions such as the Challenger Expedition (Sladen 1889), the Discovery Expedition
(Fisher 1940; see also A.M. Clark 1962 [Henricia fisheri]), and the MPE South African
Expeditions in 1965-6 and 1972-3 (Bernasconi 1968, 1971; Rowe and Clark 1975;
respectively). Additional comments on some Marion asteroids species were also made by
Jangoux (1982) and O’ Loughlin & O’ Hara (1990) (Tremaster mirabilis and Smilasterias
scalprifera, respectively). The 1982—9 UCT benthic surveys collected thirty-one different
species of asteroids, of which one is new to science and eleven are new for the MPE area.
All the species known from previous expeditions were collected again but one, the
korethrasterid Peribolaster folliculatus (taken by the Discovery).
Of the eleven species new for the MPE area, one was already known from the Enderby
quadrant in the Subantarctic (viz. Labidiaster annulatus, a species that commonly occurs
in Antarctic seas) and two were previously reported from Antarctic seas (Solaster
regularis and Odontaster validus). The remaining nine species have a Subantarctic
distribution and were previously recorded either both in the Weddell and Victoria
quadrants (Henricia obesa) or in the Weddell quadrant only (Odontaster penicillatus,
Ceramaster patagonicus, Hippasteria falklandica, Hippasteria hyadesi, Pseudarchaster
discus, Henricia studeri and Anteliaster australis).
LIST OF STATIONS (all species were collected by dredging)
Stati Locality
wee Date Depth Comments
number lates: Long. E.
MAD 1 29/08/84 4675304 37253105) 90 Very muddy substrate, black muddy
volcanic sand covered in bryozoan
fragments.
MAD 2 DIVO8/S4 -A623915! = 3775202? 105-145 Rocky, shelly and bryozoan beds.
MAD 6 01/09/84 46°48'00" = 38°00'00" 50-55 Very rocky bottom.
MAD 8 02/09/84 46°42'06" 37°48'05" 250-260
MAD 12 16/04/85 46°45'00" = 37°55'00" 150-152
MAD 13 17/04/85 46759 000 esi OSU 100-180 Muddy bottom.
MAD 15 21/04/85 46°35'00" = 37°56'00" 48—S0
MAD 16 ~—_23/04/85 46°51'00" 38°04'00" 160-170 Sandy bottom dominated by
polychaetes.
THE ASTEROID FAUNA (ECHINODERMATA) OF MARION & PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS 5
MAD 17 ~— 24/04/85 46°41'20" 37°49'00" 335-375 Very rocky bottom.
MAD 18 — 25/04/85 46°43'05" — 38°01'00" 224-232
MAD 20 ~—_. 26/04/85 46°49'00" —- 37°41'05" 34-42 Rocky and algae bottom.
MAD 21 29/04/85 ATO NO2" S37 2o04" 349-351 Rocky bottom.
MAD 25 20/04/87 A024 992 S195. 138-140 Fairly muddy bottom (lighter soil).
MAD 27 26/04/87 46°46'90" = 38°00'00" 92-133 Light sandy bottom with volcanic
rock.
MAD 28 ~— 28/04/87 AG-A3'98 Bi 5598" 237-243 Dark sediment.
MAD 29 —. 28/04/87 AA 3) 0) SI 143-147 Very muddy bottom covered in
é bryozoans.
MAD 31 04/05/87 AGyS Ss) O24 ga 482e 42-85 Little sediment, red algae bottom.
MAD 32 = 07/05/87 = 46°49'35" ——-337°58'98" 147 Muddy bottom covered in bryozoan
fragments.
MAD 37 24/08/87 46°40'55"_——-37°50'98" 460-488 Rocky bottom (large rocks).
MAD 38 25/08/87 46°57'88" = 37°58'82" 190-210 Muddy bottom covered in bryozoan
fragments.
MAD 39 ~—- 26/08/87 46°59'75" — 38°00'65" 360-376 Very rocky bottom.
MAD 40 31/08/87 46°40'25" = 37°50'98" 375-462 Mixture of small pebbles and coarse
gravel; little true sediment and no sand.
MAD 42 01/09/88 46°40'32" = 37°51'00" 460-560 Rocky bottom, no sediment.
MAD 43 02/09/88 46°40'22" = 37°51'20" 350-600 Rocky slope: large volcanic rocks, no
sediment.
MAD 44 ~— 03/09/88 46°40'58" = 3.7°50'20" 410-644 Rocky bottom, no sediment (slope
area).
MAD 47 08/09/88 AG2S8 21% ~ 37252100" 52-53 Muddy bottom (fine sediment).
MAD 48 05/09/88 AGS OS “Si52)05) 92-105 Muddy bottom covered in bryozoan
fragments.
MAD 49 07/09/88 AT 20085E 33053190) 265-306 Mud and rock substratum.
MAD 52 =. 22/04/89 = 46°54'95"_ 3.793 4'15" 340-400 Very rocky bottom little sediment.
MAD 54 23/04/89 46°54'92" = 37°35'00" 70-135 Coarse sediment with tiny volcanic
rocks.
MAD 55 23/04/89 A625 USS 3520) 42-47 Very rocky; medium size pebbles and
coarse gravel.
MAR 16 1982 AGZSIO3 Ee S725 N00" 10 Inshore collection at Transvaal Cove. _
TP 5-8 1988 46253045) 3775203" 10 Diving survey at Trypot Point.
TVL 4 1988 462903" 37751'00" 5 Diving survey at Transvaal Cove.
TVL 5-8 1988 AO LOS an so OO), 10 Diving survey at Transvaal Cove.
BB 1+ 1988 46°54'06" = 37°54'04" 5 Diving survey at Bullards Bay.
BB 5-8 1988 46°54'06" = 3:7°54'04" 10 Diving survey at Bullards Bay.
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LIST OF COLEECTED SPECIES
The number of specimens and, when relevant, their measurements are indicated
between brackets. Species new for the area are indicated in bold; an * means that the
species is discussed below. R = length of the longest arm (radius); r = length from disc
centre to interradius.
Families and species
ASTROPECTINIDAE
Bathybiaster loripes Sladen, 1889
Leptychaster kerguelenensis Smith, 1876
Stations and numbers of individuals
MAD 18 (2 juvenile)
MAD 8 (1 juvenile); MAD 39 (1 juvenile)
ODONTASTERIDAE
Acodontaster elongatus (Sladen, 1889)
Odontaster meridionalis (Smith, 1876)
Odontaster penicillatus (Philippi, 1870)
Odontaster validus Koehler, 1905
MAD 12 (1 juvenile)
MAD 27 (1 juvenile); MAD 31 (2: R/r mm = 21/10 &
47/18)
MAD 44 (2: R/r= 16/8 & 20/10 mm); MAD 31
(3 juvenile)
MAD 25 (3 : R/r mm [range] = 19—21/8:—12);
MAD 43 (1: juvenile ); MAD 37 (1 juvenile)
GONIASTERMAE
*Ceramaster patagonicus (Sladen, 1889)
*Hippasteria falklandica Fisher, 1940
*Hippasteria hyadesi Perrier, 1891
*Pseudarchaster discus Sladen, 1889
MAD 44 (1)
MAD 44 (1: R/t mm = 73/27)
MAD 42 (2: R/r mm = 37/15 & 41/19)
MAD 39 (2: R/r mm = 20/6 & 24/9)
ASTERINIDAE
Tremaster mirabilis Verrill, 1879
MAD 44 (1 : R/r mm = 80/67 mm)
PORANIIDAE
Porania antarctica Smith, 1876
MAD 1 (1 juvenile);
MAD 29 (2: R/r mm = 34/13 & 39/18);
MAD 48 (3 : R/r mm [range] = 58—60/21—25)
ECHINASTERIDAE
*Henricia fisheri A.M. Clark, 1962
*Henricia sp. aff. H. obesa (Sladen, 1889)
Henricia praetans (Sladen, 1889)
MAD 28 (1 : R/r mm = 44/7);
MAD 44 (2: R/r mm = 31/4 & 31/4)
MAD 55 (1 : R/r mm = 34/6)
MAD 44 (2: R/r mm = 37/8 & 48/10)
MAD 12 (1 juvenile);
MAD 15 (7: R/r mm [range] = 10—15/3-—5);
TVL 14 (1: R/r mm= 12/3)
THE ASTEROID FAUNA (ECHINODERMATA) OF MARION & PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS
ECHINASTERIDAE continued
*Henricia sp. aff. simplex (Sladen, 1889)
*Henricia sp. aff. H. studeri (Perrier, 1891)
MAD 1 (1 juvenile); MAD 6 (3 juvenile);
MAD 38 (1 : R/r mm = 20/3)
MAD 44 (1 : R/r mm = 36/6)
SOLASTERIDAE
Crossaster penicillatus Sladen, 1889
Lophaster stellans Sladen, 1889
*Solaster dianei nov. sp. 2
*Solaster regularis Sladen, 1889
MAD 16 (1 : R/r mm = 39/4);
MAD 49 (1 : R/r mm = 37/4);
MAD 28 (1 : R/r mm = 43/11);
MAD 52 (1 juvenile)
MAD 13(2: R/t mm = 14/3 & 21/6)
MAD 17 (1 : R/r mm = 59/18);
MAD 43 (1 : R/r mm = 56/18)
MAD 2 (1 : R77 mm = 61/31);
MAD 44 (1 : R/r mm = 89/24);
MAD 48 (1 : R/r mm = 62/18);
MAR 16 (3 : R/r mm [range] = 47—59/17-26);
TP 5-8 (8 : R/r mm [range] = 32—54/13-16);
TVL 5-8 (1 juvenile);
BB 5-8 (2: R/r mm = 60/16 & 92/25)
PTERASTERIDAE
Diplopteraster semireticulatus (Sladen, 1882)
Pteraster affinis Smith, 1876
MAD 21 (1 : R/r mm = 48/31)
MAD 8 (1 : R/r mm = 61/20)
LABIDIASTERIDAE
Labidiaster annulatus Sladen, 1876
ASTERHDAE
Anasterias rupicola (Verrill, 1876)
* Anteliaster australis Fisher, 1940
Anteliaster scaber (Smith, 1876)
Diplasterias meridionalis (Perrier, 1875)
Pedicellaster hypernotius Sladen, 1889
Smilasterias scalprifera (Sladen, 1889)
Smilasterias triremis (Sladen, 1889)
MAD 8 (1 juvenile); MAD 40 (1 juvenile);
MAD 43 (1 juvenile)
MAR 16 (1 : R47 mm = 29/9)
MAD 12 (2: R/r mm = 19/4 & 19/4).
MAD 21 (1 juvenile); TVL 5—8 (1 juvenile);
BB 1- (1 juvenile)
MAD 31 (1: R/r mm = 40/8);
MAD 47 (1 : R/r mm [range] = 41/9);
MAD 54 (3: R/r mm [range] = 23-44/6-10)
MAD 12 (1 : R/r mm = 15/4)
MAD 47 (4: R/r mm [range] = 74-82/8-11)
MAD 15 (2: R/r mm = 18/4 & 18/4);
MAD 20 (2: R/r mm = 14/3 & 17/4);
MAD 47 (9 : R/r mm [range] = 24-25/4-6);
MAR 16 (2: R47 mm = 20/5 & 29/6);
TVL 14 (1: R/4 mm = 25/6)
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TAXONOMICAL AND ZOOGEOGRAPHICAL COMMENTS
Ceramaster patagonicus (Sladen, 1889)
?Astrogonium granulare Whiteaves, 1887: 117 (according to Fisher 1911).
Pentagonaster patagonicus Sladen, 1889: 269, pl. 46 (figs 3-4); pl. 49 (figs 3-4).
Mediaster patagonicus Verrill, 1899: 145, 4 figs.
Pentagonaster austrogranularis Perrier, 1891: 127, pl. 12 (figs 3a—3b) (synonymized by Fisher
1940).
Ceramaster patagonicus Fisher, 1911: 214-6, pl. 37 (fig. 4), pl. 38 (figs 1-2), pl. 60 (fig. 3);
1940: 118. Koehler, 1923: 94. Djakonov, 1950: 48, figs 21, 88, 186. A.M. Clark, 1962: 23.
Bernasconi, 1963: 8, pl. | (figs 1-2), pl. 2 (fig. 3); 1973: 297, pl. 7 (fig. 2). Tommasi, 1970: 12
(fig. 36). Codoceo & Andrade, 1979: 156, pl. 2 (figs 5—6).
Ceramaster patagonicus var. euryplax H.L. Clark, 1923: 262-4, pl. 14 (figs 1-2); 1926: 9-10.
A.M. Clark, 1952: 195, 204—5.
Ceramaster chondriscus H.L. Clark, 1923: 258-60, pl. 14 (figs 5-6). Mortensen, 1933: 242
(synonymized by A.M. Clark 1974).
Ceramaster patagonicus productus Djakonov, 1950: 48.
Ceramaster patagonicus euryplax A.M. Clark, 1974: 435. A.M. Clark & Courtman-Stock,
1976: 61.
Though Ceramaster patagonicus has been rather frequently recorded over the past
100 years, its status needs examination mostly because of its puzzling distribution. The
type locality is station 313 of the Challenger Expedition (Atlantic entrance to the Strait of
Magellan; Sladen 1889). In the southern hemisphere, the species was found around the
southernmost part of South America (New Year Sound, Cape Horn, Perrier 1891;
Falkland plateau, Koehler 1923 and Fisher 1940; off South Argentina, Bernasconi 1963;
off South Brazil, Tommasi 1976; off Central Chile, Codoceo & Andrade 1979) as well as
off the Atlantic coast of South Africa (subspecies euryplax; see A.M. Clark &
Courtman-Stock 1976). The species was also reported to occur in the N.E. Pacific (from
the Gulf of California to south of the Alaskan Peninsula; Verrill 1899, Fisher 1911), in the
southern portion of the Bering Sea (Djakonov 1950), and in the Okhotsk Sea (subspecies
productus; Dyakonov 1950).
Hippasteria falklandica Fisher, 1940
Hippasteria falklandica Fisher, 1940: 125, pl. 3 (fig. 2), pl. 4 (fig. 4). A.M. Clark, 1962: 22.
Bernasconi, 1963: 15—6; 1973: 299-300, pl. 4 (figs 1, 4).
This is the third record of a species known only from two specimens, viz. the type
specimen (type locality: Falkland Islands, 225—51 m; Fisher 1940) and an additional one
originating from off Buenos Aires province, Argentina (Bernasconi 1973). The discovery
of the species in the MPE area greatly extends its geographical distribution.
THE ASTEROID FAUNA (ECHINODERMATA) OF MARION & PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS 7
Although smaller than the holotype (R/r mm = 129/43 & 73/27 for the holotype and the
MPE specimen respectively), the MPE specimen fits Fisher’s original description rather
well. The limits of abactinal plates are difficult to distinguish as they are not outlined by a
row of closely appressed peripheral granules as in many other Hippasteria species.
Abactinal plates with small scattered granules and with a well-developed bivalve
pedicellaria (from 1.5 to 3.5 mm long) or one (mostly) or two globose tubercles.
Superomarginals are clearly marked off from the abactinals while inferomarginals are
not easily distinct from the outer actinolaterals. Most marginal plates carry one or two
bivalve pedicellariae and one to three globose tubercles. The terminal superomarginals
gradually decrease in size instead of being larger than the subterminal plates as they are in
the holotype. Most actinolateral plates bear a long bivalve pedicellaria; this 1s surrounded
by enlarged squarish to polygonal granules. Adambulacral plates usually have two furrow
spines (Some proximal-most plates having only one) and two stouter subambulacral
spines arranged transversally; these are surrounded by small, flattened, peripheral
granules.
Hippasteria hyadesi Perrier, 1891
Hippasteria hyadesi Perrier, 1891: 128. Fisher, 1940: 125-6. A.M. Clark, 1962: 22. Bernasconi,
1963: 16-17, pl. 3 (fig. 2), pl. 5 (fig. 2). Codoceo & Andrade, 1979: 156, pl. 2 (figs 3-4).
The species was previously known from the type locality (Puerto Hambre, Magellan
Strait, 36 m, 1 specimen; Perrier 1891) and from off central Chile (300-400 m, 6 specimens;
Codoceo & Andrade 1979). Its discovery in the MPE area significantly extends its known
geographical distribution.
The MPE specimens (R/r mm = 37/15 & 41/19) are slightly smaller than the holotype
(R/r of the holotype: 50/9 mm; Bernasconi 1963) and much smaller than the largest
recorded specimen whose R/r ratio is 144/62 mm (Codoceo & Andrade 1979). Abactinal
plates are outlined by a distinct row of spaced peripheral granules. Both carinal and
proximal-most adcarinal plates are enlarged and circular in shape; each plate bears a stout
conical spine. Other abactinal plates are quadrangular to pentagonal in shape. They bear
either one (sometimes two) globose tubercules or a well developed bivalve pedicellaria.
Small secondary triangular abactinal plates occur in the disc centre between some of the
most proximal carinal and adcarinal plates. Superomarginals and inferomarginals are
clearly distinct from the abactinal and actinolateral plates. Marginals, outlined by closely
appressed granules, bear from one to three stout conical spines (neither bivalve
pedicellariae nor globose granule occur on these plates). Actinolateral plates are outlined
by small flattened granules; the actinolaterals lining the adambulacral plates usually have
one bivalve pedicellaria while others bear one or two globose to squarish tubercles.
Adambulacral plates with usually one (two on the most proximal) elongated furrow spines
and one shorter conical subambulacral spine.
8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Pseudarchaster discus Sladen, 1889
Pseudarchaster discus Sladen, 1889: 110, pl. 19 (figs 1-2), pl. 42 (figs 3-4). Fisher, 1940: 117.
A.M. Clark, 1962: 23. Bernasconi, 1963: 5—7, pl. 2 (figs 1-2), pl. 4 (fig. 2). Codoceo &
Andrade, 1979: 157, pl. 3 (figs 1-2).
Astrogonium patagonicum Perrier, 1891: 125, pl. 13 (figs 2a—b) (synonymized by Fisher 1940).
That species was already known from various samples collected in the Magellan and
Falkland areas as well as off Argentina (Rio de la Plata) and off central Chile. It is now
reported from the Subantarctic part of the Enderby quadrant. Although these are smaller
than most specimens previously sampled (R of the holotype = 30 mm), the MPE
specimens agree well with Sladen’s (1889) original description; the present specimens
have well marked postadambulacral fascioles.
Genus Henricia Gray, 1840
In his report on the asteroids collected by the Discovery Expedition, Fisher (1940,
p. 162) wrote that “the name Henricia is applied to a considerable number of extremely
unstable entities, for convenience called species’; the situation today remains almost
unchanged. Twelve Antarctic and Subantarctic species of Henricia have been described
based, in most cases, on vague or poorly established criteria. As, moreover, Henricia
species show high intraspecific variability (e.g. Madsen 1987) identifications are rather
uncertain, the geographical origins of the specimens being sometimes the only objective
parameter that can be used (see A.M. Clark 1962). There is an obvious need for a careful
revision of the southern species of Henricia.
Henricia fisheri A.M. Clark, 1962
Henricia simplex (pars) Sladen, 1889: 547-8 (only station 148).
Henricia simplex Fisher, 1940: 168-169, pl. 11 (fig. 3).
Henricia fisheri A.M. Clark, 1962: 46, text-fig. 51, pl. 2 (figs 3, 6).
Henricia fisheri 1s one of the few well-defined southern species of Henricia. It has
been described by A.M. Clark (1962) from Crozet and Marion specimens previously
identified as Henricia simplex by Sladen (1889) and Fisher (1940), respectively. The
individuals have a rather small-meshed abactinal skeleton, most meshes containing three
to four papulae. Abactinal spinelets are single, well separate from each other, and
sheathed in skin. As reported by A.M. Clark (1962), the actinal and inferomarginal plates
are very regularly arranged in longitudinal series (no actinal papulae were observed on the
MPE specimens). Adambulacral plates bear three to five subambulacral spinelets
arranged in a single transverse series.
THE ASTEROID FAUNA (ECHINODERMATA) OF MARION & PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS 9
Henricia sp. aff. Henricia obesa (Sladen, 1889)
Cribrella obesa Sladen, 1889: 544—5, pl. 96 (figs 3—4), pl. 98 (figs 5-6).
Cribrella hyadesi Perrier, 1891: 100-102, pl. 9 (figs la—d), pl. 10 (fig. 2).
Henricia hyadesi H.L. Clark, 1910: 336, pl. 2 (fig. 5).
Henricia hyadesi H.L. Clark, 1916: 60; 1946: 148.
Henricia pagenstecheri (pars) Koehler, 1923: 60 (according to Fisher 1940).
Henricia obesa Fisher, 1940: 164-6, pl. 11 (fig. 2). Mortensen, 1941: 3, pl. 1 (fig. 3). Madsen,
1956: 30; 1965: 169. A.M. Clark, 1962: 48-9, text-figs 5n—6a—c. Bernasconi, 1966: 169; 1973:
308; 1980: 250, pl. 1 (figs 3-4). Hernandez & Tablado, 1985: 4-5, fig. la-+b. Rowe &
Albertson, 1987: 190-2, fig 2a—b.
The species is known mostly from the Subantarctic part of the Weddell quadrant. It is
also reported off Macquarie Island and off South Australia (Rowe & Albertson 1987). The
MPE specimens have a rather large-meshed abactinal skeleton, with one to four papulae
per mesh. Inferomarginal plates with ten to twelve spinelets. Actinolateral plates with two
to six spinelets: four to six spinelets on the most proximal plates; two spinelets on the most
distal ones. Only the innermost actinolateral series reaches the arm tips. Papulae
widespread actinolaterally. Adambulacral armature made of six to seven spinelets
arranged in bifid (“Y’) series.
Henricia sp. aff. Henricia simplex (Sladen, 1889)
Cribrella simplex Sladen, 1889: 547, pl. 97 (figs 5—6), pl. 98 (figs 9-10).
Henricia simplex Mortensen, 1941: 2. A.M. Clark, 1962: 37.
As papulae occur between the proximal actinolateral plates, the MPE specimens
belong to the pagenstecheri group. The last includes three species—viz. Henricia
pagenstecheri (Studer, 1885), Henricia simplex (Sladen, 1889), and Henricia lukinsi
(Farquhar, 1898)—that are almost indistinguishable from each other except in
considering their type localities (see A.M. Clark 1962). Because of their relatively
small-meshed abactinal skeleton, the MPE specimens are tentatively identified Henricia
simplex, a species already recorded in MPE waters (Sladen 1889).
Henricia sp. aff. Henricia studeri (Perrier, 1891)
Cribrella studeri Perrier, 1891: 102, pl. 9 (fig. 2).
Henricia studeri Fisher, 1940: 163, pl. 11 (fig. 1). A.M. Clark, 1962: 38. Bernasconi, 1966: 169;
1980: 252-3, pl. 1 (figs 1-2). Codoceo & Andrade, 1979: 158, pl. 4 (figs 5-6).
The MPE specimen presumably belongs to Henricia studeri, a species recorded
several times in the Magellan—Falkland area. Abactinal spinelets occur in clusters of ten to
twelve spinelets that each have a multifid vitreous tip. Actinal and inferomarginal plates
10 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are linked by bar-like plates giving the actinal skeleton a regular transverse arrangement.
Actinolateral plates with c. ten spinelets each, arranged in two rows. Papulae occur all
over the actinal surface. Proximal adambulacral plates with two transverse series of
spinelets with four to five spinelets in each series.
Solaster dianei sp. nov
Figs 1, 2
Material
SAM—A24025, between Marion and Prince Edward Islands (46°41'2" S—37°39'0" E),
335-375 m, | specimen (Holotype); SAM—A24009, off Prince Edward Island (46°40'2" S—
37°51'2" E), 1 specimen (Paratype).
Etymology
Dedicated to Diane Gianakouras who oversaw the 1982-9 faunistic survey of the
Marion and Prince Edward area.
Diagnosis
A species of Solaster with 7 triangular-shaped arms. Abactinal paxillae short,
irregularly arranged except at the sides of arms where they form oblique transverse series.
Superomarginal paxillae clearly larger than the most lateral abactinal paxillae.
Actinolateral area fairly large with 4 rows of actinolateral plates at the base of the arms.
Actinal surface of oral plates covered with spinelets.
Description of the holotype
Arms 7; R=59 mm; r= 18 mm; R = 3.3 r; breadth of arms at base 12 mm. Disk large;
arms triangular, tapering progressively towards their distal extremity. Interbrachial arcs
acute. Abactinal surface convex; actinal surface flat (Figs 1A, B).
Most abactinal plates 3 to 4-lobed. Abactinal paxillae 0.1 to 0.3 mm in diameter, and
spaced | to 3 times their width (Fig. 2A). Largest disk paxillae with a crown up to 25 short
point- to blunt-tipped spinelets measuring 0.15 mm in length; paxillae of the mid-central
part of arms with up to 20 spinelets. Basal parts of spinelets form a single paxilla united in
a membrane. Generally 2 papulae present in each skeletal mesh. Paxillae irregularly
arranged except on arm sides where they form regular oblique transverse series. Abactinal
paxillae occurring close to inferomarginals small; they bear c. 11 very short spinelets.
Superomarginal paxillae enlarged, easily distinguishable from the most lateral
abactinal ones (Fig. 2B); those of the most proximal part of the arm measure 0.3 mm in
diameter and have up to 30 spinelets (0.25 mm in length). Inferomarginal plates 42,
conspicuous, defining the ambitus; proximal plate with an enlarged fan-like, transversally
compressed pseudopaxilla measuring 2.5 mm in length and 0.3 mm in breadth.
Inferomarginal fans with 3 to 4 transversal rows of spinelets measuring up to 1.5 mm in
length.
Actinal interradial areas fairly large with four series of actinolateral plates, the
THE ASTEROID FAUNA (ECHINODERMATA) OF MARION & PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS
Figure 1
Solaster dianei nov. sp. Abactinal (A) and actinal (B) views of the holotype.
11
IZ ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
sia
Figure 2
Solaster dianei nov. sp. (holotype). A. Abactinal paxillae of the disk central part.
B. Profile view showing the abactinolateral (ap), superomarginal (sp)
and inferomarginal (ip) paxillae.
innermost one extending half the arm length. Each actinolateral with a paxillar-like group
of 4 to 8 spinelets up to 0.9 mm in length.
Adambulacral plates with 4 furrow spines webbed at their base, and 1 or 2 (most
proximal plates) transverse combs of 6 to 7 subambulacral spines (c. 0.8 in length). Oral
plates with 10 somewhat elongated furrow spines (maximal length: 1.5 mm), the surface
of the plates being covered by up to 15 irregularly arranged shorter suboral spines.
Note on the paratype
R = 56 mm; r= 18 mm; R = 3.1 r. There are only slight differences between the two
specimens, probably a result of size, viz. the paratype has 12 oral furrow spinelets (10 in
the holotype) and up to 9 spinelets per subambulacral series (no more than 7 in the
holotype).
Discussion
The species clearly belongs to the genus Solaster; it has a dense small-meshed
abactinal skeleton and the abactinal paxillae on arm sides forms oblique transverse series.
It basically differs from the southern species of Solaster—sS. torulatus (Sladen, 1889) and
S. regularis (Sladen, 1889)—in its extensive actinolateral areas, the occurrence of two
distinct series of marginal plates, and the arrangement of the suboral spinelets on the oral
plates.
THE ASTEROID FAUNA (ECHINODERMATA) OF MARION & PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS 13
Solaster regularis Sladen, 1889
Solaster regularis Sladen, 1889: 454, pl. 60 (fig. I), pl. 62 (figs 5-6). A.M. Clark, 1962: 50.
Bernasconi, 1973: 309-10. Codoceo & Andrade, 1979: 157, pl. 3 (figs 5-6).
Solaster subarcuatus Sladen, 1889: 455-7, pl. 70 (fig. 2), pl. 72 (figs 7, 8). Doderlein, 1928: 296,
pl. 12 (fig. 4).
Crossaster australis Perrier, 1891: 113, pl. 10 (figs la—Id) (synonymized by Fisher 1940).
Solaster octoradiatus Ludwig, 1903: 25-7, pl. 3 (figs 21-2). Bell, 1908: 11; 1917: 4. Jangoux &
Massin, 1986: 91 (synonymized Fisher 1940).
Solaster australis Ludwig, 1905: 63. Fisher, 1911: 323 (synonymized by Fisher 1940).
Solaster regularis regularis Fisher, 1940: 178-9.
Solaster regularis subarcuatus Fisher, 1940: 179-80. A.M. Clark 1962: 55, text-figs 7o-s.
McKnight, 1976: 28. Jangoux & Massin, 1986: 91.
Crossaster canopus H.E.S. Clark, 1963: 55, pl. 10 (figs 1-2), pl. 11 (synonymized by McKnight
OG):
According to Fisher (1940) two subspecies of Solaster regularis occur in the Southern
Ocean, viz. S. regularis regularis from the Cape Horn region and the Falkland Plateau and
S. regularis subarcuatus that is said to be ‘probably circumpolar’. The species, however,
is known to be extremely variable (see e.g. Bernasconi 1973) and this is confirmed by the
examination of the 18 specimens (size range: from 32 to 92 mm arm length) collected
during the MPE Survey (Table 1). Indeed, though some specimens resemble either the
regularis or subarcuatus subspecies, most show mixed features suggesting that Fisher’s
subspecies might be artificial and may express the high polymorphism of the species.
Anteliaster australis Fisher, 1940
Anteliaster australis Fisher, 1940: 215-7, fig. I -4a, pl. 9 (figs 2-3). A.M. Clark, 1962: 72.
The species is closely related to Anteliaster scaber (Smith) from which it can be
distinguished by more numerous abactinal pedicellariae (according to Fisher 1940), or by
the size and shape of abactinal spinelets (according to A.M. Clark 1962). The abactinal
spinelets have a bushy-headed form in A. scaber while they are shorter and truncated in
A. australis. While the two abactinal features cited above (i.e. pedicellarial density and
shape of abactinal spinelets) allowed recognition of the species in the MPE collection,
their reliability as specific characters may be questionable (see A.M. Clark 1962, p. 72).
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Table 1. Variations in number and shape of spinelets in Solaster regularis'
Type of spinelets subspecies regularis subspecies subarcuatus MPE specimens
order atid shane ps 6 to 10 point-tipped 5 to 6 blunt-tipped 7 to 20 point- or
spirtelets on abactinal spinelets spinelets blunt-tipped spinelet
paxillae P P PP ae
Ney Oe 10 to 20 10 to 12 10 to 30
inferomarginal paxillae
Number of spinelets on Ate 3105 Dine
actinolateral plates
Number of furrow
spinelets (adambulacral 4to5 3 to 4 3) 1 S
plates)
Number of
subambulacral spinelets 4 to 5 4 to 5 5 to 6
(adambulacral plates)
Number of furrow oral 9 8 JF toll
spinelets
Number of suboral
5 3 to4 7 to9
spinelets
'Data from Sladen (1889) and Fisher (1940).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are deeply indebted to Mrs Margo Branch (Zoology Department, University of
Cape Town) for giving us the opportunity to study Marion and Prince Edward asteroid
fauna. Work supported by an IRSIA grant to S. Stampanato. Contribution of the “Centre
Interuniversitaire de Biologie Marine’ (CIBIM).
THE ASTEROID FAUNA (ECHINODERMATA) OF MARION & PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS 15
REFERENCES
BELL, F.J. 1917. Echinoderma. National Antarctic Expedition, London. Nat. Hist. 4 (Zool.): 241-53.
BERNASCONL, I. 1963. Asteroideos Argentinos. IV. Familia Goniasteridae. Rev. Mus. Argent. Cienc.
nat., Zool. 9 (1): 1-25.
BERNASCONI, I. 1966. Los Equinoideos y Asteroideos colectados por el buque oceanogrifico R/V
‘Vema’ frente a las costas argentinas, uruguayas y sur de Chile. Rev. Mus. Argent. Cienc. nat., Zool.
9 (7): 147-75.
BERNASCONI, I. 1968. Equinodermos de las Islas Marion y Principe Eduardo con descripcion de una
nueva especie de ofiuroideo. Physis, B. Aires 28 (76): 55-8.
BERNASCONI, I. 1971. Echinodermata: Asteroidea and Ophiuroidea. Jn: VAN ZINDEREN
BAKKER E.M. (ed), Marion and Prince Edward Islands. Report on the South African Biological
and Geological Expedition, 1965-1966, pp. 284—7. Cape Town: A.A. Balkema.
BERNASCONI, I. 1973. Los equinodermos colectados por el ‘Walther Herwig’ en el Atlantico
sudoeste. Rev. Mus. Argent. Cienc. nat., Hidrob. 3 (3): 287-334.
CLARK, A.M. 1952. Some echinoderms from South Africa. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 33: 193-221.
CLARK, A.M. 1962. Asteroidea. Rep. BANZARE Antarct. Res. Exped. B9: 1—104.
CLARK, A.M. 1974. Notes on some echinoderms from southern Africa. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.)
26: 423-87.
CLARK, A.M. & COURTMAN-STOCK, J. 1976. The Echinoderms of Southern Africa. Trustees of the
British Museum (Nat. Hist.), London. 277 pp.
CLARK, H.E.S. 1963. The fauna of the Ross Sea. 3. Asteroidea. Bull. N. Z. Dept. scient. Ind. Res.
151: 1-84.
CLARK, H.L. 1910. The echinoderms of Peru. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harv. 52: 321-58.
CLARK, H.L. 1916. Report on the sea-lilies, starfishes, brittle-stars and sea-urchins obtained by the
F.I.S. ‘Endeavour’ on the coasts of Queensland, N.S.W., Tasmania, Victoria, S. Australia and
W. Australia. Endeavour Res. 4: 1-123.
CLARK, H.L. 1923. The echinoderm fauna of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 13: 221-51.
CLARK, H.L. 1946. The Echinoderm fauna of Australia. Its composition and its origin. Publ. Carnegie
Instn. Wash. 566: 1-567.
CODOCEO, R.M. & ANDRADE V.H. 1979. Asterozoos arquibentonicos de Chile central. An. Mus.
Hist. nat. Valparaiso (1978) 11: 153-74.
DJAKONOV, A.J. 1950. Starfish of the Soviet Union. Tabl. anal. Faune URSS 34: 1—203 (in Russian;
translated into English by Israel Program for scientific translations, Jerusalem, 183 pp., 1968).
DODERLEIN, L. 1928. Die Seesterne der Deutschen Siidpolar-Expedition 1901-1903. Dt. Siidpol.
Exped. 19 (Zool. 11): 291-301.
FARQUHAR, H. 1898. On the echinoderm fauna of New Zealand. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales
23: 300-27.
FISHER, W.K. 1911. Asteroidea of the North Pacific and adjacent waters. Bull. U.S. nation. Mus.
76 (1): 1-420.
FISHER, W.K. 1940. Asteroidea. Discovery Rep. 20: 69-306.
HERNANDEZ, D.A. & TABLADO A. 1985. Asteroidea de Puerto Deseado (Santa Cruz, Argentina).
Centro Nacional Patagonico, Consejo Nacional de Investigaciones Cientificas y Técnicas, 104: 1-16.
JANGOUX, M. 1982. On Tremaster Verrill, 1879, an odd genus of recent starfish (Echinodermata:
Asteroidea). In: LAWRENCE J.M. (ed.). Echinoderms: Proceedings of the International
Conference, Tampa Bay. pp. 155-63. A.A. Balkema: Rotterdam.
JANGOUX, M. & MASSIN C. 1986. Catalogue commenteé des type d’Echinodermes actuels conservés
dans les collections nationales belges. Bull. Inst. r. Sci nat. Belg., Biol. 56: 82-97.
KOEHLER, R. 1923. Astéries et ophiures recueillis par l’expédition antarctique suédoise, 1901-1903.
Further Zool. Res. Swed. Antarct. Exped. 1 (1): 1-145.
LUDWIG, H. 1903. Seesterne. Résult. Voy. Belgica, Zool. 1903: 1—72.
16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LUDWIG, H. 1905. Asteroidea. Reports on exploration by the USFS ‘Albatross’ during 1891. Mem.
Mus. Comp. Zool. Harv. 32: 1-292.
MADSEN, F.J. 1956. Reports of the Lund University Chile Expedition 1948—49. 24. Asteroidea, with a
survey of the Asteroidea of the Chilean Shelf. Acta Univ. Lund, NS 52 (2): 1-53.
MADSEN, F.J. 1987. The Henricia sanguinolenta complex (Echinodermata, Asteroidea) of the
Norwegian Sea and adjacent waters. A re-evaluation, with notes on related species. Steenstropia. 13
(5): 201-68.
McKNIGHT, D.G. 1976. Asteroids from Ross Sea and the Balleny Islands. NZO/ Rec. 3 (4): 21-31.
MORTENSEN, T. 1933. Echinoderms of South Africa (Asteroidea and Ophiuroidea). Vidensk. Medd.
dansk naturh. Foren. 93: 215—400.
MORTENSEN, T. 1941. Echinoderms of Tristan da Cunha. Results Norweg. Exped. Tristan da Cunha.
7: 1-10.
O’LOUGHLIN, P.M. & O’HARA T.D. 1990. A review of the genus Smilasterias (Echinodermata,
Asteroidea), with descriptions of two new species from south-eastern Australia, one a gastric
brooder, and a new species from Macquarie Island. Mem. Mus. Victoria, 50 (2): 307-23.
PERRIER, E. 1891. Echinodermes. 1. Stellérides. Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn 1882-1883, 6
(Zool. 3): 1-198.
ROWE, F.W.E. & CLARK A.M. 1975. Notes on some echinoderms from Marion Island. Bull. Br. Mus.
nat. Hist. (Zool.) 28 (5): 187-90.
ROWE, F.W.E. & ALBERTSON E.L. 1987. The echinoderm genus Henricia Gray, 1840 (Asteroidea:
Echinasteridae) in southern and southeastern Australian waters, with the description of a new
species. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 109 (3): 183-94.
SLADEN, W.P. 1889. The Asteroidea. Rep. scient. Results. Voy. Challenger, Zool. 30: 1-935.
STUDER, T. 1885. Die Seesterne Siid-Georgiens nach der Ausbeute des deutschen Polarstation in 1882
und 1883. Jahrb. Hamburg. Wissensch. Anstalt. 2: 143-64.
TOMMASI, L.R. 1970. Lista dos asteroides recentes do Brasil. Contr. Inst oceanog. Univ. S. Paulo,
Ocean. Biol. 18: 1-61.
VERRILL, A.E. 1899. Revision of certain genera and species of starfishes with descriptions of new
forms. Trans. Conn. Acad. 10: 145-234.
WHITEAVES, J.F. 1887. On some marine Invertebrata dredged or otherwise collected by Dr. G. M.
Dawson in 1885, on the coast of British Columbia; with a supplementary list of new land and
freshwater shells, fishes, bird, etc., from the same region. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 4 (4): 116-7.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 112 Band
April 2004 April
Rate = 2 Deel
J.H. DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF
POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA) IN THE COLLECTION
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
by
G.A. MARSKA
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and
review articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
(DOES, 5-9), DS, 7S tis, 0), SL-S, 7), (2, Coit).
HC), 8, SID, Dy, IWS), WCB. S, 7, eo), IAG), 155),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 192 X
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
J.H. DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA)
IN THE COLLECTION OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
by
G.A. MARSKA
Natural History Division, South African Museum, Iziko Museums of Cape Town
(With | figure)
[MS accepted May 1995]
CONTENTS
PAGE
LUST CID. SENO TE, ccc006): coche aOR at AP Caro RUD Ne ARTE RE, ete ee Acs ee tee meee ree 17
iS! OE ESTE MOSSES ES Meee ok as eee ec ce Mma ei Ie, noe ees a ee 19
RELSIEICES. ccoocatontgeeccaae te eee URE se REE Sere tte net Mento Secs ar nee nee ees See an ef eee nee a7,
INTRODUCTION
In 1990, the South African Museum (Marine Biology Department) received the entire
J.H. Day reference collection of Polychaeta, previously housed in the Zoology
Department, University of Cape Town. At the Museum, specimens were sorted, rebottled,
preserved in 70 per cent ethanol and catalogued. Amongst the collection are the types of
several species that were described by Day between 1934 and 1975. A list of these types is
provided herein. In accordance with the recommendations of the Jnternational Code of
Zoological Nomenclature, this paper forms part of the series of publications in Annals of
the South African Museum documenting the South African Museum’s holdings of type
material. |
The vast majority of type specimens were obtained by the Zoology Department of the
University of Cape Town during extensive ecological surveys over a number of years.
These surveys covered an area along the coast of southern Africa extending from Walvis
Bay on the west coast to Mozambique on the east. For easy reference, a map of the area
(Fig. 1) from Day (1967: 8), is included.
There are also a few type specimens from Western Australia, the United States, and
India.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 112 (2), 2004:17—38, 1 fig.
17
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
f2° t3e- M42 152 16° 178 PIR? 39° 208 219 29939 | 4c) be = 26°" 1979) QB 250 30° Bie 32° 33 g4e gsc nommmags
SOUTHERN AFRICA
FROM 20° SOUTH.
- KEY -
Inhambane.
au
®
ct
a
o
3
a
@
ne
oa
@
"yraqezi|3 “Id
Simon's Bay Gordon’s Ba
False Bay
CAPE POINT :
CAPE HANGKLIP
Oi 202) 21S 220 93°, 242) 252) 262) 272 28° 292 308) SR S22) 33° 6S 4o cS eG
Figure |
In addition to Day’s publications, the South African Museum is in possession of some
of his unpublished material, e.g. notes indicating types deposited in the South African
Museum and Natural History Museum, London, and annotated card index of specimens.
Pertinent information derived from these unpublished sources is included, where
applicable, in ‘remarks’ at the end of the entry for each species.
The name under which a species was first described 1s placed in square brackets, if this
name has since been changed. The current name appears in round brackets following the
original reference.
If a valid species has been transferred from the original to another genus, the current
name and reference is followed by the original name in round brackets.
The classification, species names and the spelling used herein as well as coordinates
follow those used by Day in his publications.
J.H, DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA) 19
ANNELIDA
POLYCHAETA
ERRANTIA
Family Polynoidae
Antinoe Kinberg, 1855
Antinoe lactea Day, 1953: 403.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20960.
Locality: Langebaan Lagoon, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Specimen label refers to this spécimen as a paratype; in his original description, Day
did not formally designate types. Day’s notes state ‘lectotype in British Museum’, and
BM collection is reported to include syntypes.
Harmothoe Kinberg, 1855
Harmothoe gilchristi Day, 1960: 275.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20904.
Locality: 34°46'S 23°27'E, 110 metres (Cape south coast, South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Harmothoe saldanha Day, 1953: 401.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20979.
Locality: Langebaan Lagoon, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Harmothoe corralophila Day, 1960: 278.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20903.
Locality: 34°09,4'S 18°16,6'E, 75 metres (Cape west coast, South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Harmothoe agulhana Day, 1960: 277.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20902. |
Locality: 34°00,4'S 25°44,S'E, 39 metres (Algoa Bay, South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Harmothoe profunda Day, 1963: 357.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A19780.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A21061.
Locality: 33°49'S 16°30'E, 2 745 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey (R.S. Africana).
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Gattyana McIntosh, 1900
Gattyana mossambica Day, 1962: 629.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20980.
Locality: Inhaca Island, Mozambique.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day’s unpublished notes, Gattyana mossambica is referred to as
Harmothoe (Gattyana) mossambica.
Lepidonotus Leach, 1816
Lepidonotus (Thormora) jolli Day, 1975: 173.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A21011.
Locality: Rottnest Island, Western Australia.
Collected by: L. Joll, 1972.
Pseudopolynoe Day, 1962
Pseudopolynoe inhaca (Day), 1951: 15 (as Polynoe inhaca).
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20893.
Locality: Inhaca Island, Mozambique.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Lepidasthenia Malmgren, 1867
Lepidasthenia mossambica Day, 1962: 632.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20981.
Locality: Inhaca Island, Delagoa Bay.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Lepidasthenia brunnea Day, 1960: 285.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20925.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20953.
Locality: 34°23,3'S 18°40,3'E, 88 metres (False Bay, South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
J.H. DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA) 74
Family Sigalionidae
Psammolyce Kinberg, 1855
Psammolyce articulata Day, 1960: 293.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20912.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20911.
Locality: Simons Bay, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Sthenelais Kinberg, 1855
[Sthenelais papillosa] Day, 1960: 289 (transferred to Fimbriosthenelais zetlandica
(McIntosh, 1876) by Pettibone 1971)).
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A21046.
Locality: 34°13,9'S 18°31,6'E, 40 metres (False Bay, South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey
Sigalion Audouin & Milne Edwards, 1832
Sigalion capense Day, 1960: 291.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20929.
Locality: 34°22,7'S 18°43, 1'E, 79 metres (False Bay, South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Pisionidae
Pisione Grube, 1856
Pisione africana Day, 1963a: 390.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A21005.
Locality: 34°35'S 21°56'E, 78 metres (Cape south coast, South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Phyllodocidae
Subfamily Phyllodocinae
Protomystides Czerniavsky, 1882
Protomystides capensis Day, 1960: 306.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20913.
Locality: 32°48'S 17°58'E, 9 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
LD ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Eulalia Savigny, 1818
Eulalia (Sige) falsa Day, 1960: 303.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20918.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20919.
Locality: 34°12,8'S 18°36,5'E, 46 metres (False Bay, South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Alciopidae
Vanadis Claparede, 1870
Vanadis crystallina inornata Day, 1967: 182.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20937.
Locality: 30°16'S 31°49'E, 150-0 metres (off Natal, South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Hesionidae
Ophiodromus Sars, 1861
Ophiodromus berrisfordi Day, 1967: 224.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20894.
Locality: Walvis Bay, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day’s unpublished material, Ophiodromus berrisfordi is referred
to as Podarke berrisfordi.
Family Syllidae
Subfamily Syllinae
Syllis Savigny, 1818
Syllis (Haplosyllis) trifalcata Day, 1960: 308.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20932.
Locality: 34°12,4'S 18°43,5'E, 41 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Syllis (Typosyllis) benguellana Day, 1963a: 399.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20958.
Locality: 32°05,5'S 18°17,3'E, 27 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
J.H, DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA) ys}
Opisthosyllis Langerhans, 1879
Opisthosyllis laevis Day, 1957: 74.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20944.
Locality: Mozambique Island.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Trypanosyllis Claparede, 1864
Trypanosyllis ankyloseta Day, 1960: 312.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20926.
Locality: 34°12,4'S 18°43,5'E, 42 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Subfamily Eusyllinae
Pionosyllis Malmgren, 1867
Pionosyllis magnidens Day, 1953: 416.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A21051.
Locality: Lamberts Bay, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Lamellisyllis Day, 1960
Lamellisyllis comans Day, 1960: 319.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20924.
Locality: 34°09,3'S 18°51'E, 8-12 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Nereidae
Dendronereides Southern, 1921
Dendronereides zululandica Day, 1951: 30.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20940.
Locality: St Lucia Estuary, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Nereis Linnaeus, 1758
Nereis (Neanthes) agulhana Day, 1963a: 406.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20982.
Locality: 34°03'S 25°59'E, 84 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Nereis (Neanthes) indica brunnea (Day), 1957: 80.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20983.
Locality: Morrumbene Estuary, east coast South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Nereis (Neanthes) mossambica Day, 1957: 78.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20984.
Locality: Morrumbene Estuary, east coast South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Nereis (Neanthes) willeyi Day, 1934: 39.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20985.
Locality: St James, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Nereis (Nereis) gaikwadi Day, 1973a: 344.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A21012.
Locality: Ratnagiri, south of Bombay, India.
Collected by: U.D. Gaikwad at Ratnagiri.
Ceratonereis Kinberg, 1866
Ceratonereis keiskama Day, 1953: 426.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20961.
Locality: Keiskama Estuary, Cape south coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Nephtyidae
Nephtys Cuvier, 1817
Nephtys (Nephtys) capensis Day, 1953: 431.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20987.
Locality: Paarden Island, Cape Peninsula, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Glyceridae
Glycera Savigny, 1818
Glycera natalensis Day, 1957: 86.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20978.
Locality: Durban (Surf Beach), South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
J.H, DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA)
Family Goniadidae
Glycinde Muller, 1858
Glycinde capensis Day, 1960: 331.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20921.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20922.
Locality: 34°09,3'S 18°27,7'E, 22 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Onuphidae
Diopatra Audouin & Milne Edwards, 1833
Diopatra dubia Day, 1960: 348.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20989.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20990.
Locality: 34°22,7'S 18°43, 1'E, 79 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Diopatra monroi Day, 1960: 345.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20996.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20991.
Locality: 32°09'S 18°06'E, 108 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey (R. S. Africana II).
Diopatra neapolitana var capensis Day, 1960: 344.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20992.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20993.
Locality: 33°58'S 25°43'E, 38,5 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Epidiopatra Augener, 1918
Epidiopatra gilchristi Day, 1960: 352.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20917.
Locality: 33°03'S 27°S6'E, 57 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Epidiopatra hupferiana var monroi Day, 1957: 92.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A21010.
Locality: 34°07'S 18°32,5'E, 18 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Rhamphobrachium Ehlers, 1887
Rhamphobrachium capense Day, 1960: 355.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20933.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20934.
Locality: 34°07,5'S 18°31'E, 27.5 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Lumbrineridae
Lumbrineris Blainville, 1828
Lumbrineris heteropoda difficilis Day, 1963a: 410.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20952.
Locality: 25°50'S 33°00'E (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey (R. S. Africana II).
Lumbrineris hartmani (Day), 1953: 437 (as Lumbriconereis hartmani).
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A21048.
Locality: St James, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day’s unpublished material, Lumbrineris hartmani is a synonym
of Lumbrineris dubeni Kinberg, 1866.
Family Arabellidae
Drilognathus Day, 1960
Drilognathus capensis Day, 1960: 370.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20999.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A21000.
Locality: 32°05'S 18°17,7'E, 29 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Drilonereis Claparede, 1870
Drilonereis monroi Day, 1960: 365.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A21001.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A21002.
Locality: 32°09'S 18°06'E, 108 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey (R. S. Africana I).
J.H. DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA) Zh
Notocirrus Schmarda, 1861
Notocirrus australis Day, 1960: 367.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20936.
Locality: 34°09,3'S 18°27,7'E, 22 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
SEDENTARIA
Family Spionidae
Boccardia Carazzi, 1895
Boccardia pseudonatrix Day, 1961: 493.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20970.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20969.
Locality: Knysna Heads, Cape south coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Nerinides Mesnil, 1896
Nerinides gilchristi Day, 1961: 491.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20931.
Locality: 33°06,5'S 17°55,4'E, 86 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day’s unpublished material, Nerenides gilchristi is referred to as
Scololepis (Nerinides) gilchristi.
Prionospio Malmgren, 1867
Prionospio cirrobranchiata Day, 1961: 488.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20955.
Locality: Off Saldanha Bay (South Africa)
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20910.
Locality: 34°11'S 18°13'E, 144 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Prionospio saldanha Day, 1961: 485.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A21006.
Locality: Langebaan, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20909.
Locality: 33°03,5'S 18°01,5'E, 9 metres.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Magelonidae
Magelona Muller, 1858
Magelona capensis Day, 1961: 495.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20897.
Locality: 34°37'S 21°56'E, 86 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: Day (1961) designated the single specimen from the above locality
as the holotype. However, the specimen label states paratype.
Family Cirratulidae
Subfamily Cirratulinae
Dodecaceria Oersted, 1843
Dodecaceria pulchra Day, 1955: 418.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20942.
Locality: Kalk Bay, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Dodecaceria capensis Day, 1961: 504.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20997.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20998.
Locality: 34°11'S 18°39'E, 44 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Caulleriella Chamberlin, 1919
Caulleriella acicula Day, 1961: 501.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20949.
Locality: 33203,5) Syl Se Oles Ea ameties:
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20973.
Locality: 33°04,4'S 17°57,6'E, 30 metres (South Africa)
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Tharyx Webster & Benedict, 1887
Tharyx filibranchia Day, 1961: 503.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A21003.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A21004.
Locality: 34°09,6'S 18°27,4'E, 26 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day’s unpublished material, Tharyx filibranchia is referred to as
Caulleriella filibranchia.
J.H. DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA) Ze
Cirratulus Lamarck, 1801
Cirratulus gilchristi Day, 1961: 500.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20950.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20974.
Locality: 33°04, 1'S 17°59,7'E, 8-12 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Cirratulus indicus Day, 1973a: 352.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A21014.
Locality: Ratnagiri, south of Bombay, India.
Collected by: U.D. Gaikwad at Ratnagiri.
Family Orbiniidae
Subfamily Protoariciinae
Scoloplella Day, 1963
Scoloplella capensis Day, 1963a: 415.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20957.
Locality: 33°06;5'S 17 -32,9'E, 183 metres\(South A inica):
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Subfamily Orbiniinae
Phylo Kinberg, 1866
Phylo capensis Day, 1961: 476.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20908.
Locality: 33°03,6'S 17°56,4'E (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Scoloplos Blainville, 1828
Scoloplos (Leodamas) uniramus Day, 1961: 477.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A21047.
Locality: 34°35'S 21°56'E, 88 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day’s unpublished material Scoloplos (Leodamas) uniramus is a
synonym of Scoloplos (Leodamas) johnstonei Day, 1934.
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Scolaricia Eisig, 1914
Scolaricia capensis Day, 1961: 480.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20930.
Locality: 34°37'S 21°56'E, 86 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day’s unpublished material, Scolaricia capensis is referred to as
Scoloplos (Scoloplos) capensis.
Family Paraonidae
Aricidea Webster, 1879
Aricidea suecica simplex Day, 19636: 364.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20965.
Locality: 34°25'S 17°36'E, | 240 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Aricidea longobranchiata Day, 1961: 482.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20968.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20964.
Locality: 33°05,5'S 17°53,5'E, 77 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Aricidea capensis Day, 1961: 481.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20963.
Locality: 34°09'S 22°07,1'E, 10 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Paraonides Cerruti, 1909
Paraonides lyra capensis (Day), 1955: 417 (as Paraonis lyra var. capensis).
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20896.
Locality: Knysna Estuary, Cape south coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Opheliidae
Ophelia Savigny, 1818
Ophelia anomala Day, 1961: 515.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20900.
Locality: 34°22,5'S 18°37,3'E, 80 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
J.H. DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA)
Ophelia agulhana Day, 1961: 513.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20899.
Locality: 34°07,1'S 18°35,6'E, 21,7 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Scalibregmidae
Parasclerocheilus Fauvel, 1928
Parasclerocheilus capensis Day, 1961: 517.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20905.
Locality: Langebaan, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Capitellidae
Notomastus Sars, 1851
Notomastus fauveli Day, 1955: 422.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20988.
Locality: Knysna Estuary, Cape south coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Mediomastus Hartman, 1944
Mediomastus capensis Day, 1961: 518.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20587.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20560.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20589.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20954.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20588.
Locality: 33°04'S 17°59,7'E, 8-12 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Maldanidae
Subfamily Euclymeninae
Euclymene Verrill, 1900
Euclymene natalensis (Day), 1957: 107 (as Clymene natalensis).
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20976.
Locality: 34°S9'S 22°18'E, 105 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Sl
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Euclymene glandularis (Day), 1955: 428 (as Clymene glandularis).
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20975.
Locality: 34°04,47'S 22°13,06'E, 26 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Macroclymene Verrill, 1900
Macroclymene saldanha (Day), 1955: 428 (as Clymene (Praxillella) saldanha).
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20943.
Locality: Langebaan, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Maldanella Mcintosh, 1885
Maldanella capensis Day, 1961: 523.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20898.
Locality: 32°15,2'S 28°57,7'E, 47 metres (South ee
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Subfamily Maldaninae
Asychis Kinberg, 1867
Asychis capensis Day, 1961: 521.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20966.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20967.
Locality: 3370355'S) 1725851 Es 2>)5 metres (SouthpArica):
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Subfamily Nicomachinae
Nicomache Malmgren, 1866
Nicomache mossambica Day, 1951: 52.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20986.
Locality: Inhaca Island, Delagoa Bay, Mozambique.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Subfamily Lumbriclymeninae
Clymenura Verrill, 1900
Clymenura tenuis (Day), 1957: 110 (as Leiochone tenuis).
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20962.
Locality: Durban Bay, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
J.H. DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA) 3/5)
Family Flabelligeridae
Brada Stimpson, 1854
Brada villosa var capensis Day, 1961: 510.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20971.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20972.
Locality: 34°46'S 22°0S'E, 95 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Pherusa Oken, 1807
Pherusa saldanha Day, 1961: 508.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20907.
Locality: 33°03'S 18°00,9'E, 15 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Diplocirrus Haase, 1915
Diplocirrus capensis Day, 1961: 509.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20994.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20995.
Locality: 34°15'S 25°0,5'E, 11 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Sabellariidae
Sabellaria Savigny, 1817
Sabellaria simplex Day, 1973a: 355.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A21013.
Locality: Ratnagiri, south of Bombay, India.
Collected by: U.D. Gaikwad.
Family Pectinariidae
Pectinaria Savigny, 1818
Pectinaria (Lagis) korreni cirrata Day, 1963a: 434.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20895.
Locality: 29°53, 5 31°06;5'E, 71 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Ampharetidae
Subfamily Ampharetinae
Ampharete Malmgren, 1866
Ampharete agulhasensis (Day) 1961: 529 (as Lysippe agulhasensis).
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20945.
Type status: Paratype: SAM A20946.
Locality: 34°46'S 22°05'E, 95 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Ampharete capensis (Day) 1961: 530 (as Lysippe capensis).
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20947.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20948.
Locality: 33°02,8'S 18°01'E, 13 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey
Sabellides Milne-Edwards, 1838
Sabellides capensis Day, 1961: 528.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20927.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20948.
Locality: 34°11'S 18°01,2'E, 27 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Samythella Verrill, 1873
Samythella affinis Day, 1963a: 435.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A20956.
Locality: 34°S1'S 23°41'E, 183 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Terebellidae
Subfamily Thelepinae
Streblosoma Sars, 1872
Streblosoma abranchiata Day, 19635: 369.
Type status: Syntype: SAM—A19770.
Locality: 33°26'S 16°33'E, 2 269 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey (R. S. Africana I).
J.H. DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA) 5/3)
Telothelepus Day, 1955
Telothelepus capensis Day, 1955: 440.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20938.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20939.
Locality: Langebaan, Cape west coast, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: Although computer records at BM(NH) indicate that the specimens
are in their collections, they are in fact held at the South African Museum.
Subfamily Terebellinae
Pista Malmgren, 1866
Pista golora Day, 1955: 436.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20891.
Locality: Qolora shore, East London, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day (1967: 740), Pista golora is a synonym of Pista quadrilobata
(Augener, 1918). In Day’s unpublished material, P. golora is a synonym of P. cetrata
(Ehlers, 1887).
Pista unibranchia Day,1963a: 439.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20892.
Locality: 34°16,8'S 18°42,8'E, 60 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Amphitrite Muller, 1771
Amphitrite pauciseta Day, 1963a: 439.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20959.
Locality: 33°06,4'S 17°44,9'E, 146 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Sabellidae
Subfamily Sabellinae
Hypsicomus Grube, 1870
Hypsicomus capensis Day, 1961: 537.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20923.
Locality: 34°20'S 24°40'E, 102 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Potamilla Malmgren, 1866
Potamilla linguicollaris Day, 1961: 539.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20906.
Locality: 34°24'S 21°46'E, 18 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day’s unpublished material, Potamilla linguicollaris is referred
to as Perkinsiana linguicollaris.
Euchone Malmgren, 1866
Euchone capensis Day, 1961: 540.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20915.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20916.
Locality: 32°06'S 16°37'E, 311 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Subfamily Fabriciinae
Fabricia Blainville, 1828
Fabricia bansei Day, 1961: 543.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20951.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20920.
Locality: Mouille Point, Cape Town, South Africa.
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Fabricia filamentosa Day, 1963a: 439.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A20977.
Locality: 32°08'S 17°39'E, 172 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Family Serpulidae
Subfamily Serpulinae
Pomatoceros Philippi,1844
Pomatoceros americanus Day, 19736: 171.
Type status: Paratype: SAM—A21023.
Locality: Off Beaufort, North Carolina, U.S.A.
Collected by: Duke University Marine Laboratory in Beaufort, N.C., U.S.A.
J.H. DAY’S TYPE SPECIMENS OF POLYCHAETA (ANNELIDA) 37,
Ficopomatus Southern, 1921
Ficopomatus capensis Day, 1961: 552.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20901.
Locality: 34°24'S 21°46'E, 18 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
Remarks: In Day’s unpublished material, Ficopomatus capensis is referred to
as Ovopomatus capensis.
Neovermilia Day, 1961
Neovermilia capensis Day, 1961: 551.
Type status: Holotype: SAM—A20935.
Locality: 34°23,3'S 18°39,4'E, 97 metres (South Africa).
Collected by: UCT Ecological Survey.
REFERENCES
DAY, J.H. 1934. On a collection of South African Polychaeta with a catalog of the species recorded
from South Africa, Angola, Mozambique and Madagascar. Zoological Journal of the Linnean
Society 39: 15-82.
DAY, J.H. 1951. The polychaete fauna of South Africa. Part 1: The intertidal and estuarine Polychaeta
of Natal and Mozambique. Annals of the Natal Museum 12 (1): 1-67.
DAY, J.H. 1953. The polychaete fauna of South Africa. Part 2: Errant species from Cape shores and
estuaries. Annals of the Natal Museum 12 (3): 397-441.
DAY, J.H. 1955. The Polychaeta of South Africa. Part 3: Sedentary species from Cape shores and
estuaries. Zoological Journal of the Linnean Society 42: 407-52.
DAY, J.H. 1957. The polychaete fauna of South Africa. Part 4: New species from Natal and
Mozambique. Annals of the Natal Museum 14: 59-129.
DAY, J.H. 1960. The polychaete fauna of South Africa. Part 5: Errant species dredged off Cape coasts.
Annals of the South African Museum 45: 261-373.
DAY, J.H. 1961. The polychaete fauna of South Africa. Part 6: Sedentary species dredged off Cape
coasts with a few new records from the shore. Zoological Journal of the Linnean Society 44:
463-560.
DAY, J.H. 1962. Polychaeta from several localities in the western Indian Ocean. Proceedings of the
Zoological Society of London 139 (4): 627-56.
DAY, J.H. 1963a. The polychaete fauna of South Africa Part 7: Species from depths between 1000 and
3300 metres west of Cape Town. Annals of the South African Museum 46 (14): 353-71.
DAY, J.H. 19636. The polychaete fauna of South Africa. Part 8: New species and records from grab
samples and dredgings. Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History) (Zoology) 10 (7): 383-445.
DAY, J. H. 1967. A monograph on the Polychaeta of Southern Africa. Parts I and 2. London: British
Museum (Natural History).
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
DAY, J.H. 1973a. Polychaeta collected by U.D. Gaikwad at Ratnagiri, south of Bombay. Zoological
Journal of the Linnean Society 52 (4): 337-61.
DAY, J.H. 19736. New Polychaeta from Beaufort, with a key to all species recorded from North
Carolina. NOAA Technical Report NMFS No. 375. U.S. Department of Commerce Publication:
1-145.
DAY, J.H. 1975. On a collection of Polychaeta from intertidal and shallow reefs near Perth, Western
Australia. Records of the Western Australian Museum 3 (3): 167-208.
MAYR, E. 1969. Principles of Systematic Zoology. McGraw-Hill Book Company Inc., New York.
PETTIBONE, M.H. 1971. Partial revision of the genus Sthenelais Kinberg (Polychaeta: Sigalionidae)
with diagnoses of two new genera. Smithsonian Contributions to Zoology 109: 1—40.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 112 Band
April 2004 April
leaner wy 3} Deel
=
NEAR-BOTTOM AND PELAGIC GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS
IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN
by
GEORGYI M. VINOGRADOV
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and
review articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/iziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
L DOS, SO, HD, 2S, ES, cout), 4, SUS, 7D), 602, ta.)
HOD, 8, 02, My, IOUS), 112, 5, 7, tant), A404), (SES),
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 193 8
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
NEAR-BOTTOM AND PELAGIC GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS
IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN
by
GEORGYI M. VINOGRADOV
A.N. Severtzov Institute of the Problems of Evolution
(formerly Institute of Animal Evolutionary Morphology and Ecology) of
the Russian Academy of Science, 33 Lenin Avenue, Moscow 117071, Russia.
With 10 figs and 2 tables
[MS accepted August 1997|
ABSTRACT
Between October 1988 and February 1989, a collection of pelagic and benthopelagic gammarids was
taken during the seventeenth cruise of R/V Vityaz in the tropical (Seamount Error, Mozambique
Channel and Saya de Malha Bank) and subtropical (Walters Shoal) regions of the Western Indian
Ocean. A total of 2 362 specimens of 34 gammaridean species were found, four of which (Amaryllis
maculata, Scopelocheiropsis sublitoralis, Ichnopus walkeri and Regalia oculata) are described as new
to science. Comparison of the near-bottom and pelagic samples permitted detection of a group of
animals mainly confined to the near-bottom water. A key to lysianassoid amphipods of the genus
Trischizostoma 1s given.
CONTENTS
PAGE
UMA (© CHILE Fi IM appeared AMT I A DONE ok. ses cet cath.vy bainadlatedlc teaab ave sueced etie sem eaeinee ten ote dedead due cdedesae ole 40
Vectra Suen elerine OCIS sacs testa obec Meer tae tect o Als sl eth oe oe ule dalton n ome ate san endo Mean teua ee ear ae teu aacnbeannasete stay 4]
IDS Seal wlOmMecetny Ale Mila eee Gack seescotect es (cacdele cedaeucnet eres seake seecencencet ete Seteeee a tena Were mtnms maedeee yeaa teneh ant Sencueds 43
IRS YALO: A DFE VAAL OMS 10 PUCUTES sayc- a cccte este ccdees satebone vaeudoee.iiedoncceudenatae te meee eetneamensseteacesstedeet sr ssecsees 43
IETS IRON SPECIES eer ees 8 Ae wee et cat ete ofeg bart duvtiveedah dad dedi vuentaudeando cee ee dh eons eeaaeeta ns benrctaeaad neces oA: 43
GSN aLOL UME sO CMUSE MISCHIZOSLOMIG 2n..20erac tinea os SPE Wh el Sctiet cdot Se sawp ne Naen aR RO Te oa SBE nae eo ehae oat IAS: 46
IDS CUSSI@Memerer mre tee emneR Rate co het nee hy LL aed Ja, Dead ICE ne did teat cae agra aac eeeees eRe REA aha s Td.
SLAvOnmelstema eso Ar Dineen meen ee OST DAR Sous: Deecdeee meant hee e eetudes hae tse eee eee te cree aS aa, 80
PNCISMONVAS CE CHINE MUS y Meee eee sce tl Raa tats. Remedies mene et eR ee Os Banc Aman Re Men Sw suedetaedenlrak 83
I SIIETRETINCSS. = — cect Seccer 66 Sa a era ee ord Ace Sone fe eee eee ee eet eo a Cm Oe ie eee oe 84
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 112 (3), 2004:39-88, 10 figs, 2 tables
39
40) ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
Amphipods form an important element of marine pelagic communities. They inhabit
the surface and deep waters of the ocean at all latitudes from the equator to the polar areas.
They do not usually form dense populations, but their diversity and the diversity of their
life-forms can be high. All amphipods are of benthic origin, but representatives of their
different suborders have radiated into pelagic biotopes to differing extents. Unlike the
hyperiids, which have become completely pelagic, and the caprellids and ingolphyellids,
which have practically no pelagic representatives, some Gammaridea have penetrated
into this biotope.
The overwhelming majority of marine gammarids are benthic epifaunal species.
However, only a few benthic gammarideans (mainly inhabitants of secluded biotopes, e.g.
wood-borers, some symbionts of benthic animals or highly specialized phytal animals)
never leave the sea floor. The majority of benthic gammarideans, representing the most
diverse life-forms, enter the pelagial some way or other. All stages of expansion into
pelagic waters may be traced among them. Some may rise briefly into the near-bottom
layer, some make regular migrations into the meroplankton, others may have a long
pelagic life without losing all connection with the bottom and, ultimately there are those
with a purely pelagic way of life (Vinogradov 1992, 1995). Less than 4 per cent of marine
gammaridean species are in this final category: about 100 species of 50 genera, almost all
of them belonging to families which also have benthic representatives.
Usually it is the purely pelagic gammarideans that are captured by samplers operating
at a considerable distance from the bottom. Other gammarideans from the near-bottom
layers are difficult to catch and therefore are poorly represented in collections. It is clearly
necessary to carry out near-bottom trawlings as well as pelagic ones in order to obtain a
complete picture of a pelagic gammaridean’s taxocene. However, near-bottom trawling is
fraught with considerable technical difficulties, and consequently the ocean’s
near-bottom layers have been studied to a considerably lesser extent than purely pelagic or
benthic communities. This is certainly true of the Indian Ocean, where the purely pelagic
gammaridean fauna has been investigated in detail by past expeditions (of the R/V Dana,
Siboga, Vityaz (old)' and others). The near-bottom fauna is known to a much lesser extent.
In 1974, during the seventeenth cruise of the Russian R/V Akademik Kurchatov to
Peruvian coasts, hauls in the near-bottom layer were successfully carried out for the first
time using an Isaacs-Kidd midwater trawl with a pressure vibration transducer, the signal
of which was transmitted through the cable rope to the frequency meter mounted on the
vessel. The transducer reading permitted continuous information on the precise depth of
the trawl, and simultaneous measurement of bottom depth with the echosounder permitted
deployment of the trawl in the immediate proximity of the bottom. In 1987 this method
was used extensively during the eighteenth cruise of R/V Professor Stockman to the
1 ‘Old’ Vityaz, historically the third Russian research vessel bearing this name, operated between 1949 and 1979.
Expeditions of the ‘new’ Vityaz (sometimes incorrectly mentioned in articles as Vityaz-IV or Vityaz-I]) began in
1981.
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 4]
Pacific submerged ridges, Nazka and Sala-y-Gomez (Rudjakov & Zaikin 1990). That
cruise, in particular, gathered a great deal of near-bottom gammaridean material from this
region (Vinogradov 19905).
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Between October 1988 and February 1989, analogous works were carried out during
the seventeenth cruise of R/V Vityaz (new) in the tropical (Seamount Error Mountain
(EM), Mozambique Channel (MC) and Saya de Malha Bank (SdM)) and subtropical
(Walters Shoal (W)) regions of the Western Indian Ocean’. The specimens of pelagic and
benthopelagic gammarideans collected by this expedition are the basis of the present
work.
Animals were collected with the following apparatus:
1. Samyshev-Aseev modification of the Isaacs-Kidd midwater trawl (IKSAMT) with
transducer (see above). Trawl mouth area was 5.5 m’, the net was 25 m long and made
completely out of 5 mm mesh, a sieve frame (1.3 mm mesh, 5 m length) was fitted at
the cod-end. Two types of haul were performed: near-bottom trawling at distances of
10-30 m from the bottom (NBT) and pelagic trawling far from the bottom (PT). In all,
28 hauls were carried out in tropical regions and 24 on the Walters Shoal, yielding
1 788 and 502 gammarideans, respectively.
2. Towed underwater apparatus ‘Sound’, or ‘Zvuk’ in the Russian language (TUA
‘Sound’) (Biryukov et a/. 1990). For plankton studies the construction of the apparatus
was modified by the addition of a sampler consisting of two nets with mouth area
0.12 m’ and mesh size 0.178 mm. The nets were opened and closed successively using
the Tucker principle. Control signals for operation of the release gear are applied
autonomously at each of the locks. Constancy of distance from the bottom was
maintained by the winch operator using TV images during tows near the bottom, and
by the apparatus’ own echo-sounder in other cases. Hauls of 30 to 60 minutes duration
were made at distances of 2 m and 30 m from the bottom (mfb) at each station. In all,
35 stations were sampled with the TUA (15 on the Walters Shoal) from which
61 gammarideans were taken (Note: a preliminary list of these species was published
by Vinogradov (1990a). Here it is made more precise and given in the final variant
(Table 1)).
3. Big Juday plankton net (BDN 37/50) with mouth area 0.1 m* and mesh size 0.18 mm
4. Oceanic model of Juday plankton net (ODN 80/113) with mouth area 0.5 m* and mesh
size 0.18 mm.
2 One can find detailed descriptions of the Walters Shoal and zoogeographical analysis of its position in Collete &
Parin (1991).
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Standard catching layers during stations with the Juday nets were 1 000-500, 500-250,
250-100, 100—50 and 50-0 m from the surface. If ocean depth at the point was less than
1 000 m, the lower limit of the deepest haul was selected at a distance of 50 m from the
bottom. The Juday net hauls were usually accompanied by hauls with the TUA ‘Sound’.
In this case ‘Sound’ works received the next station number (for example, st. 2648—ODN
and st.2649-TUA), but catches were carried out in the same point. Only
11 gammarideans were taken in all catches by both models of the Juday nets.
Detailed information on the hauls yielding gammarideans is given in Station List
(Tables A—D, pages 80 to 83). All the gammarideans captured are considered below’,
together with data on the sampling gear, station number, region, time of capture (D = day;
N = night), depth and characteristics of the haul (NBT-PT for IKSAMT, n mfb for TUA
‘Sound’).
ABER |
Gammaridean abundances at different distances above the sea bed
(on basis of hauls of TUA ‘Sound’ and Juday nets, number of individuals)
TUA ‘Sound’
2 mfb 30 mib
Juday nets
(near-bottom hauls)
Group Species
Pelagic Cyphocaris anonyx
C. challengeri
Stenopleura atlantica
*Fusirella ?elegans juv.
* Stenopleuroides macrops
*Halice macronyx
Bathystegocephalus globosus
Parandania boecki
Benthopelagic | *Orchomene pelagica
*Furythenes gryllus juv.
*Ichnopus walkeri sp. nov.
3
*Scopelocheiropsis sublitoralis sp. nov. 2 = =
*Parargissa curticornis — =
* Ampelisca brevicornis
1
* Stegocephaloides attingens 5
*? Eusirus crosnieri (damaged spcm.) D) ] -
1
* Paramoera austrina
* Halicoides tambiella 2 2 =
*Halicoides discoveryi = ] 1
NB: asterisk (*) indicates amphipods which were found only in the near-bottom hauls (in all material).
3. Fora description of the collection of hyperiidean amphipods taken by these catches from the Walters Shoal sze
G. Vinogradov (1993).
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 43
DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS IN FIGURES
A1—An — antennae I and II; L — lower lip; Md — mandible; Mx1-Mxit— maxillae I and
Il; Mxp — maxilliped; PI-P Vi — pereopods I—VII (pereopods I and II = gnathopods I and
II); Epm — epimeron III; Ur-Unmt— uropods J[-III; T — telson.
LIST OF SPECIES
Lysianassoidae
Trischizostoma barnardi
Trischizostoma tanjae
Amaryllis maculata sp. nov.
Erikus dahli
Cyphocaris anonyx
Cyphocaris challengeri
Cyphocaris richardi
Cyphocaris faurei
Cyphocaris cornuta
Paracyphocaris praedator
Scopelocheiropsis sublitoralis sp. nov.
Eurythenes gryllus
Eurythenes obesus
Ichnopus pelagicus
Ichnopus walkeri sp. nov.
Thoriella islandica
Orchomenella pelagica
Hyperiopsidae
Parargissa curticornis
Stegocephalidae
Parandania boecki
Bathystegocephalus globosus
Stegocephaloides attingens
Pardaliscidae
Halice tenella
Halice macronyx
Halicoides discoveryi
Halicoides tambiella
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Ampeliscidae
Ampelisca brevicornis
Synopiidae
Synopia variabilis
Eusiridae
Eusirus crosnieri
Eusiropsis riiset
Eusirella ?elegans
Stenopleura atlantica
Stenopleuroides macrops
Regalia oculata sp. nov.
Paramoera austrina
Superfamily LYSIANASSOIDAE
(= Family Lysianassidae s.1.)
Trischizostoma Boeck, 1861
The species belonging to this genus are semiparasitic. They have strong prehensile
pereopods and narrow piercing mouthparts. The genus falls into two distinct groups. The
first group includes T. serratum, T. remipes and T. paucispinosum, characterized by telson
cleft to middle and weakly specialized mouthparts. They are symbionts of benthic
animals, e.g. sponges (K. Barnard 1925). Representatives of the second group rise up into
the water column where they occupy an atypical ecological niche for gammaridean
amphipods. They are ectoparasites of fishes, mainly of sharks (Stephensen 1935; Vader &
Romppainen 1985). These species have telson small entire (only one—T. crosnieri—
weakly cleft) and highly specialized mouthparts, e.g. maxillae are elongated stylets,
mandibles are narrow and have well-developed incisors, maxillipeds are considerably
reduced, and they have digitate grooved inner plates.
It is a long time since the existing key to Trischizostoma was published in English*
(J.L. Barnard 1961) and the genus now includes more than twice the number of species as
it did then (see Ledoyer 1978; G. Vinogradov 19906, 1991; Lowry & Stoddart 1993,
1994). A new key that includes all the Trischizostoma species known to 1996 1s provided.
4 Russian key to the genus Trischizostoma was published by Vinogradov (1991) and does not include recently
described T. crosnieri and T. richeri (see Lowry & Stoddart 1993, 1994).
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 45
Trischizostoma barnardi G. Vinogradov, 1990
Trischizostoma barnardi G. Vinogradov, 1990b: 37.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2598 (MC), D, PT 400 m—1 specimen, 7 mm.
Distribution
Formerly recorded from the Pacific Ocean (submerged Nazka Ridge).
Trischizostoma tanjae G. Vinogradov, 1991
Trischizostoma tanjae G. Vinogradov, 1991: 26.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2575 (EM), D, NBT 380-400 m—5 @, 5—7.5 mm; st. 2576 (EM), D, PT
50-0 m—1 2, 6 mm; st. 2823 (EM), D, NBT 390-400 m—139 specimens, 5—7 mm;
st. 2826 (EM), N, NBT 390-370 m—3 2, 7.5—8 mm, | o, 7.5 mm, 7 juv., 5—7 mm.
Description
The description of 7. tanjae published elsewhere was based on this collection, all
specimens of which must be regarded as type material. The holotype (2 reif. 5 mm, from
st. 2575) and most of the paratypes are stored in the Zoological Museum of the Moscow
State University, Moscow (ZMMU), holotype No Mb—032 and paratypes No Mb—1013
(104 specimens) and Mb—1033. However, 25 paratypes from st. 2823 have been deposited
in the South African Museum (catalogue numbers SAM—A40854 to SAM—A40878).
Distribution
Found only near the submerged Error Mountain (Indian Ocean).
Remarks
Sharks, as has already been noted, are the typical hosts of fish-associated semiparasitic
Trischizostoma. On the Error Mountain, near-bottom catches of commercial fish and
shrimp trawls included numerous sharks Halaelurus hispindus (Scyliorhinidae). Sharks
made up 12 per cent of the total number of caught fishes (Scherbatchev 1989). Halaelurus
hispindus may be a host of 7. tanjae. During the Vityaz cruise, many H. hispindus were
caught near the Socotra Island, but unfortunately no IKSAMT trawling was done there to
catch amphipods. In other regions, neither H. hispindus nor T. tanjae were found.
46
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
KEY TO THE GENUS TRISCHIZOSTOMA
1A. Telson partly cleft -2.00 Acti oe 2
IB. Telson entire... 2c ee aicn ere hottaca vs sesse eeu sa 5
ZA; Pereopod Mdactylinnemimanrcin'seratc 1. eee eee T. serratum
2B: Pereopod I dactyinner marein- smooth ....0...220..40...05-).0s-0 ee 3
3A. Palm of pereopod L-very spin0Se (Ma)... ceecciercsdeueseseiuses ee +
SB Ral ofpereopad li scancelyaspin@se= eens eee T. pincispinosum
4A. 6th article of pereopod I 1.5 times as wide as long. 7th article of pereopod VII
Stender(nonmaldacty 1). Gaskets ick ee ee ee T. crosnieri
4B. 6th article of pereopod I 2—3 times as wide as long. 7th article of
percopodeVil oval ie susqhi hid lel eae Aer CEE a ee T. remipes
SA. Maxillipedal palp much longer than outer plates of maxillipeds ....................0..08 6
5B. Maxillipedal palp not longer than outer plates of maxillipeds ............0.....0.cecee. 12
6A. Pereopod I 6th article oval, width exceeding length by at least 1.5 times ............... 7
6B. Pereopod I 6th article of another shape. Width never exceeding length by more
TA.
7B.
8A.
SB.
than 1.5 times. If length:width ratio approximates to 1.5, the posterior margin
of 6th article forms a distinct angle with palmar margin so that article 1s nearly
CITATION UE A sce vos esced coheaatae eae oie Side eee eae 10
Pereopod I 6th article spiniferous palmar margin without triangular processes ...... 8
Pereopod I 6th article spiniferous palmar margin with triangular processes
Pe Na a ig Gi a a tele he eB NS nal Cok a Lid ale 120 04 «Oi a eg T. denticulatum>
Pereopod II 5th article as long as or slightly longer than 3rd article and twice
as long as oval 6th article. Pereopod II 2nd article twice as long as 5th article.
Pereopod VI 2nd article as long as 4th and 5th articles combined ......................06 9
Pereopod II 5th article shorter than 3rd article and not more than 1.5 times as
long as pyriform 6th article. Pereopod III 2nd article not longer than 5th article.
Pereopod VI 2nd article shorter than 4th and 5th articles combined
PA andl ls 2 eke Nae Meira te BAR the 2 a Ok area ta 0 SAN a a ew a T. macrochela®
5
6
Ledoyer (1978) did not find eyes in 7. denticulatum but suggested that they may have disappeared as a result of
preservation of the specimen. So this character is not included in this key.
The description of 7. macrochela erroneously reported that the palp of maxilla I is completely absent
(Vinogradoy 19904). Repeated investigation of the holotype shows that a very delicate 1-articulated
rudimentary palp of maxilla I (without any setae) is present in T. macrochela.
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 47
9A. Rostrum length greater than half head. Pereopod VI 2nd article length hardly
EXCESS TIS WGI Narn serene egret Rae satya cee er aie in aie a mR mer T. longirostra
9B. Rostrum length does not exceed half of head. Pereopod VI 2nd article length
GE AlhyRe xX CECAS US: WAGEN J, i). goe sug ete renee Senecio eite. wacet ene etc cvavaetesseveaede oe T. richeri
10A. Coxa II maximum height equal to that of the corresponding pereonite.
Rostrum horizontal, its top reaching beyond peduncle of antenna 1 ...................... 1]
10B. Coxa II maximum height equal to half height of corresponding pereonite.
Rostrum rounded, its top not reaching beyond peduncle of antenna I ... T. nicaeense
11A. Coxae II to VII decreasing in height progressively. Pereopod I 6th article
approximately triangular, with pronounced angle between palmar and
| OSTSIUONE TOD UET ECTS see de ccc Ren aree Some ok at emalin rt RSe amy Mr ee Pee iia es eo T. rashii
11B. Coxae II to IV equally high. Coxa V half as high as coxa IV. Other coxae
decreasing in height progressively. Pereopod I 6th article irregularly rounded
eM ee sic tered Satie gat Oe em aee emai c 2 ee, Ne Be T. circulare
12A. Maxillipedal palp half as long as outer plates of maxillipeds. Pereopod I
6th article spiniferous palmar margin is even. Pereopods V to VII 2nd
AATCIESS OOM WHE VTTANS WOWNTG ET! JOLWME sonocooscanoseocc donno ssenveccoonasesceo: T. nascaensis
12B. Maxillipedal palp is slightly shorter than outer plates of maxillipeds.
Pereopod I 6th article spiniferous palmar margin forming declivitous
serrations or pronounced outgrowth. At least pereopod VII 2nd article
POsteMOnmMaLoIM IS Concave On Skewed GiIStallly Wecz.cs-ceecseess ccunnecssed-ossseeeesessse- eee Ig)
13A. Pereopod II 6th article length exceeds width. Maxillipedal palp with all
Spanicles approximately equalwms |eimethy :c5.0..:ceue one 2-- sacs eke os eee eee eee 14
13B. Pereopod I 6th article width exceeds length. Maxillipedal palp 2nd article
tvs CeASHIOMOrAS. BITS GOR Cie 28. ce Sac actusessccdees aces cocoons cool aeeeawak ac eos T. tanjae
14A. Pereopod I 6th article spiniferous palmar margin with declivitous serrations.
Pereopod V 2nd article posterodistal margin skewed. Uropod III rami half as
FOMERASH Me UMC Eck manimdt Maceieess Jeet ee catee LNA se chico heene haem Oe T. barnardi
14B. Pereopod I 6th article spiniferous palmar margin with a ridge of large
outgrowths. Pereopod V 2nd article posterodistal margin forming a round
lobe. Uropod III rami slightly longer than peduncle ......................... T. cristochelata
48
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 1
Amaryllis maculata sp. nov. Holotype.
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 49
Amaryllis Haswell, 1880
Amaryllis maculata sp. nov.
Fig. |
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2725 (W), N, NBT 20 m—1 2 juv., 6.5 mm (holotype, SAM—A40879).
Type locality
Walters Shoal.
Description j
Juvenile female 6.5 mm long. Body smooth, without thorns and carina. Urosome
segment I with dorsal depression. Eyes large, black, kidney-shaped.
Antennae I and II in living specimens with red rings around the distal parts of all
articles, pereonal, pleonal and urosomal segments also with red bands on posterior
margin, centre of coxae IV and V and pereopods VI and VII basal articles each with red
spot.
Lateral cephalic lobe large, quadriform, rounded. Rostrum short, blunt, recurved.
Antenna I with peduncle articles cylindrical; 1st peduncle article twice as long and broad
as 2nd, 2nd twice as long and broader than 3rd, flagellum 12-articulate, accessory
flagellum 5-articulate. Antenna II subequal to antenna I.
Lower lip lacking inner lobes and with narrow mandibular processes.
Mandible, incisor smooth, spine row well developed, molar weak, conical; palp attached
slightly proximal to molar, palp second article linear, 1.5 times as long as article 3. Maxilla I
lacking palp; outer plate narrow, linear, longer than inner, with 11 serrate teeth distally,
medial margin with fine setae distally, inner plate with 2 pinnate setae distally, medial
margin setulose. Maxilla II inner and outer plates subequal, outer plate narrower than
inner, both having long, strong spine-setae distally.
Maxilliped inner plate well developed, narrow, reaching ¥% along outer; outer plate
elongate with distomedial row of small submarginal spines, palp slightly exceeding outer
plate, bearing few weak long setae, 4th article rudimentary, bearing two long apical setae.
Pereopod I simple, short, second article linear, slightly bent, as long as articles 4—7
combined; article 6 slightly longer than article 5. Pereopod II subchelate, 2nd article
linear, shorter than articles 4-6 combined, 5th article sublinear, about 1.5 times as long as
6th; palm short, not lunate, sub-straight, dactyl short and covering 100 per cent of palmar
edge.
Coxa III and [TV much deeper than II; coxa IV substantially excavate posteriorly with
posteroventral lobe somewhat round, pointed dorsally. Pereopods HI and IV subequal,
2nd article linear, equal to 5th and 6th articles combined, 4th subequal to 5th but broader;
6th article linear, slightly curved, 1.2—1.5 times as long as 5th. Coxae V—VII height
decreasing from V to VII. Coxa V with weak posterior lobe. Pereopod V shorter than
subequal VI and VII. Pereopods V—VII article 2 with well developed rounded
50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
posteroventral lobe; article 4 expanded posteriorly and bearing few spines along anterior
and posterior margins; pereopods V—VII article 6 linear, longer and slightly narrower than
article 5; dactyl strong and slightly curved.
Epimeron III weakly extended posteriorly with small sinus posteroventrally.
Uropod I peduncle with lateral row of spines; uropod II inner ramus shorter than outer
ramus, bearing row of spines; uropod HI aequiramous, ordinary, peduncle short with
apicomedial tooth, outer ramus 2-articulate.
Telson cleft 50 per cent of length, width 70 per cent of length, lateral margins slightly
excavate, narrowly gaping with apically rounded lobes.
Remarks
Many details of the morphology of A. maculata sp. nov., i.e. form of the eyes and
rostrum, mandibular palp, form and proportions of pereopod articles, resemble those of
A. macrophthalma. However, A. maculata has maxilliped outer plates of another form,
maxilla II with broad inner plate, telson with concave edges and some other characters,
which clearly separate it from A. macrophthalma.
Neither our specimen of A. maculata sp. nov., nor J. Barnard’s specimen of
A. macrophthalma (see Barnard 1972), have the inner edge of uropod II inner ramus
incised. Such an incision is shown for A. macrophthalma by Stebbing (1888) and is found
on other species of the genus and in closely related genera (Evikus, for example), though it
is not shown by Bathyamaryllis (see Pirlot 1933). This incision is also absent in the new
species of this lysianassoid group described from the Red Sea. It constituted the main
reason for the description of the genus Pseudoamaryllis by Andres (1981). But, as can be
seen, this character is not reliable, so the validity of Pseudoamaryllis may be doubtful.
Biotope
This individual was caught on the top of Walters Shoal. Based on the results of Sigsbee
trawlings, diving and TV observations, the top was covered by stones with narrow gaps
between them, covered by thalloid red algae and encrusted by dominant calcareous
coralline algae Mesophyllum syrphetodes—see Collet & Parin (1991). This article
includes a photograph of the bottom at st. 2691 of the R/V Vityaz, taken at practically the
same position as st. 2725 (Collet & Parin 1991, fig. 2).
Erikus Lowry & Stoddart, 1987
Erikus dahli Lowry & Stoddart, 1987
ene, Z.
Erikus dahli Lowry & Stoddart, 1987: 1304.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2799 (SdM), N, NBT 300-220 m—3 ¢&, 6-6.5 mm (SAM-—A40880).
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 51
Distribution
Temperate water near the Chile coast. Lowry & Stoddart (1987) assumed that some
species of this genus were found near South Africa. A new record from Saya de Malha
Bank broadens the known distribution of this species.
Remarks
Our specimens correspond to the description and figures of typical specimens.
However, our animals are noticeably smaller than the holotype (21.4 mm) and one of the
paratypes (13 mm), although other paratypes have lengths between 6 and 7 mm, similar to
our specimens.
Cyphocaris Boeck, 1871
Cyphocaris anonyx Boeck, 1871
Cyphocaris anonyx Boeck, 1871: 104; 1872: 141. Schellenberg, 1926a: 210. Birstein &
Vinogradov, 1955: 212. Non Chilton, 1912: 464.
Cyphocaris micronyx Stebbing, 1888: 656. Chevreux, 1900: 165.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2575 (EM), D, PT 380-400 m—4 specimens, 8.5—10.5 mm; st. 2597
(MC), N, NBT 360-550 m—1 specimen, 6.5 mm; st. 2604 (MC), N, NBT 680 m—
8 specimens, 4—12 mm; st. 2642 (MC), N, PT 1200 m—1 specimen, 10.5 mm; st. 2714
(W), D, NBT 1 000 m—8% specimens, 8.5—11 mm; st. 2717 (W), N, PT 1 000 m—
6 specimens, 9.5—12.5 mm; st. 2720 (W), D, PT 850-730 m—% specimens, 8—12 mm;
st. 2799 (W), D, PT 620-600 m—® specimens, up to 12 mm; st. 2773 (W), N, PT 1 150 m
—6 specimens, up to 13 mm; st. 2788 (SdM), N, PT 400 m—1 specimen, 10 mm; st. 2789
(SdM), N, PT 1 000 m—10 specimens, 11.5—13 mm. TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2661 (MC), D,
300-260 m (2 mfb)—4 juv., 3 mm each; st. 2678 (W), N, 840-820 m (2 mfb)—1 damaged
specimen; st. 2681 (W), N, 450-480-310 m (30 mfb)—1 damaged specimen; st. 2737
(W), D, 1 085—1 090 m (30 mfb)—1 specimen, 6 mm and | exuviae; st. 2798 (SdM), N,
230-255 m (30 mfb)—I1 juv. specimen.
Distribution
Cosmopolitan, meso- and bathypelagic.
Cyphocaris challengeri Stebbing, 1888
Cyphocaris challengeri Stebbing, 1888: 661; 1906: 29. Schellenberg, 1926a: 243. G. Vinogradov,
1990b: 40.
Cyphocaris alicei Chevreux, 19056: 1. Walker, 1909: 327. Non Strauss, 1909: 67.
Cyphocaris kincaidi Thorsteinson, 1941: 58.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
JF
‘66L7 IS “WU ¢’9 YNSUg] “ope 1PYOp snyLsT
Z MINS
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 3p)
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2578 (EM), N, PT 380-400 m—10 specimens, 8—14 mm; st. 2598 (MC),
D, PT 400 m—3 specimens, 5.5—8 mm; st. 2605 (MC), D, PT 460—700 m—1 specimen,
10 mm; st. 2675 (W), N, PT 1 000 m—1 specimen, 12 mm; st. 2712 (W), N, PT 100 m—
1 specimen, 9 mm; st. 2714 (W), D, NBT 850—650 m—1 specimen, 10.5 mm; st. 2719
(W), N, PT 200 m—1 specimen, 11 mm; st. 2720 (W), D, PT 850-730 m—2 specimens,
10 mm each; st. 2727 (W), N, PT 150 m—1 specimen, 8 mm; st. 2773 (W), N,
PT 1 150 m—4 specimens, up to 13 mm; st. 2776 (W), N, PT 200 m—S specimens, up to
9 mm; st. 2777 (W), N, PT 200 m—3 specimens, up to 10 mm; st. 2787 (SdM), N,
PT 100 m—21 specimens, up to 15 mm; st. 2788 (SdM), N, PT 400 m—10 specimens, up
to 13 mm; st. 2789 (SdM), N, PT 1 000 m—10 specimens, 9.5—14.5 mm; st. 2794 (SdM),
D, NBT 300-650 m—59 specimens, 7—11 mm; st. 2799 (SdM), N, NBT 300-200 m—
9 specimens, 7-10 mm; st. 2800 (SdM), N, PT 200 m—3 specimens, up to 8 mm; st. 2805
(SdM), D, PT 200 m—14 specimens, up to 10 mm; st. 2807 (SdM), N, NBT 200 m—
12 specimens, up to 13 mm. TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2647 (MC), N, 400-470 m (30 mfb)—
1 specimen, 4 mm; st. 2655 (MC), N, 1 210—1 215 m (2 mfb)—1 exuviae, 11 mm;
st. 2792 (SdM), D, 266 m (30 mfb)—1 juv., 4mm. ODN 80/113: st. 2586 (0°27'N 56°03'E
— Equator Mountain), N, 500-250 m—1 2, 12 mm, with 49 eggs in marsupium; st. 2656
(MC), N, 1 000—500 m—1 juv., 3 mm.
Distribution
Atlantic, Pacific, Indian and Southern Oceans, mesopelagic.
Cyphocaris richardi Chevreux, 1905
Cyphocaris richardi Chevreux, 1905a: 1. Schellenberg, 1926a: 245. 19266: 206. Birstein &
Vinogradov, 1955: 12.
Cyphocaris anonyx Chilton, 1912: 464 (non Boeck, 1871:104).
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2616 (MC), N, PT 1 700—1 900 m—1 specimen, 23 mm; st. 2717 (W), N,
PT 1 000 m—1 juv., 13.5 mm; st. 2773 (W), N, PT 1 150 m—7 specimens, up to 12 mm;
st. 2789 (SdM), N, PT 1 000 m—1 specimen, 24 mm.
Distribution
Cosmopolitan, abysso- and bathypelagic.
Cyphocaris faurei Barnard, 1916
Cyphocaris faurei K. Barnard, 1916: 117. Schellenberg, 1926a: 215. G. Vinogradov, 19905: 41.
Cyphocaris alicei Strauss, 1909: 67 (non Chevreux, 19055: 1).
54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2604 (MC), N, NBT 680 m—7 specimens, 9-30 mm; st. 2605 (MC), D,
PT 460—700 m—3 specimens, 17, 25 and 28 mm; st. 2616 (MC), N, PT 1 700—1 900 m—
1 specimen, 29 mm; st. 2789 (SdM), N, PT 1 000 m—1 specimen, 22 mm.
Distribution
Circumoceanic in southern hemisphere, also in the Gulf of California, mesopelagic.
Cyphocaris cornuta Ledoyer, 1978
Cyphocaris cornuta Ledoyer, 1978: 375.
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2655 (MC), N, 1 190—1 210 m (30 mfb)—1 exuviae, 10 mm.
Distribution
Mozambique Channel.
Paracyphocaris Chevreux, 1905
Paracyphocaris praedator Chevreux, 1905
Paracyphocaris praedator Chevreux, 1905c: 1. Shoemaker, 1945: 189. Bowman & Wasmer,
1984: 844.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2616 (MC), N, PT 1 700-1 900 m—1 ¢&, 8 mm.
Distribution
Cosmopolitan, bathypelagic.
Remarks
Bowman & Wasmer (1984) found three P. praedator among the attached eggs of the
shrimp Oplophorus novaezeelandie. They suggested that P. praedator is an egg-mimic
that feeds on the Oplophorus eggs. The prehensile pereopods of Paracyphocaris prevent
it from being dislodged by the host’s grooming.
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN I)
Scopelocheiropsis Schellenberg, 1926
Scopelocheiropsis sublitoralis sp. nov.
Rig? 3:
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2661 (MC), D, 300-258 m (2 mfb)—1 o&, 4.5 mm (holotype,
SAM-—A40881) and 1 juv., 2.5 mm (paratype). Paratype is stored in the P.P. Shirshov
Institute of Oceanology of the Russian Academy of Sciences.
Bottom at st. 2661
Mud with sand.
Type locality
Mozambique Channel.
Description
Male, 4.5 mm. Body smooth, without thorns. Urosomit I with low convex carina.
Rostrum small. Epistome hangs over upper lip.
Antenna I shorter than II, peduncle articles broad, the length of each article less than
breadth, Ist article longer than 2nd and 3rd combined. Flagellum proximal articles fused
conical. Distal part of flagellum 8-articulate. Accessory flagellum 3-articulate. Ist article
longer than 2nd and 3rd combined. Antenna II peduncle articles broad, subrectangular,
margin with few transverse rows of short setae; flagellum 27-articulate.
Lower lip lacking inner lobes, mandibular process narrow.
Mandible, incisor smooth convex, lacinia mobilis well developed, spine row short,
molar absent. Palp strong, 2nd article much longer than 3rd, both with a row of long setae
distally on medial margin.
Maxilla I inner plate shorter than outer, with row of 10 pinnate setae. Palp well developed,
2nd article expanded distally, apex broad, truncate with 7 apical spines (forked or serrate).
Maxilla I plates subequal, distal margin of both plates having row of long strong setae
varying from pinnate to smooth.
Maxilliped well developed, palp 4-articulate, inner plate reaching middle of palp
article 1, apex truncate with 4 short rounded spines, present a row of long pinnate setae
apicomedially; outer plate oval, nearly reaching distal margin of palp article 3, bearing
3 long pinnate setae apically and row of long spines on medial margin.
Coxae I-IV not densely setose distally. Coxa I trapeziform, expanded distally,
anterodistal angle blunt. Pereopod I scopelocheirin in structure, article 2 equal to articles
5 and 6 taken together, 6th longer than 5th, dactyl very vestigial and shrouded in setae.
Pereopod II subequal to pereopod I; 5th article drop-like, 6th rounded-oval, 1.5 times
longer than wide, dactyl emanating from middle of article 6 apex, palm straight, short, one
half of the distal margin, both articles 5 and 6 thickly covered by short and long setae.
Pereopods III and IV stout, 2nd articles dilated distally and equal to 5th and 6th articles
56
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
=
=
ee
ac and
a :
of a
Figure 3
Scopelocheiropsis sublitoralis sp. nov. Holotype.
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN D7,
taken together, 5th article 1.5 times shorter than wide, its posterodistal corner with setae
and short spines, 6th article conical, 2.5 times longer than Sth, with short spines on the
posterior margin and strong blunt spine at base of dactyl.
Pereopod V slender, 2nd article oblong-oval without distal lobe, dactyl sharp and
slightly curved, one quarter as long as 6th article. Pereopod VII 2nd article broad, anterior
margin concave distally and convex proximally, posterodistal lobe obliquely blunted
distally and not overreaching 3rd article, 4th and 5th articles subequal, 6th rather slender
and longer, dactyl short and sharp.
Epimeron III posterodistal angle broadly rounded.
Uropod II peduncle subequal to outer ramus, inner ramus slightly shorter than outer,
peduncle medial margin and inner ramus with short marginal spines, outer ramus lateral
margin with one strong lateral spine in distal half. Uropod HI rami subequal, longer than
peduncle, outer ramus article 2 very small, inner ramus medial margin with row of long
pinnate setae.
Telson ovoid, cleft beyond middle, each lobe with setule notch, lateral margin armed
dorsally with row of three short spines.
Remarks
The main distinctive features of the new species (cf. Scopelocheiropsis abyssalis, the
only other species of the genus) are the following: mandible with cutting edge well
developed; coxa I considerably widened distally; pereopods I and II subequal in length,
their 6th articles half as long again as the 5th; pereopod II 6th article slightly longer than
wide; pereopods III and IV Sth articles relatively long, with triangular anterodistal lobes;
pereopods V—VII 2nd articles of different shape, dactyls shorter.
Eurythenes Smith in Scudder, 1882
Eurythenes gryllus (Lichtenstein in Mandt, 1822)
Fig. 4.
Gammarus gryllus Lichtenstein in Mandt, 1822: 34.
Lysianassa magellanica Milne Edwards, 1848: 398.
Eurytenes magellanicus Lileborg, 1865: 11.
Eurythenes gryllus Smith, 1884: 54. Stephensen, 1933: 12 (partim). Gurjanova, 1951: 265. Birstein
& Vinogradov, 1955: 25. Barnard, 1961: 35.
Euryporeia gryllus Sars, 1891-1895: 86. Chevreux, 1900: 24.
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2703 (W), N, 995—985 m (30 mfb)—1 juv., 11 mm (SAM—A40882).
Distribution
Meso-, bathy- and abyssopelagic, 5 000—6 000 m. Panoceanic, including the Arctic
Basin and the Antarctic, inhabiting middle and near-bottom waters, feeding on carcasses
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
58
‘(qyur O€) UNOS, VAL “COLT IS “WU T] YSU] “anf snppus souaysing
py oInsIy
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 39
of fishes and other big animals. It gathers in large numbers on bait. Comparatively large
specimens up to 95 mm in length are commonly found in the water column. However,
juveniles and very large females (100—120 mm) are recorded only in the near-bottom
layers, where they can burrow into the substrate to avoid danger (Birstein and Vinogradov
1958; Baldwin and Smith 1987).
Remarks
Details of morphology of our specimen correspond to existing descriptions and figures
of E. gryllus, except for two: in contrast to the figure published by Sars (1891—1895) and
repeated by Gurjanova (1951), our animal has maxilla IJ inner and outer plates subequal
and maxilliped inner plates with stretched spine-like (not rounded) tops.
Eurythenes obesus (Chevreux, 1905)
Katius obesus Chevreux, 1905d: 1. Stephensen, 1933: 12 (partim).
Eurythenes obesus Schellenberg, 1955: 183. Shoemaker, 1956: 177. Birstein & Vinogradov, 1960:
184; 1962: 39; 1964: 163. J. Barnard, 1961: 38.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2718 (W), N, PT 100 m—1 &, 11 mm; st. 2719 (W), N, PT 200 m—1 2,
12 mm; st. 2773 (W), N, PT 1 150 m—1 specimen, 11 mm.
Distribution
Cosmopolitan, bathy- and abyssopelagic.
Ichnopus Costa, 1853
Ichnopus pelagicus Schellenberg, 1926
Ichnopus pelagicus Schellenberg, 19266: 218. Birstein & Vinogradov, 1964: 163. Lowry &
Stoddart, 1992: 216.
Socarnes longicornis Birstein & Vinogradov, 1960: 185. Gurjanova, 1962: 433.
?Ichnopus nossibeensis Ledoyer, 1986: 761.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2597 (MC), N, NBT 360-550 m—1 o&, 9.5 mm; st. 2625 (MC), N, NBT
210-220 m—29 specimens, 7—9.5 mm; st. 2799 (SdM), N, NBT 300-200 m—12 specimens,
6—10.5 (% reif.) mm; st. 2800 (SdM), N, PT 200 m—1 specimen, 10 mm; st. 2801 (SdM),
N, PT 50 m—1 &, 8.5 mm.
Distribution
Tropical Pacific and Indian Oceans.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
60
‘adAjojoyH ‘Aou ‘ds 1/ayjom sndouyoy
¢ ons
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 61
Ichnopus walkeri sp. nov.
ists:
Ichnopus taurus Walker, 1904: 238 (non Costa, 1853: 72).
Ichnopus sp. Lowry & Stoddart, 1992: 241, fig. 38 (based on Walker’s material).
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2635 (MC), D, 223 m (2 mfb)—2 juv., 4 mm (holotype,
SAM-—A40883) and 5 mm (SAM—A40884); st. 2676 (W), D, 1 058-1 068 m (2 mfb)—
| juv., 3.5 mm. One paratype is deposited in the P.P. Shirshov Institute of Oceanology of
the Russian Academy of Sciences.
Bottom at st. 2635 and 2676
Muddy.
Etymology
The species was named after Dr A.O. Walker, who first dealt with this animal (see
Remarks).
Type locality
Mozambique Channel.
Description
Juvenile male 4 mm long. Body smooth, lacking thorns and carina. Eyes large,
kidney-shaped, nearly contiguous mid-dorsally. Epistome separated from the upper lip.
Antenna I peduncle barrel-like, 1st article twice as long as 2nd and 3rd taken together,
Ist article breadth equal to length; 2nd article shortest. Flagellum proximal articles fused
into cone shape, callynophorate, distal part 10-articulate. Accessory flagellum well
developed, 3-articulate, Ist article longest. Antenna II slightly longer than antenna I,
flagellum 15-articulate, proximal articles with calceoli.
Mandible, incisor, smooth convex, spine row short, molar strong, conical, covered by
numerous setae and marginal spines. Palp narrow, weakly armed, slightly longer than
mandible itself, attached at level of molar, 3rd article weakly curved, shorter and narrower
than linear 2nd article.
Maxilla I inner plate oval with 2 pinnate setae apically, outer plate linear, longer than
inner plate; palp 2nd article truncate, apex armed with teeth, 5 small blunt spines and one
thick short seta.
Maxilla II inner plate shorter and slightly narrower than outer. Both plates armed by
long strong spine-setae.
Maxilliped weakly armed, mner plate reaching apex of palp Ist article, with straight cutting
edge distally, bearing small teeth and 2 setae; outer plate petal-like, broadly oval, thin, reaching
apex of palp 3rd article, medial margin with submarginal row of short spines; palp greatly
exceeding outer plate; dactyl elongate, unguiform, with short nail and accessory setules.
62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Coxa I deep, with somewhat concave anterior and posterior margins, anterodistal angle
rounded. Pereopod I 2nd article about 0.9 times as long as coxa I and subequal to the 5th
and 6th articles taken together; 3rd, 5th and 6th articles subequal, 5th article linear, 6th
narrow-conical. Dactyl curved, spoon-like, with band of strong setae distally, deeply
serrated on both margins with curved hook-like apex. Pereopod II longer than pereopod I,
2nd article slender, subequal to 4th, 5th and 6th articles taken together; 6th article slightly
shorter than 5th, oval with short palm.
Pereopods III-IV strong, 4th article 1.6 times as long and 1.8 times as broad as 5th article,
slender 6th article subequal to 4th. Coxa IV deep with dorsally subsharp posteroventral lobe.
Pereopod VI longer than V, VII longer than VI, each 2nd article with posteroventral
lobe well developed, rounded. Pereopod V has this lobe rounded with very weak sloping
teeth. Pereopod V 5th article also with weak posteroventral lobe; 6th article longer than
Sth. Pereopods VI and VII 2nd article lobes with straight, smooth posterior margin; 6th
article longer than Sth (but not so strong as in pereopod V). 4th articles of pereopods
V-VII with parallelogrammiform posteroventral lobes most developed on pereopod V
which is 1.7 times broader than long.
Uropod I peduncle larger than rami. Uropod I peduncle and rami subequal. Uropod III
peduncle shorter than rami.
Telson lobes triangular, 1.3 times as long as broad basally, cleft per cent of length, each
apex with spine and small setule.
Distribution
Also found near Sri Lanka at a depth of about 200 m (Walker 1904; Lowry & Stoddart
1992):
Remarks
Ichnopus walkeri sp. nov. is similar to the group of species which formerly were
attributed to the genus Glycerina Haswell, 1882. This genus was included into Ichnopus
in the latest revision (Lowry & Stoddart, 1992). However, all other known species of this
group—l. tenuicornis (Haswell, 1879), I. woodmasoni (Giles, 1890) and J. teretis
(Andres, 1981)—have deeply indentured article 2 of pereopod V.
The new species 1s also similar to J. comorensis Lowry & Stoddart, 1992, /. spinicornis
Boeck, 1861 and /. taurus Costa, 1853. Ichnopus comorensis and I. spinicornis differ from
I. walkeri in having a shorter and distally broadened coxal plate I, short 3rd article of
pereopod I and more or less broadly rounded tops of telson’s lobes. Also, in J. spinicornis
2nd article of pereopod I is broader than in the new species. Jchnopus taurus differs from
I. walkeri in having arming of maxilla I palp (8 separate distal denticles instead of 5 in
I. walkeri and another indentation of outer distal corner), numerous marginal setae on
mandibular palp 3rd article and smaller spines on the mandibular molar.
However, I have no doubt that our specimen belongs to the same species as the animal
which was caught near Sri Lanka in 1902 during a cruise of S/S Lady Havelock, and was
identified by Dr A.O. Walker as /. taurus (Walker 1904). Later, Lowry & Stoddart
re-examined this specimen and showed that it is not J. taurus, and marked it as
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 63
Ichnopus sp. (Lowry & Stoddart 1992). Unfortunately, I have not had the opportunity to
examine Walker’s specimen (Natural History Museum, London; catalogue numbers
1905.2.18:9 and 1905.2.18:304) but fig. 38 and the description in Lowry and Stoddart
(1992) helped to resolve this issue.
Thoriella Stephensen, 1915
Thoriella islandica Stephensen, 1915
Thoriella islandica Stephensen, 1915: 39. Shoemaker, 1945: 201. G. Vinogradov, 1990b: 41.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2575 (EM), D, NBT 380-400 m—1¢’, 11 mm (SAM—A40885).
Distribution
Cosmopolitan.
Orchomenella Sars, 1895
A few similar genera of lysianassoids (Orchomene, Orchomenella, Orchomenopsis,
Allogaussia, Tryphosa) had been described previously but later, many species with an
intergradation of characters were described and Barnard (1964a, 1969) declared that all
these genera were synonyms of the genus Orchomene. Following this, additional
revisions were made and the status of some ‘old’ orchomenoid groups of species changed
to subgeneric or generic levels. Now Orchomenella 1s again considered to be a valid genus
(Barnard & Karaman 1991; Lowry & Stoddart 1994),
Orchomenella pelagica Birstein & M. Vinogradov, 1960
Orchomenella pelagica Birstein & Vinogradov, 1960: 189.
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2676 (W), D, 1 058-1 068 m (2 mfb)—1 specimen, 6 mm.
Bottom at st. 2676
Muddy.
Distribution
Tropical Pacific and Indian Oceans.
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Hyperiopsidae
Parargissa Chevreux, 1908
Parargissa curticornis Birstein & M. Vinogradov, 1960
Parargissa curticornis Birstein & Vinogradov, 1960: 199.
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2655 (MC), N, 1 990-1 210 m (30 mfb)-1 & reif., 25 mm
(SAM—A40886). ©
Distribution
Equatorial regions of the West Pacific and Indian Oceans, meso- and bathypelagic.
Family Stegocephalidae
Parandania Stebbing, 1906
Parandania boecki (Stebbing, 1888)
Andania boecki Stebbing, 1888: 735.
Parandania boecki Stebbing, 1906: 95. Schellenberg, 1926a: 223. K. Barnard, 1932: 77.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2717 (W), N, PT 1 000 m—1 specimen, 10 mm; st. 2773 (W), N,
PT 1150 m—1 specimen, 9 mm; st. 2789 (SdM), N, PT 1 000 m—1 specimen, 13.5 mm.
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2649 (MC), N, 958-968 m (2 mfb)—1 juv., 2 mm. BDN 37/50: st. 2740
(W), N, 250—100 m—1 specimen, 9 mm.
Bottom at st. 2649
Muddy with holes, covered by numerous Hyalospongia (observed on TV monitor of
TUA ‘Sound’).
Distribution
Cosmopolitan, bathypelagic.
Remarks
There are observations showing that P. boecki feeds upon Cnidaria, in particular, on
the medusae of the genus Atolla (Moore & Rainbow 1989; Coleman 1990).
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 65
Bathystegocephalus Schellenberg, 1926
Bathystegocephalus globosus (Walker, 1909)
Stegocephalus globosus Walker, 1909: 329.
Stegocephalus valdiviae Strauss, 1909: 72.
Bathystegocephalus globosus Schellenberg, 1926b: 221. Birstein & Vinogradov, 1960: 205.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2675 (W), N, PT 1 000 m—1 specimen, 6 mm; st. 2713 (W), N,
PT 200 m—2 specimens, 5 mm each; st. 2714 (W), D, NBT 850-650 m—242 specimens,
4.5—12 mm; st. 2718 (W), N, PT 100 m—S specimens, 4.5 mm each; st. 2719 (W), N,
PT 200 m—32 specimens, 4.5—12.5 mm; st. 2720 (W), D, PT 850—730 m—2 specimens,
7 and 9 mm; st. 2726 (W), N, PT 100 m—S specimens, 3—7 mm; st. 2727 (W), N,
PT 150 m—S1 specimens, 4-11 mm; st. 2729 (W), D, PT 620-600 m—2 specimens,
4 mm each; st. 2773 (W), N, PT 1 150 m—7 specimens, up to 13 mm; st. 2775 (W), N,
PT 100 m—7 specimens, up to 7 mm; st. 2776 (W), N, PT 200 m—S7 specimens,
5—9 mm; st. 2777 (W), N, PT 550 m—29 specimens, up to 9 mm; st. 2785 (SdM), N,
PT 600 m— specimens, 4 and 11 mm; st. 2787 (SdM), N, PT 100 m—3 specimens,
10 mm each; st. 2788 (SdM), N, PT 400 m—2 specimens, 3 and 7 mm; st. 2805 (SdM), D,
NBT 200 m—1 368 specimens, 3-12 mm; st. 2807 (SdM), N, NBT 200 m—
18 specimens, 4-8 mm. TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2757 (W), D, 430-450 m (30 mfb)—
1 specimen, 3 mm. BDN 37/50: st. 2744 (W), N, 920-500 m—1 specimen, 9 mm.
Distribution
Tropical and subtropical regions in all oceans in the southern hemisphere.
Stegocephaloides Sars, 1895
Stegocephaloides attingens K. Barnard, 1916
Stegocephaloides attingens K. Barnard, 1916: 131.
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2647 (MC), N, 402-428 m (2 mfb)—1 juv., 3 mm; st. 2661 (MC), D,
300-258 m (2 mfb)—4 specimens, up to 6 mm. ODN 80/113: st. 2648 (MC), N, 450-250 m
—] juv., 2 mm. BDN 37/50: st. 2710 (W), N, 450-240 m—1 specimen, 3 mm.
Bottom at st. 2647 and 2661
Muddy, at st. 2647 with numerous holes (observed on TV monitor of TUA ‘Sound’).
Distribution
South Africa, 250—1 000 m.
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Pardaliscidae
Halice Boeck, 1871
Halice tenella Birstein & M. Vinogradov, 1962
Halice tenella Birstein & Vinogradov, 1962: 49; 1964: 168.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2799 (SdM), N, NBT 300-200 m (trawl touched the bottom)—
1 specimen, 5.5 mm.
Distribution
Indian Ocean in the Southern Hemisphere.
Remarks
Capture of this typically pelagic animal cannot be connected with the trawl touching
the bottom.
Halice macronyx (Stebbing, 1888)
Synopioides macronyx Stebbing, 1888: 1000; 1906: 227. Schellenberg, 19266: 225. Non K. Barnard,
1930: 363
Halice macronyx Birstein & Vinogradov, 1962: 48.
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2637 (MC), N, 930-(0) m (the locking mechanism was out of
order)—1 specimen, 7 mm; st. 2746 (W), D, 950 m (30 mfb)—1 specimen, 8 mm.
Distribution
Circumoceanic in the Southern Hemisphere.
Halicoides Walker, 1896
Halicoides discoveryi Thurston, 1976
Halicoides discoveryi Thurston, 1976: 149.
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2798 (SdM), N, 230-250 m (30 mfb)—1 o&, 4 mm (SAM—A40887).
BDN 37/50: st. 2758 (W), D, 500—250 m—1 specimen, 3 mm.
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 67
Distribution
Formerly recorded only in the Atlantic Ocean near the Canary Islands, in the few
pelagic hauls from 2 300 to 500 m.
Halicoides tambiella (J. Barnard, 1961)
Pardisynopia tambiella J. Barnard, 1961: 79. G. Vinogradov, 1990b: 44.
Halice tambiella Karaman, 1974: 10.
Halicoides tambiella Thurston, 1976: 149.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2689 (W), D, NBT 500 m (trawl touched the ground)—3 <, 5 mm each.
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2709 (W), N, 530-490 m (30 mfb)—1 specimen, 6 mm; st. 2757 (W),
D, 430-530 m (30 mfb)—1 specimen, 5 mm; st. 2797 (SdM), N, 248-258 m (2 mfb)—
2 specimens, 4 mm each.
Bottom at st. 2797
Sandy with ripples. One patch of starfishes was observed on TV monitor of TUA
‘Sound’.
Distribution
Indo-Pacific.
Remarks
The species was frequently found in benthopelagic trawlings on the Pacific submerged
ridges Nazka and Sala-y-Gomez (Vinogradov 19905). However, the type specimen was
taken by the grab in the Tasman Sea (Barnard 1961), so this is a true benthopelagic
species. The morphology of the present material is comparable with that from the Pacific.
Family Ampeliscidae
Ampelisca Kroyer, 1842
The genus includes more than 100 species. The majority are littoral, but 20 species are
bathyal and one is abyssal. Commonly ampeliscids live on soft grounds in muddy tubes,
often forming dense populations. Observations on Ampelisca typica, and a few other
species have, however, shown that in the second half of the night ampeliscids vacate their
tubes and swim in the plankton, although they do not come near to the sea surface (Mills
1967; Macquart-Moulin 1968; Kaim-Malka 1969; Macquart-Moulin et al. 1987).
Ampelisca brevicornis (Costa, 1853)
Araneops brevicornis Costa, 1853: 171.
Ampelisca laevigata Liljeborg, 1855: 123. Sars, 1891-1895: 169.
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Tetromatus bellianus Bate, 1856: 58; 1857: 139.
Ampelisca brevicornis Della Valle, 1893: 473 (partim).
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2624 (MC), N, 218 m (2 mfb)—1 specimen, 8 mm.
Bottom at st. 2624
Sandy with mud.
Distribution
Cosmopolitan in latitudes below 45°.
Remarks
Very polymorphic species (Schellenberg 1925; Reid 1951).
Family Synopiidae
Synopia Dana, 1852
Synopia variabilis Spandl, 1923
Synopia variabilis Spandl, 1923: 18; 1924: 48. J. Barnard, 1965: 494.
Material
Neuston net near underwater lamp at night: st. 2557 (Red Sea, 21°06'N 38°12'E), N,
0-—0.5 m—10 specimens, up to 4 mm.
Distribution
Red Sea, Ifaluk and Eniwetok Atolls.
Remarks
Animals reddish in colour, but eggs in marsupiums blue, which is typical of neustonic
animals.
Family Eusiridae
Eusirus Kroyer, 1845
Eusirus crosnieri Ledoyer, 1978
Eusirus crosnieri Ledoyer, 1978: 369.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2714 (W), D, NBT 850-650 m (trawl touched the ground)—1 specimen,
7 mm.
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 69
Distribution
Mozambique Channel and Madagascar Plateau.
Remarks
See also Eusirus sp.
Eusirus sp.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2823 (EM), D, NBT 390-400 m—1 specimen. TUA ‘Sound?’ st. 2655
(MC), N, 1 215-1 220 m (2 mfb)—1 specimen, 5 mm; st. 2660 (MC), D, 133-78 m
(2 mfb)—1 exuviae, 17 mm; st. 2709 (W), N, 438-558 m (30 mfb)—1 specimen, 5 mm;
st. 2757 (W), D, 490-455 m (2 mfb)—1 specimen, 5 mm.
Bottom
Sandy with mud at st. 2655 and sandy with stones at st. 2757.
Remarks
Specimens damaged, making accurate identification impossible; the species is
probably E. crosnieri.
Eusiropsis Stebbing, 1899
Eusiropsis riisei Stebbing, 1897
Eusiropsis riisei Stebbing, 1897: 39.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2576 (EM), D, PT 50-0 m—1 &, 8.5 mm; st. 2604 (MC), N, NBT 680 m
—1] specimen, 9 mm; st. 2799 (SdM), N, NBT 300—200 m—1 2, 8.5 mm and 1 o, 9 mm;
st. 2805 (SdM), D, NBT 200 m—1 o, 11 mm; st. 2827 (EM), N, PT 400 m—2 specimens,
9 and 10 mm.
Distribution
Circumtropical, epipelagic.
Eusirella Chevreux, 1908
Eusirella is a deep-sea genus. As a rule representatives are caught in depths exceeding
800 m (Barnard & Karaman 1991), but in a few cases these amphipods have been reported
from subsurface waters, e.g. depths between 200-500 m (Birstein & Vinogradov 1970).
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
70
SUDBAIA(, DIJAAISNT
9 OINSIy
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 71
Eusirella ?elegans Chevreux, 1908
Fig. 6.
Eusirella elegans Chevreux, 1908: 12; 1935: 103. Shoemaker, 1945: 198 (partim).
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2798 (SdM), N, 255—250 m (30 mfb)—2 juv., both 3 mm.
Distribution
North and South Atlantic and western Indian Ocean.
Remarks
The captured amphipods were first juvenile stages. Pereopods I and II had 6th articles
particularly short and broad, which is typical of E. elegans. They probably belong to this
species. However, some differences were also noted: viz. mandibular palp apical article
comparatively short and bearing one seta (not two). Maxilliped palp also has noticeably
fewer setae than shown by Chevreux’s figures. These are interpreted as being merely
age-related variability although the possibility that these animals belong to a new species
(which is closely related to E. elegans) cannot be excluded totally.
Stenopleura Stebbing, 1888
Stenopleura atlantica Stebbing, 1888
Stenopleura atlantica Stebbing, 1888: 950. Stephensen, 1915: 45. Schellenberg, 1926a: 353.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2578 (EM), N, PT 380-400 m—1 specimen, 7 mm; st. 2714 (W), D,
NBT 850-650 m—2 specimens, 6 and 6.5 mm. TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2757 (W), D,
430-530 m (30 mfb)—1 specimen, 5 mm. BDN 37/50: st. 2701 (W), D, 750-500 m—
1 specimen, 5 mm; ibid., 250-90 m—1 juv., 2 mm; st. 2744 (W), N, 500-250 m—1 ¢,
6.5 mm.
Distribution
Circumtropical.
Remarks
Stenopleura atlantica is normally epipelagic, therefore its capture in closing gear
(TUA ‘Sound’, BDN, but not IKSAMT) at a depth of approximately half a kilometre is
worthy of special note.
72 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Stenopleuroides Birstein & M. Vinogradov, 1964
Stenopleuroides macrops Birstein & M. Vinogradov, 1964
Stenopleuroides macrops Birstein & Vinogradov, 1964: 173.
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2783 (SdM), D, 262 m (2 mfb)—18 specimens, 2—3 mm; st. 2784
(SdM), D, 263—265 m (30 mfb)—4 specimens, 2—5 mm.
Bottom at st. 2783
Sandy with outcrops of bed rock. Sand with strong ripples; some objects were observed
on TV monitor of TUA ‘Sound’ rolling along the bottom in strong currents.
Distribution
Tropical regions of the Indian Ocean.
Regalia K. Barnard, 1930
Regalia oculata sp. nov.
Figs 7, 8.
Material
IKSAMT: st. 2597 (MC), N, NBT 360-550 m—4 specimens, 7—8.5 (o°) mm
(SAM—A40888—SAM-—A40891), among them the holotype: 2? 7 mm (SAM—A40888);
st. 2598 (MC), D, PT 400 m—1 juv., 5.5 mm; st. 2799 (SdM), N, NBT 300-220 m—1 ¢,
7 mm (SAM—A40892) and | juv., 6 mm. The two last paratypes from stns 2598 and 2799
are stored in the P.P. Shirshov Institute of Oceanology of the Russian Academy of
Sciences.
Type locality
Mozambique Channel.
Description
Female 7 mm long. Body with strong cuticle. Pereonite VI, pleonites and urosomite I
with big knife-like posteriorly turned dorsal teeth, the biggest one on pleonite I. Pleonites
with weak lateral teeth too. Urosomite I with depression. Eyes large, with well marked
ommatidia, taking up the major part of the lateral cephalic surface, contiguous dorsally.
Rostrum well developed, triangular. Lateral cephalic lobe weak.
Antennae of holotype missing, so this description of the antennae is based on paratype
material: specimen SAM—A40889 from st. 2799 (male). Antennae I and II subequal.
Antenna I peduncle Ist article massive, rectangular, anterior margin with 8 transverse
rows of short setae, 1.5 times longer than wide; 2nd article square, with 5 transverse rows
73
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN
‘(,, Aq poyreul ‘66/7 IS WO “WU / ySUD]
¢
ayeur) odAjesed pue adAjoyoxH ‘Aou ‘ds pypjnNI20 vIYpsay
L wnsty
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Loz =
v4 4 (SSX
\/ ( ee ee NT
Se we
Se = =. a
Ce ee a we
a —~
2 “ =
f
a me
Figure 8
Regalia oculata sp. nov. Paratype (juv., length 5.5 mm, from st. 2598).
of short setae, half as long as Ist; 3rd article short and broad, slightly narrower than 2nd.
Flagellum proximal articles merged into a cone, as long as peduncle, covered by weak
setae; distal part of flagellum 40-articulate. Accessory flagellum absent. Calceoli absent.
Antenna IT peduncle articles 1—3 short and broad, 3rd with 4 transverse rows of short
setae; 4th article longer than 1—3 combined, rectangular, with 8 transverse rows of short
setae; flagellum 40-articulate; calceoli absent.
Lower lip inner lobes well developed, covered by short setules. Outer lobes also
covered by short setules, apices have row of strong setae with forked ends. Mandibular
processes small, rounded.
Mandible incisor straight, toothed. Right and left laciniae different: right small, with
smooth cutting edge and spine-like inner corner; left big, toothed, as broad as incisor,
resembling whale’s tail in shape. Spiny row of setae and strong spines (2 and 3 on right
and left mandibles of holotype respectively, 1 on some paratype mandibles). Molar
conical. Palp strong, longer than the total body of mandible, attached on level with molar,
2nd article slightly longer and twice as broad as 3rd.
Maxilla I palp strong, 2-articulate, with strong setae apically. Inner plate shorter than outer,
oval, with sharp apex, resembling a lemon in shape, medial margin armed with two subapical
pinnate setae. Maxilla II with inner and outer plates subequal, armed by strong setae.
Maxilliped palp strong, armed with numerous setae, greatly exceeding outer plate,
dactyl well developed, ordinary, lacking apical nail. Outer plate oval, reaching to middle
of palp 2nd article, apex with 4—5 slender spines, medial margin with row of weak setae.
Inner plate reaching apex of palp Ist article, distal margin cutting, armed with 3 short
blunt spines and 4 long setae, medial margin with numerous weak setae.
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN Te
Pereopod I coxa small with acute anterodistal corner, 2nd article slender, a little shorter
than 5th and 6th taken together, 5th article trapezoid, extended posteriorly with strong
pinnate setae on posterior margin, subequal to 6th. Article 6 oval with long pinnate setae on
posterior margin, distal part of palm serrated, dactyl about 90 per cent as long as article 6,
overreaching palm. Pereopod II like pereopod I, but coxa without acute anterodistal corner.
Pereopods III-IV slender, article 2 of pereopod III expanded distally with small
anterodistal lobe; 4th and Sth articles expanded distally, 6th article slender, about 1.5 times
as long as article 5.
Pereopods V—VII 2nd articles broad, with prominent posterolateral lobes. On
pereopod V this article has a medial carina bearing a row of long setae, 4th articles rather
linear. Unfortunately, pereopods V—VII articles 5—7 were missing in all specimens.
Epimeron III posterodistal angle broadly rounded.
Uropod I peduncle subequal to outer ramus, evenly spinose medially, outer ramus with
3—4 marginal and apical spines, inner ramus shorter than outer ramus. Uropod II peduncle
about 1.3 times as long as inner ramus, both rami lanceolate, serrated on both margins.
Uropod III peduncle much shorter than rami, rami lanceolate, with serrate margins, inner
ramus longer than outer ramus.
Telson subquadrate, entire, somewhat overreaching peduncle of uropod III.
Remarks
The scantily known and poorly defined genus Regalia includes two species:
R. fasciculares Barnard, 1930 described from New Zealand and R. gracilimana Pirlot,
1934 from Indonesia. The species considered here does not completely satisfy the generic
diagnoses, for specimens possess prominent dorsal teeth on pereonite VII as well as on
pleon segments. This feature would put it close to Halirages if it were not for the absence
of calceoli on the antennae. It differs from Apherusa by epimeron III posterior margin
smooth. An important distinguishing feature of both these genera is the well developed
inner lobe of the lower lip. This and many other features testify to this species being a
Regalia. The only alternative would be to give it the status of a separate genus, but there is
little strength in such an argument.
Regalia oculata may be differentiated from other species in the genus by the above-
mentioned teeth on pereonal segment VII and by unusually large eyes. In other respects it
is very similar to R. gracilimana, especially in the morphology of mouthparts, pereopods
III and IV, uropods and telson. However, R. oculata possesses epimeron III with postero-
distal angle rounded and pereopods IJ and II with relatively shorter and wider articles 5 and 6.
Paramoera Miers, 1875.
Paramoera austrina (Bate, 1862)
Figs 9, 10.
Atylus austrinus Bate, 1862: 137.
Paramoera australis Miers, 1875: 75. Barnard & Karaman, 1991: 332 (in the list).
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
76
‘(qj Z) Puno, VAL ‘1697 IS ‘WU $9 WWBUD] ‘oULYSnD D1dOWDIDG
6 Wns
\
1
3
¥
?
t
»
,
E
fe
RN
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 77
Atyloides australis Stebbing, 1888: 914, pts LXXV, LXXVI.
Paramoera austrina Stebbing, 1906: 363. Barnard & Karaman, 1991: 332 (in the list).
Material
TUA ‘Sound’: st. 2691 (W), N, 28-63 m (2 mfb)—1 specimen, 6.5 mm
(SAM—A40893).
Biotope
The bottom was covered with large stones with narrow gaps between them, encrusted
by calcareous coralline algae Mesophyllum syrphetodes (see also Biotope in the
description of Amaryllis maculata in this article).
Remarks
Our specimen of P. austrina conformed to Stebbing’s (1888) material, except in a few
insignificant details (e.g. pereopods I and II morphology, mandibular palp). However, the
drop-like eyes of our specimen are bigger than shown on Stebbing’s figures. The eyes take
up the majority of the iateral cephalic surface and are nearly contiguous mid-dorsally.
Distribution
South Indian and south Indo-Pacific Oceans.
DISCUSSION
Thirty-four gammaridean species are represented in our material. The overwhelming
majority of pelagic gammaridean species are deep-water bathy- and abyssopelagic
animals. This explains the paucity of Gammaridea in our epi- and mesopelagic water
samples.
Typically epipelagic gammaridean species are few; three of them (Eusiropsis rissoei,
Stenopleura atlantica and Synopia variabilis) were found in our material.
The two species of Trischizostoma, as has already been pointed out, are ectoparasites
of near-bottom sharks which are a consistent element of the fauna of the investigated
regions.
Paracyphocaris praedator appears not to be a parasite of sharks, but of large
planktonic crustaceans. In addition, Thoriella islandica and probably Parandania boecki,
are parasites/predators of gelatinous zooplankters (Vinogradov 1988; Moore & Rainbow
1989; Coleman 1990).
The remaining 26 species can be categorized into two groups: typical inhabitants of the
meso- and bathypelagic zones (it is thought that some of them are able to collect prey from
the bottom) and benthic animals only sporadically rising into the pelagial.
Almost all the representatives of the first group are panoceanic species: only
Cyphocaris cornuta has not been found beyond the waters of the Mozambique Channel.
In the IKSAMT samples three species (Cyphocaris anonyx, C. challengeri and
Bathystegocephalus globosus) were found in great quantities and amounted to 2.6, 7.5 and
78
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 10
Paramoera austrina, length 6.5 mm. St. 2691, TUA ‘Sound’ (2 mfb).
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 79
79.3 per cent (respectively) of all amphipods so caught. That said, a considerable
proportion of B. globosus was caught as a result of near-bottom trawling, as will be
discussed below.
Comparison of the IKSAMT near-bottom and pelagic samples permits detection of
that group of animals which is largely specific to the near-bottom layer of water. Some
animals were only recorded (practically) in the near-bottom catches: Trischizostoma
tanjae (155 out of 156 specimens, recorded in all samples), /chnopus pelagicus (22 out of
24 recorded specimens) and Regalia oculata sp. nov. (6 out of 7 recorded specimens). Of
these 7. tanjae, as already indicated, is most likely a parasite of near-bottom sharks, which
determines its concentration in this layer. The other two species are free-living animals.
In addition, Amaryllis maculata sp. nov., Erikus dahli, Thoriella islandica and Halice
tenella were recorded only in the IKSAMT near-bottom samples. However, these species
were represented only by single specimens, which does not permit us to derive any
conclusions from these results, especially since all that is known about T. islandica and
H. tenella testifies to the fact that these amphipods were most likely caught during
passage of the trawl through the water column.
Bathystegocephalus globosus deserves special mention. This species was regularly
(15 times) recorded in the IKSAMT samples; however, its largest numbers were yielded
by three near-bottom catches: 242, 1368 and 18 specimens (out of a total of
1 815 specimens recorded in all catches). Pelagic catches of B. globosus were recorded
predominantly at night-time (animals were recorded only twice in daytime pelagic
samples and in both cases depths exceeding 500 m were being sampled at the time); and
most abundant near-bottom trawlings were carried out during the daytime (the richest
haul was at a depth of only 200 m). It is possible that B. globosus makes active diurnal
migrations. At night it may be distributed in the water column and so not abundant in the
trawl samples (rarely exceeding 10 specimens per catch). In the daytime the population
descends and, if a submerged seamount exceeds this depth, these amphipods accumulate
over it. An analogous situation was observed with Cyphocaris challengeri over the
submerged Nazka and Sala-y-Gomez ridges in the Pacific Ocean (Vinogradov 19905).
Only six gammarideans from five species were found in all the lower (nearest to
bottom) plankton net hauls (with lower limit 50 mfb). The TUA ‘Sound’ catches at 30 mfb
yielded 20 gammarideans from 12 species (in 11 from 13 received samples) and
40 gammarideans from 11 species at 2 mfb (in 13 from 35 received samples). Thus, the
number of gammarideans increases as one approaches the bottom. The true pelagic
amphipods were scare in these samples, the majority were near-bottom and benthopelagic
species and benthic migrants. That said, the purely pelagic species were caught in the
main at 30 mfb, and benthopelagic and near-bottom gammarideans at 2 mfb (Table 1).
Stenopleuroides macrops was the only exception to this pattern, 18 out of 22 captured
species of this animal were taken at 2 mfb. However, it should be noted that 18 S. macrops
were caught from one haul (st. 2783, 2 mfb) which may have encompassed a ‘swarm’. It is
interesting that the opposite pattern, 1.e. a sharp decrease in the number of animals on
approaching the bottom, appears for the purely pelagic hyperiids and other big planktonic
crustaceans on the basis of other results of the same samples (Vinogradov 1990a;
8&0 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Vereshchaka 1990). We observe here one of the specific characteristics of the thin water
layer directly overlying the bottom, i.e. a change from the purely pelagic animals to the
representatives of the near-bottom plankton.
Comparison of the gammarideans caught by TUA ‘Sound’ with the other material
permits detection of one more group of gammarideans caught only in the near-bottom
layer (Table 1, indicated by asterisks). It includes all the benthopelagic and swimming
benthic amphipods caught by TUA (except one specimen of Halicoides discoveryi and
two specimens of Stegocephaloides attingens which were also found in the near-bottom
catches by the Juday nets covering the 50—250 mfb layer), as well as three species of the
typically pelagic amphipods (Eusirella elegans, Stenopleuroides macrops and Halice
macronyx). Of the latter, H. macronyx and E. elegans are rare amphipods represented by
one and two specimens (respectively) in the entire sample. Their capture near the bottom
is most likely accidental. As for S. macrops, it was found in abundance, but only in one
place above 300 m depths on the Saya de Malha Bank (12°26—27'S, 61°04'E).
Unfortunately pelagic trawling was not carried out at this station, so we have no data on
the vertical distribution of this species. Previously, S. macrops was recorded in pelagic
samples from the upper 300 m layer over depths of 3—4 km (Birstein and Vinogradov
1964).
No significant difference between the number of gammarideans caught during the day
or night using TUA ‘Sound’ has been detected.
TABLE A
IKSAMT station data (stations lacking Gammaridea excluded) 10°25' N
Station No Date Local time of Depth of Depth of Location
trawling bottom (m) trawling (m) (start point of trawling)
Error Mountain
DTS 30.X.1988 16.00-17.20 400-1100 380-400 10°18'N 56°06' E
2576 30.X.1988 17.50-18.25 >2000 50-0 10°25'N 56°06' E
2578 31.X.1988 01.45-02.45 1280-1050 380-400 10°18'N Soll 7/13)
Mozambique Channel
DST) 12.X1.1988 02.35-03.55 390-560 360-550 NOL29 ES 48°20'E
2598 12.X1.1988 05.15-06.15 560-820 400 12°36'S A8°11'E
2604 13.X1.1988 02.45-03.40 695-690 680 ZEB IES 48°09' E
2605 13.X1.1988 11.00-12.30 1100-970 460-700 Wes2es A48°O1'E
2616 18.X1.1988 01.45—-04.47 3100-3000 1700-1900 05S 42°16'E
2625 22 XV 1988") * 0123-0223) § 220-230 210-220 24°30'S 35°30 E
2642 28.XI.1988 19.30-21.00 1700-2120 1200 DANS 43°23'E
2667 06.XII.1988 17.40-19.00 1900 (100)—200 PSS 44°33'E
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN
Station No Date Local time of Depth of Depth of Location
trawling bottom (m) trawling (m) (start point of trawling)
Walters Shoal
2675 10.X11.1988 03.21-04.21 1600-1320 1000 32°54'S AS 7s
2689 12.X11.1988 16.45-18.38 250-600 0—500—0 So aGLS 43°S0'E
Dit2 16.X1.1988 00.22-01.22 550-600 100 33°08'S 43°59'E
DAMS 16.X11.1988 02.10—-03.00 650 200 Soles 43°S9'E
2714 16.X11.1988 05.20-06.35 850-790 850-650 38) as. 43°S1'E
DIN 16.X11.1988 22.40-23.30 2400 1000 34°06'S 43°45'E
2718 17.X11.1988 01.10-02.10 2400 100 34°00'S 43°45'E
DANG 17.XI1.1988 03.10—04.13 2200-1600 200 33°55.S 43°46'E
2720 17.X11.1988 05.30—06.45 1600-2000 850-730 S31) 43°A47' E
DS) 18.X11.1988 00.17-01.17 50-30 20 350 WES ASS) as
2726 RODMAN SS,) Oilesl-0225i | 220-750 100 33°16'S 43°S4'E
Did 18.X11.1988 03.30—-04.30 750-920 200-150 33°24'S 43°56'E
2A29 18.X11.1988 07.25—08.25 1150-1580 620-660 38>33.5 AScas: i
PT) 25.X11.1988 19.21-20.21 2040-2100 1150 SZ Ses 45°56'E
DATS 25.X11.1988 — 22.36-23.36 2150-2200 100 3S 46°09' E
2776 26.X11.1988 00.08-01.08 2200 200 S1IBES 46°12'E
DT, 26.X11.1988 02.00—03.00 2200 550 31°08'S 46°1S'E
Saya de Malha Bank
2785 05.1.1989 20.20—21.20 1600-1900 600 NS 60°49' E
2787 05—06.1.89 23.17-00.17 1900-2200 100 Does 60°41'E
2788 06.1.1989 01.08—02.08 2200-2000 400 IDS09ES 60°40' E
2789 06.1.1989 03.58-04.58 2000-2115 970-1020 12°03'S 60°38'E
2794 06.1.1989 15.00-16.00 303-700 300-330 11°49'S 60°58 E
DIDS 06—07.1.89 23.50-00.50 310-220 300-220 EASES 61°00' E
2800 07.1.1989 01.43-02.43 250 200 11°45'S 605" E
2801 OTM USS 03.12-03.42 250-238 50 11°41'S 61209" E
2805 07.1.1989 5257 — 00) 240-25 230-200 PEStQes 62° 1'E
2807 08.1.1989 W235—U3.35 . ZNS='S0 210-185 1108'S 62712, E
Error Mountain (second visit)
2823 14.1.1989 15.55-16.55 390-432 380—400 10°19'N 56°06' E
2826 14.1.1989 21.20-22.20 400 390-370 10°18'N 56°04' E
2827 SaIelOS9 00.00—01.00 2000 370 LOZ220N 56°04' E
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE B
TUA ‘Sound’ station data (stations lacking Gammaridea excluded)
Station No Date Local time of Depth of bottom Location
sampling (m) (start point of catching) |
Mozambique Channel : oe
2624 21-22.X1.1988 23.45-00.15 220-220 24°31'S 3) 245) Je
2635 25.X1.1988 14.01-14.30 223-223 BS NES so. 113 18
2637 26.X1.1988 02.13—04.30 975-910 DE NSIES 35°24'E
2647 2.X11.1988 19.08-21.08 404-521 MINTS 43°04' E
2649 3.XI1.1988 01.06—03.06 965-950 Wa Nay SS 43°00' E
2655 3.XII.1988 19.17-21.17 1215-1240 22 DOES AQIS 3)
2660 4.X11.1988 10.14—10.44 135-80 IINZ'S 43°09' E
2661 4 XII.1988 11.30-12.30 312-180 MINES 43°07'E
Walters Shoal |
2676 10.XII.1988 09.15—11.15 1060-1070 3255S 44°39'E
2678 10.XII.1988 18.23—20.23 850-790 33°03)" S A44°12'E
2681 11.XI1.1988 OIES5—03%55 510-340 33°09'S 43°58' E
2691 12-13.XII1.88 23.40—00.40 46-30-76 33°02" S 43°53'E
2709 15. XII.1988 18.08—20.08 455-590 33°0D' S 43°S8'E
D3) 19. XII.1988 14.50—16.50 1100-1113 33°5S8'S 45°04' E
2746 21 .XII.1988 07.20—-09.20 980-950 33°47'S 44°35'E
2757 23.X1I.1988 05.35—07.35 485-560 33°S' S A43°S7'E
Saya de Malha Bank
2783 5.1.1989 14.54-15.54 265 122260 61°04' E
2784 SLIDE 16.45-17.15 268-275 L220 S 61°04' E
YS 6.1.1989 12.10-12.40 296 11°49'S 61°00' E
DST 6.1.1989 20.57—21.27 250-260 11°46'S GOPSo' 18,
2798 6.1.1989 21.43-22.13 260-285 11°47'S 61°00' E
Station No
2701
Station No
2586
2648
2656
The author is very thankful to the late Dr T.E. Bowman, Dr C.L. Griffiths and
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN
BDN station data (stations lacking Gammaridea excluded)
Date
14.XI1.1988
15.XII.1988
19. XII.1988
21.XI1.1988
23.XII.1988
Date
03.X1.1988
02.XII.1988
03.XII.1988
Local time of
sampling
15.05—15.40
16.15—16.22
MN 3027 NO)
20.30—20.50
03.55—04.50~
04.55—05.25
08.53—09.20
TABLE C
Haul (m)
750-500
250-90
450-240
250-100
920-500
500-250
500-250
TABLE D
ODN station data (stations lacking Gammaridea excluded)
Depth of Location
bottom (m)
820 33-03)S
500 380705
990 33255 45
970 33°47'S
550 so IES
Local time of Haul (m) Depth of Location
sampling bottom (m)
03.15-03.45 500-250 50 00°27' N
21.45-22.10 450-250 520 DNS
21.17—22.55 1000-500 1270 DAES
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Dr P.G. Moore for their very useful comments on the manuscript.
44°05'E
43°S56'E
44°SS'E
44°35'E
43°56'E
56°03' E
43°04'E
42°54' E
83
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REFERENCES
ANDRES H.G. 1981. Lysianassidae aus dem Abyssal des Roten Meers. Bearbeitung der Koderfange
von F S ‘Sonne’-MESEDA I (1977) (Crustacea: Amphipoda: Gammaridea). Senckenbergiana
Biologia. 61 (5-6): 429-43.
BALDWIN, R.J. & SMITH, K.L. 1987. Temporal variation in the catch rate, length, color and sex of the
necrophagous amphipod Eurythenes gryllus from the central and eastern North Pacific. Deep-Sea
Research 34 (3): 425-39.
BARNARD, J.L. 1961. Gammaridean Amphipoda from depths of 400 to 6 000 metres. Galathea Report
5: 23-120.
BARNARD, J.L. 1964. Marine amphipoda of Bahia de San Quintin, Baja California. Pacific Naturalist
4 (3): 55-139.
BARNARD, J.L. 1965. Marine amphipoda of atolls in Micronesia. Proceedings of the United States
National Museum 117 (3516): 459-552.
BARNARD, J.L. 1969. The families and genera of marine gammaridean Amphipoda. Bulletin. United
States National Museum 271: 1-535.
BARNARD, J.L. 1972. Gammaridean Amphipoda of Australia. Part I. Smithsonian Contributions to
Zoology 133: 1-333.
BARNARD, J.L. & KARAMAN, G. S. 1991. The families and genera of the marine gammaridean
Amphipoda (except marine Gammaroids). Parts 1 and 2. Records of the Australian Museum
Supplement 13: 1-866.
BARNARD, K.H. 1916. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa, 5: The Amphipoda.
Annals of the South African Museum 15: 105-302.
BARNARD, K.H. 1925. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa, 8: Further addition to the
list of Amphipoda. Annals of the South African Museum 20: 319-80.
BARNARD, K.H. 1930. Amphipoda: British Antarctic (“Terra Nova’) Expedition, 1910. British
Museum (Natural History). Rep. Zool. 8: 307-454.
BARNARD, K.H. 1932. Amphipoda. ‘Discovery’ Report 5: 1-326.
BATE, C.S. 1856. On the British Edriophthalma. Report on the Twenty-Fifth meeting of the British
Association for the Advancement of Science 1855. pp 18-62.
BATE, C.S. 1857. A synopsis of the British edriophthalmous Crustacea. Annals and Magazine of
Natural History (series 2) 19: 135-52.
BATE, C.S. 1862. Catalogue of the specimens of amphipodous Crustacea in the collection of the British
Museum. London: British Museum of Natural History.
BIRSTEIN, J.A. & VINOGRADOV, M.E. 1955. The pelagic gammarids of the Kurile-Kamchatka
trench. Trudy Instituta Okeanologii AN SSSR [Trans. P.P. Shirshov Inst. of Oceanology Ac. Sci.,
USSR] 12: 210-87. (In Russian).
BIRSTEIN, J.A. & VINOGRADOV, M.E. 1958. The pelagic gammarids (Amphipoda, Gammaridea) of
the northwest part of the Pacific Ocean. Trudy Instituta Okeanologii AN SSSR [Trans. P.P. Shirshov
Inst. of Oceanology Ac. Sci., USSR] 27: 219-57. (In Russian).
BIRSTEIN, J.A. & VINOGRADOV, M.E. 1960. The pelagic gammarids from the tropical Pacific.
Trudy Instituta Okeanologii AN SSSR |Trans. P.P. Shirshov Inst. of Oceanology Ac. Sci. USSR|
34: 165—241. (In Russian).
BIRSTEIN, J.A. & VINOGRADOV, M.E. 1962. Pelagic gammarids collected by the Soviet Antarctic
Expedition with the R/V Ob southward from the 40°S. Explorations of the fauna of the seas. I(LX):
Biological results of the Soviet Antarctic Expedition (1955—1958) 1: 36—57. (In Russian).
BIRSTEIN, J.A. & VINOGRADOV, M.E. 1964. The pelagic amphipod gammarids of the northern part
of the Indian Ocean. Trudy Instituta Okeanologii AN SSSR [ Trans. P.P. Shirshov Inst. of Oceanology
Ac. Sci. USSR] 65: 152—96. (In Russian).
BIRSTEIN, J.A. & VINOGRADOV, M.E. 1970. On the fauna of pelagic gammarids of the
Kurile-Kamchatka region of the Pacific Ocean. Trudy Instituta Okeanologii AN SSSR [Trans.
P.P. Shirshov Inst. of Oceanology Ac. Sci. USSR] 86: 401-19. (In Russian).
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 85
BIRYUKOV, S.G., MARYATKIN, V.N., MATVEEV, A.S., POPOV, V.A. & RUDJAKOV, J.A.
1990. Experience of usage of towed underwater apparatus ‘Sound’ for study of near-bottom
plankton. Okeanologija [Oceanology (Moscow) | 30 (1): 152-6. (In Russian).
BOECK, A. 1861. Bemaerkninger angaaende de ved de norske kyster forekkomende Amphipoder.
Forhandl. Scand. Naturforsk., Ottende Mode 8: 631-77.
BOECK, A. 1871. Crustacea Amphipoda borealia & arctica. Forhandl. Vidensk.-Selsk. Christiania
1870. 8. 83-280.
BOECK, A. 1872. Bidrag til Californiens Amphipoden fauna. Forhandl. Vidensk.-Selsk. Christiania
og Ss. 1=22.
BOWMAN, T.E. & WASMER, T.A. 1984. The deep-sea amphipod Paracyphocaris praedator
(Gammaridea : Lysianassidae) associated with the pelagic shrimp Oplophorus novaezeelandie as an
egg-mimic. Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington 97 (4): 844-8.
CHEVREUX, E. 1900. Amphipodes provenant des campagnes de |’ Hirondelle (1885-1888). Résultats
des campagnes scientifique par le Prince Albert I 16: 1-195.
CHEVREUX, E. 1905a. Description d’un amphipode (Cyphocaris richardi nov. sp.) provenant des
péches au filet a grande ouverture de la derniére campagne du yacht Princesse-Alice (1904). Bulletin
du Musée oceanographique de Monaco 24: 1-S.
CHEVREUX, E. 1905b. Cyphocaris alicei, nouvelle espece d’Amphipode voisine de Cyphocaris
challengeri Stebbing. Bulletin du Musée oceanographique de Monaco 27: \-6.
CHEVREUX, E. 1905c. Paracyphocaris praedator, type dun nouveau genre de Lysianassidae.
Bulletin du Musée oceanographique de Monaco 32: \-5.
CHEVREUX, E. 1905d. Description d’un Amphipode (Katius obesus, nov. gen. & sp.). Suivie d’une
liste des Amphipodes de la tribu des Gammarina ramenés par le filet a grande ouverture pendant la
derniére campagne de la Princesse-Alice en 1904. Bulletin du Musée oceanographique de Monaco
382 Las
CHEVREUX, E. 1908. Diagnoses d’amphipodes nouveaux provenant des campagnes de la
Princesse-Alice dans I’ Atlantique nord. Bulletin du Musée oceanographique de Monaco 121: 1-15.
CHEVREUX, E. 1935. Amphipodes provenant des campagnes du Prince Albert I-er, de Monaco.
Résultats des campagnes scientifique par le Prince Albert I 90: 1-214.
CHILTON, C. 1912. The Amphipoda of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. Transactions of the
Royal Society of Edinburgh 48: 455-520.
COLEMAN, Ch.O. 1990. Anatomy of the alimentary canal of Parandania boecki (Stebbing, 1888)
(Crustacea, Amphipoda, Stegocephalidae) from the Antarctic ocean. Journal of Natural History,
London 24: 1573-85.
COLLET, B.D. & PARIN, N.V. 1991. Shallow-water fishes of Walters Shoal, Madagascar Ridge.
Bulletin of Marine Science 48 (1): 1-22.
COSTA, A. 1853. Relazione sulla memoria del Dottor Achille Costa, di ricerche su’ crostacei amfipodi
del regno di Napoli. Rendiconto della Societa Reale Borbonica, Accademia delle Scienze (new
series) 2: 167—78.
DANA, J.D. 1852. On the classification of the crustacean Choristopoda or Tetradecapoda. American
Journal of Science and Arts (series 2) 14 (Appendix): 297-316.
DELLA VALLE, A. 1893. Gammarini del Golfo di Napoli. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel und
der angrenzenden Meers-Abschnitte. Monographie 20. 948 p., atlas (Atlante) 61 pls.
GILES, G.M. 1890. Natural history notes from H.M. Indian Marine Survey Steamer “Investigator’’,
Commander Alfred Carpenter, R.N., D.S.O., commanding. No. 15. Descriptions of seven additional
new Indian amphipods. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 59 (2): 63-74.
GURJANOVA, E.F. 1951. The Amphipoda of the seas of USSR with adjacent waters. Moscow &
Leningrad: Izd. AN SSSR. 1032 pp (in Russian).
GURJANOVA, E.F. 1962. Gammarideans of the northern Pacific Ocean (Amphipoda—Gammaridea).
Part I. Moscow & Leningrad, Izd. AN SSSR. pp 1-441 (in Russian).
HASWELL, W.A. 1879. On Australian Amphipoda. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South
Wales 4 (3): 245-79.
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
HASWELL, W.A. 1882. Catalogue of the Australian stalk- and sessile-eyed Crustacea. Sydney:
F.W. White. 327 pp.
KAIM-MALKA, R.A. 1969. Biologie & ecologie de quelques Ampelisca (Crustacea, Amphipoda) de ia
région de Marseille. Tethys 4 (11): 977-1022.
KARAMAN, G:S. 1974. Revision of the family Pardaliscidae with diagnoses of genera, distribution of
species and bibliography. Acta Adriatica 15 (7): 3-46.
KROYER, H. 1845. Karcinologiske Bidrag. Naturh. Tidsskr, NR. 1: 283-345, 403, 453-638.
LEDOYER, M. 1978. Contribution a |’étude des amphipodes gammariens profonds de Madagascar.
Tethys 8 (4): 365-82.
LEDOYER, M. 1986. Crustacés Amphipodes Gammariens. Families des Haustoridae a Vitjazianidae.
Faune de Madagaskar 59 (2): 599-1112.
LICHTENSTEIN, H. Jn: MANDT, M.W. 1822. Observationes in historian naturalen & anatomian
comparant in itinere Groenlandico factae. — Dissertatio inauguralis quam consensu &
auctoritaegratiosi micoruminauguralis quam consensu & auctoritategratiosi micorum ordinis in
universitate literaria berolinensi ut summi in medicina & chirurgia honores rite sibi concedantur die
XXII. Berolini. Publice defendet auctor Martinus Gulielmus Mandt Beyenburgensis. pp 31—7.
LILJEBORG, W. 1855. Om Hafs-Crustacee vid Kullaberg i Skane. Ofversigt af Kongliga Vetensk.-
Akad. Forhanadl. 12: 117-38.
LILJEBORG, W. 1865. On the Lysianassa magellanica H. Milne Edwards, and on the Crustacea of the
suborder Amphipoda and subfamily Lysianassina found on the coast of Sweden and Norway.
N. Acta Reg. Soc. Sci. Upsal., (series 3) 6 (1): 1-38.
LOWRY, J.K. & STODDART, H.E. 1987. A new South American genus and species in the amaryllidid
group of lysianassoid Amphipoda. Journal of Natural History 12: 1303-9.
LOWRY, J.K. & STODDART, H.E. 1992. A revision of the genus /chnopus (Crustacea: Amphipoda:
Lysianassoidea: Uristidae). Records of the Australian Museum 44: 185-245.
LOWRY, J.K. & STODDART, H.E. 1993. Crustacea amphipoda: lysianassoids from Philippine and
Indonesian waters. In: CROSNIER, A. ed. Résultats des Campagnes MUSORSTOM, Volume 10.
Memoires du Muséum nationale d’histoire naturelle 156: 55—109.
LOWRY, J.K. & STODDART, H.E. 1994. Crustacea amphipoda: lysianassoids from the tropical
western South Pacific Ocean. Jn: CROSNIER, A. ed. Résultats des Campagnes MUSORSTOM,
Volume 12. Mémoires du Muséum nationale d’histoire naturelle 161: 127-223.
MACQUART-MOULIN, C. 1968. Les amphipodes bentho-planctoniques du Golf de Marseille:
analyse des captures faites au cours de péches planctoniques nocturnes régulieres (Années
1963-1964). Rec. Trav. St. Mar. D’Endoume. 43 (59): 311-32.
MACQUART-MOULIN C., BOURDILLON A., PASSELAIGUE F. & RASOANARIVO R. 1987. Un
cas type de migration verticale “retare” chez l’amphipode Ampelisca typica. Journal of Plankton
Research 9 (5): 785-809.
MIERS, E.J. 1875. Descriptions of new species of Crustacea collected at Kerguelen’s Island by the Rev.
A. E. Eaton. Annals and Magazine of Natural History (series 4) 16: 73-6.
MILLS, E.L. 1967. The biology of an ampeliscid amphipod crustacean sibling species pair. Journal of
the Fisheries Research Board of Canada 24: 305-55.
MILNE EDWARDS, H. 1848. Sur un crustace amphipode, remarquable par sa grande taille. Annales de
Sciences naturelles Zoologie (Series 3) 9: 398.
MOORE, P.G. & RAINBOW, P.S. 1989. Feeding biology of the mesopelagic gammaridean amphipod
Parandania boecki (Stebbing, 1888) (Crustacea: Amphipoda: Stegocephalidae) from the Atlantic
Ocean. Ophelia 30: 1-19.
PIRLOT J.-M. 1933. Les amphipodes de l’expédition du Siboga, Deuxiéme partie: Les amphipodes
gammarides, II: Les amphipodes de la mer profonde. 1: (Lysianassidae, Stegocephalidae,
Stenothoidae, Pleustidae, Lepechinellidae). Siboga Expeditie 33c: 115-66.
GAMMARIDEAN AMPHIPODS IN THE WESTERN INDIAN OCEAN 87
PIRLOT J.-M. 1934. Les amphipodes de l’expédition du Siboga, Deuxieme partie: Les amphipodes
gammarides, II: Les amphipodes de la mer profonde. 2: (Hyperiopsidae, Pardaliscidae, Astyridae
nov. fam., Tironidae, Calliopiidae, Paramphithoidae, Amathillopsidae nov. fam., Eusiridae,
Gammaridae, Aoridae, Photidae, Amphithoidae, Jassidae). Siboga Expeditie 33d: 167-235.
REID, D.M. 1951. Report on the Amphipoda (Gammaridea and Caprellidea) of the coast of tropical
West Africa. Atlantide Report 2: 189-291.
RUDJAKOV, J.A. & ZAIKIN, A.N. 1990. 18th cruise of R/V ‘Professor Stockman’: a next step of
hydrobiological investigations of the ocean near-bottom layer. Trudy Instituta Okeanologii AN SSSR
[ Trans. P.P. Shirshov Inst. of Oceanology Ac. Sci. USSR] 124: 7-14. (In Russian).
SARS, G.O. 1891-1895. Amphipoda. An account of the Crustacea of Norway with short description
and figures of all the species. 1: 1-711, 240 + 8 pis.
SCHELLENBERG, A. 1925. Crustacea VIII: Amphipoda, volume 3. Jn: W. MICHAELSEN [Ed.].
Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Meersfauna Westafrikas. Hamburg: L. Friedrichsohn & K.P. 111—204.
SCHELLENBERG, A. 1926a. Amphipoda 3: Die Gammariden der Deutchen Tiefsee Expedition.
Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der Deutchen Tiefsee-Expedition auf dem Dampfer ‘Valdivia’
1898-1899. 23 (5): 195-243.
SCHELLENBERG, A. 19266. Die Gammariden. Deutche Stidpolar-Expedition, 1901—1903 18: 235-414.
SCHELLENBERG, A. 1955. Amphipoda. Report of the Swedish Deep-sea Expedition (ser. Zool.) 2 (18):
181-95.
SCHERBATCHEYV, Yu.N. 1989. The report of the ichthyological team. /n: Report of the 17th cruise of
R/V ‘Vityaz’ to the west part of the Indian Ocean according to the “Ecosystem” project: 177-248.
Moscow: P.P. Shirshov Inst. of Oceanol. Acad. Sci. USSR. (In Russian).
SHOEMAKER, C.R. 1945. The Amphipoda of the Bermuda Oceanographic Expeditions, 1929-1931.
Zoologica. Scientific Contributions of the New York Zoological Society 30 (4): 186-264.
SHOEMAKER, C.R. 1956. Notes on the amphipods Eurythenes gryllus (Lichtenstein) and Katius
obesus Chevreux. Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington 69: 177-8.
SMITH, S.I. In: SCUDDER, S.H. 1882. Nomenclator zoologicus: An alphabetical list of all generic
names that have been employed by naturalists for recent and fossil animals from the earliest times to
the close of the year 1879. II. Universal Index. Washington.
SMITH, S.I. 1884. Crustacea of the “Albatross” dredgings in 1883. American Journal of Science (series 3)
28: 53-6.
SPANDL, H. 1923 Amphipoden der ‘Pola’-Expeditionen in das Rote Meer. Sitzber. Akad. Wiss. Wien,
Anzeiger, 60 Jahrgang, 1923 [part 1]. S. 17-20.
SPANDL, H. 1924. Die Amphipoden des Roten Meers. /n: Expeditionen S.M. Schiff “Pola” in das Rote
Meer nordliche und stidliche halfte 1895/96—1897/98. Zool. Ergebn. 35, Denk. Akad. Wiss. Wien
Mat. 99: 19-73.
STEBBING, T.R.R. 1888. Report on the Amphipoda collected by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the years
1873-1876. Report of the Scientific Results of the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ 1873-76
29: 1-1737.
STEBBING, T.R.R. 1897. Amphipoda from the Copenhagen Museum and other sources. Part II.
Transactions of the Linnean Society of London (series 2, Zoology) 7: 25-45.
STEBBING, T.R.R. 1906. Amphipoda. I. Gammaridea. Tierreich (B) 21: 1-806.
STEPHENSEN, K. 1915. Isopoda, Tanaidacea, Cumacea, Amphipoda (exl. Hyperiidea). Report on the
Danish Oceanographical Expeditions, 1908-1910 to the Mediterranean and adjacent seas. 2.
Biology. D. 1915. 1: 1-53.
STEPHENSEN, K. 1933. Amphipoda. The ‘Godthaab’ expedition 1928. Meddelelser om Gronland
79 (7): 1-88.
STEPHENSEN, K. 1935. The Amphipoda of N. Norway and Spitsbergen with adjacent waters. Tromsa
museum skrifter 3 (1): 1-140.
STRAUSS, E. 1909. Das Gammaridenauge. Studien tber ansgebildete und nickgebildete
Gammaridenauge. Wisschaftliche Ergebnisse der Tiefsee-Expedition auf dem Dampfer ‘Valdivia’,
1898-1899 20 (1): 1-84.
8&3 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
THORSTEINSON, E.D. 1941. New or noteworthy amphipods from the North Pacific coast. University
of Washington Publications in Oceanography 4: 50-96.
THURSTON, M.H. 1976. New pelagic amphipods (Crustacea: Amphipoda) collected on the SOND
Cruise. Journal of the Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom 56: 143-59.
VADER, W. & ROMPPAINEN, K. 1985. Notes on Norwegian marine Amphipoda. 10. Scavengers and
fish associates. Fauna Norw., (ser. A) 3: 3-8.
VERESHCHAKA, A.L. 1990. Vertical distribution of euphausiids, pelagic decapods and mysids in the
near-bottom layer of the Western Indian Ocean. Okeanologija [Oceanology (Moscow)| 30 (1):
126-31. (In Russian).
VINOGRADOV, G.M. 1988. Life-forms of the pelagic amphipods. Zoologicheskyi Zhurnal 67 (12):
1765—75. (In Russian).
VINOGRADOV, G.M. 1990a. Amphipods in the thin near-bottom layer in the Southwestern part of the
Indian Ocean. Okeanologija |Oceanology (Moscow) | 30 (1): 121—5. (in Russian).
VINOGRADOV, G.M. 19906. Pelagic amphipods (Amphipoda, Crustacea) from the South-Eastern
Pacific. Trudy Instituta Okeanologii AN SSSR [Trans. P.P. Shirshov Inst. of Oceanology Ac. Sci.
USSR] 124: 27-104. (in Russian).
VINOGRADOV, G.M. 1991. A new species of Trischizostoma (Amphipoda,Gammaridea) from the
Indian Ocean (with the key). Zoologicheskyi Zhurnal 70 (6): 25—31 (in Russian).
VINOGRADOV, G.M. 1992. The probable ways of the Gammarides (Amphipoda: Crustacea)
expansion into the pelagic domain: life-forms analysis. Zhurnal Obshchei Biologii |J .General Biol.
(Moscow) 53 (3): 328-39. (In Russian).
VINOGRADOV, G.M. 1993. Hyperiid amphipods from the Walters Shoal (southwestern Indian
Ocean). Arthropoda Selecta 2 (1): 41-8.
VINOGRADOV, G.M. 1995. Colonization of pelagic and hydrothermal vent habitats by gammaridean
amphipods: an attempt of reconstruction. Polskie archiwum hydrobiologii 42 (4): 417-30.
WALKER, A.O. 1896. On two new species of Amphipoda Gammarina. Annals and Magazine of
Natural History (series 6) 17: 343-6.
WALKER, A.O. 1904. Report on the Amphipoda collected by Professor Herdman, at Ceylon, in 1902.
Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries — 1904. Suppl. Rep. 17: 229-300.
WALKER, A.O. 1909. Amphipoda Gammaridea from the Indian Ocean, British East Africa and the Red
Sea. Transactions of the Linnean Society of London (series 2, Zoology) 12: 323-44.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 112 Band
April 2004 April
Pence Al Deel
MYSIDACEA FROM THE COMOROS ARCHIPELAGO
WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW SPECIES
by
TRIS WOOLDRIDGE
&
JAN MEES
The South African Museum forms part of Iziko Museums of Cape Town
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles, revisions and
review articles in natural history (palaeontology, geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology,
mammalogy, and marine and freshwater biology), social history (anthropology, archaeology and
history), and art.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in part, with material
from the collections of Iziko Museums of Cape Town. Other contributions are also considered
provided at least one of the authors is a staff member or affiliate of the Museum. In the case of
taxonomic work, descriptions of new species not already part of the Museum’s collections, the
holotype and, if possible, part of the paratype series must be deposited in the South African
Museum. Authors whose contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Board prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper accepted is
published as a separate part. We endeavour to publish a minimum of four issues per annum at
quarterly intervals, as material becomes available; parts are priced individually and different
volumes do not necessarily contain a standard number of parts.
Editorial Board
Prof. H. J. Deacon Dr K. Skawran Prof. A. Chinsamy-Turan
Prof. C. L. Griffiths Prof. B. Rubidge Dr H. C. Klinger
Dr S. van Noort Ms M. Rall
Ms E. Louw (editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town, 8000, South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Editor.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://www.museums.org.za/1ziko/sam
OUT OF PRINT
1 DOB, 59), 302, 4-5, 1-8, tent), A), 30-5, 7-9), GO, tga),
TO), 8, OUD, My, OTB, 2, 5, Th tao), IED, 155).
24(2-3, 5), 27, 30(5), 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 44(7), 45(1), 49,
67(5, 11), 77(7), 84(2), 93(3), 100(1)
ISBN 0 86813 194 6
DTP by User Friendly, Cape Town
Printed in South Africa by Mills Litho, Maitland, Cape Town
|
|
MYSIDACEA FROM THE COMOROS ARCHIPELAGO
WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW SPECIES
by
TRIS WOOLDRIDGE
Dept of Zoology, Box 1600, University of Port Elizabeth, South Africa
&
JAN MEES
Flanders Marine Institute, Vismijn, Pakhuizen 45—52, B-8400 Oostende, Belgium
(With 7 figs & 1 table)
[MS accepted 7 September 2003]
ABSTRACT
Five species of Anisomysis were collected from a coral reef flat on Grande Comore, Western Indian
Ocean. Anisomysis hanseni Nouvel, 1967, A. marisrubri Bacescu, 1973a and A. vasseuri Ledoyer, 1974
represent new distribution records for the three species. Two new species are described. Anisomysis
unispinosa sp. nov. 1s distinguished by the presence of a single spine at the distal end of the telsonic lobes
of the deeply cleft telson. Anisomysis comorensis sp. nov. is distinguished by the truncate distal border
of the telson and its armature.
CONTENTS
PAGE
NAGA LENS LOIN eee se feces cease a Stet Nee Mea Ome cuoenlse vets soanhetee ct me ten etn onades teen: <Suaect nee MeN aa MER Mee Sas 91
DESCMMOMOMIMMAUEI al, Varden stancccccs se rdeosisdeeecateres ae ewer adecs arte Ais aaee eae eosecenieoa tub ciczat one Seeuaems Rec eran eiawis i.
PNG KANON Ke CII MES. eh reer ccna see eee aac oS MOR ee cate rea A neces cual sce = peck nce Mites esta Re ec eee see 101
| NGIREINEINGSS, Sec prseccten cece aonsoenone ie eco Oa ec aCe CCE Ee tne En NB oe ee ee ene re 00 102
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 112 (4), 2004:89-102, 7 figs, 1 table
89
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
90
\
i
nee
Jas
Uy AS
Figure 1
Anisomysis unispinosa sp. Nov.
Adult male: (A) anterior part of body and carapace in dorsal view. (B) antennule.
(C) antenna. (D) mandible. (E) first thoracic limb.
MYSIDACEA FROM THE COMOROS ARCHIPELAGO 9]
INTRODUCTION
The Comoros group of four main islands lies approximately equidistant from the
African mainland and Madagascar in the northern sector of the Mozambique Channel.
Grande Comore is the largest (950 km’) of these volcanic islands. Although fringing coral
reefs line about 60% of the 170 km perimeter of Grande Comore, reefs are small and
discontinuous (Quod ef al. 2000).
No mysids are currently known from this archipelago. The present paper describes two
new species of Anisomysis from Le Galawa coral reef flat (water depth 4—5 m at high tide)
at the northern tip of Grande Comore (Njazidja). Anisomysis marisrubri Bacescu, 1973a,
A. hanseni Nouvel, 1967 and A. vasseuri Ledoyer, 1974 were also common in samples,
extending their previous known ranges (see Table 1, page 101). Anisomysis marisrubri
was also recently recorded from Mozambique (Wooldridge & Mees 2003), while the
second author collected the species in 1994—96 over weed beds at Gazi Bay, providing the
first Kenyan record of distribution.
Deprez et al. (2001) list 43 species of Anisomysis. To this list must be added A. ijimai
Nakazawa, 1910, A. mixta australis Zimmer, 1918, Bacescu, 19736, A. spatulispina
Murano, 19956 and A. nana Murano, 19955. A further three species are supplementary:
Anisomysis arabicus from coastal waters of Oman (Wooldridge & Victor 2004) and the
two new species described in this paper. Although members of the genus occur in the
warm-water regions of the Indo-West Pacific (Murano 1995a), only 15 of the 50 known
Species occur in the Western Indian Ocean (Table 1).
Samples at Grande Comore were collected at night with a small benthic sled towed
over scattered patches of low reef, interspersed with patches of coral sand and weed. Type
specimens are lodged in the South African Museum, Iziko Museums of Cape Town.
DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL
Antsomysis unispinosa sp. nov.
Figs 14
Type species
SAM—A45145. Adult male from Le Galawa reef flat on Grande Comore (11°22'07"S,
43°19'13"E). Collected by T. Wooldridge, 28 October 1997.
Paratypes
SAM-—A45146. Three adult males and three adult females.
Description
Morphological characteristics described refer to both sexes, unless otherwise stated.
Carapace short, posterodorsal margin emarginated and rounded medially (Fig. 1A).
Frontal margin produced into short rostrum covering the base of eyestalks; apex narrowly
92
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 2
Anisomysis unispinosa sp. nov.
Adult male: (A) second thoracic limb. (B) fourth thoracic limb. (C) fifth thoracic limb.
MYSIDACEA FROM THE COMOROS ARCHIPELAGO
Figure 3
Anisomysis unispinosa sp. nov.
Adult male: (A) seventh thoracic limb. (B) eighth thoracic limb. (C) first pleopod.
93
94
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 4
Anisomysis unispinosa sp. Nov.
Adult male: (A) fourth pleopod. (B) distal end of exopod of fourth pleopod.
(C) uropod. (D) telson.
MYSIDACEA FROM THE COMOROS ARCHIPELAGO 95
rounded. Eyes longer than broad, projecting well beyond lateral margin of carapace.
Cornea wider than eyestalk.
Antennular peduncle more robust in male than in female; in male first article (Fig.1B)
equal in length to third article, armed at outer distal angle with a long seta. Second article
twice as broad as long, bearing two short setae on outer distal margin; third segment with
well developed hirsute lobe.
Antennal scale (Fig. 1C) extending slightly beyond distal end of antennular peduncle,
nearly six times long as broad, setose all round, suture present at distal sixth. Antennal
peduncle short, not reaching midlength of scale.
Second article of mandibular palp (Fig. 1D) 2.3 times long as broad and without
denticles, inner and outer margin bearing four and 15 setae as illustrated; third segment
less than half length of second with comb-like process at distal end.
Endopod of first thoracic limb (Fig.1E) shorter and more robust compared to endopod
of second limb (Fig. 2A). Endopod of third limb more slender than that of second limb.
Remaining limbs with endopod similar in length (Figs 2B, C, 3A, B), carpopropodus
undivided. Ischium shorter than merus on all thoracic endopods, but gradually increasing
in relative length posteriorly. Eighth thoracic endopod (Fig. 3B) relatively slender,
sparsely setose. Basal segment of exopod expanded (Figs 1E, 2A—C, 3A, B) rounded on
outer distal angle. Exopod flagellae 7 or 8 segmented, each segment with one or two
plumose setae as illustrated.
First three pairs of pleopods in male similar in form, the first (Fig. 3C) the largest and
bearing 3 long setae and two groups of short setae as illustrated. Fourth pair biramous,
endopod small (Fig. 4A); exopod three-segmented and reaching beyond base of telson,
first segment 5.1 and 1.5 times longer than second and third segments respectively, third
segment 3.3 times longer than second, terminating in two stiff setae (Fig. 4B). Female
pleopods rudimentary.
Uropods long and narrow, setose all round; exopod longer than endopod and curved
slightly outward (Fig. 4C). Exopod of uropod nearly three times length of telson.
Telson 1.25 times as long as basal width (Fig. 4D), bifurcate distally. Cleft one-fifth
length of telson, unarmed and rounded at bottom. Lateral margins convex in proximal
two-thirds, distal one-third concave, armed with three small spines. Last lateral spine
located along margin of lobe of telson, lobes slightly tapering and divergent, each lobe
terminating in a single spine.
Length: adult male 3.3-4.1 mm; adult female 3.3-4.2 mm.
Etymology
The specific name refers to the single spine on each lobe of the telson.
Remarks
Anisomysis unispinosa sp. nov. 1s readily distinguished from allied Anisomysis species by
the shape and armature of the telson. In A. unispinosa sp. nov., the telson is deeply cleft and
divergent, without spines around the cleft margin. There are only three pairs of lateral spines
located opposite the base of the cleft. All spines on the telson are also of similar length.
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Wa \
‘i
“ b>
Figure 5
Anisomysis comorensis sp. nov.
Adult male: (A) anterior part of body and carapace in dorsal view. (B) antennule. (C) antenna.
(D) mandible. (E) first thoracic limb.
MYSIDACEA FROM THE COMOROS ARCHIPELAGO 97
The new species is most similar to Anisomysis kunduchiana Bacescu (1975) in the
shape and armature of the telson recorded from coastal waters of Tanzania, but the latter
differs in having two apical spines on the telsonic lobes. Another clearly distinguishing
feature refers to the fourth male pleopod; in A. unispinosa sp. nov., the third article of the
exopod segment is relatively long when compared to the first segment (> half the length or
c. 0.67 times by comparison) while in A. kunduchiana the third segment 1s < half the
length of the first segment (c. 0.48 times length).
Antsomysis comorensis sp. nov.
Figs 5—7
Type species ;
SAM—A45147. Adult male from Le Galawa reef flat on Grande Comore (1 1°22'07"S,
43°19'13"E). Collected by T. Wooldridge, 28 October 1997.
Paratypes
SAM—A45148. Three adult males and three adult females from the same locality.
Description
The morphological characteristics described refer to both sexes, unless otherwise
stated. Carapace short (Fig. 5A), slightly produced anteriorly into a triangular, obtusely
pointed rostrum; extending to base of eyestalks. Posterior border of carapace emarginate
and smoothly rounded, exposing last three thoracic somites. Eyes large, projecting well
beyond lateral margins of carapace. Cornea wider than eyestalk.
Antennular peduncle more robust in male than in female; in male first article (Fig. 5B)
slightly longer than third article, armed at outer distal angle with a long seta. Hirsute lobe
well developed, incised on inner margin. Second article twice as wide as long.
Antennal scale (Fig. 5C) in male extending to distal end of antennular peduncle
(Fig. 5B), nearly seven times long as maximum width. Lateral margins of scale curved
slightly outwards, armed with c. 9-10 plumose setae on either side. Distal suture present
at distal sixth. Antennal peduncle short, not reaching midlength of scale.
Second article of mandibular palp (Fig. 5D) slightly more than twice as long as broad,
inner margin sharply angled, not bearing denticles, with c. 11 setae. Outer margin almost
straight, bearing c. 14 setae along margin. Third article 2.8 times long as broad, with a
terminal comb-like process and c. six barbed spines. Lateral margins of segment with six
setae as illustrated.
Endopod of first thoracic limb (Fig. 5E) short and more robust compared to endopod of
second thoracic limb (Fig. 6A). Remaining thoracic limbs similar in form, endopod
becoming progressively less setose posteriorly (Fig. 6B, C); carpopropodus undivided.
Basal article of exopod expanded, rounded on outer distal angle, flagellate part 7 or 8
segmented.
First three pairs of male pleopods similar in form; first pleopod (Fig. 7A) largest and
bearing three long setae and sets of four, one or two shorter setae as illustrated. Fourth
98
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 6
Anisomysis comorensis sp. nov.
Adult male: (A) second thoracic limb. (B) fourth thoracic limb. (C) eighth thoracic limb.
MYSIDACEA FROM THE COMOROS ARCHIPELAGO 99
male pleopod biramous, endopod short and unsegmented (Fig. 7B); exopod three-
segmented and reaching beyond base of telson. First exopod segment 4.6 and 2.1 times
longer than second and third segments respectively, third segment 2.1 times longer than
second, terminal setae subequal in length; form typical for the genus (Fig. 7C). Female
pleopods rudimentary, becoming progressively smaller posteriorly.
Uropods long and narrow, setose all round; exopod distinctly longer than endopod and
curved slightly outward (Fig. 7D). Exopod of uropod nearly three times length of telson.
Telson (Fig. 7E) 1.6 times longer than basal width, proximal half with convex margins
and unarmed, distal half concave and gradually narrowing towards truncated apex. Distal
width less than one-third as broad as maximum basal width. Distal margin with minute
notch in some specimens, three unequal spines on either side. Lateral margins with 10-13
spines. 7
Length: adult male 4.5—5.2 mm; adult female 3.8-4.6 mm.
Etymology
The specific name refers to the region from where collections were made.
Remarks
In the absence of denticles on the second segment of the mandibular palp and in the telson
having a truncated apex, Anisomysis comorensis sp. nov. displays affinities to 4. hanseni
Nouvel, 1967, A. levi Bacescu, 1973, A. vasseuri Ledoyer, 1974, A. bacescui Pillai, 1976,
A. chessi Murano, 1983 and A. mullini Murano, 1987. Among these, A. comorensis sp. nov.
shows closest resemblance to 4. bacescui in the shape and armature of the telson. It differs
from A. bacescui in the following points:
1. The carpopropodus of the thoracic endopods three to eight in 4. bacescui is
unsegmented. It is two-segmented in A. comorensis sp. nov.
2. The lateral border of the telson in A. bacescui has 10—13 spines along the border as
opposed to 9 in the new species.
3. In the former species, the fourth pleopod of the male extends slightly beyond the base
of the telson, whereas in A. comorensis sp. nov. it extends to the tip of the telson.
4. Body size is larger in the new species, measuring up to 5.2 mm compared to 2.7 mm in
A. bacescui.
The new species also closely resembles A. hanseni, but the latter has a distinct telsonic
sinus.
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CLE
EAE
See
SEE
ee
ELF ES
<<
oe eee
:
Sa
“wipe
Figure 7
Anisomysis comorensis sp. NOV.
Adult male: (A) first pleopod. (B) fourth pleopod. (C) distal end of exopod of fourth pleopod.
(D) uropod. (E) telson.
MYSIDACEA FROM THE COMOROS ARCHIPELAGO 101
TABLED
Distribution of Anisomysis species recorded from the Western Indian Ocean Region.
Species
A. arabicus Wooldridge & Victor, 2004
Distribution
Oman (Wooldridge & Victor 2004)
A. bacescui Pillai, 1976 Lakshadweep archipelago (Panampunnayil 1993), Arabian
sea (Muller 1993)
A. bifurcata Tattersall, 1912 Chagos and Farquehan Islands (Tattersall 1912)
A. comorensis sp. NOV.
Grande Comore (this publication)
A. hanseni Nouvel, 1967 Madagascar (Nouvel 1967), Grande Comore (this
publication), Tanzania (Bacescu 1975)
A. ijimai estafricana Bacescu, 1973c Kenya (Bacescu 1973c)
A. kunduchiana Bacescu, 1975 Tanzania (Bacescu 1975)
A. laccadivei Panampunnayil, 1981 Lakshadweep archipelago (Panampunnayil 1981)
A. levi Bacescu, 19736 Red Sea (Bacescu 19735)
A. marisrubri Bacescu, 1973a Mozambique (Wooldridge & Mees 2003), Tanzania
(Bacescu 1975), Kenya (this publication), Red Sea,
(Bacescu 1973a, Almeida Prado-Por 1980), Grande
Comore (this publication)
A. sirielloides Bacescu, 1975 Tanzania (Bacescu 1975)
A. spinata Panampunnayil, 1993 Lakshadweep archipelago (Panampunnayil 1993)
A. truncata Panampunnayil, 1993 Lakshadweep archipelago (Panampunnayil 1993)
A. unispinosa sp. nov. Grande Comore (this publication)
A. vasseuri Ledoyer, 1974 Madagascar (Ledoyer 1974)
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This contribution forms part of a joint research programme on the shallow water mysid
fauna of the Western Indian Ocean by the University of Port Elizabeth, the Flanders
Marine Institute, the University of Ghent and the Sultan Qaboos University. The
contribution made by the respec-ive institutes is gratefully acknowledged. Two
anonymous referees are also thanked for constructive inputs.
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM ||
REFERENCES i
ALMEIDA PRADO-POR, M.S. 1980. Mysidacea from the Gulf of Eilat (Gulf of Aqaba). Israel Journal |
of Zoology 29: 189-91.
BACESCU, M. 1973a. Contribution 4 la connaisance des Mysidés benthiques de la mer Rouge. Rapport |
de la commission International des Mediterranean 21: 643—6 (not seen in the original). |
BACESCU, M. 1973b. Anisomysis levi n. sp. from the Red Sea and the dichotomic key of the species | |
belonging to the genus, with description of a new taxon, Paranisomysis n. sg. Revue Roumaine de} |
Biologie, Zoologie 18: 173-80.
BACESCU, M. 1973c. New mysids from the littoral East African waters: Haplostylus estafricana n. sp. |
and Anisomysis ijimai estafricana n. sp. Revue Roumaine Biologie, Zoologie 18: 317-24.
BACESCU, M. 1975. Contributions to the knowledge of the mysids (Crustacea) from Tanzanian waters.
University Science Journal (University of Dar es Salaam) 1: 39-61.
DEPREZ, T., MEES, J., WOOLDRIDGE, T. & VINCX, M. 2001. Mysidlan 4.0. Taxonomy and |
biodiversity of shallow coastal mysidacea of the Western Indian Ocean. CD-Rom. Magda Vincx, ©
Marine Biology Section, Ghent University, Belgium.
LEDOYER, M. 1974. Anisomysis vasseuri n. sp. Mysidacé nouveau vivant a l’entrée des grottes sous- |
marines récifales. Tethys 5: 361-6. |
MULLER, H-G. 1993. World Catalogue and Bibliography of the recent Mysidacea. Verlag H.-G —
Muller, Laboratory for Tropical Ecosystems, Wetzlar. 491 pp.
MURANO, M. 1983. Mysidacea fauna from Enewetak Lagoon, Micronesia. Bulletin of Plankton
Society of Japan 30: 81—90.
MURANO, M. 1987. A new species of the genus Anisomysis from the Great Barrier Reef. Crustaceana |
52: 47-52.
MURANO, M. 1995a. New and already known species of the genus Anisomysis (Mysidacea) from |
Hawaii and the Society Islands. Journal of Crustacean Biology 15: 355—64. |
MURANO, M. 19955. Two new species of the genus Anisomysis (Crustacea: Mysidacea) from northern |
Australia. The Beagle. Records of the Museums and Art Galleries of the Northern Territory
12: 145-50. |
NAKAZAWA, K. 1910. Notes on Japanese Schizopoda. Annotationes Zoologicae Japonenses
7: 247-61.
NOUVEL, H. 1967. Mysidacés récoltés par S. Frontier a Nosy-Bé. IV. Mesacanthomysis pygmaea,
n. gen, n. sp., et Anisomysis hanseni n. sp. Bulletin de la Société d'Histoire Naturelle de Toulouse |
103: 105-21. |
PANAMPUNNAYIL, S.U. 1981. Anisomysis laccadivei, a new mysid from Laccadives. Mahasagar-
Bulletin of the National Institute of Oceanography 14: 207-9. |
PANAMPUNNAYIL, S.U. 1993. Two new species of Anisomysis (Crustacea—Mysidacea) from the
Lakshadweep archipelago. Journal of Plankton Research 15: 1141-8.
PILLAI, N.K. 1976. Observations on two Indo-West Pacific mysids. Aquatic Biology 1: 65—77.
QUOD, J-P., NAIM, O. & ABDOURAZI, F. 2000. The Comoros Archipelago. Jn: SHEPPARD, C.R.C. |
(ed). Seas at the Millennium: an environmental evaluation. Vol. Il. Regional Chapters: The Indian
Ocean to the Pacific. Chapter 69: 243-52. Amsterdam, Pergamon Press.
TATTERSALL, W. 1912. On the Mysidacea and Euphausiacea collected in the Indian Ocean during
1905. Transactions of the Linnean Society, Series 2, Zoology 13: 119-36.
WOOLDRIDGE, T. & MEES, J. 2003. Additions to the mysid fauna (Crustacea: Mysidacea) from
coastal waters of Mozambique, with descriptions of two new species. Hydrobiologia 505: 31-9.
WOOLDRIDGE, T.H. & VICTOR, R. 2004. Additions to the mysid fauna (Crustacea: Mysidacea) from
coastal waters of Oman, including descriptions of two new species. Hydrobiologia 511: 247-58.
ZIMMER, C. 1918. Neue und wenig bekannte Mysidaceen des Berliner Zoologischen Museums.
Mitteilungen aus dem Zoologischen Museum in Berlin 9: 13-26 (not seen in the original).
SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature (particularly Articles 22
and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed by the appropriate
Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov., etc. The name of the taxon should be
followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s(s’) name(s) (not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a
comma must separate author’s(s’) name(s) and year. The author’s(s’) name(s) and date must be placed in parentheses if
a species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must
be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published scientific names by
which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order, with all references to that name
following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the
year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should
adopt one style or the other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
~
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
NOTE punctuation in the above example: comma separates author’s name and year; semicolon separates more than one
reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of plates are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nickleés, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nickles, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens mentioned in the original
description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes; additional material not regarded as paratypes
should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality,
collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach,
Port Elizabeth (33 51 S25 39 E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. “... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’, or
*,..1n C. namacolus (Fig. 10) ....’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full names: e.g. Du
Toit, but A. L. du Toit; Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should preferably be expressed
in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a book or
article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded
by the generic name or its abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph),
provided the same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included in the
title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the editorial
committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports will be forwarded to the
author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’ suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised
manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee. In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee
reserves the right to consult one or more referees regarding the revised manuscript.
WON MIU
3 9088 01075 6955
Pr ah: elk apathy
ar at ; eR
’ at a i ee
fae ae
oor a
1 e a
' @ =
» ve
a ' be
.~ a : :
Be an
a4 Z f
. A _
: 7
q - .
>
a
7 -
apni
\ . A
me; a
~ i
vy
-
7
wy
3!
2
~
H]
t
J
t
;
1
t
m2
|
=4)
a os Bete ley sn
é
Peseta
3 9088 01459 1358
———
——
——
————
—==
EE
Saas
—————_—
———
—SSe
—=
—=—=
—EEE
———
————_
—————
——
————<——t
——
——
——
————
——
——_—
—————
———
———
———_—_—_
———
a
————————
——
———————
———
—<_—_—
————
od
——_—_———
>
—eee
——
——
———____
——
cone
pane PaO?
hp wage
bee
sc ee
pene
aypene
Apo aera
pata
dase ait
sp hl
HON
are
mh np ee
PUR ee
mer ap ues e
ange SEPM
MeN PAALY
yee
aa
ayat
Parr
At yete yy an ie dae
MPN ane? r
RA eaye Ae taTA A VE oa
peer
pment
sepa eye?
Ap iene aes
wip earn s4! Bagh ap aeeyy
apna
porere
yeapaened
prt
weeps
yee ee yan
e yee py yer ew
sas tee ce AAT
dv ait Wee
wenger
unrest
piney
mt
EA BAA V ESE NE EOE
woe tee
Wy wh RENIN
eager
wag
papa pte
pape §
SpE
m"
ee vee
Pe Ca
TC lA ay
spade Oe
eres OMAN
POON ata ad
ayy
vp ae Me
sup?
Up
eve POM 2 UT
yee
Wy ALA
yeh
wt
cepa OO Ug TE at
akon LE NTE TNR
yar vb! key
API fc SLA W
paddy tg Vee par ep er Mee
papaya ea nire Vines
PV aya
Via a sn
yee weve
wey
eweury
Wr wens ey het
Pape Weds jue VP AE NEM NS
Or (on a a
"
We
AP EUAU We wee
PU ENE APE arya Matin Me
ad PERE ME VEY ‘ Wp yin DEVE ERLE
Pures rar l PIA ELI NS
ayy & Wg eve \ ‘ pete gf UEAp ad We wr
wr
AM a Ay Gr
yeu Yn tev
py Vt biydll Me
wit
1 Vite MEM
as ee
eepelt
ee ave ale Ae wy
eu iiel
te
wears rt
hua ge Wee HY
ar Vearinar Me
ve ee UAE Te
wes (AE CCur at
pare PAPA T A
ADVE es
weet
wee
Pge tue ve tan ae
Piya an eee ese
Al
pitt
nett
pete eh
ran y eae UL
y yeaa ESE WENT 7
opted Wy
wi
PApenie
male
cee mon nara ME UAE CATAL
AGADME
get dghe se
arate
wees
PREM vente!
Penance Vine ES
Pr
peut
peewee ayy
parse MET Ba
v
And pat ae yee
pm een
PAs ast
yAeyave ut
Aya ane
apanen
yee
vey st
ep MEME
v bag ra VL a
Lalas en ADE MLM
teh) hbo
Ure
Aye
Ay ME et SELENE
yh
wore
EMRE RET
Vps Or AE
PAA a SME
Sapa
fp ene
Ae Aye VE et
we
Aes neve
ru
nen OM
ek A NENETS
Wh ens Wea aE aw
Rent GAs drwy Ve St
Vevey yr sear Ue at
Ae DENS AE Ure VME
WE VE teed whet apat
fava
pened
yeanien’
wohwee
Uhre VP at ®
RU ale !
PEE ved ETE AS ey tea ME
a sdgeen rae valu
hehe fey qe ag hee
pada ate pitoat apt PN
cabene he ”
pag We bad
yepete yt Mi
to
A art
pinnrale nue ox eaten
yarn
ww
Ve MOMS yede iut
oe AU Li Oe gi AE INTE HE Aaa
Vaca aap wy dee eine wens ay UPd Veae
earn VP eter tr agers ; ,
UAE WLP UA VE wes Wa ararde ear
par wiser td PMI ENE ae bh Wants MAU WHERE At Wey 4 SAP T CERIN bare We AA r
oa ae hoya MEME AT VAL Ue y the are te ee Lecenr erat ded ge WENN pe era VEN
fay Weed plete VENA SE Lp i se Daal ee parade de sbot yearn a tet
F shai 'p ‘hgh he wee Nene bye a FaNPn span seer Wat AS AE NS
Mp Wee WEE sp pve Pa spelt www
his (ew uene eye MEY eA
Nr Vi Cn eal seve Ay AEY
Re dell bl wd SP ny oa a how
pe eae at
an
pay aE We CAP
aap aad
eqpnie (ce at
ane
rows
aa yenent
yeas ayes eM
suas yeaineeet
aoaes
ese MEAS LPR
pena area AE
anne 2
i WEEN
LEMP AERTS,
Cen nae ®
pueenenn" “
Pah aaa
save at
NE) NEMS
ane ay Se mbt
ah Mts!
nena
eee nes
i Ag aA Ve
pan
apt
\ layne AY
ERE Ne" Ly onan
0 sede COMeN
uM ‘4 »
TLL
poraeae
say te
ao nthe
pau AT
phe aya §
lee
ADE RNEAW A
peg eer’
yarn
nae td
pada”
SA awe
CNM
Tosh ly Cae ean PUL as
ee hh
pase ED
4 ieee
D aioyeny
a,
Pee,
ene een
nian
weenie
ent
ed
eye
yee
near ons
gay ata
ert
“oe
wvapavenne®
ao ar
ee
wre
agen deters
pee nan
ry
aap Ags A
x
Leeland
ying ayer’
arr’
eee
we etre
ego 8 ERAN AUS
ant Aad ETO
espe gens aE apa rrr et
yoann” eenren
yaya
epngay